électroménagers Cuisinières NE599N1PBSR - Cuisinière électrique FlexDuo de 5,9 pi³, acier inoxydable NE599N1PBSR/AC - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels- Samsung
SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
- Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung
- Revenir à l'accueil
|
Description
|
DATE DE SORTIE 
|
Langue
|
Dossier
|
|---|
| Manuel de l'utilisateur |
2013.06.10 |
ENGLISH, FRENCH |
27.49 MB
 |
|---|
| Installation Guide(Installation manual) |
2013.03.18 |
ENGLISH, FRENCH |
4.09 MB
|
|---|
Recherche par catégories :
Imprimantes Téléphones
GSM Informatique
Ordinateurs Galaxy
Photo TV
Electroménager
Autres Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :
![[TXT]](http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/icons/text.gif)
Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 13-Jun-2013 07:25 3.0M
Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 13-Jun-2013 07:25 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD..> 13-Jun-2013 07:24 1.7M
Samsung-Camescopes-P..> 13-Jun-2013 07:24 1.8M
Samsung-Telephones-C..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23 2.3M
Samsung-IT-producten..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23 2.5M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 13-Jun-2013 07:23 2.6M
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu..> 13-Jun-2013 07:22 3.6M
Samsung-Mobilite-Sma..> 13-Jun-2013 07:22 3.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Jun-2013 08:19 1.3M
Samsung-PC-Office-LC..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18 1.5M
Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18 1.3M
Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18 1.8M
Samsung-Printer-Mult..> 12-Jun-2013 08:18 1.8M
Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17 2.1M
Samsung-Home-Applian..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17 2.1M
Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17 2.8M
Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 12-Jun-2013 08:17 2.5M
Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 12-Jun-2013 08:16 3.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 12-Jun-2013 08:16 2.8M
Samsung-Liste-Imprim..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43 1.4M
Samsung-Liste-Teleph..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43 1.4M
Samsung-Liste-GSM-Ma..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43 1.4M
Samsung-Liste-Inform..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43 1.5M
Samsung-Liste-Ordina..> 11-Jun-2013 11:43 1.4M
Samsung-Liste-Galaxy..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42 1.4M
Samsung-Liste-Electr..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42 1.4M
Samsung-Liste-Photo-..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42 1.4M
Samsung-Liste-TV-Man..> 11-Jun-2013 11:42 1.4M
Liste-Produits-Manue..> 11-Jun-2013 09:51 511K
Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 11-Jun-2013 09:51 379K
/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3170FN-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3170FN-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3175FW-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FW-Manuels-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/19-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-S19A300N-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/27-Serie7-Moniteur-station-d-accueil-C27A750-C27A750X-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/40-UE40D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6500VS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/46-LE46D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE46D550K1W-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/CLX-3185FW.htm
/SAMSUNG/GalaxyAceGT-S5830.htm
/SAMSUNG/Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/GalaxySIIGT-I9100.htm
/SAMSUNG/GalaxyTab10.1GT-P7500M16.htm
/SAMSUNG/GalaxyTab8.9GT-P7310M16.htm
/SAMSUNG/GalaxyYGT-S5360.htm
/SAMSUNG/Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/index.html
/SAMSUNG/LE32C350LE32C350D1W.htm
/SAMSUNG/LE40C630LE40C630K1W.htm
/SAMSUNG/LE55C650-LE55C650L1W-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Liste-Manuels-Utilisateur-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Liste-Produits-Manuels-Utilisateur-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4010WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4010NW-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-Galaxy-Mini-2-GT-S6500-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-Galaxy-Y-GT-S5360-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-GT-B5510-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-GT-B7300-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-UE46ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES7000S-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-noir-Open-market-GT-I9100.htm
/SAMSUNG/Micro-chaine-MM-D330DWXZF-serie-3-MM-D330-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/MM-C330D.htm
/SAMSUNG/MM-D330D.htm
/SAMSUNG/N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/N150-NP-N150-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/RSH5UEPN.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-Compact-Performant-WB700-SAMSUNG-WB700-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-18-XTDVBEUE-SWE-0327.pdf-Suede-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-20120405165711377-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-20-XTDVBEUE-NOR-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-2243QW-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-22-LE22D450WXZF-serie-4-Full-HD-LCD-TV-LE22D450G1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%BD%D0%B8%D1%82%D0%BE%D1%80-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%B8-3-T24B30-T24B301EW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-\xd0\x9c\xd0\xbe\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd1\x82\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80-\xd1\x81\xd0\xb5\xd1\x80\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb8-3-T24B30-T24B301EW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-305U1A-A02-NP305U1A-A02HK-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-320MXN-3-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-32-UE32D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE32D4000NW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400EXN-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400TS-3-400TS-3-SIM-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400TS-3D-400TS-3D-SIM-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400UXN-3-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-400UXN-3-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-LE40D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE40D550K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE40ES6565U-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6500VS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-40-UE40D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D8000YS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-460UT-B-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6535-UE46ES6535U-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-01-XTDVBEUE-ENG-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Anglais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-19-XTDVBEUE-DAN-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Danemark-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_FIN-0424.pdf-Finlande-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_NOR-0424.pdf-E-Manual-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-2012_Skype_SWE-0424.pdf-Suede-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-21-XTDVBEUE-FIN-0327.pdf-E-Manual-Finlande-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6565-UE46ES6565U-Danemark-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES7005-UE46ES7005U-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-46-UE46D7000WXZF-serie-7
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E555-PS51E555D1K-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-51-Smart-3D-Plasma-E8005-PS51E8005GU-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-55-Smart-3D-LED-TV-ES6805-UE55ES6805U-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-708SC-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-740SC-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-821SC-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-910MP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-940SC-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-941SC-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Affichage-Dynamique-Murs-d-images-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareil-photo-numerique-Samsung-ES90-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-menagers-La-Plaque-Chauffante-Pensez-intelligemment-vivez-simplement-GN641FFXD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-mobiles-Smartphone-Galaxy-S4-I9505-Android-Impression-GT-I9505-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Appareils-mobiles-Smartphone-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQ09UGBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-BN68-04109G-00L05-0228.pdf-LED-TV-Serie-6-user-manual-Anglais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ES90-14.2MP-Digital-Camera-FIND-A-PRODUCT-SAMSUNG-ES90-English-Anglais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-et-Camcorder-NX-NX11-Appareil-photo-compact-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camera-et-Camcorder-NX-NX5-Appareil-photo-compact-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Camescopes-Photo-Compacts-numeriques-Samsung-SMART-Kompaktkamera-WB800F-SAMSUNG-WB800F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-AT-T-SGH-I547-Samsung-Galaxy-Rugby-Pro-AT-T-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-AT-T-SGH-I577-Samsung-Galaxy-Exhilarate-Android-Smartphone-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-Sprint-SPH-L300-Samsung-Galaxy-Victory-4G-LTE-Sprint-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-Verizon-Wireless-SCH-I405-Samsung-Stratosphere-a-Galaxy-S-phone-Black-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cell-Phones-VIEW-ALL-SPH-M930-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CLP-367W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Cuisson-Four-Four-compact-Twin-30-L-FQV113T002-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA68-01829P.pdf-SEC-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-DA-E550-CN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electrom%C3%A9nager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-1-voie-MH026FSEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-Cassette-4-voies-MH035FMEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH020FNEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FEEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH035FJEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FJEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH052FWEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH060FXEA3A-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH068FXEA4-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH18AP2X-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ09UGFN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12TSBN.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ12UGBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18UGAN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09KBBN.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09PSBX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV09UGAX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12KBAN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12NSBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PWAN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12UGAX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18KBAX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18PSBX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV18UGAN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-Mistral-AQV09PSBN-User-Manuals-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-SH24TA6D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-Refrigerateur-Combine-RB29FEJNDWW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Combines-RL34HGMG-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT63VBPN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Four-Four-compact-Twin-30-L-FQV113T002-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lavage-Lave-Linge-WF70F5E3U4W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF1702NHWG-YLE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF70F5E3U4W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0R-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-Table-induction-2-zones-7-2-KW-CTN364N006-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-Table-induction-4-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN464FB01-CTN464FB01-XEF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXC4H140EE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXTJH036EE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXWNH022EE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH160PHXEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH200WHXES-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS0351DXEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NS071SDXEA-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-RVXMHF050EA-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-SR8750-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC86H0-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Cuisinieres-NE595R0ABBB-Cuisiniere-electrique-de-5-9-pi-noir-NE595R0ABBB-AC-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Cuisinieres-NE595R0ABSR-AC-Cuisiniere-a-convection-de-5-9-pi-acier-inoxydable-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Sechoir-seche-linge-condensation-8kg-SDC3C801-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox%20RSH5TERS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Electrom-nager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Entro-SPH-m350-SPH-M350-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-NEXUS-SC-04D-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/SamsungGalaxyNoteGT-N7000.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/SamsungGalaxySGT-I9000.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-GT-I9100-SINGAPOUR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-III-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-III-Pub-TV.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-noir-Open-market-Manuels-Samsung.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-Plus-blanc-Orange-GT-I9001-manuel.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open%20market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10.1v-P7100-Android-GT-P7100-M16-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-10-1-LTE-SC-01D-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10-1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-7.0-Plus-SC-02D-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7-0-Wi-Fi-GT-P3110-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-SC-01C-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-orange-Open-market-GT-S5690-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Galaxy-Y-DUOS-GT-S6102-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro-Duos-GT-B5512-RUSSE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-Champ-Duos-E2652-GT-E2652W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E1050-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E1180-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E2202GT-E2202-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-GSM-E2202GT-E2202-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Android-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Gio-S5660-Android-GT-S5660-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Note-N7000-AndroidGT-N7000-Belgique-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Pocket-S5300-Android-GT-S5300-Android-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S4-I9505-Android-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-Advance-i9070-Android-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-SIII-4G-i9305-AndroidGT-I9305-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-II-Plus-I9105-Android-GT-I9105P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-S-Plus-i9001-Android-GT-I9001-M8-Belgique-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GSM-Smartphone-Wave-Y-S5380-Bada-GT-S5380D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9250-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-N8000-CN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-GT-S5830_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110825_Screen-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Laser-couleur-CLP-365W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Laser-monochrome-ML-2955ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-et-imprimantes-multifonctions-Multifonctions-couleurCLX-9251NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-43-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-multifonction-noir-et-blanc-SCX-6545N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-52-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-noir-et-blanc-ML-5510ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-couleur-multifonctions-A3-35-ppm-A3-imprimante-laser-multifonction-couleur-CLX-9352NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-couleur-multifonctions-A3-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-multifonctions-43-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-multifonction-noir-et-blanc-SCX-6545NX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Copieurs-A3-Multifonctions-CLX-9201NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Copieurs-A4-A3-Copieur-monochrome-SCX-6555N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-680ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-775ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Imprimantes-Laser-Monochrome-ML-6510ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Imprimantes-Multifonctions-Multifonctions-Laser-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-4705ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique%20Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-360-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-620ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-775ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-16ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1630-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-16ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1660-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-18ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1865-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-18ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-1865W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2545-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3750ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-4510ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-Monochrome-SL-M2825ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2540R-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-6510ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Imprimantes-Photos-SPP-2040-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Inkjet-Imprimante-jet-d-encre-CJX-1050W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD%20770TFT-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-151P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-152B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-170T-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-191T-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-226BW-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-226BW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-S23A350H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-460DR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-B1930N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2231-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-BX2240W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C27B750X-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19B350N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C200NW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S19C450MR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-InformatiqueMoniteur-LCD-S19C450MW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22A300H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22C300H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24A650S-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B970D-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27C650D-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T22B300-T22B300EW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T23A750-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T24B300-T24B300EW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-T27B750EW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Moniteurs-moniteur-LCD-32-et-plus-ME40B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-lasercouleur-CLX-3185FN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3170FN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3175FN-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-3175FN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-A3-A4-couleur-CLX-9352NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-Couleur-A4-CLX-8650ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-4195FW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-6260ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-16ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-3205W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-20ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4521F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-33ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-5835FN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Copieur-monochrome-SCX-6555N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Fax-monochrome-SF-760P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-4833FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-Monochrome-SL-M2875FD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SL-M2875FW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Mutifonction-Monochrome-SL-M2875ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4824FN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-4828FN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-5637FR-SCX-5637FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-5737FW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8240NA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP500A2D-S02FR-2-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie%209-900X1A-NP900X1A-A01FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1AXE-700T1A-A02FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-1-Serie-5-Chromebook-XE500C21-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S04FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5ANP-300E5A-S06FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300V5A-NP300V5A-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S06FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S07FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S08FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-ATIV-Smart-PC-Pro-XE700T1C-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S05FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0CFR.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5AH-NP300E5A-S0GFR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-S04FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-S08FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T05FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-T06FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S04FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AH-NP300E7A-S0DFR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E7AI-NP300E7A-A04FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300V3AH-NP300V3A-S02FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-T01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S07FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP355V5C-NP355V5C-S03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP370R5E-S04FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP400B5BI-NP400B5B-AG3FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP400B5B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-A05FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A01FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A04FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S03FR.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3C-NP900X3C-A03FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X3D-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4B-NP900X4B-A01FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-P500NP-P500-FA01DE-Open-market-GT-C3300K-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q320E-NP-Q320-AS02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R510%20NP-R510-XA02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610NP-R610-AS03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS05FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS06FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-AS08FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-FS01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RV510I-NP-RV510-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-France-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NQ20-NQ20RP3GH8-SEF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FRManuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Samsung-Chromebook-XE303C12-A02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-S0AFR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5C-NP300E5C-T02FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-NP370R5E-A02FR-NP370R5E-A02FR-Logiciels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-4-NP400B2B-A03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T03FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X3C-A05FR-NP900X3C-A05FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A04FR.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X3D-A05FR-NP900X3D-A05FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-NP900X4D-A03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-SF310-NP-SF310-S01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500C21-XE500C21-AZ2FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-H02FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-A04FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE700T1A-XE700T1A-HF1FR-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Solutions-d-impression-Multifonctions-laser-Multifonction-couleur-CLX-3300-Version-imprimable-CLX-3300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-N150Plus-NP-N150P-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-N150Plus-NP-N150P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NC110-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-N140-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC110-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-IT-producten-Imprimantes-laser-monochromes-35-ppm-A4-imprimante-laser-noir-et-blanc-ML-3710D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-IT-producten-Ordinateurs-portables-Samsung-Series-9-NP900X3C-A01-NP900X3C-A01BE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1200-Noir-HM1200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LA46C550J1F-CN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-lcd_business_q2.pdf-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE19C350-LE19C350D1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE22C452C4H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE26B450-LE26B450C4W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32A466-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32A568-LE32A568P3M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32B450C4W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40A577P2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE46C630-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-LE52A676-LE52A676A1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-Player-50-Blanc-8Go-YP-G50CW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Livres-blancs.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Livres-blancs-Technologie-ReCP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-M_YUKON_2K_WD175ARYKSU_DC68-02631L-05-120810.pdf-SEC-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ME65B-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Others-HM3700-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Smart-Phone-GT-I9505-Suisse-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobile-Tablet-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Smartphone-Samsung-Galaxy-S4-Impression-GT-I9505-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Telephone-a-fonction-Rugby-II-de-Samsung-SGH-a847M-SGH-A847M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Mobilite-Telephone-Intelligent-Galaxy-Q-de-Samsung-SGH-T589R-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Moniteur-grande-taille-Ecrans-grand-format-UD55A-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-T01FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300E5ZI-NP300E5Z-A09MA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP300V5AH-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP530U3C-A01ES-NP530U3C-A01ES-Espagnol-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-pascal_owners_manual.pdf-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-OFFICE-Coree-NT-RF711NT-RF711-PS02G-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-couleur-CLX-3305FW-Canada-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405FW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-4727FD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope%20-Appareils-photo-Gamme-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-Tactile-8.9-cm-3-5-Compact-Performant-WB210-SAMSUNG-WB210-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Appareils-photo-Gamme-Compact-Samsung-ST66-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-12-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-essentiel-Samsung-ES80-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-Ecran-avant-LCD-1-5-compact-double-ecran-Samsung-PL120-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-compact-style-Samsung-PL210-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-Style-Samsung-ST77s.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-2-7-compact-Style-Samsung-ST90-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-LCD-3-Compact-Performant-WB700-SAMSUNG-WB700-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-16-MP-Ecran-pivotant-LCD-Tactile-3-compact-Samsung-MultiView-MV800-SAMSUNG-MV800-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-SMART-DV300F-SAMSUNG-DV300F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ES60-SAMSUNG-ES60.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-NV24HD-SAMSUNG-NV24-HD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL170-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL210-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL70-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-DV150F-SAMSUNG-DV150F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-EX2F-SAMSUNG-EX2F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-CAMERA-ST200F-SAMSUNG-ST200F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-SMART-Camera-WB250F-SAMSUNG-WB250F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST560-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST65-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-ST95-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-WB210-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-WB560-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST45-SAMSUNG-ST45-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-1-8-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F50SMX-F50BP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-Tactile-rotatif-3-7-2-cm-Camescope-HD-Samsung-Q10HMX-Q10PP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-Camera-HD-HMX-Q200BP-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F800BP-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F80BP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-F90WP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-Samsung-SMART-Camcorder-QF30-HMX-QF30WP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Appareil-photo-numerique-NX-NX-210-Afrique-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX10-3-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX10-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-NX5-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX11-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-periph%C3%A9riques-Mini-ordinateur-portable-N102-NP-N102-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Couleur-Laser-CLP-680ND-Colour-Laser-Printer-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Couleur-Laser-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-620ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-LCD-Moniteur-LED-3D-serie-9-S27A950D-de-27-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-ML-1865W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Mono-Laser-Imprimante-multifunction-laser-ML-3750ND-ML-3750ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300E5V-NP300E5V-A01MA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300E5V-NP300E5V-A08MA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5AH-NP300V5A-S03MA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5AI-NP300V5A-A03MA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP300V5A-S0CZA-Superbe-encadrement-ultrafin-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U3BI-NP530U3B-A01ZA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U4C-de-la-serie-5-NP530U4C-A03ZA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-NP530U4C-S04ZA-serie-5-de-Samsung-NP530U4C-S04ZA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Ordinateur-portable-serie-9-NP900X3C-A02ZA-de-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-5-XE500T1C-XE500T1C-H01ZA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-Series-9-NP900X3C-Notebook-NP900X3C-A03ZA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Portables-et-peripheriques-Ordinateur-portable-XE700T1A-A01ZA-The-Freedom-of-true-mob.-comp.-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Presentation-du-Samsung-GALAXY-S-4-Video.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Printers-Multifunction-Mono-Laser-Printer-ML-5010ND-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS42C450-PS42C450B1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50A566-PS50A566S2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50C450-PS50C450B1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS50C535-PS50C535C1W-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS51D490A1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-PS51E530-ZF-PLASMA-51-FULL-HD%20-PS51E530A3W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RE-C21VMS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S23A550H-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCH-W999-CN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-3200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SCX-4x28-Series-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHV-E210S-S-III-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHV-E300L-Coree-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SHW-M220L-Coree-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-S-II-HDSHV-E120S-Coree-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-SNE-60K_UM_Embedded_KOR_100526-SEC-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-MZ-7TD120-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-128Go-MZ-7PD128-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-256Go-MZ-7PD256-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-SSD-840-Pro-512GoMZ-7PD512-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T%C3%A9l%C3%A9phone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T22B300EW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T240-JP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-T260-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Galaxy-Camera-Samsung-GALAXY-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-C3750.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1130-B.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2220.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E2550D.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5620.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B5722-noir-Open-marketGT-B5722-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Blue-Earth-bleu-Open-market-GT-S7550-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3050-noir-Virgin-Mobile-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1050-noir-Open-market-GT-E1050-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1310-NRJ-Mobile-GT-E1310B.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2330-noir-Open-market-GT-E2330B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Jetnoir-Open-market-GT-S8000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-5-noir-Open-market-GT-S5560-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Light-noir-Open-market-GT-C3510-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-mini-noir-Open-market-GT-C3300K-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Pixon-noir-Open-market-GT-M8800-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-2-noir-Open-market-GT-S5620-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Star-noir-Open-market-GT-S5600-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Ultra-rouge-open-market-GT-S8300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3500-noir-Open-market-GT-S3500-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5233W-GT-S5233W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-C180-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E570-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E840-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-F480G.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-N620-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-R200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-U100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Mobiles-Style-Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Mains-Libres-Bluetooth-HF1000-BHF1000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Oreillette-bluetooth-Kit-Pieton-Bluetooth-HM1700-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Ace-Plus-GT-S7500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-SIII-mini-GT-I8190-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GALAXY-Y-ProGT-B5510-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-B5510-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I8190-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9003-RM4-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-Afrique-du-nord-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-N7100-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5369-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5380-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5570-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5750E-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-3-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-GALAXY-Camera%20EK-GC100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Express-GT-I8730-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Nexus-noir-Open-market-GT-I9250-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-GT-N7000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S4GT-I9505-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-IIIGT-I9300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-I9500-GT-I9500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-S6312-GT-S6312-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-marketGT-S5330-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-723-gris-Open-marketGT-S7230E-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Galaxy-Tab-GT-P1000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P3110-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-3-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7500-M32-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7510-M16-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablettes-Tablettes-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablettes-Tablettes-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-Wi-Fi-Version-imprimable-GT-P3110-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Telephone-coulissant-Samsung-S5200-bleu-SFRGT-S5200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Telephones-Cellulaires-telephones-intelligents-Samsung-Galaxy-Discover-Version-imprimable-SGH-S730M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A465C1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV%20Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A676-PS50A676T1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD-Series-5-550-32inch-LE32D550-LE32D550K1W-Belgique-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid%C3%A9o-Video-projecteur-SP-P310ME-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-32-UE32D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6500VS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED%20TV-UE40D6200TS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D6300WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D6300SS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D8000YS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D550WXZF-serie-5-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D550C1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-51-PS51D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51D8000FS-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-User-Manuals-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-64-PS64D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS64D8000FS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LED-Smart-TV-LED-3D-UA65ES8000R-serie-8-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LED-UA60D8000YR-Series-8-Smart-3D-LED-TV-UA60D8000YR-Afrique-Fr.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS43D490A1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C490-PS50C490B3W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C6970-PS50C6970YS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS50C7000YW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS64E8000-ZF-PLASMA-64-SMART-INTERACTION-3DPS64E8000GS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6100W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3D-UE32ES6300S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D8000YQ-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40EH6030W-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6560S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6710S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES7000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3DUE40ES8000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F6500-TV-LED-40-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F6500SS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F7000-TV-LED-40-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F7000SL-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40F8000-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE40F8000SL-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6200TS-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6500VH-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6570WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6540S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6560S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6570S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46F6510-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE46F6510SS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46F8000-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE46F8000SL-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6100W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C8700XS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6100W-AQV09PSBN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6530S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55F8000-TV-LED-55-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE55F8000SL-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65F6400-TV-LED-65-Full-HD-Smart-TV-3D-UE65F6400AW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH877-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-SH897-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D5550WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-3DHT-D5550-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E4550-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E5200-ZF-Home-Cinema-2.1-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-ES4200-ZFHT-ES4200-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-F6550W-ZF-Home-Cinema-5.1-Blu-Ray-3D-Smart-Hub-HT-F6550W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D5000WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-3DHT-D5000-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-C5300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E5300-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Youtube-AllShare-BD-E5300-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-ES6000-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-Ray-3D-SMART%20HUB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-F8500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-F8900-ZF-Lecteur-Blu-ray-3D-avec-disque-dur-Double-Tuner-Wi-Fi-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P4600-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-DVD-DVD-D530WXZF-serie-5-DVD-D530-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Baladeur-MP3-Clip-F3-Noir-2GoYP-F3QB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-5.0-Blanc-8G-YP-G70CW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1CW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GI1EW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-GS1CW-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YP-Z5FQW-ELS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-C330D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E330D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-ARC-AUX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E430D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-Double-Dock-USB-Bluetooth-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-ZB7-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-ZB7-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-46-Moniteur-LED-UE46A-mur-d-images-bord-fin-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-55-Moniteur-LED-UD55A-mur-d-image-bord-fin-UD55A-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TS190W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Televiseurs-TV-2013-SMART-LED-TV-46-UE46F7000-Version-imprimable-UE46F7000SL-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-CW29Z504N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-Cathodique-WS32V54N-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD%20-LE22B450-LE22B450C4W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-32-LE32D550WXZF-serie-5-HD-TV-LCD-TV-LE32D550K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE19B450C4H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22A455C1D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22B650-LE22B650T6W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C430C4W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A456C2D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26A466-LE26A466C2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26B350F1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450-LE26C450E1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C452C4H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C457C6H-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A437T2D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A456-LE32A456C2D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A465-LE32A465C1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A577P2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B651-LE32B651T3P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C350D1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450-LE32C450E1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D450G1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32R86BD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32S86BD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32T51B-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A457C1D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A626-LE37A626A3M-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B530-LE37B530P7W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37B653T5P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530F1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37C530-LE37C530F1W.manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A457C1D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A536T1F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A856-LE40A856S1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651-LE40B651T3W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C630-LE40C630K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D550K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C650-LE46C650L1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE22D5000NW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-22-UE22ES5400WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-27-UE27D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE27D5000NW-2-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE32D5000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-40-UE40D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE40D5000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-46-UE46D5000WXZF-serie-5-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D5000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG32EA590LS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-LE40A796-LE40A796R2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE19C4000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22C4010PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5000NH-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5000-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TV-UE22ES5000W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22ES5410-ZF-Slim-LED-22-SMART-TVUE22ES5410W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22F5000-TV-LED-22-Full-HD-UE22F5000AW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PH-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-2-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C5100-UE32C5100QF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6000-UE32C6000RW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C6700-UE32C6700US-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C8700XS-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D4003BW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuals-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH4000-ZF-LED-32-HD-TV-UE32EH4000W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5300W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32F4000-TV-LED-32-HDTV-UE32F4000AW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32F5300-TV-LED-32-Full-HD-Smart-TV-UE32F5300AW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37C6000-UE37C6000RW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE39EH5003W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B7000-UE40B7000WW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6000RH-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C6900VS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5720RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B7020WW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C5100QW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6000-UE46C6000RW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46EH5300W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TVUE46ES5500W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46F5500-TV-LED-46-Full-HD-Smart-TV-UE46F5500AW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE55C6000-UE55C6000RW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE55C6700-UE55C6700US-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE60EH6000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-43-PS43D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-PDP-TVPS43D450A2W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A426-PS42A426C1M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42A456-PS42A456P2D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C430-PS42C430A1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS42C96HD-PS-42C96HD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43E450-ZF-PLASMA-43-HD-TV-PS43E450A1W-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS43F4500-TV-Plasma-43-HD-TV-PS43F4500AW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A466-PS50A466P2M-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B550-PS50B550T4W-manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Francais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50Q96HD-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS51E450-ZF-PLASMA-51-HD-TVPS51E450A1W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS58B680-PS58B680T6W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS59D530A5W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS63B680-PS63B680T6W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E750-ZF-Double-Dock-Pre-ampli-a-lampes-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUX-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-HW-F450-ZF-Barre-de-son-2.1-Bluetooth-SoundShare-HW-F450-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E750-Afrique-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE40B7000WW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE32D5000-UE32D5000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE40D5000-UE40D5000PW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED-UE40D5700-UE40D5700RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TVs-LED-TV-UN55ES8000F-55-Class-54.6-Diag-LED-8000-Series-Smart-TV-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-TV-Video-3D-Televiseur-DEL-de-75-po-et-de-serie-7100-2013-UN75F7100AF-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UA32ES5500-UA32ES5500R-CN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UD22B-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE19D4003BW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE26EH4500-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4500W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32D6530WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE37C5100QW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40B6050-UE40B6050VW-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40C6700-UE40C6700US-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-UE40ES5500W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE40ES7000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE40ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE40ES8000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C6805-UE46C6805US-Norvege-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46C8700XS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46D5720RS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46D6530WS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE46S870XS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55C8700-UE55C8790XS-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC331LLDC6S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC331LLMA6S-Japon-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-VC-UBL916-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Video-tutorielle-4G-Video.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-723-gris-Open-market-GT-S7230E-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-WEP480-CN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-ZS31FASAB1S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S03FR-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/SGH-F490.htm
/SAMSUNG/T23A550T23A550.htm
/SAMSUNG/UE40D6500ZFUE40D6500VS.htm
/SAMSUNG/UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES8000S-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/UE60ES6100WXZF-UE60ES6100W-Samsung-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Wave575GT-S5750E.htm
/SAMSUNG/WaveIIGT-S8530.htm
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39 1.5M
Samsung-IT-producten..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39 1.8M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 11-Jun-2013 07:39 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38 1.8M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38 3.3M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 07:38 3.0M
Samsung-Peripherique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:37 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:37 3.5M
Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35 1.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35 1.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35 2.0M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 11-Jun-2013 07:35 1.8M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53 1.5M
Samsung-TV-AV-Wirele..> 11-Jun-2013 06:53 1.5M
Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels
Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels
SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels
Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels
Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels
Samsung-910MP-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels
Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels
Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels
Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels
Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels
Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels
Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels
Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels
Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels
Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels
Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels
17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels
40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels
CLX-3185FW Manuels
Galaxy Ace GT-S5830
Galaxy S II GT-I9100
Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16
Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16
Galaxy YGT-S5360
LE32C350 LE32C350D1W
LE40C630 LE40C630K1W
MM-C330D
MM-D330D
Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels
N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels
N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels
RSH5UEPN
SGH-F490
Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000
Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000
Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels
T23A550 T23A550
UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS
UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels
Wave 575 GT-S5750E
Wave II GT-S8530
16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung
16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung
samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels
Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%20Photo-Camescope-Compact-Appareil-photo-numerique-Samsung-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Afrique-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung%2DGT%2DP6200%2DManuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0%20%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-46-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE46EH5307-UE46EH5307K-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0%20-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-6-Full-HD-UE40C6000R-UE40C6000RW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-LE40C530F1-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LE32B450C4W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%96%d0%9a-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80%d1%8b-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%96%D0%9A-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-51-c%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-PS51E530-PS51E530A3W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-43-c%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-PS43E450PS43E450A1W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-42-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-PS42C431A2-PS42C431A2W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-PS42A410C3-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%9F%D0%BB%D0%B0%D0%B7%D0%BC%D0%B0-51-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-PS51D8000F-PS51D8000FS-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-6-SMART-TV-3D-Full-HD-LED-UE40ES6100-UE40ES6100W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-%d0%a2%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-40-%d1%81%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-6-SMART-TV-3D-Full-HD-LED-UE40ES6100-UE40ES6100W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-55-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE55ES8007-UE55ES8007U-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-%d0%a2%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-55-%d1%81%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE55ES8007-UE55ES8007U-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-65-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-8-SMART-TV-3D-Full-HD-LED-UE65ES8007-UE65ES8007U-Russe--Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F%206-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-UE40D6100S-UE40D6100SW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-7-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-UE40D7000L-UE40D7000LS-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-LED-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-46-%d0%a1%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-8-3D-SMART-TV-Full-HD-UE46D8000Y-UE46D8000YS-Russe--Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-3D-UA40C7000WR-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UA40C7000WR-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UA55D6600WR-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UE40ES7500S-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-3D-UE46D7000LS-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-46-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE46EH5300-UE46EH5300W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE40ES5537-UE40ES5537K-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-LED-UE40EH5047-UE40EH5047K-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-40-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE40EH5307-UE40EH5307K-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-26-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-LED-UE26EH4000-UE26EH4000W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-%D0%A2%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-32-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-LED-UE32EH5040-UE32EH5040W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-LED-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80%d1%8b-%d0%a2%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80-40-%d1%81%d0%b5%d1%80%d0%b8%d1%8f-5-SMART-TV-Full-HD-LED-UE40EH5307-UE40EH5307K-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-37-FULL-HD-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-%D1%81%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D0%B8-5-UE37EH5007K-UE37EH5007K-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-32-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-5-Full-HD-UE32C5000Q-UE32C5000QW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80-32-%D0%A1%D0%B5%D1%80%D0%B8%D1%8F-4-HD-UE32C4000P-UE32C4000PW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%d0%90%d1%83%d0%b4%d0%b8%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-%d0%92%d0%b8%d0%b4%d0%b5%d0%be%d1%82%d0%b5%d1%85%d0%bd%d0%b8%d0%ba%d0%b0-LED-%d1%82%d0%b5%d0%bb%d0%b5%d0%b2%d0%b8%d0%b7%d0%be%d1%80%d1%8b-UA40C5000QR-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-UE32D5000PW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-UE46EH5000W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%90%D1%83%D0%B4%D0%B8%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%92%D0%B8%D0%B4%D0%B5%D0%BE%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-LED-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%B2%D0%B8%D0%B7%D0%BE%D1%80%D1%8B-UE55B7000WW-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%91%D1%8B%D1%82%D0%BE%D0%B2%D0%B0%D1%8F-%D1%82%D0%B5%D1%85%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%BA%D0%B0-%D0%9D%D0%B0%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D0%BE%D0%B5-%D0%BA%D1%80%D0%B5%D0%BF%D0%BB%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%B8%D0%B5-%D0%9D%D0%B0%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BD%D0%BD%D0%B0%D1%8F-%D1%81%D0%BF%D0%BB%D0%B8%D1%82-%D1%81%D0%B8%D1%81%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BC%D0%B0-%D0%A1%D1%82%D0%B0%D0%BD%D0%B4%D0%B0%D1%80%D1%82-AQ07RLAQ07RLN-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-C3510-TVGT-C3510T-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-%D0%A1%D0%BC%D0%B0%D1%80%D1%82%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-GT-S5830I-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-%D0%9C%D0%BE%D0%B1%D0%B8%D0%BB%D1%8C%D0%BD%D1%8B%D0%B5-%D1%82%D0%B5%D0%BB%D0%B5%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-%D0%A1%D0%BC%D0%B0%D1%80%D1%82%D1%84%D0%BE%D0%BD%D1%8B-Samsung-S6012-GT-S5830I-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-\xd0\x90\xd1\x83\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb8\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x92\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x96\xd0\x9a-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80\xd1\x8b-LE32B450C4W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-\xd0\x90\xd1\x83\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb8\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x92\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x96\xd0\x9a-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80\xd1\x8b-\xd0\x96\xd0\x9a-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80-40-\xd0\xa1\xd0\xb5\xd1\x80\xd0\xb8\xd1\x8f-5-Full-HD-LE40C530F1-LE40C530F1W-Russe-Manuels.htm
/SAMSUNG/Samsung-\xd0\x90\xd1\x83\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb8\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-\xd0\x92\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb4\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbe\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd1\x85\xd0\xbd\xd0\xb8\xd0\xba\xd0\xb0-LED-\xd1\x82\xd0\xb5\xd0\xbb\xd0\xb5\xd0\xb2\xd0\xb8\xd0\xb7\xd0\xbe\xd1\x80\xd1\x8b-UA40C5000QR-Russe-Manuels.htm
| PRODUITS SAMSUNG : |
| Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide |
| Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
| Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes |
| Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360° |
| Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
| Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
| Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung |
| Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
| Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir |
| Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800 |
| G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100 |
| Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet |
| Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
| Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir |
| Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB |
| Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830 |
| Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes |
| Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes |
| Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique) |
| Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace |
| Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
| Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir |
| Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note |
| Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
| Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret |
| Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830 |
| Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830 |
| Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100 |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA |
| QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 |
| QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED |
| Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste |
| Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD |
| Samsung B5722 Double SIM |
| Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles |
| Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310 |
| Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB |
| Samsung batterie IA-BP420E |
| Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST |
| Samsung batterie SLB-10A |
| Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS |
| Samsung BD-E5300 |
| Samsung BD-E5500 3D |
| Samsung BD-E6100 3D |
| Samsung BD-E8300 3D |
| Samsung BD-ES5000 |
| Samsung BD-ES6000 3D |
| Samsung C3050 Stratus |
| Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1" |
| Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung |
| Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100 |
| Samsung CB20A12 |
| Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir |
| Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB |
| Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir |
| Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB |
| Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
| Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
| Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
| Samsung CLP-C300A |
| Samsung CLP-K300A |
| Samsung CLP-M300A |
| Samsung CLP-Y300A |
| Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi |
| Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0 |
| Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet |
| Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
| Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire |
| Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series |
| Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX |
| Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170 |
| Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 |
| Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile |
| Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel |
| Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose |
| Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi |
| Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui |
| Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui |
| Samsung E1150 - Silver |
| Samsung ES90 Noir |
| Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir |
| Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir |
| Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir |
| Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
| Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S |
| Samsung EX1 |
| Samsung Flash SEF15A |
| Samsung Flash SEF20A |
| Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Note |
| Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue |
| Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir |
| Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre |
| Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet |
| Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir |
| Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB |
| Samsung HMX-F80 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" |
| Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
| Samsung HT-D330 |
| Samsung HT-D350 |
| Samsung HT-D4500 |
| Samsung HT-D5000 3D |
| Samsung HT-E4200 3D |
| Samsung HT-E4500 3D |
| Samsung HT-E5200 3D |
| Samsung HT-E5530 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES4200 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES6200 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES8200 3D |
| Samsung HW-E350 |
| Samsung HW-E450 |
| Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android) |
| Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1" |
| Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX |
| Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220 |
| Samsung kit HDMI |
| Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm |
| Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm |
| Samsung LE32E420 |
| Samsung LE40D503 |
| Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500 |
| Samsung ML-2010D3 |
| Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi |
| Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
| Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung MLT-D1052S |
| Samsung MLT-D1082S |
| Samsung MLT-D1092S |
| Samsung MM-D430D |
| Samsung MM-E320 |
| Samsung MV800 Noir |
| Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir |
| Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED |
| Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED |
| Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED |
| Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS |
| Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8 |
| Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200 |
| Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100 |
| Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
| Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
| Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED |
| Samsung PL210 Noir |
| Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal |
| Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante |
| Samsung PS43E450 |
| Samsung PS43E490 3D |
| Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung PS51E450 |
| Samsung PS51E490 3D |
| Samsung PS51E530 |
| Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go |
| Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go |
| Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED |
| Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes |
| Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display |
| Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED |
| Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED |
| Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D |
| Samsung S23B350H 23" LED |
| Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED |
| Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED |
| Samsung S27B350H 27" LED |
| Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions |
| Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
| Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions |
| Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi |
| Samsung SCX-4200A |
| Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0 |
| Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0 |
| Samsung SLB07A pour ST50 |
| Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000 |
| Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi |
| Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi |
| Samsung ST65 Noir |
| Samsung ST65 Rouge |
| Samsung ST66 Noir |
| Samsung ST77 Blanc |
| Samsung ST77 Noir |
| Samsung ST77 Rouge |
| Samsung ST77 Violet |
| Samsung ST88 Noir |
| Samsung station d'accueil |
| Samsung station d'accueil HD2 |
| Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
| Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR |
| Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED |
| Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED |
| Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D |
| Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX |
| Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir |
| Samsung UE19ES4000 LED |
| Samsung UE22ES5000 LED |
| Samsung UE22ES5410 LED |
| Samsung UE26EH4000 LED |
| Samsung UE26EH4500 LED |
| Samsung UE32EH4000 LED |
| Samsung UE32EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE32ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
| Samsung UE37ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE40D5000 LED |
| Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE40EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE40ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE46EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE46ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
| Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise |
| Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron |
| Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose |
| Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10 |
| Samsung Wave 575 |
| Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi |
| Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung WB690 Noir |
| Samsung WB700 Noir |
| Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS |
| Samsung WMN250M accroche murale |
| Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD |
| Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go |
| Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose |
| Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go |
| Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
| Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
| Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go |
| T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York |
| Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan |
| Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan |
| Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir |
| Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir |
| Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta |
| Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta |
| Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners |
| Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune |
| Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune |
| Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir |
| We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0 |
| We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0 |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire |
| Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire |
| Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc |
| Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
16-4ppm-Imprimante-l..> 23-Jul-2012 21:34 2.8M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 24-Jul-2012 14:00 6.0M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 24-Jul-2012 13:51 5.4M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 23-Jul-2012 21:57 4.3M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 24-Jul-2012 13:55 6.0M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 23-Jul-2012 21:39 3.8M
16-4ppm-Multifonctio..> 23-Jul-2012 21:44 4.3M
17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-..> 23-Jul-2012 18:59 3.9M
19-Serie-3-Moniteur-..> 29-Jul-2012 10:18 4.7M
20ppm-Multifonction-..> 24-Jul-2012 14:04 6.0M
24ppm-Multifonction-..> 24-Jul-2012 14:08 6.5M
27-Serie7-Moniteur-s..> 29-Jul-2012 10:23 4.8M
32-LE32D450WXZF-seri..> 24-Jul-2012 16:22 5.7M
32-UE32D6200WXZF-ser..> 29-Jul-2012 10:12 4.6M
35-35ppm-Copieur-cou..> 24-Jul-2012 14:22 6.5M
40-UE40D6500WXZF-ser..> 23-Jul-2012 18:34 3.6M
46-LE46D550WXZF-seri..> 24-Jul-2012 16:17 6.9M
CLX-3185FW.htm 30-Aug-2012 10:57 3.2M
Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-..> 28-Jul-2012 10:42 5.5M
Galaxy-Y-S5360-Andro..> 05-Sep-2012 07:56 3.2M
GalaxyAceGT-S5830.htm 30-Apr-2012 11:05 1.4M
GalaxySIIGT-I9100.htm 30-Apr-2012 10:59 914K
GalaxyTab8.9GT-P7310..> 30-Apr-2012 17:22 2.3M
GalaxyTab10.1GT-P750..> 30-Apr-2012 17:16 2.0M
GalaxyYGT-S5360.htm 30-Apr-2012 11:32 2.0M
LE32C350LE32C350D1W.htm 30-Apr-2012 11:12 1.9M
LE40C630LE40C630K1W.htm 01-May-2012 10:44 4.8M
LE40D503F7W-Samsung-..> 24-Jul-2012 16:31 6.3M
LE55C650-LE55C650L1W..> 24-Jul-2012 16:27 6.3M
Liste-Manuels-Utilis..> 28-Nov-2012 17:46 82K
Liste-Produits-Manue..> 28-Nov-2012 06:57 213K
MM-C330D.htm 30-Apr-2012 11:18 2.0M
MM-D330D.htm 30-Apr-2012 17:46 2.9M
Manuels-Utilisateur-..> 05-Sep-2012 08:10 3.4M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 17:54 4.1M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 17:58 4.4M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:03 3.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:07 3.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:11 2.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:16 2.5M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 06-Sep-2012 18:21 2.8M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 05-Sep-2012 08:19 3.5M
Manuels-de-l-Utilisa..> 05-Sep-2012 08:27 4.1M
Micro-chaine-MM-D330..> 23-Jul-2012 18:43 3.9M
N145Plus-NP-N145P-Ma..> 23-Jul-2012 19:31 3.9M
N150-NP-N150-Manuels..> 23-Jul-2012 18:53 3.9M
Nexus-S-noir-Open-ma..> 24-Sep-2012 11:11 4.0M
RSH5UEPN.htm 30-Apr-2012 18:01 3.4M
SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels..> 06-Oct-2012 18:04 2.6M
SGH-F490.htm 01-May-2012 10:22 3.7M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:01 4.2M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:02 2.9M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:47 3.8M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:44 4.9M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:06 2.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:45 4.3M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:07 3.2M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:07 2.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 11:59 2.3M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:02 3.8M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:08 2.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:11 4.2M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:12 2.8M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:00 4.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:10 3.9M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:12 3.1M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:47 2.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 20-Dec-2012 13:24 5.2M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:06 4.4M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 11:59 2.1M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:05 2.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:45 4.1M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:03 3.3M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:11 3.1M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:03 3.0M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:06 2.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:00 4.7M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 12:09 3.0M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 21-Dec-2012 12:01 2.9M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:47 3.4M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 21:48 4.2M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 19-Dec-2012 16:02 3.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 23-Dec-2012 22:05 2.5M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:07 2.8M
Samsung-Ðудиот..> 24-Dec-2012 08:06 3.8M
Samsung-Бытова..> 19-Dec-2012 21:48 4.3M
Samsung-Мобиль..> 21-Dec-2012 11:58 2.5M
Samsung-Мобиль..> 21-Dec-2012 12:03 5.7M
Samsung-Мобиль..> 21-Dec-2012 12:02 2.3M
Samsung--Informatiqu..> 06-May-2013 11:14 2.7M
Samsung-16-MP-Ecran-..> 09-Oct-2012 17:12 2.4M
Samsung-18-XTDVBEUE-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:08 2.3M
Samsung-20-XTDVBEUE-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:37 2.5M
Samsung-22-LE22D450W..> 07-Oct-2012 10:14 2.5M
Samsung-24-LED-HDTV-..> 09-Oct-2012 17:17 2.9M
Samsung-32-LE32D450W..> 24-Sep-2012 09:34 4.0M
Samsung-32-UE32D4000..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37 2.2M
Samsung-40-LE40D550W..> 01-Oct-2012 14:59 2.2M
Samsung-40-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:36 2.6M
Samsung-40-UE40D5700..> 04-Oct-2012 07:20 2.7M
Samsung-40-UE40D6500..> 04-Oct-2012 18:11 2.6M
Samsung-40-UE40D8000..> 07-Oct-2012 10:19 2.4M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:36 3.9M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:19 3.0M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:24 3.3M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:14 2.8M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:28 3.3M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:37 3.0M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:36 3.3M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:34 3.3M
Samsung-46-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:35 2.1M
Samsung-46-UE46D5700..> 24-Sep-2012 09:40 4.6M
Samsung-46-UE46D7000..> 02-Oct-2012 15:40 2.0M
Samsung-51-PS51E490W..> 06-Oct-2012 17:51 2.3M
Samsung-51-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:35 3.4M
Samsung-51-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:34 2.7M
Samsung-55-Smart-3D-..> 14-Oct-2012 21:34 2.9M
Samsung-305U1A-A02-N..> 09-Oct-2012 17:26 2.9M
Samsung-320MXN-3-SSD..> 10-Oct-2012 06:44 2.5M
Samsung-320TSN-3D-SS..> 09-Oct-2012 07:48 3.3M
Samsung-400EXN-Japon..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47 2.8M
Samsung-400TS-3-400T..> 17-Oct-2012 10:46 1.9M
Samsung-400TS-3D-400..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47 2.0M
Samsung-400UXN-3-Jap..> 08-Oct-2012 18:42 4.2M
Samsung-400UXN-3-SSD..> 10-Oct-2012 06:45 1.9M
Samsung-460UT-B-Japo..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47 1.9M
Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD..> 09-Oct-2012 07:47 1.9M
Samsung-708SC-Japon-..> 17-Oct-2012 10:47 3.2M
Samsung-740SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:51 2.5M
Samsung-821SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:44 2.3M
Samsung-910MP-Manuel..> 06-Oct-2012 12:56 3.3M
Samsung-940SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:58 2.6M
Samsung-941SC-JP-Man..> 07-Oct-2012 10:45 2.8M
Samsung-2012_Skype_E..> 01-Oct-2012 10:51 2.0M
Samsung-2243QW-Japon..> 08-Oct-2012 18:41 3.0M
Samsung-201204051657..> 07-Oct-2012 14:01 1.8M
Samsung-AQ09UGBN-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 14:54 1.8M
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:17 3.4M
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Po..> 06-Oct-2012 18:16 3.2M
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Ma..> 24-Sep-2012 09:53 3.7M
Samsung-Affichage-Dy..> 06-Feb-2013 07:13 2.3M
Samsung-Appareil-pho..> 06-May-2013 08:00 2.3M
Samsung-Appareils-me..> 19-Apr-2013 18:58 2.7M
Samsung-Appareils-mo..> 31-May-2013 17:12 1.5M
Samsung-Appareils-mo..> 31-May-2013 17:12 1.5M
Samsung-B2440MH-Japo..> 08-Oct-2012 18:41 2.8M
Samsung-BN68-04109G-..> 07-Oct-2012 14:05 2.0M
Samsung-CLP-367W-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 15:31 2.2M
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Ma..> 24-Sep-2012 10:10 3.3M
Samsung-CW21Z573N-Ma..> 04-Oct-2012 07:15 2.2M
Samsung-Camaras-Alta..> 29-Nov-2012 08:22 1.6M
Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 29-Nov-2012 08:24 2.7M
Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 29-Nov-2012 10:40 1.7M
Samsung-Camera-Camco..> 10-Jun-2013 08:11 1.5M
Samsung-Camera-et-Ca..> 26-Mar-2013 06:44 3.3M
Samsung-Camera-et-Ca..> 26-Mar-2013 06:45 3.1M
Samsung-Camescopes-P..> 06-Jun-2013 07:26 3.4M
Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 08:01 2.1M
Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 07:45 2.1M
Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 07:45 2.1M
Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 08:01 2.1M
Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 06-May-2013 08:00 2.1M
Samsung-Cell-Phones-..> 07-Apr-2013 10:23 3.6M
Samsung-Congelateur-..> 24-Sep-2012 10:54 3.8M
Samsung-Cuisson-Four..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06 1.2M
Samsung-DA-E550-CN-M..> 24-Sep-2012 16:43 2.4M
Samsung-DA68-01829P...> 07-Oct-2012 10:04 3.9M
Samsung-DA68-01829P...> 07-Oct-2012 10:04 3.9M
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9D..> 24-Sep-2012 14:08 3.1M
Samsung-E1720NR-Japo..> 09-Oct-2012 07:49 2.6M
Samsung-Electroména..> 01-Dec-2012 07:34 2.5M
Samsung-Electrom-nag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:50 3.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 10:57 3.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:09 1.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Nov-2012 07:42 3.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:19 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:27 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Jan-2013 10:32 2.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:12 3.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:39 3.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:17 3.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:26 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Dec-2012 08:26 3.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:08 1.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Jan-2013 08:10 3.0M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 18-Jan-2013 14:21 2.1M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 28-Nov-2012 07:19 2.0M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38 2.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Nov-2012 07:42 3.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:30 2.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 10:57 3.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:28 1.8M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 18:09 1.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Jan-2013 07:43 3.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 03-Dec-2012 15:43 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:49 3.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 24-Dec-2012 14:48 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:57 2.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 04-Jan-2013 16:24 3.8M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:28 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:38 3.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:16 3.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:26 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jan-2013 08:16 3.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 13:14 2.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 11:00 3.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:48 3.8M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Jan-2013 07:45 2.9M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:25 2.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Feb-2013 14:49 2.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:22 2.9M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:21 1.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Jan-2013 16:41 2.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 28-Nov-2012 14:41 1.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:18 1.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 09-Nov-2012 18:22 1.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 23-Jan-2013 06:53 1.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 06-Feb-2013 07:09 3.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 12:21 2.1M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 17-Nov-2012 19:23 1.9M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 06-Feb-2013 07:11 3.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Dec-2012 08:26 2.9M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Dec-2012 07:34 2.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 20-Nov-2012 09:45 2.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Dec-2012 07:33 2.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:29 2.0M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 12-Feb-2013 17:51 2.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06 1.9M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Feb-2013 14:50 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 18:59 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 05-Feb-2013 18:49 3.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:40 3.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 13:17 4.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 11:41 3.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 27-Dec-2012 10:55 1.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 04-Jan-2013 16:24 3.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 30-Jan-2013 07:45 3.0M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Nov-2012 07:43 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 21-Jan-2013 16:29 1.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Jan-2013 16:42 2.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 03-Dec-2012 15:10 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 09-Nov-2012 18:22 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 11-Nov-2012 14:22 3.1M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 29-Nov-2012 10:09 2.4M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 31-May-2013 16:01 1.8M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 26-Mar-2013 07:29 2.9M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 01-Dec-2012 07:33 2.6M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56 2.3M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:31 3.5M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:29 2.0M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 22-Nov-2012 08:27 2.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 28-Nov-2012 12:20 2.2M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jun-2013 07:26 2.7M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 03-Dec-2012 15:04 2.1M
Samsung-Electromenag..> 10-Jun-2013 07:27 2.6M
Samsung-Entro-SPH-m3..> 09-Oct-2012 17:12 2.2M
Samsung-Exhibit-4G-A..> 03-Dec-2012 15:42 3.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-NEXUS..> 24-Sep-2012 15:17 1.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-..> 24-Sep-2012 14:59 3.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:36 2.5M
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-..> 24-Sep-2012 14:48 3.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-7..> 07-Oct-2012 11:16 2.5M
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-1..> 24-Sep-2012 16:29 1.9M
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-G..> 24-Sep-2012 10:42 5.0M
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-S..> 24-Sep-2012 16:32 2.4M
Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro..> 16-Oct-2012 11:35 2.7M
Samsung-GALAXY-Y-Pro..> 09-Oct-2012 17:13 2.5M
Samsung-GSM-GSM-Cham..> 07-Apr-2013 10:25 3.0M
Samsung-GSM-GSM-E105..> 04-Jun-2013 17:03 1.6M
Samsung-GSM-GSM-E118..> 02-Jun-2013 22:07 3.1M
Samsung-GSM-GSM-E220..> 26-Mar-2013 07:34 2.9M
Samsung-GSM-GSM-E220..> 26-Mar-2013 06:41 2.7M
Samsung-GSM-S5610-GT..> 10-Jun-2013 08:03 3.8M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:23 3.4M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 26-Mar-2013 07:31 2.9M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:24 3.2M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 06-May-2013 09:30 2.0M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 05-Jun-2013 06:55 3.4M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 05-Jun-2013 06:55 3.2M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 26-Mar-2013 06:42 3.8M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:26 3.0M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 04-Jun-2013 16:39 1.5M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 06-May-2013 09:31 1.8M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 07-Apr-2013 10:28 3.8M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 10-Jun-2013 08:05 3.0M
Samsung-GSM-Smartpho..> 05-Jun-2013 07:48 2.7M
Samsung-GT-B5310-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:59 3.9M
Samsung-GT-I9000-Man..> 02-Oct-2012 16:14 2.0M
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM..> 05-Oct-2012 17:16 2.2M
Samsung-GT-I9250-Man..> 05-Oct-2012 17:34 2.5M
Samsung-GT-I9300-Man..> 06-Oct-2012 18:01 2.3M
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_..> 05-Oct-2012 17:20 2.4M
Samsung-GT-N8000-CN-..> 24-Sep-2012 16:50 1.0M
Samsung-GT-N8000-Man..> 06-Oct-2012 18:10 3.0M
Samsung-GT-P5110-Jap..> 09-Oct-2012 07:49 2.6M
Samsung-GT-P6200-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 11:15 1.5M
Samsung-GT-S5360-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 14:25 3.8M
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_..> 24-Sep-2012 14:16 3.2M
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_..> 05-Oct-2012 17:10 2.0M
Samsung-GT-S5830_UM_..> 05-Oct-2012 17:38 2.7M
Samsung-Gainable-Sli..> 04-Oct-2012 07:11 2.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-n..> 23-Jul-2012 18:22 3.0M
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-n..> 06-Oct-2012 12:05 2.9M
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-..> 24-Sep-2012 14:44 4.6M
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-..> 06-Oct-2012 17:57 1.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-II-..> 23-Jul-2012 18:17 2.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-III..> 23-Jul-2012 18:29 3.4M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-III..> 28-Jul-2012 10:34 7.3M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-Plu..> 24-Jul-2012 11:39 4.3M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL..> 06-Oct-2012 11:51 3.4M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL..> 06-Oct-2012 11:50 3.4M
Samsung-Galaxy-S-noi..> 23-Jul-2012 18:26 3.2M
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT..> 17-Sep-2012 16:19 3.3M
Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT..> 20-Nov-2012 10:03 3.4M
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica..> 06-Oct-2012 12:17 2.4M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 15-Nov-2012 18:17 2.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 06-Oct-2012 17:40 4.0M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 24-Jul-2012 14:34 6.5M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2..> 06-Oct-2012 17:36 3.7M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7..> 24-Jul-2012 14:35 6.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 24-Sep-2012 14:21 3.6M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 24-Sep-2012 14:22 3.6M
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-1..> 09-Oct-2012 17:11 2.3M
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-..> 06-Oct-2012 12:11 2.0M
Samsung-Galaxy-Xcove..> 30-Aug-2012 10:56 4.8M
Samsung-Galaxy-Y-DUO..> 09-Oct-2012 17:13 3.0M
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-..> 17-Sep-2012 16:48 3.9M
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-..> 17-Sep-2012 16:44 3.6M
Samsung-Home-Applian..> 28-Nov-2012 17:43 2.3M
Samsung-Home-Applian..> 29-Nov-2012 08:21 950K
Samsung-Home-Applian..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20 947K
Samsung-I9300-GT-I93..> 29-Nov-2012 10:21 2.7M
Samsung-IT-producten..> 26-Mar-2013 06:43 3.6M
Samsung-IT-producten..> 10-Jun-2013 07:26 3.0M
Samsung-IT-producten..> 26-Mar-2013 07:31 2.9M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:45 3.7M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 31-May-2013 17:12 1.9M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12 2.8M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 22:07 3.2M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 22:09 3.1M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 22:08 3.1M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:46 2.7M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 10-Jun-2013 07:27 2.4M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:44 2.4M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 18:22 2.0M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 02-Jun-2013 11:50 3.1M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:40 2.7M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 10-Jun-2013 07:26 2.7M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:40 2.2M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:41 4.0M
Samsung-Imprimantes-..> 04-Jun-2013 16:40 3.3M
Samsung-Informatica-..> 29-Nov-2012 08:23 3.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:10 4.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44 1.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:49 4.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:49 4.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:05 3.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:27 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:45 1.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-May-2013 07:48 4.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:04 3.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 11:13 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 02-Jun-2013 22:09 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 12:47 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:32 3.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:10 3.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:30 4.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Jun-2013 07:27 1.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jun-2013 07:29 4.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:15 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:40 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:39 4.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 19:07 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:41 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:43 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44 1.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:25 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 04-Jun-2013 18:21 1.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 07:40 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 12:16 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Jan-2013 16:23 2.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08 1.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:43 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Feb-2013 18:51 2.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Jan-2013 07:47 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Feb-2013 18:51 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Feb-2013 18:52 2.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:24 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Apr-2013 11:55 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:21 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 01-Jan-2013 11:17 3.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Jan-2013 16:25 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Jan-2013 07:48 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 14:23 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 27-Feb-2013 14:48 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:40 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Apr-2013 11:02 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jan-2013 11:32 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jan-2013 11:32 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 18:37 2.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:29 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Feb-2013 15:38 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:36 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:38 3.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:14 1.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 09-Nov-2012 18:21 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:37 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 13-Jan-2013 18:09 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:15 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:04 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:45 3.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Jan-2013 16:23 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 24-Dec-2012 08:28 6.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Feb-2013 10:03 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:19 3.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 11:14 4.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 08:05 3.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Dec-2012 08:28 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:26 3.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 13-May-2013 17:34 2.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-May-2013 22:41 1.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Apr-2013 11:56 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:27 3.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Feb-2013 15:39 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:42 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 07:58 3.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 07:40 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 22:26 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:28 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:17 1.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Jun-2013 06:56 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47 2.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:25 1.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:42 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:25 4.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 07:24 3.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Jun-2013 06:54 4.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 02-Jun-2013 11:44 2.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:13 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:39 3.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 05-Jun-2013 19:38 3.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:23 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 06:46 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:41 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:21 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jun-2013 07:28 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 27-May-2013 22:24 2.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 15:03 2.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Jan-2013 14:21 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:05 1.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:26 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 18:16 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:31 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:39 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44 1.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 11:47 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:54 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:54 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:19 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 20:17 1.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:15 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 09-Nov-2012 18:23 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 14:19 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:07 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:06 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Feb-2013 15:36 4.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 02-Jun-2013 11:43 2.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:46 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:15 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:53 3.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 14-May-2013 07:22 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:06 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 08:03 3.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:13 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 08:03 3.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:09 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-May-2013 15:18 1.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Apr-2013 10:50 3.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:43 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:26 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 25-May-2013 11:33 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44 1.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:13 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:11 4.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:05 3.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:05 3.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:06 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:06 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:15 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:31 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 07-Apr-2013 10:26 2.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:12 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49 1.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 01-Dec-2012 07:31 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:11 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 11:48 1.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 21-Nov-2012 14:39 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:06 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:11 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:06 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:05 1.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:07 4.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 11:45 1.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:26 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Dec-2012 08:06 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:28 3.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 10-Jan-2013 18:31 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Jan-2013 08:37 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:45 3.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 12:22 3.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:08 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:46 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:38 3.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 08:02 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 15-Jan-2013 17:14 2.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:15 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:56 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:43 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:49 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:52 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:48 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Jan-2013 07:49 1.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:15 3.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:47 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:06 1.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:53 3.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 15:04 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:48 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 09:04 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:45 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Apr-2013 10:51 3.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:31 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Apr-2013 11:56 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 15-Jan-2013 17:14 2.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:55 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:47 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:24 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 12:51 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 08:08 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:24 1.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:09 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:16 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:42 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:57 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 13-May-2013 22:06 4.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:14 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:09 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:22 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:16 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:30 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:07 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:56 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 03-Dec-2012 12:25 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 08:24 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:42 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 31-May-2013 17:19 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:46 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:16 2.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 08:07 3.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 08:23 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:42 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:04 2.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 18-Nov-2012 11:05 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-May-2013 07:42 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-May-2013 06:15 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 01-Dec-2012 07:31 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 13-Jan-2013 22:33 4.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39 2.4M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Nov-2012 14:18 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:49 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:16 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 06:48 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:04 1.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:43 3.9M
Samsung-Informatique..> 28-Nov-2012 12:24 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:38 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Jan-2013 07:55 2.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 14-Jan-2013 07:15 2.5M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 08:15 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 17-Jan-2013 07:46 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 15-Jan-2013 17:14 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39 2.8M
Samsung-Informatique..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15 2.6M
Samsung-Informatique..> 30-Nov-2012 18:17 2.2M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-May-2013 09:29 3.1M
Samsung-Informatique..> 26-Mar-2013 06:41 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 23-May-2013 07:42 2.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:45 1.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 22-Jan-2013 12:06 3.0M
Samsung-Informatique..> 16-Nov-2012 19:09 3.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40 1.7M
Samsung-Informatique..> 06-Jan-2013 11:32 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 19-Nov-2012 08:05 3.3M
Samsung-Informatique..> 20-Nov-2012 09:46 2.5M
Samsung-Kit-Pieton-B..> 16-Oct-2012 11:34 3.1M
Samsung-LA46C550J1F-..> 24-Sep-2012 17:00 1.3M
Samsung-LE19C350-LE1..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37 1.7M
Samsung-LE22C452C4H-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:38 2.0M
Samsung-LE26B450-LE2..> 16-Oct-2012 11:33 2.9M
Samsung-LE26D450G1W-..> 05-Oct-2012 16:42 1.7M
Samsung-LE32A466-Man..> 04-Oct-2012 18:25 3.3M
Samsung-LE32A568-LE3..> 02-Oct-2012 15:59 2.7M
Samsung-LE32B450C4W-..> 04-Oct-2012 18:16 3.7M
Samsung-LE32C650-LE3..> 05-Oct-2012 16:36 2.3M
Samsung-LE32D400E1W-..> 04-Oct-2012 07:06 3.0M
Samsung-LE32D460C9H-..> 19-Oct-2012 14:58 2.7M
Samsung-LE32E420E2W-..> 06-Oct-2012 12:50 3.1M
Samsung-LE37A466-LE3..> 19-Oct-2012 15:02 2.3M
Samsung-LE40A577P2M-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:38 2.0M
Samsung-LE40B551A6W-..> 19-Oct-2012 14:58 2.7M
Samsung-LE40S71B-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:31 4.0M
Samsung-LE46A676-LE4..> 24-Sep-2012 10:04 2.5M
Samsung-LE46C630-LE4..> 07-Oct-2012 10:34 4.5M
Samsung-LE52A676-LE5..> 07-Oct-2012 10:06 4.5M
Samsung-Lecteur-Mult..> 02-Oct-2012 16:09 2.5M
Samsung-Lecteur-Mult..> 24-Sep-2012 14:29 4.2M
Samsung-Livres-blanc..> 05-Jun-2013 19:37 3.8M
Samsung-Livres-blanc..> 05-Jun-2013 19:37 3.8M
Samsung-ME40A-TP40-J..> 09-Oct-2012 07:47 2.7M
Samsung-ME46A-Japon-..> 09-Oct-2012 07:47 2.7M
Samsung-ME65B-Japon-..> 17-Oct-2012 10:52 2.4M
Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-..> 01-Oct-2012 11:00 1.1M
Samsung-ML-2160-Impr..> 09-Nov-2012 18:26 3.5M
Samsung-ML-2165W-Rou..> 06-Oct-2012 18:21 3.7M
Samsung-M_YUKON_2K_W..> 07-Oct-2012 10:03 4.1M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 30-Nov-2012 18:15 2.4M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 31-May-2013 17:14 3.5M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 29-Nov-2012 08:22 2.2M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 03-Dec-2012 15:02 2.8M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20 1.0M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 30-Nov-2012 18:16 2.4M
Samsung-Mobile-Phone..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20 2.6M
Samsung-Mobile-Smart..> 02-Jun-2013 22:09 3.1M
Samsung-Mobile-Table..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12 2.8M
Samsung-Mobilite-Sma..> 04-Jun-2013 18:22 2.2M
Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 07-Apr-2013 10:28 3.8M
Samsung-Mobilite-Tel..> 07-Apr-2013 10:29 2.9M
Samsung-Moniteur-gra..> 08-Feb-2013 10:05 1.9M
Samsung-Monitors-249..> 03-Dec-2012 15:42 2.3M
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-..> 05-Oct-2012 16:58 1.7M
Samsung-N150-NP-N150..> 05-Oct-2012 17:01 1.7M
Samsung-NC190-Japon-..> 09-Oct-2012 07:48 1.9M
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R..> 24-Sep-2012 10:48 3.1M
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK0..> 05-Oct-2012 17:06 1.8M
Samsung-NP300E5C-NP3..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37 2.2M
Samsung-NP300E5ZI-NP..> 16-Oct-2012 11:36 2.4M
Samsung-NP300V5AH-Ma..> 04-Jun-2013 18:23 1.8M
Samsung-NP530U3C-A01..> 16-Oct-2012 11:35 2.7M
Samsung-NS140SDXEA-M..> 01-Oct-2012 10:55 1.0M
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 16:24 3.3M
Samsung-Notebook-Ser..> 06-Oct-2012 18:29 3.7M
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 16:38 3.4M
Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 16:31 3.4M
Samsung-Omnia-II-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 16:30 3.4M
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-n..> 17-Sep-2012 16:12 4.3M
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7..> 17-Sep-2012 16:09 4.3M
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7..> 06-Oct-2012 12:29 2.7M
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 11:47 4.1M
Samsung-PC-OFFICE-Co..> 31-May-2013 17:13 3.5M
Samsung-PC-Office-LC..> 29-Nov-2012 08:21 2.4M
Samsung-PC-Office-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 08:20 1.4M
Samsung-PC-Office-Ne..> 03-Dec-2012 15:05 3.3M
Samsung-PC-Office-No..> 03-Dec-2012 15:03 2.8M
Samsung-PC-Office-No..> 03-Dec-2012 15:06 3.3M
Samsung-PDP-TV-PN51D..> 01-Oct-2012 15:21 2.0M
Samsung-PS42C450-PS4..> 02-Oct-2012 16:06 3.2M
Samsung-PS50A566-PS5..> 16-Oct-2012 11:38 2.2M
Samsung-PS50C450-PS5..> 16-Oct-2012 11:37 1.7M
Samsung-PS50C535-PS5..> 14-Oct-2012 21:34 3.1M
Samsung-PS51D490A1W-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:33 3.3M
Samsung-PS51E530-ZF-..> 09-Oct-2012 17:31 3.3M
Samsung-Peripherique..> 06-May-2013 09:29 2.0M
Samsung-Peripherique..> 05-Jun-2013 06:56 3.1M
Samsung-Peripherique..> 05-Jun-2013 07:49 2.1M
Samsung-Peripherique..> 29-Nov-2012 10:21 3.2M
Samsung-Peripherique..> 02-Jun-2013 22:08 3.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04 2.5M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04 2.7M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Dec-2012 08:26 3.2M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36 2.3M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Jan-2013 16:24 2.6M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 18:07 4.4M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 22-May-2013 07:33 2.2M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 27-May-2013 07:39 2.7M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 11:13 3.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 25-May-2013 11:35 1.6M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Jun-2013 07:46 3.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-May-2013 22:40 1.5M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 07:30 2.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 18:58 2.8M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 10-Jun-2013 08:04 3.2M
Samsung- Photo-Cames..> 06-May-2013 09:30 2.3M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 10-Jan-2013 18:08 1.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 11:52 3.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 25-May-2013 11:27 2.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Feb-2013 18:47 1.7M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Feb-2013 18:48 3.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Jan-2013 16:24 2.7M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49 1.4M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06 1.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 13-May-2013 17:34 1.3M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 29-Nov-2012 10:08 1.5M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06 1.2M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 31-May-2013 17:19 2.3M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Jan-2013 08:38 2.5M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06 1.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 12-Feb-2013 17:42 2.3M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 31-May-2013 17:16 3.2M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Nov-2012 12:14 2.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20 2.6M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-Nov-2012 08:18 3.8M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-May-2013 09:33 3.4M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 25-May-2013 11:30 2.6M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-Feb-2013 07:11 3.4M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 27-Feb-2013 14:50 2.6M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 22-Nov-2012 08:24 3.2M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 07-Feb-2013 15:37 2.7M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 30-Nov-2012 19:05 2.2M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 07:29 3.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 22-May-2013 06:40 1.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49 1.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 07:28 3.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 18:55 3.3M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 07-Feb-2013 15:36 3.6M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 26-Mar-2013 06:47 3.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 05-Feb-2013 18:52 3.5M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 13-Jan-2013 18:08 3.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-Nov-2012 08:18 3.6M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 23-May-2013 07:39 3.7M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 20-May-2013 22:39 2.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 31-May-2013 16:01 1.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 11:06 2.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 19:00 2.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 11:02 2.1M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 06-Feb-2013 14:49 3.9M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 01-Dec-2012 07:32 3.0M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 21-May-2013 15:20 2.7M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 19-Apr-2013 19:00 2.3M
Samsung-Photo-Camesc..> 18-Nov-2012 11:04 1.8M
Samsung-Player-Addic..> 17-Sep-2012 11:39 3.8M
Samsung-Player-Duo-n..> 17-Sep-2012 11:35 3.6M
Samsung-Player-HD-no..> 17-Sep-2012 11:31 3.6M
Samsung-Player-One-n..> 06-Oct-2012 18:39 3.8M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 20-May-2013 22:40 1.6M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 05-Jun-2013 06:56 2.6M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 15:19 3.8M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 06-Jun-2013 07:26 3.5M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 06:47 2.1M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 15:20 2.7M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 06-Jun-2013 07:28 2.3M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 04-Jun-2013 18:25 2.6M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 21-May-2013 15:20 2.7M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:38 2.7M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 10-Jun-2013 08:04 3.6M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:38 2.7M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 08:05 3.2M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 02-Jun-2013 11:45 3.2M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 04-Jun-2013 18:23 1.8M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 19-Apr-2013 18:57 2.1M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:23 2.4M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:38 2.6M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 14-May-2013 07:23 2.6M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 27-Feb-2013 14:47 3.2M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 27-Feb-2013 14:47 3.3M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56 3.1M
Samsung-Portables-et..> 19-Apr-2013 11:06 2.2M
Samsung-Presentation..> 07-Apr-2013 10:36 3.6M
Samsung-Printers-Mul..> 06-Jun-2013 07:27 3.0M
Samsung-RE-C21VMS-Ma..> 01-Oct-2012 15:24 2.0M
Samsung-RR92HASX-Man..> 24-Sep-2012 10:26 3.6M
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Man..> 01-Oct-2012 11:10 1.8M
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Ref..> 09-Nov-2012 18:25 3.4M
Samsung-RV511-NP-RV5..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07 1.7M
Samsung-Refrigerateu..> 01-Oct-2012 11:18 1.6M
Samsung-Refrigerateu..> 24-Sep-2012 10:20 3.5M
Samsung-Refrigerator..> 03-Dec-2012 15:50 2.4M
Samsung-S-II-HDSHV-E..> 31-May-2013 17:15 3.5M
Samsung-S22B350B-Man..> 06-Oct-2012 17:46 3.0M
Samsung-S23A550H-Jap..> 10-Oct-2012 06:56 2.7M
Samsung-S5610-GT-S56..> 06-Oct-2012 12:37 2.7M
Samsung-SCH-W999-CN-..> 24-Sep-2012 16:54 1.2M
Samsung-SCX-4x28-Ser..> 02-Jun-2013 11:46 3.4M
Samsung-SCX-3200-Man..> 09-Oct-2012 17:11 2.6M
Samsung-SCX-3400-Pak..> 03-Dec-2012 15:04 2.7M
Samsung-SGH-D500-Tel..> 09-Nov-2012 18:24 4.2M
Samsung-SHV-E210S-S-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:39 1.9M
Samsung-SHV-E300L-Co..> 31-May-2013 17:13 1.5M
Samsung-SHW-M220L-Co..> 04-Jun-2013 16:41 3.3M
Samsung-SNE-60K_UM_E..> 07-Oct-2012 10:03 3.9M
Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 24-Sep-2012 14:38 3.4M
Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 24-Sep-2012 10:38 4.8M
Samsung-Samsung-Gala..> 06-Oct-2012 11:58 3.7M
Samsung-Sante-Ultras..> 28-May-2013 07:39 3.8M
Samsung-Sprzet-kompu..> 29-Nov-2012 08:22 1.2M
Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06 1.9M
Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 01-Dec-2012 07:32 3.1M
Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 16-Jan-2013 07:51 2.2M
Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 23-May-2013 07:38 3.7M
Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 25-May-2013 11:30 2.6M
Samsung-Stockage-inf..> 23-May-2013 07:41 2.9M
Samsung-Téléphone-..> 29-Nov-2012 10:05 2.3M
Samsung-T22B300EW-Ma..> 09-Oct-2012 17:38 2.4M
Samsung-T240-JP-Manu..> 07-Oct-2012 10:36 3.3M
Samsung-T260-Japon-M..> 10-Oct-2012 06:44 2.2M
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu..> 29-Nov-2012 08:23 2.8M
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47 1.8M
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19..> 03-Dec-2012 15:05 3.4M
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-UE..> 10-Dec-2012 08:06 3.8M
Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-20..> 29-Nov-2012 10:09 2.2M
Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED..> 05-Jun-2013 07:47 2.8M
Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED..> 05-Jun-2013 07:48 2.8M
Samsung-TV-AV-TV-LED..> 19-Apr-2013 10:50 3.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-LCD..> 06-May-2013 09:30 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Mar-2013 06:49 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:14 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 12:09 4.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:11 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:05 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 08:21 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:01 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:40 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:11 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:44 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:30 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:03 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:08 1.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:43 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:21 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:53 1.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:58 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Jan-2013 11:43 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:21 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 06:48 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Apr-2013 18:58 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:39 4.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:12 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:17 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:22 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:25 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:18 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 14:45 1.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:23 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:15 4.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:25 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:44 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 19:08 3.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 08:17 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:43 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:15 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:17 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:15 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 15:42 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 14:45 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:40 3.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:14 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 17:37 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Dec-2012 12:29 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:50 3.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:59 4.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:40 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:41 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:03 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44 1.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:20 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:20 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:18 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 14:44 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 06:57 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:19 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:21 3.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:10 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 17:36 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:43 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:39 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:13 4.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:01 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:24 1.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:24 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:33 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:07 1.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 10:59 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:05 3.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:16 4.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 19:15 4.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 22:25 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:40 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Nov-2012 10:28 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 31-May-2013 17:20 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 12:21 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 31-May-2013 17:18 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:36 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Jun-2013 07:48 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09 1.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Jun-2013 06:54 4.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:47 4.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:52 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 14-May-2013 08:08 3.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 11:53 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:23 4.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:32 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 14:39 3.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 17:34 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 15:02 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 18:33 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 22:01 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:27 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:40 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:24 1.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:15 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Apr-2013 18:56 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:29 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 14:42 4.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:48 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 17:34 1.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Jan-2013 12:05 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 18:16 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Nov-2012 11:07 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 12:05 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:19 3.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:04 1.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 14:40 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:16 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 19:12 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:06 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:06 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:23 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:37 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:41 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Mar-2013 07:26 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:55 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:26 1.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:05 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 08:00 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-May-2013 07:58 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Nov-2012 20:17 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-May-2013 06:30 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Feb-2013 15:39 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 14:20 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 14:21 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Nov-2012 18:24 4.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Nov-2012 18:28 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Nov-2012 18:22 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 08:22 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 12:05 4.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:52 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Mar-2013 06:47 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 12:29 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:32 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:29 1.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:37 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:46 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:21 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 09:44 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:32 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 07:19 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:03 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:36 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:22 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 23-Jan-2013 06:52 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 11:00 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:03 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:22 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:46 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 08:04 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 09:40 4.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:23 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:21 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:15 4.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 08:01 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09 1.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:17 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:14 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:17 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:19 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 29-Nov-2012 10:07 1.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:58 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:18 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:42 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 11:53 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:07 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:08 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Dec-2012 22:16 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:16 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:43 4.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:16 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 03-Mar-2013 12:16 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Jan-2013 14:23 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 18:29 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:49 2.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:41 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:16 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:30 3.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:19 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:41 1.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 07:18 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:22 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 18:56 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 17-Nov-2012 19:22 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 07:18 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:04 4.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:04 4.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:17 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:17 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:37 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:30 3.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 10:59 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 09:44 4.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 26-Nov-2012 10:28 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-Nov-2012 08:25 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:24 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 18:15 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:14 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Feb-2013 18:51 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:41 1.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:27 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:59 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:25 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:13 3.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 09:41 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:19 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:11 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:50 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:48 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:09 4.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:28 4.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:46 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:28 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:30 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 05-Feb-2013 18:50 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:33 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:18 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:47 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:15 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:58 3.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:09 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 11:48 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:20 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:44 3.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08 1.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:25 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:19 3.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Feb-2013 17:47 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:38 4.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 17:33 2.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:10 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:49 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Jan-2013 07:44 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Nov-2012 12:51 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-Jan-2013 11:31 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 12:03 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 10:20 3.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:49 4.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:21 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 25-May-2013 11:26 1.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:43 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:15 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:27 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:43 3.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:24 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:18 1.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 11:19 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Nov-2012 11:50 3.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:14 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:40 3.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-Jan-2013 11:31 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:48 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 15-Nov-2012 08:24 5.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:44 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:11 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:25 3.3M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Nov-2012 08:26 5.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:24 3.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 18-Jan-2013 14:20 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 12-Nov-2012 07:19 4.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:26 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 14:48 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:45 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-Apr-2013 11:56 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 22-May-2013 06:31 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 27-Dec-2012 12:05 3.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:11 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 11:37 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:09 2.0M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 04-Jan-2013 16:22 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:08 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 22:00 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Jan-2013 16:40 2.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 28-May-2013 07:43 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 12:15 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 24-Dec-2012 08:26 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 16-Jan-2013 07:50 2.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Nov-2012 07:43 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:23 4.2M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08 1.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 14:19 2.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 19-Dec-2012 08:24 2.9M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 06-May-2013 11:14 3.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 21-Jan-2013 16:21 2.5M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 07-Jan-2013 19:10 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 01-Jan-2013 10:34 4.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 13-May-2013 21:56 4.4M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 08-Feb-2013 10:04 2.7M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-Nov-2012 08:17 1.8M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 31-May-2013 17:18 2.6M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 14-May-2013 08:06 3.1M
Samsung-TV-Audio-Vid..> 20-May-2013 22:40 1.6M
Samsung-TV-Video-3D-..> 04-Jun-2013 18:22 2.1M
Samsung-TV Audio-Vid..> 23-Jan-2013 06:53 1.6M
Samsung-TV Audio-Vid..> 11-Nov-2012 13:15 2.8M
Samsung-TV Audio-Vid..> 10-Jan-2013 08:19 2.7M
Samsung-TVs-LED-TV-U..> 13-May-2013 21:57 4.5M
Samsung-TVs-LED-TV-U..> 13-May-2013 21:57 4.5M
Samsung-Table-induct..> 09-Nov-2012 18:25 3.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 08:23 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Nov-2012 13:24 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 17:33 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:10 3.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:08 3.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 08:04 1.7M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 20-Nov-2012 09:57 2.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:09 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:10 3.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44 1.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 12:14 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jan-2013 18:37 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 12:16 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:18 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:17 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:14 3.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 12:21 1.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:31 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:31 4.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jan-2013 18:31 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:16 3.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15 2.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 12:21 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:14 3.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 08:25 3.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jun-2013 08:04 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:13 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 22:01 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 31-May-2013 17:17 3.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 08:23 2.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:26 1.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:28 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 06:48 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:27 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:13 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-May-2013 06:47 1.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:05 2.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 08:09 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Apr-2013 13:30 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:10 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 11:47 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 20-Nov-2012 08:17 1.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 20-Nov-2012 09:45 2.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 14:57 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 11:43 2.7M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:42 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:08 1.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 22:00 2.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:41 2.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 16:41 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Feb-2013 14:49 2.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:06 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 12:05 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:43 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 30-Nov-2012 19:08 1.7M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 16:42 2.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 03-Dec-2012 15:02 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 05-Jun-2013 06:53 4.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Apr-2013 11:55 1.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 18-Nov-2012 20:17 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:26 1.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 21-Nov-2012 12:49 1.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:13 2.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-Jun-2013 07:27 3.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Feb-2013 10:03 2.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 10:55 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 01-Jan-2013 11:13 5.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 09:30 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Feb-2013 15:38 2.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 19:10 3.7M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Jan-2013 19:05 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Nov-2012 12:50 3.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 18:15 4.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Jan-2013 09:25 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Apr-2013 10:27 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Jan-2013 07:52 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 11:47 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 28-Nov-2012 12:08 4.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Jan-2013 19:07 3.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 16-Jan-2013 07:51 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:17 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Nov-2012 18:21 3.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Nov-2012 12:22 3.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:33 3.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Jan-2013 16:39 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 08:23 6.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 05-Jun-2013 07:49 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 14-Jan-2013 07:38 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:06 3.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Feb-2013 14:48 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44 2.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 26-Mar-2013 06:49 2.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 26-Mar-2013 07:32 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:22 3.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12 3.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Feb-2013 15:37 2.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 18:17 2.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Apr-2013 18:59 2.5M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 10-Jun-2013 08:03 3.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 08:26 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Nov-2012 08:26 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-Feb-2013 07:12 2.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 30-Nov-2012 18:16 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 25-May-2013 11:28 4.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:08 2.7M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:09 2.2M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:20 3.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:22 2.7M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Apr-2013 10:30 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:09 2.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 23-May-2013 07:40 3.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 18:16 3.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 07-Apr-2013 10:31 3.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 17-Nov-2012 19:22 5.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 14-May-2013 08:06 2.7M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 13-May-2013 21:59 2.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 29-Nov-2012 10:22 2.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Nov-2012 11:48 3.3M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 19-Apr-2013 18:57 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Jan-2013 08:39 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:06 2.4M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 12-Feb-2013 17:44 1.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:07 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 26-Mar-2013 06:45 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:17 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 18:34 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 09-Dec-2012 22:15 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 11-Nov-2012 14:23 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:21 3.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:30 1.8M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Jan-2013 11:44 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 27-Dec-2012 12:08 2.9M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 22-Apr-2013 11:54 2.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 05-Feb-2013 18:57 2.0M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 15-Nov-2012 10:20 3.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 08-Feb-2013 10:06 1.6M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 06-May-2013 09:28 3.1M
Samsung-Telephone-Mo..> 04-Jan-2013 16:23 2.5M
Samsung-Telephones-C..> 08-Feb-2013 10:05 2.4M
Samsung-UA32ES5500-U..> 01-Oct-2012 10:49 1.7M
Samsung-UA40ES5500-U..> 09-Oct-2012 07:57 3.1M
Samsung-UD22B-Japon-..> 08-Oct-2012 18:42 2.8M
Samsung-UE19D4003BW-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:09 1.6M
Samsung-UE26EH4000-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 14:02 4.2M
Samsung-UE26EH4500-Z..> 04-Oct-2012 18:04 2.4M
Samsung-UE32D5700RS-..> 01-Oct-2012 10:43 3.3M
Samsung-UE32D6530WS-..> 16-Oct-2012 11:34 3.1M
Samsung-UE32EH4003W-..> 19-Oct-2012 14:57 2.9M
Samsung-UE32ES6710-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 10:34 4.3M
Samsung-UE37C5100QW-..> 02-Oct-2012 15:55 3.8M
Samsung-UE40B6050-UE..> 14-Oct-2012 21:33 3.9M
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE..> 24-Sep-2012 10:50 3.1M
Samsung-UE40C6700-UE..> 28-Sep-2012 11:53 3.0M
Samsung-UE40D6510WS-..> 09-Nov-2012 18:26 2.9M
Samsung-UE40ES5500-Z..> 16-Oct-2012 11:54 2.1M
Samsung-UE40ES7000-Z..> 07-Oct-2012 10:26 3.3M
Samsung-UE40ES8000-Z..> 02-Oct-2012 16:21 2.7M
Samsung-UE46C6805-UE..> 14-Oct-2012 21:33 3.9M
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE..> 24-Sep-2012 10:08 3.2M
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE..> 04-Oct-2012 07:31 3.2M
Samsung-UE46C8700XS-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:02 2.9M
Samsung-UE46D5720RS-..> 04-Oct-2012 18:21 3.3M
Samsung-UE46D6300SS-..> 02-Oct-2012 15:29 753K
Samsung-UE46D6530WS-..> 04-Oct-2012 18:02 2.4M
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-..> 24-Sep-2012 10:23 3.5M
Samsung-UE46ES6300-Z..> 01-Oct-2012 10:49 2.0M
Samsung-UE46ES8000-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 09:46 3.6M
Samsung-UE46S870XS-M..> 01-Oct-2012 15:05 2.5M
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-..> 24-Sep-2012 09:57 3.7M
Samsung-UE55C8700-UE..> 07-Oct-2012 10:10 2.8M
Samsung-UE55ES6300-Z..> 24-Sep-2012 09:50 3.6M
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-..> 24-Sep-2012 09:43 3.0M
Samsung-UE55ES8000-Z..> 02-Oct-2012 15:35 1.4M
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-..> 01-Oct-2012 11:05 1.7M
Samsung-VC-UBL916-Ma..> 01-Oct-2012 15:35 1.6M
Samsung-VC331LLDC6S-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:17 1.7M
Samsung-VC331LLMA6S-..> 10-Oct-2012 06:43 2.5M
Samsung-Video-tutori..> 07-Apr-2013 10:32 3.5M
Samsung-WEP480-CN-Ma..> 24-Sep-2012 17:03 1.3M
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-..> 17-Sep-2012 11:27 4.9M
Samsung-Wave-533-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 11:23 4.6M
Samsung-Wave-575-bla..> 24-Jul-2012 11:44 4.6M
Samsung-Wave-578-noi..> 17-Sep-2012 11:19 4.2M
Samsung-Wave-723-gri..> 24-Jul-2012 14:45 7.0M
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 17-Sep-2012 11:14 3.9M
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-..> 28-Jul-2012 10:51 5.6M
Samsung-Wave-noir-Op..> 17-Sep-2012 11:09 3.6M
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1..> 17-Sep-2012 16:57 3.9M
Samsung-ZS31FASAB1S-..> 01-Oct-2012 15:14 1.7M
Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09..> 19-Oct-2012 14:59 2.7M
Samsung-electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 19:11 2.4M
Samsung-electromenag..> 19-Apr-2013 18:55 3.6M
Samsung-electromenag..> 29-Nov-2012 08:21 2.7M
Samsung-lcd_business..> 10-Oct-2012 06:45 1.6M
Samsung-pascal_owner..> 10-Oct-2012 06:45 1.6M
SamsungGalaxyNoteGT-..> 30-Apr-2012 11:47 1.9M
SamsungGalaxySGT-I90..> 30-Apr-2012 11:26 1.9M
Serie-3-300E7A-NP300..> 23-Jul-2012 18:56 3.9M
T23A550T23A550.htm 23-Jul-2012 19:31 2.8M
UE40D6500ZFUE40D6500..> 30-Apr-2012 17:32 2.5M
UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 23-Jul-2012 18:46 3.8M
UE55ES8000-ZF-Slim-L..> 24-Jul-2012 16:35 6.6M
UE60ES6100WXZF-UE60E..> 24-Jul-2012 16:43 7.3M
UE65C8700-UE65C8700X..> 24-Jul-2012 16:40 7.3M
Video-Samsung-Galaxy..> 28-Jul-2012 10:29 7.3M
Wave575GT-S5750E.htm 01-May-2012 10:05 3.2M
WaveIIGT-S8530.htm 01-May-2012 10:11 3.6M
samsung-Wave-II-noir..> 17-Sep-2012 11:06 3.3M
Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir
Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U
Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B
SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung E2550
Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur
Samsung ES30 Noir
Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D423
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE40D550
Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir
Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB
SAMSUNG ME106V-SX
Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction
SAMSUNG ME82V-SX
SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S
Samsung PL170 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43D450
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS59D530
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SC4340 noir ébène
Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19D4010 LED
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32D5000 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D5710 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB750 Noir
Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
Electric Range
installation manual
ENGLISH
This manual is made with 100% recycled paper.
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 1 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:442_ Before you begin
before you begin
ANTI-TIP DEVICE
WARNING: To reduce the risk of tipping the appliance, the appliance must be
secured by properly installed anti-tip devices packed with the appliance.
a) A child or adult can tip the range and be killed.
b) Install the anti-tip device to the structure and/or the range at rear right (or rear left)
of the range bottom.
c) Engage the range to the anti-tip device by leveling leg at rear right (or rear left) of
the range bottom.
d) Re-engage the anti-tip device if the range is moved.
e) See installation instructions for details.
f) Failure to do so can result in death or serious burns to children or adults.
AbouT ThIs mANuAl
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS COMPLETELY AND CAREFULLY.
Important note to the installer
• Read all instructions contained in these installation instructions before installing range.
• Remove all packing materials from the oven compartments before connecting the electrical supply
to the range.
• Observe all governing codes and ordinances.
• Be sure to leave these instructions with the consumer.
Important note to the consumer
Keep these instructions for the local electrical inspector’s use.
• As when using any appliance generating heat, there are certain safety precautions you should follow.
• Be sure your range is installed and grounded properly by a qualified installer or service technician.
• Make sure the wall coverings around the range can withstand the heat generated by the range.
• To eliminate the need to reach over the surface elements, cabinet storage space above the elements
should be avoided.
• The range should not be placed on a base.
FoR YouR sAFETY
WARNINGWARNING If the information in this manual is not followed exactly, a fire or electrical
shock may result causing property damage, personal injury or death.
WARNINGWARNING Before beginning the installation, switch power off at the service panel and
lock the service disconnecting means to prevent power from being switched on accidentally. When the
service disconnecting means cannot be locked, securely fasten a prominent warning device, such as a
tag, to the service panel.
WARNINGWARNING This appliance must be properly grounded.
WARNING
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 2 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4401 PREPARING TO INSTALL
Preparing to install the range _3
preparing to install the range
REmoVE PACKAGING
Remove packaging materials. Failure to remove packaging materials could result in damage to the
appliance.
PREPARE Tools & PARTs
What tools you will need
Drill Adjustable Wrench Pliers 1/4˝ Nut Driver
Phillips Screwdriver Flat Screwdriver Pencil Level
What’s included with your range
Template Anti-Tip Bracket Screws (2 ea)
4-Wire Cord or 3-Wire Cord
(UL Approved 40 or 50 AMP)
What’s not included
Strain Relief
(For Conduit Installation Only)
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 3 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:454_ Preparing to install the range
ChECKING ThE INsTAllATIoN sITE
Clearances and dimensions
To install the range, refer to the following fi gure.
For installation in CANADA, a Free-standing range is not to be installed closer than 12mm
from any adjacent surface.
CAUTION CAUTION This range has been designed to comply with the maximum allowable wood
cabinet temperatures of 194°F. Make sure the wall covering, countertops and cabinets around the
range can withstand the heat (up to 194°F) generated by the range. If not, discoloration, delamination
or melting may occur.
A
B
36”
30”
24”
6”
25”
3”
24” 3”
A : Cabinet opening
30” For U.S.A,
30”~31” For CANADA.
B : Acceptable electrical
outlet area
Minimum dimensions
IMPORTANT To eliminate the risk of burns or fi re caused by reaching over heated surface
units, cabinet storage space located above the surface units should be avoided. If cabinet storage is to
be provided, the risk can be reduced by installing a range hood that projects horizontally a minimum of
5” beyond the bottom of the cabinets.
* 30”
30”
** 15” * 30” minimum clearance between the top
of the cooking surface and the bottom of
an unprotected wood or metal cabinet;
or 24” minimum when the bottom of the
wood or metal cabinet is protected by not
less than 1/4” fl ame retardant millboard
covered with not less than no.28 MSG
sheet steel, 0.015” stainless steel, 0.024”
aluminum or 0.020” copper.
** 15” minimum between the countertop and
the adjacent cabinet bottom.
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 4 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4602 CONNECTING THE POWER
Connecting the power _5
connecting the power
sTEP 1. mEETING ElECTRICAl CoNNECTIoN REQuIREmENTs
CAUTION CAUTIONFor personal safety, do not use an extension cord with this appliance.
Remove house fuse or open circuit breaker before beginning installation.
This appliance must be supplied with the proper voltage and frequency, and
connected to an individual properly grounded branch circuit, protected by a
circuit breaker or fuse having amperage as specifi ed on the rating plate. The
rating plate is located above the drawer on the oven frame. (Fig. 1 or Fig. 2)
We recommend you have the electrical wiring and hookup of your range
connected by a qualifi ed electrician. After installation, have the electrician show
you where your main range disconnect is located.
Check with your local utilities for electrical codes which apply in your area.
Failure to wire your oven according to governing codes could result in a
hazardous condition. If there are no local codes, your range must be wired and
fused to meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
70–Latest Edition. You can get a copy by writing:
National Fire Protection Association
Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02269
Effective January 1, 1996, the National Electrical Code requires that new construction (not
existing) utilize a 4-conductor connection to an electric range.
When installing an electric range in new construction, follow Steps 2 and 3 for 4-wire
connection.
You must use a 3-wire or 4-wire, single-phase A.C. 208Y/120 Volt or 240/120 Volt, 60 hertz electrical
system.
If the electrical service provided does not meet the above specifi cations, have a licensed electrician
install an approved outlet.
Use only a 3-conductor or a 4-conductor UL-listed range cord. These cords may be provided with ring
terminals on wire and a strain relief device.
A range cord rated at 40 amps with 125/250 minimum volt range is required. A 50 amp range cord
is not recommended but if used, it should be marked for use with nominal 13⁄8” diameter connection
openings. Care should be taken to center the cable and strain relief within the knockout hole to keep
the edge from damaging the cable.
• Because range terminals are not accessible after range is in position, fl exible service conduit or cord
must be used.
NOTE If conduit is being used, go to Step 4 on page 9.
ALL NEW BRANCH-CIRCUIT CONSTRUCTIONS, MOBILE HOMES,
RECREATIONAL VEHICLES AND INSTALLATIONS WHERE LOCAL CODES DO
NOT ALLOW GROUNDING THROUGH NEUTRAL, REQUIRE A 4-CONDUCTOR
UL-LISTED RANGE CORD.
(Fig. 1)
(Fig. 2)
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 5 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:476_ Connecting the power
sTEP 2. ACCEssING ThE PoWER CoRD CoNNECTIoN
Remove the rear access cover and loosen the screw with a screwdriver. The terminal block will then be
accessible.
Access cover
Terminal block
Specifi ed power-supply-cord kit rating
Range rating, watts Specifi ed rating of
power-supply-cord kit,
amperes
Diameter (inches) of range
connection opening
120/240 volts 3-wire Power cord Conduit
8,750 - 16,500 40 or 50A 13/8” 11/8”
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 6 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:4802 CONNECTING THE POWER
Connecting the power _7
sTEP 3. INsTAllING ThE PoWER CoRD
For power cord installations, hook the strain relief over the power cord hole (13/8”) located below the
rear of the drawer body. Insert the power cord through the strain relief and tighten the device.
Strain relief
Power cord
Conduit connection plate
• You must install the power cord with a strain relief.
• Attach the strain relief to the 13/8” opening in conduit connection plate.
Installing a 3-wire power cord
WARNINGWARNING The neutral or ground wire of the power cord must be connected to the
neutral terminal located in the center of the terminal block. The power leads must be connected to the
lower left and the lower right terminals of the terminal block.
1. Remove the 3 lower terminal screws from the
terminal block.
2. Insert the 3 terminal screws through each
power cord terminal ring and into the lower
terminals of the terminal block. Be certain that
the center wire (white/neutral) is connected to
the center lower position of the terminal block.
3. Tighten screws securely into the terminal
block. DO NOT remove the ground strap
connection.
4. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with
the installation.
Neutral Ground strap
terminal
Black
White
Red
Black White
Red
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 7 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:498_ Connecting the power
Installing a 4-wire power cord
WARNINGWARNING The neutral wire of the supply circuit must be connected to the neutral terminal
located in the lower center of the terminal block. The power leads must be connected to the lower left
and the lower right terminals of the terminal block. The 4th grounding lead must be connected to the
frame of the range with the ground plate and the ground screw.
1. Remove the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. Remove the ground screw and
ground plate and retain them.
2. Cut and discard the ground strap. Do not discard any screws.
3. Insert the one ground screw into the power cord ground wire terminal ring, through the ground
plate, and into the frame of the range.
4. Insert the 3 terminal screws (removed earlier) through each power cord terminal ring and into the
lower terminals of the terminal block. Be certain that the center wire (white/neutral) is connected
to the center lower position of the terminal block. Tighten screws securely into the terminal block.
5. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the installation.
Ground strap
Ground plate
Ground
screw
Neutral
terminal
Ground
wire (Green)
White
Black
Red
Black
White
Red
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 8 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5002 CONNECTING THE POWER
Connecting the power _9
sTEP 4. INsTAllING ThE CoNDuIT
Remove the conduit connection plate from the rear of the drawer body and rotate it as shown below.
The conduit hole (11/8”) must be used.
11/8” 13/8”
11 13/8” /8”
1. Prepare the conduit cord shown in Figure 1.
2. Install the conduit cord as shown in Figure 2.
Conduit connection plate
Strain relief
Ring
Body
Figure 2
1”
31/2”
3/8” 1”
31/2”
3 wire 4 wire
Knockout surface
Figure 1
3/8”
For conduit installations, insert the strain relief (not included) into the conduit hole (11/8”). Then thread
the conduit cord through the body of the strain relief and fasten the ring. Reinstall the bracket.
Installing a 3-wire conduit
• Aluminum building wire may be used but it must be rated for the correct amperage and voltage to
make the connection. Connect wires according to Step 4 depending on the number of wires.
• Wire used, location and enclosure of splices, etc., must conform to good wiring practices and local
codes.
1. Loosen the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal
block.
2. Insert the center bare wire (white/neutral) tip through
the bottom center terminal block opening. On certain
models, the wire will need to be inserted through the
ground strap opening and then into the bottom center
block opening.
3. Insert the two side bare wire tips into the lower left
and the lower right terminal block openings.
4. Tighten the screws until the wire is fi rmly secured (35
to 50 inch-lbs.). Do not over-tighten the screws since
it could damage the wires.
5. Go to step 5 on page 10 and proceed with the
installation.
Black White Red
Ground
strap
Neutral
terminal
Wire tips
Red
White
Black
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 9 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5110_ Connecting the power
Installing a 4-wire conduit
• Aluminum building wire may be used but it must be rated for the correct amperage and voltage to
make the connection. Connect wires according to this Step 4 depending on the number of wires.
• Wire used, location and enclosure of splices, etc., must conform to good wiring practices and local
codes.
1. Loosen the 3 lower terminal screws from the terminal block. Remove the ground screw and
ground plate and retain them.
2. Cut and discard the ground strap. Do not discard any screws.
3. Insert the ground bare wire tip between the range frame and the ground plate (removed earlier)
and secure it in place with the ground screw (removed earlier).
4. Insert the bare wire (white/neutral) tip through the bottom center of the terminal block opening.
5. Insert the two side bare wire tips into the lower left and the lower right terminal block openings.
6. Tighten the screws until the wire is fi rmly secured (35 to 50 inch-lbs.). Do not over-tighten the
screws since it could damage the wires.
7. Go to step 5 and proceed with the installation.
Ground strap
Ground plate
White Black Red
Neutral
terminal
Ground
wire (Green)
Wire tips White
Black
Red
sTEP 5. REPlACING ThE ACCEss CoVER
Replace the access cover on the range back. To replace the wire cover, insert double projections in the
pockets located below the opening and tighten the screw.
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 10 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:53Installing the range _11
03 INSTALLING THE RANGE
installing the range
INsTAllING ThE ANTI-TIP DEVICE
WARNINGWARNING To reduce the risk of tipping, the appliance must be secured by properly
installing the Anti-Tip device packed with the appliance.
• Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the bracket.
• Unless properly installed, the range could be tipped by stepping or sitting on the door. Injury may
result from spilled hot liquids or from the range itself.
Anti-Tip
bracket
Screw must enter wood or
concrete
*approximately
21/32”(16.5mm) *NOTE: To install Anti-Tip bracket,
release the leveling leg. A minimum
clearance of 21/32”(16.5mm) is required
between the range bottom and the
kitchen fl oor.
1. Locate the bracket using the template
The Anti-Tip bracket is packaged with a template. The instructions include information necessary to
complete the installation. Read and follow the instructions on the sheet (template) for range installation.
2. Level the range
Level the range by adjusting the leveling legs with a wrench.
Lower range
Raise range
Leveling leg
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 11 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5412_ Installing the range
3. Check your adjustments
Use a spirit level to check your adjustments. Place the level diagonally on the oven rack or surface
cooktop, and check each direction for level.
1. Check direction 1.
2. Check direction 2.
If the spirit level doesn’t show level on the oven rack
or surface cooktop, adjust the leveling legs with a
wrench.
FINAlIZING ThE INsTAllATIoN
• Move range close enough to the opening to plug into the receptacle.
• Slide range into position insuring that the rear left(or rear right) leg slides under the Anti-Tip bracket.
The range will sit 0” away from the back wall when properly installed.
• Carefully tip the range forward to insure that the Anti-Tip bracket engages the back brace and
prevents tip-over.
• Turn on the electrical power. Check the range for proper operation as described in the user manual.
Anti-Tip bracket
Leveling leg
DG68-00109F-01
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 12 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:54un monde de possibilités
Nous vous remercions d'avoir choisi ce produit
Samsung. Afin de bénéficier du meilleur du service
après-vente, enregistrez votre appareil sur le site suivant :
www.samsung.com/register
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
Manuel d'utilisation
Manuel d'installation
FRANÇAIS CANADIEN
Ce manuel est en papier recyclé à 100%.
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 1 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:552_ Avant de commencer
avant de commencer
DISPOSITIF ANTI-BASCULEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT : Pour réduire le risque de basculement de l’appareil, ce dernier
doit être sécurisé à l’aide des dispositifs anti-basculement correctement installés,
fournis dans l’emballage.
a) Adultes ou enfants peuvent faire basculer la cuisinière et être tués.
b) Installez le dispositif anti-basculement sur la structure et/ou sur la cuisinière à
l’arrière droit (ou arrière gauche) du dessous de l’appareil.
c) Engagez le pied de mise à niveau de la cuisinière situé à l’arrière droit (ou arrière
gauche) du dessous de l’appareil dans le dispositif anti-basculement.
d) Engagez à nouveau le dispositif anti-basculement si la cuisinière est déplacée.
e) Reportez-vous aux consignes d’installation pour plus d’informations.
f) Le non-respect de cette consigne peut entraîner des brûlures graves ou des
blessures mortelles chez l’enfant et l’adulte.
A PrOPOS DE CE MANUEL
LISEZ ENTIÈREMENT ET ATTENTIVEMENT CES INSTRUCTIONS.
Note importante destinée à l'installateur
• Lisez l'intégralité des consignes d'installation avant d'installer la cuisinière.
• Retirez tous les éléments d'emballage des compartiments du four avant de raccorder la cuisinière à
l'alimentation électrique.
• Respectez tous les codes et règlements en vigueur.
• Assurez-vous de laisser ces instructions à l'utilisateur.
Note importante destinée à l'utilisateur
Conservez précieusement ces instructions afin que la personne chargée du contrôle
électrique puisse s'y reporter.
• Comme pour tout appareil générant de la chaleur, certaines consignes de sécurité sont à respecter.
• Assurez-vous que votre appareil est correctement installé et mis à la terre par un installateur qualifié
ou un technicien spécialisé.
• Assurez-vous que les revêtements muraux situés à proximité de l'appareil peuvent résister à la
chaleur générée par celui-ci.
• Pour ne pas avoir à accéder à l'espace au-dessus des éléments de cuisson, évitez d'y aménager
des meubles de rangement.
• La cuisinière ne doit pas être placée sur un socle.
POUr VOTrE SÉCUrITÉ
AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Si vous ne respectez pas scrupuleusement les informations
contenues dans ce manuel, vous risquez de provoquer un incendie ou un choc électrique et, par
conséquent, des dégâts matériels, blessures ou accidents mortels.
AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Avant de démarrer l'installation, coupez l'alimentation au
panneau de commande et verrouillez les dispositifs de débranchement de la mise en service ; cette
précaution évitera toute mise sous tension accidentelle de l'appareil. Si vous ne parvenez pas à
verrouiller les moyens de débranchement de la mise en service, fixez fermement au panneau de
commande un dispositif d'alarme bien visible.
AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Cet appareil doit être correctement mis à la terre.
AVERTISSEMENT
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 2 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5501 PREPARATION DE L'INSTALLATION
Préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière _3
préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière
rETrAIT DE L'EMBALLAGE
Retirez le matériel d'emballage. Tout matériel d'emballage non retiré risque d'endommager l'appareil.
PrEPArATION DES OUTILS ET DES PIECES
Outils nécessaires
Perceuse Clé à molette Pince Tournevis à douille de
1/4˝
Tournevis cruciforme Tournevis plat Crayon Niveau
Accessoires fournis
Modèle Support anti-basculement Vis (2 ch)
Cordon 4 fils ou 3 fils
(homologué UL 40 ou 50 AMP)
Accessoires non fournis
Protection contre la traction
(pour le branchement des
gaines uniquement)
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 3 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:564_ Préparation avant l'installation de la cuisinière
VÉrIFICATION DU LIEU D'INSTALLATION
Dégagements et dimensions
Pour procéder à l'installation de la cuisinière, reportez-vous au schéma suivant.
Concernant les installations au CANADA, une cuisinière non encastrable ne peut pas être
installée à moins de 12 mm de toute surface adjacente.
ATTENTION ATTENTION Cette cuisinière a été conçue pour supporter une température maximale de
194 ºF, température maximale autorisée pour toute structure en bois. Assurez-vous que le revêtement
mural, les plans de travail et les meubles voisins peuvent résister à la chaleur (jusqu'à 194 ºF) générée par
la cuisinière. Dans le cas contraire, des éléments peuvent se décolorer, se décoller ou fondre.
A
B
36”
30”
24”
6”
25”
3”
24” 3”
A : Ouverture du meuble
30” pour les Etats-Unis,
30”~31” pour le CANADA.
B : emplacement autorisé
pour la prise électrique
Dimensions minimales
IMPORTANT Pour éliminer tout risque de brûlure ou d'incendie lors de l'accès à l'espace
situé au-dessus des éléments de cuisson chauds, évitez d'y aménager tout meuble de rangement.
Si, toutefois, un meuble de rangement doit être monté, réduisez ce risque en installant une hotte
d'aspiration assurant une protection horizontale d'au moins 5" au-delà du dessous du meuble.
* 30”
30”
** 15”
* dégagement minimal de 30” entre le
dessus de la table de cuisson et le
dessous d'un meuble en métal ou en bois
non protégé, ou de 24” minimum si le
dessous du meuble en métal ou en bois
est protégé par un carton pâte inifugeant
d'au moins 1/4” recouvert par au moins
une feuille d'acier n°28 MSG, d'acier
inoxydable de 0.015”, d'aluminium de
0.024” ou de cuivre de 0.020”.
** 15 ” minimum entre le plan de travail et le
dessous du meuble adjacent.
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 4 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5602 MISE SOUS TENSION
Mise sous tension _5
Mise sous tension
ETAPE 1 : rESPECT DES EXIGENCES EN MATIErE DE
rACCOrDEMENTS ELECTrIQUES
ATTENTION ATTENTION Pour votre sécurité, n'utilisez pas de rallonge pour brancher
l'appareil. Retirez le fusible de l'installation électrique ou ouvrez le disjoncteur avant de
démarrer l'installation.
Cet appareil doit être alimenté par la fréquence et la tension adaptées. Il doit
également être branché sur un circuit individuel correctement mis à la terre et
protégé par un disjoncteur ou un fusible dont l'ampérage est conforme à celui
spécifi é sur la plaque signalétique de l'appareil. La plaque signalétique est
située au-dessus du tiroir sur la structure du four. (Fig. 1 ou Fig. 2)
Nous vous recommandons de confi er le câblage et le branchement électriques
de votre cuisinière à un électricien qualifi é. Une fois l'installation eff ectuée,
demandez à l'électricien de vous montrer l'emplacement de débranchement
principal de votre cuisinière.
Vérifi ez auprès de votre service public les codes électriques s'appliquant à votre
zone. Le non-respect des codes obligatoires pour le branchement de votre
four peut s'avérer dangereux. S'il n'existe pas de codes locaux, votre
cuisinière doit être branchée conformément aux exigences du Code
national électrique, ANSI/NFPA N° 70 (dernière édition). Vous pouvez
en obtenir une copie en adressant un courrier à :
National Fire Protection Association
Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02269
Entré en vigueur le 1er janvier 1996, le Code électrique national exige que toute construction neuve
(non existante) doit être équipée d'un branchement à 4 conducteurs pour les cuisinières électriques.
Lorsque vous installez une cuisinière électrique dans une construction neuve, suivez les
étapes 2 et 3 relatives aux connexions à 4 fi ls.
Vous devez utiliser un système électrique à 3 ou 4 fi ls, monophasé CA de 208Y/120 V ou de 240/120 V (60 Hz).
Si votre installation électrique n'est pas conforme aux spécifi cations ci-dessus, contactez un électricien
agréé afi n d'installer une prise homologuée.
Utilisez uniquement un cordon d'alimentation à 3 ou 4 fi ls fi gurant dans la liste UL. Ces cordons
nécessitent des bornes rondes sur le fi l et un dispositif de protection contre la traction.
Un cordon d'alimentation nominale de 40 A et de 125/250 V minimum est indispensable. Il n'est pas
recommandé d'utiliser un cordon d'alimentation de 50 A, mais si toutefois vous en utilisé un, celui-ci
doit être repéré pour être utilisé avec des ouvertures de connexion de diamètre nominal 13⁄8 ”. Veillez
à bien centrer le câble et le dispositif de protection contre la traction dans le trou d'éjection afi n
d'empêcher que le bord n'endommage le câble.
• Etant donné que les prises de la cuisinière sont inaccessibles une fois la cuisinière installée, il est
nécessaire d'utiliser une gaine ou un cordon fl exible.
REMARQUE Si vous utilisez une gaine, suivez l'étape 4, page 9.
TOUTES LES CONSTRUCTIONS DONT LES CIRCUITS DERIVES SONT NEUFS,
LES MAISONS MOBILES, LES VEHICULES ET LES INSTALLATIONS DE LOISIRS
DONT LES CODES LOCAUX NE PERMETTENT PAS UNE MISE A LA TERRE
PAR UNE BORNE NEUTRE, NECESSITENT L'UTILISATION D'UN CORDON
D'ALIMENTATION A 4 FILS FIGURANT DANS LA LISTE UL.
(Fig. 1).
(Fig. 2).
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 5 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:576_ Mise sous tension
ETAPE 2 : ACCES AU BrANCHEMENT DU COrDON
D'ALIMENTATION
Retirez le panneau d'accès situé à l'arrière et desserrez la vis à l'aide d'un tournevis. Vous pourrez alors
accéder au bornier.
Capot d'accès
Bornier
Classifi cation de l'équipement nécessaire à la mise sous tension
Classifi cation générale, watts Classifi cation de l'équipement
nécessaire à la mise sous
tension, ampères
Diamètre (pouces) de l'ouverture de
connexion de la cuisinière
120 / 240 volts, 3 fi ls Cordon
d'alimentation Gaine
8750 - 16500 40 ou 50 A 13/8” 11/8”
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 6 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:5802 MISE SOUS TENSION
Mise sous tension _7
ETAPE 3 : INSTALLATION DU COrDON D'ALIMENTATION
Pour les installations de cordons d'alimentation, branchez le dispositif de protection de câble
sur l'orifi ce du cordon d'alimentation (13/8”) situé sous la partie arrière du tiroir. Insérez le cordon
d'alimentation dans le dispositif et serrez-le.
Protection contre la traction
Cordon
d'alimentation
Plaque de raccordement
des gaines
• Le cordon d'alimentation doit être installé au moyen d'une protection contre la traction.
• Fixez la protection à l'ouverture 13/8” située dans la plaque de raccordement des gaines.
Installation d'un cordon d'alimentation à 3 fi ls
AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT La prise de terre ou la prise neutre du cordon d'alimentation doit
être connectée à la borne neutre située au centre du bornier. Les câbles d'alimentation doivent être
connectés aux bornes inférieures gauches et inférieures droites du bornier.
1. Retirez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du
bornier.
2. Insérez les 3 vis de la borne dans les bornes
inférieures du bornier en passant par
chacun des anneaux de la borne du cordon
d'alimentation. Assurez-vous que le fi l central
(blanc/neutre) est relié à l'emplacement
central inférieur du bornier.
3. Serrez fermement les vis dans le bornier. NE
retirez PAS la connexion du conducteur
de terre.
4. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 de la page 10 et
procédez à l'installation.
Conducteur
de terre
Borne
neutre
Noir
Blanc
rouge
Noir Blanc
rouge
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 7 2012-02-21 �� 6:48:598_ Mise sous tension
Installation d'un cordon d'alimentation à 4 fi ls
AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT La prise neutre du circuit d'alimentation doit être connectée à la
borne neutre située au centre inférieur du bornier. Les câbles d'alimentation doivent être connectés aux
bornes inférieures gauches et inférieures droites du bornier. Le 4ème câble de mise à la terre doit être
connecté au bâti de la cuisinière au moyen de la plaque et de la vis de masse.
1. Retirez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. Retirez la vis et la plaque de terre et conservezles.
2. Coupez et éliminez le conducteur de terre. Ne jetez aucune vis.
3. Insérez la première vis de terre dans l'anneau de la borne du fi l de mise à la terre du cordon
d'alimentation, en passant par la plaque de masse puis dans le bâti de la cuisinière.
4. Insérez les 3 vis de la borne (retirées précédemment) dans les bornes inférieures du bornier en
passant par chacun des anneaux de la borne du cordon d'alimentation. Assurez-vous que le fi l
central (blanc/neutre) est relié à l'emplacement central inférieur du bornier. Serrez fermement les
vis dans le bornier.
5. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 de la page 10 et procédez à l'installation.
Conducteur de terre
Plaque de terre
Vis de
terre
Borne
neutre
Fil de
terre (Vert)
Blanc
Noir
rouge
Noir
Blanc
rouge
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 8 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:0002 MISE SOUS TENSION
Mise sous tension _9
ETAPE 4 : INSTALLATION DE LA GAINE
Retirez la plaque de connexion de la gaine de la partie arrière du tiroir, puis faites-la pivoter comme
indiqué ci-dessous. Vous devez utiliser l'orifi ce de la gaine (11/8 ”).
11/8” 13/8”
11 13/8” /8”
1. Préparez le cordon de la gaine comme le montre la fi gure 1.
2. Installez le cordon de la gaine comme le montre la fi gure 2.
Plaque de raccordement des gaines
Protection contre la traction
Anneau
Corps
Figure 2
1”
31/2”
3/8” 1”
31/2”
3 fi ls 4 fi ls
Surface d'éjection
Figure 1
3/8”
Pour les installations de gaine, insérez le câble de tension (non fourni) dans l'orifi ce de la gaine (11/8 ”).
Faites ensuite passer le cordon de la gaine dans le dispositif de protection, puis serrez l'anneau.
Réinstallez le support.
Installation d'un conduit à 3 fi ls
• Un fi l de bâtiment en aluminium peut être utilisé mais il devra être doté de l'intensité et de la tension
nominales correctes permettant d'établir la connexion. Connectez les fi ls en suivant l'étape 4 selon
le nombre de fi ls utilisé.
• Les fi ls utilisés, les emplacements, les jonctions de fi ls, etc. doivent être conformes aux bonnes
pratiques de câblage et aux codes locaux.
1. Desserrez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier.
2. Insérez l'extrémité du fi l nu (blanc/neutre) central
dans l'emplacement inférieur central de l'ouverture
du bornier. Sur certains modèles, le fi l devra être
inséré dans l'ouverture du conducteur de terre puis
dans l'emplacement inférieur central de l'ouverture du
bornier.
3. Insérez les deux extrémités de fi l nu latérales dans les
ouvertures inférieure gauche et inférieure droite du
bornier.
4. Serrez les vis jusqu'à fi xation complète du fi l (35 à
50 pouce-livre). Ne serrez pas excessivement les vis
sous peine d'endommager les fi ls.
5. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 de la page 10 et procédez
à l'installation.
Noir Blanc rouge
Conducteur
de terre Borne
neutre
Extrémités des câbles
rouge
Blanc
Noir
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 9 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:0110_ Mise sous tension
Installation d'un conduit à 4 fi ls
• Un fi l de bâtiment en aluminium peut être utilisé mais il devra être doté de l'intensité et de la tension
nominales correctes permettant d'établir la connexion. Connectez les fi ls en suivant l'étape 4 selon
le nombre de fi ls utilisé.
• Les fi ls utilisés, les emplacements, les jonctions de fi ls, etc. doivent être conformes aux bonnes
pratiques de câblage et aux codes locaux.
1. Desserrez les 3 vis de la borne inférieure du bornier. Retirez la vis et la plaque de terre et
conservez-les.
2. Coupez et éliminez le conducteur de terre. Ne jetez aucune vis.
3. Insérez l'extrémité du fi l de terre nu entre le bâti de la cuisinière et la plaque de terre (retirée
précédemment) et fi xez-la à l'aide de la vis de terre (retirée précédemment).
4. Insérez l'extrémité du fi l nu (blanc/neutre) dans l'emplacement inférieur central de l'ouverture du
bornier.
5. Insérez les deux extrémités de fi l nu latérales dans les ouvertures inférieure gauche et inférieure
droite du bornier.
6. Serrez les vis jusqu'à fi xation complète du fi l (35 à 50 pouce-livre). Ne serrez pas excessivement
les vis sous peine d'endommager les fi ls.
7. Reportez-vous à l'étape 5 et procédez à l'installation.
Conducteur de terre
Plaque de terre
Blanc Noir rouge
Borne
neutre
Fil de
terre (Vert)
Extrémités
des câbles
Blanc
Noir
rouge
ETAPE 5 : rEMISE EN PLACE DU PANNEAU D'ACCES
Replacez le panneau d'accès à l'arrière de la cuisinière. Pour replacer la protection du câblage, insérez
les deux saillies dans les orifi ces situés sous les ouvertures et serrez la vis.
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 10 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:03Installation de la cuisinière _11
03 INSTALLATION DE LA CUISINIERE
Installation de la cuisinière
INSTALLATION DU DISPOSITIF ANTI-BASCULEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Afi n de réduire les risques de basculement, fi xez la cuisinière en
installant correctement le dispositif anti-basculement fourni avec cette dernière.
• Reportez-vous aux consignes d'installation fournies avec le support.
• Si elle n'est pas correctement installée, la cuisinière risque de basculer si vous trébuchez ou vous
asseyez sur la porte. Les liquides chauds renversés ou la cuisinière elle-même sont susceptibles de
provoquer des blessures.
Support antibasculement
La vis doit pénétrer dans le
bois ou le béton
*approximativement
21/32” (16.5 mm)
*REMARQUE desserrez le pied de
mise à niveau pour
installer le support
anti-basculement. Un
dégagement minimum
de 21/32" (16.5 mm)
est nécessaire entre le
dessous de la cuisinière
et le sol de la cuisine.
1. Déterminez l'emplacement du support à l'aide du modèle.
Le support anti-basculement est fourni avec un modèle. Les consignes comportent les informations
nécessaires à l'installation. Lisez et suivez les consignes fi gurant sur la fi che (modèle) pour l'installation
de la cuisinière.
2. Mise à niveau de la cuisinière
Mettez la cuisinière à niveau en ajustant les pieds de réglage à l'aide d'une clé.
Abaissement de la
cuisinière
Elévation de la
cuisinière
Pied de mise à niveau
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 11 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:0312_ Installation de la cuisinière
3. Vérifi cation des réglages
Utilisez un niveau à bulle pour vérifi er vos réglages. Placez le niveau en diagonale sur la grille du four ou
la surface de la cuisinère et vérifi ez le niveau dans chaque direction.
1. Vérifi ez la direction 1.
2. Vérifi ez la direction 2.
Si le niveau à bulle n'est pas à niveau sur la grille du
four ou la surface de cuisson, ajustez les pieds de
mise à niveau à l'aide d'une clé.
MISE AU POINT DE L'INSTALLATION
• Placez la cuisinière suffi samment près de l'ouverture pour permettre le branchement de la prise.
• Positionnez la cuisinière en vous assurant que le pied arrière gauche (ou arrière droit) se place sous
le support anti-basculement. La distance entre la cuisinière et le mur doit être de 0" lorsque cette
dernière est correctement installée.
• Inclinez avec précaution la cuisinière vers l'avant afi n de vous assurer que le support antibasculement s'emboîte dans la fi xation arrière et que la cuisinière ne bascule pas.
• Mettez l'appareil sous tension. Vérifi ez que la cuisinière fonctionne correctement comme indiqué
dans le manuel d'utilisation.
Support antibasculement
Pied de mise à
niveau
DG68-00109F-01
Installation_XAC_DG68-00109F-01_EN+CFR.indb 12 2012-02-21 �� 6:49:04
E-MANUAL
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model______________ Serial No.______________Contents
e-Manual Guide
Viewing the e-Manual
1 Scrolling a Page
1 Using the Top Icons
1 Returning to the Home Page
2 Searching the Index
2 Searching Pages
2 Closing the e-Manual
2 Jumping to a Menu Item
2 Updating the e-Manual
Getting Started
Antenna Connection
Video Device Connections
4 HDMI Connection
5 Component Connection
5 AV Connection
Audio Device Connections
6 Digital Audio (Optical) Connection
7 Audio Output Connection
7 ARC (Audio Return Channel)
Computer Connection
8 HDMI Connection
9 HDMI-to-DVI Connection
Switching Between Video Sources
Programming
11 Auto Program
11 Remove Scrambled Channels
Channel Management
12 Remove Channels
13 Restore Removed Channels
13 Program Rating Lock
13 Blocking Programs Using the TV Rating
14 Blocking based on Movie Rating (MPAA)
14 Blocking Based on Canadian English Rating
15 Blocking Based on Canadian French Rating
15 Blocking Based on Downloadable U.S. Rating
15 Watching Blocked / Restricted Programs
15 Rename Analog Channels
Favorite Channels
17 Add Favorite Channels
17 Remove Favorite Channels
18 Rearrange the Favorite Channels List
18 Rename a Favorite Channel List
18 Copy a Favorite Channels List
Network Configuration
19 Wired Network
20 Wireless Network
20 PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above
20 LED 4300 Series models
21 Wireless Network Precautions
21 Network Security Protocols
Wired Network Setup
22 Automatic Wired Network Setup
22 Manual Wired Network Setup
24 Failed Wired Connection
Wireless Network Setup
25 Automatic Wireless Network Setup
26 Manual Wireless Network Setup
28 Using the WPS Button
28 Failed Wireless Connection
29 Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses
Checking the Network Status
Mobile Device Connection
31 Wi-Fi Direct
31 AllShare Settings
31 Rename the TV
IIControlling the TV
Smart Touch Control
32 Inserting the Batteries (AAA X 2)
32 Connecting to the TV
33 Reconnecting the Smart Touch Control
33 Battery Low Alarm
34 Buttons and Descriptions
36 Special Functions
Using the touch pad
37 Dragging
37 Pressing
38 Flicking
38 Pressing and Holding
38 Pressing and Dragging
39 Scrolling Up/Down
39 Scrolling Left/Right
40 Changing Channels by Entering Numbers
40 Numerical Input Guide
40 Adjusting the Touch pad
41 Show Status and Notification Banner
41 Recommended
41 History
41 Deleting History Data
41 Searching
Virtual Remote Control
42 Changing the Virtual Remote Control Panel
42 Change a position of the Virtual Remote Panel
42 Using the Number Panel
42 Using the Playback Control Panel
42 Using the Quick Access Panel
42 Adjusting the virtual remote control
Universal Remote Setup
43 Connecting the IR Extender
44 Add the External Device
44 Using the Universal Remote Control
44 Registered External Device Management
Entering Text using the Onscreen Keypad
45 Entering Text using the QWERTY Keypad
45 Additional Features
SMART Interaction
46 Precautions
46 Face Recognition
46 TV Camera Use
47 Motion Control
47 Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition
48 Operating Environment
49 Enabling Voice Recognition
49 Voice Recognition Tutorial
49 Basic Voice Recognition Use
49 Voice Recognition Settings
50 Interactive Voice Recognition Commands
50 Deactivating Voice Recognition
Motion Control
51 Operating Environment
52 Motion Control Environment Test
52 Motion Control Tutorial
52 Motion Control Activation
53 Using the Basic Motion Controls
53 Motion Control Options
54 Motion Control Screen
54 The Screen Composition while Viewing TV
55 The Smart Hub Screen Composition
Face Recognition
57 Operating Environment
58 Face Registration
58 Face Registration from the Smart Hub account information
screen
59 Face Registration for the Smart Hub account using face
recognition
59 Face Recognition Login
Using Peripheral Devices
60 Keyboard Connection
60 Keyboard Use
61 Mouse Connection
61 Mouse Use
II IIITV Viewing
TV Viewing
62 Program Info
62 Change the Broadcast Signal
63 Guide
63 Change Channels
63 Change Category
63 Quick Navigation
64 Schedule Viewing
64 Checking the Program Info
65 Channel List
65 Change Channels
65 Genre
66 Change the Broadcast Signal
66 Change the Channel List
Schedule Viewing
67 Digital Channel Schedule Viewing
68 Guide
68 Program Info
68 Analog Channel Schedule Viewing
68 Cancel a Schedule Viewing
68 Edit Schedule List
3D TV
69 Precautions
70 Restrictions
70 Tips
71 Activating 3D Mode
71 Setting 3D Effects
PIP
Analog Screen Calibration
73 Fine Tune
Broadcast Audio Options
74 Digital Broadcast Audio Options
74 Analog Broadcast Audio Options
Sports Mode
Subtitles
75 Show Subtitles
75 Subtitle Options
75 Subtitle Display Options
TV Settings
Basic Picture Settings
76 Changing the Picture Mode
77 Picture Quality
77 Applying the Current Picture Quality Setting to Another
Input
78 Picture Size
79 Screen Position
79 Picture Off
79 Reset Image Settings
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Basic Sound Settings
84 Changing the Sound Mode
85 Adjusting the Sound Settings
85 Auto Volume
85 TV Installation Type
85 Resetting the Sound
3D Audio
Speaker Settings
87 Speaker Select
88 Digital Audio Output
88 Samsung Audio Device Connection
IVClock and Timer
89 Setting the Time
90 Auto
90 Manual
90 Sleep Timer
91 On Timer
91 Off Timer
Screen Protection and Maintenance
92 Eco Solution
93 Screen Burn Protection
93 Pixel Shift
93 Auto Protection Time
94 Scrolling
94 Side Gray
94 Auto Protection Time
Password
95 Change Password
Additional Features
96 Changing the Menu Language
96 Game Mode
96 Precautions and Restrictions
97 BD Wise
97 Menu Transparency
97 Sound Feedback
97 Panel Locking
97 Booting Logo
97 DivX® Video On Demand
SMART TV Features
Smart Hub
98 Agreements Required to Use Smart Hub
99 Samsung Account
99 Creating a Samsung Account
99 Logging In
100 Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy
100 Linking a Samsung Account to Other Accounts
100 Managing Accounts
101 Resetting Smart Hub
Searching
101 Keyword Search
101 Setting Search Scope
Status and Notification
102 Show Status and Notification Banner
102 Voice Recognition & Motion Control Configuration
102 Samsung Account Configuration
102 Network Configuration
102 Check Notifications
Social
103 Social Settings
103 Checking the Application
103 Connecting a Service to a Samsung Account
104 Watching Videos
104 Friend Profile
104 Video Calling a Friend
104 Filters
Apps
105 Precautions
106 Installing Standard Applications
106 Launching an Application
106 Samsung Apps
106 Searching for Apps
106 Installing Applications
107 Apps Management
107 Edit My Apps
108 Deleting Applications
108 Managing Application Folders
108 Application Lock/Unlock
108 Application Update
IV V109 Fitness
109 Creating a Profile
109 Kids
110 WebBrowser
110 Social Networks
110 Linking Service Accounts
111 Apps Settings
111 Auto Ticker
111 Push Notification Settings
111 Channel-Bound Apps
111 Properties
On TV
113 On TV Settings
113 On TV Setup
113 Recommendation Notice
113 Auto Start
113 Recommendation Method
113 Adult Contents Block
114 Watching an On-Air Recommended Program
114 Scheduled Recommended Program Info
114 Activating the Guide
114 Program Recommendations by Time
Movies & TV Shows
116 Buying Movies
116 Playing Movies
116 Parental Control
Photos, Videos & Music
117 Restrictions
118 Supported File Formats
118 USB Device Connection
118 USB Device Removal
119 Playing all the Content on a Storage Device
119 Clearing the Recent Playlist
119 Using Networked External Storage Devices
120 Allowing DLNA Device Connections
120 AllShare
120 Exporting Contents
Videos
121 Changing the view mode
121 Playlist Creation
122 Opening a Different File
122 Video Scanning
123 Show Subtitles
123 Additional Video Playback Settings
Music
124 Changing the view mode
124 Playlist Creation
125 Music Scanning
125 Opening a Different File
125 Additional Music Playback Settings
Photos
126 Changing the view mode
126 Slide Show
126 Slide Show Settings
126 Playlist Creation
127 Opening a Different File
127 Background Music
127 Mini Player
127 Additional Photo Playback Settings
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
128 Precautions
129 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Setup
129 Using the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
129 Switching between Anynet+ Devices
130 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Device Menu
130 ARC
Sharing Mobile Device Screens on the TV
131 Screen Mirroring
131 Mobile Device Connection
VIOther Information
Support
132 Remote Management
133 What is Remote Support?
133 How Does it Work?
134 e-Manual
134 Self Diagnosis
134 Picture Test
135 Sound Test
135 Motion Control Environment Check
135 Signal Information
135 Reset
136 Updating the Software
136 Update now
136 Auto Update
137 Usage Mode
137 Support Info
Kensington Security Lock
Display Resolution
138 PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above
138 IBM
138 MAC
139 VESA DMT
140 LED 4300 series models
140 IBM
140 MAC
141 VESA DMT
Picture Size and Input Signal
Supported 3D Resolutions
143 HDMI
143 3D Format: L/R, T/B
143 3D Format: Frame Packing
144 Component
144 Digital Channel
144 Videos/Photos
144 HDMI PC Mode
Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec
145 Subtitle
145 External
145 Internal
146 Supported image resolutions
146 Supported music file formats
147 Video Codec
147 Other Restrictions
148 Video Decoders
148 Audio Decoders
3D Precautions
149 Viewing guidelines
150 CAUTION!
151 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Licenses
Troubleshooting
Screen
Sound
3D TV
Antenna (Air/Cable) Connection
PC Connection
Networking
Miscellaneous
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Apps
Photos, Videos & Music
Reset the Personal Info and TV settings
Web Browser
VI VII1
e-Manual Guide
Viewing the e-Manual
The embedded e-Manual contains information about your TV's key features.
Navigate to the screen menu and select e-Manual (Support > e-Manual (Troubleshooting)).
11
Select a category from the left side of the screen.
21
Select an item. The e-Manual will open on the page containing the selected information.
" Words in blue refer to screen menu options and words in light blue refer to remote control buttons.
" Arrows are used to indicate the menu path. (Example: Screen Menu > Support > e-Manual
(Troubleshooting))
Scrolling a Page
To scroll a page, use of one of the following methods:
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
● Press the or button on the scroll bar at the right edge of the screen.
● Drag or flick up or down from the line on either the left or right edge of the touch pad. This
method is not available with LED 4300 - 6300 series.
● Place the focus on the or button at the right edge of the screen, drag or flick up or down
on the touch pad.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
● Press the or button on the scroll bar at the right edge of the screen.
● Place the focus on the or button at the right edge of the screen, press the up or down
arrow button on the remote.
Using the Top Icons
Use the Back, Forward, and Opened pages icons on the top left of the screen to navigate through
pages. These icons are available when two or more pages are passed.
Returning to the Home Page
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
To return to the home page, select the a button on the virtual remote panel or select on the top
right of the screen.
" To select a letter button (a, b, {, }), press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control to display
a panel of the virtual remote. Flick the Touch Pad until the Playback Control Panel appears, select the a
button, and then press the Touch Pad.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
To return to the home page, press the a button or select on the top right of the screen.2
Searching the Index
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Select the b button on the virtual remote panel or select on the top right of the screen to display
the index. Select a term to display the page containing the term.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the b button or select on the top right of the screen to display the index. Select a term to
display the page containing the term.
Searching Pages
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Select the { button on the virtual remote panel or select on the top right of the screen, and enter
search criteria. Select a page from the list of search results to display it.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the { button or select on the top right of the screen, and enter search criteria. Select a page
from the list of search results to display it.
Closing the e-Manual
PDP 5500, LED 6400, 6800 and 7050/7100 series
To close the e-Manual, press and hold the RETURN button or select at the upper-right corner of the
screen.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
To close the e-Manual, press the EXIT button or select at the upper-right corner of the screen.
Jumping to a Menu Item
To directly jump to the menu item that is described in the current section, select Try Now. It is possible
to jump from a menu item directly to the related section in the e-Manual.
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
On the screen menu, press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control and then select e-Manual on
the virtual remote panel that appears on the screen.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
On the screen menu, press the E-MANUAL button that appears on the screen.
" This feature may not be available, depending on the menu.
Updating the e-Manual
Press the button and select Apps, and then select More Apps. The e-Manual can be updated in the
same way with an application update.
On the More Apps screen, select Update Apps, and then select e-Manual from the list. The e-Manual
starts updating to the latest version. However, Update Apps appears on the screen only when the
update is required.2 3
Getting Started
Antenna Connection
Refer to the diagram and connect the antenna cable to the antenna input connector. Make sure that you
do not bend the cable. The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending
on the model.
Connect the correct antenna cable for your viewing environment (over-the-air or cable broadcasting).
However, an antenna connection is not necessary if you are using a cable box or satellite receiver.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Video Device Connections
This TV has a wide range of connectors for video input from video devices such as Blu-ray players,
DVD players, camcorders and gaming consoles. Below is a list of featured connectors shown in
descending order of picture quality.
● HDMI
● Component
● AV
Connect the video device to the TV via an HDMI connector for the best picture quality. If the device
does not have an HDMI connector, try a component connector to get the next best possible picture
quality.
The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model.
When connecting an external device, refer to the device's operating manual. The number of external
device connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the manufacturer.4
HDMI Connection
Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI cable to the video device's HDMI output connector and the
TV's HDMI input connector. One of the following HDMI cable types is recommended:
● High-Speed HDMI Cable
● High-Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet
Use an HDMI cable with a thickness of 14 mm or less. Using a non-certified HDMI cable may result in
a blank screen or a connection error.
" Some HDMI cables and devices may not be compatible with the TV due to different HDMI specifications.
" This TV does not support the HDMI Ethernet Channel.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.4 5
Component Connection
Connect the TV’s component video and audio input connectors to the external device’s component
video and audio output connectors using a component cable, so that the connectors of the same color
connect to each other, as shown in the figure.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
AV Connection
Refer to the diagram and connect the AV cable to the TV's external input connectors and the device's
AV output connectors. Certain models combine the external video input connector and the component
Y connector into a single connector. If this is the case, connect the video cable to the Y connector.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.6
Audio Device Connections
This TV has a wide range of connectors for audio input from devices such as amplifiers, Blu-ray
players and DVD players. For better audio quality, it is a good idea to use an AV receiver.
● Digital Audio (Optical)
● Audio
● ARC (Audio Return Channel)
The number of connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the model.
When connecting an external device, refer to the device's operating manual. The number of external
device connectors and their names and locations may vary depending on the manufacturer.
Digital Audio (Optical) Connection
Refer to the diagram and connect the optical cable to the TV's digital audio output connector and the
device's digital audio input connector.
Connecting the device using an optical cable does not automatically turn off the TV speakers. To turn
off the TV speakers, open the Speaker Select (Sound > Speaker Settings > Speaker Select) menu,
then set External Speaker.
Adjust the audio device's volume using its remote control.
An unusual noise coming from the audio device while it is being used may indicate a problem with the
audio device itself. If this is the case, ask for assistance from the audio device manufacturer.
5.1-channel audio for digital channels is only available with broadcasts that support 5.1-channel audio.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.6 7
Audio Output Connection
Refer to the diagram and connect the audio cable to the TV's audio output connector and the device's
audio input connector.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
ARC (Audio Return Channel)
The ARC function is not available for LED 4300 and 5500 series model.
This TV supports 3D and ARC (Audio Return Channel) functions via an HDMI cable. ARC enables
digital sound to be output using just an HDMI cable. However, ARC is only available through the HDMI
(ARC) port and only when the TV is connected to an ARC-enabled AV receiver. Connect the HDMI
cable to the TV's HDMI (ARC) connector and the device's HDMI output connector.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.8
Computer Connection
This TV supports the HDMI/DVI port for connect the computer. Not all computers are HDMI-enabled.
In this case, use an HDMI-to-DVI cable to connect the computer to the TV. Refer to the "Display
Resolution" for information on the resolution settings supported to the TV.
HDMI Connection
Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI cable to the TV's HDMI input port and the computer's
HDMI output port.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.8 9
HDMI-to-DVI Connection
Refer to the diagram and connect the HDMI-to-DVI cable to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port and the
computer's DVI output port. The HDMI-to-DVI connection is available through the HDMI (DVI) port
only.
DVI cannot carry audio. To listen to the computer sound, connect the external speaker to the
computer’s audio output connector.
The displayed image may differ depending on the model.10
Switching Between Video Sources
Press the SOURCE button to switch between devices connected to the TV.
For example, to switch to a game console connected to the second HDMI connector, press the
SOURCE button. From the Source list, select HDMI2. The connector names may vary depending on the
product.
Select Tools at the upper-right corner of the Source screen to access the following functions.
● Edit Name: You can rename devices connected to the TV to more easily identify external sources.
With a computer connected to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port via an HDMI cable, for example, you can
change Edit Name to PC.
With a computer connected to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, for example,
you can change Edit Name to DVI PC.
With an AV device connected to the TV's HDMI (DVI) port via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, for
example, you can change Edit Name to DVI Devices.
● Information: View detailed information about the connected devices.
● Refresh: Select this if a connected device does not appear in the list. If the list does not show the
device after selecting Refresh, check the status of the TV-to-device connection.
● Remove USB: Remove the USB device from the list to safely. This function is only available when
the USB device selected.
To add a new external device to control it with the Touch Remote Control, press the SOURCE button
and select Universal Remote Setup on the top right of the screen. Using the universal remote control,
users can control external devices connected to the TV, such as a set-top box, Blu-ray player, and AV
receiver. For details, see "Universal Remote Setup".
" The Universal Remote Setup function is not available for LED 4300 series.10 11
Programming
Scan and index available channels.
Broadcasting
Auto Program
Antenna Cable
Channel List
Guide
Schedule Manager
Edit Channel
Edit Favorites
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
You can also remove channels from the index, restore removed channels and designate favorite
channels for a more convenient TV viewing experience. Programming is not necessary if you are
connected to a cable or satellite receiver.
Auto Program
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Auto Program Try Now
Automatically scans and indexes all channels received through the TV's antenna input connector.
11
To start, navigate to Broadcasting and select Auto Program.
21
Select Start when prompted with a message. This initiates the Auto Program function. The
process can take up to 30 minutes to complete. If starting the Auto Program function when there
is an existing index of channels overwrites the previous index.
Remove Scrambled Channels
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Clear Scrambled Channel Try Now
Remove scrambled channels (ex: pay-per-view channels) from channel list. To remove scrambled
channels, run this function. This function is enabled only for cable TVs when at least one digital
channel is available.12
Channel Management
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Edit Channel Try Now Try Now
Broadcasting
Auto Program
Antenna Cable
Channel List
Guide
Schedule Manager
Edit Channel
Edit Favorites
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Remove channels from the index, restore removed channels, and rename analog channels. The Edit
Channel screen icons indicate the following:
● : An analog channel
● : A favorite channel
● : A locked channel
In the Edit Channel screen, select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to
access the following options:
● Antenna: Choose between Cable and Air.
● Category: The TV's channel index is divided into different categories such as All, Added Ch.,
Recently Viewed and Mostly Viewed. Choose a category.
● Edit Favorites: You can designate frequently watched channels as favorites. For details, see
"Favorite Channels".
● Information: View detailed information about the current program.
Remove Channels
Remove registered channels from the index. Removing channels appearing in the Recently Viewed or
Mostly Viewed list clears the channels from the list only and does not remove them from the index.
11
From the screen, select the channels you wish to remove. Unselect channels by choosing them
again.
21
Select the { button on the virtual remote panel or press the { button on regular remote control.
The selected channel(s) will be deleted.12 13
Restore Removed Channels
Restore removed channels. Removed channels are displayed in gray on the All list. In addition, the Add
option is only available for removed channels.
11
From the screen, press TOOLS button. Select Category and then select All.
21
From the All list, select the channels you wish to restore. Unselect channels by choosing them
again.
31
Select the { button on the virtual remote panel or press the { button on standard remote
control. The selected channel(s) will be added.
Program Rating Lock
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Program Rating Lock
The Program Rating Lock blocks programs with ratings higher than those desired. This is useful for
controlling what children watch on TV. This will not function for programs originating from external
sources, such as DVD players or USB files.
This PIN is required to watch a blocked program.
The Program Rating Lock is available only in TV mode.
Blocking Programs Using the TV Rating
To block content, select a rating entry to lock. All programs at that level and higher are blocked and
require the PIN to watch. To unblock a category, select the lock icon. To unblock all the categories in a
row, select the lock under ALL.
Categories on the left:
● TV-Y: Young children
● TV-Y7: Children 7 and over
● TV-G: General audience
● TV-PG: Parental guidance
● TV-14: Viewers 14 and over
● TV-MA: Mature audience
Categories on the top:
● ALL: Lock all TV ratings.
● FV: Fantasy violence
● V: Violence
● S: Sexual situations
● L: Adult Language
● D: Sexually Suggestive Dialog14
Blocking based on Movie Rating (MPAA)
Block movies based on their MPAA rating. This applies to all material with supplied ratings in the USA.
From the MPAA:
“The Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) has implemented a rating system that provides
parents or guardians with advanced information on which films are appropriate for children.”
Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To
unblock a category, select the lock icon.
● G: General audience (no restrictions).
● PG: Parental guidance suggested.
● PG-13: Parents strongly cautioned.
● R: Restricted. Children under 17 should be accompanied by an adult.
● NC-17: No children under age 17.
● X: Adults only.
● NR: Not rated.
Blocking Based on Canadian English Rating
Block material based on its English Canadian rating. This applies to all rated material viewed on
English-Canadian TV channels.
Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To
unblock a category, select the lock icon.
● C: Programming intended for children under age 8
● C8+: Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on
their own
● G: General programming, suitable for all audiences.
● PG: Parental Guidance
● 14+: Programming containing themes or content which may not be suitable for viewers under the
age of 14
● 18+: Adult programming14 15
Blocking Based on Canadian French Rating
Block material based on its French Canadian rating. This applies to all rated material viewed on
French-Canadian TV channels.
Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To
unblock a category, select the lock icon.
G: General
8 ans+: Programming acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own
13 ans+: Programming that may not be suitable for children under the age of 13
16 ans+: Programming not suitable for children under the age of 16
18 ans+: Programming restricted to adults
Blocking Based on Downloadable U.S. Rating
Block material based on its Downloadable U.S. Rating. This rating system only applies to material
originating from US DTV channels.
Parental restriction information is automatically downloaded while watching DTV channels. This
download may take several seconds. If the information is unavailable from the broadcasting station,
the Downloadable U.S. Rating menu is deactivated.
Parental restriction levels differ depending on the broadcasting station, and the default menu name
and the Downloadable U.S. Rating name changes depending on the downloaded information.
Even when the on-screen display is set to another language, the Downloadable U.S. Rating menu
appears only in English.
Select a lock beside one of the rating categories to block that category and all higher categories. To
unblock a category, select the lock icon.
Watching Blocked / Restricted Programs
To watch a blocked program, enter the PIN when requested.
When initially showing a restricted program or movie, the screen is blank because the Program Rating
Lock blocks it. Enter the PIN to unblock the program when a message appears requesting the code.
Rename Analog Channels
Select a channel you wish to rename from the Edit Channel screen, press TOOLS button, and then
select Rename Channel from the list.
You can now rename the selected channel. The new name can be up to 5 characters long.16
Favorite Channels
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Edit Favorites Try Now
Broadcasting
Auto Program
Antenna Cable
Channel List
Guide
Schedule Manager
Edit Channel
Edit Favorites
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
You can designate frequently watched channels as favorites. The channels assigned as a favorite are
displayed with the symbol on the Edit Channel and channel list screens. You can create up to 5
favorite channel lists. You can also rename and edit favorite channel lists.
From the Edit Channel screen, select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button
to access the following options:
● Antenna: Choose between Cable and Air.
● Edit Channel: You can manage the channels saved on the TV. For details, see "Channel
Management".
● Information: View detailed information about the current program.16 17
Add Favorite Channels
Add a channel to a favorite channels list.
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
11
Select the a button on the virtual remote panel to bring up the channel list containing the
channels you wish to add and then select the channels. However, the a button is available only
when the Recently Viewed or Mostly Viewed channel list has one or more channel entries.
21
Select the b button to bring up a favorite channels list and then select the { button to add the
selected channels.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
11
Press the a button to bring up the channel list containing the channels you wish to add and then
select the channels. However, the a button is available only when the Recently Viewed or Mostly
Viewed channel list has one or more channel entries.
21
Press the b button to bring up a favorite channels list and then press the { button to add the
selected channels.
Remove Favorite Channels
Remove channels from a favorite channels list.
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
11
Select the b button on the virtual remote panel to bring up a favorite channels list and then
select the channels you wish to remove.
21
Select the { button on the virtual remote panel to remove the channels from the list.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
11
Press the b button to bring up a favorite channels list and then select the channels you wish to
remove.
21
Press the { button to remove the channels from the list.18
Rearrange the Favorite Channels List
Rearrange the order of the channels in a Favorite Channels List.
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
11
Select the b button on the virtual remote panel to bring up the favorite channels list and select
the channel you wish to move.
21
Select the a button on the virtual remote panel to rearrange the order of the selected channel.
Press the touch pad to finish.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
11
Press the b button to bring up the favorite channels list and select the channel you wish to move.
21
Press the a button to rearrange the order of the selected channel. Press E button to finish.
Rename a Favorite Channel List
Rename an existing favorite channels list.
11
Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display the list. Select
Rename Favorites from the list.
21
Rename the list in the popup window. The new name can be up to 20 characters long.
Copy a Favorite Channels List
Copy channels from one favorite channels list to another.
11
Select the b button on the virtual remote panel or press b button on regular remote control to
bring up a Favorite Channels List and select the channels you wish to copy.
21
Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display the list. Select
Copy to Favorites from the list, and then select the Favorite Channels List(s) you wish to copy to.
This copies over the channels to the selected Favorite Channels List(s).18 19
Network Configuration
Connecting the TV to a network gives you access to online services such as the Smart Hub as well as
software updates.
Wired Network
There are three ways to connect the TV to a Local Area Network (LAN).
● External Modem
● ① IP Router + ② External Modem
● Wall-mounted LAN Outlet20
Wireless Network
PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above
Connect the TV to the Internet using a standard router or modem.
LED 4300 Series models
Refer to the diagram and connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter (WIS09ABGNX or WIS12ABGNX)
to the USB port. To connect wirelessly, the TV should be attach a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter on
the TV. Then, connect the TV to the Internet using a standard router or modem. The Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter is sold separately.
The picture may appear corrupted or have static for some channels when the TV is connected to
the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter. If this occurs, establish a connection using one of the following
methods or connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using a USB cable in a place that is not
affected by radio interference.
● The USB right angle adapter: Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the USB right
angle adapter.
● The USB extension cable: Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using the USB extension
cable. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter to the back of the TV near the top, using
double-sided adhesive tape.20 21
Wireless Network Precautions
PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above
● This TV supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g /n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using
IEEE 802.11n. Otherwise when you play video over a network connection, the video may not play
smoothly.
● To use a wireless network, the TV must be connected to a wireless router or modem. If the
wireless router supports DHCP, the TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the
wireless network.
● Select a channel that is not currently in use for the wireless router. If the channel set for the
wireless router is currently being used by another device, the result is usually interference and/or
a communications failure.
● Most wireless networks have an optional security system. To enable a wireless network's security
system, you need to create a security key using characters and numbers. This security key is then
needed to connect to the wireless network.
LED 4300 Series models
● Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter supports the IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n communication protocols.
Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. Otherwise when you play video over a network
connection, the video may not play smoothly.
● To use a wireless network, the TV must be connected to a wireless router or modem. If the
wireless router supports DHCP, the TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the
wireless network.
● Select a channel that is not currently in use for the wireless router. If the channel set for the
wireless router is currently being used by another device, the result is usually interference and/or
a communications failure.
● Most wireless networks have an optional security system. To enable a wireless network's security
system, you need to create a security key using characters and numbers. This security key is then
needed to connect to the wireless network.
Network Security Protocols
The TV only supports the following wireless network security protocols and is unable to connect to
non-certified wireless routers:
● Authentication Modes: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
● Encryption Types: WEP, TKIP, AES
If the wireless router has been set to Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n mode and the
Encryption Type to WEP or TKIP, Samsung TVs will not support the connection in compliance with the
new Wi-Fi certification specifications.
If the wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), it is possible to connect to the network
using PBC (Push Button Configuration) or a PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS automatically
configures the SSID and WPA key settings.22
Wired Network Setup
Screen Menu > Network > Network Settings Try Now
Network
Network Status
Network Settings
Wi-Fi Direct
AllShare Settings
Device Name [TV]Samsung LE...
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Automatic Wired Network Setup
The TV's wired network connection is automatically configured when it is connected to a network that
supports DHCP.
11
Set Network type to Wired and then select Connect.
21
The TV attempts to connect to the network. A confirmation message is then shown once a
connection is established. Select OK to proceed. If the attempt fails, try again or connect
manually.
Manual Wired Network Setup
If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values
to connect to the network manually. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values,
contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Refer to the "Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses" for
more information.22 23
11
Set Network type to Wired and then select Connect.
Network Settings
Select your network type.
Network type Wired
Connect
Plug a network cable into
the back of your TV.
21
Select Stop when the TV attempts to connect to the network. Once the network connection has
been interrupted, select IP Settings.
Network Settings
Connection verification cancelled.
Wired network connection test is stopped.
Change Network IP Settings Retry Close
31
From the IP Settings screen, set IP Setting to Enter manually, enter IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Gateway, and the DNS Server values, and then select OK.
IP Settings
IP Setting Enter manually
IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0
DNS Setting Enter manually
DNS Server 0.0.0.0
OK Cancel
41
The TV attempts to connect to the network again using the specified settings. A confirmation
message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed.24
Failed Wired Connection
No network cable found Try Now Try Now
Make sure the network cable is plugged in. If it is connected, make sure the router is turned on. If it is
on, try turning it off and on again.
IP auto setting failed Try Now
Perform the following or set the IP address manually from IP Settings.
11
Ensure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router and reset the router.
21
If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information.
Unable to connect to the network Try Now
Check the following:
11
Check the IP Settings settings.
21
Ensure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router and unplug and then plug the router back in.
31
If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information.
Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet Try Now
11
Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port.
21
Check the DNS settings under IP Settings.
31
If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider.
Network setup complete, but unable to connect to the Internet Try Now
If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider.24 25
Wireless Network Setup
Screen Menu > Network > Network Settings
Network
Network Status
Network Settings
Wi-Fi Direct
AllShare Settings
Device Name [TV]Samsung LE...
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Automatic Wireless Network Setup
Connect the TV to the Internet via a wireless router. Check the wireless router's SSID and security
key settings before attempting to connect. The security key can be found on the wireless router's
configuration screen.
11
Setting Network type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks.
21
Select the network (SSID) you wish to connect to. If the desired wireless router doesn't appear in
the list, select Add Network and enter the network's SSID manually.
31
Enter the security key and select Done. If the selected network is not security-enabled, the TV will
attempt a connection right away.
41
The TV attempts to connect to the network. A confirmation message is then shown once a
connection is established. Select OK to proceed. If the attempt fails, try again or connect
manually.26
Manual Wireless Network Setup
If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values
to connect to the network manually. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values,
contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Refer to the "Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses" for
more information.
11
Setting Network type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks.
Network Settings
Select your network type.
Network type Wireless
Wireless network
AP0000
AP0001
Add Network You can connect your TV to the
internet. Please select which
wireless network to use.
Refresh WPS(PBC)
21
Select the network (SSID) you wish to connect to. If the desired wireless router doesn't appear in
the list, select Add Network and enter the network's SSID manually.
31
Enter the security key and select Done. If the selected network is not security-enabled, the TV will
attempt a connection right away.26 27
41
Select Stop when the TV attempts to connect to the network. Once the network connection has
been interrupted, select IP Settings.
Network Settings
Connection verification cancelled.
Wireless network connection test is stopped.
Change Network IP Settings Retry Close
51
From the IP Settings screen, set IP Setting to Enter manually, enter IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Gateway, and the DNS Server values, and then select OK.
IP Settings
IP Setting Enter manually
IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Gateway 0.0.0.0
DNS Setting Enter manually
DNS Server 0.0.0.0
OK Cancel
61
The TV attempts to connect to the network again using the specified settings. A confirmation
message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed.28
Using the WPS Button
If the router has a WPS push button, you can use it to connect the TV to the router automatically. WPS
automatically configures the SSID and WPA key settings.
11
Setting Network type to Wireless automatically displays a list of available wireless networks.
21
Select WPS(PBC) and then press the router's WPS button within two minutes.
31
The TV automatically acquires the SSID and security key settings and connects to the network. A
confirmation message is then shown once a connection is established. Select OK to proceed.
Failed Wireless Connection
Wireless network connection failed, or no wireless router selected. Try Now Try Now
Go to Network Settings and select the correct router.
Unable to connect to a wireless router Try Now Try Now
Check the following:
11
Check that the router is turned on, and if it is, turn it off and on again.
21
Enter the correct security key if required.
IP auto setting failed Try Now
Perform the following or set the IP address manually from IP Settings.
11
Make sure that the DHCP server is enabled on the router and unplug and plug the router back in.
21
Enter the correct security key if required.
31
If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information.28 29
Unable to connect to the network Try Now
Check the following:
11
Check the IP Settings settings.
21
Enter the correct security key if required.
31
If this does not work, contact your Internet Service Provider for more information.
Connected to a local network, but not to the Internet Try Now
11
Make sure that the Internet LAN cable is connected to the router's external LAN port.
21
Check the DNS settings under IP Settings.
31
If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider.
Network setup complete, but unable to connect to the Internet Try Now
If the problem persists, contact your Internet Service Provider.
Dynamic versus Static IP Addresses
If the network requires a dynamic IP address, use an ADSL modem or router that supports the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically
provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and DNS values the TV needs to access the Internet, so
they do not have to be entered manually. Most home networks use a dynamic IP address.
If the network requires a static IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values
manually when setting up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway and
DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
If the network requires a static IP address, use an ADSL modem that supports DHCP. ADSL modems
that support DHCP also allow static IP addresses.30
Checking the Network Status
Screen Menu > Network > Network Status Try Now
Network
Network Status
Network Settings
Wi-Fi Direct
AllShare Settings
Device Name [TV]Samsung LE...
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
View the current network and Internet status.
Mobile Device Connection
Network
Network Status
Network Settings
Wi-Fi Direct
AllShare Settings
Device Name [TV]Samsung LE...
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
You can either directly connect a mobile device to the TV with no need for a wireless router or connect
them on the same network to play media files from the mobile device on the TV.30 31
Wi-Fi Direct
Screen Menu > Network > Wi-Fi Direct Try Now
Connect a mobile device that supports Wi-Fi Direct to the TV without using a wireless router.
11
Enable Wi-Fi Direct on the mobile device and then launch Wi-Fi Direct. The TV automatically
scans for and displays a list of available devices. The TV's name also appears on the mobile
device.
21
Select the device from the list to initiate a connection. If a connection request is made by the
TV, a permission message appears on the mobile device and vice versa. Accept the request to
connect the mobile device to the TV.
AllShare Settings
Screen Menu > Network > AllShare Settings
This TV can play media files from computers or other DLNA-enabled devices connected to the TV via
a network. For details, see "Using Networked External Storage Devices".
In addition, this TV can be used as a display for mobile devices, including smartphones and tablets.
For details, see "Screen Mirroring".
Rename the TV
Screen Menu > Network > Device Name Try Now
Assign a unique name for your TV. The assigned name appears on the external devices connected to
the TV via the network.32 Controlling the TV
Smart Touch Control
Smart Touch Control is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher.
The Smart Touch Control makes it easier and more convenient to use the TV. For example, you can
use the remote control's built-in touch pad to move the focus and make selections as you would on a
computer using a mouse. In addition, you can use the virtual remote panel displayed on the screen to
change channels, play media files, and access favorites.
Inserting the Batteries (AAA X 2)
11
Slightly lift the battery cover by pulling the strap or using a plastic card. Next, pull on the cover’s
notch with a fingernail to remove the cover completely.
" Check the location of the battery cover groove. The groove’s location may vary depending on the type
of Smart Touch Control is provided with the product.
21
Insert 2 AAA batteries, making sure to align the positive and negative ends correctly.
31
Align the battery cover with the back of the remote control and press down along the edges until
it is cleanly attached to the remote control.
Connecting to the TV
In order to operate the TV using a Smart Touch Control, you must first pair it to the TV via Bluetooth.
However, the Smart Touch Control is only available for the paired Samsung TV.
11
To turn on the TV, point the Smart Touch Control at the remote control receiver of the TV and
press the TV button. The remote control receiver's location may vary depending on the model.
21
A Bluetooth icon will appear at the bottom left of the screen as shown below. The TV will then
attempt to connect to the Smart Touch Control automatically.
32 33
Reconnecting the Smart Touch Control
If you need to reestablish the connection between the TV and the Smart Touch Control unit, press the
pairing button at the back of the Smart Touch Control.
The pairing button can be accessed by removing the Smart Touch Control's battery cover. Pressing the
pairing button automatically reestablishes the connection between the control and the TV.
Battery Low Alarm
If the battery becomes low while using the Smart Touch Control, the following alarm window blinks
and appears at the bottom of the left screen. If the alarm window pops up, replace the batteries of the
Smart Touch Control. Use alkaline batteries for longer usage.
34
Buttons and Descriptions
34 35
Buttons Descriptions
TV Turns the TV on/off.
SOURCE Changes the source.
STB
Turn on and off the satellite or cable set-top box connected to the TV. For this,
the Smart Touch Control must be configured as a universal remote control. Refer
to "Universal Remote Setup" for more information.
VOL Adjusts the volume.
VOICE
Run Voice Recognition. To speak a voice command, press and hold the VOICE
button and say a voice command. Refer to "Voice Recognition" for more
information.
MUTE Turns the TV sound on/off.
CH Changes the channel.
MORE
Displays the virtual remote panel on the screen. The virtual remote panel
consists of a number panel, a playback control panel, and a quick access panel.
Use the touch pad to select numbers and buttons. Refer to "Virtual Remote
Control" for more information.
Touch pad
Drag your finger on the touch pad as you would on the touch pad of a laptop
to move the focus displayed on the screen. To select item, press the touch pad.
Refer to "Using the touch pad" for more information.
RETURN / EXIT Returns to the previous menu.
SMART HUB Launch Smart Hub. While an application is running, pressing the SMART HUB
button terminates the application. Refer to "Smart Hub" for more information.
GUIDE Check the digital channel broadcasting schedule. Refer to "Guide" for more
information.
LIGHT
(for U.S.A. and Canada) Turn on the backlight for the buttons. The backlight
lasts for only a few seconds. Turns the remote control light on or off. When on,
the buttons become illuminated for a moment when pressed. (Using the remote
control with this button set to On will reduce the battery usage time.)
DVR
(for U.S.A. and Canada) This button is only available when the Smart Touch
Control is configured to function as a universal remote control to control a settop box. Run DVR (Digital Video Recording) in set-top box.
MENU Opens the OSD.
3D Turns the 3D image on or off. Refer to "3D TV" for more information.
¥ (for the other countries) Enable Sports Mode for the optimal sports viewing
experience.
INFO (for the other countries) Displays information on the TV screen.36
Special Functions
Press and hold the following Smart Touch Control buttons to access various special functions.
Buttons Descriptions
Touch pad
Press and hold the touch pad while watching TV to display CH List on the
screen. In addition, you can press and hold the touch pad for 2 seconds or more
while an application is running to access the application's hidden features. (Not
available with all applications.)
RETURN Press and hold this button to quit the current process or app.
MORE Press and hold the touch pad to select a desired function (e.g. e-Manual,
TOOLS, INFO, etc.) easily.36 37
Using the touch pad
Use the touch pad to perform various commands. Navigate to Tutorial (System > Device Manager
> Smart Touch Control Settings > Tutorial) to view an on-screen guide to using the Smart Touch
Control.
Dragging
Drag on the touch pad in the desired direction. Move the focus or the pointer in the direction the
finger is dragging.
Pressing
Press the touch pad. This selects the focused item.
38
Flicking
Flick on the touch pad in the desired direction. This moves the focus or scrolls the screen based on
the direction and speed of the flick.
Pressing and Holding
Press and hold the touch pad while watching TV to display CH List on the screen. In addition, you
can press and hold the touch pad for 2 seconds or more while an application is running to access the
application's hidden features. (Not available with all applications.)
Pressing and Dragging
Press on the touch pad, drag and release. This moves the selected web item in a webpage or your
current location on a map.
38 39
Scrolling Up/Down
Scroll up/down the line on either the left or right edge of the touch pad. This scrolls a webpage or a
list up/down. This scrolling feature easily accommodates both right-handed and left-handed users.
Scrolling Left/Right
Scroll left/right on the line at the top or bottom edge of the touch pad. This scrolls a horizontal
webpage or the Smart Hub panel to the left/right.
40
Changing Channels by Entering Numbers
While watching TV, tap on the protruding line on the left or right edge of the touch pad to bring up the
numerical input window on the screen. Use your finger to enter the number for the channel you want
to watch. The recognized number is displayed on the screen and the TV switches to the corresponding
channel. However, the number you have entered may not be recognized properly by the TV. Refer to
the guide below to ensure that your numerical entries are recognized accurately.
Numerical Input Guide
Refer to the diagrams below when entering numerical values. The TV may not recognize your entries if
you do not follow the sequences shown below.
Adjusting the Touch pad
Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Smart Touch Control Settings > Touch Sensitivity
Users can adjust the sensitivity of the Smart Touch Control’s touch pad. Set Touch Sensitivity to
adjust sensitivity and make it more convenient to use.40 41
Show Status and Notification Banner
Press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control and then select STATUS on the virtual remote
panel to display the status and notification banner at the top of the screen. Refer to the "Status and
Notification" for more information.
Recommended
This function is only available on U.S.A. and Canada.
Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH and then select Recommended from the list displayed at the bottom of
the screen. This shows the current/scheduled program and application recommendations.
Select a program that is currently airing to jump to the corresponding channel or a program that is
scheduled to air to set up a Schedule Viewing setting. Refer to the "Scheduled Recommended Program
Info" for more information.
Select an application to launch. Samsung Apps will launch if the selected application is not installed
on the TV. Refer to the "Samsung Apps" for more information.
History
For U.S.A. and Canada
Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH and then select History from the list displayed at the bottom of the
screen. This displays an interactive list of recently accessed channels, media content and applications.
For the other countries
Press the HISTORY / SEARCH and then select History from the list displayed at the bottom of the
screen. This displays an interactive list of recently accessed channels, media content and applications.
Deleting History Data
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Remove viewing history > History
You can delete the history information about recently viewed channels, content and applications.
Searching
For U.S.A. and Canada
Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH button on the Smart Touch Control. The list appears at the bottom of
the screen. Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH button again. The keypad will appear on the screen. Enter
search criteria to search not only many apps and their contents on the TV but also the Web. For more
information, refer to "Searching".
For the other countries
Press the HISTORY / SEARCH button. The list appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the HISTORY
/ SEARCH button again. The keypad will appear on the screen. Enter search criteria to search not only
many apps and their contents on the TV but also the Web. For more information, refer to "Searching".42
Virtual Remote Control
Press the MORE button to display the virtual remote panel on the screen. The virtual remote panel
consists of a number panel, a playback control panel, and a quick access panel. Use the touch pad to
select numbers and buttons. Press and hold this button. A quick access panel of virtual remote panel
appears. You can select screen buttons easily.
Changing the Virtual Remote Control Panel
Choose the number panel, playback control panel, or quick access panel as the panel to be shown on
the screen.
Use the touch pad to keep moving the focus left or right. The panel changes when the focus is moved
beyond the leftmost or rightmost edge.
Use left/right scroll function on the touch pad to change the panel easily.
Change a position of the Virtual Remote Panel
Press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control. The virtual remote panel appears on the screen.
Press and hold the touch pad for one second. Users can change a position of the virtual remote panel
of the screen.
Using the Number Panel
Use the number panel to enter numbers on a keypad screen or webpage or to change the channel
while watching TV. Changing the channel using the number pad leaves a record, allowing you to easily
return to previous channels.
Using the Playback Control Panel
Use the playback control panel to pause, rewind, fast forward, skip to the next file, and much more
while enjoying media content.
Using the Quick Access Panel
Quickly access the INFO, TOOLS and e-Manual buttons. However, the availability of buttons may vary
depending on the operating mode of the Smart Touch Control (with the TV only, as a universal remote,
etc.).
Adjusting the virtual remote control
Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Smart Touch Control Settings > Onscreen Remote Size
You can resize the virtual remote control. If the virtual remote control buttons are too small, enlarge
the remote control window before using the virtual remote control.42 43
Universal Remote Setup
Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Universal Remote Setup Try Now
This function is not available for LED 4300 series.
Device Manager
Keyboard Settings
Mouse Settings
Smart Touch Control Settings
Universal Remote Setup
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
This TV has a universal remote control feature that lets you control cable boxes, Blu-ray players, home
theaters, and other third-party external devices connected to the TV using the TV's remote control.
You can also use the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function to operate Samsung external devices with your
TV's remote control without any additional setup. For more information, refer to "Anynet+ (HDMICEC)".
Connecting the IR Extender
Keep a distance of 0.16 ft at least between the IR Extender and the external device, as the illustration
shows. Face the IR Extender toward the external device’s remote control signal receiver. Note that
it should be no obstacle between IR Extender and external device. The presence of an obstacle will
interfere with the transmission of the remote control signal.
" The color and design of the IR Extender may vary depending on the model.44
Add the External Device
11
Turn on the external device you wish to set up universal remote function for and then press the
SOURCE button to bring up the Source screen.
21
Select Universal Remote Setup from the top of the screen. This initiates the universal remote
setup process.
31
Follow the on-screen instruction and set up the universal remote control. If it does not work, set
up the remote control by entering the model number manually.
Using the Universal Remote Control
By configuring the universal remote control feature for a connector to which an external device is
already connected, you can use the Smart Touch Control as a universal remote control simply by
sending the input signals to the corresponding connector.
Registered External Device Management
Universal Remote Setup screen, select a registered external device.
● Source Setup: Change the TV's input connector that the external device is connected to.
● Synced Power off: Configure the external device to turn off when the TV is turned off.
● Rename: Rename the registered external device (up to 15 characters long).
● Delete: Remove the registered external device.44 45
Entering Text using the Onscreen Keypad
An onscreen keypad appears when you need to enter text (entering the network password, logging
into your Samsung account, etc.), allowing you to enter text using your remote control.
Entering Text using the QWERTY Keypad
Use the QWERTY keypad as you would a normal keyboard. Simply select the letters you want to enter
them.
Additional Features
Select the icon from the keypad to access the following features:
● Language: Select a language from the list.
● Recommended text: Enable/disable the Recommended Text feature. Enabling the Recommended
Text feature displays word recommendations based on the entered characters. To enter the word
"Internet", for example, all you have to do is enter "In" and select the word "Internet" from the list
of recommended words.
● Predict Next Letter: Enable/disable the Text Prediction feature. Enabling the Text Prediction
feature eliminates the need to find and select individual character keys. However, this feature is
limited to words that have previously been added to the dictionary. To enter the word "Internet",
for example, select "I". A predicted word will then appear next to the I key. Simply select the
predicted word to enter "Internet".46
SMART Interaction
This TV features SMART Interaction, which recognizes a user's voice, actions, and face to enable TV
operations without the use of a remote control. The motion control and facial recognition features
require a separately-sold camera installed on the TV. Make sure that the TV is connected to the
Internet when installing the camera so that it can download the software required for motion control.
SMART Interaction makes it possible to configure settings and access features with ease. It takes
approximately 15 seconds for voice and motion recognition to come online after turning on the TV.
[ When connecting the TV camera to 2013 Samsung TV models, make sure to connect it to the
specified USB port of the TV. Other USB ports are not supported for this purpose.
Precautions
Face Recognition
This product saves thumbnail images of users' faces for use during the Face Login. Logging into the
Smart Hub via face recognition may be less secure than logging in using an ID and password.
TV Camera Use
Under some circumstances and under certain legal conditions, the use/misuse of the TV camera may
result in legal liability. There may be obligations under local privacy laws regarding the protection of
individuals concerning personal data and on the free movement of such data, and possibly other laws
including criminal laws, regulating camera surveillance both in the workplace and elsewhere.
By using the TV camera, users agree that it will not be used (i) in locations where cameras are
generally prohibited (such as bathrooms, locker rooms or changing rooms), (ii) in any manner that will
result in an invasion of a person’s privacy or (iii) in violation of any applicable laws, regulations or
statutes.
If you are using a camera, first check the back for a sticker.
Remove the sticker cover before adjusting the TV camera angle.
When you are no longer using the camera, rotate the lens downward and secure it in place. This
prevents any inadvertent or unintentional camera operation.46 47
Motion Control
Motion Control works by using the camera, so the user must be within the camera's recognition range.
The camera's recognition range varies depending on the ambient light level and other factors. Run
Motion Control Environment Test before using Motion Control to determine the camera's recognition
range. User may experience physical fatigue when using Motion Control for extended periods.
Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition is not available in all languages, dialects or regions. The performance varies
depending on the language chosen, voice volume and ambient noise levels in the surrounding area.
Voice Text Input requires the user's agreement with any third-party app’s voice privacy policy and to
provide Samsung with the user's MAC address and other private information.
Voice Text Input lets users enter text using voice commands instead of a mouse, keyboard or remote
control. This feature is particularly useful for searching, browsing the web, and using applications that
require text input.
You must agree to the Supplemental Privacy Notices before using Interactive Voice Recognition.48
Voice Recognition
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Voice Recognition
This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher.
Voice Recognition
Voice Recognition On
Language US English
TV Voice
Voice Recognition Tutorial
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Voice Recognition lets you access and control specific functions of the TV using voice commands. For
the accurate recognition of voice commands, pronounce words and phrases clearly in the language
selected in Language. The TV's clock has to be set before you use Voice Recognition. Set the Clock
(System > Time > Clock).
To use the Voice Recognition, press the VOICE button and then say the command word/phrase 0.3ft
to 0.4ft away from the microphone on the Smart Touch Control. Commands may not be recognized if
you speak too softly or loudly. The optimal volume is approximately 75~80dB.
Operating Environment
The voice recognition rate varies depending on the volume/tone, pronunciation, and ambient
environment (TV sound and ambient noise).48 49
Enabling Voice Recognition
Press the VOICE button to run Voice Recognition. Say a command. You can use Voice Recognition to
operate the TV.
If Voice Recognition is not working, check to see if Voice Recognition (Smart Features > Voice
Recognition) has been enabled. To use Voice Recognition, Voice Recognition must be set to On.
When the Voice Recognition is running, the Motion Control is not available.
Voice Recognition Tutorial
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Voice Recognition > Voice Recognition Tutorial
This lets you familiarize yourself with the basics of using Voice Recognition. Run Voice Recognition
Tutorial or activate Voice Recognition and then say "Guide me".
Basic Voice Recognition Use
You can use the following commands anytime while Voice Recognition is active:
● Moving the Focus: Say "Focus Left", "Focus Right", "Focus Up", or "Focus Down" to move the
focus. However, these commands can only be used in situations when the focus can be moved.
● Select Item: Say "Select".
● Available Voice Commands: Say "Guide me". A list of basic voice commands available in the
current state is shown.
● All Voice Commands: Say "Guide me" and then "Show All" to display a complete list of voice
commands by category. Say the name of a category.
Only preset voice commands are recognized. Available voice commands may vary, depending on the
software version.
Voice Recognition Settings
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Voice Recognition
● Language: Select a language for Voice Recognition.
● TV Voice: Enable/disable the TV's voice responses to your Voice Recognition commands and
choose between a male and female voice. This function is not supported depending on the
region.50
Interactive Voice Recognition Commands
Interactive Voice Recognition allows you to set up a Schedule Viewing access VODs, search and
launch applications, and execute various other commands without having to remember specific
commands or keywords. Saying "Turn off the TV in 30 minutes," for example, instructs the TV to turn
off after 30 minutes (Sleep Timer).
Activate Interactive Voice Recognition and say a command. See the examples below:
● When you don't know which channel a specific program is on:
"Play ."
● When you need information about a specific genre:
"Which ***(genre name) shows are on today?"
● When you want to watch a program featuring a specific actor or directed by a specific director:
"Please look up programs featuring ***(cast member). / Find me works directed by ***(director
name)."
● When you want to find out more information about the program you are watching:
"Who are the cast members in this program?" / "What's the title of this program?"
● When you want program recommendations:
"Please recommend something to watch this evening." / "Are there any shows worth watching
today?"
● When you want to operate the TV:
"Adjust the volume to ten." / "Change to channel **"
Deactivating Voice Recognition
To deactivate Voice Recognition, say "Close Voice Recognition".50 51
Motion Control
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control
Motion Control
Motion Control On
Animated Motion Guide Off
Pointer Speed Medium
Motion Control Environment Test
Motion Control Tutorial
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Use Motion Control to change the channel, adjust the volume, move the pointer, and control other TV
functions.
Some applications may not support Motion Control.
The motion control features require a separately-sold camera installed on the TV. Make sure that
the TV is connected to the Internet when installing the camera so that it can download the software
required for motion control.
When the Voice Recognition is running, the Motion Control is not available.
[ When connecting the TV camera to 2013 Samsung TV models, make sure to connect it to the
specified USB port of the TV. Other USB ports are not supported for this purpose.
Operating Environment
Users should be located between 4.9ft and 13.1ft from the camera. The actual recognition range may
vary depending on the camera angle and other factors.
Motion Control relies on the TV camera and therefore will not function if the camera is pointed up or
down. Adjust the camera to the correct angle. Do not point the camera directly at the sun or any other
light source or obstruct its view.
In order for the camera to recognize movement, the user has to stand out from the background.
The appropriate ambient brightness is between 50 to 500 lux. (ex: 100 Lux: bathroom, 400 Lux: living
room)
Avoid direct sunlight when using Motion Control.
Run Motion Control Environment Test to assess the camera's recognition range before using Motion
Control.52
Motion Control Environment Test
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control > Motion Control Environment Test
Run this test before using Motion Control to ensure proper functionality.
11
Run Motion Control Environment Test and select Start within 4.9ft and 13.1ft of the TV. If light
reflects on the TV screen, user can be difficult to use Motion Control.
21
Adjust the camera angle so that you appear inside the square displayed on the screen. Once
you have finished adjusting the camera angle, wave one hand slowly from left to right. Spread
your hand out with the palm facing the TV. An arrow cursor appears on the screen when the TV
recognizes the action. If recognition fails, try again.
Motion Control Tutorial
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control > Motion Control Tutorial
Run Motion Control and follow the instructions. This lets you familiarize yourself with the basics of
using Motion Control.
Motion Control Activation
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control > Motion Control
Raise your hand with the palm facing the TV. Hold it for a moment and slowly wave your hand from
side to side three or four times. When your hand is successfully recognized, the Motion Control is
activated and a pointer is displayed on the screen.
" Dropping your hand out of the range of the TV camera deactivates Motion Control. Raise your hand within 3
seconds to reactivate it.52 53
Using the Basic Motion Controls
Available motion commands may vary, depending on what the TV is currently doing.
The following basic motion control commands are available:
● Pointing Navigation: This action moves the cursor to the desired position.
● Run / Select: Make a fist to select an option or execute a command. Keeping your fist clenched is
like holding down a remote control button.
● Return: Make a circle with your hand in the counterclockwise direction to return to the previous
menu.
● Turning over screens: Hold one palm vertical, and swing to the left or right to change the Smart
Hub screens.
● Scrolling a web page: While viewing a web page, make a fist on the scroll bar, and then move it
up/down to scroll the page up/down.
Motion Control Options
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Motion Control
● Animated Motion Guide: Displays an animated guide when user motion is detected.
● Pointer Speed: Set the speed of the pointer used in Motion Control.54
Motion Control Screen
The Screen Composition while Viewing TV
Launching Motion Control while watching TV displays the following icons on the screen:
Screen Icons Explanation
/ Adjust the volume.
Turns the TV sound on/off.
/ Changes the channel.
Check the recommended program information and air times. Select a program
from the list to view detailed information about that program. For more
information, refer to "Scheduled Recommended Program Info".
Launch Smart Hub.
Enter a channel number using the number panel to jump to the channel. Use the
playback control panel with the on-screen color buttons to control a media file
that is currently playing.
Change the source.
Turn off the TV.54 55
The Smart Hub Screen Composition
Launching Motion Control while using Smart Hub displays the following icons on the screen:
Screen Icons Explanation
/ Adjust the volume. This function is only available on the On TV.
Turns the TV sound on/off. This function is only available on the On TV.
/ Changes the channel. This function is only available on the On TV.
Returns to the previous menu.
Check the recommended program information and air times. Select a program
from the list to view detailed information about that program. For more
information, refer to "Scheduled Recommended Program Info".
Displays the virtual remote panel on screen. Refer to the "Virtual Remote Control"
for more information.
Change the source.
Turn off the TV.56
Retrieving Icons on the Screen
When using Motion Control with Smart Hub, the icons will disappear automatically after two seconds
of inactivity. To retrieve the icons, move the pointer to one of the three edges shown below (marked in
blue) and then hold it there for 1 second. The icons will reappear on the screen.
Screen Icons Explanation
① / / / /
② / /
③ / 56 57
Face Recognition
Users can register their faces and log into their Smart Hub accounts through Face Recognition. One
face may be registered per account. Depending on the ambient brightness level and the user's skin
tone, the TV may have difficulty recognizing the user's face.
The Face Recognition features require a separately-sold camera installed on the TV. Make sure that
the TV is connected to the Internet when installing the camera so that it can download the software
required for Face Recognition.
[ When connecting the TV camera to 2013 Samsung TV models, make sure to connect it to the
specified USB port of the TV. Other USB ports are not supported for this purpose.
Operating Environment
Users should be located between 4.9ft and 13.1ft from the camera. The actual recognition range may
vary depending on the camera angle and other factors.
The appropriate ambient brightness is between 50 to 500 lux. (ex: 100 Lux: bathroom, 400 Lux: living
room)
Face Recognition can recognize up to 5 different users at a time.
The TV may have difficulty recognizing twins and people with similar faces as two different
individuals.
Note the following when using Face Recognition:
● Do not cover your face with a hat, a pair of sunglasses, or your hair.
● The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows
prevent the camera from recognizing your face accurately.
● Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same
time as neutral as possible.
● User's facial expression when logging into your Samsung account must be the same as the facial
expression during the registration process.58
Face Registration
Users can register their faces to the Smart Hub accounts. Create a new account if you do not already
have one. Refer to the "Creating a Samsung Account" section for details.
Face Registration from the Smart Hub account information screen
" Log into Smart Hub first.
11
Open the (Smart Features > Samsung Account > Edit Profile) menu, and select Register Face.
21
Read the instruction, select OK, and then enter the password for the Samsung account.
31
Select Take Picture, and the user’s face appears on the screen. Keep the face to be completely in
the red dotted frame. The face is successfully registered when the frame turns green.
" The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent
the camera from recognizing your face accurately.
" Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time
as neutral as possible.
" It is better to select the checkbox beside I want to enter password as well for increased security for
higher security. With the checkbox selected, the user must enter the password when logging in using
face recognition.
41
Select Save to finish.58 59
Face Registration for the Smart Hub account using face recognition
11
From the Smart Hub login window, select Face recognition, and then select Start. The TV
automatically recognizes the user's face.
21
Select a face to register from the list, and then select Register Face in the popup window.
31
Read the instruction from the popup window, select OK, and then select the account from the list.
However, a user account appears in the list if the TV has a record of the user's account and the
user is logged in.
41
Enter the password for the Samsung account. To make face recognition more accurate, scan the
user's face again.
51
Select Take Picture. The user’s face appears on the screen. Keep the face completely within the
red round. The face is successfully registered when the round turns green. Select OK to proceed.
" The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent the
camera from recognizing your face accurately.
" Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as
neutral as possible.
" It is better to select the checkbox beside I want to enter password as well for increased security for
higher security. With the checkbox selected, the user must enter the password when logging in using face
recognition.
Face Recognition Login
Select Face recognition, and then select Start from the login window. The TV automatically recognizes
a user's face. If recognition fails, try again.
" The user's entire face must be visible to the camera. Avoid shadows over your face. Shadows prevent the
camera from recognizing your face accurately.
" Keep your expression as neutral as possible. In addition, keep your mouth closed but at the same time as
neutral as possible.
" Once recognition succeeds, the TV logs into the Smart Hub automatically. If the TV recognizes two or more
registered faces, a list of corresponding accounts appears. Select the appropriate account. Recognition of an
unregistered face prompts a warning.60
Using Peripheral Devices
Device Manager
Keyboard Settings
Mouse Settings
Smart Touch Control Settings
Universal Remote Setup
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
This TV can be controlled with a keyboard and a mouse instead of a remote control.
These peripheral devices make it easier and more convenient to use the TV.
Certain models do not support USB HID class keyboards and mice.
Keyboard Connection
Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Keyboard Settings Try Now
Connect a keyboard to the TV for easier text entry. To use a USB keyboard, plug the keyboard cable
into the TV's USB port. With a Bluetooth keyboard, pair it using the TV's Bluetooth function. The
Bluetooth function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher.
● Select Keyboard: Designate which keyboard to use. Only one keyboard can be used at a time. Try
Now
● Add Bluetooth Keyboard: View a list of Bluetooth keyboards within range. Select the keyboard
you wish to use. This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or
higher.
● Keyboard Options: Configure the language, type and other basic keyboard settings. Try Now
Keyboard Use
Use the following keyboard keys to control the TV.
● Arrows key (Moves the focus), Windows (m), Menu (TOOLS), Enter (Selects and activates), ESC
(RETURN), Numbers (Numbers)
● F1 (a), F2 (b), F3 ({), F4 (}), F5 ( ), F6 (SOURCE button), F7 (CH LIST button), F8 (MUTE
button), F9/F10 (Volume Control), F11/F12 (Change Channel)
● Page Up / Page Down: You can scroll up or down on web browser.60 61
Mouse Connection
Screen Menu > System > Device Manager > Mouse Settings Try Now
Connect a mouse to the TV and right-click on the mouse to bring up the Go To screen. You can
then use the screen menu, Smart Hub, and other TV functions using the mouse as you would on a
computer.
To use a USB mouse, plug the mouse cord into the TV's USB port. To use a Bluetooth mouse, pair it
using the TV's Bluetooth function. The Bluetooth function is available only with PDP 5500 series and
LED 6400 series or higher.
● Select Mouse: Designate which mouse to use. Only one mouse may be used at a time. Try Now
● Add Bluetooth Mouse: View a list of Bluetooth mice within range. This function is available only
with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher.
● Mouse Options: Configure button assignments, pointer speed and other basic mouse settings. Try
Now
Mouse Use
● Left Button: Selects
● Right Button: Brings up the Go To screen, which includes options such as Power Off, Screen
Menu, Smart Hub, and Tools.
● Page Up / Page Down on screen: Move the mouse wheel up and down. You can scroll up or
down on web browser or screen.62
TV Viewing
Broadcasting
Auto Program
Antenna Cable
Channel List
Guide
Schedule Manager
Edit Channel
Edit Favorites
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Use this feature to view the program guide and program information more easily. However, these
features are not available when viewing TV using a cable box or satellite receiver.
Program Info
Select the virtual remote panel's INFO button while watching TV to view information about the current
program.
However, Program Info is only available with digital channels. In order to use the Program Info,
you must first set the TV's clock. To set the clock, navigate to Clock (System > Time > Clock). The
Program Info may vary depending on the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for
certain programs.
Drag left/right on the touch pad to check out other programs or press the touch pad to set up a
Schedule Viewing setting for the selected program.
Refer to the "Schedule Viewing" section for more information about Schedule Viewing settings.
Change the Broadcast Signal
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Antenna Try Now
Choose an antenna to receive digital broadcast signals from.
TV Viewing62 63
Guide
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Guide Try Now Try Now
View each digital channel's programming schedule. Check the programming schedules and even setup
a Schedule Viewing. Press the GUIDE button to launch the guide.
Change Channels
Select a channel from Guide to jump to that channel right away.
Change Category
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Select the b button on the virtual remote panel to change the desired category.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the b button to change the desired category.
Quick Navigation
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Select the a button on the virtual remote panel. A popup window will open. Dragging left or right
on the touch pad moves the focus two hours back or forward, enabling faster browsing of the
programming schedule. However, the focus cannot be on a time prior to the current time.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the a button. A popup window will open. Each press of the left or right arrow button moves the
focus 2 hours back or forward, enabling faster browsing of the programming schedule. However, the
focus cannot be on a time prior to the current time.64
Schedule Viewing
Select a program that you wish to view, and then the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's
INFO button to display the detailed information screen. Select Schedule Viewing from the detailed
information screen to set up a Schedule Viewing. Schedule Viewing is only available for programs
that haven't aired yet.
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Select the { button on the virtual remote panel and navigate to the Schedule Manager screen to view
a list of reserved programs.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the { button and navigate to the Schedule Manager screen to view a list of reserved programs.
Checking the Program Info
Highlight a program and select the INFO button on the virtual remote panel or press the INFO button
on regular remote control. This displays detailed information about the highlighted program. The
Program Info may vary depending on the type of incoming signal and may not be available at all for
certain programs.64 65
Channel List
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Channel List Try Now
Launch CH List while watching TV to change channels or to check what's on other channels. Press and
hold the touch pad. This launches CH List. Alternatively, press the regular remote's CH LIST button to
launch the Channel List.
The Channel List screen icons indicate the following:
● : An analog channel
● : A favorite channel
● : A Schedule Viewing reserved channel
● : A locked channel
Change Channels
Select a channel to jump to it right away. To quickly scroll through the list, use the channel up/down
buttons. The focus moves up and down the list in one page.
Genre
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Drag left on the touch pad or press the left arrow button on the remote control and then select Genre.
Select a desired TV channel genre.
On the Added Ch. list, it is possible to filter channels by genre, if the channels contain proper genre
information.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the left arrow button on the remote and select Genre. Select a desired TV channel genre.
On the Added Ch. list, it is possible to filter channels by genre, if the channels contain proper genre
information.66
Change the Broadcast Signal
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Drag right on the touch pad and then select Air or Cable. This will change the signal source
immediately.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the right arrow button on the remote and select Air or Cable. This will change the signal source
immediately.
Change the Channel List
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Drag right on the touch pad and then switch to the Added Ch. or Favorites list. However, the Favorites
list can only be selected if it contains at least one favorite channel. If no favorite channel was
previously added, select Edit Favorites and add channels from the Edit Favorites screen.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the right arrow button on the remote and switch to the Added Ch. or Favorites list. However, the
Favorites list can only be selected if it contains at least one favorite channel. If no favorite channel was
previously added, select Edit Favorites and add channels from the Edit Favorites screen.66 67
Schedule Viewing
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Schedule Manager Try Now
Broadcasting
Auto Program
Antenna Cable
Channel List
Guide
Schedule Manager
Edit Channel
Edit Favorites
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Configure the TV to show a specific channel or program at a specific time and date. Before scheduling
TV watching, make sure that the date and time is set properly under the System > Time > Clock menu.
The icon appears next to programs that have been configured for a Schedule Viewing.
Digital Channel Schedule Viewing
Schedule Viewing for programs on digital channels can be set up through the following two options:
● Guide
● Program Info68
Guide
From Guide, select a program you wish to view.
Program Info
Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's INFO button to display information about the
current program. From the program information screen, drag left/right on the touch pad or press left/
right button on the remote control to select a program that has not yet aired and set up a Schedule
Viewing for it.
Analog Channel Schedule Viewing
The Schedule Viewing function for programs on analog channels can be set up by specifying the time
and date.
11
Run Schedule Manager and then select Schedule.
21
Specify that program's Antenna, Channel, Repeat, and Start Time and then select, OK to finish.
Cancel a Schedule Viewing
To cancel a Schedule Viewing for a specific program, select the program from the Schedule Manager
screen. A popup menu will appear. Select Delete to cancel.
Edit Schedule List
Select an entry from the Schedule Manager screen and then select Edit from the popup menu. Edit the
settings of the selected entry.68 69
3D TV
Screen Menu > Picture > 3D
3D
3D Mode
3D Perspective 0
Depth 5
L/R Change L/R Image
3D → 2D Off
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher.
This TV is 3D-enabled. For the best 3D viewing experience, users must wear Samsung's 3D Active
Glasses.
The ideal viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen. We also recommend sitting
with your eyes level with the screen.
Precautions
Carefully read the health and safety information concerning 3D viewing before viewing the TV in 3D.
Refer to the "3D Precautions", for more information.70
Restrictions
There are several restrictions when using 3D TV:
● Running the Smart Hub automatically deactivates 3D viewing.
● PIP cannot be used.
● Certain Picture options are disabled.
● IR Type Samsung 3D Active Glasses and third-party 3D glasses are not supported.
Tips
● The left and right 3D images may initially overlap when the TV is turned on. It takes a moment
for the display to optimize and the overlapping to go away.
● The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is another 3D product or electronic device
turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away
as possible from the 3D Active Glasses.
● Whether or not 3D video is displayed in true HD is usually determined by the quality of the
content.70 71
Activating 3D Mode
Screen Menu > Picture > 3D > 3D Mode
Choose a 3D mode according to the input signal. Available 3D modes may vary depending on the
input signal. Some 3D contents may differ preferred 3D mode. In this case, change the desired 3D
mode for watching. Select a 3D mode from the available 3D modes depending on the input signal.
Available 3D modes may vary depending on the input signal.
● Off: Deactivates 3D viewing.
● Normal: Converts normal images to 3D images. Some formats do not support this mode.
● L/R: Splits a single image into left and right overlapping images to create the 3D effect.
● T/B: Splits a single image into top and bottom overlapping images to create the 3D effect.
Resolutions supported by the TV may vary, depending on the 3D mode. For details, see "Supported 3D
Resolutions".
Setting 3D Effects
There are several adjustments that can be made to make 3D content more enjoyable.
● 3D Perspective: Adjusts the 3D perspective.
● Depth: Adjusts the 3D depth. This option cannot be used if 3D mode is set to (L/R) or
(T/B).
● L/R Change: Swaps the left and right pictures.
● 3D → 2D: Converts 3D images to normal images. This function is not available if 3D mode is set
to (Normal) or (Off).
● 3D Light control: Adjust the brightness of 3D images. If the screen is too dark, select High. This
function is only available on the LED 7050/7100 series, except 75-inch TVs.72
PIP
Screen Menu > Picture > PIP Try Now
Picture
3D
PIP Off
Advanced Settings
Picture Options
Picture Off
Apply Picture Mode All Sources
Reset Picture
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Display video from an external device on the main screen and the TV as a picture-in-picture. For
example, you can display a Blu-ray movie on the main screen and simultaneously watch TV as a
picture-in-picture. PIP is not available while the Smart Hub or 3D TV is active. Turning off the TV while
PIP is active automatically deactivates PIP.
● PIP: Activates/deactivates PIP.
● Antenna: Select either Air or Cable as the input source for the sub-picture screen.
● Channel: Selects the PIP sub-picture channel.
● Size: Selects the PIP sub-picture size.
● Position: Selects the PIP sub-picture position.
● Sound Select: Selects the audio source.
" Playing a game or using the karaoke feature on the main screen can result in a lower PIP picture quality.
" To watch TV as a picture-in-picture, the main screen's source must be set to Component or HDMI. The PIP
window supports TV signals only.72 73
Analog Screen Calibration
Channel Settings
Fine Tune
Clear Scrambled Channel
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Analog pictures can become shaky and full of noise. If this happens, you can fine tune the signal
and/or reduce noise to clear up the picture.
Fine Tune
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Channel Settings > Fine Tune Try Now
Clear up shaky pictures. Fine tune the pictures until they are clear and then select Save or Close.
Select Reset to reset the Fine Tune operation. This option is only available for analog broadcasts.74
Broadcast Audio Options
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Audio Options Try Now
Configure the program's audio language. Using this option is different for analog and digital channels.
Digital Broadcast Audio Options
● Preferred Language: Digital broadcasts are embedded with audio signals in multiple languages
which users can choose from. You do not need to manually configure digital broadcasts that
support the designated language. If the designated language is not supported, the default audio
language chosen by the TV station will be heard. Try Now
● Visual Impaired: Activate the audio guide for the visually impaired. This is only available with
broadcasts that provide this service. Try Now
Analog Broadcast Audio Options
● Multi-Track Sound: Configure the audio for the current broadcast. You can select a sound you
want to listen from among the ones being broadcasted. Multi-Track Sound may differ depending
on the program being broadcast or broadcast signal. Although user set this option to stereo,
if the broadcast signal or program is not supported a stereo, this option will be set to mono
automatically. Try Now
" Press INFO button to view the current broadcast's audio signal information.
" Press TOOLS button while watching TV to access and configure the Multi-Track Sound setting.
Sports Mode
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Sports Mode
This function is not available on U.S.A. and Canada.
Enable Sports Mode for the optimal sports viewing experience. However, enabling Sports Mode
disables the Picture, Sound and Broadcasting menu options. Disabling Sports Mode restores the
previous Picture and Sound settings.74 75
Subtitles
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption Try Now
View subtitles along with subtitle-enabled digital and analog broadcasts.
Show Subtitles
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption > Caption Try Now
Show subtitles. Subtitles will be displayed when you choose a broadcast that supports subtitles.
" DVD Subtitles are only available when connected to an external input connector.
Subtitle Options
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption > Caption Mode Try Now
Select a subtitle mode. The list of modes may vary depending on the broadcast.
● Default / CC1 ~ CC4 / Text1 ~ Text4: (analog channels only) The analog caption function
operates in either analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied from an external device
to the TV. (Depending on the broadcasting signal, the analog caption function may or may not
work with digital channels.)
● Default / CC1 ~ CC4 / Text1 ~ Text4 / Service1 ~ Service6: (Digital channels only) The digital
caption function works with digital channels. Service1 – Service6 may not be available in digital
caption mode depending on the broadcast.
Subtitle Display Options
Screen Menu > Broadcasting > Caption > Digital Caption Options Try Now
Specify the foreground and background settings. This option is available for digital channels.
● Size: Choose the subtitle size from the list.
● Font Style: Choose the foreground style from the list.
● Font Color: Choose a foreground color from the list.
● Background Color: Choose a background color from the list.
● Font Opacity: Choose a foreground opacity level from the list.
● Background Opacity: Choose a background opacity level from the list.
● Return to Default: Restores all subtitle display options to the Default settings. Default applies
settings chosen by the TV station.
" The foreground and background color and opacity settings cannot be the same.76 TV Settings
Basic Picture Settings
Screen Menu > Picture
Picture
Picture Mode Standard
• Backlight 12
• Contrast 100
• Brightness 45
• Sharpness 50
• Color 50
• Tint (G/R) G50 R50
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
The basic image settings alter the look and feel of the image displayed on the TV screen.
Changing the Picture Mode
Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Mode Try Now
Choose the optimal picture mode for your TV viewing conditions. When connected to a PC via an
HDMI-to-DVI cable, only the Standard and Entertain modes can be chosen.
● Dynamic: This increases the brightness of the screen. It is most suitable for bright environments.
● Standard: This is the default mode.
● Natural: This is useful for reducing eye strain. This mode is available for LED TVs only.
● Movie: Darkens the screen and reduces glare. Appropriate for darkened rooms, for watching
movies, and when experiencing eye fatigue.
● Entertain: Sharpens images for a more dynamic viewing experience. This mode is only available
when connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable.
● Stadium: This is chosen automatically when Sports Mode is turned on under the Smart Features
menu. This function is not available on U.S.A. and Canada.76 77
Picture Quality
Screen Menu > Picture
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Choose a Picture Mode and then select the following options to display a slide bar that allows the
corresponding setting to be adjusted. Adjust the value by dragging left/right on the touch pad and
change the setting by dragging up/down on the touch pad. Adjusted values are applied to the current
source and will remain in effect the next time the source is selected. When connected to a computer
via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, only the Color and Tint (G/R) adjustment options can be chosen.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Choose a Picture Mode and then select the following options to display a slide bar that allows the
corresponding setting to be adjusted. Adjust the value by pressing the left/right arrow button on the
remote and change the setting by pressing up/down arrow button on the remote. Adjusted values
are applied to the current source and will remain in effect the next time the source is selected. When
connected to a computer via an HDMI-to-DVI cable, only the Color and Tint (G/R) adjustment options
can be chosen.
● Backlight
Adjusts the brightness of individual pixels. Decreasing the brightness reduces power
consumption. This option is only available for LED TVs.
● Cell Light
Adjusts the brightness of the panel. Decreasing the brightness reduces power consumption. This
option is only available for PDP TVs.
● Contrast
Adjusts the screen contrast. Try Now
● Brightness
Adjusts the overall brightness. Try Now
● Sharpness
Sharpens or dulls the edges of objects. Try Now
● Color
Adjusts the overall color saturation. Try Now
● Tint (G/R)
Adjusts the ratio of green to red. Increase the green value to saturate the greens and the red
value to saturate the reds. Try Now
Applying the Current Picture Quality Setting to Another Input
Screen Menu> Picture > Apply Picture Mode Try Now
You can apply the picture quality setting that you configured for the TV to all external devices
connected to the TV.
To apply the setting to all external devices connected to the TV, select All Sources. To only apply the
setting to the current input, select Current Source.78
Picture Size
Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Size > Picture Size Try Now
Most TV programs and videos are displayed in full screen, but some programs and videos don’t fit the
screen. Users can change the picture size for such programs and videos. However, the available size
options may differ, depending on the video source. For details, see "Picture Size and Input Signal".
● 16:9: Set the picture to the 16:9 wide-screen format.
● Zoom1: Magnifies the 16:9 screen size to up and down. A magnified picture can be moved up
and down.
● Zoom2: Magnifies the Zoom1 screen size to up and down. A magnified picture can be moved up
and down.
● Wide Fit: Enlarge the aspect ratio of the picture so it fits the entire screen. Enjoy 4:3 images as
undistorted 16:9 images.
● 4:3: Sets the picture to basic 4:3 mode.
[ Do not leave the TV in 4:3 mode for an extended period. The dark borders displayed on the left
and right/top and bottom of the screen may cause image retention (screen burn). This is not
covered by the warranty. This mode is available for PDP TVs only.
● Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cutoff.
● Smart View 1: Reduces a 16:9 picture by 50%. This mode is only available for LED TVs and in
HDMI mode.
● Smart View 2: Reduces a 16:9 picture by 25%. This mode is only available for LED TVs and in
HDMI or DTV mode.78 79
Screen Position
Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Size > Position Try Now
The screen position can be adjusted if Picture Size is set to Zoom1, Zoom2, Wide Fit, or Screen Fit. In
DTV mode, the screen position cannot be adjusted if the Picture Size is set to Screen Fit.
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
11
To adjust the screen position, select Position and then Position from the popup window.
21
Drag on the touch pad to move the screen. Once done, select Position and then Close. Select
Reset to reset the screen position.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
11
To adjust the screen position, select Position and then Position from the popup window.
21
Press the arrow buttons on the remote to move the screen. Once done, select Position and then
Close. Select Reset to reset the screen position.
Picture Off
Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Off Try Now
Turns off the screen and plays audio only. To turn the screen back on, press any button except TV and
volume buttons.
Reset Image Settings
Screen Menu > Picture > Reset Picture Try Now
Reset all image settings for the current Picture Mode to the default settings. This does not affect other
Picture Modes.80
Advanced Settings
Screen Menu > Picture > Advanced Settings Try Now
Advanced Settings
Dynamic Contrast High
Black Tone Off
Flesh Tone 0
RGB Only Mode Off
Color Space Native
White Balance
10p White Balance Off
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Use Advanced Settings to fine-tune how images are displayed on the TV screen. The Advanced
Settings option is only available when Picture Mode is set to Standard or Movie. When the TV is
connected to a computer via an HDMI-DVI cable, only White Balance and Gamma can be adjusted.
● Dynamic Contrast
Automatically adjusts the screen contrast. Use this option to achieve the optimal contrast setting.
Try Now
● Black Tone
Adjusts the black color depth. Try Now
● Flesh Tone
Adjusts the amount of red in skin-color tones. Try Now80 81
● RGB Only Mode
Adjusts the red, green, and blue levels individually. Try Now
● Color Space
Adjusts the range of colors that can be expressed on screen. Auto automatically adjusts the
color space depending on the input signal, and Native applies a range that is wider than the input
signal. Custom allow the user to manually adjust a range of the desired color in the colors of the
input signal. Try Now
" Custom mode is only available with LED 6300 series and above.
● White Balance
Adjusts the color temperature of the picture to make white objects look white and the overall
picture appear natural. Adjust each color's luminosity with the offset menu and the brightness
with the gain menu. To restore the default values, select Reset. Try Now
● 10p White Balance
This function is not available with LED 4300, 5500 series and PDP 5500 series.
Adjusts the white balance by adjusting the brightness of the red, green, and blue elements in
10-point intervals. This option is only available when Picture Mode is set to Movie and may not
be supported by some external devices.
● Gamma
Adjusts the primary color intensity. Try Now
● Expert Pattern
This function is not available with LED 4300, 5500 series and PDP 5500 series.
Displays picture calibration patterns on the screen without using a separate pattern generator or
filter. Pattern1 is used to calibrate the contrast, and Pattern2 is used for calibrating the color and
color saturation. If the screen menu disappears or a different menu is activated while the screen
is being calibrated, this option will save the changes up to that point and automatically deactivate
that menu. This feature is enabled in Component and HDMI modes only.
● Motion Lighting
Adjusts the picture brightness depending on the on-screen movements for reduced power
consumption. This feature is only available when Picture Mode is set to Standard and is not
available in 3D mode. In addition, adjusting Contrast or Brightness automatically deactivates this
feature. Try Now82
Picture Options
Screen Menu > Picture > Picture Options Try Now
Picture Options
Color Tone Standard
Digital Clean View Auto
MPEG Noise Filter Auto
HDMI Black Level Low
Film Mode Off
Auto Motion Plus Standard
Cinema Black Off
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Use Picture Options to further improve the picture quality. When connected to a computer via an
HDMI-to-DVI cable, users can only change Color Tone.
● Color Tone
Adjusts the color tone. The setting is applied on an individual Picture Mode basis. When Picture
Mode is changed, the corresponding setting will apply automatically. If Picture Mode is set to
Dynamic, users can only choose between Cool and Standard. Try Now
● Digital Clean View
Reduces static and ghosting caused by weak signals. This feature is only available for ATV
channels. Selecting Auto Visualization displays the signal strength on the screen. Green indicates
the best possible signal. Try Now
● MPEG Noise Filter
Reduces MPEG noise and improves the video quality. Try Now82 83
● HDMI Black Level
This is available only for video input via an HDMI cable. Use this to reduce image retention that
may occur when watching video from an external device. Choose one of the black levels. Try Now
● Film Mode
Optimizes the picture quality for movies. Select the mode for watching movies. This feature is
only available when watching TV or when the input signal is AV, Component (480i, 1080i), or
HDMI (1080i). The Cinema Smooth option is only active when the TV inputs an HDMI 24Hz signal.
The Cinema Smooth option is only available for PDP 5500 series. Try Now
● Black optimizer
This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6800 series.
Adjust overall black color depth to give a change to picture depth. This is not available when
playing a media file or using the TV as a computer display.
● Auto Motion Plus
Use this to reduce blur and judder from scenes with rapid movement. If you select Custom, you
can configure the afterimage and screen trembling removal ratio and you can view a sharper
image through the LED Clear Motion function. This feature is only available for LED 6300 series
and above.
" While Auto Motion Plus is running, select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's INFO button
to display the resolution and frequency of the incoming video signal (60Hz). The displayed frequency is
not the same as the frequency of the picture the TV is displaying when Auto Motion Plus is activated.
● Cinema Black
This function is only available on the LED 7050/7100 series, except 75-inch TVs. In Movie mode,
this feature dims the top and bottom areas of the video image to provide a more immersive
viewing experience.
● LED Clear Motion
Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clear picture. This function is
only available for the LED 4300, 5500 series.84
Basic Sound Settings
Screen Menu > Sound
Sound
Sound Mode Standard
Sound Effect
3D Audio Low
Speaker Settings
Digital Audio Out
Reset Sound
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Use the Sound Settings to change the sound mode, enable/disable surround sound, adjust the
equalizer, and optimize the TV's sound.
Changing the Sound Mode
Screen Menu > Sound > Sound Mode Try Now
Sound modes make adjustments to the sound output. However, Sound Modes are not available when
using external speakers only.
● Standard: This is the normal sound mode.
● Music: This mode emphasizes normal music instead of voices.
● Movie: This mode is calibrated to provide the best sound for movies.
● Clear Voice: This mode emphasizes voices.
● Amplify: This increases the overall intensity of high-frequency sounds for a better listening
experience. It is designed for hearing-impaired listeners.
● Stadium: This is chosen automatically when Sports Mode is turned on under the Smart Features
menu. This function is not available on U.S.A. and Canada.84 85
Adjusting the Sound Settings
Screen Menu > Sound > Sound Effect Try Now
Use sound effects to alter how the TV projects sound. These options are available only when Speaker
Select is set to TV Speaker and Sound Mode is set to Standard.
● DTS TruSurround: Produces sound that will make you feel like you are sitting in a movie theater
or concert hall. Try Now
● DTS TruDialog: Increases the voice intensity to make dialog clearer. Try Now
● Equalizer: Adjusts the speaker balance and makes bandwidth adjustments. Select Reset to reset
the settings. Try Now
Auto Volume
Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > Auto Volume Try Now
Because each station has its own set of broadcasting conditions, the volume may fluctuate as the
channel changes. The Auto Volume function automatically adjusts the volume of a channel by lowering
or raising the sound output. Normal applies a normal level of volume adjustment, whereas Night
applies a slightly lower volume level than Normal and is ideal for nighttime TV viewing. To use the
volume control of a connected source device, deactivate the Auto Volume function. When using the
Auto Volume function with a source device, the device’s volume control may not function properly.
TV Installation Type
Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > TV Installation Type Try Now
Select the TV's installation type. Choose between Wall Mount and Stand to optimize the TV's sound
automatically.
Resetting the Sound
Screen Menu > Sound > Reset Sound Try Now
This resets all sound settings to the factory defaults.86
3D Audio
Screen Menu > Sound > 3D Audio
Sound
Sound Mode Standard
Sound Effect
3D Audio Low
Speaker Settings
Digital Audio Out
Reset Sound
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
This function is only available with the PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series and higher.
3D audio technology provides immersive sound that matches the pop-up effect of 3D video by using
perspective in the audio depth control. 3D Audio is only available while viewing 3D content.86 87
Speaker Settings
Sound
Sound Mode Standard
Sound Effect
3D Audio Low
Speaker Settings
Digital Audio Out
Reset Sound
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
If the TV's audio is sent to an external device such as a home theater system, you can designate
which speakers to use and make adjustments to eliminate decoding speed echoes.
Speaker Select
Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > Speaker Select Try Now
You can choose which speakers to use from among available several speakers. Choose one from the
list of speakers. To use both the TV speakers and the AV receiver speakers simultaneously, set this
option to TV Speaker. If there is a delay between the two sounds, choose any other than TV Speaker
to mute the TV speakers.
" Using the external speakers only disables the volume button and the mute function. In addition, certain
Sound options will be disabled.88
Digital Audio Output
Screen Menu > Sound > Digital Audio Out Try Now
This TV is SPDIF-enabled. The Sony Philips Digital Interface (SPDIF) provides digital audio output to
speakers and various digital devices, including A/V Receivers and home theaters. This feature reduces
interference and distortion.
● Audio Format: Selects the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format. The available Digital Audio output
(SPDIF) formats may vary depending on the input source. Try Now
● Audio Delay: This setting helps correct timing mismatches between the audio and video tracks
when watching TV and listening to audio through a digital audio device. Enabling the feature
displays a slide bar that you can use to adjust the delay by up to 250ms. Try Now
Samsung Audio Device Connection
Screen Menu > Sound > Speaker Settings > SoundShare Settings
This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6400 series or higher.
Connect the TV to a Samsung audio device for a richer, clearer sound. This function is available for
Samsung Audio Device supported the SoundShare function.
Pair the Samsung audio device using the TV's Bluetooth function. Refer to the Samsung audio device's
operating manual for more information on pairing.
● Add New Device
Enables/disables SoundShare. Connection signals from new devices are ignored if they are set to
Off.
● Samsung Audio Device List
Displays a list of paired Samsung audio devices. Select a device to display its menu options.
Activate/deactivate the audio device or remove it from the list.
" When using a Bluetooth audio device, a slight mismatch between the audio and video may occur,
depending on the content.88 89
Clock and Timer
System
Setup
Menu Language English
Time
Device Manager
Eco Solution
Auto Protection Time 2 hours
Change PIN
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Use the clock and timer to make scheduled use of the TV easier and more efficient. Once the clock
has been set, you can select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's INFO button to check
the current time. The clock must be reset every time the power is disconnected.
Setting the Time
Screen Menu > System > Time > Clock Try Now
Set the clock manually or automatically.90
Auto
Automatically download the correct time from a digital channel. To enable this option, an antenna
cable has to be connected to the TV. The accuracy of the time information received may vary
depending on the channel and signal. Set Clock Mode to Auto.
" Time Zone and DST may not be supported depending on the country.
● DST: Set the DST (Daylight Savings Time).
● Time Zone: Choose your time zone.
Time Offset
Screen Menu > System > Time > Clock > Time Offset Try Now
If the set time is not accurate, users can set the time offset to adjust the time difference hourly from
-12 to +12 hour. Changing Time Offset is only available, when the Time is set to auto, and is set
through a network.
The current time will be set through a network, if the TV fails to receive the time information including
the broadcast signal from TV stations. (ex: Watching TV via set-top box, Satellite receiver, or etc)
Manual
Manually enter the time. Set Clock Mode to Manual and then select Clock Set to enter the current
time and date.
Sleep Timer
Screen Menu > System > Time > Sleep Timer Try Now
This function automatically shuts off the TV after a preconfigured period of time. You can set the timer
up to 180 minutes in 30 minute increments.90 91
On Timer
Screen Menu > System > Time > On Timer Try Now
Set the On Timer so that the TV turns on automatically at a chosen time. Only three On Timer settings
can run concurrently. The clock must be set for the On Timer to work.
● Setup: Specify the dates and duration. Use Manual to specify the days of the week.
● Time: Specifies the on time.
● Volume: Specifies the volume when the TV turns on.
● Source: Selects a signal source from the list. Specify a channel or source to be displayed when
the TV turns on. To specify a USB device, a USB device must first be connected to the TV. To
playback media from an HDMI or Component source such as a DVD player or Blu-ray player, the
device must already be turned on and playing the media when the TV is turned on.
● Antenna: Set Source to TV to select a broadcast signal.
● Channel: Set Source to TV to select a channel.
● Music / Photo: Set Source to USB to specify a USB device folder containing music and image
files. Selecting both music and image files plays the music files and displays the images at the
same time.
" This feature will not function properly if the selected USB device does not contain media files or a folder
has not been specified.
" The slideshow will not start if there is only one image file on the USB device.
" Folders with long names cannot be selected.
" Always use different folder names for multiple USB devices.
" Use a USB memory stick or multi-card reader. On Timer may not work with certain battery-powered USB
devices, MP3 players, or PMPs because the TV may take too long to recognize the device.
Off Timer
Screen Menu > System > Time > Off Timer Try Now
Set the Off Timer to turn the TV off automatically at a specific time. Only three Off Timer settings can
be entered concurrently. The clock must be set for the Off Timer to work.
● Setup: Specifies the date or period to run the function. Use Manual to specify the days of the
week.
● Time: Sets the time for the TV to automatically turn off.92
Screen Protection and Maintenance
System
Setup
Menu Language English
Time
Device Manager
Eco Solution
Auto Protection Time 2 hours
Change PIN
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Several onboard functions exist that help maintain the TV beyond its useful lifespan and decrease
power consumption.
Eco Solution
Screen Menu > System > Eco Solution Try Now
Eco Solution adjusts the TV's brightness level and prevents overheating to reduce overall power
consumption.
● Energy Saving
Select a brightness setting from the list to reduce the TV's power consumption. Try Now
● Eco Sensor
Automatically adjusts the TV's brightness level based on the ambient light level to reduce the
TV's power consumption. If the Eco Sensor has adjusted the screen's brightness level, you can
manually adjust the screen's minimum brightness level by adjusting Min. Backlight or Min Cell
Light (applicable models). If Eco Sensor is enabled and the Picture menu's Backlight or Cell Light
(applicable models) value is changed, Eco Sensor is automatically disabled.
This function is not available LED 4300 series.
● No Signal Power Off
Select a time from the list. If no signal is received for the specified duration, the TV will
automatically cut off the power to reduce power consumption. Try Now
● Auto Power Off
If the TV remains turned on for four hours without any user input, the TV will automatically turn
off to prevent overheating. Try Now92 93
Screen Burn Protection
Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection
This feature is only available for PDP TVs.
To reduce the possibility of screen burn, the TV uses Pixel Shift screen burn prevention technology.
Pixel Shift moves the picture slightly on the screen to avoid over-using some elements and underusing others. The Pixel Shift Time setting allows users to program the time between picture
movements, in minutes.
The TV also has the following additional screen burn protection functions:
● Pixel Shift
● Auto Protection Time
● Scrolling
● Side Gray
Pixel Shift
Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Pixel Shift
Set the TV to very slightly shift pixels on the PDP screen in a horizontal or vertical direction to
minimize burned-in after-images.
The Pixel Shift value may differ depending on the monitor size and mode. It is not available in Screen
Fit mode.
Settings:
● Horizontal: Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels), Optimum settings for TV/AV/Component/HDMI: 4
● Vertical: Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels), Optimum settings for TV/AV/Component/HDMI: 4
● Time (minutes): 1 – 4 min, Optimum settings for TV/AV/Component/HDMI: 4 min
Auto Protection Time
Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Auto Protection Time
If the screen displays a still image for a certain period of, the TV activates the screen saver to prevent
the formation of burnt-in ghost images.94
Scrolling
Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Scrolling
This removes after-images on the screen by illuminating all the pixels on the PDP according to a set
pattern. Use this when there are after-images or symbols on the screen, especially when a still image
was displayed on the screen for a long time.
The after-image removal function has to be executed for approximately 1 hour to effectively remove
after-images. If the after-image is not removed the first time, repeat the process.
Press any button to cancel this process.
Side Gray
Screen Menu > System > Screen Burn Protection > Side Gray
This allows selection of colors for the sidebars the TV displays when the screen size is set to 4:3. The
default color is gray.
Auto Protection Time
Screen Menu > System > Auto Protection Time
Select a time from the list. If a still image is shown on the screen for the specified duration of time,
the TV will automatically activate the Screen Burn Protection function to prevent burnt-in ghost
images. This feature is only available for LED TVs.94 95
Password
System
Device Manager
Eco Solution
Auto Protection Time 2 hours
Change PIN
General
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) On
DivX® Video On Demand
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
This TV requires a password to lock out channels and to reset its settings to the factory default.
Change Password
Screen Menu > System > Change PIN Try Now
Change the TV's password.
11
Run Change PIN and then enter the current password in the password field. The default password
is 0000.
21
Enter a new password and then enter it again to confirm it. The password change is complete.
If you forget the PIN code, press the buttons in the following sequence which resets the PIN to “0-0-
0-0”:
For Standard Remote Control:
In Standby mode: MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 → POWER (on)
For Smart Touch Control:
When the TV turnes on: MUTE → Volume up → RETURN → Volume down → RETURN → Volume up →
RETURN96
Additional Features
System
Setup
Menu Language English
Time
Device Manager
Eco Solution
Auto Protection Time 2 hours
Change PIN
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
There are many elements available for customizing the TV for individual user preferences.
Changing the Menu Language
Screen Menu > System > Menu Language Try Now
Select a menu language from the list.
Game Mode
Screen Menu > System > General > Game Mode Try Now
Game Mode optimizes the TV's settings for playing video games on a gaming console such as
PlayStation™ or Xbox™. Read the following information before using Game Mode.
Precautions and Restrictions
● Game Mode cannot be used for normal TV viewing.
● Connect the gaming console before enabling Game Mode. Otherwise, the picture quality may
suffer.
● Game Mode can result in some images shaking.
● Enabling Game Mode automatically sets Picture Mode to Standard and Sound Mode to Movie.
● Once finished, disconnect the gaming console and disable Game Mode before plugging in a
different external device.96 97
BD Wise
Screen Menu > System > General > BD Wise
This function is available only with PDP 5500 series and LED 6300 series and above.
Connecting a Samsung DVD player, Blu-ray player, or home theater system that supports BD Wise
enables you to enjoy the richest colors and picture quality possible. Enabling BD Wise automatically
optimizes the TV's resolution. This feature is only available when the external device is connected via
an HDMI cable.
Menu Transparency
Screen Menu > System > General > Menu Transparency Try Now
Adjust the menu screen's transparency.
Sound Feedback
Screen Menu > System > General > Sound Feedback Try Now
Adjust the sound feedback volume or disable it entirely. Sound feedback is an audio cue that plays
when you move the focus or make a selection.
Panel Locking
Screen Menu > System > General > Panel Lock Try Now
Lock or unlock all the keys on the front panel. The panel keys are located at the back of the TV and
can be used to select options, to change the channel, and to adjust the volume.
Booting Logo
Screen Menu > System > General > Boot Logo Try Now
Enable/disable displaying the logo while the TV starts up.
DivX® Video On Demand
Screen Menu > System > DivX® Video On Demand Try Now
Product registration is required to play back videos protected with DivX® DRM. Visit the DivX website
and register the code displayed on the screen.98 SMART TV Features
Smart Hub
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Open Smart Hub Try Now
This TV features Smart Hub, a multi-purpose entertainment and family center. With Smart Hub, users
can surf the web, download applications, and stay in touch with family and friends through social
networking services. In addition, you can enjoy photo, video & music files stored on external storage
devices.
Press the button to launch Smart Hub. Choose a service using the icons displayed in the top part
of the screen.
● Social: Watch the latest YouTube videos and you and your friends' video posts on Facebook
and Twitter. You can also make video calls to friends by connecting the TV to a camera (sold
separately).
● Apps: Samsung Apps offers an extensive collection of free and paid news, sports, weather, and
gaming content you can directly download to and enjoy on your TV.
● On TV: Check a listing of programs that are currently airing and are scheduled to air.
● Movies & TV Shows: Purchase and watch movies and TV shows without the need for a separate
external device.
● Photos, Videos & Music: Play back photo, video, and music files from an external storage device.
Use † or … to change the Smart Hub screens.
Agreements Required to Use Smart Hub
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy
Carefully read the terms and conditions to use Smart Hub, and determine whether or not to agree to
them. Users cannot use Smart Hub fully unless they agree to them.98 99
Samsung Account
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account
Samsung Account
Log In
Edit Profile
Link Service Accounts
Remove Accounts from TV
Create Account
Terms & Conditions
Privacy Policy
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
A Samsung account allows you to get even more out of Smart Hub. You can create a Samsung
account using your email address.
Creating a Samsung Account
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Log In
From the login screen, select Create Account and then follow the on-screen instructions.
" Once a Samsung account has been created, a confirmation email will be sent to the email address you
entered as your ID. Open the confirmation email and click on the confirmation button to finalize the
Samsung account setup process.
Creating a Samsung Account Using a Facebook Account
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Create Account > Create Samsung Account
with Facebook
A Facebook account makes it easier to create a Samsung account. When a Samsung account is created
using a Facebook account, the Facebook account is also registered on the TV.
Logging In
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Log In
Use your Samsung account to log into the Smart Hub. Enter your ID and password and then select Log
In.
The Remember my password option lets you login without having to enter your password each time.
Check this option to enable it. Check the Sign me in automatically option if you want to log into
Smart Hub automatically.
If you forgot your password, select Reset password to receive the password resetting instructions via
email.100
Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Terms & Conditions / Privacy Policy
Carefully read the terms and conditions to use Samsung Account, and determine whether or not to
agree to them. Users cannot use Samsung Account fully unless they agree to them. However, you can
only view the entire terms and conditions after signing in with your Samsung account and you can use
your Samsung Account after agreeing to the terms and conditions.
Linking a Samsung Account to Other Accounts
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account > Link Service Accounts
Linking your Samsung account to other accounts lets you automatically log into your linked accounts
when you log into your Samsung account. For example, you can download the Facebook application
and link your Facebook account to your Samsung account. Logging into your Samsung account then
automatically logs you into your Facebook account as well.
Log into your Samsung account and select Link Service Accounts to view a list of applications that
require login information.
● Register Service Account: Select an application, select Register, and then provide the ID and
password.
● Edit: It is possible to change a registered account. Select an application, select Edit, and enter the
ID and password for the new account.
● Remove: Select an application to which an account has been registered and then select
Deregister.
Managing Accounts
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Samsung Account
Using the Samsung Account menu, you can manage your Samsung account. You can only use this
function after signing in with your Samsung account.
● Edit Profile: You can change the basic user information and register your photo and credit card
information.
● Remove Accounts from TV: The Samsung account used to sign into the Smart Hub is
automatically saved on the TV. You can delete your account information from among the saved
accounts on the TV.100 101
Resetting Smart Hub
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Smart Hub Reset
It is possible to remove Samsung accounts and everything linked to them, including apps, from the TV.
Enter the password when accessing this menu. To use Smart Hub fully again after resetting it, users
are required to agree to the terms of conditions. Open the System menu, choose Setup, and then
follow the initial setup process.
Searching
Users can search many apps and their contents on the TV as well as the Web.
Keyword Search
For U.S.A. and Canada
Press the RECOMM. / SEARCH button. The list appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the
RECOMM. / SEARCH button again. Enter search criteria using the on-screen keyboard that appears,
and then select Done. A list of search results appears. Select a desired item from a list of search
results. The selected item's page appears.
For the other countries
Press the HISTORY / SEARCH button. The list appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the HISTORY
/ SEARCH button again. Enter search criteria using the on-screen keyboard that appears, and then
select Done. A list of search results appears. Select a desired item from a list of search results. The
selected item's page appears.
Setting Search Scope
Select icon on the Search result screen. User can set up the desired search range in the scope list.102
Status and Notification
A notification message window appears at the top of the screen when important messages concerning
application updates and Samsung account logins are available. This message window notifies the user
of the TV's operating status.
Show Status and Notification Banner
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Press the MORE button on the Smart Touch Control and then select STATUS on the virtual remote
panel that appears on the screen. The status and notification banner is shown at the top of the screen.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Press the STATUS button. The status and notification banner is shown at the top of the screen.
Voice Recognition & Motion Control Configuration
Enable/disable the status and notification banner's Voice Recognition and Motion Control functions.
It's also possible to perform the Motion Control Environment Test.
Samsung Account Configuration
Select My Account from the status and notification banner to manage your Samsung account. For
more information, refer to "Managing Accounts".
Network Configuration
Select Network Settings from the status and notification banner to configure the network.
For details on how to connect to a wired network, see "Wired Network Setup".
For details on how to connect to a wireless network, see "Wireless Network Setup".
Check Notifications
If you were not able to check the notification message, you can see a list of unread notification
messages in the status and notifications banner. You can also check notifications from Notifications
(Smart Features > Notifications). Try Now
Selecting a notification from the list allows you to perform corresponding actions with ease. To delete
all notifications, select Delete All.
Selecting Service Notice launches WebBrowser to display the notification webpage of the Samsung
website.102 103
Social
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Watch the latest YouTube videos and you and your friends' video posts on Facebook and Twitter. You
can also make video calls to friends by connecting the TV Camera (sold separately).
Social Settings
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Social Settings Try Now
Checking the Application
Certain applications need to be installed on the TV in order to use the Social feature. If a selected
application has not been installed on your TV, you will need to install it first. For more information on
installing applications, refer to "Samsung Apps".
Connecting a Service to a Samsung Account
Social service accounts need to be linked to a user's Samsung account first. If you do not have a
social service account, create one by visiting the website of that service. For more information on
connecting to a social service, refer to "Linking a Samsung Account to Other Accounts".104
Watching Videos
Select Friends' Picks or What's Hot at the bottom of the Social screen to display a list of videos.
Select a video from the list to view its information and then select Play.
Friend Profile
Select Friends at the bottom of the Social screen to display a list of Facebook and Twitter friends.
Select a friend from the list. The selected friend's profile containing his/her basic information and
posts is displayed
Video Calling a Friend
Select Video Call at the bottom of the Social screen. This launches Skype and displays a list of
friends. Select a friend to call.
Filters
Log in to a Samsung account to use this function.
Select either Friends' Picks or Friends and Video Call on the Social screen. Use the filter option at
the top of the screen to rearrange the list. Select an item. However, this option cannot be used in the
What's Hot list.104 105
Apps
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
Samsung Apps offers an extensive collection of free and paid news, sports, weather, and gaming
content you can directly download to and enjoy on your TV. First, check the network and make sure
the TV is connected to the Internet. Your TV needs to be connected to the Internet in order to use
Apps.
Precautions
● Due to the product characteristics featured on the Samsung Smart Hub, as well as limitations in
available content, certain features, applications, and services may not be available on all devices
or in all territories. Some Smart Hub features may also require additional peripheral devices
or membership fees. Visit http://www.samsung.com for more information on specific device
information and content availability. Services and content availability are subject to change
without prior notice.
● Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for any interruption of the Smart Hub service
caused by the service provider for any reason.
● Application services may be provided in English only and available content may vary, depending
on the area.
● For more information about applications, visit the applicable service provider's website.
● An unstable Internet connection may cause delays or interruptions. In addition, applications may
terminate automatically depending on the network environment. If this occurs, check your Internet
connection and try again.
● Application services and updates may become unavailable.
● Application content is subject to change by the service provider without prior notice.
● The service details may vary depending on the user's firmware version.
● The application usage method may vary with future versions of the application. If this is the case,
run the application's tutorial or visit the service provider's website.106
Installing Standard Applications
Launching Smart Hub for the first time and loading the Apps screen. The TV is automatically
downloads and installs the basic applications that correspond to the network your TV is connected to.
The types of basic applications may vary depending on your location.
Launching an Application
Navigate to the Smart Hub's Apps screen and then select More Apps located at the bottom of the
screen. The list of applications currently installed on your TV is displayed. From this list, select the
application you want to launch. Select View (top of the screen) to rearrange the list of downloaded
applications by the installation date, launch date, or title.
Samsung Apps
Samsung Apps offers various free and paid news, sports, weather, and gaming applications. Samsung
Apps lets you search for applications and install them directly on your TV. Read and agree to the
terms and conditions of use and then browse through the categories or directly search for applications.
Try Now
Searching for Apps
Search for applications by name. On the Samsung Apps screen, select the Search Samsung Apps to
bring up the keypad. Enter the application's name and then select Done.
Installing Applications
Select the application you wish to install to bring up a screen with detailed information about
that application. Select Download to install the selected application. Paid applications, however,
must be purchased before you can install them. Visit the Samsung Apps TV website at http://
tv.samsungapps.com and recharge your account with App Cash before purchasing paid applications.106 107
Apps Management
You can customize the My Apps screen. You can also manage installed applications and configure
application update settings
Edit My Apps
Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and then select Edit My Apps. You can customize the
My Apps screen.
Change Order
From the Edit My Apps screen, select the applications you wish to rearrange, change the order, and
then press the touch pad or press the E button on regular remote control.
Removing Applications
Remove unused applications from the My Apps' application list. Removed applications are moved to
the More Apps list.
From the Edit My Apps screen, select the applications you wish to remove and then move them to
the first or last row of the My Apps list. An 'X' will appear at the top or bottom of the icons of the
selected applications. Move the applications in the direction of the 'X'. A popup window will appear.
Select Yes from the popup window to remove the selected applications from the My Apps list.
From the Edit My Apps screen, select Delete All to remove all applications from the My Apps list.
Adding Applications
Applications that have been installed on the TV but do not show up in the My Apps list can be added
to the list.
Select the applications you wish to add from the More Apps list at the top of the Edit My Apps
screen. Selected apps are added to the My Apps list.108
Deleting Applications
Delete applications installed on your TV. Deleting an application deletes all data associated with that
application.
Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and then select Delete. A check box appears on the
application icons. Select all the applications you wish to delete and then select Delete. A popup
window appears. select Yes. Applications in gray cannot be deleted.
" You can reinstall deleted applications for free from Samsung Apps.
Managing Application Folders
Create folders and manage applications by group. Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and
then Create Folder. Enter a name for the new folder.
Select Options to rename the folder or move applications to that folder.
Application Lock/Unlock
Lock/unlock applications. Navigate to More Apps screen, select Options, and then select Lock /
Unlock. Enter the password and then select the applications you wish to lock. A lock symbol appears
on the selected applications. To unlock, simply select the application again.
Application Update
When the application require to update to the latest version, select Apps and then select More
Apps. On the More Apps screen, select Update Apps, and then select application from the list. The
application starts updating to the latest version. However, Update Apps appears on the screen only
when the update is required.108 109
Fitness
Fitness is an application that helps you stay fit. Create a profile, set up an exercise plan, and start
exercising according to a structured regimen. Read and agree to the terms and conditions before using
Fitness. Try Now
[ Do a warm-up or some stretches before exercising. Users must stop exercising immediately if
they experience pain, or become dizzy, exhausted or short of breath.
Creating a Profile
Follow the on-screen instructions and enter your information to create a profile.
Kids
This is a quick launcher and recommended list for applications and content that is suitable for
children and even provides services not currently installed on your TV. Using Kids, you can download
applications and content for your children to your TV. Certain services, however, are fee-based. Try
Now
On the Kids screen, select the TOOLS button on the virtual remote panel or press the TOOLS button
on regular remote control. The list screen appears. Select Tutorial Video from the list, user can view
the introductory video for more information about Kids anytime.110
WebBrowser
WebBrowser is a web-browsing application. Using WebBrowser, you can browse the Internet on
your TV as you would on your computer and even watch TV while you surf the web. The browsing
experience, however, may not be the same as it is on your computer. Use a keyboard and mouse for a
more convenient web browsing experience. Try Now
Social Networks
Share your thoughts and comments about a program on the air through social networking services.
Social Networks displays social network services such as Twitter, Facebook, Google Talk, on a single
screen. You can even post messages and comments in the same manner as you would using a
computer. You must first link your Samsung account to the respective SNS accounts before you can
access them using Social Networks.
For more information about using the service, visit the application's website.
Linking Service Accounts
Link your SNS (Twitter, Facebook, Google Talk, etc.) to your Samsung account. Launch Social
Networks, select an SNS, and then register the account you have with that SNS.
Once linked, you can use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to access the registered SNS. You
can update your feed, post comments, and even change the viewing mode.110 111
Apps Settings
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Apps Settings Try Now
Configure the apps installed on your TV.
Auto Ticker
Configure selected tickers to display automatically when the TV is turned on. A ticker is a service
that displays stock values, news, and weather updates on the screen in real-time. Enabling the Ticker
service brings you up-to-the-minute information while you watch TV. From the Auto Ticker list, select
the applications to run. If a selected application has not been installed on your TV, you will need to
install it first.
Push Notification Settings
Enable/disable push notifications from applications. Push notifications are displayed on the screen as
you watch TV. You can then select these notifications to get more information.
Channel-Bound Apps
Channel-Bound Apps can be used when watching a channel that supports applications for the current
program's data services.
Properties
You can view the Apps version, the TV's serial number, and the Netflix ESN. In addition, you can check
the TV's total and available memory capacity.112
On TV
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
This function is only available on U.S.A. and Canada.
While you watch TV, a list of recommended programs on other channels appears on the screen.
You can use this list to change the channel and find out more information about the recommended
programs including how much time is left until they air.
Branded content is only available on models for sale in the U.S.A.
" Certain features within SMART Hub require internet access and may not be available based on service
provider, language, dialect and region.
" On TV's program and channel information recommendations may differ from actual information depending
on service providers and broadcasts.112 113
On TV Settings
Screen Menu > Smart Features > On TV Settings Try Now
Customize the On TV screen.
On TV Setup
Set a broadcast media type and TV stations for the On TV screen, following the on-screen
instructions.
Recommendation Notice
With this enabled, when one of popular TV programs that the user has often watched is currently on
the air, the TV notifies the user.
Auto Start
You can configure On TV to automatically launch when the TV is turned on.
Recommendation Method
Determine whether to display upcoming TV programs by user preference or general popularity.
Adult Contents Block
With this enabled, adult TV programs are not listed on the On TV screen.114
Watching an On-Air Recommended Program
Select a program from the right side of the screen. This changes the channel to the selected program.
Scheduled Recommended Program Info
The following list displays the information and viewing times of recommended programs that have not
yet aired. Select a program from the list to see more information about the program and to access the
following options:
● Jump to Channel: Jump to the selected program's channel.
● Timer: Set up a Schedule Viewing.
● Related Contents: Displays the related contents list of the selected program. Select a desired
contents in the list. User can view the information screen of the selected contents.
● Share: Like/dislike the selected program or share information about the selected program via an
SNS.
Activating the Guide
Select Guide at the bottom of the screen to launch the Guide. For more information, refer to "Guide".
Program Recommendations by Time
Select Timeline View at the bottom of the screen to display program recommendations for different
times of the day.114 115
Movies & TV Shows
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
This function is not supported depending on the region.
Movies & TV Shows recommends you Movies and TV Shows video on demand content. This
aggregates multiple local VOD content local to help you browse and watch all you want in one place.
Open Smart Hub and move to Movies & TV Shows. You can have recommendations and purchase
VOD on TV. Enjoy Premium VOD on TV simply.
This service or some of functions of it may be not available in some countries or region.116
Buying Movies
To browse movies and TV shows, select one of the following on the bottom of the screen.
● Favorites: View the user’s preferred movies and TV shows.
● Featured: View the most outstanding movies and TV shows.
● Movies: View the latest movies.
● TV Shows: View the latest TV shows.
Playing Movies
Select Purchased at the lower-right corner of the screen. Select one of purchased movies and TV
shows to play it.
Parental Control
Screen Menu > Smart Features > VOD Rating Lock
Lock movies and TV shows rated a certain class or higher to prevent children from watching them.
Open the Smart Features menu, choose VOD Rating Lock, and enter the passcode.
Turn on VOD Rating Lock and set any necessary options.116 117
Photos, Videos & Music
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
" On the Photos, Videos & Music screen, the Enjoyed Content panel only shows recently-played media files
from either removable storage devices connected to the TV via USB, or DLNA-enabled devices connected to
the TV via network.
Enjoy photo, video and music files from an external storage device directly on your TV. Back up
important files before connecting an external storage device to the TV. Samsung will not be held
responsible for damaged or lost files.
Restrictions
● Supports MSC (Mass Storage Class) USB devices only. MSC is a class designation for mass
storage devices. Types of MSC devices include external hard drives, flash card readers, and
digital cameras. (USB hubs are not supported.) these kinds of devices must be connected directly
to the TV's USB port. The TV may not be able to recognize the USB device or read the files on
the device if it is connected to the TV via a USB extension cable. Do not disconnect the USB
device while transferring files.
● When connecting an external hard drive, use the USB (HDD) port. We recommend that you use an
external hard drive with its own power adapter.
● Certain digital cameras and audio devices may not be compatible with the TV.
● If there are multiple USB devices connected to the TV, the TV might not be able to recognize
some or all the devices. USB devices that use high-power input (500mA or 5V) may not be
supported.
● Supported file systems are FAT, exFAT, and NTFS.
● Sorting the files in Folder view mode can display up to 1,000 files per folder. If the USB device
contains more than 8,000 files and folders, however, some files and folders might not be
accessible.
● PTP connection mode is fully available only with digital cameras. When connecting a smartphone
or tablet to the TV using PTP mode, it may not be recognized.118
Supported File Formats
This TV is capable of playing back the following types of files. For more information, refer to the
"Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec" section.
● Photos: .bmp, .jpg, .mpo, .png
● Music: .aac, .flac, .m4a, .mpa, .mp3, .ogg, .wma
● Video: .3gp, .avi, .asf, .flv, .m2ts, .mkv, .mov, .mp4, .mpg, .mts, .svi, .ts, .tp, .trp, .vob, .vro,
.webm, .wmv
● Subtitles: .ass, .psb, .smi, .srt, .ssa, .sub, .ttxt, .txt
With .avi, .mkv, and .mp4 files, the TV supports embedded subtitles.
" Certain files, depending on how they were encoded, may not play on the TV.
USB Device Connection
Plug the USB device into the TV's USB port. Play back stored media files as follows:
● Connecting a USB device while the TV is turned on displays a popup window. Select the type of
media you want to play.
● Move to Photos, Videos & Music at the top of the Smart Hub screen. Select the type of media
you want to play and then the USB device that contains the files.
● Select the USB device from the Source screen. A popup window appears. Select the type of
media you want to play.
USB Device Removal
Press the SOURCE button to access the Source screen. Select the USB device you want to remove and
then select Tools at the top of the screen.
Select Remove USB from the list to safely remove the selected USB device.118 119
Playing all the Content on a Storage Device
Select the All Content on the Photos, Videos & Music screen, you can play all the content saved on a
storage device regardless of the type of content (videos, photos, music). Try Now
Clearing the Recent Playlist
Screen Menu > Smart Features > Remove viewing history > Photos, Videos & Music
The Photos, Videos & Music screen displays thumbnails of recently-played media files. Selecting a
thumbnail plays the media file.
Using Networked External Storage Devices
This TV can directly display media files from web storage devices and computers and DLNA-enabled
devices connected to the TV over a network. To display the media files on an external storage
device, the device must support DLNA and be connected to the same network as the TV. For more
information, refer to the manual of the external storage device.
For example, you can display the media files on your Smartphone or web storage in the following
ways:
● Send a media playback request to the TV from a Smartphone or computer.
● Establish a link between the TV and a computer/Smartphone/web storage and play the media
files.
● Use a Smartphone to send a request to the TV to play the media files stored on a computer or
use a computer to request playing the media files stored on a Smartphone.
● Log into your Samsung account and play the media files stored on your web storage.
" Certain media files stored on a networked external storage device may not play on the TV, depending on
their resolution and format. In addition, certain functions may not be available.
" Certain files may not play smoothly. If this is the case, use a USB storage device.
Move to Photos, Videos & Music at the top of the Smart Hub screen. Select the media type and then
the device where the media file is located. The folder and file list of the selected external storage
device are shown.120
Allowing DLNA Device Connections
Screen Menu > Network > AllShare Settings
Selecting AllShare Settings screen Content Sharing displays a list of external storage devices
connected to the same network as the TV. Select a device to allow it to connect to the TV. You can
only play media files from devices that have been allowed to connect to the TV. This function is
available for all DLNA DMC devices. Alternatively, you can send a media playback request from an
external device that has not yet been allowed to connect to the TV and then accept the connection
when prompted.
AllShare
AllShare makes it easy to retrieve and enjoy media files from computers and DLNA-enabled devices.
However, computers need to be installed with AllShare PC and mobile devices need to support
AllShare. For more information, visit the Samsung Content & Service portal (http://link.samsung.com).
" You may experience compatibility issues when attempting to play media files via a third-party DLNA server.
Exporting Contents
From the Options list located at the top of the screen, select Send. Select all the contents files you
wish to export and then select Send. This exports the selected files to a different storage device.
Possible file export pairings are as follows:
Source Device Target Device
USB Device DLNA Device, SugarSync, Dropbox, Mobile Device
Camera DLNA Device
DLNA Device USB Device
SugarSync, Dropbox USB Device
Mobile Device USB Device120 121
Videos
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
Select the video file from the list or select the ∂ button on the virtual remote panel to play video. Use
the Smart Touch Control or the on-screen buttons to control the video playback.
Press the touch pad to bring up the on-screen buttons and press the RETURN button to hide them. To
stop playing the file, select the ∫ button on the virtual remote panel or press the RETURN button. Try
Now
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Select the video file from the list or select the ∂ button on the remote control to play video. Use the
remote control or the on-screen buttons to control the video playback.
Press the E button to bring up the on-screen buttons and press the RETURN button to hide them. To
stop playing the file, press the ∫ button on remote control or press the RETURN button.
Changing the view mode
On the file list screen, select View on the top right of the screen and choose a category. The file list is
sorted by the chosen category.
Playlist Creation
From the Options list at the top of the screen, select Play Selected, specify all the video files you wish
to play, and then select Play. This creates a playlist. This creates a playlist. If the list is displayed in
Folder view mode, only the files contained in the current folder can be selected. To select files from
other folders, change the view mode.122
Opening a Different File
● Select the €/‚ on-screen button.
● Select the on-screen button and then Search Titles.
Video Scanning
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
● Drag left/right on the touch pad. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward.
● Select the †/
… button on the virtual remote panel. This changes the playback speed by up to
300%. To restore normal playback speed, select ∂ button. Alternatively, select the … button while
paused to reduce the playback speed (1/8, 1/4, 1/2). Slow playback doesn't support audio and is
available in the forward direction only.
● Select the ∑ button on the virtual remote panel to pause the screen and then select the ∑ button
to scan through the paused video in 1-frame increments. Audio is not supported while the video
is paused.
● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Scene. This will take you to a
scene in the video. If the index information is damaged or unsupported, user will not be able to
use the Search Scene function.
● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Time bar. This will take you to a
time frame in the video.
● Select the € on-screen button. This plays the video from the beginning.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
● Press the left/right arrow buttons on the remote control. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward.
● Press the †/
… button. This changes the playback speed by up to 300%. To restore normal
playback speed, press ∂ button. Alternatively, press the … button while paused to reduce the
playback speed (1/8, 1/4, 1/2). Slow playback doesn't support audio and is available in the
forward direction only.
● Press the ∑ button to pause the screen and then press the ∑ button to scan through the paused
video in 1-frame increments. Audio is not supported while the video is paused.
● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Scene. This will take you to a
scene in the video. If the index information is damaged or unsupported, user will not be able to
use the Search Scene function.
● Select the Search on-screen button and then select the Search Time bar. This will take you to a
time frame in the video.
● Select the € on-screen button. This plays the video from the beginning.122 123
Show Subtitles
If the external storage device contains a subtitle file with the same name as the video file being
played, you can choose to display subtitles on the screen. Select the Settings on-screen button and
then select Subtitle Settings to show subtitles.
If the subtitles appear corrupted, try changing the encoding setting. If the subtitles do not match the
video, adjust the sync.
If the subtitles are too small, increase the font size.
Additional Video Playback Settings
● Repeat: Select the Repeat Mode on-screen button. This changes the repeat mode. Repeat One
repeats the current file only, whereas Repeat All repeats all files contained in the folder.
● Picture Size: Select the Picture Size on-screen button and then select the picture size.
● Rotate: Select the Rotate on-screen button to rotate the current video 90 degrees clockwise.
● Receiver: Select the Receiver on-screen button and then power on the receiver.
● Picture Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Picture Mode. Select a
picture mode.
● Sound Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Sound Mode. Select a sound
mode.
● Audio Language: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Audio Language. Select
an audio language. However, this option is only available with streaming videos that support
multiple audio formats.
● Information: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Information to view detailed
information about the current video.124
Music
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
To exit, select ∫ button on the virtual remote panel or press the RETURN button.
Select the music file from the list or press the ∂ button on the virtual remote panel to play music. To
exit, select ∫ button on the virtual remote panel or press the RETURN button. Try Now
LED 4300 - 6300 series
Select the music file from the list or press ∂ to play music. To exit, press ∫ or RETURN.
Changing the view mode
On the file list screen, select View on the top right of the screen and choose a category. The file list is
sorted by the chosen category.
Playlist Creation
From the Options list at the top of the screen, select Play Selected, specify all the music files you
want to play, and then select Play.
This creates a playlist. If the list is displayed in Folder view mode, only the files contained in the
current folder can be selected. To select files from other folders, change the view mode.124 125
Music Scanning
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
● Select the †/
… button on the virtual remote panel. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward.
● Select the ∑ button on the virtual remote panel. This pauses the currently playing music file.
LED 4300 - 6300 series
● Press the †/
… button. Scan 10 seconds backward or forward.
● Press the ∑ button. This pauses the currently playing music file.
Opening a Different File
● Select the €/‚ on-screen button.
● Select a file from the playlist.
Additional Music Playback Settings
● Repeat: Select the Repeat on-screen button. This changes the repeat mode. One Song repeats
the current file only, whereas All repeats all files contained in the playlist.
● Shuffle: Select the Shuffle on-screen button. Choose between normal and random play.
● Receiver: Select the Receiver on-screen button and then power on the receiver.
● Sound Mode: Select the Sound Mode on-screen button. Select a sound mode.
● Information: Select the virtual remote panel's INFO button from the playlist to view detailed
information about the selected file.126
Photos
Select a photo from the list to display it on the screen. Press the touch pad or press the regular
remote's E button to display the screen control buttons. Press RETURN to hide them.
PDP 5500, LED 6400 series and above
To exit, press the ∫ or RETURN. Try Now
LED 4300 - 6300 series
To exit, press the ∫ button or RETURN button.
Changing the view mode
On the file list screen, select View on the top right of the screen and choose a category. The file list is
sorted by the chosen category.
Slide Show
● From the Options list located at the top of the screen, select Slide Show. You can view all photos
in the list as a slideshow.
● Press ∂ from the list.
● Press ∂ or select the Start Slide Show on-screen button to begin the slideshow.
Slide Show Settings
● Speed: Press the †/
… button or select the Slideshow Settings on-screen button and then select
Speed.
● Effect: Select the Slideshow Settings on-screen button and then select Effects.
Playlist Creation
From the Options list at the top of the screen, select Play Selected. specify all the photos you want to
play, and then select Play. This creates a playlist. If the list is displayed in Folder view mode, only the
files contained in the current folder can be selected. To select files from other folders, change the view
mode.126 127
Opening a Different File
● Drag left/right on the touch pad.
● Select the Previous / Next on-screen button.
Background Music
Enable music to play in the background during a slide show. However, all music files must be located
on the same storage device.
Select the Background Music on-screen button while a photo is displayed on the screen or a slide
show is in progress. Select the music files you want to listen to and then Play. To play the files in a
random order, select Shuffle.
Mini Player
When viewing photos with background music, you can control the music. Select Background Music
from among the on-screen control buttons and select Mini Player. You can pause playback or skip to
the previous or next song.
Additional Photo Playback Settings
● Zoom: Select the Zoom on-screen button. Zoom in by up to a factor of 4.
● Rotate: Select the Rotate on-screen button. This rotates the current photo 90 degrees clockwise.
● Receiver: Select the Receiver on-screen button and then power on the receiver.
● Picture Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Picture Mode. Select a
picture mode.
● Sound Mode: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Sound Mode. Select a sound
mode. However, this option is not available while background music is playing.
● Information: Select the Settings on-screen button and then select Information to view detailed
information about the current video.128
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
This SMART TV is enabled with Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), a feature that makes it possible to control
Samsung external devices connected to the TV with ease. With Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), you can use the
TV remote control to operate all compatible Samsung devices that are connected to the TV. However,
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) only works with the remote control and not with the panel keys.
" Use the TV's remote control to operate third-party cable boxes, Blu-ray players, and home theaters
connected to the TV. For more information, refer to "Universal Remote Setup".
Precautions
● This feature does not support other manufacturer's products.
● Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV using an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not
support Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). In this case, you will need to replace the HDMI cable.
● The TV remote control may not function under certain circumstances. In this case, select the
Anynet+ device again.
● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) only works with external devices that support Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) and
only when those devices are either in standby mode or turned on.
● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) can control up to 12 compatible external devices (up to 3 of the same type).
With home theater systems, however, the number of systems that can be controlled is limited to
one.
● A home theater system that has been connected to the TV using an HDMI cable and an optical
cable supports 2-channel audio only. However, the home theater is capable of supporting
5.1-channel audio from digital broadcasts.
● To listen to 5.1-channel audio from an external device, connect the device to the TV via an HDMI
cable and the device's digital audio output connector directly to the home theater system.128 129
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Setup
Screen Menu > System > Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Try Now
Enable/disable Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC): Enables/disables Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Disabling this turns off all
Anynet+-related features. Try Now
● Auto Turn Off: Turns off external devices when the TV is turned off. Some devices do not support
this option. Try Now
Using the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
You can operate external devices using just the TV remote control.
Switching between Anynet+ Devices
11
Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display the list. Select
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) from the list. A device selection screen will appear.
21
Select a device and wait for the switch to take place. This process may take up to 2 minutes to
complete and cannot be cancelled when started.
" Alternatively, switch to a different Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) device by selecting its name from the Source list.
However, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) cannot be used if a connected input connector is selected.130
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Device Menu
Once the TV has switched over to the selected device, you can access the device's menu using the
TV's remote control. Select the virtual remote panel's or the regular remote's TOOLS button to display
the list.
" The items displayed by Tools may vary, depending on the external device.
● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC): A list appears showing Anynet+ compatible ones of external devices
connected to the TV. Either choose View TV to close the current Anynet+ and watch TV, or
choose an external device to switch to the device.
● (Connected Device) MENU: Display the menu of the connected device. If the target device is a
DVD player, the DVD menu is shown.
● (Connected Device) Tools: Display a list of frequently-used functions that are available for the
device. If the target device is a DVD player, the DVD playback menu is shown. Some external
devices may not support this option.
● (Connected Device) Title Menu: Display the connected device's title menu. If the target device is
a DVD player, the DVD title menu is shown. Some external devices may not support this option.
ARC
ARC enables digital sound to be output using just an HDMI cable. However, ARC is only available with
AV receivers that support ARC.130 131
Sharing Mobile Device Screens on the TV
The Screen Mirroring function is not available for LED 4300 series.
This TV is capable of displaying mobile device screens. You can use the following features to enjoy
video, photo, and music files from mobile devices directly on your TV.
● Use the Screen Mirroring menu to display a mobile device's screen on the TV.
Screen Mirroring
Screen Menu > Network > AllShare Settings > Screen Mirroring
Displays mobile device screens on your TV wirelessly. However, Screen Mirroring is only available
with mobile devices that support AllShare Cast. For more information, visit the mobile device
manufacturer's website.
" Depending on the network condition, screen or voice dropouts may occur when the Screen Mirroring
function is running.
Mobile Device Connection
Run Screen Mirroring (Network > AllShare Settings > Screen Mirroring) function. Alternatively,
press the SOURCE button and select Screen Mirroring from the source list. After running the Screen
Mirroring, run Mirroring function on the mobile device. The TV will connect with the mobile device,
and user can view the connected mobile device's screen on the TV.132 Other Information
Support
Support
Remote Management
e-Manual (Troubleshooting)
Self Diagnosis
Software Update
Use Mode Home Use
Contact Samsung
" The displayed image may differ depending on the model.
The TV has several built-in systems designed for user and TV system support.
Remote Management
Screen Menu > Support > Remote Management Try Now
If you need assistance with your TV, you can use this feature to let Samsung Electronics diagnose
your TV remotely. You will need to read and agree to the service agreement before using this feature.
A Samsung Electronics technician will then diagnose, repair, and update your TV remotely. However,
these features are only available when your TV is connected to the Internet.132 133
What is Remote Support?
Samsung Remote Support service offers you one-on-one support with a Samsung Technician who can
remotely.
● Diagnose your TV
● Adjust the TV settings for you
● Perform a factory reset your TV
● Install recommended firmware updates
How Does it Work?
Having a Samsung Tech remotely service your TV is really pretty simple
Call Samsung Contact Center and
ask for remote support.
Open the menu on your TV and go
to the Support section.
Select Remote Management and
Provide the Pin# to the agent.
The agent will then access your TV.
That's it!134
e-Manual
Screen Menu > Support > e-Manual (Troubleshooting)
This TV features a built-in electronic user manual. It is a comprehensive guide for using your Samsung
TV. Refer to the "e-Manual" for more information.
Self Diagnosis
Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis Try Now
Your TV is capable of diagnosing itself for picture-, sound-, and signal-related issues. The selfdiagnosis function consists of the following options:
● Picture Test
● Sound Test
● Motion Control Environment Check
● Signal Information
● Reset
Picture Test
Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Picture Test Try Now
The Picture Test displays a high definition picture to examine it for flaws or faults.
If the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion, the TV may have a problem. Contact
Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. If the test picture is displayed properly, there may be a problem
with the external device. Please check the connections. If the problem persists, check the signal
strength or refer to the external device’s user manual.134 135
Sound Test
Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Sound Test Try Now
Use the built-in melody to check for sound problems.
If no melody is played by the TV’s speakers, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker and then
try again. If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center
for assistance. If the melody is played, there may be a problem with the external device. Please check
the connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual.
Motion Control Environment Check
Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Motion Control Environment Check
Test the ambient noise and brightness levels to see if they are suitable for SMART Interaction use.
Signal Information
Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Signal Information Try Now
The signal Information displays the digital channel signal information and strength. Users can then
adjust the antenna to increase the signal strength and receive HD channels. This option is only
available for digital channels.
Reset
Screen Menu > Support > Self Diagnosis > Reset Try Now
This resets all settings to the factory default settings except for the network settings. Select Reset,
enter the PIN code when requested, and then select Yes. All settings are then reset. The TV turns off
and on again automatically and then displays the Setup screen. For more information on resetting the
TV, refer to the user manual that came with the TV.136
Updating the Software
Screen Menu > Support > Software Update Try Now
Check your TV's software version and upgrade it if necessary.
[ DO NOT turn off the TV’s power until the upgrade is complete. The TV will turn off and on
automatically after completing the software upgrade. All video and audio settings return to the
default settings after a software upgrade.
Update now
Screen Menu > Support > Software Update > Update now Try Now
An online upgrade downloads and installs the upgrade software directly from the Internet. Configure
the TV to connect to a network and make sure it can access the Internet. Select Online.
Manual Update
Download the latest update file from the Samsung website. Decompress the file and copy it into the
root directory of a flash drive. Insert the flash drive one of the TV’s USB ports to install the update.
Auto Update
Screen Menu > Support > Software Update > Auto Update Try Now
This option upgrades the TV while it is in Standby Mode. In Standby Mode, the TV appears to be
turned off but still has access to the Internet. This allows the TV to upgrade itself automatically
while it is not in use. Because the TV’s internal processes are operating, the screen may emit a faint
glow, and this may continue for more than 1 hour until the software download is complete. Check the
network configuration and internet connectivity and then enable this option.136 137
Standby Mode Upgrade Settings
Specify when you want the upgrade to take place. This TV can be set to periodically check and install
updates.
Usage Mode
Screen Menu > Support > Use Mode Try Now
Select the TV's usage mode. If your TV has been unintentionally set to Store Demo, you can change
the mode with this option. Store Demo should be used in retail environments only. With Store Demo,
certain functions are disabled and the TV automatically resets itself after a certain amount of time.
Support Info
Screen Menu > Support > Contact Samsung Try Now
Check the information below if your TV is not working properly or you need information on upgrading
the software. The section below contains useful information about the product and instruction on
obtaining the latest software.138
Kensington Security Lock
A Kensington Security Lock is a physical device that can be used to protect the TV against theft. Look
for the Kensington slot on the back of the TV. The slot has a K icon next to it. Wrap the lock around
an object that is too heavy to carry and then thread it through the TV's Kensington slot. The lock,
however, has to be purchased separately.
The method of using a Kensington Security Lock may differ for each TV model. Refer to the
Kensington Security Lock manual for more information.
Display Resolution
PDP 5500, LED 5500 series and above
Connect a computer to the TV and then configure the computer's resolution by referencing the table
below. The optimal resolution is 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz. Choosing an output signal not included in the
table can result in a blank screen or just the power indicator being turned on. Refer to the user manual
of the graphics card and configure the resolution as indicated below.
IBM
Resolution
(Dots x Lines)
Standard
Frequency
Horizontal
Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical
Frequency
(Hz)
Clock Frequency
(MHz)
Polarity
(Horizontal /
Vertical)
720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
MAC
Resolution
(Dots x Lines)
Standard
Frequency
Horizontal
Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical
Frequency
(Hz)
Clock Frequency
(MHz)
Polarity
(Horizontal /
Vertical)
640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
1152 x 870 75Hz 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/-138 139
VESA DMT
Resolution
(Dots x Lines)
Standard
Frequency
Horizontal
Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical
Frequency
(Hz)
Clock Frequency
(MHz)
Polarity
(Horizontal /
Vertical)
640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
1152 x 864 75Hz 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+
1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+
1280 x 800 60Hz 49.702 59.810 83.500 -/+
1280 x 1024 60Hz 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+
1280 x 1024 75Hz 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+
1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+
1440 x 900 60Hz 55.935 59.887 106.500 -/+
1600 x 900RB 60Hz 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+
1680 x 1050 60Hz 65.290 59.954 146.250 -/+
1920 x 1080 60Hz 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+140
LED 4300 series models
Connect a computer to the TV and then configure the computer's resolution by referencing the table
below. The optimal resolution is 1366 x 768 @ 60Hz. Choosing an output signal not included in the
table can result in a blank screen or just the power indicator being turned on. Refer to the user manual
of the graphics card and configure the resolution as indicated below.
IBM
Resolution Standard
frequency
Horizontal
Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical
Frequenzcy
(Hz)
Pixel Clock
Frequency
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
720 x 400 70Hz 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
MAC
Resolution Standard
frequency
Horizontal
Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical
Frequenzcy
(Hz)
Pixel Clock
Frequency
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
640 x 480 67Hz 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
832 x 624 75Hz 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-140 141
VESA DMT
Resolution Standard
frequency
Horizontal
Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical
Frequenzcy
(Hz)
Pixel Clock
Frequency
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
640 x 480 60Hz 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
640 x 480 72Hz 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
640 x 480 75Hz 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
800 x 600 60Hz 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
800 x 600 72Hz 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
800 x 600 75Hz 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
1024 x 768 60Hz 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
1024 x 768 70Hz 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
1024 x 768 75Hz 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
1280 x 720 60Hz 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+
1366 x 768 60Hz 47.712 59.790 85.500 +/+142
Picture Size and Input Signal
Input Signal Picture Size
ATV, AV 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3
Component
(480i, 480p) 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3
DTV (720p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Smart View 2
DTV (1080i,
1080p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 2
Component
(720p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3
Component
(1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit
HDMI (720p,
1080i, 1080p) 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 1 (for LED TV), Smart View 2 (for LED TV)
The Picture Size setting is applied to the current source and the applied Picture Size will remain in
effect the next time the source is selected.142 143
Supported 3D Resolutions
These specifications apply to a display ratio of 16:9 only.
HDMI
3D Format: L/R, T/B
Resolution Frequency (Hz)
1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60
1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60
1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60
3D Format: Frame Packing
Resolution Frequency (Hz)
1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60
1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60
1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30144
Component
Resolution Frequency (Hz)
1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60
1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60
1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60
Digital Channel
Resolution Frequency (Hz)
1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60
1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60
Videos/Photos
Refer to the "Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec".
HDMI PC Mode
Supported 3D resolutions for HDMI PC mode apply to LED TVs only.
The optimal resolution for HDMI PC mode is 1920 x 1080. The TV may not display 3D images properly
and full screen view may not be available if set to a different resolution.144 145
Subtitle and Media Contents file formats, and Codec
Subtitle
External
Name File Extension
MPEG-4 Timed text .ttxt
SAMI .smi
SubRip .srt
SubViewer .sub
Micro DVD .sub or .txt
SubStation Alpha .ssa
Advanced SubStation Alpha .ass
Powerdivx .psb
Internal
Name Container
Xsub AVI
SubStation Alpha MKV
Advanced SubStation Alpha MKV
SubRip MKV
MPEG-4 Timed text MP4146
Supported image resolutions
File Extension Type Resolution
*.jpg
*.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640
*.png PNG 4096x4096
*.bmp BMP 4096x4096
*.mpo MPO 15360x8640
Supported music file formats
File Extension Type Codec Comments
*.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
*.m4a
*.mpa
*.aac
MPEG4 AAC
*.flac FLAC FLAC Supports up to 2 channel
*.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2 channel
*.wma WMA WMA
WMA 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel. WMA
lossless audio is not supported. Supports up to
M2 profile (except LBR mode)
*.wav wav wav
*.mid
*.midi midi midi type 0, type 1 are supported.
*.ape ape ape146 147
Video Codec
File
Extension
Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate
(fps)
Bit rate
(Mbps) Audio Codec
*.avi Divx 3.11 / 4 / 5 / 6
*.mkv
*.asf
MPEG4 SP/ASP 1920x1080 30
*.wmv
*.mp4
AVI
MKV
H.264 BP/MP/HP
AC3
LPCM
*.3gp
*.vro
ASF
MP4
Motion JPEG 640x480 6~30 8
ADPCM(IMA, MS)
AAC
*.mpg
*.mpeg
3GP
MOV
Microsoft MPEG-4 v3
HE-AAC
WMA
*.ts
*.tp
FLV
VRO
Window Media Video
v7,v8,v9
1920x1080
(WMV v7,v8,
30
DD+
MPEG(MP3)
*.flv
*.vob
TS
SVAF
MPEG2 MSMPEG4 v3:
1280x720)
*.svi
*.m2ts
MPEG1
*.mts
*.divx
MVC 24/25/30 60
VP6 640x480 4
*.webm WebM VP8 1920x1080 6~30 20 Vorbis
Other Restrictions
Codecs may not function properly if there is a problem with the content data.
Video content does not play or does not play correctly if there is an error in the content or container.
Sound or video may not work if they have standard bit rates/frame rates above the TV’s compatibility
ratings.
If the Index Table is wrong, the Seek (Jump) function does not work.
When playing video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly because of data
transmission speeds.
Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player.148
Video Decoders
● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 (does not support FMO/ASO/RS)
● VC1 AP L4 is not supported.
● All video codecs excluding WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, and VP6:
Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max
Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max
● GMC is not supported.
● Supports SVAF top/bottom and left/right only.
● Supports Blu-ray/DVD MVC specs only.
Audio Decoders
● WMA 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channels. Supports up to M2 profile. (Excluding M0 LBR mode)
● WMA lossless audio is not supported.
● Vorbis is supported for up to 2 channels.
● DD+ is supported for up to 5.1 channels.148 149
3D Precautions
Viewing guidelines
● In 3D view mode, the screen may flicker under florescent lighting (50Hz ~ 60Hz) or three-wave
lighting.
" In this case, it is advisable to turn off the lighting or adjust it to a low level.
● When switching the picture mode from 3D view, the 3D view mode turns off, and the Samsung
Multi View 3D Glasses fail to operate, resulting in the display not operating properly.
" Then, the 3D glasses turn off.
● If you lie on your side while watching TV with the 3D glasses, the picture may look darker or
may not be visible.
● If the 3D glasses are defective or damaged, they cannot be repaired and should be exchanged for
a new pair. The repair service is free of charge within the warranty period, which, however, does
not cover damage from the user's fault.
● The actual 3D effect may be experienced differently depending on the viewer. The 3D effect may
not be experienced by a person who has a great difference of vision in the left and right eyes.
● In 3D view mode, it is advisable to watch TV within the recommended distance.
" The 3D function of the glasses may not work properly if you are out of the recommended distance for
about 3 seconds.
" If you stay out of the recommended range, the 3D glasses lose the wireless communications with the
TV, and then the display turns off in few seconds before the glasses turn off.
● The 3D glasses may not work properly if there are any nearby active 3D devices or electronic or
wireless communication devices (for example, a device that uses the 2.4GHz or 5GHz frequency
range such as a microwave or AP). In this case, move the devices away from the 3D glasses.
● The Samsung Multi View 3D Glasses may not work properly near metal objects or in an
electromagnetic field. In this case, move the metal objects or the electromagnetic device away
from the 3D glasses.
● The vividness of the image may be deteriorated if you watch TV in a location that is exposed to
direct sunlight or illumination.
● The temples of the 3D glasses are unfolded. Do not attempt to fold the temples with excessive
force. This may damage the 3D glasses.
● If you lie on your side while watching TV with the 3D glasses, the picture may look darker or
may not be visible.
● If watching 3D content for an extended time without averting your eyes elsewhere, the 3D glasses
may turn off automatically. (for SSG-3570 models only)
● Take off the 3D glasses and put them on again if it does not work in 3D view mode in the first
place. (for SSG-3570 models only)150
CAUTION!
IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D IMAGES. READ THE FOLLOWING
CAUTIONS BEFORE YOU OR YOUR CHILD USE THE 3D FUNCTION.
● Adults should frequently check on children who are using the 3D function. If there are any
complaints of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness or nausea, stop the child from viewing the 3D TV
and ensure that they rest.
● Do not use the 3D glasses for any purpose other than the intended purpose, such as general
eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective goggles.
● Some viewers may experience discomfort such as dizziness, nausea and headaches while viewing
3D TV. If you experience any of these symptoms, stop watching the 3D content, remove the 3D
glasses, and take a rest.
● An extended period of watching TV in 3D view mode may cause eye fatigue. In this case, stop
watching the 3D content immediately, take off the 3D glasses and allow your eyes to rest.
● Do not use the 3D function or the 3D glasses while walking or moving around. Wearing the 3D
glasses while moving around may result in injury due to running into objects, tripping and/or
falling.
● If you sleep with the 3D glasses on, the temples on the glasses may become broken.
● The temples of the 3D glasses are unfolded. Do not attempt to fold the temples with excessive
force. Folding the temples with excessive force may damage the 3D glasses.
● Do not shake your 3D glasses repeatedly. Shaking the glasses will power them on and can cause
the battery to discharge faster than it should. (for SSG-3570 models only)150 151
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The following safety instructions are to ensure your personal safety and prevent property damage.
Please read them to ensure the proper use of the product.
● Do not place the product in a location exposed to direct sunlight, heat, fire, or water. Exposure
may result in a product malfunction or fire.
● Do not apply force to the lenses of the 3D glasses. Do not drop or bend the product. Applying
force, dropping, or bending may result in a product malfunction.
● Keep components of the 3D glasses out of reach of children, and especially ensure children do
not swallow one of the components. If your child swallowed a component, consult your doctor
immediately.
● When cleaning the product, do not spray water or cleaner directly onto the surface of the product.
Spraying water or cleaner directly onto the glasses may result in fire or electric shock, damage to
the product's surface, or cause the indicator labels on the product's surface to come loose.
● Do not apply chemicals containing alcohol, solvent, or surfactant such as wax, benzene, thinner,
pesticide, air freshener, lubricant, or cleaner to the product. These chemicals may cause the
product's exterior to be discolored or cracked, or labels or instructions to be removed. Use only
a soft cloth such as superfine fibers or cotton flannels for cleaning the product as the surface or
the lenses easily cracks. Because the product can be easily scratched with foreign substances,
make sure to dust off the cloth before using.
● Do not sleep while wearing the 3D glasses. Wearing the 3D glasses while sleeping may damage
them.
● Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the 3D glasses by yourself. Do not use a product that is
damaged.
● Take care that you do not injure your eyes with the edges of the frame of the 3D glasses when
wearing them.
● Put the 3D glasses on and take them off with both hands.
● Use only approved batteries, and make sure to insert the batteries in the correct polarities. If
the batteries are replaced in the wrong polarities, the batteries may implode or leak its internal
chemicals, which may cause fire, inflict injury on users, or contaminate (damage) its environment.
(for SSG-3570 models only)
● Keep the removed batteries out of childrens' reach to prevent children from swallowing them. If
they swallow them, consult with a doctor immediately. (for SSG-3570 models only)152
Licenses
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used
under license.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This
is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software
tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your
device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s: 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535, 6,226,616,
7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567, 7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 and 7,548,853. DTS, the Symbol,
and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS Premium Sound | 5.1 is a trademark of DTS,
Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Manufactured under a license from U.S. Patent No’s: 6,285,767, 8,027,477, 5,319,713, 5,333,201, 5,638,452,
5,771,295, 5,970,152, 5,912,976, 7,200,236, 7,492,907, 8,050,434, 7,720,240, 7,031,474, 7,907,736 and
7,764,802. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS Studio Sound is
a trademark of DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.152 153
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
This license is not available for LED 4300 series.
Open Source License Notice
In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on the product menu.
Open Source License Notice is written only English.154 Troubleshooting
If the TV appears to have a problem, first review this list of possible problems and solutions. If none of
the troubleshooting tips apply, visit www.samsung.com/support or contact Samsung Customer Service.
Screen
If there is a problem with the screen, run Picture Test (Support > Self Diagnosis > Picture Test) to
diagnose the issue. If the test fails to identify a problem, there may be a problem with an external
device or the signal strength.
There is something
wrong with the TV. Try this!
Flickering and Dimming
If your Samsung Television is flickering or dimming sporadically, you may need
to disable some of the energy efficiency features. Disable Energy Saving (System
> Eco Solution > Eco Sensor) and/or Energy Saving (System > Eco Solution >
Energy Saving) and check again.
Component
Connections/Screen
Color
If you find that the color on your Samsung television screen is not correct or the
black and white colors are off, run Self Diagnosis (Support > Self Diagnosis >
Picture Test).
If the test results are negative, check the following:
Are the TV's video input connectors connected to the correct external device video
output connectors?
Check other connections as well. If the TV is connected to an external device via a
component cable, check that the Pb, Pr, and Y jacks are plugged into their proper
connectors.
Screen Brightness
If you find that the colors on your Samsung TV are correct but just a little too dark
or bright, try adjusting the following settings first.
Navigate to Picture and adjust Backlight/Cell Light (applicable models), Contrast,
Brightness, Sharpness, Color, Tint (G/R) and other picture quality adjustment
settings.
Auto Motion Plus/Blur
If you find that there is a blur or “ghost” shadow to the images on your television
screen, you might be able to correct the issue using Auto Motion Plus (Picture >
Picture Options > Auto Motion Plus).
Unwanted Powering
Off
If your Samsung TV appears to turn off by itself, try disabling some of the TV's
energy efficiency features. Check if Sleep Timer (System > Time > Sleep Timer)
has been enabled. Sleep Timer automatically turns off the TV to save energy after
a specified period of inactivity. If the Sleep Timer has not been enabled, see if No
Signal Power Off (System > Eco Solution > No Signal Power Off) or Auto Power
Off (System > Eco Solution > Auto Power Off) has been enabled.
Problems Powering On
When the TV is turned on, the remote control receiver flashes 5 times before the
screen turns on.
If you find that you are having problems powering on your Samsung television,
there are a number of things to check before calling the service department. If the
power cord is connected properly and the remote control is operating normally, the
problem might be with the antenna cable connection or the cable/satellite box not
being turned on. Check the antenna connection or turn on the cable/satellite box.154 155
There is something
wrong with the TV. Try this!
Unable to find a
Channel Run Setup (System > Setup) or Auto Program (Broadcasting > Auto Program).
The TV image does not
look as good as it did
in the store.
Store displays are all tuned to digital, HD (high definition) channels.
If you have an analog cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use
HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality.
Many HD channels are upscaled from SD (Standard Definition) content. Look for a
channel that is broadcasting true HD content.
Cable/Satellite Subscribers: Try HD channels from the channel lineup.
Air/Cable Antenna Connection: Try HD channels after performing the Auto
Program operation.
Adjust the cable/satellite box's video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.
The picture is distorted.
The compression of video content may cause picture distortions, especially in fast
moving pictures such as sports and action movies.
A weak or bad quality signal can cause picture distortions. This is not an issue
with the TV.
Mobile phones used close to the TV (within 1m) may cause noise in analog and
digital channels.
The color is wrong or
missing.
If you’re using a Component connection, make sure that the component cables are
connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color
problems or a blank screen.
The color is poor or
the picture is not bright
enough.
Navigate to Picture and adjust Picture Mode, Brightness, Sharpness, Color, and
other picture adjustment settings.
See if Energy Saving (System > Eco Solution > Energy Saving) has been enabled.
Try resetting the picture. (Picture > Reset Picture)
There is a dotted line
on the edge of the
screen.
If Picture Size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9.
Change the cable/satellite box resolution.
The picture is black
and white.
If you are using AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the TV's
green component jack.
The color is wrong or
missing.
If you are using a Component connection, make sure that the component cables
are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause
color problems or a blank screen.156
Sound
If you find that there is a problem with the TV's speakers, run Sound Test (Support > Self Diagnosis >
Sound Test) to diagnose the issue. If the audio is OK, the sound problem may be caused by the source
or signal.
There is something wrong
with the TV. Try this!
There is no sound or
the sound is too low at
maximum volume.
Please check the volume of the device (cable/satellite box, DVD, Blu-ray, etc.)
connected to your TV.
The picture is good but
there is no sound.
Navigate to Sound and set Speaker Select to TV Speaker.
If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option. (For
example, you may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI if the
box connected to your TV is using an HDMI cable.)
If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required.
If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it.
Reboot the connected device by disconnecting and then reconnecting the device’
s power cable.
The speakers are making
an odd sound.
Make sure that the audio cable is connected to the correct audio output
connector on the external device.
For antenna or cable connections, check the signal information. A low signal
level may cause sound distortions.
Run Self Diagnosis (Support > Self Diagnosis > Sound Test).
3D TV
There is something wrong
with the TV. Try this!
The 3D Active Glasses
are not working correctly.
Make sure the glasses are turned on.
The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is another 3D product or
electronic device turned on near the glasses or TV.
If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from
the 3D Active Glasses.
The 3D images don’t
look quite right.
The ideal viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen.
We also recommend sitting with your eyes level with the screen.
The batteries in the 3D
glasses don’t last.
Turn off the 3D glasses when you are not using them. If you leave the 3D glasses
on, the battery lifespan is shortened.156 157
Antenna (Air/Cable) Connection
There is something wrong
with the TV. Try this!
The TV is not receiving
all channels.
Make sure the coaxial cable is connected securely.
Run Auto Program (Broadcasting > Auto Program) to add all available channels
to the channel list.
Verify that the antenna is positioned correctly.
There are no captions on
digital channels.
Navigate to Caption (Broadcasting > Caption) and change the Caption Mode
setting.
Some channels may not have caption data.
The picture is distorted.
The compression of video content may cause picture distortions. This is
especially true with fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies.
A weak signal can cause picture distortions. This is not a problem with the TV.
PC Connection
There is something wrong
with the TV. Try this!
The "Mode Not
Supported" message
appears.
Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches a resolution supported by the TV.
The video is OK but
there is no audio.
If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC.
If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required.
Networking
There is something wrong
with the TV. Try this!
The wireless network
connection failed. Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP router.
The Software Update
over the network has
failed.
Check the network connection status.
If the TV is not connected to a network, connect to a network.
The upgrade will not proceed if you already have the latest software version.158
Miscellaneous
There is something wrong
with the TV. Try this!
The TV is hot.
Watching TV for an extended period of time causes the panel to generate heat.
The heat from the panel is dissipated through internal vents running along the
top part of the TV. The bottom portion, however, may feel hot to the touch after
extended use. Children watching TV need constant adult supervision to prevent
them from touching the TV. This heat, however, is not a defect and does not
affect the TV's functionality.
The picture won’t
display in full screen.
HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying
upscaled SD (4:3) content.
Black bars will appear at the top and bottom of the screen when you watch
movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV.
Adjust the picture size options on your external device or set the TV to full
screen.
The "Mode Not
Supported" message
appears.
Check the supported resolutions of the TV and adjust the external device’s
output resolution accordingly.
The Captions item in the
TV menu is grayed out.
You cannot select the Caption menu if you have selected a source connected
to the TV via HDMI or Component. The external device’s caption function must
also be activated.
The TV smells of plastic. This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.
The TV's Signal
Information option is
not activated in the Self
Diagnosis.
Verify that the current channel is a digital channel.
Signal Information is only available with digital channels.
The TV is tilted to the
side. Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it.
Broadcasting is grayed
out.
The Broadcasting menu is only available when Source is set to TV.
The Broadcasting menu cannot be accessed while watching TV using a cable
box or satellite receiver.158 159
There is something wrong
with the TV. Try this!
The settings are lost
after 30 minutes or every
time the TV is turned off.
If Use Mode is set to Store Demo, the TV's audio and video settings are
automatically reset every 30 minutes.
Change Use Mode (Support > Use Mode) to Home Use.
There is an intermittent
loss of audio or video.
Check the cable connections and reconnect them.
Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables.
Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If you are mounting
the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90-degree connectors.
There are small particles
on the TV's bezel. This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.
The PIP menu is not
available.
PIP functionality is only available when you are using an HDMI or Component
source.
A POP (TV’s internal
banner ad) appears on
the screen.
Change Use Mode (Support > Use Mode) to Home Use.
The TV is making a
popping noise.
The expansion and contraction of the TV's outer casing may cause a popping
noise. This does not indicate a product malfunction. The TV is safe to use.
The TV is making a
humming noise.
Your TV utilizes high-speed switching circuits and high levels of electrical
current, and depending on the brightness level being used may seem slightly
noisier than a conventional TV.
Your TV has undergone strict quality control procedures that meet our
demanding performance and reliability requirements.
Some noise coming from the TV is considered normal and is not an acceptable
cause for an exchange or refund.
Image Retention (Burn
In) Issue
This issue affects PDP TVs only. Watching TV for an extended period of time or
using the 4:3 screen ratio only may result in burn-ins.
PDP TVs are equipped with Pixel Shift screen burn reduction technology. Pixel
Shift technology reduces screen burn-ins in PDP TVs.
It does this by moving the picture slightly vertically or horizontally.
Use Screen Burn Protection (System > Screen Burn Protection) to prevent
screen burn-ins.160
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
There is something
wrong with the TV. Try this!
Anynet+ does not
work.
Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+
devices only.
Only one external device may be connected to Receiver.
Check if the power cord of the Anynet+ device is properly connected.
Check the cable connections of the Anynet+ device.
Navigate to the System menu and verify that Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On.
Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode.
Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible.
Anynet+ may not function under certain circumstances. (Searching channels,
operating Smart Hub or Setup, etc.)
If you have disconnected and then reconnected the HDMI cable, scan for devices
again or turn your TV off and on.
I want to start
Anynet+.
Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and then navigate to
the System menu to see if Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On.
After checking, press TOOLS button, select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) and then choose
a device.
I want to exit Anynet+. Select View TV from the Anynet+ menu.
Select a non-Anynet+ device from Source.
The message
"Connecting to
Anynet+ device..."
or "Disconnecting
from Anynet+ device"
appears on the screen.
You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching
to a viewing mode. Use the remote control after the TV has completed the Anynet+
configuration or has switched to a viewing mode.
The Anynet+ device
won't play. You cannot use the play function when Setup is progress.
The connected device
is not displayed.
Check whether the device supports Anynet+.
Check whether the HDMI cable is properly connected.
Navigate to the System menu and verify that Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On.
Scan for Anynet+ devices again.
Anynet+ devices must be connected to the TV using an HDMI cable. Make sure the
device is connected to your TV with an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not
support Anynet+.
If the connection is terminated because there has been a power failure or the HDMI
cable has been disconnected, please scan for the device again.
The TV audio is not
being played through
the receiver.
Connect an optical cable to the TV and the receiver.
ARC enables digital sound to be output via the HDMI (ARC) port.
However, ARC is only available when the TV is connected to an audio receiver that
supports ARC.160 161
Apps
There is something
wrong with the TV. Try this!
Some application
content only appears
in English. How can I
change the language?
The application content language may be different from the user interface
language. The ability to change the language depends on the service provider.
Some application
services do not work.
Check with the service provider.
Refer to the help section on the application service provider's website.
Photos, Videos & Music
There is something
wrong with the TV. Try this!
Some files can't be
played back.
This problem may occur with high-bitrate files. Most files can be played back, but
you might experience problems with high-bitrate files.
Reset the Personal Info and TV settings
Reset Type Navigation Description
TV settings Reset Screen Menu > Support >
Self Diagnosis > Reset
Reset all the settings (Picture, Sound, Broadcasting
and Smart Hub, etc), excluding the network settings, to
factory defaults.
Smart Hub Reset Screen Menu > Smart
Features > Smart Hub Reset
Reset all saved information relating to Samsung
accounts and linked service accounts, as well as Smart
Hub service agreements and applications.162
Web Browser
11
Select Web Browser. The browsing screen may differ from the one on your computer.
21
The web browser is not compatible with Java applications.
31
You cannot download files. If you attempt to download a file, you will receive an error message
instead.
41
The web browser may not be able to access certain websites.
51
Playing Flash videos may be restricted.
61
E-commerce for online purchases is not supported.
71
With websites that have scrollable windows, scrolling through such a window can result in
corrupted characters.
81
ActiveX is not supported.
91
Certain options are not accessible in Link Browsing mode. (Switch to Pointer Browsing to activate
this.)
111
Only a limited number of fonts are supported. Certain symbols and characters may not be
displayed properly.
111
The response to remote commands and the resulting on-screen display may be delayed while a
webpage is loading.
121
Loading a webpage may be delayed or suspended completely with certain operating systems.
131
The copy and paste operations are not supported.
141
When composing an email or a simple message, certain functions such as the font size and color
selection may not be available.
151
There is a limit to the number of bookmarks and the size of the log file that can be saved.
161
The number of windows that can be opened concurrently varies depending on the search
conditions and the TV model.
171
The web browsing speed will vary depending on the network environment.162 163
181
Playing embedded video automatically disables PIP. Video playback may not commence after PIP
is disabled. In this case, you will have to reload the page.
191
The web browser supports .mp3 audio files only.
211
The web browser supports a specific file format for importing and exporting bookmarks.
(Compatible Format: Netscape-bookmarkfile- 1)
211
The folder tree information is not included when importing and exporting bookmarks.
221
Exporting bookmarks to a USB device connected to the TV saves the bookmarks under a folder
named "Samsung SmartTV Bookmark".
231
If Clock (System > Time > Clock) has not been enabled, the browsing history will not be saved.
241
The browsing history is saved in the order of latest to oldest, with the oldest entries being
overwritten first.
251
Depending on the types of video/audio codecs supported, it might not be possible to play back
certain video and audio files during Flash playback.
261
A sudden change in the picture brightness inside a video window may affect the brightness of
the screen. This problem applies to PDP TVs only.
271
Video sources from PC-optimized streaming service providers may not play properly on our
proprietary web browser.
281
Using the on-screen QWERTY keyboard automatically disables PIP. (Except when entering a URL.)
User Manual
GT-I8730
www.samsung.com2
About this manual
This device provides high quality mobile communication and entertainment using Samsung’s
high standards and technological expertise. This user manual is specially designed to detail
the device’s functions and features.
• Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use.
• Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings.
• Images and screenshots may differ in appearance from the actual product.
• Content may differ from the final product, or from software provided by service providers
or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of the
manual, refer to the Samsung website, www.samsung.com.
• Content (high quality content) that requires high CPU and RAM usage will affect the
overall performance of the device. Applications related to the content may not work
properly depending on the device’s specifications and the environment that it is used in.
• Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service
provider.
• Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications.
Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by applications from any provider
other than Samsung.
• Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited
registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the
operating system may cause the device or applications to work improperly.
• Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device
are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other
purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal
use of media.
• You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and
downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services. To avoid additional charges, select
an appropriate data tariff plan. For details, contact your service provider.About this manual
3
• Default applications that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer
be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an application provided
with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed applications,
contact service providers.
• Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources
may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations
of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty.
Instructional icons
Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others
Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment
Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information
Copyright
Copyright © 2013 Samsung Electronics
This guide is protected under international copyright laws.
No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any
information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung
Electronics.About this manual
4
Trademarks
• SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics.
• The Android logo, Google
™, Google Maps
™, Google Mail
™, YouTube
™, Google Play™
Store, and Google Talk
™ are trademarks of Google, Inc.
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide.
• Wi-Fi
®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™, Wi-Fi Direct
™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are
registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.5
Table of Contents
Getting started
7 Device layout
8 Buttons
9 Package contents
10 Installing the SIM or USIM card and
battery
13 Charging the battery
15 Inserting a memory card
17 Turning the device on and off
18 Holding the device
18 Locking and unlocking the device
18 Adjusting the volume
19 Switching to silent mode
Basics
20 Indicator icons
21 Using the touch screen
24 Control motions
29 Page Buddy
29 Notifications
30 Home screen
32 Using applications
32 Applications screen
34 Help
34 Entering text
36 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network
37 Setting up accounts
38 Transferring files
39 Securing the device
41 Upgrading the device
Communication
42 Phone
47 Contacts
51 Messaging
52 Email
54 Google Mail
55 Talk
56 Google+
56 Messenger
57 ChatON
Web & network
58 Internet
59 Chrome
60 Bluetooth
61 AllShare Play
62 Group Play
63 NFC
64 S Beam
Media
65 Music Player
66 CameraTable of Contents
6
Settings
98 About Settings
98 Wi-Fi
99 Bluetooth
99 Data usage
99 More settings
101 Home screen mode
101 Blocking mode
102 Sound
102 Display
103 Storage
103 Power saving mode
104 Battery
104 Application manager
104 Location services
104 Lock screen
105 Security
107 Language and input
110 Cloud
110 Backup and reset
110 Add account
110 Motion
111 Accessory
112 Date and time
112 Accessibility
113 Developer options
114 About device
Troubleshooting
72 Gallery
75 Video Player
76 YouTube
77 FM Radio
Application & media stores
79 Play Store
80 Samsung Apps
80 S Suggest
81 Game Hub
Utilities
82 S Memo
84 S Planner
86 Dropbox
87 Cloud
88 Clock
90 Calculator
90 Voice Recorder
91 S Voice
92 Google
93 Voice Search
93 My Files
94 Downloads
Travel & local
95 Maps
96 Local
97 Navigation7
Getting started
Device layout
Back button
Microphone
Front camera
Earpiece
Menu button
Multipurpose jack
Touch screen
Proximity/Light
sensor
Microphone for
speakerphone
Home button
Power button
Rear camera
GPS antenna Flash
Speaker
Headset jack
Main antenna
Back cover
Volume buttonGetting started
8
The microphone at the top of the device is active only when you use the speakerphone or
take videos.
• Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause
connectivity problems or drain the battery.
• Do not use a screen protector. This causes sensor malfunctions.
• Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction
in humid conditions or when exposed to water.
Buttons
Button Function
Power
• Press and hold to turn the device on or off.
• Press and hold for 8-10 seconds to reset the device if it has
fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes.
• Press to lock or unlock the device. The device goes into lock
mode when the touch screen turns off.
Menu
• Tap to open a list of options available for the current screen.
• Tap and hold on the Home screen to launch Google search.
Home
• Press to return to the Home screen.
• Press and hold to open the list of recent applications.
Back • Tap to return to the previous screen.
Volume • Press to adjust the device volume.Getting started
9
Package contents
Check the product box for the following items:
• Device
• Battery
• Quick start guide
Use only Samsung-approved software. Pirated or illegal software may cause damage
or malfunctions, which are not covered by the warranty.
• The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary
depending on the region or service provider.
• The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible
with other devices.
• Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
• You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make
sure they are compatible with the device before purchase.
• Other accessories may not be compatible with your device.
• Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Malfunctions caused by using
unapproved accessories are not covered by the warranty service.
• Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on
manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer
to the Samsung website.Getting started
10
Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery
Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the
included battery.
• Only microSIM cards work with the device.
• Some LTE services may not be available depending on the service provider. For
details about service availability, contact your service provider.
1 Remove the back cover.
• Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover.
• Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover.
2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards.Getting started
11
• Do not remove the protective tape covering the antenna, as this can damage the
antenna.
• Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to
be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to
remove the memory card.
• Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not
responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards.
3 Push the SIM or USIM card into the slot until it locks in place.
4 Insert the battery.
1
2
5 Replace the back cover.Getting started
12
Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Pull out the battery.
3 Push the SIM or USIM card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out.Getting started
13
Charging the battery
Charge the battery before using it for the first time. Use the charger to charge the battery. A
computer can be also used to charge the device by connecting them via the USB cable.
Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or
cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device.
• When the battery power is low, the device emits a warning tone and displays a low
battery power message.
• If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on
immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for
a few minutes before turning on the device.
Charging with the charger
Plug the small end of the charger into the multipurpose jack of the device, and plug the large
end of the charger into an electric socket.
Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any
damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.Getting started
14
• The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge
the battery.
• If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen
may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device.
• While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the
device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger
may stop charging.
• If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a
Samsung Service Centre.
After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the
device, and then unplug it from the electric socket.
Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the
device.
To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a
power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in
use to avoid wasting power. The device should remain close to the electric socket
while charging.
Checking the battery charge status
When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current
battery charge status:
Charging Fully chargedGetting started
15
Reducing the battery consumption
Your device provides options that help you save battery power. By customising these options
and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges:
• When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button.
• Close unnecessary applications with the task manager.
• Deactivate the Bluetooth feature.
• Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature.
• Deactivate auto-syncing of applications.
• Decrease the backlight time.
• Decrease the brightness of the display.
Inserting a memory card
Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 32 GB. Depending on the
memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your
device.
• Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an
incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data
stored in it.
• Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up.
• The device supports only the FAT file system for memory cards. When inserting a
card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory
card.
• Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards.
• When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory
appears in the extSdCard folder under the internal memory.Getting started
16
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards.
3 Push the memory card into the slot until it locks in place.
4 Replace the back cover.
Removing the memory card
Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap
Apps→Settings→Storage→Unmount SD card→OK.
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Push the memory card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out.
3 Replace the back cover.
Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing
information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or damage to the
memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the
misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data.Getting started
17
Formatting the memory card
A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the
memory card on the device.
On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Storage→Format SD card→Format SD
card→Erase everything.
Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all
important data stored on the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss
of data resulting from user actions.
Turning the device on and off
When turning on the device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your
device.
Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn on the device.
• Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas
where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals.
• Press and hold the Power button and tap Flight mode to disable the wireless
features.
To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off.Getting started
18
Holding the device
Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity
problems or drain the battery.
Locking and unlocking the device
When not in use, lock the device to prevent unwanted operation. Pressing the Power button
turns off the screen and puts the device into lock mode. The device automatically gets locked
if it is not used for a specified period.
To unlock the device, press the Power button or the Home button when the touch screen is
turned off, tap anywhere on the screen, and then flick your finger in any direction.
You can use motion to unlock the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Lock
screen→Screen lock→Motion. To unlock the device with motion, tap and hold a point on
the screen, and then tilt the device forwards.
Adjusting the volume
Press the Volume button up or down to adjust the ringtone volume, or to adjust the sound
volume when playing music or video.Getting started
19
Switching to silent mode
Use one of the following methods:
• Press and hold the Volume button down until it switches to silent mode.
• Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Mute.
• Open the notifications panel at the top of the screen, and then tap Sound.
Set the device to alert you to various events in silent mode. Press and hold the Power button,
and then tap Vibrate.20
Basics
Indicator icons
The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the
device. The icons listed in the table below are most common.
Icon Meaning
No signal
Signal strength
Roaming (outside of normal service area)
GPRS network connected
EDGE network connected
UMTS network connected
HSDPA network connected
HSPA+ network connected
LTE network connected
Wi-Fi connected
Bluetooth feature activated
GPS activated
Call in progress
Missed call
Synced with the web
Connected to computer
No SIM or USIM card
New text or multimedia message
Alarm activated
Silent mode activated
Vibration mode activatedBasics
21
Icon Meaning
Flight mode activated
Error occurred or caution required
Battery power level
Using the touch screen
Use only fingers to use the touch screen.
• Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices.
Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction.
• Do not allow the touch screen to contact water. The touch screen may malfunction
in humid conditions or when exposed to water.
• To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply
excessive pressure to it with your fingertips.
• Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages
(screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the
device.
Finger gestures
Tapping
To open an application, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a
character using the on-screen keyboard, tap it with a finger.Basics
22
Dragging
To move an icon, thumbnail, or preview to a new location, tap and hold it and drag it to the
target position.
Double-tapping
Double-tap on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Double-tap again to return.Basics
23
Flicking
Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Applications screen to see another panel. Flick up
or down to scroll through a webpage or a list, such as contacts.
Pinching
Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out.Basics
24
Control motions
Simple motions allow easy control of the device.
Before using motions, make sure the motion feature is activated. On the Home screen, tap
Apps→Settings→Motion, and then drag the Motion switch to the right.
Excessive shaking or impact to the device may result in unintended inputs. To learn
how to control motions properly, tap Apps→Settings→Motion→Learn about
motions. (p.111)
Rotating the screen
Many applications allow display in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotating the
device causes the display to automatically adjust to fit the new screen orientation.
To prevent the display from rotating automatically, open the notifications panel and deselect
Screen rotation.
• Some applications do not allow screen rotation.
• Some applications display a different screen depending on the orientation. The
calculator turns into a scientific calculator when rotated to landscape.Basics
25
Picking up
When you pick up the device after it has been idle for some time or when the screen has
turned off, it vibrates if you have missed calls or new messages.
Holding to ear
While viewing call, message, or contact details, pick up and hold the device to your ear to
make a call.Basics
26
Panning to move
Tap and hold an item, and then move the device to the left or right to move the item to
another panel on the Home screen or the Applications screen.
Panning to browse
When an image is zoomed in, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then move the device
in any direction to browse the image.Basics
27
Double-tapping
Double-tap the device to move to the top of a list of contacts or emails.
Rotating
While the screen is locked, tap and hold the screen, and then rotate the device to landscape
orientation to launch the camera. To use this motion, on the Home screen, tap Apps→
Settings→Lock screen→Lock screen options, and then drag the Camera quick access
switch to the right.Basics
28
Turning over
Turn over the device to mute ringtone, pause media playback, or mute the FM radio (when
using the speaker).
Shaking
• Shake the device to search for Bluetooth devices, or computers in Kies via Wi-Fi.
• Shake the device to update the list of emails or information from Yahoo News, Yahoo
Finance, or AccuWeather.Basics
29
Tilting
Tap and hold two points on the screen, and then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or
out.
Page Buddy
Use this feature to use specific applications based on your actions. Pages related to your
actions appear in the following conditions:
• When you connect a headset or dock to the device.
• When you are roaming.
Notifications
Notification icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen to report missed calls, new
messages, calendar events, device status, and more. Drag down from the status bar to open
the notifications panel. Scroll the list to see additional alerts. To close the notifications panel,
drag up the bar that is at the bottom of the screen.
From the notifications panel, you can view your device’s current status and use the following
options:
• Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature.
• GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature.
• Sound: Activate or deactivate silent mode. You can vibrate or mute your device in silent
mode.Basics
30
• Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device.
• Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth feature.
• Mobile data: Activate or deactivate the data connection.
• Blocking mode: Activate or deactivate blocking mode. In blocking mode, the device will
block notifications. To select which notifications will be blocked, tap Settings→Blocking
mode.
• Power saving: Activate or deactivate power-saving mode.
• AllShare Cast: Activate or deactivate the AllShare Cast feature.
• Sync: Activate or deactivate auto-syncing of applications.
The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider.
Home screen
The Home screen is the starting point to access all of the device’s features. It displays indicator
icons, widgets, shortcuts to applications, and others.
The Home screen can have multiple panels. To view other panels, scroll left or right.
Rearranging items
Adding an application icon
On the Home screen, tap Apps, tap and hold an application icon, and then drag it into a panel
preview.
Adding an item
Customise the Home screen by adding widgets or folders.
Tap and hold the empty area on the Home screen, and then select one of the following
categories:
• Apps and widgets: Add widgets or applications to the Home screen.
• Folder: Create a new folder.
Then, select an item and drag it to the Home screen.Basics
31
Moving an item
Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the
side of the screen.
Removing an item
Tap and hold an item, and drag it to the rubbish bin that appears at the top of the Home
screen. When the rubbish bin turns red, release it.
Rearranging panels
Adding a new panel
Tap →Edit page→ .
Moving a panel
Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location.
Removing a panel
Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the
bottom of the screen.
Setting wallpaper
Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen.
On the Home screen, tap →Set wallpaper→Home screen, and then select one of the
following:
• Gallery: See photos taken by the device’s camera or images downloaded from the
Internet.
• Live wallpapers: See animated images.
• Wallpapers: See wallpaper images.
Then, select an image and tap Set wallpaper. Or, select an image, resize it by dragging the
frame, and then tap Done.Basics
32
Using applications
This device can run many different types of applications, ranging from media to Internet
applications.
Opening an application
On the Home screen or the Applications screen, select an application icon to open it.
Opening from recently-used applications
Press and hold the Home button to open the list of recently-used applications.
Select an application icon to open.
Closing an application
Close applications not in use to save battery power and maintain device performance.
Press and hold the Home button, tap , and then tap End next to an application to close it.
To close all running applications, tap End all. Alternatively, press and hold the Home button,
and then tap .
Applications screen
The Applications screen displays icons for all applications, including any new applications
installed.
On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Applications screen.
To view other panels, scroll left or right.Basics
33
Rearranging applications
Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to a new location. To move it to
another panel, drag it to the side of the screen.
Organising with folders
Put related applications together in a folder for convenience.
Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to Create folder. Enter a folder
name and then tap OK. Put applications into the new folder by dragging, and then tap Save
to save the arrangement.
Rearranging panels
Pinch on the screen, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location.
Installing applications
Use application stores, such as Samsung Apps, to download and install applications.
Uninstalling applications
Tap →Uninstall, and then select an application to uninstall it.
Default applications that come with the device cannot be uninstalled.
Sharing applications
Share downloaded applications with other users via email, Bluetooth, or other methods.
Tap →Share app, select applications, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. The
next steps vary depending on the method selected.Basics
34
Help
Access help information to learn how to use the device and applications or configure
important settings.
Tap Help on the Applications screen. Select an item to view tips.
To reset help pop-ups if you have hidden them, tap Show help tip pop-ups, and then select
items by ticking.
Entering text
Use the Samsung keyboard or the voice input feature to enter text.
Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the
input language to one of the supported languages.
Changing the keyboard type
Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select
the type of keyboard to use.
Using the Samsung keyboard
Changing the keyboard layout
Tap →Portrait keyboard types, and then tap Qwerty keyboard or 3x4 keyboard.
On the 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap
repeatedly the key corresponding to the character.
Break to the next line.
Delete a preceding character.
Enter numerals and punctuation
marks.
Enter uppercase.
Set options for the Samsung
keyboard.
Enter a space.Basics
35
Entering uppercase
Tap before entering a character. For all caps, tap it twice.
Changing language keyboards
Slide the space key left or right to change language keyboards.
Handwriting
Tap and hold , tap , and then write a word with a finger. Suggested words appear as
characters are entered. Select a suggested word.
Entering text by voice
Activate the voice input feature and then speak into the microphone. The device displays
what you speak.
If the device does not recognise your words correctly, tap the underlined text and select an
alternative word or phrase from the dropdown list.
To change the language or add languages for the voice recognition, tap the current language.
When you are finished, tap Tap to pause.Basics
36
Copying and pasting
Tap and hold over text, drag or to select more or less text, and then tap to copy or
to cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard.
To paste it into a text entry field, place the cursor at the point where it should be inserted, and
then tap →Paste.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network
Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other
devices. (p. 98)
Turning Wi-Fi on and off
Open the notifications panel, and then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on or off.
• Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all
European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction
indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors.
• Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use.
Joining Wi-Fi networks
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Wi-Fi, and then drag the Wi-Fi switch to the right.
Select a network from the list of detected Wi-Fi networks, enter a password if necessary, and
then tap Connect. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. After the device
connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will automatically connect to it any time it is available.
Adding Wi-Fi networks
If the desired network does not appear in the networks list, tap Add Wi-Fi network at the
bottom of the networks list. Enter the network name in Network SSID, select the security
type and enter the password if it is not an open network, and then tap Save.Basics
37
Forgetting Wi-Fi networks
Any network that has ever been used, including the current network, can be forgotten so the
device will not automatically connect to it. Select the network in the networks list, and then
tap Forget.
Setting up accounts
Google applications, such as Play Store, require a Google account, and Samsung Apps
requires a Samsung account. Create Google and Samsung accounts to have the best
experience with the device.
Adding accounts
Follow the instructions that appear when opening a Google application without signing in to
set up a Google account.
To sign in with or sign up for a Google account, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→
Add account→Google. After that, tap New to sign up, or tap Existing, and then follow onscreen instructions to complete the account setup. More than one Google account can be
used on the device.
Set up a Samsung account as well.
Removing accounts
On the Applications screen, tap Settings, select an account name under Accounts, select the
account to remove, and then tap Remove account.Basics
38
Transferring files
Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice
versa.
The following file formats are supported by some applications. Some file formats are
not supported depending on the version of the device’s software.
• Music: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac, flac, wav, amr, awb, mid, midi,
xmf, mxmf, imy, rtttl, rtx, and ota
• Image: bmp, gif, jpg, and png
• Video: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, asf, dvix, m4v, webm, and mkv
• Document: doc, docx, dot, dotx, xls, xlsx, xltx, csv, ppt, pptx, pps, ppsx, pot, potx,
pdf, hwp, txt, asc, rtf, and zip
Connecting with Samsung Kies
Samsung Kies is a computer application that manages media libraries, contacts, and
calendars, and syncs them with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from
the Samsung website.
1
Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch,
double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer.
2 Transfer files between your device and the computer.
Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information.
Connecting with Windows Media Player
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on the computer.
1
Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
2
Open Windows Media Player and sync music files.Basics
39
Connecting as a media device
1
Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
2
Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device→Media
device (MTP).
Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or
not have any appropriate driver installed.
3 Transfer files between your device and the computer.
Securing the device
Prevent others from using or accessing personal data and information stored in the device by
using the security features. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it.
Setting a face unlock
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face unlock.
Fit your face in the frame to be captured. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock
the screen in case the face unlock fails.
Setting a face and voice unlock
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face and voice.
Fit your face in the frame to be captured and then set a voice command. Then, set a backup
unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face and voice unlock fails.Basics
40
Setting a pattern
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Pattern.
Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it.
Set a backup unlock PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern.
Setting a PIN
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→PIN.
Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it.
Setting a password
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Password.
Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password
again to verify it.Basics
41
Unlocking the device
Turn on the screen by pressing the Power button or the Home button, and enter the unlock
code.
If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it.
Upgrading the device
The device can be upgraded to the latest software.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Upgrading with Samsung Kies
Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically
recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update
button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for details on
how to upgrade.
• Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is
upgrading.
• While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer.
Doing so may interfere with the update process.
Upgrading over the air
The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air
(FOTA) service.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→About device→Software update→Update.42
Communication
Phone
Use this application to make or answer a call.
Tap Phone on the Applications screen.
Making calls
Making a call
Use one of the following methods:
• Keypad: Enter the number using the keypad, and then tap .
• Logs: Make a call from the history of incoming and outgoing calls and messages.
• Favourites: Make a call from the list of favourite contacts.
• Contacts: Make a call from the contacts list.
Speed dial numbers
For speed dial numbers, tap and hold the corresponding digit.
Number prediction
When entering numbers on the keypad, automatic predictions appear. Select one of these to
make a call.Communication
43
Finding contacts
Enter a name, phone number, or email address to find a contact in the contacts list. As
characters are entered, predicted contacts appear. Select one to place a call to it.
Making an international call
Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone
number, and then tap .
During a call
The following actions are available:
• : Hold a call. Or press and hold the headset button. Tap to retrieve the held call, or
press and hold the headset button.
• Add call: Dial a second call.
• Keypad: Open the keypad.
• Speaker: Activate the speakerphone. Keep the device away from your ears when using
the speakerphone.
• Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you.
• Headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device.
• Swap: Switch between two calls.
• Merge: Make a multiparty call when connected to two calls. Repeat this to add more
parties. This feature is available only if the multiparty call service is active.
• →Contacts: Open the contacts list.
• →Message: Send a message.
• →S Memo: Create a memo.
• →Transfer: Connect the first party to the second party. This disconnects you from
the conversation.
• →Manage conference call: Have a private conversation with one party during a
multiparty call or disconnect one party form the multiparty call.Communication
44
Adding contacts
To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, enter the number and tap Add
to Contacts.
Viewing call logs
Tap Logs to view the history of incoming and outgoing calls.
To filter a call log, tap →View by, and then select an option.
Fixed dialling number
The device can be set to restrict outgoing calls only to numbers with specified prefixes. Those
prefixes are stored in the SIM or USIM card.
Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Fixed Dialling Numbers→Enable FDN,
and then enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. Tap FDN list and add numbers.
Call barring
The device can be set to prevent certain calls from being made. For example, international
calling can be disabled.
Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call barring, select a call type, select a call
barring option, and then enter a password.
Receiving calls
Answering a call
When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press the headset button.
If the call waiting service is active, another call can be made. When the second call is
answered, the first call is put on hold.Communication
45
Rejecting a call
When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press and hold the headset button.
To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, tap Reject call with message. To create
the rejection message, tap →Call settings→Set reject messages.
Automatically rejecting calls from unwanted numbers
Tap →Call settings→Call rejection, drag the Auto reject mode switch to the right, and
then tap Auto reject list. Tap Create, enter a number, assign a category, and then tap Save.
Missed calls
If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of
missed calls.
Call waiting
Call waiting is a service provided by the service provider. A user can use this service to
suspend a current call and switch to an incoming call. This service is not available for video
calls.
To make use of this service, tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call waiting.
Call forwarding
The device can be set to send incoming calls to a specified number.
Tap →Call settings→Call forwarding, and then select a call type and condition. Enter a
number and tap Enable.
Ending a call
Tap End call to end a call. Or press the headset button.Communication
46
Video calls
Making a video call
Enter the number or select a contact from the contacts list, and then tap to make a video
call.
During a video call
The following actions are available:
• Switch camera: Switch between the front and rear camera.
• Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you.
• →Hide me: Hide your image from the other party.
• →Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party.
• →Keypad: Open the keypad.
• →Switch to headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device.
• →Speaker off: Deactivate the speakerphone feature.
Tap and hold the other party’s image to access the following options:
• Capture image: Capture the other party’s image.
• Record video: Take a video of the other party’s images.
It is illegal in many countries to record a call without the other party’s prior
permission.
Tap and hold your image to access the following options:
• Switch camera: Switch between the front and rear camera.
• Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party.Communication
47
Swapping images
Drag an image of either party onto the other party’s image to swap the images.
Contacts
Use this application to manage contacts, including phone numbers, email addresses, and
others.
Tap Contacts on the Applications screen.
Managing contacts
Creating a contact
Tap and enter contact information.
• : Add an image.
• / : Add or delete a contact field.Communication
48
Editing a contact
Select a contact to edit, and then tap .
Deleting a contact
Tap →Delete.
Setting a speed dial number
Tap →Speed dial setting, select a speed dial number, and then select a contact for it. To
remove a speed dial number, tap and hold it, and then tap Remove.
Searching for contacts
Use one of the following search methods:
• Scroll up or down the contacts list.
• Use the index at the right side of the contacts list for quick scrolling, by dragging a finger
along it.
• Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria.
Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions:
• : Add to favourite contacts.
• / : Make a voice or video call.
• : Compose a message.
• : Compose an email.
Importing and exporting contacts
Syncing with Google Contacts
Tap →Merge with Google.
Contacts synced with Google Contacts appear with in the contacts list.
If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Google
Contacts, and vice versa.Communication
49
Syncing with Samsung Contacts
Tap →Merge with Samsung.
Contacts synced with Samsung Contacts appear with in the contacts list.
If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Samsung
Contacts, and vice versa.
Importing contacts
Tap →Import/Export→Import from SIM card, Import from SD card, or Import from
USB storage.
Exporting contacts
Tap →Import/Export→Export to SIM card, Export to SD card, or Export to USB
storage.
Sharing contacts
Tap →Import/Export→Share namecard via, select contacts, tap Done, and then select
a sharing method.
Favourite contacts
Tap , and then take one of the following actions:
• Search: Search for contacts.
• Add to Favourites: Add contacts to favourites.
• Remove from Favourites: Remove contacts from favourites.
• Grid view / List view: View contacts in grid or list form.Communication
50
Contact groups
Adding contacts to a group
Select a group, and then tap . Select contacts to add, and then tap Done.
Managing groups
Tap , and then take one of the following actions:
• Create: Make a new group.
• Search: Search for contacts.
• Change order: Tap and hold next to the group name, drag it up or down to another
position, and then tap Done.
• Delete groups: Select user-added groups, and then tap Delete. Default groups cannot be
deleted.
Sending a message or email to a group’s members
Select a group, tap →Send message or Send email, select members, and then tap Done.
Business card
Create a business card and send it to others.
Tap Set up my profile, enter details, such as phone number, email address, and postal
address, and then tap Save. If user information has been saved when you set up the device,
select the business card in ME, and then tap to edit.
Tap →Share namecard via, and then select a sharing method.Communication
51
Messaging
Use this application to send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS).
Tap Messaging on the Applications screen.
You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while you are
outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider.
Sending messages
Tap , add recipients, enter a message, and then tap .
Use the following methods to add recipients:
• Enter a phone number.
• Tap , select contacts, and then tap Done.
Use the following methods to make a multimedia message:
• Tap and attach images, videos, contacts, memos, events, and others.
• Tap →Insert smiley to insert emoticons.
• Tap →Add subject to enter a subject.
Sending scheduled messages
While composing a message, tap →Scheduled message. Set a time and date, and then
tap OK. The device will send the message at the specified time and date.
• If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network,
or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent.
• This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date
may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update
the information.Communication
52
Viewing incoming messages
Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact.
Select a contact to view the person’s message.
Listening to a voice message
Tap and hold 1 on the keypad, and then follow the instructions from your service provider.
Email
Use this application to send or view email messages.
Tap Email on the Applications screen.
Setting up email accounts
Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time.
Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account, such as Google
Mail, or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow on-screen
instructions to complete the setup.
To set up another email account, tap →Settings→ .
Sending messages
Tap the email account to use, and then tap at the top of the screen. Enter recipients,
subject, and message, and then tap .
Tap to add a recipient from the contacts list.
Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients.
Tap to attach images, videos, contacts, memos, events, and others.
Tap to insert images, events, contacts, and location information into the message.Communication
53
Sending scheduled messages
While composing a message, tap →Schedule sending. Tick Schedule sending, set a
time and date, and then tap Done. The device will send the message at the specified time and
date.
• If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network,
or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent.
• This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date
may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update
the information.
Reading messages
Select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new
messages, tap .
Tap a message to read.
Open attachments.
Reply to the message.
Add this email address to the
contacts list.
Delete the message.
Mark the message as a reminder.
Forward the message.
Tap the attachment tab to open attachments, and then tap next to an attachment to save
it.Communication
54
Google Mail
Use this application to quickly and directly access the Google Mail service.
Tap Google Mail on the Applications screen.
• This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
• This application may be labelled differently depending on the region or service
provider.
Sending messages
In any mailbox, tap , enter recipients, a subject, and a message, and then tap .
Tap →Attach picture to attach images.
Tap →Attach video to attach videos.
Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients.
Tap →Save draft to save the message for later delivery.
Tap →Discard to start over.
Reading messages
Mark the message as unread.
Add a label to this message.
Preview attachment.
Keep this message for long-term
storage.
Mark the message as a reminder.
Delete this message.
Reply to this message.
Reply to all recipients or forward
this message to others.
Add this email address to the
contacts list.Communication
55
Labels
Google Mail does not use actual folders, but uses labels instead. When Google Mail is
launched, it displays messages labelled Inbox.
Tap to view messages in other labels.
To add a label to a message, select the message, tap , and then select the label to assign.
Talk
Use this application to chat with others via Google Talk.
Tap Talk on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Public profile
Tap the account ID at the top of the friends list to change the availability status, image, or
status message.
Adding friends
Tap , enter the email address of the friend to add, and then tap DONE.
Chatting with friends
Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen,
and then tap .
To add a friend to chat, tap →Add to chat.
To end the chat, tap →End chat.Communication
56
Switching between chats
Scroll left or right.
Deleting chat history
Chats are automatically saved. To delete chat history, tap →Clear chat history.
Google+
Use this application to stay connected with people via Google’s social network service.
Tap Google+ on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Tap All circles to change the category, and then scroll up or down to view posts from your
circles.
Tap to use other social network features.
Messenger
Use this application to chat with others via Google+ instant messaging service.
Tap Messenger on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen,
and then tap .Communication
57
ChatON
Use this application to chat with any device that has a mobile phone number.
Tap ChatON on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Create the buddies list by entering phone numbers or email addresses of Samsung accounts,
or selecting buddies from the list of suggestions.
Select a buddy to start chatting.
To sync contacts on the device with ChatON, tap Settings→Sync contacts.58
Web & network
Internet
Use this application to browse the Internet.
Tap Internet on the Applications screen.
Viewing webpages
Tap the address field, enter the web address, and then tap Go.
Tap to share, save, or print the current webpage while viewing a webpage.
Opening a new page
Tap →New window.
To go to another webpage, tap , scroll left or right, and tap the page to select it.
Searching the web by voice
Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords
that appear.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Bookmarks
To bookmark the current webpage, tap →Add bookmark.
To open a bookmarked webpage, tap , and then select one.Web & network
59
History
Tap →History to open a webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the
history, tap →Clear history.
Tap →History→Most visited to open a webpage from the list of most visited webpages.
Saved pages
To view saved webpages, tap →Saved pages.
Links
Tap and hold a link on the webpage to open it in a new tab, save, or copy.
To view saved links, tap →Downloads.
Sharing webpages
To share a webpage address with others, tap →Share page.
To share a part of a webpage, tap and hold the desired text, and then tap →Share.
Chrome
Use this application to search for information and browse webpages.
Tap Chrome on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Viewing webpages
Tap the address field, and then enter a web address or search criteria.
Opening a new page
Tap →New tab.
To go to another webpage, tap , and then select a webpage.Web & network
60
Searching the web by voice
Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords
that appear.
Syncing with other devices
Sync open tabs and bookmarks to use with Chrome on another device, when you are logged
in with the same Google account.
To view open tabs on other devices, tap →Other devices. Select a webpage to open.
To view bookmarks, tap .
Bluetooth
Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use
Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices.
• Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or
received via the Bluetooth feature.
• Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted
and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating
distance may be reduced.
• Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth
SIG, may be incompatible with your device.
• Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies
of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes).
Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth
feature.
To activate Bluetooth, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth, and then drag
the Bluetooth switch to the right.Web & network
61
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth→Scan, and detected devices are
listed. Select the device you want to pair with, and then accept the auto-generated passkey
on both devices to confirm.
Sending and receiving data
Many applications support data transfer via Bluetooth. An example is Gallery. Open Gallery,
select an image, tap →Bluetooth, and then select one of the paired Bluetooth devices.
After that, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device to receive the
image. The transferred file is saved in the Bluetooth folder. If a contact is received, it is added
to the contacts list automatically.
AllShare Play
Use this application to play contents saved on various devices over the Internet. You can play
and send any file on any device to another device or web storage server.
To use this application, you must sign in to your Samsung account and register two or more
devices as file servers. The registration methods may vary depending on the device type. To
get more details, tap →Settings→Customer support.
Tap AllShare Play on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Sending files
Select a device or web storage, select a file, and then tap .
Sharing files
Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then use the following options:
• Group Play: Share screens with multiple other devices that are connected to the same
Wi-Fi network.
• Facebook / Twitter / Flickr / Picasa: Upload files to a social network site.Web & network
62
Playing files on a remote device
Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then select a device.
• Supported file formats may differ depending on connected devices as a media
player.
• Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection.
Managing contents on a web storage server
Select a web storage server, and then view and manage your files.
Group Play
Use this application to share images, documents, and music with other devices that are
connected to the same Wi-Fi network.
Tap Group Play on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Sharing files
1 Tap Share picture, Share document, or Share music, select the files to share, and then
tap Done.
2 Enter a PIN code and tap Done.
Joining another Group Play
Tap another device under Join, enter the PIN code, and then tap OK.Web & network
63
NFC
Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information
about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for
transportation or events after downloading the required applications.
The battery contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the battery carefully to avoid
damaging the NFC antenna.
If the screen is locked, your device will not read NFC tags or receive data.
To activate the NFC feature, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→
NFC. Drag the NFC switch to the right.
Reading information from an NFC tag
Place the device near an NFC tag. The information from the tag will appear.
Making a purchase with the NFC feature
Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile
payment service. To register or get details about the service, contact your service provider.
Touch the back of your device to the NFC card reader.
Sending data via Android Beam
Use the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled
devices.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→NFC. Drag the Android Beam
switch to the right.
Select an item, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap
your device’s screen.Web & network
64
S Beam
Use this feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents.
Do not send copyright-protected data via S Beam. Doing so may violate copyright
laws. Samsung is not responsible for any liabilities caused by the illegal use of
copyrighted data.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→S Beam. Drag the S Beam
switch to the right.
Select a file, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap your
device’s screen.
If both devices try to send data simultaneously, the file transfer may fail.65
Media
Music Player
Use this application to listen to music.
Tap Music Player on the Applications screen.
• Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software version.
• Some files may not play properly depending on the encoding used.
Playing music
Select a music category, and then select a song to play.
Open the playlist.
Skip to the next song. Tap and
hold to move forwards quickly.
Pause and resume playback.
Adjust the volume.
Open Music square.
Change the repeat mode.
Restart the currently-playing
song or skip to the previous
song. Tap and hold to move
backwards quickly.
Turn on shu e.
Select a sound e ect.Media
66
Setting a song as ringtone
To use the currently-playing song as ringtone, tap →Set as→Phone ringtone.
Creating playlists
Make an own selection of songs.
Tap Playlists, and then tap →Create playlist. Enter a title and tap OK. Tap Add music,
select songs to include, and then tap Done.
To add the currently-playing song to a playlist, tap →Add to playlist.
Playing music by mood
Play music grouped by mood. The playlist is automatically created by the device. When a new
song is added, tap Music square→ →Library update.
Tap Music square and select a cell of mood. Or select multiple cells by dragging your finger.
Camera
Use this application to take photos or videos.
Use Gallery to view photos and videos taken with the device’s camera. (p. 72)
Tap Camera on the Applications screen.
The camera automatically shuts off when unused.
Camera etiquette
• Do not take photos or videos of other people without their permission.
• Do not take photos or videos where legally prohibited.
• Do not take photos or videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy.Media
67
Taking photos
Taking a photo
Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. When the subject is in
focus, the focus frame turns green. Tap to take the photo.
Indicates which
storage is in use.
Switch between still
and video mode.
Open the image
viewer to display
photos.
Switch between the
front and rear camera.
Change the ash
setting.
Change the shooting
mode.
Select among various
e ects that are
available.
Change the camera
settings.
Scene mode
Predefined settings make point-and-shoot photos easier to take.
Tap →Scene mode.
• Portrait: Use this setting for a human subject.
• Landscape: Use this setting to take photos of blue skies and landscapes with richer
colours.
• Sports: Use this setting for fast-moving subjects.
• Party/Indoor: Use this setting for well-lit indoor scenes.
• Beach/Snow: Use this setting for well-lit or sunny outdoor scenes.
• Sunset: Use this setting for richer colours and sharper contrasts.
• Dawn: Use this setting for very subtle colours.Media
68
• Autumn colour: Use this setting for red-shifted background scenery.
• Text: Use this setting for books or posters.
• Candlelight: Use this setting for images of bright light against a dark background.
• Firework: Use this setting for high-contrast scenes.
• Backlight: Use this setting for subjects with bright lights behind them.
• Night: Use this setting for images taken in darker conditions.
Shooting mode
Several photo effects are available.
Tap →Shooting mode.
• Single shot: Take a single photo.
• Panorama: Take a photo composed of many photos strung together.
• Share shot: Send a photo directly to another device via Wi-Fi Direct.
• Buddy photo share: Set the device to recognise a person’s face that you have tagged in a
photo and send it to that person.
• Smile shot: Take a photo while the camera waits for a subject to smile.
• Cartoon: Take a photo that looks like a drawing.
Panoramic photos
A panoramic photo is a wide landscape image consisting of multiple shots.
Tap →Shooting mode→Panorama.
Tap and move the camera in any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the
viewfinder, the camera automatically takes another shot in a panoramic sequence. To stop
shooting, tap again.Media
69
Taking videos
Taking a video
Slide the still-video switch to the video icon, and then tap to take a video. To stop
recording, tap .
• Manual focus is not available in video mode.
• The zoom function may not be available when recording at the highest resolution.
Recording mode
Switch between the
front and rear camera.
Change recording
mode.
Change the ash
setting.
Select among various
e ects that are
available.
Change the camera
settings.
Indicates which
storage is in use.
Switch between still
and video mode.
Open the video player
to play videos. Media
70
Tap to change recording mode.
• Normal: Use this mode for normal quality.
• Limit for MMS: Use this mode to lower quality for sending via messaging.
Zooming in and out
Use one of the following methods:
• Use the Volume button to zoom in or out.
• Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out.
• The zoom function may not be available when shooting at the highest resolution.
• The zoom in/out effect is available when using the zoom feature while shooting
video.
Configuring settings for Camera
Tap to configure settings for Camera. Not all of the following options are available in both
still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary depending on the mode
used.Media
71
• Edit shortcuts: Reorganise shortcuts to frequently-used options.
• GPS tag: Attach a GPS location tag to the photo.
• To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be
obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather
conditions.
• Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet.
To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.
• Self portrait: Take a photo of yourself.
• Self recording: Take a video of yourself.
• Flash: Activate or deactivate the flash.
• Shooting mode: Change the shooting mode.
• Recording mode: Change recording mode.
• Effects: Select among various photo effects that are available.
• Scene mode: Change the scene mode.
• Exposure value: Change the exposure value. This determines how much light the
camera’s sensor receives. For low-light situations, use a higher exposure.
• Focus mode: Select a focus mode. Auto focus is camera-controlled. Macro is for very
close objects.
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots.
• Resolution: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up
more memory.
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour
range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar
to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras.
• ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are
for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects.Media
72
• Metering: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated.
Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures
the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene.
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects.
• Contextual filename: Set the camera to display contextual tags.
• Take photos using voice: Set the camera to take photos with voice commands.
• Save as flipped: Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene.
• Image quality: Set the quality level for photos. Higher quality images require more
storage space.
• Video quality: Set the quality level for videos.
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.
Shortcuts
Reorganise shortcuts for easy access to the camera’s various options.
Tap →Edit shortcuts.
Tap and hold an option and drag it to a slot at the left of the screen. The other icons can be
moved within the list by tapping and dragging them.
Gallery
Use this application to view images and videos.
Tap Gallery on the Applications screen.
• Some file formats are not supported depending on the software installed on the
device.
• Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded.Media
73
Viewing images
Launching Gallery displays available folders. When another application, such as Email, saves
an image, the download folder is automatically created to contain the image. Likewise,
capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Select a folder to open
it.
In a folder, images are displayed by creation date. Select an image to view it in full screen.
Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image.
Zooming in and out
Use one of the following methods to zoom in an image:
• Double-tap anywhere to zoom in.
• Spread two fingers apart on any place to zoom in. Pinch to zoom out, or double-tap to
return.
Viewing images using the motion feature
Use the motion feature to execute a function with particular motion.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Motion, drag the Motion switch to the right, and
then select features by ticking.
To stop using a motion feature, drag the Motion switch to the left.
To set the sensitivity for each motion feature, tap Sensitivity settings, select a feature, and
then use the adjustable slide bar.
Playing videos
Video files show the icon on the preview. Select a video to watch it and tap .
Editing images
When viewing an image, tap and use the following functions:
• Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current folder.
• Face tag: Register the faces in the image as face tags.Media
74
• Tag buddy: Set the camera to display contextual tags.
• Add weather tag: Add a weather tag.
• Copy to clipboard: Copy to clipboard.
• Rotate left: Rotate anticlockwise.
• Rotate right: Rotate clockwise.
• Crop: Resize the blue frame to crop and save the image in it.
• Edit: Launch the Photo editor application.
• Set as: Set the image as a wallpaper or a contact image.
• Buddy photo share: Send the image to a person whose face is tagged in the image.
• Print: Print via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. The device is only compatible with some
Samsung printers.
• Rename: Rename the file.
• Scan for nearby devices: Search for devices that have media sharing activated.
• Details: View image details.
Deleting images
Use one of the following methods:
• In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap .
• When viewing an image, tap .
Sharing images
Use one of the following methods:
• In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap to send them
to others.
• When viewing an image, tap to send it to others or share it via social network services.
Setting as wallpaper
When viewing an image, tap →Set as to set the image as wallpaper or to assign it to a
contact.Media
75
Video Player
Use this application to play video files.
Tap Video Player on the Applications screen.
• Some file formats are not supported depending on the device's software.
• Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded.
Playing videos
Select a video to play.
Change screen ratio.
Move forwards or
backwards by
dragging the bar.
Restart the current
video or skip to the
previous video. Tap
and hold to move
backwards quickly.
Skip to the next video.
Tap and hold to move
forwards quickly.
Adjust the volume.
Reduce the size of the
video screen.
Pause and resume
playback.
Deleting videos
Tap →Delete, select videos by ticking, and then tap Delete.
Sharing videos
Tap →Share via, select videos by ticking, tap Done, and then select a sharing method.Media
76
YouTube
Use this application to watch videos from the YouTube website.
Tap YouTube on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Watching videos
Tap , and then enter a keyword. Select one of the returned search results to watch a video.
Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display full screen.
Pause or resume
playback.
Move forwards or
backwards by
dragging the bar.
Change display
quality.
Add the video to
the playlist.
Search for videos.
Rotate the screen to
portrait orientation.
Send the URL to
others.
Sharing videos
Select the video to view, tap , and then select a sharing method.
Uploading videos
Select your account, tap , select a video, enter information for the video, and then tap .Media
77
FM Radio
Listen to music and news on the FM radio. To listen to the FM radio, you must connect a
headset, which serves as the radio antenna.
Tap FM Radio on the Applications screen.
Listening to the FM radio
Plug a headset into the device before launching the FM radio.
The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically when running for the
first time.
Tap to turn on the FM radio. Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap
to return to the FM radio screen.
Add the current radio station to
the favourites list.
Turn the FM radio on or off.
Access services for the current
station.
Adjust the volume.
Search for an available radio
station.
Fine-tune the frequency.
Record a song from the FM radio.Media
78
Scanning radio stations
Tap →Scan, and then select a scan option. The FM radio scans and saves available
stations automatically.
Select the radio station you want from the stations list and tap to return to the FM radio
screen.
Adding stations to the favourites list
Scroll to a radio station, and then tap to add the station to the favourites list.79
Application & media stores
Play Store
Use this application to purchase and download applications and games that are able to run
on the device.
Tap Play Store on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Installing applications
Browse applications by category, or tap to search with a keyword.
Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Install. If there is a charge for
the application, tap the price, and follow on-screen instructions to complete the purchase
process.
• When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon
appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications
panel and tap the icon to update the application.
• To install applications that you downloaded from other sources, on the
Applications screen, tap Settings→Security→Unknown sources.
Uninstalling applications
Uninstall the applications purchased from Play Store.
Tap →My Apps, select an application to delete in the list of installed applications, and
then tap Uninstall.Application & media stores
80
Samsung Apps
Use this application to purchase and download dedicated Samsung applications. For more
information, visit www.samsungapps.com.
Tap Samsung Apps on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
If a Samsung account is not registered, follow on-screen instructions to create a Samsung
account. To complete the subscription process, read the terms and conditions, and then tap
Accept to agree to them.
Installing applications
Browse applications by category. Tap to select a category.
To search for an application, tap at the top of the screen, and then enter a keyword in the
search field.
Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Get.
When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears
at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and
tap the icon to update the application.
S Suggest
Use this application to browse and download the latest applications suggested by Samsung.
Tap S Suggest on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Application & media stores
81
Game Hub
Use this application to access games.
Tap Game Hub on the Applications screen.
Scroll left or right and select a game to download from Samsung Apps.82
Utilities
S Memo
Use this application to create a memo using images and voice recordings.
Tap S Memo on the Applications screen.
Composing memos
Append another page to the
current memo.
Hide the toolbar.
Jot down or draw a memo. Undo and redo the last action.
Enter a memo.
Erase the handwritten memo.
Switch to view mode.
When jotting down a memo, tap once more to change the pen type, line thickness, or pen
colour.
When erasing the handwritten memo, tap once more to change the eraser size or clear
the memo.Utilities
83
View more colours. Adjust the
highlighter transparency.
Change the pen type.
Change the line thickness.
Change the pen colour.
To change the sheet background, tap →Change background.
Inserting images or a voice recording
Tap to insert multimedia files. Tap to insert a voice recording.
Make a voice recording to insert.
Mark the memo as important.
Insert a multimedia le.
Browsing memos
Browse memo thumbnails by scrolling up or down.
To search for a memo, tap →Search.
To delete memos, tap →Delete.
To sort memos by date, title, text, or others, tap →Sort by.
To change the view mode, tap →View by list.
To create a memo by importing a file, tap →Import S Memo.
To sync memos with Google Docs or Evernote, tap →Sync.
To create a folder, tap →Create folder.Utilities
84
To move memos to another folder, tap →Move.
To copy memos, tap →Copy.
To change the S Memo settings, tap →Settings.
To view the tutorial for S Memo, tap →Tutorial.
Viewing a memo
Tap the memo thumbnail to open it.
To send the memo to others, tap →Share via.
To save the memo as an image file or a PDF file, tap →Export.
To save the memo as an event, tap →Create event.
To set the memo as a widget or wallpaper for the Home screen, tap →Set as.
To print the memo via a USB or Wi-Fi connection, tap →Print. The device is only
compatible with some Samsung printers.
To edit the memo, tap the screen.
To play the voice recording, tap .
S Planner
Use this application to manage events and tasks.
Tap S Planner on the Applications screen.
Creating events or tasks
Tap , and then use one of the following methods:
• Quick add: Create an event or task from a memo. This feature is available only for English
and Korean.
• Add event: Enter an event with an optional repeat setting.
• Add task: Enter a task with an optional priority setting.Utilities
85
To add an event or task more briefly, tap a date to select it and tap it again.
Enter a title and specify which calendar to use or sync with. Then tap Edit event details or
Edit task details to add more details, such as how often the event repeats, when it has an
advance alert, or where it takes place.
Attach a map showing the location of the event. Enter the location in the Location field, tap
next to the field, and then pinpoint the precise location by tapping and holding on the
map that appears.
Attach a memo from S Memo. Tap Memos, and then compose a new memo or select one of
the existing memos.
Attach an image. Tap Images, and then take a photo or select one of the existing images.
Syncing with Google Calendar
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Google under Accounts→ a Google account,
and then tick Sync Calendar. To manually sync for updating, on the Applications screen, tap S
Planner→ →Sync.
To display synced events or tasks, tap →Settings→Calendars, select the Google
account, and then tap Done.Utilities
86
Changing calendar type
Tap , and then select one from among different types of calendars including year, month,
week, and others. A pinch gesture can be used to change calendar type. For example, pinch
to change from the monthly calendar to the yearly calendar, and spread apart to change
yearly calendar back to monthly calendar.
Searching for events
Tap →Search, and then enter a keyword to search for.
To view today’s events, tap Today at the top of the screen.
Deleting events
Select a date or event, and then tap →Delete.
Sharing events
Select an event, tap →Share via, and then select a sharing method.
Dropbox
Use this application to save and share files with others via the Dropbox cloud storage. When
you save files to Dropbox, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other
computers that have Dropbox installed.
Tap Dropbox on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
When running Dropbox for the first time, tap Start to activate it. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the setup.
To upload files to Dropbox, tap → →Upload here→Photos or videos or Other files.
To open a file in Dropbox, tap , and then select a file. While viewing the file, tap Favorite to
add it to the favourites list.
To open favourite files, tap .Utilities
87
Cloud
Use this feature to sync files or back up settings and application data with your Samsung
account or Dropbox.
Tap Settings→Cloud on the Applications screen.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Syncing with the Samsung account
Tap your Samsung account or Sync settings to sync files.
Backing up or restoring data
Tap Device backup to back up or restore data with your Samsung account.
Syncing with Dropbox
If an account is not set up, tap Set account, and then enter the Dropbox account. Follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the setup.
Once you sign in, tap Allow and the device automatically syncs files with Dropbox whenever
you make some changes.Utilities
88
Clock
Use this application to set alarms, check the time in any location in the world, measure the
duration of an event, set a timer, or use as the desk clock.
Tap Clock on the Applications screen.
Turn this alarm on or off.
Alarm
Setting alarms
Tap Create alarm, set a time for the alarm to go off, select days for the alarm to repeat, and
then tap Save.
• Snooze: Set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat after the preset
time.
• Smart alarm: Set a time for the alarm to go off before the preset time.Utilities
89
Stopping alarms
Drag outside the large circle to stop an alarm. Drag outside the large circle to repeat
the alarm after a specified length of time.
Deleting alarms
Tap and hold the alarm, and then tap Delete.
World clock
Creating clocks
Tap Add city, and then enter a city name or select a city from the cities list.
To apply summer time, tap and hold a clock, and then tap DST settings.
Deleting clocks
Tap →Delete, select clocks, and then tap Delete.
Stopwatch
Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times.
Tap Reset to clear lap time records.
Timer
Set the duration, and then tap Start.
Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off.
Desk clock
Tap to view in full screen.Utilities
90
Calculator
Use this application for simple or complex calculations.
Tap Calculator on the Applications screen.
Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen
rotation is disabled, tap →Scientific calculator.
To see calculation history, tap to hide the keypad.
To clear history, tap →Clear history.
To change the character size for history, tap →Text size.
Voice Recorder
Use this application to record or play voice memos.
Tap Voice Recorder on the Applications screen.
Recording voice memos
Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone at the bottom of the device. Tap to
pause recording. Tap to finish recording.
Start recording.
Recording elapsed time
Display the list of voice memos.Utilities
91
Playing voice memos
Select a voice memo to play.
• : Adjust the playback speed.
• : Trim the voice memo.
• : Adjust the volume by dragging the volume bar up or down.
• : Stop playback.
• : Pause playback.
To send a voice memo to others, tap →Share via, select a voice memo, tap Done, and
then select a sharing method.
Managing voice memos
In the list of voice memos, tap and select one of the following:
• Share via: Select voice memos to send, and then select a sharing method.
• Delete: Select voice memos to delete.
• Settings: Change the voice recorder settings.
• End: Close the voice recorder.
S Voice
Use this application to command the device by voice to dial a number, send a message, write
a memo, and more.
Tap S Voice on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Here are several examples of spoken commands:
• Open music
• Launch calculator
• Call Lulu mobile
• Dial Lulu work
• Check scheduleUtilities
92
Tips for better voice recognition
• Speak clearly.
• Speak in quiet places.
• Do not use offensive or slang words.
• Avoid speaking in dialectal accents.
The device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands
depending on your surroundings or how you speak.
Google
Use this application to search not only the Internet, but also applications and their contents
on the device as well.
Tap Google on the Applications screen.
Searching the device
Tap the search field, and then enter a keyword. Alternatively, tap , speak a keyword, and
then select one of the suggested keywords that appear.
If no results are returned from the applications, the web browser appears, displaying the
search results.
Search scope
To select what applications to search, tap →Settings→Phone search, and then tick the
items to search for.Utilities
93
Google Now
Launch Google search to view Google Now cards that show the current weather, public
transit info, your next appointment, and more when you are most likely to need it.
Join Google Now when opening Google search for the first time. To change Google Now
settings, tap →Settings→Google Now.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Voice Search
Use this application to search webpages by speaking.
Tap Voice Search on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Speak a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. Select one of the
suggested keywords that appear.
My Files
Use this application to access all kinds of files stored in the device, including images, videos,
songs, and sound clips.
Tap My Files on the Applications screen.
Select a folder to open it. To go back to the parent folder, tap . To return to the root
directory, tap .Utilities
94
In a folder, tap , and then use one of the following options:
• Select all: Select all files to apply the same option to them at once.
• Create folder: Create a folder.
• Search: Search for files.
• View by: Change the view mode.
• Sort by: Sort files or folders.
• Settings: Change the file manager settings.
Downloads
Use this application to see what files are downloaded through the applications.
Tap Downloads on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
To see the files downloaded from the Internet, tap Internet downloads, otherwise, tap Other
downloads to see the files downloaded from other applications, such as Email.
Select a file to open it with an appropriate application.95
Travel & local
Maps
Use this application to pinpoint the location of the device, search for places, or get directions.
Tap Maps on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Searching for locations
Tap , enter an address, and then tap . Select a location to view the detailed location
information. To search for nearby locations, tap .
Once the location is found, tap and use one of the following functions:
• Clear Map: Clear the map.
• Make available offline: Save the map of a specified area to view it offline.
• Directions: Get directions for the found location.
• Layers: Overlay multiple layers including satellite images, traffic information, and more.
• Settings: Change the map settings.
• Help: View information about using the map.
To view current location, tap .Travel & local
96
Getting directions for a destination
1 Tap .
2 Tap , and then select a method to enter starting and ending locations:
• My current location: Use current location for starting location.
• Contacts: Select from the contacts list.
• Point on map: Pinpoint by tapping on the map.
• My Places: Select from the list of favourite places.
3 Select a travel method, such as driving, public transit, or walking, and then tap GET
DIRECTIONS.
4 Select one of the routes that appear, and then tap MAP VIEW to view details.
Local
Use this application to search for nearby restaurants, banks, bus stops, and more.
Tap Local on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a place category, and then select a place from the list of search results.
• Map: Pinpoint the place on the map.
• Directions: Search for a route to the place.
• Call: Call the place’s phone number.
To add a place category, tap →Add a search on the category list, enter a keyword to
search into the text field.Travel & local
97
Navigation
Use this application to search for a route to a destination.
Tap Navigation on the Applications screen.
• Navigation maps, your current location, and other navigational data may differ
from actual location information. You should always pay attention to road
conditions, traffic, and any other factors that may affect your driving. Follow all
safety warnings and regulations while driving.
• This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Specify the destination by using one of the following methods:
• Speak the destination address.
• Enter the destination address.
• Select the destination address from the contacts list.
• Select the destination from the list of starred places.
Once a route is found, follow on-screen instructions to navigate to the destination.98
Settings
About Settings
Use this application to configure the device, set application options, and add accounts.
Tap Settings on the Applications screen.
Wi-Fi
Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other
network devices.
To use options, tap .
• Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings.
• WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button.
• WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN.
Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy
On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced→Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep.
When entering power-saving mode, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi
connections. When this happens, the device automatically accesses data networks if it
is set to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid data-usage bills, set this
option to Always.
Setting Network notification
The device can detect open Wi-Fi networks and display an icon on the status bar to notify
when available.
On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced and tick Network notification to
activate this feature.Settings
99
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct connects two devices directly via a Wi-Fi network without requiring an access
point.
On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→Wi-Fi Direct.
Bluetooth
Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances.
Data usage
Keep track of your data usage amount, and customise the settings for the limitation.
• Mobile data: Set to use data connections on any mobile network.
• Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for the mobile data usage.
• Data usage cycle: Enter monthly reset date to monitor your data usage.
To use more options, tap .
• Data roaming: Set to use data connections when you are roaming.
• Restrict background data: Set to disable sync in the background while using a mobile
network.
• Auto sync data: Set the device to sync contact, calendar, email, bookmark, and social
network image data automatically.
• Show Wi-Fi usage: Set to show your data usage via Wi-Fi.
• Mobile hotspots: Search for and use another device’s mobile network.
More settings
Customise settings to control connections with other devices or networks.Settings
100
Flight mode
This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services.
Mobile networks
• Mobile data: Use to allow packet switching data networks for network services.
• Data roaming: Use the device to connect to another network when you are roaming or
your home network is not available.
• Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs).
• Network mode: Select a network type.
• Network operators: Search for available networks and select a network for roaming.
Tethering and portable hotspot
• Portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Use the portable Wi-Fi hotspot to share the device’s mobile
network connection with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network.
• USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile network connection with
a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless
modem for the computer.
• Bluetooth tethering: Use the Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile network
connection with computers via Bluetooth.
• Help: Learn more about USB, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth tethering.
VPN
Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs).
NFC
• NFC: Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information.
• Android Beam: Turn on the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and
contacts, to NFC-enabled devices.Settings
101
S Beam
Activate the S Beam feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents, to
devices that support NFC and Wi-Fi Direct.
Nearby devices
• File sharing: Activate media sharing to allow other DLNA-enabled devices to access
media files on your device.
• Shared contents: Set to share your content with other devices.
• Device name: Enter a media server name for your device.
• Allowed devices list: View the list of devices that can access your device.
• Not-allowed devices list: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your
device.
• Download to: Select a memory location for saving media files.
• Upload from other devices: Set to accept uploads from other devices.
AllShare Cast
Activate the AllShare Cast feature and share your display with others.
Kies via Wi-Fi
Connect the device to Samsung Kies via a Wi-Fi network.
Home screen mode
Select a Home screen mode (basic or easy).
Blocking mode
Select which notifications will be blocked or set to allow notifications for calls from specified
contacts in blocking mode.Settings
102
Sound
Change settings for various sounds on the device.
• Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and
notifications.
• Vibration intensity: Adjust the force of the vibration notification.
• Device ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls.
• Device vibration: Add or select a vibration pattern.
• Default notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages, missed
calls, and alarms.
• Vibrate when ringing: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls.
• Keytones: Set the device to sound when tapping the buttons on the keypad.
• Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when selecting an application or option on the
touch screen.
• Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when locking or unlocking the touch screen.
• Haptic feedback: Set the device to vibrate when touching keys.
Display
Change the settings for the display.
• Wallpaper:
–
Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen.
– Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen.
–
Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the
locked screen.
• Page buddy: Set the device to open contextual pages based on your actions.
• Brightness: Set the brightness of the display.Settings
103
• Auto-rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned.
• Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s
backlight.
• Smart stay: Set to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at
the display.
• Font style: Change the font type for display text.
• Font size: Change the font size.
• Touch key light duration: Set the duration for the touch button backlight.
• Display battery percentage: Set to view the remaining battery life.
• Auto adjust screen tone: Set to save power by adjusting the brightness of the display.
Storage
View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card.
Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it.
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified
capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the
memory.
Power saving mode
Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for power-saving mode.
• CPU power saving: Set the device to limit some system resource usage.
• Screen power saving: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the display.
• Background colour: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the background colour
of Internet.
• Turn off haptic feedback: Set the device to turn off the vibration when touching keys.
• Learn about Power saving mode: Discover how to reduce battery consumption.Settings
104
Battery
View the amount of battery power consumed by your device.
Application manager
View and manage the applications on your device.
Location services
Change settings for GPS functionality.
• Use wireless networks: Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks for finding the current
location.
• Use GPS satellites: Set to use the GPS satellite for finding the current location.
• Location and Google search: Set to use your current location for Google search and
other Google services.
Lock screen
Change settings for securing the device.
• Screen lock: Activate the screen lock feature.
• Lock screen options: Change the settings for the locked screen. These settings are
applied only when you set the swipe lock option.
–
Shortcuts: Set to show and edit application shortcuts on the locked screen.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
– Information ticker: Set to show news or stock information on the locked screen.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Settings
105
–
Clock: Set to show the clock on the locked screen.
–
Dual clock: Set to show the dual clock on the locked screen.
– Weather: Set to show weather information on the locked screen.
–
Help text: Set to show the help text on the locked screen.
–
Camera quick access: Set the device to launch the camera by tapping and holding
the screen and rotating the device while the screen is locked.
– Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when
the screen is locked.
–
Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a
specified function.
• Owner information: Enter your information that is shown on the locked screen.
Security
Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card.
• Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the
password each time you turn on the device.
Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an
hour to encrypt your data.
• Encrypt external SD card:
–
Encrypt: Set to encrypt files when you save them to a memory card.
–
Full encryption: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card.
–
Exclude multimedia files: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card, except for media
files.
If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device
will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the
device.Settings
106
• Remote controls: Set to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the
Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account.
–
Account registration: Add or view your Samsung account.
–
Use wireless networks: Set to allow location data collection and to determine the
location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi and mobile networks.
• SIM Change Alert: Activate or deactivate the Find my mobile feature which helps locate
the device when lost or stolen.
• Find my mobile web page: Access the SamsungDive website (www.samsungdive.com).
You can track and control your lost or stolen device on the SamsungDive website.
• Set up SIM card lock:
– Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before
using the device.
–
Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data.
• Make passwords visible: By default, the device hides passwords for security. Set the
device to display passwords as they are entered.
• Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow
device administrators to apply new policies to the device.
• Unknown sources: Choose to install applications from any source. If not chosen,
download applications only from Play Store.
• Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various
applications.
• Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage.
• Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password.Settings
107
Language and input
Change the settings for text input.
Language
Select a display language for all menus and applications.
Default
Select a default keyboard type for text input.
Google voice typing
To change the voice input settings, tap .
• Choose input languages: Select input languages for text input.
• Block offensive words: Set to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in
voice inputs.
• Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline
voice input.
Samsung keyboard
To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap .
• Portrait keyboard types: Change the keyboard layout.
• Input languages: Select languages for text input.
• Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and
show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings.
• Continuous input: Set to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard.
• Keyboard swipe: Set to switch text input modes by sweeping your finger left or right
across the keyboard.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Settings
108
• Handwriting: Customise settings for handwriting mode, such as recognition time, pen
thickness, or pen colour.
• Advanced:
–
Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after
a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark.
–
Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space
bar.
–
Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped.
–
Key-tap vibration: Set the device to vibrate when a key is touched.
–
Key-tap sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched.
• Tutorial: Learn how to enter text with the Samsung keyboard.
• Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings.
Voice recogniser
Select a voice recognition engine.
Voice search
For Samsung voice recognition, use the following options:
• Language: Select a language for the voice recognition.
• Open via the home key: Set to launch S Voice by pressing the Home button twice.
• Use location data: Set to use location information for voice search results.
• Hide offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results.
• Help: Access help information for S Voice.
• About: View version information.
• Voice control: Set the device to recognise voice commands for controlling your device.
You can select the features to control with voice commands.
• Auto-start speaker: Set to automatically turn on the speakerphone when making a call
with S Voice.Settings
109
• Show body of message: Set to view the text of a new message received while in driving
mode.
• Wake up command: Set to start voice recognition by saying a wake up command while
using S Voice.
• Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise commands for controlling the device
when the screen is locked.
• Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a
specified function.
• Check missed events: Set to check missed calls, messages, or events when S Voice is
launched by pressing the headset button.
• Home address: Enter your home address to use location information with the voice
command feature.
• Log in to Facebook: Enter your Facebook account information by voice.
• Log in to Twitter: Enter your Twitter account information by voice.
For Google voice recognition, use the following options:
• Language: Select a language for the voice recognition.
• Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current
action.
• Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results.
• Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline
voice input.
Text-to-speech output
• Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for
speech synthesis engines, tap .
• Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature.
• Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example.
• Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and
specify applications to use in driving mode.Settings
110
Pointer speed
Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device.
Cloud
Change settings for syncing data or files with your Samsung account or Dropbox cloud
storage.
Backup and reset
Change the settings for managing settings and data.
• Back up my data: Set to back up settings and application data to the Google server.
• Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account.
• Automatic restore: Set to restore settings and application data when the applications are
reinstalled on the device.
• Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data.
Add account
Add email or SNS accounts.
Motion
Activate the motion feature and change settings for motion recognition.
• Direct call: Set to make a voice call by picking up and holding the device near your ear
while viewing call, message, or contact details.
• Smart alert: Set the device to alert you if you have missed calls or new messages when
you pick up the device.Settings
111
• Double tap to top: Set to move to the top of a list of contacts or email messages when
you double-tap the device.
• Tilt to zoom: Set to zoom in or out while viewing images in Gallery or browsing
webpages, when you tap and hold two points with your fingers and then tilt the device
back and forth.
• Pan to move icon: Set to move an item to another page when tapping and holding the
item and then panning the device to the left or right.
• Pan to browse images: Set to scroll through an image by moving the device in any
direction when the image is zoomed in.
• Shake to update: Set the device to search for Bluetooth devices by shaking it.
• Turn over to mute/pause: Set to mute incoming calls, alarms, music, and the FM radio by
placing the device face down.
• Sensitivity settings: Adjust the reaction speed for each motion.
• Learn about motions: View the tutorial for controlling motions.
Accessory
Change the accessory settings.
• Dock sound: Set the device to play a sound when your device is connected to or
removed from a car or desktop dock.
• Audio output mode: Set to use the dock speaker when your device is connected to a car
or desktop dock.
• Desk home screen display: Set the device to show the desk clock when your device is
connected to a car or desktop dock.
• Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to
HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting.Settings
112
Date and time
Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date.
If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date
is reset.
• Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across
time zones.
• Set date: Set the current date manually.
• Set time: Set the current time manually.
• Automatic time zone: Set to receive time zone information from the network when you
move across time zones.
• Select time zone: Set the home time zone.
• Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format.
• Select date format: Select a date format.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features for those with certain physical disabilities. Access
and alert the following settings to improve accessibility to the device.
• Auto-rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device.
• Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s
backlight.
• Speak passwords: Set the device to read aloud passwords you enter with Talkback.
• Answering/ending calls:
–
The home key answers calls: Set the device to answer an incoming call when
pressing the Home button.
–
Answer calls using voice: Set to answer or reject an incoming call with voice
commands.
–
The power key ends calls: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power
button.Settings
113
• Accessibility shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility on the quick menu that appears
when you press and hold the Power button.
• TalkBack: Activate Talkback, which provides voice feedback.
• Font size: Change the font size.
• Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility.
• Text-to-speech output:
–
Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for
speech synthesis engines, tap .
–
Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature.
– Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example.
–
Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and
specify applications to use in driving mode.
• Enhance web accessibility: Set applications to install web scripts to make their web
content more accessible.
• Sound balance: Adjust the sound balance when using a dual headset.
• Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with one earbud.
• Turn off all sounds: Mute all device sounds.
• Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen.
Developer options
Change the settings for application development.
• Desktop backup password: Set a password to secure your backup data.
• Stay awake: Set the screen to remain on while you are charging the battery.
• Protect SD card: Set to request a confirmation when reading data from a memory card.
• USB debugging: Activate USB debugging mode to connect your device to a computer
with a USB cable.
• Allow mock locations: Allow mock locations and service information to be sent to a
Location Manager service for testing.
• Select debug app: Select applications to debug and prevent errors when you pause
debugging.Settings
114
• Wait for debugger: Set to prevent the selected application from loading until the
debugger is ready.
• Show touches: Set to show the pointer when you touch the screen.
• Show pointer location: Set to show the coordinates and traces of the pointer when you
touch the screen.
• Show layout boundaries: Set to show boundaries.
• Show GPU view updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated with
the GPU.
• Show screen updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated.
• Window animation scale: Select a speed for opening and closing pop-up windows.
• Transition animation scale: Select a speed for switching between screens.
• Animator duration scale: Select how long pop-up windows will be shown.
• Disable hardware overlays: Set to hide hardware overlays.
• Force GPU rendering: Set to use 2D hardware acceleration to improve graphic
performance.
• Strict mode: Set the device to flash the screen when applications perform long
operations.
• Show CPU usage: Set to list all active processes.
• Profile GPU rendering: Set to check the time of GPU rendering time.
• Enable traces: Set to capture traces of application and system performance.
• Do not keep activities: Set to end a running application when you launch a new
application.
• Limit background processes: Set to limit the number of processes that can run in the
background.
• Show all ANRs: Set the device to alert you to unresponsive applications that are running
in the background.
About device
Access device information and update device software.115
Troubleshooting
When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it
prompts you to enter one of the following codes:
• Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set
for the device.
• PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you
must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by
using the Lock SIM card menu.
• PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly
several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider.
• PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with
the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider.
Your device displays network or service error messages
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move
to another area and try again.
• You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for
more details.
The touch screen responds slowly or improperly
If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the
following:
• Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the
device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices.
• Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen.
• Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs.
• Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version.
• If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take it to your local Samsung Service Centre.Troubleshooting
116
Your device freezes or has fatal errors
If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close programs or reset the device to regain
functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button for
8-10 seconds. The device reboots automatically.
If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Applications
screen, tap Settings→Backup and reset→Factory data reset→Reset device→Erase
everything.
Calls are being dropped
When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose your connection to
the network. Move to another area and try again.
Outgoing calls are not connected
• Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key.
• Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling.
Incoming calls are not connected
• Ensure that your device is turned on.
• Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number.
Others cannot hear you speaking on a call
• Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone.
• Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth.
• If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected.Troubleshooting
117
Audio quality is poor
• Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna.
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move
to another area and try again.
When dialling from contacts, the call is not connected
• Ensure that the correct number is stored in the contact list.
• Re-enter and save the number, if necessary.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the contact’s phone number.
The device beeps and the battery icon is empty
Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device.
The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off
• The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts with a clean, soft
cloth and try charging the battery again.
• If the battery no longer charges completely, dispose of the old battery properly
and replace it with a new battery (refer to your local ordinances for proper disposal
instructions).
Your device is hot to the touch
When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an
extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not
affect your device’s lifespan or performance.Troubleshooting
118
Error messages appear when launching the camera
Your Samsung device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate
the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the
following:
• Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged.
• Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device.
• Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying
these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre.
Error messages appear when launching the FM radio
The FM radio application on your Samsung device uses the headset cable as an antenna.
Without a headset connected, the FM radio cannot receive radio stations. To use the FM radio,
first ensure that the headset is properly connected. Next, scan for and save the available radio
stations.
If you still cannot use the FM radio after performing these steps, try accessing your desired
station with another radio receiver. If you can hear the station with another receiver, your
device may require service. Contact a Samsung Service Centre.
Error messages appear when opening music files
Some music files may not play on your Samsung device for a variety of reasons. If you receive
error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following:
• Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device.
• Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is
DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file.
• Ensure that your device supports the file type.Troubleshooting
119
Another Bluetooth device is not located
• Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device.
• Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect
to, if necessary.
• Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum
Bluetooth range (10 m).
If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre.
A connection is not established when you connect the device to a
computer
• Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device.
• Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your computer.
• If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher
installed on your computer.
• Ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed
on your computer.
A small gap appears around the outside of the device case
• This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of
parts may occur.
• Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly.www.samsung.com English (EU). 03/2013. Rev. 1.2
Some content may differ from your device depending on the region, service provider, or
software version, and is subject to change without prior notice.
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service,
please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
7.1CH Blu-ray™
Home Entertainment System
user manual
HT-F9750W
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 1 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 1 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:01 013-06-04 오전 10:00:01| 2 English
Safety Information
WARNING
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not
expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
• The Mains plug is used as a disconnect device and
shall stay readily operable at any time.
• This apparatus shall always be connected to an AC
outlet with a protective grounding connection.
• To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug
must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore
the mains plug shall be readily operable.
Warning
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER(OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
This symbol indicates “dangerous
voltage” inside the product that
presents a risk of electric shock
or personal injury.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE
SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
This symbol indicates
important instructions
accompanying the product.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT
LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
This Compact Disc player is classified as a CLASS 1
LASER product.
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION
• INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND
INTERLOCKS DEFEATED, AVOID EXPOSURE TO
BEAM.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 2 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 2 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:20 013-06-04 오전 10:00:20English 3|
01
Safety Information
Disc Storage & Management
• Holding Discs
- Fingerprints or scratches on
a disc may reduce sound and
picture quality or cause skipping.
- Avoid touching the surface of a disc where data has
been recorded.
- Hold the disc by the edges so that fingerprints will
not get on the surface.
- Do not stick paper or tape on the disc.
• Cleaning Discs
- If you get fingerprints or dirt on a disc,
clean it with a mild detergent diluted
in water and wipe with a soft cloth.
- When cleaning, wipe gently from the
inside to the outside of the disc.
- Disc Storage
Do not keep in direct sunlight.
Keep in a cool ventilated area.
Keep in a clean protection jacket and store
vertically.
Handling Cautions
• Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing.
Do not put objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on
the apparatus.
• To turn this apparatus off completely, you must pull the
power plug out of the wall socket. Consequently, the
power plug must be easily and readily accessible at all
times.
• Do not touch the power plug with a wet hand.
It can cause an electric shock.
• Do not plug multiple electric devices into the same wall
socket. Overloading a socket can cause it to overheat,
resulting in a fire.
• Maintenance of the Cabinet
- Before connecting other components to this
product, be sure to turn them off.
- If you move your product suddenly from a cold place
to a warm place, condensation may occur on the
operating parts and lens and cause abnormal disc
playback. If this occurs, unplug the product, wait for
two hours, and then connect the plug to the power
outlet. Then, insert the disc, and try to play back
again.
• If the product makes an abnormal noise or produces
a burning smell or smoke, turn off the power switch
immediately and disconnect the power plug from
the wall outlet. Then, contact the nearest customer
service centre for technical assistance. Do not use the
product. Using the product as it is may cause a fire or
an electric shock.
Licence
Manufactured under licence
from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, and
the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under a licence from U.S. Patent
No’s: 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535,
6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567,
7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 and
7,548,853. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, and DTS
or DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks & DTS Neo:Fusion is a trademark of DTS,
Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX®
is a digital video format
created by DivX, LLC, a
subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com
for more information and software tools to convert
your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order to play
purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To
obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.
com for more information on how to complete your
registration.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p,
including premium content.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are
trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and
are used under licence.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents
: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 3 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 3 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:21 013-06-04 오전 10:00:21| 4 English
Safety Information
The terms HDMI and HDMI
High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI
Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licencing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks
of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names
may be trademarks of their respective
owners.
This item incorporates copy protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering
and disassembly are prohibited.
Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™, and the logos are trademarks
of Blu-ray Disc Association.
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the
use of unauthorized copies of some commerciallyproduced film and videos and their soundtracks. When
a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a
message will be displayed and playback or copying will
be interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided
at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Centre
at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.”
This product incorporates proprietary technology
under licence from Verance Corporation and is
protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S.
and worldwide patents issued and pending as well
as copyright and trade secret protection for certain
aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of
Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance
Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
- Open Source Licence Notice
In the case of using open source software, Open
Source Licences are available on the product menu.
Using the 3D Function
IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR
3D PICTURES.
Read and understand the following safety information
before using the 3D function.
• Some viewers may experience discomfort while viewing
3D TV such as dizziness, nausea, and headaches.
If you experience any such symptom, stop viewing 3D
TV, remove the 3D Active Glasses, and rest.
• Watching 3D images for an extended period of time
may cause eye strain. If you feel eye strain, stop
viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses, and
rest.
• A responsible adult should frequently check on children
who are using the 3D function.
If there are any reports of tired eyes, headaches,
dizziness, or nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D
TV and rest.
• Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes
(such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective
goggles, etc.)
• Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while
walking or moving around. Using the 3D function or 3D
Active Glasses while moving around may cause you to
bump into objects, trip, and/or fall, and cause serious
injury.
• If you want to enjoy 3D content, connect a 3D device
(3D compliant AV receiver or TV) to the product’s HDMI
OUT port using a high-speed HDMI cable. Put on 3D
glasses before playing the 3D content.
• The product outputs 3D signals only through HDMI
cable connected to the HDMI OUT port.
• As the video resolution in 3D play mode is fixed
according to the resolution of the original 3D video, you
can not change the resolution to your preference.
• Some functions such as BD Wise, screen size
adjustment, and resolution adjustment may not operate
properly in 3D play mode.
• You must use a high-speed HDMI cable for proper
output of the 3D signal.
• Stay at least three times the width of the screen from
the TV when watching 3D images. For example, if
you have a 46 inch screen, stay 3.5 meters from the
screen.
• Place the 3D video screen at eye level for the best 3D
picture.
• When the product is connected to some 3D devices,
the 3D effect may not function properly.
• This product does not convert 2D content into 3D.
• “Blu-ray 3D” and “Blu-ray 3D” logo are trademarks of
the Blu-ray Disc Association.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 4 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 4 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:22 013-06-04 오전 10:00:22English 5|
01
Safety Information
Copyright
© 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
All rights reserved; No part or whole of this user’s manual
may be reproduced or copied without the prior written
permission of Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Contents
SAFETY INFORMATION
2 Warning
3 Disc Storage & Management
3 Handling Cautions
3 Licence
4 Using the 3D Function
5 Copyright
GETTING STARTED
6 Disk and Format Compatibility
7 Logos of Discs the Product can Play
10 Accessories
11 Front Panel
11 Rear Panel
12 Remote Control
CONNECTIONS
14 Connecting the Speakers
17 Connecting to TV/External Devices
18 Connecting to a Network Router
SETTINGS
19 The Initial Settings Procedure
19 The Home Screen
19 Accessing the Settings Screen
20 Settings Menu Functions
24 Auto Sound Calibration
25 Networks and the Internet
28 Upgrading Software
MEDIA PLAY
30 The All Content Screen
30 Playing Commercial Discs
30 Playing Files on a USB Device
31 Playing a Disc with User Recorded Content
31 Using the AllShare Network Function
32 Controlling Video Playback
35 Controlling Music Playback
39 Playing Photo Contents
40 Listening to Radio
41 Using the Special Effects Remote Control Buttons
NETWORK SERVICES
43 Logging In to Your Samsung Account
43 Before Using Movies & TV Shows or Apps
44 Using Movies & TV Shows
44 Using Apps
48 Screen Mirroring
48 Using the Web Browser
51 Linking your Internet Service Accounts to the
Product
51 BD-LIVE™
APPENDIX
52 Additional Information
56 Troubleshooting
59 Specifications
Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are
provided for reference only and may differ from
actual product appearance.
An administration fee may be charged if either
a. an engineer is called out at your request and
there is no defect in the product (i.e. where
you have failed to read this user manual)
b. you bring the unit to a repair centre and there
is no defect in the product (i.e. where you
have failed to read this user manual).
The amount of such administration charge will
be advised to you before any work or home
visit is carried out.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 5 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 5 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:22 013-06-04 오전 10:00:22| 6 English
Getting Started
Disk and Format Compatibility
Disc Types and content your Product can Play
Media Disc Type Details
VIDEO
Blu-ray Disc
3D Blu-ray Disc BD-ROM or BD-RE/-R disc recorded in the BD-RE format.
DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW,
DVD-R, DVD+RW,
DVD+R
DVD-VIDEO, recorded DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R discs that have
been recorded and finalised, or a USB storage media containing DivX,
MKV, MP4 contents.
MUSIC
CD-RW/-R,
DVD-RW/-R,
BD-RE/-R
Music recorded on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R discs or a USB
storage media containing MP3 or WMA contents.
PHOTO
CD-RW/-R,
DVD-RW/-R,
BD-RE/-R
Photos recorded on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R discs or a USB
storage media containing JPEG contents.
| NOTES |
The product may not play certain CD-RW/-R and DVD-R because of the disc type or recording conditions.
If a DVD-RW/-R disc has not been recorded properly in DVD video format, it will not be playable.
Your product will not play content that has been recorded on a DVD-R at a bit rate that exceeds 10 Mbps.
Your product will not play content that has been recorded on a BD-R or USB device at a bit rate that exceeds 30
Mbps.
Playback may not work for some types of discs, or when you use specific operations, such as angle change
and aspect ratio adjustment. Information about the discs is written in detail on the disc box. Please refer to this if
necessary.
When you play a BD-J title, loading may take longer than a normal title or some functions may perform slowly.
Disc Types your Product cannot Play
• HD DVD
• DVD-ROM/PD/MV-Disc,
etc
• DVD-RAM
• Super Audio CD
(except CD layer)
• DVD-RW(VR mode)
• CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/
CD-G/CD-I/LD
(CD-Gs play audio only,
not graphics.)
• 3.9 GB DVD-R Disc for
Authoring.
| NOTES |
This product may not respond to all operating commands because some Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and CD discs allow
specific or limited operation and provide only certain features during playback.
Please note that this is not a defect in the product.
Samsung cannot guarantee that this product will play every disc bearing the Blu-ray Disc, DVD or CD logo because
disc formats evolve, and problems and errors may occur during the creation of Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and CD software
and/or the manufacture of discs.
Please contact the SAMSUNG Customer Care Centre at, if you have questions or encounter difficulty when playing
Blu-ray Disc, DVD, or CD discs in this product. Also, refer to rest of this user manual for additional information on
playback restrictions.
Some commercial discs and DVD discs purchased outside your region may not play on this product.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 6 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 6 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:23 013-06-04 오전 10:00:23English 7|
02
Getting Started
Region Code
Both products and discs are coded by region. These
regional codes must match for a disc to play. If the codes
do not match, the disc will not play.
The Region Number for this product is displayed on the
rear panel of the product.
Disc Type Region
Code Area
Blu-ray Disc
A
North America, Central
America, South America,
Korea, Japan, Taiwan, Hong
Kong and South East Asia.
B
Europe, Greenland, French
territories, Middle East, Africa,
Australia and New Zealand.
C
India, China, Russia, Central
and South Asia.
DVD-VIDEO
1
The U.S., U.S. territories and
Canada
2
Europe, Japan, the Middle
East, Egypt, Africa, Greenland
3
Taiwan, Korea, the Philippines,
Indonesia, Hong Kong
4
Mexico, South America,
Central America, Australia,
New Zealand, Pacific Islands,
Caribbean
5
Russia, Eastern Europe, India,
North Korea, Mongolia
6
China
| NOTES |
If the Region number of a Blu-ray Disc/DVDs
does not correspond to the Region number of this
product, the product cannot play the disc.
Logos of Discs the Product can Play
Blu-ray Disc 3D Blu-ray Disc
BD-LIVE Dolby
DTS
PAL broadcast system in U.K,
France, Germany, etc. DivX
Java
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 7 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 7 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:24 013-06-04 오전 10:00:24| 8 English
Getting Started
Limitations
- Even when a file is encoded by a supported codec
listed above, the file might not be played if its content
is defective or corrupted.
- Normal playback is not guaranteed if the file's container
information is wrong or the file itself is corrupted.
- Files having higher bit or frame rates than standard
may stutter when played back.
- The seek (skip) function is not available if the file's
index table is damaged.
- When you playback a file remotely through a network
connection, video playback may stutter depending on
the network speed.
- Some USB/Digital camera devices may not be
compatible with the product.
Video decoder
- Supports up to H.264 Level 4.1 (except for FMO/ASO/
RS)
- Does not support VC1 AP L4
- Except for WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, VP6
Below 1280 X 720: 60 frame max
Above 1280 X 720: 30 frame max
- Does not support GMC 2 or higher
- Supports SVAF Top/Bottom, Side by Side Only
- Supports BD MVC Spec Only
Audio decoder
- Supports WMA 10 Pro (Up to 5.1)
- Does not support WMA lossless audio.
- Supported ADPCM IMA, MS.
- Does not support ADPCM (A-Law, μ-Low)
- Does not support QCELP, AMR NB/WB
- Supports vorbis (Up to 2ch),
- Supports Dolby Digital Plus (Up to 7.1ch)
Comments
- MPEG4 : Supports up to GMC 1-Warping Point.
- H.264 : Supports up to BP/MP/HP Level 4.1.
- WMV : Supports V9, VC1 SP/MP/AP L3.
- MPEG1 : Does not support D-picture.
- MPEG2 : Supports up to Hight Profile High Level.
Supported Formats
Video File Support
File
Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate
(fps)
Bit Rate
(Mbps) Audio Codec
*.avi
*.mkv
*.asf
*.wmv
*.mp4
*.3gp
*.vro
*.mpg
*.mpeg
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
*.mov
*.flv
*.vob
*.svi
*.m2ts
*.mts
*.divx
AVI
MKV
ASF
MP4
3GP
MOV
FLV
VRO
VOB
PS
TS
SVAF
Divx 3.11 / 4
/ 5 / 6
1920x1080
(WMV v7,v8,
MSMPEG4 v3 :
1280x720)
6~30 30
Dolby Digital
LPCM
ADPCM
(IMA, MS)
AAC
HE-AAC
WMA
Dolby Digital
Plus
MPEG(MP3)
DTS (Core)
MPEG4 SP/ASP
H.264 BP/
MP/HP
Motion JPEG
Microsoft
MPEG-4 v3
Window Media
Video v7, v8, v9
MPEG2
MPEG1
VP6 640x480 - 4
MVC - 24/25/30 60
*.webm WebM VP8 1920x1080 6~30 20 Vorbis
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 8 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 8 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:26 013-06-04 오전 10:00:26English 9|
02
Getting Started
❑ Supported DivX subtitle file formats
*.ttxt, *.smi, *.srt, *.sub, *.txt
| NOTES |
Some MKV and MP4 format discs may not play,
depending on their video resolution and frame rate.
Music File Support
File
Extension Container Audio
Codec Support Range
*.mp3 MPEG
MPEG1
Audio
Layer 3
-
*.m4a
*.mpa
*.aac
MPEG4 AAC -
*.flac FLAC FLAC Supports up to
2ch
*.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to
2ch
*.wma WMA WMA
Supports WMA 10
Pro (Up to 5.1)
Does not support
WMA lossless
audio
Supports up to M2
profile
Does not support
LBR mode
*.wav wav wav -
*.mid
*.midi midi midi type 0 and type 1
*.ape ape ape
Does not support
X13, NVT
Picture File Support
File Extension Type Resolution
*.jpg
*.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640
*.png PNG 4096x4096
*.bmp BMP 4096x4096
*.mpo MPO 15360x8640
Notes on the USB connection
• Your product supports USB storage media, MP3
players, digital cameras, and USB card readers.
• The product does not support folder or file names
longer than 128 characters.
• Some USB/digital camera devices may not be
compatible with the product.
• Your product supports the FAT 16, FAT 32, and NTFS
file systems.
• Connect USB devices directly to the product’s USB
port. Connecting through a USB cable may cause
compatibility problems.
• Inserting more than one memory device into a
multi-card reader may cause the reader to operate
improperly.
• The product does not support the PTP protocol.
• Do not disconnect a USB device during a “loading”
process.
• The bigger the image resolution, the longer the image
takes to display.
• This product cannot play MP3 files with DRM (Digital
Rights Management) downloaded from commercial
sites.
• Your product only supports video that is under 30fps
(frame rate).
• Your product only supports USB Mass Storage Class
(MSC) devices such as thumb drives and USB HDD.
(HUB is not supported.)
• Certain USB HDD Devices, multi-card readers and
thumb drives may not be compatible with this product.
• If some USB devices require excessive power, they
may be limited by the circuit safety device.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 9 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 9 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:26 013-06-04 오전 10:00:26| 10 English
Getting Started
• If playback from a USB HDD is unstable, provide additional power by plugging the HDD into a wall socket. If the
problem continues, contact the USB HDD manufacturer.
• SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss.
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition)
• This product can play back AVCHD format discs. These discs are normally recorded and used in camcorders.
• The AVCHD format is a high definition digital video camera format.
• The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format compresses images with greater efficiency than the conventional image compressing
format.
• Some AVCHD discs use the “x.v.Colour” format. This product can play back AVCHD discs that use the “x.v.Colour”
format.
• “x.v.Colour” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• “AVCHD” and the AVCHD logo are trademarks of Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. and Sony Corporation.
| NOTES |
Some AVCHD format discs may not play, depending on the recording conditions.
AVCHD format discs need to be finalised.
“x.v.Colour” offers a wider colour range than normal DVD camcorder discs.
Some DivX, MKV and MP4 format discs may not play, depending on their video resolution and frame rate.
Accessories
Check for the supplied accessories below.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
MUTE
TV
SOUND
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP
TV
HOME
VOL TUNING
/ CH
FUNCTION
TV/SOURCE
3D
SOUND
SOUND
EFFECT SEARCH SMART
HUB
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
BD
RECEIVER
User Manual HDMI Cable ASC microphone
FM Antenna Power Cable Soft Cloth Remote Control/
Batteries (AAA size)
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 10 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 10 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:27 013-06-04 오전 10:00:27English 11|
02
Getting Started
Front Panel
FUNCTION
STOP OPEN/CLOSE
POWER
PLAY/PAUSE
DISC TRAY
HIGH-END VACUUM TUBE SOUND
5V
0.5A
VACUUM TUBE AMP
VOLUME CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR DISPLAY USB
| NOTES |
Cellular phones or mobile devices placed near the vacuum tube amp or electronic products placed on the top of the
product can cause audio noise or distortion.
When the product is on, do not let children touch the product's surface. It will be hot.
To upgrade the product's software through the USB jack, you must use a USB flash drive.
When the product displays the Blu-ray Disc menu, you cannot start the movie by pressing the 6 button on the
product or the remote. To play the movie, you must select Play Movie or Start in the disc menu, and then press the
E button.
If you use the Internet service or play the USB device contents on the TV, you cannot select the BD/DVD mode with
the FUNCTION button. Stop the playing contents on the TV first to select the BD/DVD mode.
Rear Panel
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
SPEAKER OUTPUT
CONNECTORS
COOLING FAN
AUX IN
* FM ANTENNA
HDMI OUT HDMI IN
ASC IN
LAN TERMINAL
EXTERNAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN (OPTICAL) POWER CORD
* Connecting the FM Antenna
1. Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM ANT Jack.
2. Slowly move the antenna wire around until you find a location where reception is good, then fasten it to a wall or
other rigid surface.
| NOTES |
Maintain a minimum of 10 cm of clear space on all sides of the home cinema to ensure adequate ventilation. Do not
obstruct the cooling fan or ventilation holes.
This product does not receive AM broadcasts.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 11 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 11 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:29 013-06-04 오전 10:00:29| 12 English
Getting Started
Remote Control
Tour of the Remote Control
Press to apply the 3D sound effect.
Turn the product on and off.
Press to open and close the disc
tray.
Press numeric buttons to operate
options.
Press to skip backwards or
forwards.
Press to output the audio signal
to the home cinema speakers or
the TV Speaker. (See page 42)
Cut off the sound temporarily.
Use to adjust the level of the
subwoofer.
Select on-screen menu items and
change menu value.
Return to the previous menu.
Press to view the disc menu.
Press to use the Tools menu.
These buttons are used both for
menus on the product and also
several Blu-ray Disc functions.
Press to search contents.
Press to select the home cinema's
mode (HDMI1, AUX, BD/DVD,
etc.).
or
Press to select TV's video mode.
Press to stop/play a disc.
Press to use Smart Hub.
Turns the remote control light on or
off. When on, the buttons become
illuminated for a moment when
pressed. (Using the remote control
with this button set to ON will reduce
the battery usage time.)
If you want to change to Home
Cinema mode on the remote control,
check this button's LED colour.
- Home Cinema : Orange
- TV : Green
Press to exit the menu.
Select MONO or STEREO for radio
broadcasts.
Use to set a preset radio frequency.
Press to search backwards or
forwards.
Search for active FM stations and
to change channels.
Use to enter the Popup menu/Title
menu.
Use to display the playback
information when playing
a Blu-ray/DVD disc.
Press to move to the Home screen.
Set a Sleep time to shut off the
product.
Press to apply sound effects.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
MUTE
TV
SOUND
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP
TV
HOME
VOL TUNING
/ CH
FUNCTION
TV/SOURCE
3D
SOUND
SOUND
EFFECT SEARCH SMART
HUB
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
BD
RECEIVER
Adjust the volume.
Press to pause a disc.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 12 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 12 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:31 013-06-04 오전 10:00:31English 13|
02
Getting Started
Installing batteries in the Remote Control
Battery size: AAA
1 2
| NOTES |
Make sure to match the “+” and “–” ends of the
batteries with the diagram inside the compartment.
Assuming typical TV usage, the batteries last for about
one year.
The remote control can be used up to approximately 7
meters from the product in a straight line.
Setting up the Remote Control
You can control certain functions of your TV with this
remote control.
To operate a TV with the Remote Control
1. Press the TV button to set the remote control to TV
mode.
2. Turn on your TV.
3. While holding down the POWER button, enter the
code corresponding to your brand of TV.
• If there is more than one code listed for your TV in
the table, enter one at a time to determine which
code works.
• Example : For a Samsung TV
While holding down the POWER button, use
the number buttons to enter 00. If that does not
work, try 15, then 16, etc.
4. If the TV turns off, the setting is complete.
• You can use the TV POWER, VOLUME,
CHANNEL, and Numeric buttons (0~9).
| NOTES |
The remote may not be able to control some
functions, depending on your brand of TV. Also, the
remote control may not work on some brands of TVs.
The remote control will work with Samsung TVs by
default.
TV Control Codes
Brand Code
Admiral
(M.Wards) 56, 57, 58
A Mark 01, 15
Anam 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07,
08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
AOC 01, 18, 40, 48
Bell & Howell
(M.Wards) 57, 58, 81
Brocsonic 59, 60
Candle 18
Cetronic 03
Citizen 03, 18, 25
Cinema 97
Classic 03
Concerto 18
Contec 46
Coronado 15
Craig 03, 05, 61, 82, 83, 84
Croslex 62
Crown 03
Curtis Mates 59, 61, 63
CXC 03
Daewoo
02, 03, 04, 15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34,
35, 36, 48, 59, 90
Daytron 40
Dynasty 03
Emerson 03, 15, 40, 46, 59, 61, 64,
82, 83, 84, 85
Fisher 19, 65
Funai 03
Futuretech 03
General Electric
(GE) 06, 40, 56, 59, 66, 67, 68
Hall Mark 40
Hitachi 15, 18, 50, 59, 69
Inkel 45
JC Penny 56, 59, 67, 86
JVC 70
KTV 59, 61, 87, 88
KEC 03, 15, 40
KMC 15
LG (Goldstar) 01, 15, 16, 17, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 43, 44
Luxman 18
LXI (Sears) 19, 54, 56, 59, 60, 62, 63,
65, 71
Magnavox 15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 60,
62, 72, 89
Marantz 40, 54
Matsui 54
MGA 18, 40
Brand Code
Mitsubishi/MGA 18, 40, 59, 60, 75
MTC 18
NEC 18, 19, 20, 40, 59, 60
Nikei 03
Onking 03
Onwa 03
Panasonic 06, 07, 08, 09, 54, 66,
67, 73, 74
Penney 18
Philco 03, 15, 17, 18, 48, 54,
59, 62, 69, 90
Philips 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54,
62, 72
Pioneer 63, 66, 80, 91
Portland 15, 18, 59
Proton 40
Quasar 06, 66, 67
Radio Shack 17, 48, 56, 60, 61, 75
RCA/Proscan 18, 59, 67, 76, 77, 78,
92, 93, 94
Realistic 03, 19
Sampo 40
Samsung
00, 15, 16, 17, 40, 43,
46, 47, 48, 49,
59, 60, 98
Sanyo 19, 61, 65
Scott 03, 40, 60, 61
Sears 15, 18, 19
Sharp 15, 57, 64
Signature 2000
(M.Wards) 57, 58
Sony 50, 51, 52, 53, 55
Soundesign 03, 40
Spectricon 01
SSS 18
Sylvania 18, 40, 48, 54, 59, 60,
62
Symphonic 61, 95, 96
Tatung 06
Techwood 18
Teknika 03, 15, 18, 25
TMK 18, 40
Toshiba 19, 57, 63, 71
Vidtech 18
Videch 59, 60, 69
Wards 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54,
60, 64
Yamaha 18
York 40
Yupiteru 03
Zenith 58, 79
Zonda 01
Dongyang 03, 54
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 13 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 13 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:32 013-06-04 오전 10:00:32| 14 English
Connections
This section describes various methods of connecting the product to other external components.
Before moving or installing the product, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power cord.
Connecting the Speakers
Surround (L)
Surround (R) Product
Subwoofer Centre
Wireless
Receiver Module
Front/
Front Top (L)
Front/
Front Top (R)
Position of the product
Place it on a stand or cabinet shelf, or
under the TV stand.
Selecting the Listening Position
The listening position should be located
about 2.5 to 3 times the distance of the
TV's screen size away from the TV.
For example, if you have a 46 inch
screen, locate the listening position 2.92
to 3.50 meters from the screen.
Front/Front Top
Speakers
Place these speakers in front of your listening position, facing inwards (about 45°) toward you.
Place the front speakers so that their tweeters will be at the same height as your ear. Align
the front face of the front/front top speakers with the front face of the centre speaker or place
them slightly in front of the centre speakers.
Centre Speaker It is best to install the Centre Speaker at the same height as the front/front top speakers. You
can also install it directly over or under the TV.
Surround
Speakers
Place these speakers to the side of your listening position. If there isn't enough room, place
these speakers so they face each other. Position them about 60 to 90cm above your ear,
facing slightly downward.
* Unlike the front/front top and centre speakers, the surround speakers are used mainly for
sound effects. Sound will not come from them all the time.
Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical. Place it anywhere you like.
* Surround speakers must be connected to the wireless receiver module.
Speaker Components
SWA-6000
Wireless Receiver
Subwoofer Module
Speaker Cable x 2
Front/Front Top x 2 Surround x 2
Centre
Screw (5x20) x 16
Stand x 4 Stand Base x 4
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 14 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 14 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:33 013-06-04 오전 10:00:33English 15|
03
Connections
Installing the Speakers on the Tallboy Stand
1. Straighten the speaker cable and put it into the hole on the
Stand Base.
2. Turn the Stand Base upside-down and connect it to the
Stand.
3. Use the driver to combine the screws on the 3 marked
holes.
4. Connect the upper Speaker to the assembled Stand.
5. Insert a screw clockwise into the hole on the rear of the
speaker using a screwdriver.
6. This is the appearance after the speaker is installed. Follow
these steps to install other speaker.
Connecting The Speakers
1. Match each speaker cable bundle to the correct speaker by matching the colour coded
plug on each bundle to the coloured sticker on the bottom of each speaker.
2. To attach speaker wire to each speaker:
a. Press down the red tab on the back of the speaker, insert the red wire, and then
release the tab.
b. Press down the black tab on the back of the speaker, insert the black wire, and then
release the tab.
3. Connect the speaker wire plugs from each speaker to the back of the product by
matching the colours of the speaker plugs to the colours of the speaker jacks.
4. Connect the left and right surround speakers to the wireless receiver module.
Again, match the colour of the plugs to the jacks on the wireless receiver module.
5. Plug the power cord of the wireless receiver module into a wall outlet.
6. Turn on the product. The product and wireless receiver module will now communicate with each other and you will
hear sound from the Surround speakers.
Black Red
4
Speaker
Stand
6
Stand Base
Stand
1 2
3
5
or
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 15 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 15 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:37 013-06-04 오전 10:00:37| 16 English
Connections
ASC IN SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
T
L
N
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
Surround
Speaker (L)
Surround
Speaker (R)
Subwoofer
Centre Speaker Front/Front Top
Speaker (L)
Front/Front Top
Speaker (R)
Wireless Receiver Module
* This product should be connected with the SWA-6000 only.
| CAUTION |
If you want to install the product on the wall, fasten the screws or nails on the wall firmly and use the holes on the
rear of speaker to install. However, when you install it, accessories (nails or screws) and installation is not provided by
the company.
Do not let children play with or near the speakers. They could get hurt if a speaker falls.
When connecting the speaker wires to the speakers, make sure that the polarity (+/ –) is correct.
Keep the subwoofer speaker out of reach of children to prevent children from inserting their hands or alien
substances into the duct (hole) of the subwoofer speaker.
Do not hang the subwoofer on the wall using the duct (hole).
The wireless receiving antenna is built into the wireless receiver module. Keep it away from water and moisture.
For optimal listening performance, make sure that the area around the wireless receiver module location is clear of
any obstructions.
If you hear no sound from the wireless surround speakers, switch the mode to Dolby Pro Logic II.
In 2-CH mode, you will hear no sound from the wireless surround speakers.
| NOTES |
If you place a speaker near your TV set, the screen colour may be distorted because of the magnetic field.
Place the wireless receiver module at the rear of the listening position. If the wireless receiver module is too close to
the product, sound from the speakers may be disrupted because of interference.
If you use a device such as a microwave oven, wireless LAN Card, Bluetooth equipment or any other device that uses
the 2.4/5.8GHz frequencies near the product, sound from the speakers may be disrupted because of interference.
The maximum transmission distance from the product to the wireless receiver module is about 10m, but may vary
depending on your operating environment. If a steel-concrete wall or metallic wall is between the product and the
wireless receiver module, the system may not operate at all, because the radio wave cannot penetrate metal.
If the product doesn't make a wireless connection, you need to run an ID Set between the product and wireless
receiver module. With the product turned off, press "0""1""3""5" on the remote control. Turn on the wireless
receiver module. Then, press and hold the “ID SET” button on the back of the wireless receiver module for 5
seconds, and then turn the product on.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 16 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 16 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:41 013-06-04 오전 10:00:41English 17|
03
Connections
Connecting to TV/External Devices
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
LAN
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
HDMI IN HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO IN
L
R
Method 1 Method 2 Method 3
R
Red
W
White
External
Devices
Connecting to a TV
Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI OUT jack on the back of the product to the HDMI IN jack on your TV. If you have
set the product's remote control to operate your TV, press the TV SOURCE button on the remote control and select
HDMI as the external source of the TV.
Connecting to External Devices
To select the correct mode for an external device, press the FUNCTION button. Each time you press the button, the
mode changes in this order : BD/DVD D. IN AUX HDMI1 HDMI2 FM BT
Method 1 HDMI IN : Connecting to an External Component with a HDMI Cable
Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI IN jack on the back of the product to the HDMI OUT jack on your digital device.
Select the HDMI1 or HDMI2 mode.
Method 2 AUX IN : Connecting an External Analogue Component
Using a RCA audio cable (not supplied), connect the AUDIO In jack on the product to the AUDIO Out jack on the
external analogue component. Select the AUX mode.
• Be sure to match the colours on the cable plugs to the colours on the input and output jacks.
Method 3 OPTICAL : Connecting an External Digital Audio Component
To connect the digital audio output of digital signal components such as Cable Boxes and Satellite Receivers (Set-TopBoxes). Using a digital optical cable (not supplied), connect the Optical Digital Audio In jack on the product to the Digital
Optical Out jack of the external digital device.
Select the D. IN mode.
| NOTES |
To see video from your Cable Box/Satellite receiver, you must connect its video output directly to your TV.
This system supports Digital sampling frequencies of 32 kHz or higher from external digital components.
This system supports only DTS and Dolby Digital audio. MPEG audio, a bitstream format, is not supported
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 17 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 17 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:43 013-06-04 오전 10:00:43| 18 English
Connections
Connecting to a Network Router
You can connect your product to your network router
using one of the methods illustrated below.
Wired Network
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
Broadband
service
Broadband
service
Broadband modem
(with integrated router)
Broadband
modem
Router
Or
| NOTES |
Your router or your Internet Service Provider's policies
may prevent the product from accessing Samsung's
software update server. If this occurs, contact your
Internet Service Provider (ISP) for more information.
DSL users, please use a router to make a network
connection.
To use the AllShare function, you must connect your
PC to your network as shown in the illustrations on the
above.
The connection can be wired or wireless.
Wireless Network
Broadband
service
Wireless IP sharer
| NOTES |
If your wireless IP router supports DHCP, this product
can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the
wireless network.
Set your wireless IP router to Infrastructure mode. Adhoc mode is not supported.
The product supports only the following wireless
security key protocols:
- WEP (OPEN/SHARED), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
Select a channel on the wireless IP router that is not
currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless
IP router is currently being used by another device
nearby, it will result in interference and communication
failure.
In compliance with the newest Wi-Fi certification
specifications, Samsung home cinema do not support
WEP, TKIP, or TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixed) security
encryption in networks running in the 802.11n mode.
Wireless LAN, by its nature, may cause interference,
depending on the operating conditions (AP
performance, distance, obstacles, interference by
other radio devices, etc).
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 18 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 18 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:45 013-06-04 오전 10:00:45English 19|
04
Settings
The Initial Settings Procedure
• The Home menu will not appear if you do not
configure the initial settings.
• The OSD (On Screen Display) may change in this
product after you upgrade the software version.
• The access steps may differ depending on the
menu you selected.
The Initial Settings Procedure lets you set the OSD and
menu languages, configure the connection to your home
network, choose the aspect ratio output (screen size and
format) that is correct for your TV, and apply an upgrade
to your product's software, if one is available.
For complete Initial Settings instructions, follow the order
in the screen.
| NOTES |
If you want to display the Initial Settings screen again
and make changes, select Settings > System >
Setup in the Home screen or select the Reset option.
(See page 22)
The Home Screen
Movies & TV
Shows
Apps Photos,
Videos &
Music
Add App Add App Add App Web Browser Settings
aSamsung Account dScreen Mirroring
1 2 34
5 6 7
1
Movies & TV Shows : Download movies and
TV Shows from the Internet.
| NOTES |
Depending on your country, this menu
function may not be supported.
2
Apps : Access various for pay or free-of-charge
applications.
3
Photos, Videos & Music : Play photos, videos
or music content from Disc, USB, PC or mobile
devices.
4
Settings : Set various functions to suit your
personal preferences.
5
Recommended Apps : A list of useful and
popular apps we recommend you download.
6
Web Browser : You can access the Internet
using the Web Browser application.
7
RED (A) : Press the RED (A) button on your
remote to create and/or log in to your personal
Samsung account.
BLUE (D) : Set up the wireless mirroring
function between the home cinema and a smart
phone or tablet.
Selecting an Option on the Home Screen
1. To select an option on the Home screen, move the
cursor using the ▲▼◄► buttons until it highlights
the option of your choice, and then press the E button.
| NOTES |
If you leave the product in the stop mode for more
than 5 minutes without using it, a screen saver will
appear on your TV. If the product is left in the screen
saver mode for more than 20 minutes, the power will
automatically turn off.
Accessing the Settings Screen
1. Select Settings on the Home screen, and then
press E. The Settings screen appears.
Display
UHD Output Auto
3D Settings
TV Aspect Ratio 16:9 Original
BD Wise Off
Resolution Auto
Movie Frame (24Fs) Auto
DVD 24fps Conversion Off
Display
Audio
Network
Smart Features
System
Support
Settings
2. To access the menus, sub-menus, and options
on the Settings screen, please refer to the remote
control illustration on the next page.
Settings
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 19 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 19 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:49 013-06-04 오전 10:00:49| 20 English
Settings
Buttons on the Remote Control Used
for the Settings Menu
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP HOME
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
2 4
3
1
1
HOME Button : Press to move to the Home
screen.
2 RETURN Button : Return to the previous menu.
3
E (Enter) / DIRECTION Button :
• Press ▲▼◄► to move the cursor or select
an item.
• Press the E button to activate the currently
selected item or confirm a setting.
4 EXIT Button : Press to exit the current menu.
Detailed Function Information
Each Settings function, menu item, and individual option
is explained in detail on-screen. To view an explanation,
use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select the function, menu
item, or option. The explanation will usually appear on the
right of the screen.
A short description of each Settings function starts on
this page. Additional information on some of the functions
is also in the Appendix of this manual.
Settings Menu Functions
Display
UHD Output
This option outputs HDMI video at
UHD resolution. This is only available
when Movie Frame is set to Auto.
| NOTES |
To use this feature, you must
connect the product to a device
that supports UHD resolution and
you must have content that plays
at 24Fs (film speed).
3D Settings
Set up the 3D related functions.
3D Blu-ray Playback Mode:
Select whether to play a Blu-ray
Disc with 3D contents in 3D Mode.
If you move to the Home or Smart
Hub Home menu while in 3D
mode, the product will switch to 2D
automatically.
Screen Size: Enter the size of the
TV attached to the product. The
product will automatically adjust the
3D output to the screen size of the
TV.
TV Aspect
Ratio
Lets you adjust the output of the
product to the screen size of your
TV. See page 52.
BD Wise
BD Wise is Samsung’s latest interconnectivity feature.
When you connect a Samsung
product and a Samsung TV with BD
Wise to each other via HDMI, and
BD Wise is on in both the product
and TV, the product outputs video at
the video resolution and frame rate
of the Blu-ray/DVD Disc.
Resolution
Lets you set the output resolution of
the HDMI video signal to
BD Wise, Auto, 1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p. The number
indicates the number of lines of
video per frame. The i and p indicate
interlaced and progressive scan,
respectively. The more lines, the
higher quality.
Movie Frame
(24Fs)
Setting the Movie Frame (24Fs)
feature to Auto lets the product
adjust its HDMI output to 24 frames
per second automatically for
improved picture quality if attached
to a 24Fs compatible TV.
• You can enjoy the Movie Frame
(24Fs) feature only on a TV
supporting this frame rate.
• Movie Frame is only available
when the product is in the HDMI
1080p output resolution modes.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 20 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 20 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:53 013-06-04 오전 10:00:53English 21|
04
Settings
DVD 24fps
Conversion
Converts DVD playback to 24
frames per second and outputs it via
HDMI. This option is only available
when Movie Frame (24Fs) is set to
on.
Smart Hub
Screen Size
Lets you select the optimal size for
the Smart Hub Screen.
HDMI Colour
Format
Lets you set the colour space format
for the HDMI output to match the
capabilities of the connected device
(TV, monitor, etc).
HDMI Deep
Colour
Lets you set the product to output
video from the HDMI OUT jack with
Deep Colour. Deep Colour provides
more accurate colour reproduction
with greater colour depth.
Progressive
Mode
Lets you improve picture quality
when viewing DVDs.
Audio
Speaker
Settings
Lets you adjust the following
speaker settings and turn the test
tone on and off so you can test the
speakers.
Level: Lets you adjust the relative
loudness of each speaker from 6db
to -6db. For example, if you like
deep bass, you can increase the
loudness of the subwoofer by 6db.
Distance: Lets you adjust the
relative distance of each speaker
from the listening position up to 9
meters. The farther the distance,
the louder the speaker will be.
Test Tone: Lets you run the Test
Tone function so you can test your
adjustments. Setting Test Tone to
On turns the Test Tone on. Setting it
to Off turns it off.
Auto Sound
Calibration
The product automatically recognize
the sound field optimized for your
environment.
Equaliser Lets you configure the Equaliser
settings manually.
Smart Volume
Lets you set the product so that
the volume remains stable when a
scene change occurs or when you
change the channel.
Speaker
Selection
Lets you select which speakers you
want active, either the TV's speakers
or the home cinema's speakers.
Audio Return
Channel
Lets you direct the sound from the
TV to the Home Cinema speakers.
Requires a HDMI connection and
an Audio Return Channel (ARC)
compatible TV.
• If Audio Return Channel is set to
on and you are using an HDMI
cable to connect the product to
the TV, digital optical input will not
work.
• If Audio Return Channel is set to
auto and you are using an HDMI
Cable to connect the product to
the TV, ARC or digital optical input
is selected automatically.
Digital Output
Lets you set the Digital Output to
match the capabilities of the AV
receiver you’ve connected to the
product. For more details, please
refer to the digital output selection
table. (See page 54)
Dynamic
Range
Control
Lets you apply dynamic range
control to Dolby Digital, Dolby
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD
audio.
Auto: Automatically controls the
dynamic range of Dolby TrueHD
audio, based on information in the
Dolby TrueHD soundtrack. Also
turns dynamic range control off for
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus.
Off: Leaves the dynamic range
uncompressed, letting you hear the
original sound.
On: Turns dynamic range control on
for all three Dolby formats. Quieter
sounds are made louder and the
volume of loud sounds is reduced.
Downmixing
Mode
Lets you select the multi-channel
downmix method that is compatible
with your stereo system. You
can choose to have the product
downmix to normal stereo or in
surround compatible stereo.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 21 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 21 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:54 013-06-04 오전 10:00:54| 22 English
Settings
Audio Sync
When the product is attached to a
digital TV, lets you adjust the audio
delay so that the audio syncs with
the video. You can set the delay
between 0 and 300 milliseconds.
Network
Network
Status
Lets you check the current network
and Internet status.
Network
Settings
Configure the network connection
so you can enjoy various features
such as Internet services or AllShare
Wi-Fi functionality, and perform
software upgrades.
Wi-Fi Direct
Lets you connect a Wi-Fi Direct
device to the product using a peerto-pear network, without the need
for a wireless router.
Note that if the product is connected
to a wireless network, it may be
disconnected when you use Wi-Fi
Direct.
| NOTES |
Text files, such as files with a .TXT
or .DOC extension, will not display
when you are using the Wi-Fi
Direct function.
AllShare
Settings
Lets you control which devices on
your network, such as smart phones
and tablets, can share content with
your TV.
Device Name
Lets you assign an identifying name
to the product. You use this name
to identify the product when you are
connecting external Wi-Fi devices
(smart phones, tablets, etc.) to it.
BD-Live
Settings
Set various BD-Live functions.
BD-Live allows you to access extra
features available on some Blu-ray
Discs if you are connected to the
Internet.
BD-Live Internet Connection :
Lets you fully allow, partly allow,
or prohibit a BD-Live Internet
connection.
BD Data Management : Manage
BD data downloaded from a BDLive service or Blu-ray Disc.
Smart Features
Apps Settings
Lets you configure App notification
settings and view basic info about
your Apps.
Push Notification Settings :
Receive notifications from selected
services.
Properties : See basic info about
Apps.
VOD Rating
Lock
You can lock access to Video on
Demand (VOD) content based on its
rating.
| NOTES |
The default security PIN is 0000.
Depending on your country,
this menu function may not be
supported.
Terms &
Conditions,
Privacy Policy
Lets you view the Smart Hub Terms
and Conditions and Privacy Policy.
Reset Smart
Hub
Resets all Smart Hub settings to
their default settings.
| NOTES |
The default security PIN is 0000.
System
Setup Lets you re-run the Initial Settings
procedure.
Language
You can select the language you
prefer for the On-Screen menu, disc
menu, subtitles, etc.
• The language you select for the
disc menu, disc audio, or subtitles
will only appear if it is supported
on the disc.
Device
Manager
You can connect a wireless USB
keyboard or mouse to the USB port
on the front of the product.
Keyboard Settings: Lets you
configure a wireless USB keyboard
connected to the product.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 22 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 22 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:55 013-06-04 오전 10:00:55English 23|
04
Settings
| NOTES |
You can use the keyboard only
when a QWERTY keyboard
screen or window appears in the
Web Browser.
Mouse Settings: Lets you
configure a wireless USB mouse
connected to the product. You can
use the mouse in the product's
menu in the same way you use a
mouse on your PC.
To use a mouse with the
product's menu:
1. Connect the USB mouse to
the product.
2. Click the primary button you
selected in Mouse Settings.
The Simple Menu appears.
3. Click the menu options you
want.
| NOTES |
Some USB HID keyboards and
mice may not be compatible with
your product.
Some HID keyboard keys may
not work.
Wired USB keyboards are not
supported.
Some applications may not be
supported.
If a wireless HID Keyboard does not
operate because of interference,
move the keyboard closer to the
product.
Security
The default security PIN is 0000.
Enter the default PIN to access
the security function if you haven't
created your own PIN.
BD Parental Rating: Restrict
playback of Blu-ray discs with
specific ratings unless the PIN is
entered.
DVD Parental Rating: Prevents
playback of DVDs with a rating
above a specific numerical rating
you have set unless the PIN is
entered.
Change PIN: Change the 4-digit
PIN used to access security
functions.
If you forget your PIN
1. Remove any disc or USB
storage device.
2. Press and hold the 5 button
on the front panel for 5
seconds or more.
All settings will revert to the
factory default settings.
| NOTES |
When the factory default settings
are restored, all the user stored
BD data is deleted.
General
You can specify the display
brightness and time zone.
Front Display: Lets you change the
brightness of the front panel.
Time Zone: You can specify the
time zone that is applicable to your
area.
Menu Transparency: Adjust the
transparency of the menu box.
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
Anynet+ is a convenient function
that offers linked operations with
other Samsung products that have
the Anynet+ feature and lets you
control those products with one
Samsung TV remote. To operate
this function, you must connect this
product to an Anynet+ Samsung TV
using an HDMI cable.
If you want to use an Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC) function, please follow
the instructions below.
1) Connect the product to an
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant
Samsung TV using HDMI Cable.
2) Set the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
feature to On in both the TV and
the product.
3) Search for and then select the
product in the TV's Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC) list. For more exact
instructions, see the Anynet+
section of the TV's user's
manual.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 23 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 23 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:56 013-06-04 오전 10:00:56| 24 English
Settings
DivX® Video
On Demand
View DivX® VOD Registration
Codes to purchase and play DivX®
VOD contents.
Support
Remote
Management
When activated, lets Samsung
Call Centre agents diagnose and
fix problems with the product
remotely. Requires an active Internet
connection. Remote Management
service might not be available in
some countries.
Software
Update
For more information about the
Software Update function, see
"Upgrading Software" on page 28.
Usage Mode
Lets you set the Use mode. If you
are using the home cinema at home,
always select Home. Store is for
retail display settings only.
Contact
Samsung
Provides contact information for
assistance with your product.
Reset
Reverts all settings to their defaults
except for the network and Smart
Hub settings, and then starts the
Setup function. Requires that you
enter your security PIN. The default
security PIN is 0000
Auto Sound Calibration
By setting the Auto Sound Calibration (ASC) function just
once when you relocate or install the product, you can
have the product automatically recognize the distance
between speakers, levels between channels, and
frequency characteristics to create a 7.1-channel sound
field optimized for your environment.
ASC IN
LAN SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRON
FRON
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
ASC microphone
Auto Sound Calibration
Select whether to run and apply automatic sound
calibration.
• Off: Produces sound according to the speaker
configuration specified in speaker settings.
• On: Runs Auto Sound Calibration and produces sound
according to the calibrated speaker settings.
Measurement
Before running the calibration, make sure no disc is left in
the disc tray.
1. Plug the ASC microphone into the ASC IN jack.
2. Place the ASC microphone at the listening position.
• Auto Sound Calibration automatically sets up
speakers in the following sequence : Front L
Centre Front R Surround R Front Top
R Front Top L Surround L Subwoofer
• Press the RETURN button to cancel the Auto
Sound Calibration Setting.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 24 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 24 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:56 013-06-04 오전 10:00:56English 25|
04
Settings
Networks and the Internet
When you connect this product to a network, you can
use network based applications and functions such as
Smart Hub and BD-LIVE, and upgrade the product's
software through the network connection. For more
information about accessing and using Internet services,
see the Network Services chapter of this manual on
pages 43~51. Instructions for configuring the network
connection start below.
Configuring your Network Connection
If you didn't configure your network connection during
the initial settings procedure or you need to reset the
network connection, follow the directions below.
Before you begin, contact your Internet Service Provider
to find out if your IP address is static or dynamic. If it
is dynamic, and you have a wired or wireless network,
we recommend using the Automatic configuration
procedures described below.
If you are connecting to a wired network, connect the
product to your router using a LAN cable before you start
the configuration procedure.
To begin configuring your network connection, follow
these steps:
1. In the Home screen, select Settings, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Network, and then press the E button.
3. Select Network Settings, and then press the E button.
4. Go to the instructions for Wired networks starting
below or the instructions for Wireless networks
starting on page 26.
Wired Network
❑ Wired – Automatic
After following Steps 1 to 3 above:
1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network
type to Wired. Then, select Connect and press
the E button. The product detects the wired
connection, verifies the network connection and
then connects to the network.
2. When it is done, highlight OK, and then press E
button.
❑ Wired - Manual
If you have a static IP address or the automatic procedure
does not work, you'll need to set the Network Settings
values manually.
After following Steps 1 to 3 above:
1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network
type to Wired. Then, select Connect and press the
E button.
The product searches for a network, and then
displays the connection failed message.
| NOTES |
If it is possible to connect the home cinema to your
network wirelessly, select Change Network at this
point, change the Network type to Wireless, and
then go to the instructions for wireless networks on
page 26.
Network Settings
Wired network connection failed.
MAC Address XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
IP Address 0. 0. 0. 0
Subnet Mask 0. 0. 0. 0
Gateway 0. 0. 0. 0
DNS Server 0. 0. 0. 0
Unable to connect to the network. Try the following: check if your IP address is
set correctly in IP Settings. Contact your Internet service provider for more
information.
Change Network IP Settings Retry Close
2. Use the ◄► buttons to select IP Settings, and
then press the E button. The IP Settings screen
appears.
3. Select the IP setting field, and then set it to Enter
manually.
4. Select a value to enter (IP Address, for example),
and then press E. Use the number keypad on
your remote control to enter the numbers for the
value. You can also enter numbers using the ▲▼
buttons. Use the ◄► buttons on the remote control
to move from entry field to entry field within a value.
When done with one value, press the E button.
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to another value,
and then enter the numbers for that value following
the instructions in Step 4.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you have filled in all
values.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 25 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 25 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:57 013-06-04 오전 10:00:57| 26 English
Settings
| NOTES |
You can get the Network values from your Internet
provider.
7. When finished entering all the values, select OK,
and then press the E button. The home cinema
verifies the network connection and then connects
to the network.
Wireless Network
You can setup a wireless network connection in three
ways:
- Wireless Automatic
- Wireless Manual
- WPS(PBC)
Before you configure the wireless network connection,
disconnect any wireless network device currently
connected to the product or, if applicable, the product's
current wired connection.
❑ Wireless - Automatic
After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network
Connection" on page 25:
1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network
type to Wireless. The product searches for and
then displays a list of the available networks.
Network Settings
Select your network type.
Network type Wireless
Wireless network
You can connect your Blu-ray
player to the internet. Please
select which wireless network to
use.
si-ap
iptime
iptime5G
KIMING_VTOWER
TIAS
Refresh WPS(PBC)
2. Select the desired network, and then press the E button.
3. On the Security screen, enter your network's
security code or pass phrase.
Enter numbers directly using the number buttons
on your remote control. Enter letters by selecting a
letter with ▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing E button.
4. When finished, select Done, and then press the E button. The product verifies the network connection
and then connects to the network.
| NOTES |
You should be able to find the security code or pass
phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set
up your router or modem.
❑ Wireless - Manual
If you have a static IP address or the Automatic
procedure does not work, you'll need to set the Network
Settings values manually.
After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network
Connection" on page 25:
1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network
type to Wireless. The product searches for and
then displays a list of the available networks.
2. Scroll through the list, select the desired network or
Add Network, and then press the E button.
3. If you selected a network in Step 2, go to Step 6.
If you selected Add Network, go to Step 4.
4. Enter your wireless network or wireless router's
name.
• Enter numbers directly using the number buttons
on your remote control.
• Enter letters by selecting a letter with the ▲▼◄►
buttons, and then pressing the E button.
• To display capital letters (or redisplay small letters
if capital letters are displayed), select , and
then press the E button.
• To display symbols and punctuation, select
123#&, and then press the E button. To
redisplay letters, select 123#&, and then press
the E button.
When finished, select Done, and then press the E
button.
5. On the Security type screen that appears, use the
▲▼ buttons to select the network's Security type,
and then press the E button. On the next screen,
enter your network's security code or pass phrase.
• Enter numbers directly using the number buttons
on your remote control.
• Enter letters by selecting a letter with the ▲▼◄►
buttons, and then pressing the E button.
When finished, select Done, and then press the E
button. The product searches for the network.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 26 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 26 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:58 013-06-04 오전 10:00:58English 27|
04
Settings
6. The Network connection fail screen appears. Use
◄► buttons to select IP Settings, and then press
the E button.
7. Select the IP setting field, and then set it to Enter
manually.
8. Select a network value to enter (IP Address, for
example), and then press E button. Use the
number keypad on your remote control to enter the
numbers for the value. You can also enter numbers
using the ▲▼ buttons. Use the ◄► buttons on the
remote control to move from entry field to entry field
within a value. When done with one value, press the
E button.
9. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to another value,
and then enter the numbers for that value following
the instructions in Step 8.
10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until you have filled in all
values.
| NOTES |
You can get the Network values from your Internet
provider.
11. When finished, select OK, and then press the E button. The Security Screen appears.
12. On the Security screen, enter your network's
Security Code or Pass Phrase. Enter numbers
directly using the number buttons on your remote
control. Enter letters by selecting a letter with the
▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing the E button.
13. When finished, select Done at the right of the
screen, and then press the E button. The product
verifies the network connection and then connects
to the network.
14. After the home cinema verifies the network, select
OK, and then press the E button.
| NOTES |
You can also begin the Manual Network setting by
going to Settings >Network > Network Status.
❑ WPS(PBC)
One of the easiest ways to set up the wireless network
connection is using the WPS(PBC) function. If your
wireless router has a WPS(PBC) button, follow these
steps:
After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network
Connection" on page 25:
1. In the Network Settings screen, change Network
type to Wireless. The product searches for and
then displays a list of the available networks.
2. Scroll the list down, select WPS(PBC), and then
press the E button.
3. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router within
two minutes. Your product automatically acquires all
the network settings values it needs and connects
to your network.
The product connects to the network after the
network connection is verified.
4. When it is done, highlight OK, and then press E
button.
| NOTES |
For WPS connection, set your wireless router’s
security encryption to AES. Setting to WEP security
encryption does not support WPS connection.
Wi-Fi Direct
The Wi-Fi Direct function allows you to connect Wi-Fi
Direct devices to the product and each other using a
peer-to-peer network, without a wireless router.
| NOTES |
Some Wi-Fi Direct devices may not support the
AllShare function if connected via Wi-Fi Direct. If this is
the case, change the network connection method you
used to connect the device to the home cinema.
Wi-Fi Direct transmissions can interfere with the
Bluetooth signal. Before you use the Bluetooth
function, we strongly recommend that you turn off
the Wi-Fi Direct function on any device in which it is
currently on.
1. Turn on the Wi-Fi direct device and activate its Wi-Fi
Direct function.
2. In the Home screen, select Settings, and then
press the E button.
3. Select Network, and then press the E button.
4. Select Wi-Fi Direct, and then press the E button.
The Wi-Fi Direct devices that you can connect
appear.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 27 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 27 22013-06-04 오전 10:00:59 013-06-04 오전 10:00:59| 28 English
Settings
Refresh
Close
Wi-Fi Direct
Device Name : [HTS]F9750W
Select your Wi-Fi Direct device to connect to.
AndroidXXXXXXX Disconnected
5. You have three ways to complete the Wi-Fi
connection:
• Through the Wi-Fi device.
• Through the product using PBC.
• Through the product using a PIN.
Each is covered below.
Through the Wi-Fi Device
1. On the Wi-Fi device, follow the device's procedure
for connecting to another Wi-Fi Direct device. See
the device's user manual for instructions.
2. When you have completed the procedure, you
should see a pop-up on your TV screen saying that
a device that supports Wi-Fi Direct has requested to
connect. Select OK, and then press the E button
to accept.
3. The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the
Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should
see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as
connected.
• The PBC and PIN procedures connect devices
automatically.
Through the Product Using PBC
1. Select the Wi-Fi Direct device you want to connect
to this product, and then press the E button.
2. The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the
Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should
see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as
connected.
Through the Product Using a PIN
1. Select the Wi-Fi Direct device you want to connect
to this product, and then press the E button.
2. The PIN pop-up appears.
3. Note the PIN code in the pop-up, and then enter it
into the appropriate field in the Wi-Fi Direct device
you want to connect.
4. The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the
Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should
see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as
connected.
| NOTES |
The current wired or wireless network connection
will be disconnected when you use the Wi-Fi Direct
function.
Text files, such as files with a .TXT or .DOC extension,
will not display when you are using the Wi-Fi Direct
function.
Upgrading Software
The Software Update menu allows you to upgrade the
product’s software for performance improvements or
additional services.
• Never turn the product off or back on manually
during the update process.
1. In the Home menu, select Settings, and then press
the E button.
2. Select Support, and then press the E button.
3. Select Software Update, and then press the E button.
4. To download update software and update now,
select Update now, and then press the E button.
See "Update now" on next page for details.
5. To let the product download update software
automatically when available, select Auto update,
and then press the E button. See "Auto update"
on the next page for details.
| NOTES |
The upgrade is complete when the product turns off,
and then turns on again by itself.
Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for
product malfunction caused by an unstable Internet
connection or consumer negligence during a software
upgrade.
If you want to cancel the upgrade while the upgrade
software is downloading, press the E button.
When a system upgrade is progress, "UPDATE" is
displayed on the front panel.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 28 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 28 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:00 013-06-04 오전 10:01:00English 29|
04
Settings
Update now
You can use Update now to update the software through
your network connection or by using a USB flash drive.
The network instructions are below. The USB flash drive
instructions are on this page.
1. Select Update now, and then press the E button.
The Update now pop-up appears.
2. The product searches on line for the latest software
version.
3. If it does not find an update, the "There are no new
updates for you at the moment." pop-up appears.
Press the E button to exit.
4. If it finds a new version, the Update Request popup appears.
5. Select OK. The product upgrades the software,
turns off, and then turns on automatically.
6. If you do not select OK or Cancel in one minute,
the product stores the new upgrade software. You
can upgrade the software later using Auto update.
7. If you select Cancel, the product cancells the
upgrade.
| NOTES |
When the system upgrade is done, check the
software details in the Product Information section of
the Contact Samsung screen.
Do not turn off the product during the software
upgrade. It may cause the product to malfunction.
Auto update
You can set the Auto update function so that the product
downloads new upgrade software when it is in Auto
update mode.
In Auto update mode, the product is off, but its Internet
connection is active. This allows the product to download
upgrade software automatically, when you are not using
it.
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Auto update, and
then press the E button.
2. Select On or Off.
If you select On, the product will automatically
download new upgrade software when it is in Auto
update mode with the power off. If it downloads
new upgrade software, the product will ask you if
you want to install it when you turn the product on.
| NOTES |
To use the Auto update function, your product must
be connected to the Internet.
Update by USB
1. Visit www.samsung.com.
2. Click SUPPORT on the top right of the page.
3. Enter the product's model number into the search
field. As you enter the model number, a drop down
will display products that match the model number.
4. Left click your product's model number in the drop
down list.
5. On the page that appears, scroll down to and then
click Firmware Manuals & Downloads.
6. Click Firmware in the centre of the page.
7. Click the ZIP button in the File column on the right
side of the page.
8. Click Send in the first pop-up that appears.
Click OK in the second pop-up to download and
save the firmware file to your PC.
9. Unzip the zip archive to your computer. You should
have a single folder with the same name as the zip
file.
10. Copy the folder to a USB flash drive.
11. Make sure no disc is inserted in the product, and
then insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of
the product.
12. In the product’s menu, go to Settings > Support >
Software Update.
13. Select Update now.
14. The product searches for the software on the
USB drive. When it finds the software,the Update
Request pop-up appears.
15. Select OK. The product upgrades the software,
turns off, and then turns on automatically.
| NOTES |
There should be no disc in the product when you
upgrade the software using the USB jack.
When the system upgrade is done, check the
software details in the Product Information section of
the Contact Samsung screen.
Do not turn off the product during the software
upgrade. It may cause the product to malfunction.
Software upgrades using the USB jack must be
performed with a USB flash drive only.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 29 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 29 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:02 013-06-04 오전 10:01:02| 30 English
Media Play
Your home cinema can play content located on Blu-ray/
DVD/CD discs, USB devices, PCs, smart phones, tablets,
and on the Web.
To play content located on your PC or a mobile device,
you must connect the PC or mobile device and the
product to your network. To play content on your PC, you
must also download and install AllShare network software
or already have DLNA network software on your PC.
| NOTES |
PCs running Windows 7 and Windows 8 have DLNA
software (Play To) built in.
The All Content Screen
For all media, the All Content screen or one of its sub
screens is your primary means of accessing and playing
contents saved on a variety of devices, either connected
directly or using your network.
Using the All Content Screen
To access the All Content screen, select Photos, Videos
& Music on the Home screen, and then press the E button.
Playing Commercial Discs
1. Press the button to open the disc tray.
2. Place a disc gently into the disc tray with the disc’s
label facing up.
3. Press the button to close the disc tray.
Playback starts automatically.
4. If playback does not start automatically, press the
6 button on the remote or see “The All Content
Screen” above.
Playing Files on a USB Device
There are two methods you can use to play or view
multimedia files located on a USB device through your
product.
Method 1
1. Turn the product on.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB port on
the front panel of the product. The New Device
Connected pop-up appears.
Movies & TV
Shows
Apps Photos,
Videos &
Music
V Apps Pho
Vide
Mus
V Apps Pho
e
Photos
Videos
Music
All Content
New device connected.
USB Flash Disk
Add App Add App Add App Web Browser Settings
| NOTES |
If the pop-up does not appear, go to Method 2.
3. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Photos, Videos,
Music or All Content, and then press the E button. Depending on how the contents are
arranged, you will see either folders, individual files,
or both.
| NOTES |
Even though the product will display folders for all
content types, it will only display files of the Content
Type you selected in Step 3. For example, if you
selected music, you will only be able to see music
files. You can change this selection by returning to the
Photos, Videos & Music screen, and then going to
Step 4 in Method 2 below.
4. If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a
folder, and then press the E button.
5. Select a file to view or play, and then press the E button.
6. Press the RETURN button to exit a folder or the
Exit button to return to the Home screen.
7. Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how
to control playback of videos, music, and pictures
on a USB device.
Method 2
1. Turn the product on.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB port on the
front panel of the product.
3. Select Photos, Videos & Music on the Home
screen, and then press the E button.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 30 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 30 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:03 013-06-04 오전 10:01:03English 31|
05
Media Play
4. Select Photos, Videos, Music or All Content, and
then press the E button.
Depending on how the contents are arranged, you
will see either folders, individual files, or both.
| NOTES |
Even though the product will display folders for all
content types, it will only display files of the Content
Type you selected in Step 4. For example, if you
selected music, you will only be able to see music
files. You can change this selection by returning to the
Photos, Videos & Music screen and repeating Step 4.
5. Use the ◄► buttons to select the desired device
and then press the E button.
6. If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a
folder, and then press the E button.
7. Press the RETURN button to exit a folder or the
Exit button to return to the Home screen.
8. Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how
to control playback of videos, music, and pictures
on a USB device.
| NOTES |
If you insert a disc when playing a USB device
or phone, the device mode changes to "Disc"
automatically.
If your cellular phone is DLNA compatible, you can
play contents without connecting a USB cable. See
"Using the AllShare Network Function" on page 31.
Playing a Disc with User Recorded
Content
You can play multimedia files you have recorded on Bluray, DVD, or CD discs.
1. Place a user recorded disc into the disc tray with
the disc’s label facing up, and then close the tray.
The Device Connected pop-up appears.
2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select the type of content
you want to view or play - Photos, Videos or Music
- and then press the E button.
| NOTES |
Even though the product will display folders for all
content types, it will only display files of the Content
Type you selected in Step 2. For example, if you
selected music, you will only be able to see music
files. You can change this selection by returning to the
Home screen and repeating Step 2.
3. A screen appears listing the contents of the disc.
Depending on how the contents are arranged, you
will see either folders, individual files, or both.
4. If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a
folder, and then press the E button.
5. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a file to view or
play, and then press the E button.
6. Press the RETURN button one or more times to
exit a current screen, exit a folder, or to return to the
Home screen.
Press the Exit button to return directly to the Home
Screen.
7. Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how
to control playback of videos, music, and pictures
on a disc.
Using the AllShare Network
Function
AllShare lets you play Photos, Videos or Music located
on your PC or your DLNA compatible device through the
product using a wireless network connection.
To Download the AllShare Software
AllShare makes it easy to retrieve and enjoy media files
from computers and DLNA-enabled devices. However,
computers need to be installed with AllShare PC and
mobile devices need to support AllShare. For more
information, visit the Samsung Content & Service portal
(http://link.samsung.com).
| NOTES |
You may experience compatibility issues when
attempting to play media files via a third-party DLNA
server.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 31 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 31 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:06 013-06-04 오전 10:01:06| 32 English
Media Play
Playing Content Located on your PC or
DLNA Device through the Product
AllShare Connection
PC
Product
Play back
PC's files
1. Connect the product, your PC, and/or your DLNA
compatible device to the same wireless network.
2. Follow the directions in the AllShare software
Installation/Instruction manual to set up devices and
files for playing or viewing.
3. Select Photos, Videos & Music on the product's
Home screen, and then press the E button. The
Photos, Videos & Music screen appears.
4. Select the type of content you want to play -
Photos, Videos, Music or All Content - and then
press the E button.
5. On the next screen, select AllShare, and then press
the E button.
6. In the list of AllShare connected devices that
appears, select your PC or other AllShare
compatible device, and then press the E button.
A screen listing the available files appears.
7. Select the file you want to play or view, and then
press the E button.
Controlling the Playback of Content
Located on Your PC with your Smart
Phone
Control PC's files
to Product
AllShare
Connection
PC
Smart Phone
Product
Play back
PC's files
5V
0.5A
(Only available with Samsung phones supporting AllShare
functionality.)
1. Connect the product, your PC, and your DLNA
compatible cellular phone to the same wireless
network.
2. Follow the directions in the AllShare software
Installation/Instruction manual to set up devices and
files for playing or viewing.
3. On your computer, using the AllShare software,
confirm your phone is connected.
4. On the phone, select the file you want to view or
play, and then select the Home cinema system as
the playback device.
5. On the phone, start playback.
Controlling Video Playback
You can control the playback of video content located on
a Blu-ray/DVD disc, USB device, mobile device or PC.
Depending on the disc or contents, some of the functions
described in this manual may not be available.
Buttons on the Remote Control used
for Video Playback
0
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
1
2
1 Using the disc menu, title menu, popup menu and
title list
DISC MENU During playback, press this button to
display the Disc menu.
TITLE
MENU
During playback, press this button to
display the Title menu.
• If your disc has a playlist, press the
View button to go to the playlist.
POPUP
MENU
During playback, press this button to
display the Popup menu.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 32 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 32 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:08 013-06-04 오전 10:01:08English 33|
05
Media Play
2 Playback related buttons
The product does not play sound in Search, Slow, or
Step mode.
• To return to normal speed playback, press the 6
button.
6 Starts playback.
5 Stops playback.
7 Pauses playback.
Fast Motion
Play
During playback, press the 3 or
button.
Each time you press the 3 or
button, the playback speed will
change.
Slow Motion
Play
In pause mode, press the button.
Each time you press the button,
the playback speed will change.
Step Motion
Play
In pause mode, press the 7 button.
Each time you press the 7 button, a
new frame appears.
Skip Motion
Play
During playback, press the 1 or 2
button.
Each time you press the 1 or 2
button, the disc moves to the previous
or next chapter or file.
Using the TOOLS Menu
During playback, press the TOOLS button.
Play from the
Beginning
Select to return to the beginning of
the movie, and then press the E button.
3D
Use 3D menu to select Side by
Side or Top Bottom option if the
3D content currently playing does
not properly appear in 3D mode.
| NOTES |
Use 3D menu only for 3D
contents of Side by Side or Top
Bottom format. If applied to 2D
contents, it may not be displayed
properly.
Search Scene
You can use the Search Scene
function during playback to view
or start a movie from the scene of
your choice.
| NOTES |
If the index information in the file
is damaged or the file does not
support indexing, you will not be
able to use the Search Scene
function.
If you are using the DLNA
function after connecting to a
computer through your network,
Search Scene may not be
supported.
Search Titles
If there is more than one movie on
the disc or device, select to start a
different title.
1. Select Search Titles, and
then press the E button.
2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select
a title, and then press the E button.
Chapter
Search
Select to play the chapter of your
choice.
1. Select Chapter Search, and
then press the E button.
2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select
a chapter, and then press the
E button.
Search Time
Bar
Select to play the movie from a
selected time point.
1. Select Search Time Bar, and
then press the E button.
2. Using the number buttons,
enter the time point you want
to go to, and then press the
E button.
| NOTES |
You can also use the ◄►
buttons to advance or rewind
the movie. The movie advances
or rewinds one minute each tme
you press the ◄► buttons.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 33 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 33 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:12 013-06-04 오전 10:01:12| 34 English
Media Play
Repeat Mode
Select to repeat a title, chapter, or
specific section.
- Off : Select to return to normal
playback.
- Title : Choose to repeat a
selected title.
- Chapter : Choose to repeat a
specific chapter.
- Repeat A-B : Choose to repeat
a specific section.
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to
select Repeat A-B, and then
press the E button.
2. Press the E button at the
point where you want repeat
play to start (A). Let the movie
play.
3. Press the E button at the
point where you want repeat
play to stop (B).
| NOTES |
You must set point (B) at least
5 seconds of playing time after
point (A).
Picture Mode
Select to set the picture mode.
- Dynamic : Increases sharpness
and brightness.
- Standard : Choose this setting
for most viewing applications.
- Movie : The best setting for
watching movies.
- User : Lets you adjust the
sharpness and noise reduction
function respectively.
| NOTES |
When you use the BD wise
function, this menu will not
appear.
Equaliser
Mode Select to use the Equaliser.
Equaliser
Settings
Select to set the Equaliser.
| NOTES |
It only appears when equaliser
mode is on.
Audio Select to set the desired audio
language.
Audio Sync
In some cases when the product is
connected to a digital TV, the audio
signal may not synchronize with the
video signal. If this occurs, adjust
the audio delay time to match the
video signal.
Subtitle Select to set the desired subtitle
language.
Subtitle
Settings
Select to set the desired subtitle
options.
Angle
To view a scene from another
angle. The Angle option displays
the number of angles available to
view (1/1, 1/2, 1/3, etc.).
BONUSVIEW
Video Select to set the desired bonusview
option. BONUSVIEW
Audio
Full Screen
Select to set the size of the video
image. Choose Original, Mode1
(larger), or Mode2 (largest).
Information Select to view video file information.
| NOTES |
Depending on the disc or storage device, the Tools
menu may differ.
Video files with high bit rates of 20Mbps or more strain
the product’s capabilities and may stop playing during
playback.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 34 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 34 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:12 013-06-04 오전 10:01:12English 35|
05
Media Play
Using the View & Options Menus
On the screen that lists the video files, use the ▲▼◄►
buttons to select View or Options in the upper right, and
then press the E button.
Videos
View
Date
Displays all the folders with
videos by date. If you select
a folder, and then press E button, displays all the videos
in the folder by date.
Title
Displays all the video files on
the media or storage device
by title.
Folder Displays all the folders on the
media or storage device.
Options
Play
Selected
Play Selected lets you
create a playlist by selecting
specific files to play. It works
essentially the same way for
all media. See Creating a
Playlist from a CD on page
37.
Send
Select Send to upload
selected files to apps (Picasa,
Facebook etc) or devices.
To use Send, you need to
establish an account with the
on-line site, and then log in
using the Log In function.
| NOTES |
Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options
View menus may differ. All options may not be
displayed.
The View and Options menus are usually available
when you are viewing video files on a USB flash
drive, a PC, a disc you recorded yourself, or a mobile
device. They are usually not available if you are viewing
a commercial Blu-ray, DVD, or CD disc.
Controlling Music Playback
You can control the playback of music content located on
a DVD, CD, USB, mobile device or PC. Depending on the
disc or contents, some of the functions described in this
manual may not be available.
Buttons on the Remote Control used
for Music Playback
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
1
4
5
3 6
2
1
NUMBER buttons : If numbered tracks are
displayed, press the number of a track. The
selected track is played.
2
1 2 buttons : Move to the previous/next
track.
3 5 button : Stops a track.
4
Fast Play (Audio CD (CD-DA) only)
During playback, press the 3 or button.
Each time you press the 3 or button, the
playback speed will change.
5 7 button : Pause a track.
6 6 button : Plays the currently selected track.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 35 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 35 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:13 013-06-04 오전 10:01:13| 36 English
Media Play
Music Screen Controls
00:09 00:43
TRACK 001
TRACK 001 00:43
TRACK 002 03:56
TRACK 003 04:41
TRACK 004 04:02
TRACK 005 03:43
TRACK 006 03:40
TRACK 007 04:06
TRACK 008 03:52
TRACK 009 03:04
TRACK 010 04:02
Options
off off
Pause a track.
Play a track.
Move to the previous track.
Move to the next track.
Rewind the track.
Advance the track.
1
, Repeat one track or all tracks.
Play tracks in random order.
Display the Equaliser.
Adjust the equaliser manually.
(Only when equaliser mode is on)
To access the controls, play a track, and then use the
▲▼◄► buttons to move to the control of your choice.
| NOTES |
The Music Screen controls are only accessible when a
track is playing.
All controls do not appear at the same time.
Using the View & Options Menus
On the screen that lists the music files, use the ▲▼◄►
buttons to select View or Options in the upper right, and
then press the E button.
Music
View
Track
Displays all the music
tracks on the media or
storage device.
Album
Displays all the music on
the media or storage by
album.
Artist
Displays all the music files
on the media or storage
device by artist
Genre
Displays all music on
the media or storage by
genre.
Folder
Displays all the folders
on the media or storage
device.
Options
Play
Selected
Play Selected lets you
create a playlist by
selecting specific files to
play. It works essentially
the same way for all
media. See Creating a
Playlist on an Audio CD
on page 37.
Send
Select Send to upload
selected files to apps
(Picasa, Facebook etc)
or devices. To use Send,
you need to establish an
account with the on-line
site, and then log in using
the Log In function.
Ripping
The Ripping function
converts CD audio to the
mp3 format and saves
the converted files on a
USB device or the mobile
device connected to the
product. See Ripping on
page 38.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 36 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 36 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:14 013-06-04 오전 10:01:14English 37|
05
Media Play
Information Select to see content
information.
Encoding Select to manage the text
encoding options.
| NOTES |
Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options
menu may differ. All options may not be displayed.
Repeating Tracks on an Audio CD
You can set the product to repeat tracks on an audio CD
(CD-DA/MP3).
1. During playback, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select
in the lower left corner of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Use the ▲▼ to select the Repeat mode you want
- Off, One Song, or All - and then press the E button.
00:09 00:43
TRACK 001
TRACK 001 00:43
TRACK 002 03:56
TRACK 003 04:41
TRACK 004 04:02
TRACK 005 03:43
TRACK 006 03:40
TRACK 007 04:06
TRACK 008 03:52
TRACK 009 03:04
TRACK 010 04:02
Options
off off
Shuffling Tracks on an Audio CD
You can set the product to play tracks on an audio CD
(CD-DA/MP3) at random.
1. During playback, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select
in the lower left corner of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Use the ▲▼ to set the Shuffle mode Off or On, and
then press the E button.
Creating a Playlist from a CD
1. With the Playback screen displayed, select the
Options button and then press the E button. The
Options menu appears.
2. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Play Selected , and
then press the E button. The Play Selected screen
appears.
3. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a track, and then
press the E button. A check appears to the left of
the track.
4. Repeat Step 3 to select and check additional tracks.
5. To remove a track from the list, move to the track,
and then press the E button again. The check on
the track is removed.
6. When done, press the ▲▼ buttons to select Play,
and then press the E button. The Music Playback
screen reappears listing only the tracks you
checked. The selected tracks play automatically.
| NOTES |
You can create a playlist with up to 99 tracks from
Audio CDs (CD-DA).
If you have created a playlist, Play Selected is
replaced by Edit playlist on the Options menu.
On the Play Selected screen, you can also choose
Select All, Deselect All, and Cancel.
~
Use Select All to select all tracks. This cancells
your individual track selections. When you press
the RETURN button on your remote or select Play
and then press the E button, all tracks will appear
on the Music Playback screen, and the product will
begin to play all tracks from Track 001.
~
Use Deselect All to deselect all selected tracks at
once. Then, select individual tracks or use Select
All to select all the tracks, and then press the
RETURN button on your remote or select Play and
then press the E button. If you do not use Select
All or select individual tracks, the Playlist will not
change.
~
Cancel cancells any changes you made on the Play
Select screen. When you return to the Playback
screen, the Playlist will be unchanged.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 37 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 37 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:17 013-06-04 오전 10:01:17| 38 English
Media Play
Ripping
1. Insert a USB device into the USB jack on the front
of the product.
2. With the Playback screen displayed, select the
Options button and then press the E button.
The Options menu appears.
3. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Ripping, and then
press the E button. The Ripping screen appears.
4. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a track, and then
press the E button. A check appears to the left of
the track.
5. Repeat Step 4 to select and check additional tracks.
6. To remove a track from the list, move to the track,
and then press the E button again. The check on
the track is removed.
7. When done, select the Rip button using the ▲▼
buttons, and then press the E button.
The Rip pop-up appears.
8. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select the device to store
the ripped files on, and then press the E button.
| NOTES |
Do not disconnect the device while ripping is in
progress.
9. If you want to cancel ripping, press the E button
and then select Yes. Select No to continue ripping.
10. When ripping is complete, the “Successfully
Ripped.” message appears. Press the Ebutton.
11. Press the RETURN button to go back to the
Playback screen.
| NOTES |
This function is not available with DTS Audio CDs.
This function may not be supported by some discs.
Ripping encodes music to the .mp3 format at
192kbps.
On the Ripping screen, you can also choose Select
All and or Clear All.
- Use Select All to select all tracks and press the E button. This cancells your individual track selections.
- Use Clear All to deselect all selected tracks at once.
Using Bluetooth
You can use a Bluetooth device to enjoy music with high
quality stereo sound, all without wires!
What is Bluetooth?
Bluetooth is a technology that enables Bluetoothcompliant devices to interconnect with each other easily
using a short wireless connection.
• A Bluetooth device may hum or malfunction:
- When a part of your body is in contact with the
receiving/transmitting system of the Bluetooth device
or the Home Cinema.
- When it is subject to electrical variation from
obstructions caused by a wall, corner or office
partitioning.
- When it is exposed to electrical interference from
same frequency-band devices including medical
equipment, microwave ovens and wireless LANs.
• Pair the Home Cinema with the Bluetooth device while
the two are close together.
• The further the distance is between the Home Cinema
and the Bluetooth device, the worse the quality is.
If the distance exceeds the Bluetooth operational
range, the connection is lost.
• In poor reception-sensitivity areas, the Bluetooth
connection may not work properly.
• The Home Cinema has an effective reception range
of up to 10 meters in all directions if there are no
obstacles. The connection will be automatically cut off
if the device is out of this range. Even within this range,
the sound quality may be degraded by obstacles such
as walls or doors.
• This wireless device may cause an electric interference
during its operation.
To connect the Home Cinema to a
Bluetooth device
Connect
Bluetooth device
Check if the Bluetooth device supports the Bluetooth
compliant stereo headset function.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 38 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 38 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:18 013-06-04 오전 10:01:18English 39|
05
Media Play
1. Press the FUNCTION button on the remote control
of the product to display the BT message.
2. Select the Bluetooth menu on the Bluetooth device
you want to connect. For instructions, refer to the
Bluetooth device's manual.
3. Select the Stereo headset menu on the Bluetooth
device.
• You will see a list of devices.
4. Select "[HTS]Fxxxxx" from the searched list.
• When the Home Cinema is connected to the
Bluetooth device, the device name of the
connected Bluetooth device, followed by the
name of home cinema will appear on the front
display of home cinema.
5. Play music on the connected device.
• You can listen to the music playing on the
connected Bluetooth device over the Home
Cinema system.
| NOTES |
The Home Cinema only supports Middle Quality SBC
data (up to 237kbps@48kHz), and does not support
High Quality SBC data (328kbps@44.1kHz).
The AVRCP feature is supported. It's functionality
will differ, depending on the specifications of the
connected device.
Connect only to a Bluetooth device that supports the
A2DP Profile.
Only one Bluetooth device can be paired at a time.
The search or connection functions may not work
properly in the following cases:
- If there a strong electric field near or around the
home cinema.
- If several Bluetooth devices are simultaneously
paired with product.
- If the Bluetooth device is turned off, not in place, or
malfunctions.
- Note that such devices as microwave ovens, wireless
LAN adapters, fluorescent lights, and gas stoves use
the same frequency range as the Bluetooth device,
and can cause electric interference.
To disconnect the Bluetooth device from
the Home Cinema
You can disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Home
Cinema. For instructions, refer to the Bluetooth device's
manual.
• When the Home Cinema is disconnected from the
Bluetooth device, the Home Cinema will display
DISCONNECTED on the front display.
To disconnect the Home Cinema from the
Bluetooth device
Press the ( ) button on the front panel of the Home
Cinema to switch from BT to another mode or turn off
the Home Cinema.
• Except when you disconnect the home cinema by
changing functions, the connected Bluetooth device
will wait a certain time for a response from the
Home Cinema before terminating the connection.
(Disconnection time may differ, depending on the
Bluetooth device.)
| NOTES |
In Bluetooth connection mode, the Bluetooth
connection will be lost if the distance between the
Home Cinema System and the Bluetooth device
exceeds 10 meters. When the Bluetooth device
comes back into effective range or you restart the
Bluetooth device, you have to pair the device and
home cinema again to reconnect.
In Bluetooth mode, the screen saver will start if
the Bluetooth device stays in the Ready state for 5
minutes. To reconnect the Bluetooth device, turn off
the screen saver, and then connect the device. To turn
off the Screen saver, press any button on the remote
control (the Volume button, a number button, etc.)
Playing Photo Contents
You can play photo contents located on a DVD, USB,
mobile device or PC.
Using the Tools Menu
During playback, press the TOOLS button.
Previous Select to move to the previous
picture.
Next Select to move to the next picture.
Start / Stop
Slide Show Select to play/pause the slide show.
Slideshow
Settings
Speed : Select to set a slide
show's speed.
Effects : Select to set a slide
show's special effects.
Zoom Select to enlarge the current
picture. (Enlarge up to 4 times)
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 39 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 39 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:19 013-06-04 오전 10:01:19| 40 English
Media Play
Rotate
Select to rotate the picture. (This will
rotate the picture either clockwise
or counter clockwise.)
Background
Music
Select to listen to music while
viewing a slide show.
Settings
Picture Mode
- Dynamic : Choose to increase
Sharpness.
- Standard : Choose for most
viewing applications.
- Movie : This is the best setting
for watching movies.
- User : Lets you adjust the
sharpness and noise reduction
function respectively.
Information : Shows the picture
information.
Equaliser
Mode
Customize your own personal
sound preferences using the
equaliser settings.
Equaliser
Settings
This function is only available when
Equaliser Mode is On.
| NOTES |
Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options
menu may differ. All options may not be displayed.
To enable the background music function, the photo
file must be in the same storage media as the music
file. However, the sound quality can be affected by the
bit rate of the MP3 file, the size of the photo, and the
encoding method.
You can't enlarge the subtitle and PG graphic in the
full screen mode.
Using the View and Options Menus
When you See the Photo File List
Photos
View
Date
Groups all the photo files
on the media or storage
device by Date. Click a
group to see the photos in
that group.
Title
Displays all the photo files
on the media or storage
device by title.
Folder
Displays all the folders
on the media or storage
device.
Options
Slide Show
Starts the slide show.
Shows all the files in the
current folder, one after
another. If you want to
create a slide show with a
selected group of photos,
see Play Selected below.
Play
Selected
Play Selected lets you
create a playlist by
selecting specific files to
play. It works essentially
the same way for all
media. See Creating a
Playlist on an Audio CD
on page 37.
Send
Select Send to upload
selected files to on line
sites (Picasa, Facebook
etc) or devices. To use
Send, you need to
establish an account with
the on-line site, and then
log in using the Log In
function.
| NOTES |
Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options
menu may differ. All options may not be displayed.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 40 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 40 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:20 013-06-04 오전 10:01:20English 41|
05
Media Play
Listening to Radio
Using Buttons on the Remote Control
1. Press the FUNCTION button to select FM.
2. Tune to the desired station.
• Preset Tuning 1 : Press the 5 button to select
Preset and then press the TUNING/CH (,.)
button to select the preset station.
- Before you can tune to preset stations, you
must add preset stations to the product's
memory.
• Manual Tuning : Press the 5 button to select
Manual and then press the TUNING/CH (,.)
button to tune to a lower or higher frequency.
• Automatic Tuning : Press the 5 button to select
Manual and then press and hold the TUNING/
CH (,.) button to automatically search the
band.
Setting Mono/Stereo
Press the MO/ST button.
• Each time the button is pressed, the sound switches
between STEREO and MONO.
• In a poor reception area, select MONO for a clear,
interference-free broadcast.
Presetting Stations
Example : Presetting FM 89.10 into memory.
1. Press the FUNCTION button to select FM.
2. Press the TUNING/CH (,.) button to select
<89.10>.
3. Press the TUNER MEMORY button.
• NUMBER flashes on the display.
4. Press the TUNER MEMORY button again.
• Press the TUNER MEMORY button before
NUMBER disappears from the display on its own.
• After you press the TUNER MEMORY button,
NUMBER disappears from the display and the
station is stored in memory.
5. To preset another station, repeat steps 2 to 4.
• To tune to a preset station, press the 5 button
to select Preset and then press the TUNING/CH
(,.) button to select the preset station.
Using the Special Effects Remote
Control Buttons
SOUND EFFECT Function SOUND
EFFECT
Lets you select a mode that optimizes the sound.
1. Press the SOUND EFFECT button.
2. Press the ▲▼ button to select the desired mode:
DSP, Dolby Pro Logic II or SFE Mode.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
sound effect.
❑ DSP
MP3 Enhancer Power Bass Football Off
• MP3 Enhancer : Helps enhance your sound
experience (ex. mp3 music). You can upscale your
MP3 level sound (24 kHz, 8bit) to CD level sound
(44.1 kHz, 16bit).
• Power Bass : Increases the volume level of bass
tones and provides thudding sound effects.
• Football : Creates a more dynamic, realistic,
stadium like sound. For listening to football, soccer,
and other sporting events.
• Off : Select for normal listening.
❑ Dolby Pro Logic II
Movie Music Game Matrix Pro Logic
Off
• Movie : Adds realism to a movie soundtrack.
• Music : When listening to music, you can
experience sound effects as if you are listening to
the actual performance.
• Game : Enhances the excitement of a game’s
sound.
• Matrix : Select to hear multi channel surround
sound.
• Pro Logic : Select to listen to a 2CH sound source
in 5.1CH surround sound with all speakers active.
- A specific speaker(s) may not output depending
on the input signal.
• Off : Select for normal listening.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 41 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 41 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:21 013-06-04 오전 10:01:21| 42 English
Media Play
❑ SFE Mode
Symphony Hall in Boston (Hall 1) Philharmonic
Hall in Bratislava (Hall 2) Jazz Club in Seoul B
Church in Seoul Amphitheater (Rock) Off
• Symphony Hall in Boston (Hall 1) : Provides a
clear vocal as if listening in a concert hall.
• Philharmonic Hall in Bratislava (Hall 2) : Also
provides a clear vocal as if listening in a concert
hall but, less powerful than HALL1.
• Jazz Club in Seoul B : Recommended setting for
Jazz.
• Church in Seoul : Gives the feel of being in a
grand church.
• Amphitheater (Rock) : Recommended setting for
Rock.
• Off : Select this for normal listening.
3D Sound 3D
SOUND
You can enjoy more natural and vivid surround sound
with enriched tones by adjusting the depth of sound
using the level options.
Off High Low
| NOTES |
3D Sound is not available in FM mode.
TV Sound
TV
SOUND
You can listen via Home theatre speakers or TV
Speaker with TV SOUND button.
1. Connect the HDMI cable to TV and Home
cinema. (See page 17 )
2. Set the connected Home cinema and TV to
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) On.
3. Press the TV SOUND button on the remote
control.
4. Each time you press the TV SOUND button, TV
SOUND ON/OFF flashes shortly on the Display
part on the Front panel, then change to D. IN.
- TV SOUND ON : Output to Home theatre
speakers.
- TV SOUND OFF : Output to Anynet+
connected TV Speaker.
❑ Use in this case:
1) If you want to listen to the sound via home
cinema speaker when you watch a TV.
2) If you want to listen to the sound from the USB
media that plugged to the TV via home cinema
speaker.
❑ TV SOUND ON/OFF support specification
Connected TV
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
Setting
TV
Sound
ON
TV
Sound
OFF
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
supported TV
ON O O
OFF O X
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC) not
supported TV
No operation O X
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 42 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 42 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:22 013-06-04 오전 10:01:22English 43|
06
Network Services
You can enjoy various network services such as streaming
video or on-line apps by connecting the product to your
network.
To use network services, you must first:
1. Connect the product to the network.
(See page 18)
2. Configure the network settings.
(See pages 25~27)
Logging In to Your Samsung
Account
Before you access Movies & TV Shows or Apps, we
suggest you log in to your Samsung account.
To log in to your Samsung account, follow these steps:
1. With the Home screen displayed, press the RED (A)
button. The Log In screen appears.
2. Select the Email field, and then press the E button. The keyboard pop-up appears.
3. Using the keyboard, enter your e-mail address.
When finished, select the Done button, and then
press the E button. The Log In screen re-appears.
4. Select the Password field, and then press the E button. The keyboard pop-up appears.
5. Using the keyboard, enter your password. When
finished, select the Done button, and then press the
E button. The Log In screen re-appears.
6. To make the log in process easier next time, select
Sign me in automatically, and then press the E button.
7. Select Log in, and then press the E button. The
product logs you in to your account. Your account
e-mail is displayed on the bottom left of the screen.
| NOTES |
If you selected Sign me in automatically, the next
time you log in, the product will automatically enter
your e-mail and password. All you need to do is select
Log In.
If your e-mail address and password are not displayed
when the Log In screen appears, select the button
with the down pointing arrow head next to the Email
field, and then press the E button. A drop down list
of all your registered accounts will appear. Select your
account, and then press the E button. The product
will fill in the e-mail and password fields.
If you press the RED (A) button after you have logged
in, the My Account pop-up appears. On the pop-up,
you can select Logout, Change Account Information,
Link Service Accounts, Remove Accounts from the
Device, and Deactivate Account.
To rent movies and purchase for pay apps,you must
have a credit card registered in your account. If you
haven’t registered a card, select Change Account
Information. On the Change Account information
page, select Register Card, press the E button,
and then follow the directions on the screen.
Before Using Movies & TV Shows
or Apps
If you haven’t set up Smart Hub, when you use Movies &
TV Shows or Apps for the first time, the product will ask
you to perform the Smart Hub set up procedure.
1. On the Home screen, select either Movies & TV
Shows or Apps, and then press the E button. If
you have selected Apps, go to Step 4.
2. If you selected Movies & TV Shows, the Smart Hub
pop-up appears asking if you want to set up Smart
Hub. Select Yes, and then press the E button.
The Welcome screen appears.
3. Select Start, and then press the E button. The
Smart Hub Terms & Conditions, Privacy Policy
screen appears.
4. On the Smart Hub Terms & Conditions, Privacy
Policy screen, you must review and agree to both
the Smart Hub Terms and Conditions and the
Privacy Policy to use Smart Hub.
5. Scroll down, and then click the View Details buttons
to review the full documents.
6. When done reading, scroll up to the first entry field,
and press the E button to agree to the Terms and
Conditions and consent to the Privacy Policy.
7. Press the ► button twice to go to the Supplemental
Privacy Notices screen.
8. Click the View Details button to view the entire
notice.
9. When done reading, scroll up to the top entry field,
and then press the E button.
| NOTES |
You do not need to consent to the Supplemental
Privacy Notice, but one or more Smart TV features or
functionalities may not be available if you do not.
10. Press the ► button twice. The Setup Complete
screen appears. Press the E button.
Network Services
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 43 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 43 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:24 013-06-04 오전 10:01:24| 44 English
Network Services
Using Movies & TV Shows
You can download or stream for pay and free-of-charge
movies and TV shows and view them on your TV.
Movies & TV Shows
Featured Recommended
Favourites Featured Movies TV Shows Purchased
1. On the Home screen, select Movies & TV Shows,
and then press the E button.
2. Select one of the Featured or Recommended
movies, and then press the E button. The page
for that movie appears.
OR
Use the ▼ button to go to the bottom of the screen.
Select Favourites, Featured, Movies, TV Shows,
or Purchased, and then press the E button.
On the page that appears, use the ▲▼◄► buttons
to select a show or movie, and then press the E button.
On the TV Shows or Movies screen, you can also
select What's New?, Most Popular, or Genres to
see more available shows or movies. On the Genre
screen, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a Genre,
and then press the E button.
To make a selection on a page displaying TV shows
or movies, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to make a
selection, and then press the E button.
3. To watch a selection, select Watch Now, and then
press the E button. A selection screen appears
listing various locations from which you can rent the
film along with prices.
4. Select a location, and then press the E button.
Follow the directions on the screen to start the
movie.
| NOTES |
If you haven't logged into your Samsung account,
the Log in screen will appear after Step 3 and you will
need to log in.
If you don't have a credit card associated with your
Samsung account, after you log in, the Register
Card screen will appear. Follow the directions on the
screen. You must have a credit card registered to your
account to rent movies and to purchase for-pay apps.
Using Apps
You can download the applications from the Internet, and
access various for pay or free-of-charge application and
view them on your TV. To access some applications, you
need to have a Samsung account.
The Apps Screen at a Glance
Samsung TV
2 3 4 5
WebBrowser Apps Apps
More Apps
1
Recommended
My Apps
Apps
1 2
3 4
1
Recommended : Displays recommended
contents managed by Samsung.
Gives you access to various for pay or free-of-
charge applications you can download.
2
Featured Applications : Use the ▲▼◄►
buttons to highlight the displayed Feature
Application, and then press the E button.
Information about the featured application
appears.
3
My Apps : Displays your personal gallery of
applications modifiable on the More Apps
screen.
4
More Apps : Select More Apps to access
the More Apps screen where you can add to,
modify, and delete applications and see all
downloaded applications.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 44 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 44 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:25 013-06-04 오전 10:01:25English 45|
06
Network Services
Downloading Applications
You can download for pay or free-of-charge applications
through Samsung Apps.
1. On the Apps screen, select Samsung Apps, and
then press the E button. The Samsung Apps
screen appears.
2. Across the top of the screen, under What's
New?, you'll see a series of new apps. Use the
◄► buttons to scroll the list right or left, and
then select an app. Press the E button to see
more information about the app. If the app is free,
select Download, and then press the E button
to download the app. If it is a for-pay app select
Buy, press the E button, and then follow the
instructions on the screen.
| NOTES |
To buy an app, you must be logged into your
Samsung account and have a credit card registered to
the account. Press the RED (A) button on your remote
to log in.
If you haven’t registered a card, after you log in, press
the RED (A) button again, and then select Change
Account Information in the pop-up that appears. On
the Change Account information page, select Register
Card, press the E button, and then follow the
directions on the screen.
You can also access and download apps from
the categories listed on the left of the screen. For
instructions, see Step 4.
3. After the app has downloaded, select Run, and
then press the E button to run the app now.
To run the app later, press the RETURN button. In
either case, the icon for the app will appear on the
Apps screen.
4. To see additional apps, use the ▲▼◄► buttons
to move to the category list on the left side of the
screen.
5. Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a category. Each
time you move the highlight to another category, a
different set of applications appears on the right.
6. Use the ► button to move to the applications and
the ▲▼◄► buttons to move from app to app.
7. To see more information about an app, select it, and
then press the E button.
8. To download the app, follow the directions in Steps
2 and 3.
Starting an Application
1. Select Apps on the Home screen, and then press
the E button.
2. On the Apps screen, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to
select an app, and then press the E button. The
app starts.
Using the More Apps Screen
More Apps
WebBrowser
WebBrowser
Category : XXXXX | Version : X.XXX | Size : XX.XKB
Samsung Apps
View : Date Downloaded Options
1 /23
Storage
109.48 MB / 629.43 MB
The More Apps Screen lists all the apps you have
downloaded and lets you:
• Sort the apps on the More Apps screen by Date
Downloaded, Recently Opened, and Title.
• Apply a number of Options Menu functions to the
apps listed in the My Apps section of the Apps screen
including updating apps, moving apps into a folder,
deleting the apps from My Apps, and locking the apps.
• Start apps.
Sorting the Apps
To sort the apps on the More Apps screen, follow these
steps:
1. On the Home screen, select Apps, and then press
the E button.
2. On the Apps screen, use the ▼ button to move to
the More Apps hotspot at the bottom of the page,
and then press the E button.
3. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
move to View at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
4. In the drop down that appears, select Date
Downloaded, Recently Opened, or Title, and then
press the E button. The apps on the More Apps
screen are sorted by the criteria you have chosen.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 45 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 45 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:30 013-06-04 오전 10:01:30| 46 English
Network Services
Using the Options Menu Functions
Lock/Unlock
Using the Lock/Unlock function and the Security PIN, you
can lock applications so they cannot be started on either
the Apps screen or the More Apps screen. The default
PIN is 0000.
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Lock/Unlock, and then press the E button.
3. When the Lock Service appears, enter the PIN
using the number buttons on your remote control.
4. To lock an application, select the application, and
then press the E button. A lock appears on the
app. Repeat to lock other, individual apps.
5. To unlock a locked app, select the application, and
then press the E button.
6. To lock all the apps at once, use the ▲► buttons to
select the Lock All button, and then press the E button.
7. To unlock all the locked apps at once, use the ▲►
buttons to select the Unlock All button and then
press the E button.
8. Press the RETURN button twice to return to the
Apps screen. Locked apps will display a lock on the
upper right side.
Edit My Apps
Edit My Apps lets you add apps to and delete apps from
My Apps. It also lets you change the position of an app in
My Apps.
Add an App to My Apps
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E button. The Edit My Apps screen appears.
3. Select a full colour app from the top row of apps,
and then press the E button. The full colour app
icon appears in the My Apps area below and the
app icon in the top row is grayed out.
| NOTES |
Grayed out apps are already in My Apps.
4. When you return to the Apps screen, the app will
appear in the My Apps area.
Delete an App from My Apps
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E button. The Edit My Apps screen appears.
3. Select the app you want to delete from My Apps,
press the E button, and then press the ▲▼◄►
buttons in the direction of the .
The Remove from My Apps pop-up appears.
4. Select Yes, and then press the E button.
5. When you return to the Apps screen, the app will
have been removed from the My Apps area.
Move an App in My Apps
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E button. The Edit My Apps screen appears.
3. Select the app you want to move in My Apps, press
the E button, and then press the ▲▼◄► buttons
to move the app icon in the direction of one of the
arrows (<, >, ^, etc.) that appears around the app
icon. The app icon moves in the direction you have
chosen.
4. After you have placed the app icon where you want,
press the E button.
5. When you return to the Apps screen, the app will be
positioned in the location you had selected.
Create Folder
Create Folder lets you create a folder on the More Apps
screen into which you can put apps.
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Create Folder, and then press the E button. The Set Folder Name pop-up appears.
3. Press the E button. The keyboard appears.
4. Select the Clear button on the right side, and then
press the E button to remove Folder 1 from the
entry field. Then, using the keyboard, enter the
name you want to apply to the folder.
5. When finished, select the Done button on the right
side, and then press the E button. The pop-up
reappears.
6. Select OK, and then press the E button. The new
folder appears in the list of apps on the left side of
the screen.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 46 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 46 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:36 013-06-04 오전 10:01:36English 47|
06
Network Services
Move to Folder
Move to Folder lets you move apps to the folder of your
choice.
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Move to Folder, and then press the E button. The Move to Folder screen appears.
3. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to an app, and
then press the E button to select the app. A
check appears in the upper left corner of the app.
4. To deselect an app, press the E button. The
check disappears.
5. Repeat Step 3 to select additional apps.
| NOTES |
To select all the downloaded apps, select Select All
at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button. To deselect all the apps, select Deselect All
at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button.
6. When done, select Select folder at the top of the
screen, and then press the E button. The Select
Folder pop-up appears.
7. In the Select Folder pop-up, use the ▲▼ buttons
to select the folder you want to move the apps you
selected to, and then press the E button.
8. The Apps Moved pop up appears. Press the E button.
9. To open the folder, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to
highlight the folder, and then press the E button.
Rename Folder
Rename Folder lets you rename an existing folder.
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Rename Folder, and then press the E button. The Rename Folder screen appears, and a
folder is highlighted.
3. User the ▲▼◄► buttons to highlight a folder of
your choice, and then press the E button. The
Rename pop-up appears.
4. Press the E button. The keyboard appears.
5. Enter the new name for the folder. When finished,
select Done on the right side, and then press
the E button. The Rename popup reappears
displaying the new name.
6. Select OK, and then press the E button. The
folder is renamed.
7. Select Close on the right side of the screen, and
then press the E button.
Delete
Delete lets you delete apps and folders from the My
Apps screen. If there are apps in a folder, both the folder
and the apps are deleted together. Delete removes apps
permanently. If you decide you want to use an app you
deleted, you will need to download it again.
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
2. Select Delete, and then press the E button. The
Delete screen appears.
3. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to an app, or
folder and then press the E button to select. A
check appears in the upper left corner of the app or
folder you selected.
4. To deselect an app, press the E button. The
check disappears.
5. Repeat Step 3 to select additional apps or folders.
| NOTES |
To select all the downloaded apps, select Select All
at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button. To deselect all the apps, select Deselect All
at the top right of the screen, and then press the E button.
6. After you have made all your selections, select
Delete at the top of the screen, and then press the
E button. The deleting pop-up appears.
7. Select Yes, and then press the E button. All the
apps you selected are deleted.
| NOTES |
You cannot immediately delete a locked app or
folder. If you select a locked app or folder to delete,
when you perform Step 7, the Lock Service pop-up
appears. Enter the Security PIN into the pop-up, and
then press the E button. The lock will be released
and the app or folder will be deleted.
Update Apps
Update Apps automatically searches the Internet for
updated versions of the apps you have downloaded and
updates them if it finds newer versions.
1. On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
press the E button.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 47 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 47 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:36 013-06-04 오전 10:01:36| 48 English
Network Services
2. Select Update Apps, and then press the E button.
3. The unit searches the Internet for newer versions of
your apps. If there are new apps, the Update Apps
pop-up appears.
4. To download the update for a particular app,
highlight the app, and then press the E button.
A check appears to the left of the app.
5. To deselect the app, highlight it, and then press the
E button.
| NOTES |
To select all the updates, select Select All on the
right of the pop-up, and then press the E button. To
deselect all the updates, select Deselect All, and then
press the E button.
6. After you have selected the updates you want to
download, select Update on the right side of the
pop-up, and then press the E button.
7. The unit downloads the updates you have chosen.
A download bar appears in each app icon as the
update for that app is downloaded. The download
is complete when the download bars disappear.
Screen Mirroring
The Screen Mirroring function lets you view the screen
of your smart phone or smart device on the TV you have
connected to the home cinema system.
1. With the Blu-ray's Home screen displayed, press
the BLUE (D) button on the remote. The Screen
Mirroring pop-up appears.
2. Launch AllShare Cast on your device.
3. On your device, find the name of the home cinema
system in the list of available devices and then
select it.
4. The TV displays a connecting message (for
example, Connecting to Android_92gb...) and then
displays the connected message.
5. In a few moments, the screen of your device
appears on the TV screen.
| NOTES |
When you are using the Screen Mirroring function,
video stuttering or audio dropouts may occur,
depending on your environment.
You can connect to a device that supports AllShare
Cast. Note that connecting to such a device may not
be fully supported depending on the manufacturer.
For further information on mobile connection support,
refer to the manufacturer’s web site.
Bluetooth transmissions can interfere with the Screen
Mirroring signal. Before using the Screen Mirroring
function, we strongly recommend that you turn off
the Bluetooth function on your smart phone or smart
device.
Using the Web Browser
You can access the Internet using the Web Browser
application.
Select Web Browser on the Home screen, and then
press the E button.
| NOTES |
When you run the Web Browser with the product
connected by HDMI to a BD Wise compatible TV -
and BD Wise is on - the browser is maximized to fill
the screen and the TV's resolution is set to the optimal
resolution automatically.
The Web Browser is not compatible with Java
applications.
If you attempt to download a file, and the file cannot
be saved, an error message will appear.
E-commerce (purchasing products online) is not
supported.
ActiveX is not supported.
Access may be blocked to some websites or to web
browsers operated by certain businesses.
Link Browsing and Pointer Browsing
The Web Browser provides two types of browsing,
Pointer Browsing and Link Browsing. When you launch
the browser for the first time, Pointer Browsing is active.
If you are using a mouse to navigate in the Web Browser,
we recommend leaving Pointer Browsing active. If you
are using your remote to navigate in the Web Browser,
we recommend that you replace Pointer Browsing with
Link Browsing. Link Browsing moves a highlight from one
link to the next in the Web Browser and is much faster
than Pointer Browsing if you are using your remote.
To activate Link Browsing, follow these steps:
1. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons on your remote to move
the pointer to the Link Browser icon on the top right
of the screen. The Link Browser icon is the third
icon from the right.
The pointer will be in the correct position if the icon
turns blue and the words “Link Browsing” appear
on the screen.
2. Press the E button. Link Browsing is activated
and will remain active whenever you bring up the
Web Browser.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 48 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 48 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:37 013-06-04 오전 10:01:37English 49|
06
Network Services
The Control Panel at a Glance
The Control Panel, which runs across the top of the
screen, has a series of icons which start a number of
useful functions. The icons are described below, starting
with the icon on the far left of the screen.
1
http://www.samsung.com 100%
1
• : Moves to the previous page.
• : Moves to the next web page.
• : Displays the Bookmarks and History
screen. You can bookmark the current page,
select an existing bookmark, and edit and
delete bookmarks. You can also view your
browsing history and select a page to revisit.
• : Moves to the Home screen of the Web
Browser.
• http://www.samsung.com : Lets you enter a
page address manually using the keyboard
pop-up.
• : Reloads the current page so that it is
refreshed on the screen.
• : Adds the current page to your
bookmarks.
• : Lets you search for
information by entering words or characters
using the keyboard pop-up. See Using the
Keyboard Popup on this page.
• 100% : Lets you enlarge or shrink the
screen by various percentages.
• : Turns on the PIP function.
• : Lets you switch between Pointer
Browsing and Link Browsing.
• : Lets you configure the Browser’s
settings. See Using the Setting Menu on
page 50.
• : Closes the Web Browser.
Using the Keyboard Pop-up
When you click the http://www.samsung.com , the
or access a data or text entry field, and
then press the E button, the keyboard pop-up appears.
http://www.samsung.com
Caps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Clear
q w e r t y u i o p ^ *
123#& a s d f g h j k l ~ @ ! Done
z x c v b n m , . ? -
Cancel
ENG www. .com / 4
As you enter characters, recommended text will be shown.
100%
To use the keyboard pop-up with your remote, follow
these steps:
1. Use the ▲▼◄► buttons on your remote to move
the highlight to a letter or number of your choice.
2. Press the E button to enter the letter or number
into the entry field.
3. To access capital letters, move the highlight to the
Caps key on the top left, and then press the E button. Press the E button again with the Caps
key highlighted to access small letters again.
4. To access symbols and additional punctuation
marks, highlight the 123#& button on the left, and
then press the E button.
5. To delete a character you entered, move the
highlight to the button, and then press the E button.
6. To delete all the characters you entered, move the
highlight to the Clear button, and then press the
E button.
7. When finished entering, move the highlight to the
Done button, and then press the E button.
| NOTES |
If you have a wireless keyboard connected to your
product, you can use the wireless keyboard to enter
letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation. Note
that the wireless keyboard will work only when the
keyboard popup appears and can only be used to
enter letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 49 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 49 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:38 013-06-04 오전 10:01:38| 50 English
Network Services
Options on the Keyboard Pop-Up
To access the keyboard pop-up options, highlight the
button on the bottom left of the keyboard, and then press
the E button.
Language
Select the language for the
keyboard. You can select English,
French, Russian, etc.
Recommended
Text
The keyboard will suggest
recommended words as you enter
text. You can turn this function On
or Off.
Predict Next
Letter
The keyboard will predict the next
letter as you enter letters. The
predictions appear in a ring around
the letter you have just entered.
You can select a predicted letter or
move to another letter. You can turn
this function On or Off.
Using the Setting Menu
The Setting menu contains functions that control how
the Browser operates and Browser security functions.
To open the Setting menu, highlight the icon in the
Control Panel, and then press the E button. To select
an option in the setting menu, highlight the option, and
then press the E button.
http://www.samsung.com
Enable Grabbing
Approved Sites
Private browsing on
Web Browser Settings
Help
Close
100%
Enable/
Disable
Grabbing
Turns the Grabber function On and
Off. When the Grabber function is
on, you can move a web page up
and down without dragging the
scroll bar.
The Grabber function is only
available in Pointer Browsing.
Approved
Sites
Lets you restrict your children’s
access to inappropriate web pages
by allowing access only to the web
sites you have registered.
Every time you access Approved
Sites, the PIN screen appears. The
first time you access Approved
Sites, enter the default PIN, 0000
using the number buttons on your
remote.
You can change the PIN using the
Reset password for the Approved
Sites function. See below.
Approved Sites feature : Turns
the Approved Sites function on
or off.
Reset password for Approved
Sites : Change the Approved
Sites password.
Add current site : Lets you add
the currently displayed web site
to the Approved Sites list.
Manage Approved Sites : Lets
you key in URLs to add to the
Approved Sites List and delete
sites from the Approved Sites
list. If you turn Approved Sites
on and have not added any sites
to the Approved Sites list, you
will not be able to access any
Internet sites.
Private
browsing
on/off
Enable or disable the Privacy mode.
When the Privacy mode is enabled,
the browser does not retain the
URLs of sites you visit. If you want
to enable Privacy mode, select OK.
If the Privacy mode is running, the
“Stop” icon appears in front of
the URL at the top of the screen.
To disable Privacy mode, select
it again when Privacy mode is
enabled.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 50 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 50 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:40 013-06-04 오전 10:01:40English 51|
06
Network Services
Web Browser
Settings
Set as homepage : You can set
the Browser's home page.
Pop-up Block : Turns the Popup
Block on and off.
Ad Block : You can determine
whether to block advertisements
and select the URLs for which
advertisements are blocked.
General : You can delete
personal in information such as
website history and browsing
data (cookies, etc.), and reset
all web browser settings to their
factory defaults.
Encoding : You can set the
Encoding setting for web pages
to Automatic or select the
encoding format manually from a
list.
Pointer : You can set the speed
of the cursor when the cursor
is set to Pointer and turn Smart
Cursor On and Off.
Browser Information : Displays
the version number and copyright
information for the Web Browser.
Help Provides basic information about
the operation of the Web Browser.
| NOTES |
Depending on the web site, some of the Web Browser
Setting functions may not be activated. Functions that
are not activated are greyed out and cannot be used.
Linking your Internet Service
Accounts to the Product
The Link Service Accounts function lets you link your
product to your accounts with Internet services that the
product can log you in to the service automatically when
you start the app for that service.
To create a service account link, follow these steps:
1. On the Home screen, press the RED (A) button on
your remote to log in to your Samsung Account.
2. After you have logged in, press the RED (A) button
on your remote again.
3. Select Link Service Accounts in the My Account
pop-up, and then press the E button.
4. On the Link Service Accounts screen, select the
service you want to link to the product, and then
press the E button.
5. Select Register, and then press the E button.
6. In the ID and Password screen, enter the ID you use
to log in to the service you selected using the popup keyboard. When finished, select Done, and then
press the E button.
7. Repeat the same process for the password. When
finished select Done, and then press the E button.
8. Select OK, and then press the E button.
BD-LIVE™
Once the product is connected to your network, you can
enjoy various movie-related service contents available on
BD-LIVE compliant discs.
1. Attach a USB flash drive to the USB jack on the
front of the product, and then check its remaining
memory. The memory device must have at least
1GB of free space to accommodate the BD-LIVE
services.
2. Select Settings on the Home screen, and then
press the E button.
3. Select Network, and then press the E button.
4. Select BD-Live Settings, and then press the E button.
5. Select BD Data Management, and then press the
E button.
6. Select Select Device, and then press the E button.
7. Select USB device, and then press the E button.
8. Insert a Blu-ray Disc that supports BD-LIVE.
9. Select an item from the list of BD-LIVE service
contents provided by the disc manufacturer.
| NOTES |
The way you use BD-LIVE and the provided contents
may differ, depending on the disc manufacturer.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 51 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 51 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:42 013-06-04 오전 10:01:42| 52 English
Appendix
Additional Information
Notes
Connections
HDMI OUT
• Certain HDMI output resolutions may not work,
depending on your TV.
• You must have a HDMI connection to enjoy videos
with 3D technology.
• A long HDMI cable may cause screen noise. If this
occurs, set HDMI Deep Colour to Off in the menu.
Settings
3D Settings
• For some 3D discs, to stop a movie during 3D
playback, press the 5 button once. The movie
stops and the 3D mode option is de-activated.
To change a 3D option selection when you are
playing a 3D movie, press the 5 button once. The
Blu-ray menu appears. Press the 5 button again,
then select 3D Settings in the Blu-ray menu.
• Depending on the content and the position of the
picture on your TV screen, you may see vertical
black bars on the left side, right side, or both sides.
TV Aspect Ratio
• Depending on the disc type, some aspect ratios
may not be available.
• If you select an aspect ratio and option which is
different than the aspect ratio of your TV screen,
then the picture might appear to be distorted.
• If you select 16:9 Original, your TV may display 4:3
Pillarbox (black bars on sides of picture).
BD Wise (Samsung Products only)
• When BD Wise is on, the Resolution setting
automatically defaults to BD Wise and BD Wise
appears in the Resolution menu.
• If the product is connected to a device that does
not support BD Wise, you can not use the BD Wise
function.
• For proper operation of BD Wise, set the BD Wise
option in both the product and the TV to On.
Digital Output
• Be sure to select the correct Digital Output or you
will hear no sound or just loud noise.
• If the HDMI device (AV receiver, TV) is not
compatible with compressed formats (Dolby Digital,
DTS), the audio signal outputs as PCM.
• Regular DVDs do not have BONUSVIEW audio and
Navigation Sound Effects.
• Some Blu-ray Discs do not have BONUSVIEW
audio and Navigation Sound Effects.
• This Digital Output setup does not affect the
analogue (L/R) audio or HDMI audio output to your
TV.
It affects the optical and HDMI audio output when
your product is connected to an AV receiver.
• If you play MPEG audio soundtracks, the audio
signal outputs as PCM regardless of your Digital
Output selections (PCM or Bitstream).
• Digital Output can be activated when Speaker
Selection is set to TV Speaker.
BD-Live Internet Connection
• The Internet connection may be restricted while you
are using BD-LIVE contents.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
• Depending on your TV, certain HDMI output
resolutions may not work. Please refer to the user
manual of your TV.
• This function is not available if the HDMI cable does
not support CEC.
• If your Samsung TV has an Anynet+ logo, then it
supports the Anynet+ function.
BD Data Management
• In the external memory mode, disc playback may
be stopped if you disconnect the USB device in the
middle of playback.
• Only those USB devices formatted in the FAT file
system (DOS 8.3 volume label) are supported.
We recommend you use USB devices that support
USB 2.0 protocol with 4 MB/sec or faster read/write
speed.
• The Resume Play function may not work after you
format the storage device.
• The total memory available to BD Data Management
may differ, depending on the conditions.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 52 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 52 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:42 013-06-04 오전 10:01:42English 53|
07
Appendix
DivX® Video On Demand
• For more information about DivX(R) VOD, visit
“http://vod.divx.com”.
Front Display
• You cannot change the brightness of the button
and the VOL +, - button.
Speaker Settings
• When Speaker Selection is set to TV Speaker,
audio is produced through the TV speakers.
• Running the Auto Sound Calibration function takes
about 3 minutes.
• Make sure there is no disc in the product when you
run the Auto Sound Calibration function.
• If the ASC microphone is disconnected during the
Auto Sound Calibration setup, the setup will be
cancelled.
• When the Auto Sound Calibration function is
activated, the DSP, Dolby Pro Logic ll and SFE
Mode will not work.
• If the product is connected to external devices or
other components (such as an AUX, D. IN), the Auto
Sound Calibration Setup may not work properly.
HDMI audio
• When HDMI audio is output to the TV speakers, it is
automatically down-mixed to 2 channels.
Audio Return Channel
• When Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is Off, the Audio Return
Channel function is not available.
• Using an HDMI cable not certified for ARC (Audio
Return Channel) may cause a compatibility problem.
• The ARC function is only available if an ARCcompliant TV is connected.
Playback
Playing Video files
• Video files with high bit rates of 20Mbps or more
strain the product’s capabilities and may stop
playing during playback.
Selecting the Audio Language
• The ◄► indicator will not appear on the screen
if the BONUSVIEW section does not contain any
BONUSVIEW audio settings.
• The languages available through the Audio
Language function depend on the languages that
are encoded on the disc. This function or certain
languages may not be available.
• Some Blu-ray Discs may allow you to select either
the PCM or Dolby Digital audio soundtrack in
English.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
• Depending on the Blu-ray Disc / DVD, you may be
able to change the subtitle language in the Disc
Menu. Press the DISC MENU button.
• This function depends on the selection of subtitles
that are encoded on the disc and may not be
available on all Blu-ray Discs/DVDs.
• Information about the main feature BONUSVIEW
mode will also appear if the Blu-ray Disc has a
BONUSVIEW section.
• This function changes both the primary and
secondary subtitles at the same time.
• The total number of primary and secondary subtitles
are displayed respectively.
Playing JPEG files
• You can’t enlarge the subtitle and PG graphic in the
full screen mode.
Media Play
Dolby Pro Logic II Mode
• Before selecting Dolby Pro Logic II mode, connect
your external device to the AUDIO INPUT jacks (L
and R) on the product. If you connect to only one
of the inputs (L or R), you cannot listen to surround
sound.
Using the TOOLS button while playing pictures
• If the system is connected to a BD Wise compliant
TV that has set BD Wise to On, the Picture Settings
menu will not appear.
• The Background Music function will not work unless
the music file and the photo file are located on the
same storage media. Also, sound quality can be
impacted by the bit rate of the MP3 music file, the
size of the photos, and the encoding method.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 53 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 53 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:43 013-06-04 오전 10:01:43| 54 English
Appendix
Digital Output Selection
Setup PCM Bitstream
(Unprocessed)
Bitstream
(Re-encoded DTS)
Bitstream
(Re-encoded
Dolby D)
Connection HDMI supported AV receiver
Audio
Stream on
Blu-ray Disc
PCM Up to PCM 7.1ch PCM DTS re-encoded Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Dolby Digital Up to PCM 5.1ch Dolby Digital DTS re-encoded Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Dolby Digital
Plus Up to PCM 7.1ch Dolby Digital Plus DTS re-encoded Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Dolby
TrueHD Up to PCM 7.1ch Dolby TrueHD DTS re-encoded Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
DTS Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS DTS re-encoded Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
DTSHD High
Resolution
Audio
Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio DTS re-encoded Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS-HD Master
Audio DTS re-encoded Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Audio
Stream on
DVD
PCM PCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM 2ch PCM 2ch
Dolby Digital Up to PCM 5.1ch Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital
DTS Up to PCM 7.1ch DTS DTS DTS
Definition for
Blu-ray Disc Any
Decodes the main
feature audio and
BONUSVIEW audio
stream together
into PCM audio and
adds Navigation
Sound Effects.
Outputs only the
main feature audio
stream so that your
AV receiver can
decode the audio
bitstream.
You will not hear
BONUSVIEW audio
or Navigation Sound
Effects.
Decodes the main
feature audio and
BONUSVIEW audio
stream together
into PCM audio and
adds Navigation
Sound Effects, then
re-encodes the
PCM audio into DTS
bitstream.
Decodes the main
feature audio and
BONUSVIEW audio
stream together
into PCM audio and
adds Navigation
Sound Effects, then
re-encodes the PCM
audio into Dolby
Digital bitstream or
PCM.
If the Source Stream is 2ch or mono, “Re-encoded Dolby D” Setting are not applied. Output will be PCM 2ch.
Blu-ray Discs may include three audio streams :
- Main Feature Audio : The audio soundtrack of the main feature.
- BONUSVIEW audio : An additional soundtrack such as the director or actor’s commentary.
- Navigation Sound Effects : When you choose some menu navigation, Navigation Sound Effects may sound.
Navigation Sound Effects are different on each Blu-ray Disc.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 54 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 54 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:44 013-06-04 오전 10:01:44English 55|
07
Appendix
Resolution according to the contents type
Contents Type
Setup Blu-ray Disc E-contents/
Digital contents
BD Wise Resolution of Blu-ray Disc 1080p@60F
Auto
Movie Frame : Auto
UHD Output : Auto 2160p@24F 2160p@24F
UHD Output : Off 1080p@24F 1080p@24F
Movie Frame : Off Max. Resolution of TV input Max. Resolution of TV input
Movie Frame : Auto (24Fs)
1080p & 1080i only 1080p@24F 1080p@24F
1080p 1080p@60F 1080p@60F
1080i 1080i 1080i
720p 720p 720p
576p/480p 576p/480p 576p/480p
Contents Type
Setup DVD
BD Wise 480i
Auto
Movie Frame : Auto
DVD 24fps Conversion : Auto
UHD Output : Auto 2160p@24F
UHD Output : Off 1080p@24F
DVD 24fps Conversion : Off Max. Resolution of TV input
Movie Frame : Off Max. Resolution of TV input
Movie Frame : Auto (DVD 24fps Conversion : Auto)
1080p & 1080i only 1080p@24F
1080p 1080p@60F
1080i 1080i
720p 720p
576p/480p 576p/480p
| NOTES |
If the TV you connected to the product does not support Movie Frame or the resolution you selected, the message
"If no pictures are shown after selecting Yes, please wait for 15 seconds to return to the previous resolution. Do you
want to change the resolution?" appears. If you select Yes, the TV's screen will go to blank for 15 seconds, and then
the resolution will revert to the previous resolution automatically.
If the screen stays blank after you have changed the resolution, remove all discs, and then press and hold the 5
button on the top of the product for more than 5 seconds. All settings are restored to the factory default. Run the
Initial Settings procedure again. Then, go to Settings > Display > Resolution in the Menu, and select the correct
resolution for your TV.
When you run the Initial Settings procedure, re-select the language and aspect ratio (screen size and format) only.
Resetting does not affect your network settings, so you should be able to skip Network Setup and Software Update.
When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data will be deleted.
The Blu-ray Disc must have the 24 frame feature for the product to use the Movie Frame (24Fs) mode.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 55 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 55 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:44 013-06-04 오전 10:01:44| 56 English
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when this product does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the product, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest
authorized dealer or Samsung Electronics Service Centre.
Symptom Check/Remedy
I cannot eject the disc. • Is the power cord plugged securely into the outlet?
• Turn off the power and then turn it back on.
Playback does not start. • Check the region number of the Blu-ray/DVD disc.
Blu-ray/DVD disc purchased from abroad may not be playable.
• CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs cannot be played on this product.
• Make sure that the rating level is correct.
Playback does not start
immediately when the
Play/Pause button is
pressed.
• Are you using a deformed disc or a disc with scratches on the surface?
• Wipe the disc clean.
Sound is not produced. • The home cinema does not play sound during fast playback, slow playback,and
step motion playback.
• Are the speakers connected properly? Is the speaker setup correctly customized?
• Is the disc severely damaged?
Sound can be heard only
from a few speakers and
not all 8.
• On certain Blu-ray/DVD discs, sound is output from the front speakers only.
• Check if the speakers are connected properly.
• Adjust the volume.
• When listening to a CD, radio or TV, sound is output to the front speakers only.
Dolby Digital 7.1 CH
Surround Sound is not
produced.
• Is there "Dolby Digital 7.1 CH" mark on the disc? Dolby Digital 7.1 CH Surround
Sound is produced only if the disc is recorded with 7.1 channel sound.
• Is the audio language correctly set to Dolby Digital 7.1-CH in the information
display?
The remote control does
not work.
• Are you operating the remote within its operational range and within the proper
angle relative to the sensor?
• Are the batteries drained?
• Have you selected the mode (TV/BD) functions of the remote control (TV or BD)
correctly?
• The disc is rotating but
no picture is produced.
• Picture quality is poor
and the picture is
shaking.
• Is the TV power on?
• Are the video cables connected properly?
• Is the disc dirty or damaged?
• A poorly manufactured disc may not be playable.
Audio language and
subtitles do not work.
• Audio language and subtitles will not work if the disc does not contain them.
The menu screen does
not appear even when the
menu function is selected.
• Are you using a disc that does not contain menus?
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 56 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 56 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:45 013-06-04 오전 10:01:45English 57|
07
Appendix
Symptom Check/Remedy
The aspect ratio cannot be
changed.
• You can play 16:9 Blu-ray/DVD discs in 16:9 Full mode, 4:3 Letter Box mode, or
4:3 Pan-Scan mode, but 4:3 Blu-ray/DVD discs are played in 4:3 ratio only. Refer
to the Blu-ray Disc jacket and then select the appropriate function.
• The product is not
working.
(Example: The power
goes out or a strange
noise is heard.)
• The Product is not working
normally.
• Press and hold the remote control's 5 button for 5 seconds in STANDBY mode.
- Using the RESET function will erase all stored settings.
Do not use this unless necessary.
You have forgotten the
rating level password.
• With no disc in the product, press and hold the product's 5 button for longer
than 5 seconds. INIT appears on the display and all settings will return to the
default values.
Then, press the POWER button.
- Using the RESET function will erase all stored settings.
Do not use this unless necessary.
Can't receive radio
broadcasts.
• Is the antenna connected properly?
• If the antenna's input signal is weak, install an external FM antenna in an area with
good reception.
While listening to TV audio
through the Product, no
sound is heard.
• If the OPEN/CLOSE ^ button is pressed while listening to TV audio using the
D. IN or AUX functions, the Blu-ray/DVD disc functions are turned on and the TV
audio is muted.
"Not Available" appears on
screen.
• The features or action cannot be completed at this time because:
1. The Blu-ray/DVD disc's software restricts it.
2. The Blu-ray/DVD disc's software doesn’t support the feature (e.g., angles)
3. The feature is not available at the moment.
4. You’ve requested a title or chapter number or search time that is out of range.
If the HDMI output is set to
a resolution your TV cannot
support (for example,
1080p), you may not see a
picture on your TV.
• Press and hold the 5 button on front panel for more than 5 seconds with no disc
in the product. All settings will revert to the factory settings.
No HDMI output. • Check the connection between the TV and the HDMI jack of the product.
• Check if your TV supports 576p/480p/720p/1080i/1080p HDMI input resolution.
Abnormal HDMI output
screen.
• If random noise appears on the screen, it means that TV does not support HDCP
(High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 57 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 57 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:46 013-06-04 오전 10:01:46| 58 English
Appendix
Symptom Check/Remedy
AllShare function
I can see folders shared
through AllShare, but I
cannot see the files.
• AllShare only shows Video, Photo, and Music files. Other types of files are not
displayed.
Video is played
intermittently.
• Check if the network is stable.
• Check if the network cable is properly connected and if the network is not
overloaded.
• The wireless connection between the DLNA compatible device and the product is
unstable.
Check the connection.
The AllShare connection
between the product and
PC is unstable.
• IP address under the same subnetwork should be unique, otherwise IP collision can
results in such a phenomenon.
• Check if you have a firewall enabled.
If so, disable the firewall function.
BD-LIVE
I cannot connect to the
BD-LIVE server.
• Test whether the network connection is active by using the Network Status
function.
• Check whether a USB memory device is connected to the product.
• The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate the
BD-LIVE service.
You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 52)
• See if the BD-LIVE Internet Connection option is set to Allow(All).
• If all above fails, contact the contents provider or update to the latest firmware.
When using the BD-LIVE
service, an error occurs.
• The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate the
BD-LIVE service.
You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 52)
| NOTES |
When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data will be deleted.
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 58 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 58 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:46 013-06-04 오전 10:01:46English 59|
07
Appendix
General
Weight 3.30 kg
Dimensions 430.00 (W) x 55.00 (H) x 314.50 (D) mm
Operating Temperature Range +5°C to +35°C
Operating Humidity Range 10 % to 75 %
FM Tuner
Signal/noise ratio 55 dB
Usable sensitivity 12 dB
Total harmonic distortion 0.5 %
HDMI
Video 2D : 2160p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p
3D : 1080p, 720p
Audio PCM multichannel audio, Bitstream audio, PCM audio
Amplifier
Front speaker output 165W x 2(3)
Front Top speaker output 165W x 2(3)
Centre speaker output 170W(3)
Surround speaker output 165W x 2(3)
Subwoofer speaker output 170W(3)
Frequency response
Analogue input : 20Hz~20kHz (±3dB)
Digital input : 20Hz~40kHz (±4dB)
S/N Ratio 70dB
Channel separation 60dB
Input sensitivity (AUX)500mV
Specifications
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 59 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 59 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:47 013-06-04 오전 10:01:47| 60 English
Appendix
Speaker (7.1ch speaker system)
Speaker
system
Impedance Frequency
range
Output sound
pressure level
Rated
input
Maximum
input
Dimensions
(W x H x D) (Unit : mm)
Weights
(Unit : kg)
Front/
Front Top
3
140Hz~
20kHz 87dB/W/M
165W 330W
90.0 x 1302.0 x 70.0
(Stand base: 250 x 250) 7.65
Surround 90.0 x 1252.0 x 70.0
(Stand base: 250 x 250) 6.82
Centre
170W 340W
360.0 x 70.0 x 65.9 0.98
Subwoofer 40Hz ~
160Hz 88dB/W/M 205.6 x 390.6 x 350.6 6.33
• Network speeds equal to or below 10Mbps are not supported.
• Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd reserves the right to change the specifications without notice.
• Weight and dimensions are approximate.
• Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
• For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
❑ SWA-6000
Weight 1.1 kg
Dimensions (W x H x D) 76.2 x 228.6 x 152.4 mm
Operating Temperature Range +5°C to +35°C
Operating Humidity Range 10 % to 75 %
Output 165W x 2 CH
Frequency range 20Hz~20KHz
S/N Ratio 65dB
HHT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 60 T-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0604.indd 60 22013-06-04 오전 10:01:47 013-06-04 오전 10:01:47ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ
ً ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ Samsung.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ،
ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ
www.samsung.com/register
7.1CH Blu-ray™
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ
ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
HT-F9750W
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 1 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 1 22013-06-04 오전 10:08:58 013-06-04 오전 10:08:58| 2 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ
ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ
• ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ، ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺮﺫﺍﺫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ
ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ
ً ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ.
ﻳﻈﻞ
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ً ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ
ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ.
• ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ، ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ
ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ، ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء (ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ).
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ. ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ.
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ
ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺟﻬﺪﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ"
ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔﺍﻟﺒﺪﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ: ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ 1 ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ
LASER PRODUKT KLASSE 1
LASER LAITE LUOKAN 1
LASER APPARAT KLASS 1
LÁSER CLASE 1 PRODUCTO
ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ 1
ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ 1.
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ
ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ.
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ
• ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 2 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 2 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:07 013-06-04 오전 10:09:07|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ3
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ 01
ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ
• ﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
- ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ
ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ.
- ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻪﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
- ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻊ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ.
- ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
- ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ،
ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء
ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺤﻪﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ.
- ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ، ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ.
- ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪﻓﻲ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ
ُﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺫﺍﺫ. ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ
• ﻻ ﺗ
ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ
ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ
ﻭﻳﺴﺮ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ٍ ﺑﺄﻳﺪﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ.
• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ.
• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ،ﻣﻤﺎ
ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ.
• ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ
- ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
- ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﺜﻒ
ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ
ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ
ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﺛﻢ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺜﺖ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ
ﺩﺧﺎﻥ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ
ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ
ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ Dolby
.Laboratories
D ﻭﺭﻣﺰ Pro Logicﻭ Dolby
ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ
.Dolby Laboratories
ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ:
6,487,535ﻭ 5,978,762ﻭ 5,974,380ﻭ 5,956,674
7,272,567ﻭ 7,003,467ﻭ 7,212,872ﻭ 6,226,616ﻭ
7,333,929ﻭ 7,930,184ﻭ 7,392,195ﻭ 7,668,723ﻭ
ﺃﻭ DTSﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ DTS-HDﻭ DTS ﺇﻥ .7,548,853ﻭ
DTS-HD ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭDTS
Neo:Fusion ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ DTS, Inc. ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ
©2012 ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ DTS, Inc. ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ.
ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX® :DIVX ﻫﻮ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ
DivX, LLC، ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ
.Rovi Corporation ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ®DivX Certified ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX. ﺗﻔﻀﻞ
ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓﻣﻮﻗﻊ divx.com ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX.
ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DIVX ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ: ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ DivX
®Certified ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ (VOD)
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺴﻢ DivX VOD
ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ vod.divx.com ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
ُ ®DivX Certified ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®DivX ﺑﺪﻗﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ
HD 1080p، ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ.
ﺇﻥ ®DivX ﻭ®DivX Certified ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Rovi Corporation ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ
ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ.
ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ
7,519,274 ;7,515,710 ;7,460,668 ;7,295,673 :ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 3 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 3 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:08 013-06-04 오전 10:09:08| 4 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ
HDMI High-ﻭ HDMI
Definition Multimedia
Interface ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ HDMI ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ HDMI Licensing LLC ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ
ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻭﺗﻌﺪ Oracle ﻭJava ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
Oracle ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔﻟﻬﺎ. ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء
ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ.
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ
ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Rovi
Corporation. ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ.
ﺇﻥ ™Blu-ray Disc ﻭ™Blu-ray ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
.Blu-ray Disc Association ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ Cinavia ﻟﻠﺤﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ً ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ،
ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ.
ﻳﺘﻢﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ Cinavia ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﻋﻤﻼء Cinavia ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ .http://www.cinavia
com. ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ Cinavia ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ،ﺃﺭﺳﻞ
ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔﻣﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ: Cinavia
Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San
".Diego, CA, 92138, USA
ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Verance
Corporation ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ
7,369,677 ﻭﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ
ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻷﺳﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻭﺟﻪ
ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ. ﺗﻌﺪ Cinavia ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Verance
Corporation. ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ 2004-2010 ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
Verance Corporation. ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ
Verance. ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ.
- ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ، ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ "ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
ﺍﻗﺮﺃﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻮﻋﺒﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ ً ﺗﻌﺒﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻉ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ، ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺎﻣﻦ
ً
ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻄ
ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ، ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ.
ً
ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻄ
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻤﺌﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ، ﻓﺎﻣﻨﻊ ﻃﻔﻠﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺟﻌﻠﻪ
ﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ.
ً
ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻄ
• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ (ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔﺇﻟﺦ.)
• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء
ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ
ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻭ/
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ، ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ.
• ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ (ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ
ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ) ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ HDMI OUT
ِ ﺍﺭﺗﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ.
ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
• ﻳُﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ
.HDMI OUT ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ
ً • ﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ
ً ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻓﻘ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ، ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ BD Wise ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ.
ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ
• ﺍﺑﻖ
ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﻣﻘﺎﺱ 46 ﺑﻮﺻﺔ، ﻓﺎﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ 3.5 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ.
• ﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ "Blu-ray 3D" ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "Blu-ray 3D" ﻳﻌﺪ •
.Blu-ray Disc Association ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 4 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 4 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:09 013-06-04 오전 10:09:09|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ5
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ 01
ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ
.Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ 2013 © ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ
ً ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺃﻭ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ؛ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ
ً ﺟﺰءﺍﻣﻨﻪﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics
.Co.,Ltd
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ
2 ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ
3 ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ
3 ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ
3 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ
4 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ
5 ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
6 ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ
7 ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ
10 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
11 ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
11 ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ
12 ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ
14 ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ
17 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ/ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ
18 ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
19 ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ
19 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
19 ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
20 ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
24 ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ
25 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ
28 ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
30 ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
30 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
30 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB
31 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
31 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ AllShare
32 ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
35 ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
39 ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
40 ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ
41 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
43 ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung
43 ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
44 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ
44 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
48 ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
48 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ
51 ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
BD-LIVE™ 51
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ
52 ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
56 ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ
59 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ
ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﺃ. ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ً ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ (ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ)
ﺏ. ﺇﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ (ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ).
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ
ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 5 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 5 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:10 013-06-04 오전 10:09:10| 6 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ
ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
Blu-ray Disc ﻗﺮﺹ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ Blu-ray ﻗﺮﺹ .BD-RE ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ BD-RE/-R ﺃﻭ BD-ROM ﻗﺮﺹ
،DVD-RW ،DVD-VIDEO
،DVD+RW ،DVD-R
DVD+R
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+Rﻭ DVD-VIDEO ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻫﺎ، ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ DivX ﻭ
.MP4ﻭ MKV
ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
،CD-RW/-R
،DVD-RW/-R
BD-RE/-R
BD-RE/-R ﺃﻭ DVD-RW/-R ﺃﻭ CD-RW/-R ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ MP3 ﺃﻭ WMA.
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ
،CD-RW/-R
،DVD-RW/-R
BD-RE/-R
ﺃﻭ BD-RE/-R ﺃﻭ DVD-RW/-R ﺃﻭ CD-RW/-R ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ JPEG.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD-RW/-R ﻭDVD-R ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD-RW/-R ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DVD، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ DVD-R ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ 10 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ BD-R ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ 30 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ، ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﺗﻮﺟﺪﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺒﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ BD-J، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺒﻂء.
ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ
HD DVD •
• ﻗﺮﺹ
ﺇﻟﺦ ،DVD-ROM/PD/MV
DVD-RAM •
• ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ (ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ)
(VR ﻭﺿﻊ) DVD-RW •
CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/ •
CD-G/CD-I/LD
(ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD-G ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ.)
3.9 ﺑﺴﻌﺔ DVD-R ﻗﺮﺹ •
ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻭDVD ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ
ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ًﻋﻴﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ Blu-ray Disc ﺃﻭ DVD ﺃﻭ CD ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ
ﻭﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻭDVD ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء SAMSUNG، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray Disc ﺃﻭ DVD ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 6 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 6 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:11 013-06-04 오전 10:09:11|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ7
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02
ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ
ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ. ﻭﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ، ﻟﻦ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ
Blu-ray ﻗﺮﺹ
Disc
A
ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ
ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ
ﻭﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ
ﺁﺳﻴﺎ.
B
ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ
ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ
ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ.
C
ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ
ﺁﺳﻴﺎ.
DVD-VIDEO
1
ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ
ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ
2
ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﻣﺼﺮ
ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ
3
ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ
ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ
4
ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺟﺰﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺒﻲ
5
ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ
ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ
6 ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray Disc/DVD ﻻ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ Blu-ray ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray Disc ﻗﺮﺹ
Dolby BD-LIVE
DTS
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺚ PAL ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ
ﻭﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ
DivX
Java
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 7 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 7 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:12 013-06-04 오전 10:09:12| 8 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
Resolution ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
(ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ)
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ
(ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ)
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ
(ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ)
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
avi.*
mkv.*
asf.*
wmv.*
mp4.*
3gp.*
vro.*
mpg.*
mpeg.*
ts.*
tp.*
trp.*
mov.*
flv.*
vob.*
svi.*
m2ts.*
mts.*
divx.*
AVI
MKV
ASF
MP4
3GP
MOV
FLV
VRO
VOB
PS
TS
SVAF
Divx 3.11 / 4
6 / 5 /
1080×1920
،WMV v7،v8)
:MSMPEG4 v3
(720×1280
30 30~6
Dolby Digital
LPCM
ADPCM
(MS ،IMA)
AAC
HE-AAC
WMA
Dolby Digital
Plus
(MP3) MPEG
(Core) DTS
MPEG4 SP/
ASP
/H.264 BP
MP/HP
Motion JPEG
Microsoft
MPEG-4 v3
Window Media
،v8 ،Video v7
v9
MPEG2
MPEG1
4 -
480×640 VP6
60 24/25/30 - MVC
Vorbis 20 30~6 1080×1920 VP8 WebM webm.*
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ
- ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ
ﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ.
ً
ﺃﻋﻼﻩ، ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﻟﻔ
- ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔﺃﻭ
ﺎ.
ً
ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪﺗﺎﻟﻔ
- ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
- ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ (ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ) ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
- ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
- ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB/ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
(FMO/ASO/RS ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء) 4.1 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ H.264 ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ -
VC1 AP L4 ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ -
VP6ﻭ MVCﻭ MSMPEG4 v3ﻭ v8ﻭ WMV v7 ﻋﺪﺍ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ -
ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ 720 × 1280: ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ 60 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ
ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ 720 × 1280: ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ 30 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ
- ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ GMC 2 ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ
- ﺗﺪﻋﻢ SVAF ﺃﻋﻠﻰ/ﺃﺳﻔﻞ، ًﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ
- ﺗﺪﻋﻢﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ BD MVC ﻓﻘﻂ
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
(5.1 ﺣﺘﻰ) WMA 10 Pro ﺗﺪﻋﻢ -
- ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ WMA lossless.
.MS ،ADPCM IMA ﺩﻋﻢ -
(μ-Low ،A-Law) ADPCM ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ -
AMR NB/WBﻭ QCELP ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ -
- ﺗﺪﻋﻢ vorbis (ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ)،
(7.1 ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ) Dolby Digital Plus ﺗﺪﻋﻢ -
ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ
GMC 1-Warping Point ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : MPEG4 -
.4.1 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ BP/MP/HP ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : H.264 -
.VC1 SP/MP/AP L3ﻭ V9 ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : WMV -
- MPEG1 : ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ D.
.Hight Profile High Level ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ : MPEG2 -
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 8 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 8 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:15 013-06-04 오전 10:09:15|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ9
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02
❑ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ DivX ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ
txt.*ﻭ sub.*ﻭ srt.*ﻭ smi.*ﻭ ttxt.*
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ MKV ﻭMP4، ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻬﺎ.
ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ
MPEG mp3.*
MPEG1
Audio
(ﺻﻮﺕ)
ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ
-
m4a.*
mpa.*
aac.*
- AAC MPEG4
*.FLAC FLAC flac ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ
*.Vorbis OGG ogg ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ
WMA WMA wma.*
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ WMA 10
(5.1 ﺣﺘﻰ) Pro
ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ
ﺻﻮﺕ WMA
lossless
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ
M2
ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ LBR
- wav wav wav.*
mid.*
midi.* 1 ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ 0 ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ midi midi
ape ape ape.* ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻻ
NVTﻭ X13
ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ
jpg.*
jpeg.* 8640×15360 JPEG
4096×4096 PNG png.*
4096×4096 BMP bmp.*
8640×15360 MPO mpo.*
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ USB
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ USB ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ MP3 ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ USB.
• ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ 128
ﺎ.
ً
ﺣﺮﻓ
• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB/ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ FAT 16 ﻭFAT 32 ﻭNTFS.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ PTP.
• ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ".
• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ، ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ MP3 ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑـ DRM (ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ) ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ.
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ 30 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﻓﻘﻂ
(ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ).
• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻓﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ (MSC)
ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ USB.
(HUB ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.)
• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ USB ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ
ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ
ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 9 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 9 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:16 013-06-04 오전 10:09:16| 10 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
• ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ USB ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ. ﺇﺫﺍ
ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ USB.
• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ SAMSUNG ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
AVCHD
(ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ)
• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
• ﺇﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ.
• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ.
• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ AVCHD ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "x.v.Colour". ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ AVCHD ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "x.v.Colour".
.Sony Corporation ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ "x.v.Colour" ﺇﻥ •
Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. ﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ AVCHD ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "AVCHD" ﻳﻌﺪ •
.Sony Corporationﻭ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD، ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ.
ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ AVCHD.
ﺗﻘﺪﻡ "x.v.Colour" ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ.
ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ DivX ﻭMKV ﻭMP4،
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
MUTE
TV
SOUND
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP
TV
HOME
VOL TUNING
/ CH
FUNCTION
TV/SOURCE
3D
SOUND
SOUND
EFFECT SEARCH SMART
HUB
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
BD
RECEIVER
ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ/ ﻗﻄﻌﺔﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM
ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ (ﺑﺤﺠﻢ AAA)
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 10 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 10 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:17 013-06-04 오전 10:09:17|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ11
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
USB
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺫﻭ
ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻏﺔ
ﻓﺘﺢ/ﻏﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
HIGH-END VACUUM TUBE SOUND
5V
0.5A
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻏﺔﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء
ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ.
ً ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ USB، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Blu-ray Disc، ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ6 ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
"ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" ﺃﻭ "ﺑﺪء" ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ BD/DVD ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﺭ FUNCTION. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ً ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ BD/DVD.
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭﻻ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ
ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ
ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ
ﻣﺨﺮﺝ HDMI
* ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM
ﻣﺪﺧﻞ HDMI
ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ (ﺑﺼﺮﻱ)
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ASC
* ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ FM ANT.
2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﺪﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪﺑﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ 10 ﺳﻢﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ.
ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ AM.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 11 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 11 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:19 013-06-04 오전 10:09:19| 12 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
MUTE
TV
SOUND
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP
TV
HOME
VOL TUNING
/ CH
FUNCTION
TV/SOURCE
3D
SOUND
SOUND
EFFECT SEARCH SMART
HUB
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
BD
RECEIVER
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ.
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﺎ.
ً
ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ً ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
Disc ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Smart Hub.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ/ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ.
ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
.(ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ BD/DVDﻭ AUXﻭ HDMI1)
ﺃﻭ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ" ﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ.
ﺎ.
ً
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ
ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ FM ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 42)
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ/
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ، ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ
ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ.
ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ: ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ: ﺃﺧﻀﺮ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ
ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
(ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.)
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
.Blu-ray/DVD ﻗﺮﺹ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ.
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 12 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 12 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:21 013-06-04 오전 10:09:21|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ13
ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 02
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ: AAA
2 1
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ "+" ﻭ "–" ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ
ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ.
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻡﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 7 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ.
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
3. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ
ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ.
• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ : ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 00. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﻔﻠﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﺠﺮﺏ 15، ﺛﻢ 16،
ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ.
4. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻭ"ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ"
ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ (0 ﺇﻟﻰ 9).
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ، ﺣﺴﺐ
ً ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ
ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
.Samsung
ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ
Admiral
(M.Wards) 58 ,57 ,56
15 ,01 A Mark
Anam
,06 ,05 ,04 ,03 ,02 ,01
,12 ,11 ,10 ,09 ,08 ,07
14 ,13
48 ,40 ,18 ,01 AOC
Bell & Howell
(M.Wards) 81 ,58 ,57
60 ,59 Brocsonic
18 Candle
03 Cetronic
25 ,18 ,03 Citizen
97 Cinema
03 Classic
18 Concerto
46 Contec
15 Coronado
84 ,83 ,82 ,61 ,05 ,03 Craig
62 Croslex
03 Crown
63 ,61 ,59 Curtis Mates
03 CXC
Daewoo
,17 ,16 ,15 ,04 ,03 ,02
,23 ,22 ,21 ,20 ,19 ,18
,29 ,28 ,27 ,26 ,25 ,24
,48 ,36 ,35 ,34 ,32 ,30
90 ,59
40 Daytron
03 Dynasty
Emerson ,61 ,59 ,46 ,40 ,15 ,03
85 ,84 ,83 ,82 ,64
65 ,19 Fisher
03 Funai
03 Futuretech
General
(GE) Electric 68 ,67 ,66 ,59 ,56 ,40 ,06
40 Hall Mark
69 ,59 ,50 ,18 ,15 Hitachi
45 Inkel
86 ,67 ,59 ,56 JC Penny
70 JVC
88 ,87 ,61 ,59 KTV
40 ,15 ,03 KEC
15 KMC
(LG (Goldstar ,38 ,37 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,01
44 ,43 ,42 ,41 ,40 ,39
18 Luxman
(LXI (Sears ,62 ,60 ,59 ,56 ,54 ,19
71 ,65 ,63
Magnavox ,59 ,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15
89 ,72 ,62 ,60
54 ,40 Marantz
54 Matsui
40 ,18 MGA
ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ
75 ,60 ,59 ,40 ,18 Mitsubishi/MGA
18 MTC
60 ,59 ,40 ,20 ,19 ,18 NEC
03 Nikei
03 Onking
03 Onwa
Panasonic ,66 ,54 ,09 ,08 ,07 ,06
74 ,73 ,67
18 Penney
Philco ,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15 ,03
90 ,69 ,62 ,59
Philips ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15
72 ,62
91 ,80 ,66 ,63 Pioneer
59 ,18 ,15 Portland
40 Proton
67 ,66 ,06 Quasar
75 ,61 ,60 ,56 ,48 ,17 Radio Shack
RCA/Proscan ,78 ,77 ,76 ,67 ,59 ,18
94 ,93 ,92
19 ,03 Realistic
40 Sampo
Samsung
,43 ,40 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,00
,49 ,48 ,47 ,46
98 ,60 ,59
65 ,61 ,19 Sanyo
61 ,60 ,40 ,03 Scott
19 ,18 ,15 Sears
64 ,57 ,15 Sharp
Signature 2000
(M.Wards) 58 ,57
55 ,53 ,52 ,51 ,50 Sony
40 ,03 Soundesign
01 Spectricon
18 SSS
Sylvania ,59 ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18
62 ,60
96 ,95 ,61 Symphonic
06 Tatung
18 Techwood
25 ,18 ,15 ,03 Teknika
40 ,18 TMK
71 ,63 ,57 ,19 Toshiba
18 Vidtech
69 ,60 ,59 Videch
Wards ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15
64 ,60
18 Yamaha
40 York
03 Yupiteru
79 ,58 Zenith
01 Zonda
54 ,03 Dongyang
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 13 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 13 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:22 013-06-04 오전 10:09:22| 14 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ
ﺎﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
ً
ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻃﺮﻗ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ (ﻳﺴﺮﻯ)
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ)
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ)
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ(ﻳﻤﻨﻰ)
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ
ﻥﻉ ﻉﺍﻡﺕﺱﺍﻝﺍ ﻉﺽﻭﻡ ﺩﻉﺏﻱ ﻥﺃ ﻱﻍﺏﻥﻱ
ﻑﺍﻉﺽﺃ 3 ﻯﻝﺇ 2.5 ﻥﻡ ﺓﻑﺍﺱﻡﺏ ﻥﻭﻱﺯﻑﻱﻝﺕﻝﺍ
.ﻥﻭﻱﺯﻑﻱﻝﺕﻝﺍ ﺓﺵﺍﺵ ﻡﺝﺡ
ﺓﺵﺍﺵ ﻙﻱﺩﻝ ﻥﺍﻙ ﺍﺫﺇ ،ﻝﺍﺙﻡﻝﺍ ﻝﻱﺏﺱ ﻯﻝﻉ
ﻉﺍﻡﺕﺱﺍﻝﺍ ﻉﺽﻭﻡ ﺩﺩﺡﻑ ،ﺓﺹﻭﺏ 46 ﻡﺝﺡﺏ
ﻥﻉ ﺭﺍﺕﻡﺃ 3.50 ﻯﻝﺇ 2.92 ﺩﻉﺏﺕ ﺓﻑﺍﺱﻡﺏ
.ﺓﺵﺍﺵﻝﺍ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ، ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ( ٤٥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ) ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ.
ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ
ً
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ
ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ.
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ
ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ، ﻓﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ
ً ﻗﻠﻴﻼ.
ﻟﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ. ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ 60 ﺇﻟﻰ 90 ﺳﻢ ً ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ، ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ
* ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ، ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ً ﺃﺑﺪﺍ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ. ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ
ًﻫﺎﻣﺎ. ﺿﻌﻪﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ.
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً ﺃﻣﺮﺍ
* ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
SWA-6000
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ 2 (20×5)
ٍ
16 ﺑﺮﺍﻍ
4 ﺣﻮﺍﻣﻞ
2 ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ
2 ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ
4 ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 14 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 14 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:23 013-06-04 오전 10:09:23|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ15
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ 03
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ
1. ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ.
2. ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ.
3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻚ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ.
4. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ.
5. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻔﻚ.
6. ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ.
2. ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ:
a. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ.
b. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ.
3. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ.
4. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻢﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
5. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ.
ًﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ.
6. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ
4
6
2 1
3
5
ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ
ﺃﻭ
ﻖ
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﺳﻮﺩ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 15 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 15 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:27 013-06-04 오전 10:09:27| 16 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ
ASC IN SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
T
L
N
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ) ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ (ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ)
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍ ﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍ ﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ (ﻳﺴﺮﻯ)
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍ ﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍ ﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ (ﻳﻤﻴﻦ)
* ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ SWA-6000 ﻓﻘﻂ.
| ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ |
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ. ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﻌﻨﺪ
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ، ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ (ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ) ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ.
ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﻌﺒﺜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ (+/ –).
ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ (ﻓﺘﺤﺔ) ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﻯ (ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ).
ً ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺇﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ.
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ Dolby Pro Logic II.
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 2-CH، ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ً ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ
ًﺟﺪﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ
ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ
ً ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ LAN ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Bluetooth ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ 2.4/5.8
ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ً ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ.
ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺧﺮﺳﺎﻧﻲ
ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 10 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ًﺎ، ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺫ.
ﻓﻮﻻﺫﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡﻣﻄﻠﻘ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ، ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ" ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
"5""3""1""0" ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ID SET (ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ)"
، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ِ
ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 16 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 16 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:31 013-06-04 오전 10:09:31|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ17
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ 03
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ/ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
LAN
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
HDMI IN HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO IN
L
R
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ
ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ
R ﺃﺣﻤﺮ
W ﺃﺑﻴﺾ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI OUT ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI IN ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺇﺫ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOURCE ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ HDMI ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ FUNCTION. ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ، ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ :
BT FM HDMI2 HDMI1 AUX D. IN BD/DVD
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ HDMI : ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ HDMI ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ HDMI ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ HDMI1 ﺃﻭ HDMI2.
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ : ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ RCA (ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ)، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ AUX.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ.
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ : ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ (ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ). ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ (ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ)، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ.
.D. IN ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ً ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ.
ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ/ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 32 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ DTS ﻭDolby Digital ﻓﻘﻂ. MPEG audio، ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ، ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 17 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 17 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:32 013-06-04 오전 10:09:32| 18 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ
ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ
(ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ)
ﻣﻮﺩﻡ
ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ
ﻣﻮﺟﻪ
ﺃﻭ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ Samsung. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ
(ISP) ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ DSL، ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻮﺟﻪﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ
ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ IP ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ IP ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ DHCP، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
DHCP ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ IP ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ.
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
ﻭ (TKIP/AES) WPA-PSKﻭ (OPEN/SHARED) WEP -
(TKIP/AES) WPA2-PSK
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ IP ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ
ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺍﺭ، ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ IP ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎﻣﻦ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ Wi-Fi، ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ
WEP ﺃﻭ TKIP ﺃﻭ TKIP-AES (WPS2 ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 802.11n.
ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ
ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ LAN ﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﺑﺤﻜﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ، ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ
ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ (ﺃﺩﺍء ﻧﻘﻄﺔﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ
ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ).
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 18 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 18 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:34 013-06-04 오전 10:09:34|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ19
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04
ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ
• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ OSD (ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ) ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ (ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ) ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ً ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ.
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء
ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ > ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ
ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 22)
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ،
ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ Apps
ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
Screen Mirroring d Samsung ﺣﺴﺎﺏ a
4 3 21
7 6 5
1
ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ : ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﻭﺽ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻚ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
2
Apps : ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ/ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
3
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ : ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ USB ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ.
4
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ : ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ
ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ.
5
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ : ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
6
ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
7
ﺃﺣﻤﺮ (A) : ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung
ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ.
ﺃﺯﺭﻕ (D) : ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
1. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
▲▼◄►ﺣﺘﻰﻳﺘﻢﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻟﺬﻱﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ،ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺩﻭﻥ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ، ﻓﺴﺘﻄﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 20 ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ
ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ 16:9 ﺃﺻﻠﻲ
BD Wise ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24Fs) ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ DVD 24Fs ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ Smart
ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
2. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ،
ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 19 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 19 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:38 013-06-04 오전 10:09:38| 20 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP HOME
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
2 4
3
1
1 ﺯﺭ HOME : ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
2 ﺯﺭ RETURN : ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
3
ﺯﺭE (ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ) / ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ :
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ
ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
4 ﺯﺭ EXIT : ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ. ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ
ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ.
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ
ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD
ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ HDMI
ﺑﺪﻗﺔ UHD. ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ".
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ، ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ
ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ UHD،
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ (ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ).
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D
ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ.
: 3D Blu-ray ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ
Blu-ray ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 3D. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Smart Hub ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ : ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ
ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 52.
BD Wise
BD Wise ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ Samsung ﻭﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
Samsung ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ BD Wise ﻣﻊ
ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ HDMI ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ BD
Wise ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﺨﺮﺝ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ
.Blu-ray/DVD Disc
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
HDMI ﻋﻠﻰ
BD Wise ﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ1080p ﻭ1080i
ﻭ720p ﻭ576p/480p. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ
ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ. ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻓﻴﻦ i ﻭp
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ، ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ.
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ
(24Fs)
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ)
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ HDMI ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﻋﻠﻰ 24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ 24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢﻣﻌﺪﻝ
ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺩﻗﺔﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ 1080p HDMI.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 20 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 20 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:42 013-06-04 오전 10:09:42|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ21
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ DVD
24Fs
ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD ﺇﻟﻰ 24 ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ HDMI. ﻻ
ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24
ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
Smart Hub
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ Smart
.Hub
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ
HDMI
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ
HDMI ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ
(ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ).
ﻟﻮﻥ HDMI
ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ
ﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI OUT ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ. ﻳﻮﻓﺮ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻖ
ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ.
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ
ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ.
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ : ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻦ 6 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 6-
ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ
ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ 6 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ.
ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔﻟﻜﻞ
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ 9 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ. ﻛﻠﻤﺎ
ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ، ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ.
ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻧﻐﻤﺔ
ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ.
ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ
ﻳﻤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ
ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺘﻚ.
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ
ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ
ﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ
ً
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ،
ﺇﻣﺎ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ
HDMI ﻭﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ (ARC).
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ/ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ
ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 54)
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ
ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ Dolby Digital ﻭDolby
.Dolby True HDﻭ Digital Plus
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ : ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ً
Dolby TrueHD ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻭﻓﻘ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ Dolby TrueHD. ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
Dolby Digitalﻭ Dolby Digital ﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ
.Plus
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺿﻐﻂ،ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ
ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ Dolby ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔﻛﻠﻬﺎ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ً ﻫﺪﻭءﺍ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ
ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ
ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ
ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 21 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 21 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:43 013-06-04 오전 10:09:43| 22 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ، ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ
ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ 0 ﻭ300
ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare Wi-Fi، ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ، ﺩﻭﻥ
ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
.Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ
.TXT ﺃﻭ .DOC ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
.Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
AllShare
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ
ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ، ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ (ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ،
ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺑﻪ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
BD-Live
ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ BD-Live ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ BD-Live ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray
ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
Disc ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-Live : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ
ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻊ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ BD-Live.
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD : ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ
ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-Live ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ
.Blu-ray Disc
ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ Smart
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ :
ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ : ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ VOD
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ
ﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﻪ.
ً
ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ (VOD) ﻭﻓﻘ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ (PIN) ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ 0000.
ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻚ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ،
ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ Smart Hub
ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻬﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ
Smart Hub
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Smart Hub
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔﻟﻬﺎ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ (PIN) ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ 0000.
ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ، ﺇﻟﺦ.
• ﻟﻦ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ
ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ USB ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ
ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ
ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ USB ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 22 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 22 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:44 013-06-04 오전 10:09:44|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ23
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ QWERTY ﻓﻲ
ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ : ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ
USB ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ:
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
2. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ.
3. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺍﺕ
USB HID ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
.HID
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ USB ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ HID ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ، ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ
ﺇﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ 0000.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ PIN
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ.
ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ BD ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ : ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
Blu-ray ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ.
ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ DVD ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ : ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
DVD ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ
.PIN
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ : ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ
PIN ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ 4 ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ
.USB
2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ5
ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ.
ٍ
ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ
ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
ﻋﺎﻡ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ
ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ
ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ.
ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ : ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
Anynet+ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ Samsung ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ
ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ Anynet+ ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
Samsung ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ Anynet+
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ،Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
1) ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
Samsung ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI.
2) ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ
ﻋﻠﻰ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
3) ﻟﺬﺍ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
.ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺴﻢ
Anynet+ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 23 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 23 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:44 013-06-04 오전 10:09:44| 24 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
DivX® Video
On Demand
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX® VOD
ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ DivX® VOD
ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ
ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ
ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ، ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻮﻛﻼء ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ
Samsung ﺑﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ
ﻧﺸﻂ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ
ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ"
ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 28.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ
ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ
ً ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ. ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔﻓﻘﻂ.
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ
Samsung
ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﻚ.
ﺇﻉ. ﺽ
ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭSmart
Hub، ﺛﻢ ﺑﺪء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ
ﻣﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ (PIN)
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ. ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ
(PIN) ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ
.0000
ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ
ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ (ASC) ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ
ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ، ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء 7.1
ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﺘﻚ.
ASC IN
LAN SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRON
FRON
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC
ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ.
• ﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ.
ً
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ
• ﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ً
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻘ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ، ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
1. ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ASC IN .
2. ﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ.
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ
ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ
ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ RETURN ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 24 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 24 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:45 013-06-04 오전 10:09:45|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ25
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﺜﻞ Smart Hub ﻭBD-LIVE ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺇﻟﻰ
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ، ﺍﻧﻈﺮ
ﻓﺼﻞ "ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 43 ﺇﻟﻰ 51. ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ
ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﺃﻭ
ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ، ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔﺇﺫﺍﻣﺎﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
ﺎ ﺃﻡ ً ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ. ﻓﺈﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ً ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ، ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ً
IP ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺛﺎﺑﺘ
ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻓﻨﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻭﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ
ﺷﺒﻜﺔﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ LAN ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ.
ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
4. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 26.
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ
❑ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ:
1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ،
ً ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ
ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺳﻠﻜﻴًّﺎ، ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
2. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
❑ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﻳﺪﻭﻱ
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ:
1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ،
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ، ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﻓﺸﻞ
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 26.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX MAC ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
0 .0 .0 .0 IP ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
0 .0 .0 .0 ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﻉ
0 .0 .0 .0 ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺎﺭﺓ
ّ
ﻋﺒ
0 .0 .0 .0 DNS ﻣﺰﻭﺩ
ً ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ
ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP
ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP. ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ
2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ IP، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ (ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ)، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
E. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ
ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4.
6. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ 4 ﻭ5 ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 25 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 25 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:46 013-06-04 오전 10:09:46| 26 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
7. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
E. ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ
ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ً ﻣﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ:
- ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
- ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ
WPS(PBC) -
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺇﻥ
ﻭﺟﺪ.
❑ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﻓﻲ " ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ
:25
1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ.
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ
ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻠﻮ ﺭﺍﻱ
ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ
ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ.
si-ap
iptime
iptime5G
KIMING_VTOWER
TIAS
WPS(PBC) ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓﻣﺮﻭﺭ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ً
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ
ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ.
❑ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ - ﻳﺪﻭﻱ
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ
:25
1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 2، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 6.
ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4.
4. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ً • ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ
▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ (ﺃﻭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ)، ﺣﺪﺩ ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ، ﺣﺪﺩ #123&، ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﻋﻠﻰﺍﻟﺰﺭE .E. ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ، ﺣﺪﺩ #123&، ﺛﻢﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ
ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ
ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.
• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ً • ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ
▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 26 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 26 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:47 013-06-04 오전 10:09:47|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ27
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04
6. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ IP، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ IP، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.
8. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ (ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ)، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء
ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
9. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 8.
10. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ 8 ﻭ9 ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ.
11. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ.
12. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ
ً
ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺮﻭﻓ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
13. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
14. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ < ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
WPS(PBC)
ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ (WPS(PBC ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. ﻓﺈﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺯﺭ (WPS(PBC، ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ:
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 1 ﺇﻟﻰ 3 ﻓﻲ " ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ
:25
1. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ (WPS(PBC، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ (WPS(PBC ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ. ﻳﺤﺼﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﺼﻞ
ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ WPS، ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ
ﻋﻠﻰ AES. ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ WEP ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ WPS.
Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﻭﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ، ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ.
2. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 27 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 27 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:48 013-06-04 오전 10:09:48| 28 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ
ﺇﻏﻼﻕ
ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ : HTS]F9750W]
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹﺑﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ.
AndroidXXXXXXX ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ
Wi-Fi ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
5. ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi-Fi:
• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi.
• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ PBC.
• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ.
ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi
1. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ Wi-Fi، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺁﺧﺮ. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ.
2. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ً ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﻗﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
3. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ُﻣ ً ﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi
ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ PBC ﻭ PIN ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ PBC
1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ُﻣ ً ﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi
ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN
1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ PIN.
3. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺭﻣﺰ PIN ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ.
4. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ُﻣ ً ﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi
ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ
.Wi-Fi ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ
ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ .TXT ﺃﻭ .DOC ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi-Fi.
ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
ً • ﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢﻣﻄﻠﻘ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
4. ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ.
5. ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ،
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻪﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﻝ
ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "UPDATE" (ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ)
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 28 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 28 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:49 013-06-04 오전 10:09:49|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ29
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 04
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ.
1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ
"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ".
2. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
3. ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ، ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ
ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ.". ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ.
4. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ".
5. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
6. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ".
7. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ، ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ Samsung".
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ
ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻪ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ
ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺎ. ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ً
ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪﻧﺸﻄ
ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ.
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ
ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ، ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ USB
.www.samsung.com ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ .1
2. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ SUPPORT ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ.
3. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ، ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ.
4. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ُ
5. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ
.Firmware Manuals & Downloads
6. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ Firmware ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ.
7. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ZIP ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ.
8. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ Send ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ.
ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ OK ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ
ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
9. ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺭﺷﻴﻒ zip ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ُﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢﻣﻠﻒ zip.
10. ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ُﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ.
11. ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
USB ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
12. ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ > ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ > ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
13. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ.
14. ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB. ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
ﻳﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ".
15. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻘﺒﺲ
.USB
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ Samsung".
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ
ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻪ.
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻘﺒﺲ USB ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺮﻙ
ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 29 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 29 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:51 013-06-04 오전 10:09:51| 30 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
Blu-ray/DVD/CD ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ
ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ AllShare ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﻳﺠﺐ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ DLNA ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Windows 7 ﻭWindows 8 ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
.ﻣﻀﻤﻦ (Play To) DLNA
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ، ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺗﻬﺎ
ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ً ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ، ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻚ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
2. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ً ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
4. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ6ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ" ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB
ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻚ.
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﺭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻢﺗﻢ ﻮ ﻴ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ".
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ،
ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ Apps
ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪ
ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪ
ﻮ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﻝﻭﻡﺡﻡ USB ﺹﺭﻕ
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ
ﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ،
ً
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻭﻓﻘ
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ، ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪﻟﻦ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3. ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭE.
5. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭE.
6. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ RETURN ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ Exit ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ.
7. ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ 32 ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB.
ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 30 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 30 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:51 013-06-04 오전 10:09:51|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ31
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ،
ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪﻟﻦ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4. ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ،
ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4.
5. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
6. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
7. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
8. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 32 ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ، ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻗﺮﺹ" ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ DLNA، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ USB. ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ AllShare" ﻓﻲ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 31.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
Blu-ray، ﺃﻭ DVD، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ.
1. ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ
ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ً ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ".
2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ
ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ - ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ - ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪﻟﻦ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 2. ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ
.2
3. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ،
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ، ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ.
4. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ، ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ◄►▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
6. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ، ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
7. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 32 ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ AllShare
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ DLNA ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare
ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ AllShare ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ً ﺳﻬﻼ.ﻋﻠﻰ
َﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ DLNA ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ً ﺃﻣﺮﺍ
ﺍﻟﻤ
ُ
ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ AllShare ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ AllShare. ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ، ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ //:Samsung (http
.(link.samsung.com
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ
DLNA ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 31 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 31 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:54 013-06-04 오전 10:09:54| 32 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
DLNA ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ AllShare
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﻭ/ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ DLNA
ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
2. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ/ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
AllShare ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ،
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ - ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ - ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ AllShare، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
6. ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ AllShare ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ AllShare، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ.
7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ AllShare
ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ
(ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ Samsung ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare.)
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ
DLNA ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
2. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ/ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ
AllShare ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
3. ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ، ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ AllShare، ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
4. ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ
ﻣﻨﺘﺞ Blu-ray ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
5. ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ /Blu-ray
DVD، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
0
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
1
2
1 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ
DISC
MENU
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
TITLE
MENU
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ.
• ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ،
ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
POPUP
MENU
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 32 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 32 22013-06-04 오전 10:09:57 013-06-04 오전 10:09:57|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ33
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05
2 ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ.
• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ6.
6 ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
5 ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ً ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ.
7 ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ.
ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ
، ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.
ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ،
ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.7
ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ7،
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ1ﺃﻭ2.
ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ1ﺃﻭ
2، ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TOOLS.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3D "ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ"
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3D ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ًﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ
ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 3D.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ًﺟﻨﺒﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ.
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ
ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﺔ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ DLNA ﺑﻌﺪ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ.
1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ
ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ.
1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢﻣﻦ
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ
ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ◄► ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ
ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ
ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ
.►◄
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 33 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 33 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:01 013-06-04 오전 10:10:01| 34 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ، ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ، ﺃﻭ
ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ.
- ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
- ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
- ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ
ﻣﻌﻴﻦ.
- ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃ-ﺏ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﺰء
ﻣﻌﻴﻦ.
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃ-ﺏ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ (A).
ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ.
3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻒ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ (B).
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ
ٍ
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ (B) ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ
ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ (A).
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ.
- ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ : ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ.
- ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ : ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ
ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ.
- ﺃﻓﻼﻡ : ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ.
- ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ : ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ
ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD wise، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ.
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ
ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ
ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ
ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻴﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪﻣﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ
"ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ" ﻋﺪﺩ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ
.(ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﺎ 1/3ﻭ 1/2ﻭ 1/1)
ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ
BONUSVIEW ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ bonusview
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
BONUSVIEW
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ، ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﻭﺿﻊ1 (ﺃﻛﺒﺮ)، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ2 (ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ).
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ، ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 34 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 34 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:02 013-06-04 오전 10:10:02|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ35
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺩﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE،
ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ.
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ
ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ.
ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ
ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 37.
ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ (ﻣﺜﻞ Picasa ﻭ
Facebook ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺃﻭ
ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء
ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺛﻢ
ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ
ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﻋﺎﺩﺓﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ، ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ، ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ
ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ. ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺹ
Blu-ray، ﺃﻭ DVD، ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB، ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺣﺴﺐ
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ.
ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
1
4
5
3 6
2
1
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ: ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
2 ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ21: ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ/ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
3 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5 : ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
4
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ (ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻘﻂ)
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ.
ﻓﻔﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ3ﺃﻭ،
ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ً ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ.
5 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 7 : ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ
6 ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 6: ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 35 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 35 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:03 013-06-04 오전 10:10:03| 36 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
00:09 00:43
TRACK 001
00:43 TRACK 001
03:56 TRACK 002
04:41 TRACK 003
04:02 TRACK 004
03:43 TRACK 005
03:40 TRACK 006
04:06 TRACK 007
03:52 TRACK 008
03:04 TRACK 009
04:02 TRACK 010
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
off off
ﺎ.
ً
ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﻗﺘ
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ.
ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.
ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
, 1
ﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ.
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ.
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.
(ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ)
ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ
▲▼◄► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ.
ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﺩﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻋﺮﺽ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ
ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ
ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ
ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ.
ﻓﻨﺎﻥ
ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ.
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ
ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ
ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔﻣﻊ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 37.
ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ (ﻣﺜﻞ
Picasa ﻭFacebook ﻭﻣﺎ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ. ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ
ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ
ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ
ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ" ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ
ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ mp3 ﻭﺣﻔﻆ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
USB ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ
ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 37.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 36 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 36 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:04 013-06-04 오전 10:10:04|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ37
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ
ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ
.(CD-DA/MP3)
1. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ
ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ - ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺃﻭ
ﻴ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ، ﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ - ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻢ ﻰ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
00:09 00:43
TRACK 001
00:43 TRACK 001
03:56 TRACK 002
04:41 TRACK 003
04:02 TRACK 004
03:43 TRACK 005
03:40 TRACK 006
04:06 TRACK 007
03:52 TRACK 008
03:04 TRACK 009
04:02 TRACK 010
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
off off
ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ
.ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ (CD-DA/MP3)
1. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ
ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ▲▼ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ
1. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
2. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ.
3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
4. ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
5. ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
6. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﺩ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ُ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 99 ً ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ
.(CD-DA) ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑـ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ، ﻭ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ،
ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ. ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ 001.
• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﺮﺓ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ"
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ
ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 37 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 37 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:08 013-06-04 오전 10:10:08| 38 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ
1. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ USB ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
2. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. E.
3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
E. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ.
4. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
5. ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
6. ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ.
7. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻧﺴﺦ.
8. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻪﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ.
9. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE
ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ.
10. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ
ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ". ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
11. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ DTS.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺑﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ mp3 ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ
192 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ
ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ.
- ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
E. ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ.
- ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ
ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ،ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ً ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ!
ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ Bluetooth؟
ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻊ
ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ:
- ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ/ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
- ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ، ﺃﻭ
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ، ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ.
- ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ
ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ LAN ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ.
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﺎﻥ
ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ.
• ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺳﺎءﺕ
ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ.
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ّﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 10 ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ. ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ. ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ، ﻗﺪ
ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻮﺍﺏ.
ً ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼ • ً ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ
ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ
ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ
ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ
ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 38 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 38 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:10 013-06-04 오전 10:10:10|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ39
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ FUNCTION ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ BT.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.
• ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ "HTS]Fxxxx]" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ.
ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ • ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ،
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻠﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
5. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ SBC ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ (ﺣﺘﻰ 237
ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 48 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ)، ﻭﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ SBC ﻋﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ (328 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 44.1 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ).
ﻣﻴﺰﺓ AVRCP ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ. ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ، ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ُ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ.
ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﺪﻋﻢﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ A2DP.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
- ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﻟﻪ.
- ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
- ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ، ﺃﻭ
ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ.
- ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ LAN
ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ
ً ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴًّﺎ.
ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ، ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.
ً ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ • ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺑﻌﺮﺽ DISCONNECTED ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ.
ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ( ) ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ
ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ BT ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ.
• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ، ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ. (ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺖ
ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ً ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ.)
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ
ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 10 ﻣﺘﺮ. ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ّ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ،
ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ. ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ،
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ (ﺯﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ)
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ DVD، ﺃﻭ USB،
ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ"
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TOOLS.
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ / ﺑﺪء
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ
ﺎ.
ً
ﻣﺆﻗﺘ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ
ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ.
ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. (ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ)
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 39 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 39 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:11 013-06-04 오전 10:10:11| 40 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. (ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ
ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ.)
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
- ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ : ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ
ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ.
- ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ : ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ.
- ﺃﻓﻼﻡ : ﻫﻮ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ
ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ.
- ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ : ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ : ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ.
ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ
ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ. ﻭﻟﻜﻦ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ MP3 ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ.
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ PG ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ
ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ
ﻳﺼﻨﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ
ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ.
ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ
ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ
ً ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ،
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻚ
ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ
ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ.
ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ
ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 37.
ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ
ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
Picasa، Facebook)
ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ، ﺃﻧﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ
ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ
ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 40 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 40 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:12 013-06-04 오전 10:10:12|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ41
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 05
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ FUNCTION ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ FM.
2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ 1: ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNING/CH (,.)
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ.
- ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ: ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNING/CH (,.) ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ: ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNING/CH (,.)
ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ/ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ MO/ST.
• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ، ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ
.MONOﻭ STEREO
• ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺌﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ MONO ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ
ٍﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ.
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ FM 89.10 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ FUNCTION ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ FM.
.<89.10> ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ (.,) TUNING/CH ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .2
3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORY.
• ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
4. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORY ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORYﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﻩ.
• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TUNER MEMORY، ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ
ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
5. ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ،ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ 2 ﺇﻟﻰ 4.
ً • ﺎ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ
ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﻄﺔﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔﻣﺴﺒﻘ
ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ TUNING/CH (,.)
ﺎ.
ً
ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔﻣﺴﺒﻘ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ
SOUND ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ
EFFECT
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ SOUND EFFECT.
2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ: DSPﺃﻭ
.SFE ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ Dolby Pro Logic II
3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ.
❑ DSP (ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ)
Football Power Bass MP3 Enhancer
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
• MP3 Enhancer : ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ (ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ mp3). ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ MP3
(24 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ، 8 ﺑﺖ) ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ
(44.1 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ، 16 ﺑﺖ).
• Power Bass : ﻳﺰﻳﺪﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﻓﺮ
ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﻡ.
• Football : ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ
ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺩ. ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ،ﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ،
ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
Dolby Pro Logic II ❑
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ Pro Logic Matrix ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
• ﺃﻓﻼﻡ : ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ.
• ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ : ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ.
• ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ : ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ.
• Matrix : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ.
• Pro Logic : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ 5.1 ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ.
- ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ (ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ) ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔﺑﺎﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 41 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 41 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:13 013-06-04 오전 10:10:13| 42 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
❑ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ SFE
ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻤﻔﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻄﻦ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ (1 ﻗﺎﻋﺔ
ﻓﻴﻠﻬﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺗﺴﻼﻓﺎ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ (2 ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ B
ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻴﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ (ﺭﻭﻙ) ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ًﺻﻮﺗﺎ
• ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻤﻔﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻄﻦ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ 1) : ﻳﻮﻓﺮ
ً ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ.
ًﺻﻮﺗﺎ
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ
• ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻬﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺗﺴﻼﻓﺎ (ﻗﺎﻋﺔ 2) : ﻳﻮﻓﺮ
ً ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ، ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪﺃﻗﻞ
ﻗﻮﺓﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺔ 1.
• ﻧﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ B : ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺯ.
• ﺍﻟﻜﻨﻴﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻮﻝ : ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺴﺔﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ.
• ﻣﺪﺭﺝ (ﺭﻭﻙ) : ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﻙ.
• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ.
3D ﺻﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
SOUND
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻋﻦ
ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ.
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ FM.
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
TV
SOUND
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOUND.
1. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ HDMI ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
(ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 17)
2. ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ On
.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOUND ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ.
4. ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TV SOUND،
ﻳﻮﻣﺾ TV SOUND ON/OFF (ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ) ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ
ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ D. IN.
- TV SOUND ON : ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
- TV SOUND OFF : ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ (ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ) ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ +Anynet.
❑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ:
1) ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻧﻈﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
2) ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ USB ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
❑ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ +Anynet ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ
(HDMI-CEC)
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺻﻮﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺻﻮﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ
ﻣﻦ +Anynet
(HDMI-CEC)
O O ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
X O ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡﻣﻦ
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ X O
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 42 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 42 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:14 013-06-04 오전 10:10:14|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ43
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ً ﺃﻭﻻ:
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ
1. ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
(ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 18)
2. ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
(ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 25 ﺇﻟﻰ 27)
ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻧﻮﺻﻲ
ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung.
ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
1. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A).
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
3. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
5. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
6. ﻭﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻲ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ
7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ. ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ
ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻲ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ
ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ. ﻓﻤﺎ
ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ
ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺣﻘﻞ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺣﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ. ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ
ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ.
ﻻﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﺍء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ
ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ،
ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Smart Hub، ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ Smart Hub
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ Apps، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ Apps، ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4.
2. ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ Smart Hub ﻟﻠﺴﺆﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ،
Smart Hub ﺃﻡ ﻻ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻨﻮﺩ
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart Hub ﻭﻧﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ.
4. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart Hub ﻭﻧﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ،
ﻳﻠﺰﻡﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart Hub ﻭﻧﻬﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ،
ٍﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء، ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ
.Smart Hub
5. ّﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ
ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ.
6. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ، ّﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻧﻬﺞ
ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ.
7. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
8. ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ.
9. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻪ، ّﻣﺮﺭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ، ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ
ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Smart TV ﻓﻲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
10. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ.
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 43 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 43 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:17 013-06-04 오전 10:10:17| 44 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺚ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ، ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ،
ﻭ ﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺰ ﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺮﻭﺽﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻯ
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ.
ﺃﻭ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﻤﻴﺰ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ
ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻬﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ
ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ، ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭﻫﺎ.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ
ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3، ﻭﻳﻠﺰﻡ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ Samsung، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ. ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ
ﺍﺳﺘﺌﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ،
ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung.
ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
Samsung TV
ﺏﻱﻭﻝﺍ ﺡﻑﺹﺕﻡ
ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
1
5 4 3 2
ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ
Appsﻱ
Apps
2 1
3 4
ﺍﻝﺕﻁﺏﻱﻕﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺕﻁﺏﻱﻕﺍﺕ
1
ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ : ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ
ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ Samsung.
ﻳﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
2
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ : ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﻴﺰﺓ.
3
Appsﻱ : ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ.
4
ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ : ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ
ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 44 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 44 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:19 013-06-04 오전 10:10:19|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ45
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06
ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ، ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ
.Samsung Apps
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ Samsung Apps، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ Samsung Apps.
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ
ﺎ ﺃﻭ
ً
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﻳﻤﻴﻨ
ً ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ً ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻴﺎ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ
ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻧﻲ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﺍء، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ
ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung
ﻭﺍﻣﺘﻼﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A)
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ، ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A)ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ،
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 4.
3. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ٍ ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ
ٍ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN.
ﻭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻴﻦ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
4. ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►
ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
5. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺌﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ، ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ، ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻓﺌﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ.
6. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►
ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ.
7. ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩﻩ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
8. ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ 2 ﻭ3.
ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
1. ﺣﺪﺩ Apps ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ
WebBrowser
XX.XKB :ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ | X.XXX :ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ | XXXXX :ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ
1 /23
ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ... ﻋﺮﺽ : ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ
109.48 MB / 629.43 MB
Samsung Apps
WebBrowser
ﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ:
• ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ
ً ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ.
ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ
• ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ
ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
• ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ Apps، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ
ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ً ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ
4. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ، ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 45 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 45 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:25 013-06-04 오전 10:10:25| 46 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﻗﻔﻞ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ
ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻗﻔﻞ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ. ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ 0000.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ/ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
4. ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ،ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ.
5. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
6. ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
7. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ
▲► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
8. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ RETURN ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ.
ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ
ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ.
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ،
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ.
4. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ.
ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻪﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE،
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ .
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ.
ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻠﻪﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ، ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE،
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ
ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ (>، <، ^، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ) ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ.
4. ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
5. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ
ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
3. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ
ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
5. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ
6. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 46 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 46 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:31 013-06-04 오전 10:10:31|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ47
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06
ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ.
3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ
4. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ.
5. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ،
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ً ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍ، ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
6. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺪﺩ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ.
.E
7. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ
ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.8
.E
9. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺇﻉ. ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻉ. ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ.
3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ.
4. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ
ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ
6. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ.
7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
.E
ﺣﺬﻑ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ
ٍﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء. ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ، ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ
ً ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ. ﻟﺬﺍ، ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺭﻏﺒﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ،
ﻓﺴﻴﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ.
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ، ﺛﻢ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ
4. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ.
5. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 3 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ،
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻛﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
6. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ، ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ
7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ
ﻣﺆﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء
ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ 7. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺛﺔﻣﻦ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﻭﺗﺤﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ.
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻼﺕ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲► ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 47 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 47 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:32 013-06-04 오전 10:10:32| 48 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ. ﻭﻓﻲ
ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ.
4. ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ.
5. ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ، ﺣﺪﺩﻩ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﻛﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
6. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ
ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ
.7
ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻛﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﻭﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ.
ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ) ﺑﻌﺮﺽ
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ.
1. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﻣﻨﺘﺞ Blu-ray ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ (D) ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ Screen
Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ).
2. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ AllShare Cast ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
3. ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢﻣﻨﺘﺞ Blu-ray ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩﻩ.
ٍﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ
4. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ،
ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ Android_92gb...)، ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔﺗﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
5. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ)،
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ، ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻚ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ AllShare Cast. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ.
ً
ﺑﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻓﻘ
ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ، ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen
Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ). ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ Screen
Mirroring (ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ) ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ HDMI
ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ BD Wise - ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ BD
Wise ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ - ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Java.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ (ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ.
ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ActiveX ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ.
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ
ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻫﻤﺎ؛ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ، ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﺎ. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ
ً
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﺸﻄ
ﺎ. ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ
ً
ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻧﺸﻄ
ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ
ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ. ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻟﻜﻨﻪﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ
ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
1. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ
ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ.
ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ
ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ "ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ
2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺎﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ً
ﻭﻳﻈﻞ ﻧﺸﻄ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 48 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 48 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:33 013-06-04 오전 10:10:33|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ49
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06
ﻟﻤﺤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ
ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ، ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻋﻠﻰ
ًﻋﺪﺩﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ. ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ
ً ﺑﺪءﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ،
1
http://www.samsung.com 100%
1
• : ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.
• : ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• : ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ،
ً ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ. ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ
ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻣﺮﺓ
ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
• : ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ : • http://www.samsung.com
ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
• : ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• : ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ.
• : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ
ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ.
• %100 : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ
ﺑﻨﺴﺐ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
• : ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ PIP (ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ).
• : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ
ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ.
• : ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 50.
• : ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ http://www.samsung.com ﺃﻭ
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ، ﺛﻢ
ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰﻰ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE، ﺮ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻮ ﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ.
http://www.samsung.com
Caps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
q w e r t y u i o p ^ *
123#& a s d f g h j k l ~ @ !
z x c v b n m , . ? -
ENG www. .com / 4
ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ.
ﻣﺴﺢ
ﺗﻢ
ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ
100%
ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ
ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
1. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ.
2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭEﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
3. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Caps
ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE
ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Caps ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ
ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
4. ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
#123& ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
6. ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ،
ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
7. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ، ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ
ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ. ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 49 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 49 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:34 013-06-04 오전 10:10:34| 50 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ
ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ
ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺳﻴﺔ، ﻭﻣﺎ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ.
ﺍﻟﻨﺺ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ
ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ
ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
ﺗﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ
ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ
ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ. ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ
ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪﻟﻠﺘﻮ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
ﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ،
ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ
ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭ ﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻢ ﻰ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
http://www.samsung.com
ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽﺧﺎﺹ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ
ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ﺇﻏﻼﻕ
100%
/ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ
ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ
ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ.
ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻢ، ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﺋﻘﺔﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ
ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ
ﻓﻘﻂ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ، ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ
PIN ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ، ﻭﻫﻮ 0000، ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ PIN ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ :
ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ.
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ : ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ.
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ : ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ًﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ.
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ : ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ URL
ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ،
ً ﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻭﻟﻢ
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ
ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ
ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ
ﺧﺎﺹ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ
ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ
ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻪ.
ًﺎ، ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ
ﻨ
ّ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﻣﻤﻜ
ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ URL ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ، ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،
ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" (ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ) ﺃﻣﺎﻡ
ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ URL ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ
ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩﻩﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ
ﺎ.
ً
ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔﻣﻤﻜﻨ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 50 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 50 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:37 013-06-04 오전 10:10:37|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ51
ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ 06
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ
ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ
ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ.
ﺣﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ : ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ.
ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ
ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ URL
ﻟﻺﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺠﺒﻬﺎ.
ﻋﺎﻡ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ
ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ
(ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ)،
ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ
ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ
ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ.
ﻣﺆﺷﺮ : ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ
ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ
ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ : ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ
ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ
ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
ﺗﻘﺪﻡﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ًﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ، ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ
ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ، ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ.
ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ
ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ، ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:
1. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ Samsung.
2. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ (A) ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ Myﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
4. ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ
ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
6. ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ، ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ
ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
7. ّﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ. ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
8. ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
BD-LIVE™
ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔﻣﻊ
ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ.
ِﺻﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ USB ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ USB ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ
.1
ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ
ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ 1 ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ
.BD-LIVE
2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
3. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
4. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ BD-Live، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
5. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
6. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
7. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭE.
8. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE.
9. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔﻣﻦ
ﺟﻬﺔﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ
ﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺔﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ً
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ، ﻭﻓﻘ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 51 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 51 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:39 013-06-04 오전 10:10:39| 52 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ
HDMI OUT
ً • ﺎ
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI، ﻭﻓﻘ
ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
• ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ HDMI ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ
ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ 3D.
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻮﻥ HDMI ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D
• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ 3D، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻣﺮﺓ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ 3D.
ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ 3D.
ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ 3D ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ 3D، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Blu-ray. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ
5ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 3D ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ Blu-ray.
ً • ﺎ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﻭﻓﻘ
ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ.
ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ً • ﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ.
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ، ﻭﻓﻘ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ 16:9 ﺃﺻﻠﻲ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ
ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ 4:3 (ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ).
(ﻓﻘﻂ Samsung ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ) BD Wise
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ BD Wise، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ، ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ،
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ BD Wise ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ BD Wise
ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD Wise، ﻓﻠﻦ
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD Wise.
• ﻭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ BD Wise ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ، ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ BD Wise ﻓﻲ
ٍﺣﺪ ﺳﻮﺍء، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ، ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺃﻱ
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ.
• ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ HDMI (ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ (Dolby
Digital ﺃﻭ DTS)، ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺜﻞ PCM.
• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ DVD ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW
ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ.
• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ
BONUSVIEW ﻭﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ (ﻳﻤﻴﻦ/
ﻳﺴﺎﺭ) ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ HDMI ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭHDMI ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ MPEG، ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ
ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ PCM ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
(PCM ﺃﻭ ﺩﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ).
• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ BD-Live
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ
.BD-LIVE
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ
ً • ﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI، ﻭﻓﻘ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ
ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ
.CEC
• ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ Samsung ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ +Anynet،
ﻓﺴﻴﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ +Anynet.
ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD
• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ
ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ USB ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻴﺌﺔﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ
ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ FAT (ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ DOS 8.3).
ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ USB ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ USB 2.0
ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔﻗﺮﺍءﺓ/ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 4 ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ً • ﺎ
ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD، ﻭﻓﻘ
ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 52 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 52 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:40 013-06-04 오전 10:10:40|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ53
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07
DivX® Video On Demand ﺧﺪﻣﺔ
• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ DivX(R) VOD،
."http://vod.divx.com" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ VOL + ﻭ - .
ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 3 ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ
ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ASC ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ
ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ
.SFEﻭ DSP، Dolby Pro Logic ll
• ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ (ﻣﺜﻞ
AUX، D.IN)، ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ.
ﺻﻮﺕ HDMI
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ HDMI ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ
ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ (Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ،
ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ.
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻛﺎﺑﻞ HDMI ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ
ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ.
• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ (ARC) ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ
ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ARC.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ
• ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺑﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 20
ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ًﺳﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ
ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ◄► ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺴﻢ
BONUSVIEW ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ
.BONUSVIEW
• ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ
ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ
ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ.
• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ PCM ﺃﻭ
ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ Dolby Digital ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ.
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ
ً • ﺎ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ Blu-ray / DVD، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﻣﻦ
ﻭﻓﻘ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ DISC MENU.
• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray
.Disc/DVD
• ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ BONUSVIEW
ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ
.BONUSVIEW
• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ
ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ.
• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ JPEG
• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ PG ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ
Dolby Pro Logic II ﻭﺿﻊ
ِﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ
،Dolby Pro Logic II ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ •
ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺴﻲ AUDIO INPUT (ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ) ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻴﻦ (ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ)، ﺩﻭﻥ
ﺍﻵﺧﺮ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ.
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ TOOLS (ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ) ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ BD
Wise ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ BD Wise ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ
ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﻛﺬﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ
ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ MP3 ﻭﺣﺠﻢ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 53 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 53 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:41 013-06-04 오전 10:10:41| 54 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ
PCM ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ Bitstream
(ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ)
Bitstream
(DTS ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ)
Bitstream
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ Dolby D)
ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ)
ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ HDMI
ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ
Blu-ray
ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS PCM PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ PCM Dolby Digital
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ *
Dolby
Digital ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital PCM 5.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ Dolby Digital
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ *
Dolby
Digital Plus ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital Plus PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ Dolby Digital
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ *
Dolby
TrueHD ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby TrueHD PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ Dolby Digital
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ *
ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS DTS PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ DTS Dolby Digital
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ *
ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ
DTS-HD
ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 7.1
DTS-HD ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ *
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 7.1 ﺑﺪﻗﺔ DTS-HD
DTS-HD ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ DTS Dolby Digital
ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ *
ﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻗﺮﺹ DVD
PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM 2 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ PCM
Dolby
Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital PCM 5.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ
DTS DTS DTS PCM 7.1 ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ DTS
ﺩﻗﺔﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ
ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Blu-ray
ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ BONUSVIEW
ًﻣﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM
ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ
ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ.
ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺚ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ
ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺑﺚ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ.
ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ
BONUSVIEW ﺃﻭ
ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ.
ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺚ ﺻﻮﺕ
BONUSVIEW ًﻣﻌﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ
ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ،
ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ
PCM ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ DTS.
ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ
ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺑﺚ ﺻﻮﺕ
BONUSVIEW ًﻣﻌﺎ
ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ
ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ،
ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺻﻮﺕ
PCM ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ Dolby Digital ﺃﻭ
.PCM
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ، ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "Dolby D ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ".
PCM ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ.
ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ:
- ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ : ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ.
- ﺻﻮﺕ BONUSVIEW : ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺜﻞ.
- ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ : ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ، ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ. ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ
.Blu-ray
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 54 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 54 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:41 013-06-04 오전 10:10:41|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ55
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07
ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ/ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
Blu-ray ﺩﻗﺔﻗﺮﺹ 1080p@60F BD Wise ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ
2160p@24F 2160p@24F ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ : UHD ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
1080p@24F 1080p@24F ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ : UHD ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ (24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ) 1080p@24F 1080p@24F
* 1080p ﻭ1080i ﻓﻘﻂ
1080p@60F 1080p@60F 1080p
1080i 1080i 1080i
720p 720p 720p
576p/480p 576p/480p 576p/480p
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ DVD
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ
480i BD Wise ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ 2160p@24F
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ UHD : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ 1080p@24F
ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ DVD ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ : ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ DVD ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ : ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ) 1080p@24F
* 1080p ﻭ1080i ﻓﻘﻂ
1080p@60F 1080p
1080i 1080i
720p 720p
576p/480p 576p/480p
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ، ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﻧﻌﻢ"، ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ 15
ٍ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.
ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﻫﻞ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ؟". ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ "ﻧﻌﻢ"، ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ 15 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ،
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ،
ﺛﻮﺍﻥ.
ٍ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ، ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 5
ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ > ﻋﺮﺽ > ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ، ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ (ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ) ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، ﻟﺬﺍ
ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
ً ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺍ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ 24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ (24 ﺇﻃﺎﺭ/ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ).
ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 55 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 55 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:42 013-06-04 오전 10:10:42| 56 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ
ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ. ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ
ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ، ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics.
ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ/ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ. • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ؟
• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray/DVD.
ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ Blu-ray/DVD ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ CD-ROM ﻭDVD-ROM ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ.
• ﺗﺄﻛﺪﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ.
ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ
ً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ
ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ
ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ً ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ؟
ً ﻗﺮﺻﺎ
• ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ
• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ.
ٌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺤﺮﻛﺔﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ.
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ. • ﻻ ﺗ
• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟ ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟
• ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ؟
ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ
ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD.
• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﻻ.
• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ، ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
ﻓﻘﻂ.
ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ
.Dolby Digital 7.1 CH
• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "Dolby Digital 7.1 CH" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ؟ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ
Dolby Digital 7.1 CH ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ 7.1.
• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dolby Digital 7.1-CH ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟
ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ُﺑﻌﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ. • ﻫﻞ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ؟
• ﻫﻞ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ؟
• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (TV/BD) ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ (TV ﺃﻭ BD) ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟
• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ.
• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ
ﺗﻬﺘﺰ.
• ﻫﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ؟
• ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟
• ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ؟
• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺭﺩﻱء ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ.
ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻼﻥ. • ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻐﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ.
ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ
ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
• ﻫﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 56 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 56 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:43 013-06-04 오전 10:10:43|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ57
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07
ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ/ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ
ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ.
• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD 16:9 ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ 16:9 ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ 4:3 ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔﺃﻭ
ﻭﺿﻊ 4:3 ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ، ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD discs 4:3 ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ 4:3 ﻓﻘﻂ. ﺭﺍﺟﻊ
ﻏﻼﻑ Blu-ray Disc، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ.
(ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ
ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ.)
• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ٍ • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STANDBY
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ
(ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ).
- ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ RESET (ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ) ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ.
ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ.
ﻟﻘﺪ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ
ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ.
. • ٍ
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ INIT ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.
ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
- ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ RESET (ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ) ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ.
ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ.
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ. • ﻫﻞ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ؟
• ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ، ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ FM ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔﺗﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ
ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ
ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ، ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ/ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ^ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ D. IN ﺃﻭ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AUX، ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD ﻭﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ "ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ" ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ:
ً ﻗﻴﻮﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ.
Blu-ray/DVD ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻔﺮﺽ .1
2. ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ Blu-ray/DVD ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ (ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ)
3. ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.
4. ﺗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ
ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ (ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ، 1080p)، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ
ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ.
ٍ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ 5 ﺛﻮﺍﻥ
ٍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ، ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI. • ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ HDMI ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ HDMI ﺑﺪﻗﺔ 576p/480p/720p/1080i/1080p.
ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ HDMI ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺫﻱ
ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ (HDCP).
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 57 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 57 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:44 013-06-04 오전 10:10:44| 58 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ
ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ/ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ AllShare
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ
ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ AllShare،
ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ AllShare ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ
ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ.
• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ.
• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
• ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ DLNA ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ.
ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ.
ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ AllShare ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ
ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ.
ً ﻓﺮﻳﺪﺍ، ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻀﺎﺭﺏ IP ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ IP ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ
ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ.
ً ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ .
• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ
ًﺎ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻨ
BD-LIVE ﺧﺪﻣﺔ
ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﺩﻡ -BD
.LIVE
ً • ﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﻧﺸﻄ
• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ USB ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻡ ﻻ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ 1 ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 52)
• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ BD-Live ﻋﻠﻰ (ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ (ﻟﻠﻜﻞ).
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ، ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ.
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE،
ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺎ.
• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ 1 ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ BD-LIVE.
ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD. (ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 52)
| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |
ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ BD ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 58 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 58 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:45 013-06-04 오전 10:10:45|
ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ59
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ 07
ﻋﺎﻡ
ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ 3.30 ﻛﺠﻢ
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ 430.00 ﻣﻠﻢ (ﻋﺮﺽ) × 55.00 ﻣﻠﻢ (ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ) × 314.50 ﻣﻠﻢ (ﻋﻤﻖ)
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ C+5° ﺇﻟﻰ C°+35
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ 10 % ﺇﻟﻰ 75 %
ﻣﻮﺍﻟﻒ FM
ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ/ﻧﺴﺒﺔﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء 55 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ
ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ 12 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ
ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ 0.5 %
HDMI
ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ 2160pﻭ1080pﻭ 1080iﻭ 720pﻭ 576p/480p : 2D
1080pﻭ 720p : 3D
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ PCM ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ Bitstream ﻭﺻﻮﺕ PCM
ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ × 3)2 ﺃﻭﻡ)
ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ × 3)2 ﺃﻭﻡ)
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ 170 ﻭﺍﻁ (3 ﺃﻭﻡ)
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ × 3)2 ﺃﻭﻡ)
ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ 170 ﻭﺍﻁ (3 ﺃﻭﻡ)
ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ : ﻣﻦ 20 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ (3± ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ)
ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ : ﻣﻦ 20 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 40 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ (4± ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ)
ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء 70 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ
ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ 60 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ
ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ AUX) 500) ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ
ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 59 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 59 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:46 013-06-04 오전 10:10:46| 60 ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ
• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ 10 ﺑﺎﻳﺖ/ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ.
• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ.
• ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ.
• ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ، ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ.
SWA-6000 ❑
1.1 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ
(ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ) ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻠﻢ 152.4 × 228.6 × 76.2
ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ C+5° ﺇﻟﻰ C°+35
ﻣﻦ 10 % ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ 75 %
165 ﻭﺍﺕ x 2 ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ
ﻣﻦ 20 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ 20 ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
65 ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ
ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ (ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻘﻨﺎﺓ 7.1)
ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ
(ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ : ﻛﻴﻠﻮ
ﺟﺮﺍﻡ)
ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ
(ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ)
(ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ : ﻣﻠﻢ)
ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ
ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ ﻟﻺﺧﺎﻝ
ّ
ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ
ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ
ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ
7.65 90.0 × 1302.0 × 70.0
(ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ: 250 × 250)
87 ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ/ 165 ﻭﺍﻁ 330 ﻭﺍﻁ
ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻣﺘﺮ
ﻣﻦ 140 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ
20 ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
3 ﺃﻭﻡ
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ/
ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ
ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ
6.82 90.0 × 1252.0 × 70.0
(ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ: 250 × 250)
ﻣﺠﺴﻤﺔ
0.98 360 × 70.0 × 65.9
170 ﻭﺍﻁ 340 ﻭﺍﻁ
ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ
6.33 205.6 × 390.6 × 350.6 /ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ 88
ﻭﺍﻁ/ﻣﺘﺮ
ﻣﻦ 40 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ
160 ﻫﺮﺗﺰ
ﻣﻀﺨﻢ
ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ
HHT-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 60 T-F9750W-ZN_UM_ARA_0604.indd 60 22013-06-04 오전 10:10:46 013-06-04 오전 10:10:46HT-F9750W
Merci d'avoir acheté ce produit Samsung.
Pour obtenir notre service complet, veuillez enregistrer votre
produit sur
www.samsung.com/register
Système Home Entertainment
Blu-ray™ 7.1 canaux
Manuel d'utilisation
imaginez les possibilités
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 1 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 1 22013-06-04 오전 10:05:57 013-06-04 오전 10:05:57| 2 Français
Consignes de Sécurité
Avertissement
POUR RÉDUIRE LES RISQUES D’ÉLECTROCUTION, NE RETIREZ JAMAIS LE CAPOT (NI L’ARRIÈRE).
LES PIÈCES DE CE PRODUIT NE SONT PAS RÉPARABLES PAR L’UTILISATEUR. VEUILLEZ CONTACTER UN
TECHNICIEN QUALIFIÉ POUR TOUTE RÉPARATION.
ATTENTION
RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
Ce symbole indique la présence d’une
tension dangereuse dans l’appareil,
présentant un risque d’électrocution
ou de blessures.
ATTENTION : POUR ÉVITER TOUT
RISQUE D’ÉLECTROCUTION, LA
BROCHE LA PLUS LARGE DE LA
FICHE DOIT ÊTRE TOTALEMENT
INSÉRÉE DANS LE TROU PLUS
LARGE.
Ce symbole indique les directives
importantes qui accompagnent le
produit.
AVERTISSEMENT
• Afin de réduire tout risque d’incendie ou d’électrocution,
n’exposez jamais cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.
ATTENTION
• Évitez toute projection d’eau sur l’appareil et ne posez
jamais d’objet contenant un liquide dessus (ex : un
vase).
• La fiche permet de débrancher l’appareil et doit
toujours être facilement accessible.
• Cet appareil doit toujours être branché à une prise de
courant alternatif reliée à la terre.
• Pour débrancher l'appareil, il convient de retirer la fiche
de la prise murale, il faut donc que cette dernière soit
facilement accessible.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
KLASSE 1 LASER PRODUKT
LUOKAN 1 LASER LAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
PRODUCTO LÁSER CLASE 1
PRODUIT LASER DE CLASSE 1
Le lecteur de disque compact est homologué comme
produit LASER DE CLASSE 1.
L'utilisation des commandes, les réglages ou l'exécution
de procédures autres que celles spécifiées ci-dessus
peuvent conduire à une exposition à des radiations
dangereuses.
ATTENTION
DES RAYONS LASER INVISIBLES SONT PRÉSENTS
LORSQUE L'APPAREIL EST OUVERT OU QUE
LES DISPOSITIFS DE VERROUILLAGE SONT
CIRCONVENUS. ÉVITEZ L'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONS.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 2 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 2 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:03 013-06-04 오전 10:06:03Français 3|
01
Consignes de Sécurité
Rangement et gestion des disques
• Comment tenir le disque
- Des empreintes digitales ou des
rayures sur la surface d'un disque
peuvent altérer la qualité du son et
de l’image ou provoquer des sauts.
- Évitez de toucher la surface du disque sur laquelle
les données ont été enregistrées.
- Tenez le disque par les bords afin de ne pas laisser
d’empreintes sur sa surface.
- Ne collez pas de papier ou d’adhésif sur le disque.
• Nettoyage des disques
- En cas d’empreintes ou de saleté sur
un disque, nettoyez-le à l'aide d'eau
additionnée de détergent doux et d’un
chiffon doux.
- Lors de son nettoyage, essuyez le
disque du centre vers le bord.
- Rangement des disques
N’exposez pas le disque à la lumière directe du
soleil.
Stockez-le dans un endroit frais et aéré.
Rangez-le dans une pochette propre et
verticalement.
Précautions de manipulation
• Évitez toute projection d’eau sur l’appareil. Ne posez
jamais d’objet contenant un liquide (ex : un vase)
dessus.
• Pour éteindre complètement l'appareil, vous devez
retirer le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale.
Par conséquent, le cordon d'alimentation doit être
facilement accessible à tout moment.
• Ne tenez pas le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains
mouillées.
Vous risquez de vous exposer à un choc électrique.
• Ne branchez pas plusieurs appareils électriques sur
une prise murale. Surcharger une prise murale peut
provoquer une surchauffe et donc un incendie.
• Entretien du meuble
- Avant de brancher un composant sur cet appareil,
assurez-vous que celui-ci est hors tension.
- Si vous déplacez soudainement l'appareil d'un
endroit froid à un endroit chaud, de la condensation
pourra se former sur les pièces et la lentille, et
occasionner des problèmes de lecture. Dans pareil
cas, débranchez l'appareil et patientez deux heures
avant de le rebrancher sur la prise d’alimentation.
Insérez ensuite le disque et essayez à nouveau de le
lire.
• Si vous entendez un bruit inhabituel ou décelez
un dégagement anormal de fumée ou une odeur
suspecte, coupez immédiatement l’alimentation et
débranchez la fiche électrique de la prise murale.
Puis contactez le service après-vente le plus proche
pour obtenir de l’aide. N’utilisez plus l'appareil. Utiliser
l'appareil en l’état peut provoquer un incendie ou un
choc électrique.
Licence
Fabriqué sous licence par Dolby
Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic et le symbole
représentant deux D sont des
marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories.
Fabriqué sous licence des brevets américains n°
5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535,
6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567,
7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 et
7,548,853. DTS, DTS-HD, le Symbole, et DTS ou
DTS-HD et le Symbole ensemble sont des marques
déposées et DTS Neo:Fusion est une marque
déposée de DTS, Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. Tous droits
réservés.
À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS
DIVX : DivX® est un format
vidéo numérique créé par la
société DivX, LLC, filiale de
Rovi Corporation. Ceci est un appareil DivX Certified®
qui prend en charge la lecture des vidéos DivX. Pour
obtenir les détails et en savoir plus sur les outils
logiciels qui vous permettent de convertir vos fichiers
au format vidéo DivX, consultez le site Web à l’adresse
suivante : divx.com.
À PROPOS DU FORMAT VIDÉO À LA DEMANDE
DIVX : Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré
afin de servir à visionner des films vidéo à la demande
(VOD) au format DivX achetés dans le commerce.
Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, identifiez
l’emplacement de la section DivX VOD dans le menu
de configuration de votre appareil. Allez sur le site
Web vod.divx.com pour obtenir de plus amples
informations sur la procédure d’enregistrement.
Les appareils DivX Certified® peuvent lire des vidéos
DivX® dans une résolution HD de 1080p, y compris
les programmes d’appel.
DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos qui leur sont associés
sont des marques déposées de Rovi Corporation ou
de ses filiales et font l’objet d’une licence. Cette norme
est couverte par un ou plusieurs des brevets américains
suivants : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 3 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 3 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:04 013-06-04 오전 10:06:04| 4 Français
Consignes de Sécurité
Les termes HDMI et HDMI
High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, et le logo HDMI
sont des marques de commerce ou des marques
déposées de HDMI Licensing LLC aux États-Unis et
dans d'autres pays.
Oracle et Java sont des marques
déposées de Oracle et/ou ses filiales.
D'autres noms mentionnés peuvent être
des marques de commerce de leurs
propriétaires respectifs.
Ce produit intègre la technique de protection contre
la copie applicable aux brevets américains ainsi que
d’autres droits de propriété intellectuelle de Rovi
Corporation. Il est interdit de tenter de démonter
l’appareil et d’en étudier le fonctionnement en vue de le
reproduire.
Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ et les logos y afférents
sont des marques de commerce de Blu-ray Disc
Association.
Cet appareil utilise la technologie Cinavia qui limite
l'utilisation de copies non autorisées de certains films et
vidéos ainsi que leurs bandes son disponibles dans le
commerce. Lorsqu'une utilisation interdite d'une copie
non autorisée est détectée, un message s'affiche et la
lecture ou la copie est interrompue.
Pour obtenir de plus amples informations sur la
technologie Cinavia, veuillez consulter le « Cinavia Online
Consumer Information Centre » (Centre d'informations
consommateur en ligne Cinavia) à l'adresse http://
www.cinavia.com. Pour toute demande d'informations
complémentaires par courrier concernant Cinavia,
envoyez une carte postale comportant votre adresse
postale à : Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O.
Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, États-Unis.
Cet appareil intègre une technologie brevetée sous
licence de Verance Corporation et qui est protégée par
le brevet américain 7 369 677 ainsi que par d'autres
brevets américains et internationaux accordés et
en attente ainsi que par des droits d'auteur et une
protection commerciale confidentielle pour certains
aspects de cette technologie. Cinavia est une marque
de commerce de Verance Corporation. Copyright
2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Tous droits réservés
par Verance. Il est interdit de tenter de démonter
l’appareil et d’en étudier le fonctionnement en vue de le
reproduire.
- Avis de licence libre
En cas d'utilisation de logiciels libres, les licences libres
sont disponibles dans le menu du produit.
Utilisation de la fonction 3D
CONSIGNES IMPORTANTES RELATIVES À LA SANTÉ ET
LA SÉCURITÉ EN CAS DE VISIONNAGE D'IMAGES 3D.
Lisez attentivement les consignes de sécurité avant
d'utiliser la fonction 3D.
• Certains utilisateurs peuvent ressentir une gêne en
visionnant des images de télévision en 3D, comme par
exemple des vertiges, des nausées ou des maux de
tête. Dès que vous ressentez l'un de ces symptômes,
arrêtez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D, retirez les
lunettes Active 3D et essayez de vous reposer.
• Le visionnage d'images en 3D sur une période de
temps prolongée peut occasionner une fatigue
oculaire. Dès que vous ressentez une fatigue oculaire,
cessez immédiatement le visionnage en 3D, retirez les
lunettes Active 3D et essayez de vous reposer.
• Des enfants utilisant la fonction 3D doivent être
constamment surveillés par un adulte responsable.
Au moindre signalement de fatigue visuelle, mal de
tête, vertige ou nausée, interrompez immédiatement le
visionnage en 3D par les enfants, et laissez-les se reposer.
• N'utilisez pas les lunettes Active 3D à d'autres fins (comme
lunettes de vue, de soleil ou de protection, par exemple).
• N'utilisez pas la fonction 3D ou les lunettes Active 3D
en marchant ou en bougeant. En utilisant la fonction
3D ou en portant des lunettes Active 3D en cours
de marche ou de mouvement, vous risquez de vous
cogner contre des objets, de trébucher et/ou de
tomber, et de vous blesser gravement.
• Pour bénéficier du visionnage de contenus en 3D,
connectez un appareil 3D (récepteur AV ou téléviseur
compatible 3D) au port de sortie SORTIE HDMI de
l'appareil à l'aide d'un câble HDMI haut débit. Veillez à
porter des lunettes 3D avant de visionner le contenu 3D.
• Le produit émet des signaux 3D uniquement via le
câble HDMI connecté au port de sortie HDMI OUT.
• La résolution de l'image vidéo en mode de lecture 3D
étant déterminée par la définition de l'image vidéo 3D
d'origine, vous ne pourrez pas modifier la résolution de
l'image selon vos préférences.
• Des fonctions telles que BD Wise, l'adaptation de la
taille de l'écran ou le réglage de la résolution peuvent ne
pas fonctionner correctement en mode de lecture 3D.
• Il vous faut obligatoirement utiliser un câble HDMI haut
débit pour garantir une émission appropriée du signal 3D.
• Lorsque vous visionnez des images en 3D, assurezvous de vous tenir éloigné du téléviseur à une distance
équivalente à au moins trois fois la taille de l'écran.
Par exemple, si vous avez un écran 46 pouces, vous
devrez rester à une distance de 3,5 mètres (138
pouces) du téléviseur.
• Positionnez l'écran à hauteur des yeux pour mieux
apprécier l'image en 3D.
• Lorsque l'appareil est connecté à plusieurs appareils
3D, l'effet 3D peut ne pas fonctionner correctement.
• Ce lecteur ne convertit pas de contenus 2D en
contenus 3D.
• « Blu-ray 3D » et le logo « Blu-ray 3D » sont des
marques de commerce de Blu-ray Disc Association.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 4 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 4 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:05 013-06-04 오전 10:06:05Français 5|
01
Consignes de Sécurité
Copyright
© 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Tous droits réservés ; il est interdit de reproduire ou de
copier tout ou partie de ce manuel d'utilisation sans
l'accord préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Sommaire
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ
2 Avertissement
3 Rangement et gestion des disques
3 Précautions de manipulation
3 Licence
4 Utilisation de la fonction 3D
5 Copyright
MISE EN ROUTE
6 Compatibilité des disques et des formats
7 Logos des disques pouvant être lus sur cet
appareil
10 Accessoires
11 Panneau avant
11 Panneau arrière
12 Télécommande
BRANCHEMENTS
14 Connexion des enceintes
17 Connexion de périphériques externes/du téléviseur
18 Connexion à un routeur réseau
PARAMÈTRES
19 Procédure de réglage des paramètres initiaux
19 L’écran Accueil
19 Accéder à l’écran Paramètres
20 Fonctions du menu Paramètres
24 Etalonnage automatique du son
25 Réseaux et Internet
28 Mise à niveau du logiciel
MEDIA PLAY
30 L’écran Tout le contenu
30 Lecture de disques disponibles dans le commerce
30 Lecture de fichiers sur un périphérique USB
31 Lecture d’un disque dont le contenu est enregistré
par l’utilisateur
31 Utilisation de la fonction Réseau AllShare
32 Contrôle de la lecture Vidéo
35 Contrôle de la lecture de Musique
39 Visionnage des photos
40 Ecouter la radio
41 Utilisation des touches de contrôle d’effets
spéciaux de la télécommande
SERVICES RÉSEAU
43 Connexion à votre compte Samsung
43 Avant d’utiliser Films et Émissions de télévision ou
Applications
44 Utilisation de Films et Émissions de télévision
44 Utilisation de Applications
48 Screen Mirroring
48 Utilisation de Navigateur Web
51 Lier vos comptes de service Internet à l’appareil
51 BD-LIVE™
ANNEXES
52 Informations complémentaires
56 Dépannage
59 Caractéristiques techniques
Les figures et les illustrations du présent
Manuel d'utilisation sont fournies à titre de
référence uniquement et peuvent différer de
l'apparence du produit réel.
Des frais supplémentaires pourront vous être
facturés dans les cas suivants :
a. vous demandez l'intervention d'un ingénieur
mais il s'avère que l'appareil ne présente
aucune anomalie (par ex. vous n'avez pas lu
ce Manuel d'utilisation).
b. vous portez l'unité à un centre de
réparation mais il s'avère que celle-ci ne
présente aucune défaillance (par ex. vous
n'avez pas lu ce Manuel d'utilisation).
Le montant de ces frais administratifs vous
sera notifié avant que tout travail ou toute visite
à votre domicile ne soit effectué(e).
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 5 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 5 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:06 013-06-04 오전 10:06:06| 6 Français
Mise en Route
Compatibilité des disques et des formats
Types de disques et contenus pouvant être lus sur cet appareil
Support Type de disque Détails
VIDÉO
Disque Blu-ray
Disque Blu-ray 3D Disque BD-ROM ou BD-RE/-R disc enregistré au format BD-RE.
DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW,
DVD-R, DVD+RW,
DVD+R
DVD-VIDEO, disques DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R enregistrés
qui ont été enregistrés et finalisés, ou un support de stockage USB
possédant des contenus DivX, MKV, MP4.
MUSIQUE
CD-RW/-R,
DVD-RW/-R,
BD-RE/-R
Musique enregistrée sur des disques CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R
ou un support de stockage USB possédant des contenus MP3 ou WMA.
PHOTO
CD-RW/-R,
DVD-RW/-R,
BD-RE/-R
Photos enregistrées sur des disques CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R
ou un support de stockage USB possédant des contenus JPEG.
| REMARQUE |
Selon le type de disque ou les conditions d'enregistrement, il se peut que certains disques CD-RW/-R et DVD-R ne
puissent pas être lus sur cet appareil.
Si un disque DVD-RW/-R n'a pas été enregistré correctement au format vidéo DVD, il ne pourra pas être lu.
Votre appareil ne lit pas les contenus ayant été enregistrés sur un disque DVD-R selon un débit binaire dépassant les
10 Mbps.
Il ne lit pas les contenus ayant été enregistrés sur un disque BD-R ou un périphérique USB selon un débit binaire
dépassant les 30 Mbps.
La lecture peut être inopérante sur certains types de disque ou lorsque vous effectuez des opérations spécifiques
telles que les changements d'angle ou le réglage du format de l'image. Des informations détaillées concernant le
disque sont inscrites sur le boîtier. Consultez-les si nécessaire.
Lors de la lecture d'un titre BD-J, il se peut que le chargement prenne plus de temps que pour un titre normal et que
certaines fonctions s'exécutent plus lentement que d'habitude.
Types de disques ne pouvant pas être lus sur cet appareil
• HD DVD
• Disque DVD-ROM/PD/
MV, etc.
• DVD-RAM
• CD Super Audio
(à l'exception de la
couche CD)
• DVD-RW (mode VR)
• CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/
CD-G/CD-I/LD (Les CD-G
lisent des données audio
uniquement et non des
données graphiques.)
• Disque DVD-R 3,9 Go
enregistrable.
| REMARQUE |
Il se peut que l'appareil ne réponde pas à toutes les commandes car certains disques Blu-ray, DVD et CD ne
permettent qu'un fonctionnement limité ou spécifique et offrent certaines fonctions seulement lors de la lecture.
Nous attirons votre attention sur le fait qu'il ne s'agit pas d'un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil.
Samsung ne peut garantir que cet appareil pourra lire tous les disques portant les logos Blu-ray, DVD ou CD car les
formats évoluent et des problèmes et erreurs peuvent se produire lors de la création d'un logiciel BD, DVD et CD et/
ou la fabrication du disque.
Veuillez contacter le service après-vente de SAMSUNG pour toute question ou tout problème concernant la lecture
des disques Blu-ray, DVD ou CD sur cet appareil. Vous pouvez également vous reporter au manuel d'utilisation pour
obtenir plus d'informations sur les restrictions en matière de lecture.
Il se peut que certains disques et DVD du commerce achetés en dehors de votre zone ne puissent pas être lus sur
cet appareil.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 6 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 6 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:07 013-06-04 오전 10:06:07Français 7|
02
Mise en Route
Code régional
Les produits et les disques sont codés par région.
Ces codes régionaux doivent correspondre pour que le
disque puisse être lu. Si les codes ne correspondent pas,
le disque ne sera pas lu.
Le code régional de ce lecteur figure sur le panneau
arrière de l’appareil.
Type de
disque
Code
régional Zone
Disque
Blu-ray
A
Amérique du Nord, Amérique
centrale, Amérique du Sud,
Corée, Japon, Taïwan, Hong
Kong et Sud-Est asiatique.
B
Europe, Groenland, France
d'outre-mer, Moyen-Orient,
Afrique, Australie et NouvelleZélande.
C
Inde, Chine, Russie, Asie
centrale et Asie du Sud.
DVD VIDÉO
1
États-Unis, Territoires
organisés des États-Unis et
Canada
2
Europe, Japon, Moyen-Orient,
Égypte, Afrique, Groenland
3
Taïwan, Corée, Philippines,
Indonésie, Hong Kong
4
Mexique, Amérique du Sud,
Amérique centrale, Australie,
Nouvelle-Zélande, Îles du
Pacifique, Caraïbes
5
Russie, Europe de l’Est, Inde,
Corée du Nord, Mongolie
6
Chine
| REMARQUE |
Si le code régional d'un disque Blu-ray/DVD ne
correspond pas à celui de l'appareil, ce dernier ne
peut pas lire le disque.
Logos des disques pouvant être
lus sur cet appareil
Disque Blu-ray Disque Blu-ray 3D
BD-LIVE Dolby
DTS
Norme de lecture PAL au
Royaume-Uni, en France, en
Allemagne, etc.
DivX
Java
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 7 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 7 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:07 013-06-04 오전 10:06:07| 8 Français
Mise en Route
Formats pris en charge
Prise en charge des fichiers vidéo
Extension de
fichier Conteneur Codec vidéo Résolution
(Définition)
Vitesse de
défilement
(FPS)
Débit binaire
(Mbps) Codec audio
*.avi
*.mkv
*.asf
*.wmv
*.mp4
*.3gp
*.vro
*.mpg
*.mpeg
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
*.mov
*.flv
*.vob
*.svi
*.m2ts
*.mts
*.divx
AVI
MKV
ASF
MP4
3GP
MOV
FLV
VRO
VOB
PS
TS
SVAF
Divx 3.11 / 4
/ 5 / 6
1920x1080
(WMV v7,v8,
MSMPEG4 v3 :
1280x720)
6~30 30
Dolby Digital
LPCM
ADPCM
(IMA, MS)
AAC
HE-AAC
WMA
Dolby Digital
Plus
MPEG(MP3)
DTS (Core)
MPEG4 SP/ASP
H.264 BP/
MP/HP
Motion JPEG
Microsoft
MPEG-4 v3
Window Media
Video v7, v8, v9
MPEG2
MPEG1
VP6 640x480 - 4
MVC - 24/25/30 60
*.webm WebM VP8 1920x1080 6~30 20 Vorbis
Limitations
- Même lorsque le fichier est codé selon un codec pris
en charge énuméré ci-dessus, ce fichier pourra ne pas
être lu si son contenu est défectueux ou corrompu.
- La lecture normale ne sera pas garantie si les
informations relatives au conteneur du fichier sont
erronées ou si le fichier lui-même est corrompu.
- Les fichiers ayant un débit binaire ou une vitesse de
défilement supérieur(e) à la normale peuvent présenter
des discontinuités lors de la lecture.
- La fonction Recherche (Saut) sera indisponible si la
table d'indexage du fichier est corrompue.
- Lors de la lecture d'un fichier à distance via une
connexion réseau, la lecture vidéo peut présenter des
discontinuités en fonction de la vitesse du réseau.
- Le lecteur peut ne pas être pas compatible avec certains
périphériques USB ou certaines caméras numériques.
Décodeur vidéo
- Prend en charge le format H.264 de niveau 4.1 (sauf
pour FMO/ASO/RS)
- Ne prend pas en charge les formats VC1 AP L4
- Sauf pour WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, VP6
Inférieure à 1280 x 720 : 60 images maxi.
Supérieure à 1280 x 720 : 30 images maxi.
- Ne prend pas en charge le format GMC 2 ou supérieur
- Prend en charge les formats SVAF Supérieur/Inférieur,
Côte à côte uniquement
- Prend en charge le format BD MVC Spec. uniquement
Décodeur audio
- Prend en charge le format WMA 10 Pro (jusqu'à 5.1)
- Ne prend pas en charge le format audio sans perte WMA.
- ADPCM IMA, MS pris en charge.
- Ne prend pas en charge le format ADPCM (A-Law, μ-Low)
- Ne prend pas en charge les formats QCELP, AMR NB/WB
- Prend en charge le format vorbis (jusqu'à 2 ca),
- Prend en charge le Dolby Digital Plus (jusqu'à 7.1 ca)
Observations
- MPEG4 : Prend en charge le format GMC 1-Warping
Point.
- H.264 : Prend en charge le format BP/MP/HP de
niveau 4.1.
- WMV : Prend en charge V9, VC1 SP/MP/AP L3.
- MPEG1 : Ne prend pas D-picture en charge.
- MPEG2 : Prend en charge jusqu'à Hight Profile High
Level.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 8 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 8 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:09 013-06-04 오전 10:06:09Français 9|
02
Mise en Route
❑ Formats des fichiers de sous-titrage DivX pris en
charge
*.ttxt, *.smi, *.srt, *.sub, *.txt
| REMARQUE |
Il est possible que certains disques de format MKV ou
MP4 ne puissent pas être lus, selon la résolution de
l’image vidéo et sa vitesse de défilement.
Prise en charge des fichiers musicaux
Extension
de fichier Conteneur Codec
audio
Plage de prise en
charge
*.mp3 MPEG
MPEG1
Audio
Layer 3
-
*.m4a
*.mpa
*.aac
MPEG4 AAC -
*.flac FLAC FLAC Prend en charge
jusqu'à 2 ca
*.ogg OGG Vorbis Prend en charge
jusqu'à 2 ca
*.wma WMA WMA
Prend en charge
le format WMA 10
Pro (jusqu'à 5.1)
Ne prend pas en
charge le format
audio sans perte
WMA
Prend en charge
jusqu’au profil M2
Ne prend pas en
charge le mode
LBR
*.wav wav wav -
*.mid
*.midi midi midi type 0 et type 1
*.ape ape ape
Ne prend pas en
charge les formats
X13, NVT
Prise en charge de fichier image
Extension de
fichier Type Résolution
(Définition)
*.jpg
*.jpeg JPEG 15360x8640
*.png PNG 4096x4096
*.bmp BMP 4096x4096
*.mpo MPO 15360x8640
Remarques sur la connexion USB
• Cet appareil prend en charge les supports de stockage
USB, les lecteurs MP3, les caméras numériques et les
lecteurs de carte USB.
• Cet appareil ne gère pas les noms de dossier ou de
ficher dépassant 128 caractères.
• Il peut ne pas être compatible avec certains
périphériques USB ou certaines caméras numériques.
• Il prend en charge les systèmes de fichiers FAT 16, FAT
32 et NTFS
• Effectuez la connexion des périphériques USB
directement au port USB de l'appareil. La connexion
via un câble USB peut causer des problèmes de
compatibilité.
• L’insertion de plusieurs périphériques de mémoire
dans un lecteur multicarte peut entraîner le
dysfonctionnement de celui-ci.
• L'appareil ne prend pas en charge le protocole PTP.
• Ne déconnectez pas un périphérique USB durant un
processus de « chargement ».
• Plus la résolution de l’image est élevée, plus le délai
d'affichage de cette image est long.
• Cet appareil ne peut pas lire les fichiers MP3 de type
DRM (Gestion des droits numériques) téléchargés
depuis des sites commerciaux.
• Votre appareil ne prend en charge que les vidéos dont la
vitesse de défilement des images est inférieure à 30 fps.
• Il ne prend en charge que les périphériques de classe de
stockage de masse (MSC) USB tels que les clés USB et
les disques durs USB. (HUB n'est pas disponible.)
• Certains disques durs USB, lecteurs multicartes et clés
USB peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec cet appareil.
• Si certains périphériques USB requièrent une
puissance excessive, ils pourront être limités par le
dispositif de sécurité du circuit.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 9 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 9 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:10 013-06-04 오전 10:06:10| 10 Français
Mise en Route
• Si la lecture à partir d'un disque dur USB est instable, fournissez-lui une alimentation supplémentaire en branchant le
disque dur dans une prise murale. Si le problème persiste, contactez le fabricant du disque dur USB.
• SAMSUNG ne peut être tenu responsable de la corruption de fichiers de données ou de la perte de données.
AVCHD (Codec vidéo avancé haute définition)
• Cet appareil prend en charge les disques au format AVCHD. Ces disques sont normalement enregistrés et lus sur des
caméscopes.
• Le format AVCHD est un format vidéo numérique haute définition.
• Le format MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 compresse les images de manière plus efficace que le format de compression
d'image conventionnel.
• Certains disques AVCHD utilisent le format « x.v.Colour ». Cet appareil peut lire les disques AVCHD faisant appel au
format « x.v.Colour ».
• « x.v.Colour » est une marque de commerce de Sony Corporation.
• « AVCHD » et le logo AVCHD sont des marques de commerce de Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. et de
Sony Corporation.
| REMARQUE |
En fonction des conditions d’enregistrement, il est possible que certains disques au format AVCHD ne puissent pas
être lus.
Les disques au format AVCHD doivent être finalisés.
Le format « x.v.Colour » offre une gamme de couleurs plus large qu’un DVD de caméscope normal.
Il est possible que certains disques de format DivX, MKV ou MP4 ne puissent pas être lus, selon leur résolution d’image
vidéo et leur vitesse de défilement.
Accessoires
Vérifiez que les accessoires ci-dessous sont fournis.
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
MUTE
TV
SOUND
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP
TV
HOME
VOL TUNING
/ CH
FUNCTION
TV/SOURCE
3D
SOUND
SOUND
EFFECT SEARCH SMART
HUB
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
BD
RECEIVER
Manuel d'utilisation Câble HDMI Microphone ASC
Antenne FM Câble d'alimentation Chiffon doux Télécommande/
Piles (taille AAA)
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 10 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 10 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:10 013-06-04 오전 10:06:10Français 11|
02
Mise en Route
Panneau avant
HIGH-END VACUUM TUBE SOUND
5V
0.5A
FONCTION
ARRÊT OUVERTURE/FERMETURE
MARCHE/
ARRÊT
LECTURE/PAUSE
TIROIR DISQUE
AMPLIFICATEUR À TUBE À VIDE
RÉGLAGE DU VOLUME
CAPTEUR DE LA TÉLÉCOMMANDE ÉCRAN USB
| REMARQUE |
Les téléphones portables ou les périphériques mobiles placés à proximité de l’amplificateur à tube à vide ou des
dispositifs électroniques posés sur l’appareil peuvent provoquer des bruits parasites ou une distorsion.
Tenez l’appareil hors de portée des enfants lorsqu’il est sous tension afin d’éviter tout risque de brûlure.
Pour mettre à niveau le logiciel de l’appareil via la prise USB, vous devez utiliser une clé USB à mémoire flash.
Lorsque l'appareil affiche le menu du disque Blu-ray, vous ne pouvez pas lancer la vidéo en appuyant sur le bouton
6 situé sur l'appareil ou la télécommande. Pour lire la vidéo, sélectionnez Lire la vidéo ou Démarrer dans le menu
du disque puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Si vous utilisez le service Internet ou si le contenu du périphérique USB est lu sur le téléviseur, vous ne pouvez
pas sélectionner le mode BD/DVD avec le bouton FUNCTION. Arrêtez tout d'abord la lecture du contenu sur le
téléviseur pour sélectionner le mode BD/DVD.
Panneau arrière
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
PRISES DE SORTIE DES
ENCEINTES
VENTILATEUR
ENTRÉE AUX
* ANTENNE FM
SORTIE HDMI ENTREE
HDMI
ENTRÉE ASC
PRISE LAN
ENTRÉE AUDIO NUMÉRIQUE
EXTÉRIEURE (OPTIQUE)
CORDON
D'ALIMENTATION
* Connexion de l’antenne FM
1. Branchez l’antenne FM fournie dans la prise FM ANT (ANTENNE FM).
2. Déplacez progressivement le fil de l’antenne jusqu’à trouver une position dans laquelle la réception est de qualité,
fixez-le ensuite solidement à un mur ou une autre surface solide.
| REMARQUE |
Veillez à prévoir un minimum d'espace libre de 10 cm sur tous les côtés du Home cinéma dans le but de garantir une
ventilation appropriée. Veuillez à ne pas obstruer le ventilateur ou les orifices d’aération.
Cet appareil ne reçoit pas les émissions AM.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 11 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 11 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:13 013-06-04 오전 10:06:13| 12 Français
Mise en Route
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
MUTE
TV
SOUND
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP
TV
HOME
VOL TUNING
/ CH
FUNCTION
TV/SOURCE
3D
SOUND
SOUND
EFFECT SEARCH SMART
HUB
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
BD
RECEIVER
Télécommande
Boîtier de la télécommande
Permet d'allumer et d'éteindre l'appareil.
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour
ouvrir et fermer le tiroir disque.
Permet d'émettre le signal audio
vers les enceintes du Home
cinéma ou l'enceinte du téléviseur.
(Reportez-vous en page 42)
Permet de régler le niveau du
caisson de basses.
Permet de sélectionner le mode
Home cinéma (HDMI1, AUX, BD/
DVD, etc.).
ou
Appuyez ici pour sélectionner le
mode vidéo du téléviseur. Permet d’activer ou de désactiver
l’éclairage de la télécommande. Lorsqu’il
est activé, les boutons s’allument un
instant lorsqu’ils sont pressés. (Utiliser
la télécommande avec ce bouton activé
réduit la durée d’utilisation de la batterie.)
Si vous souhaitez changer le mode
Home Cinéma sur la télécommande,
vérifiez la couleur de la DEL du bouton.
- Home Cinéma : Orange
- TV : Verte
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
passer à l’écran Accueil.
Permet de régler l'heure de mise
en veille de l'appareil.
Appuyez sur les touches
numériques pour commander les
options.
Appuyez sur ces touches pour
effectuer un saut vers l'arrière ou
l'avant.
Permet de régler le volume.
Permet de couper le son
momentanément.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
visualiser le menu du disque.
Appuyez ici pour arrêter ou
démarrer la lecture d'un disque.
Sélectionnez les éléments de menu
à l’écran, puis changez la valeur du
menu sélectionné.
Permet de revenir au menu
précédent.
Ces touches sont utilisées à la
fois pour les menus de l'appareil
et certaines fonctions liées aux
disques Blu-ray.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
utiliser le menu Outils.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
utiliser Smart Hub.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
rechercher du contenu.
Appuyez sur ces touches pour
effectuer une recherche vers l'arrière
ou l'avant.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
suspendre la lecture d’un disque.
Permet de rechercher les stations FM
actives et de changer les canaux en
conséquence.
Permet d'accéder au menu
contextuel/menu titre.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
appliquer les effets sonores.
Permet de sélectionner les réglages
MONO ou STEREO pour les
radiodiffusions.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
quitter le menu.
Permet d'afficher les informations
relatives à la lecture, en cours de
lecture d'un disque Blu-ray/DVD.
Permet de configurer une fréquence
radio préréglée.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour
appliquer l'effet sonore 3D.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 12 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 12 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:15 013-06-04 오전 10:06:15Français 13|
02
Mise en Route
Insertion des piles dans la télécommande
Taille des piles : AAA
1 2
| REMARQUE |
Veillez à faire correspondre les extrémités « + » et
« - » des piles avec le dessin situé à l’intérieur du
compartiment.
Sur la base d’une utilisation classique, la durée de vie
des piles est d’environ un an.
La portée de la télécommande en ligne droite est
d'environ 7 mètres par rapport à l'appareil.
Réglage de la télécommande
Vous pouvez contrôler certaines fonctions de votre
téléviseur à l’aide de cette télécommande.
Faire fonctionner un téléviseur à l’aide de la
télécommande
1. Appuyez sur la touche TV pour régler la
télécommande en mode TV.
2. Allumez votre téléviseur.
3. Tout en maintenant la touche MARCHE/ARRÊT
appuyée, saisissez le code correspondant à la
marque de votre téléviseur.
• Si plusieurs codes correspondant à votre
téléviseur figurent dans le tableau, saisissez-les
les uns après les autres afin de déterminer quel
code fonctionne.
• Exemple : Dans le cas d'un televiseur
Samsung
Tout en maintenant la touche MARCHE/ARRÊT
appuyée, utilisez les touches numériques pour
saisir 00. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, essayez 15,
puis 16, etc.
4. Si le téléviseur s'éteint, le réglage est terminé.
• Vous pouvez utiliser les touches MARCHE/
ARRÊT TV, VOLUME, CANAL ainsi que les
touches numériques (0 à 9).
| REMARQUE |
Il est possible que la télécommande ne soit pas
compatible avec certaines marques de téléviseurs.
Il est également possible que certaines fonctions ne
puissent pas être activées en fonction de la marque
de votre téléviseur.
La télécommande fonctionne par défaut avec les
téléviseurs Samsung.
Codes TV utilisables
Marque Code
Admiral
(M.Wards) 56, 57, 58
A Mark 01, 15
Anam 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07,
08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
AOC 01, 18, 40, 48
Bell & Howell
(M.Wards) 57, 58, 81
Brocsonic 59, 60
Candle 18
Cetronic 03
Citizen 03, 18, 25
Cinema 97
Classic 03
Concerto 18
Contec 46
Coronado 15
Craig 03, 05, 61, 82, 83, 84
Croslex 62
Crown 03
Curtis Mates 59, 61, 63
CXC 03
Daewoo
02, 03, 04, 15, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34,
35, 36, 48, 59, 90
Daytron 40
Dynasty 03
Emerson 03, 15, 40, 46, 59, 61, 64,
82, 83, 84, 85
Fisher 19, 65
Funai 03
Futuretech 03
General Electric
(GE) 06, 40, 56, 59, 66, 67, 68
Hall Mark 40
Hitachi 15, 18, 50, 59, 69
Inkel 45
JC Penny 56, 59, 67, 86
JVC 70
KTV 59, 61, 87, 88
KEC 03, 15, 40
KMC 15
LG (Goldstar) 01, 15, 16, 17, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 43, 44
Luxman 18
LXI (Sears) 19, 54, 56, 59, 60, 62, 63,
65, 71
Magnavox 15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 60,
62, 72, 89
Marantz 40, 54
Matsui 54
MGA 18, 40
Marque Code
Mitsubishi/MGA 18, 40, 59, 60, 75
MTC 18
NEC 18, 19, 20, 40, 59, 60
Nikei 03
Onking 03
Onwa 03
Panasonic 06, 07, 08, 09, 54, 66,
67, 73, 74
Penney 18
Philco 03, 15, 17, 18, 48, 54,
59, 62, 69, 90
Philips 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54,
62, 72
Pioneer 63, 66, 80, 91
Portland 15, 18, 59
Proton 40
Quasar 06, 66, 67
Radio Shack 17, 48, 56, 60, 61, 75
RCA/Proscan 18, 59, 67, 76, 77, 78,
92, 93, 94
Realistic 03, 19
Sampo 40
Samsung
00, 15, 16, 17, 40, 43,
46, 47, 48, 49,
59, 60, 98
Sanyo 19, 61, 65
Scott 03, 40, 60, 61
Sears 15, 18, 19
Sharp 15, 57, 64
Signature 2000
(M.Wards) 57, 58
Sony 50, 51, 52, 53, 55
Soundesign 03, 40
Spectricon 01
SSS 18
Sylvania 18, 40, 48, 54, 59, 60,
62
Symphonic 61, 95, 96
Tatung 06
Techwood 18
Teknika 03, 15, 18, 25
TMK 18, 40
Toshiba 19, 57, 63, 71
Vidtech 18
Videch 59, 60, 69
Wards 15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54,
60, 64
Yamaha 18
York 40
Yupiteru 03
Zenith 58, 79
Zonda 01
Dongyang 03, 54
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 13 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 13 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:16 013-06-04 오전 10:06:16| 14 Français
Branchements
Dans ce chapitre, vous trouverez plusieurs méthodes vous expliquant comment connecter votre appareil à d’autres
composants externes. Avant de déplacer ou d'installer l'appareil, éteignez-le et débranchez le cordon d'alimentation.
Connexion des enceintes
Module de
réception sans fil
Ambiophonique (G)
Appareil Ambiophonique (D)
Enceinte
Caisson de centrale
graves
Avant/
Supérieur
avant (G)
Avant/
Supérieur
avant (D)
Position de l’appareil
Posez-le sur un support, sur une étagère
ou sous un meuble TV.
Choix de la position d’écoute
La position d’écoute doit être située à
une distance équivalente à environ 2,5
à 3 fois la taille de l’écran du téléviseur.
Si vous avez par exemple un écran 46
pouces, situez les positions d’écoute
entre 2,92 et 3,5 m de l'écran.
Enceintes avant/
supérieure avant
Placez les enceintes face à votre position d’écoute en les orientant vers vous (d’environ 45°).
Positionnez-les de manière à ce que les haut-parleurs d’aigus se situent à la hauteur de vos
oreilles. Alignez la face avant des enceintes avant/supérieure avant avec la face avant de
l’enceinte centrale ou avancez-les légèrement par rapport à l’enceinte centrale.
Enceinte centrale Il est préférable d’installer l’enceinte centrale à la même hauteur que les enceintes avant/
supérieure avant. Vous pouvez également l’installer directement sur ou sous le téléviseur.
Enceintes
ambiophoniques
Placez les enceintes ambiophoniques de chaque côté de votre position d’écoute. Si vous
ne disposez pas d’assez de place, positionnez-les face à face. Elles doivent être situées à
environ 60 à 90 cm de vos oreilles et légèrement inclinées vers le sol.
* Contrairement aux enceintes avant/supérieure avant et centrale, les enceintes
ambiophoniques servent principalement pour les effets sonores. Elles n’émettent donc pas
de son en permanence.
Caisson de graves La position du caisson de graves n’a pas d’importance. Vous pouvez l’installer où vous voulez.
* Les enceintes ambiophoniques doivent être reliées au module de réception sans fil.
Accessoires des enceintes
SWA-6000
Module de réception
Caisson de basse sans fil
Câble d’enceinte x 2
Ambiophonique
x 2
Avant/Supérieur
avant x 2
Centre
Vis (5x20) x 16
Pied x 4 Socle x 4
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 14 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 14 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:17 013-06-04 오전 10:06:17Français 15|
03
Branchements
Installation des enceintes sur le pied type Tallboy
1. Redressez le câble pour enceinte et insérez-le dans l’orifice
sur le socle.
2. Retournez le socle et emboîtez-le sur le pied.
3. Utilisez un tournevis pour insérer les vis dans les 3 orifices
repérés.
4. Branchez l'enceinte supérieure au pied ainsi monté.
5. À l’aide d’un tournevis, serrez une vis dans le sens des
aiguilles d'une montre dans le trou situé à l’arrière de
l’enceinte.
6. Voici à quoi ressemble le haut-parleur une fois celui-ci
installé. Respectez cette procédure pour installer l’autre
enceinte.
Connexion des enceintes
1. Chaque ensemble de câble d'enceinte doit être relié à l'enceinte correspondante.
Pour cela, la prise avec le codage couleur sur chaque ensemble doit correspondre à
l'autocollant coloré situé sur la face inférieure de chaque enceinte.
2. Pour fixer le câble d'enceinte à chaque enceinte :
a. Appuyez sur la languette rouge située à l’arrière de l’enceinte, insérez le câble rouge,
puis relâchez la languette.
b. Appuyez sur la languette noire située à l’arrière de l’enceinte, insérez le câble noir,
puis relâchez la languette.
3. Branchez les fiches des câbles de chaque enceinte à l’arrière de l'appareil en respectant
les couleurs entre les fiches et les prises femelles des enceintes.
4. Connectez les enceintes ambiophoniques gauche et droite au module de réception sans fil. À nouveau, respectez
la correspondance entre la couleur des fiches et celle des prises du module de réception sans fil.
5. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation du module de réception sans fil à la prise murale.
6. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. L’appareil et le module de réception sans fil communiquent à présent entre eux et le
son est émis par les enceintes ambiophoniques.
Noir Rouge
4
Enceinte
Pied
6
Socle
Pied
1 2
3
5
ou
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 15 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 15 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:21 013-06-04 오전 10:06:21| 16 Français
Branchements
ASC IN SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
T
L
N
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
Enceintes avant/
supérieure avant (G)
Enceintes avant/
supérieure avant (D)
* Ce produit doit être connecté au module SWA-6000 uniquement.
Enceinte
ambiophonique (G)
Enceinte
ambiophonique (D)
Caisson de
graves
Enceinte
centrale
Module de réception sans fil
| ATTENTION |
Si vous souhaitez installer l'appareil au mur, fixez les vis ou les clous fermement au mur et utilisez pour l'installation
les orifices situés à l'arrière de l'enceinte.
Cependant, lorsque vous installez l'appareil au mur, les accessoires (clous ou vis) et l'installation ne sont pas fournis
par notre entreprise.
Ne laissez pas jouer des enfants avec ou à proximité des enceintes. Ils peuvent se blesser en cas de chute d'une
enceinte.
Lors du raccordement des câbles d'enceinte aux enceintes, assurez-vous que la polarité (+/ –) est correcte.
Conservez l'enceinte de caisson de graves hors de portée des enfants afin d'éviter qu'ils ne mettent leurs mains ou
des objets étrangers dans le conduit (orifice) de l'enceinte du caisson de graves.
N'accrochez pas le caisson de graves au mur à l'aide du conduit (orifice).
L’antenne de réception sans fil est intégrée au module de réception sans fil. Maintenez l’appareil à l’abri de l’eau et
de l’humidité.
Pour un résultat d’écoute optimal, assurez-vous que la zone autour du module de réception sans fil est bien dégagée.
Si aucun son n’est émis par les enceintes ambiophoniques sans fil, basculez en mode Dolby Pro Logic II.
En mode 2-CH, aucun son n’est émis par les enceintes ambiophoniques sans fil.
| REMARQUE |
Si vous placez une enceinte à proximité de votre téléviseur, la couleur des images peut être déformée en raison du
champ magnétique.
Placez le module de réception sans fil en arrière de la position d’écoute. Si le module de réception sans fil est situé
trop près de l’appareil, le son émis par les enceintes peut être interrompu en raison d’interférences.
Si un appareil du type four à micro-ondes, carte LAN sans fil, dispositif Bluetooth ou tout autre appareil fonctionnant
sur des fréquences 2,4/5,8 GHz est installé à proximité du produit, des interférences risquent de se produire dans les
haut-parleurs.
La distance maximale de transmission entre l’appareil et le module de réception sans fil est d’environ 10 m, mais elle
peut varier en fonction de l’environnement de fonctionnement. Si l’appareil et le module de réception sans fil sont
séparés par un mur en béton armé ou en métal, le système est susceptible de ne pas fonctionner du tout, car l'onde
radio ne traverse pas le métal.
Si l'appareil n’établit pas de connexion sans fil, vous devez exécuter un réglage ID entre l'appareil et le module de
réception sans fil. Éteignez l’appareil, puis appuyez sur les touches « 0 »« 1 »« 3 »« 5 » de la télécommande.
Allumez le module de réception sans fil. Puis, appuyez sur le bouton « ID SET » situé à l'arrière du module de
réception sans fil et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant 5 secondes. Enfin, mettez l’appareil sous tension.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 16 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 16 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:24 013-06-04 오전 10:06:24Français 17|
03
Branchements
Connexion de périphériques externes/du téléviseur
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
LAN
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
HDMI IN HDMI OUT AUDIO OUT OPTICAL OUT
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO IN
L
R
Méthode 1 Méthode 2 Méthode 3
R
Rouge
W
Blanc
Périphériques
externes
Connexion de l'appareil à un téléviseur
À l'aide d'un câble HDMI, connectez la prise HDMI OUT située à l'arrière de l'appareil à la prise HDMI IN de votre
téléviseur. Si vous avez réglé la télécommande de l'appareil de manière à ce qu'elle fonctionne avec votre téléviseur,
appuyez sur le bouton TV SOURCE de la télécommande et sélectionnez HDMI comme source externe du téléviseur.
Connexion de périphériques externes
Pour sélectionner le mode correct pour un périphérique externe, appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION. Chaque appui sur
cette touche change le mode selon cet ordre : BD/DVD D. IN AUX HDMI1 HDMI2 FM BT
Méthode 1 ENTRÉE HDMI : Connexion d'un composant externe à l'aide d'un câble HDMI
À l'aide d'un câble HDMI, connectez la prise HDMI IN située à l'arrière de l'appareil à la prise HDMI OUT de votre
périphérique numérique. Sélectionnez le mode HDMI1 ou HDMI2.
Méthode 2 ENTRÉE AUX : Connexion d’un composant analogique externe
En utilisant un câble audio RCA (non fourni), connectez la prise d'Entrée AUDIO située sur l'appareil à la prise de Sortie
AUDIO située sur le composant analogique externe. Sélectionnez le mode AUX.
• Assurez-vous de faire correspondre les couleurs des fiches des câbles avec celles des prises d'entrée et de sortie.
Méthode 3 OPTIQUE : Connexion d’un composant audio numérique externe
Pour connecter la sortie audio numérique des composants à signaux numériques tels que les récepteurs câble/satellite
(décodeur). Connectez la prise d'entrée audio numérique optique de l'appareil à la prise de sortie optique numérique du
périphérique numérique externe à l'aide d'un câble optique numérique (non fourni). Sélectionnez le mode D. IN.
| REMARQUE |
Pour visionner un film depuis votre récepteur câble/satellite, vous devez connecter sa prise de sortie vidéo
directement à votre téléviseur.
Ce système prend en charge les fréquences d’échantillonnage numériques de 32 kHz minimum provenant de
composants numériques externes.
Ce système prend en charge uniquement les données audionumériques DTS et Dolby. Les données audio MPEG,
un format type train de bits n'est pas pris en charge.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 17 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 17 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:25 013-06-04 오전 10:06:25| 18 Français
Branchements
Connexion à un routeur réseau
Vous pouvez connecter votre appareil à votre routeur
réseau en utilisant l'une des méthodes illustrées cidessous.
Réseau câblé
HDMI OUT 1 HDMI IN 2
ASC IN
LAN
POWER
SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRONT TOP L
FRONT TOP R
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
Service large
bande
Service large
bande
Modem large bande
(avec routeur intégré)
Modem large
bande
Routeur
Ou
| REMARQUE |
Votre routeur ou la politique de votre fournisseur de
services Internet peut empêcher l’accès de l’appareil
au serveur de mise à jour du logiciel Samsung. Si cela
se produit, contactez votre fournisseur de services
Internet pour plus d’informations.
Les utilisateurs DSL doivent passer par un routeur
pour la connexion au réseau.
Pour utiliser la fonction AllShare, vous devez
connecter l’ordinateur au réseau, tel qu’indiqué sur les
illustrations ci-dessus.
La connexion peut être câblée ou sans fil.
Réseau sans fil
Dispositif de
partage IP sans fil
Service large
bande
| REMARQUE |
Si le dispositif de partage IP sans fil prend en charge
le protocole DHCP, votre appareil pourra utiliser
une adresse DHCP ou une adresse IP fixe pour la
connexion au réseau sans fil.
Réglez le routeur IP sans fil en mode Infrastructure. Le
mode Ad-hoc n'est pas pris en charge.
L'appareil ne prend en charge que les protocoles de
clé de sécurité sans fil suivants :
- WEP (OPEN/SHARED), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
Sélectionnez un canal qui est actuellement non utilisé
sur le routeur IP sans fil. Si le canal défini pour le
routeur IP sans fil est en cours d’utilisation par un
autre périphérique à proximité, il pourra en résulter
des interférences et un échec de communication.
Conformément aux nouvelles spécifications de
certification Wi-Fi, le Home cinéma ne prend pas en
charge le cryptage de sécurité en réseau WEP, TKIP
ou TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixte) lorsque le mode 802.11n
est en cours.
Par nature, le réseau LAN peut provoquer des
interférences, selon les conditions de fonctionnement
(performance du point d'accès, distance, obstacles,
interférences avec d'autres appareils radio, etc.).
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 18 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 18 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:27 013-06-04 오전 10:06:27Français 19|
04
Paramètres
Procédure de réglage des
paramètres initiaux
• Le menu Accueil n'apparaîtra pas si vous ne
configurez pas les paramètres initiaux.
• L'affichage à l'écran (OSD) peut changer sur cet
appareil après la mise à niveau de la version du logiciel.
• Les étapes d'accès peuvent varier selon le menu
sélectionné.
La procédure des paramètres initiaux vous permet de
définir les langues du menu et de l'affichage à l'écran.
Configurez la connexion à votre réseau domestique,
sélectionnez la sortie du format de l'image (taille et format
d'écran) correspondant à votre téléviseur, puis effectuez
la mise à niveau du logiciel de l'appareil, s'il en existe une
version disponible. Pour obtenir les instructions complètes
sur les paramètres initiaux, suivez les instructions à l'écran.
| REMARQUE |
Si vous souhaitez afficher à nouveau l'écran des
paramètres initiaux afin d'y effectuer des modifications,
sélectionnez Paramètres > Système > Configuration
dans l'écran d'accueil ou avec l'option Réinitialiser.
(Voir page 22)
L'écran Accueil
Films et
séries télé
Applications Photos,
vidéos et
musique
Ajouter
l'application Navigateur Web Paramètres
aCompte Samsung dScreen Mirroring
1 2 34
5 6 7
Ajouter
l'application
Ajouter
l'application
1
Films et séries télé : permet de télécharger des
films et des émissions de télévision sur Internet.
| REMARQUE |
Selon le pays, cette fonction de menu peut
ne pas être prise en charge.
2
Applications : vous permet de télécharger/
accéder à diverses applications gratuites ou
payantes.
3
Photos, vidéos et musique : Permet de lire des
photos, des vidéos ou des fichiers musicaux
contenus sur un disque, une clé USB, un
ordinateur ou des périphériques mobiles.
4
Paramètres : Permet de régler diverses
fonctions selon vos préférences.
5
Applications recommandées : une liste des
applications utiles et populaires que nous
recommandons de télécharger.
6
Navigateur Web : Vous pouvez accéder à
Internet à l'aide de l'application Web Browser.
7
ROUGE (A) : appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A)
de votre télécommande pour créer et/ou vous
connecter à votre compte personnel Samsung.
BLEU (D) : Permet de configure la fonction de
mise en miroir sans fil entre le Home cinéma et
un smartphone ou une tablette.
Sélection d'une option sur l'écran Accueil
1. Pour sélectionner une option sur l'écran Accueil,
déplacez le curseur à l'aide des boutons ▲▼◄►
jusqu'à ce que l'option de votre choix soit mise en
surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Si l'appareil reste en mode Arrêt pendant plus de 5
minutes sans l'utiliser, un écran de veille s'affichera sur
le téléviseur. Si l'appareil reste en mode d’écran de
veille pendant plus de 20 minutes, l'alimentation sera
automatiquement coupée.
Accéder à l'écran Paramètres
1. Sélectionnez Paramètres sur l'écran Accueil, puis
appuyez sur E. L'écran Paramètres apparaît.
Affichage
Sortie UHD Auto.
Paramètres 3D
Format TV 16:9 Original
BD Wise Arrêt
Résolution Auto.
Trame vidéo (24Fs) Auto.
Convers. 24 img/s DVD Arrêt
Affichage
Audio
Réseau
Fonctions Smart
Système
Assistance
Paramètres
2. Pour accéder aux menus, sous-menus et options
sur l'écran Paramètres, veuillez vous reporter
à l'illustration de la télécommande sur la page
suivante.
Paramètres
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 19 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 19 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:31 013-06-04 오전 10:06:31| 20 Français
Paramètres
Touches de la télécommande utilisées
pour le menu Paramètres
S/W
LEVEL
EXIT
INFO
RETURN
TOOLS
SLEEP HOME
A B C D
TUNERMEMORY MO/ST
2 4
3
1
1
Touche HOME : Appuyez sur cette touche pour
passer à l’écran Accueil.
2
Touche RETURN : Permet de revenir au menu
précédent.
3
Touche E (Entrée) / DIRECTION :
• Appuyez sur ▲▼◄► pour déplacer le curseur
ou sélectionner un élément.
• Appuyez sur la touche E pour activer
l'élément sélectionné actuellement ou
confirmer un réglage.
4
Touche EXIT : Appuyez sur cette touche pour
quitter le menu actuellement sélectionné.
Informations détaillées sur les fonctions
Chaque fonction Paramètres, élément de menu, et
chaque option sont expliqués en détails à l'écran. Pour
afficher les informations, utilisez les touches ▲▼◄►
pour sélectionner la fonction, l'élément de menu ou
l'option. Les informations apparaissent en général à
droite de l'écran. Une brève description des différentes
fonctions liées aux paramètres s'affiche sur cette page.
Vous pourrez également trouver des informations
complémentaires sur certaines fonctions dans l'Annexe
de ce manuel.
Fonctions du menu Paramètres
Affichage
Sortie UHD
Cette option émet un signal vidéo
HDMI en sortie à une résolution
de UHD. Disponible uniquement
lorsque la trame vidéo est en mode
Auto..
| REMARQUE |
Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous
devez connecter l'appareil à un
périphérique prenant en charge la
résolution UHD et votre contenu
doit lire à 24 images/seconde
(vitesse de film).
Paramètres
3D
Permet de configurer les fonctions
relatives à la 3D.
Mode lecture Blu-ray 3D: Vous
permet de choisir de lire en mode 3D
ou non un disque Blu-ray comportant
des contenus 3D. Si vous passez au
menu Accueil ou Accueil Smart Hub
tout en étant en mode 3D, l'appareil
passera automatiquement en 2D.
Taille écran: Permet d'entrer la taille
du téléviseur connecté à l'appareil.
L'appareil règle automatiquement la
sortie 3D en fonction de la taille de
l'écran du téléviseur.
Format TV
Vous permet de régler la sortie de
l'appareil sur la taille de l'écran de
votre téléviseur. Reportez-vous à la
page 52.
BD Wise
BD Wise est la fonctionnalité
d’interconnectivité de Samsung
la plus récente. Lorsque vous
connectez un appareil Samsung
et un téléviseur Samsung doté de
la fonction BD Wise via l'interface
HDMI et que l'appareil et le
téléviseur disposent tous deux de
la fonctionnalité BD Wise, le produit
émet des images dont la résolution
vidéo et la vitesse de défilement
sont identiques à celles du disque
Blu-ray/DVD.
Résolution
Cette option vous permet de régler
la définition du signal vidéo HDMI
respectivement sur les valeurs BD
Wise, Auto., 1080p, 1080i, 720p,
576p/480p. Ces valeurs sont
indicatives du nombre de lignes
vidéo par image. Les lettres i et p
signifient respectivement balayage
entrelacé (i) et balayage progressif
(p). Plus il y a de lignes, plus la
qualité de l'image est élevée.
Trame vidéo
(24Fs)
Le réglage de la fonction Trame
vidéo (24Fs) sur Auto vous permet
de spécifier automatiquement la
sortie HDMI de l'appareil sur 24
images par seconde pour une
qualité d'image améliorée si un
téléviseur compatible 24Fs est
connecté.
• Vous ne pouvez bénéficier de la
fonction Trame vidéo (24Fs) que
sur un téléviseur prenant en charge
cette vitesse de défilement.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner Movie
Frame uniquement lorsque
le produit est en modes de
résolution de sortie HDMI 1080p.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 20 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 20 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:35 013-06-04 오전 10:06:35Français 21|
04
Paramètres
Convers. 24
img/s DVD
Permet de convertir la lecture d’un
DVD en 24 images par seconde et de
la diffuser via un branchement HDMI.
Disponible uniquement lorsque la
fonction Trame vidéo (24Fs) est activée.
Taille écran
Smart Hub
Permet de sélectionner la taille optimale
de l'écran Smart Hub.
Format couleur
HDMI
Vous pouvez régler le format de l'espace
chromatique pour la sortie HDMI afin qu'il
corresponde aux capacités de l'appareil
branché (télévision, moniteur, etc.).
Couleur intense
HDMI
Cette option vous permet de régler
l'appareil pour émettre des données
vidéo en sortie avec Couleur intense via
la prise HDMI OUT. L'option Couleur
intense permet une reproduction plus
fidèle des couleurs, notamment en
termes de profondeur.
Mode
progressif
Cette option permet d'améliorer la qualité
de l'image lors de la lecture d'un DVD.
Audio
Paramètre
haut-parleur
Vous permet de régler les
paramètres des enceintes suivantes
et d'activer et désactiver la tonalité
d'essai afin de tester les enceintes.
Niveau: vous permet de régler le
niveau sonore relatif de chaque
enceinte de 6 dB à -6 dB. Par
exemple, si vous aimez les basses
puissantes, vous pouvez augmenter
le niveau sonore du caisson de
graves de 6 dB.
Distance: vous permet de régler la
distance relative de chaque enceinte à
partir de la position d'écoute jusqu'à
9 mètres. Plus la distance est grande,
plus le son de l'enceinte sera fort.
Test tonalité: vous permet d'exécuter
la fonction de Tonalité d'essai afin que
vous puissiez tester vos réglages.
Régler la Tonalité d’essai sur On permet
d’activer cette tonalité d’essai. La
régler sur Off permet de la désactiver.
Etalonnage
automatique
du son
L’appareil reconnaît automatiquement
le champ acoustique adapté à votre
environnement.
Egaliseur
Cette option vous permet de
configurer manuellement les
réglages de l'égaliseur.
Volume
intelligent
Cette option vous permet de
régler l'appareil de sorte que le
volume demeure stable lorsqu'un
changement de scène se produit ou
lorsque vous changez de chaîne.
Sélect. hautparleur
Cette option vous permet de sélectionner
les haut-parleurs activés, ceux du
téléviseur ou ceux du Home cinéma.
Fonct. Retour
Audio
Cette option vous permet de diriger
le son du téléviseur vers les hautparleurs du Home cinéma. Elle
nécessite une connexion HDMI et
un téléviseur compatible avec la
fonction Canal de retour audio (ARC).
• Si la fonction Audio Return
Channel (Canal de retour audio) est
activée et si vous utilisez un câble
HDMI pour connecter l'appareil
au téléviseur, l'entrée optique
numérique ne fonctionne pas.
• Si la fonction Canal de retour audio
est réglée sur Auto et si vous utilisez
un câble HDMI pour connecter
l'appareil au téléviseur, l'ARC ou
l'entrée optique numérique sont
sélectionnés automatiquement.
Sortie
numérique
Cette option vous permet de définir
la Sortie numérique de manière à ce
qu'elle corresponde aux capacités du
récepteur AV que vous avez connecté
à l'appareil. Pour les détails, reportezvous au tableau de sélection des
sorties numériques. (Voir page 54)
Contrôle de la
dynamique
Cette option vous permet
d'appliquer le contrôle de la
dynamique au son Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus et Dolby TrueHD.
Auto.: Contrôle automatiquement
la plage dynamique de l'audio
Dolby TrueHD selon les informations
fournies par la piste audio Dolby
TrueHD. Désactive également le
contrôle de la plage dynamique pour
Dolby Digital et Dolby Digital Plus.
Arrêt: la plage dynamique reste non
compressée, vous permettant ainsi
d'entendre le son original.
Activé: cette option active le
contrôle de la dynamique pour
les trois formats Dolby. Les sons
les moins forts sont amplifiés et le
volume des sons forts est abaissé.
Mode sousmixage
Permet de sélectionner la méthode du
sous-mixage multicanal compatible avec
le système stéréo utilisé. Vous pouvez
alors choisir de spécifier le sous-mixage
de l'appareil sur l'option stéréo normal
ou stéréo compatible surround.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 21 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 21 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:36 013-06-04 오전 10:06:36| 22 Français
Paramètres
Sync. audio
Lorsque l'appareil est relié à un
téléviseur numérique, cette option
vous permet de régler le temps de
retard audio afin que le son soit
synchronisé avec la vidéo. Vous
pouvez régler le retard entre 0 et
300 millisecondes.
Réseau
État du
réseau
Permet de vérifier le réseau actuel et
l'état d'Internet.
Paramètres
réseau
Configurez la connexion du réseau
pour profiter des diverses fonctions
telles que les services Internet ou
les fonctionnalités Wi-Fi AllShare, et
effectuer des mises à niveau de logiciel.
Wi-Fi Direct
Permet de connecter un
périphérique Wi-Fi Direct à l'appareil
via un réseau peer-to-peer, sans
qu'il soit nécessaire de recourir à
un routeur sans fil. Notez que si
l’appareil est connecté à un réseau
sans fil, il peut être déconnecté si
vous utilisez Wi-Fi Direct.
| REMARQUE |
Les fichiers texte, tels que ceux
ayant l’extension .TXT ou .DOC,
ne sont pas affichés lorsque vous
utilisez la fonction Wi-Fi Direct.
Paramètres
AllShare
Vous permet de commander quels
périphériques de votre réseau, tels
que les smartphones et les tablettes,
peuvent partager le contenu de
votre téléviseur.
Nom du
périph.
Cette option vous permet d'affecter
un nom identifiant l'appareil. Vous
utilisez ce nom pour identifier
l'appareil lorsque vous lui connectez
des périphériques Wi-Fi externes
(Smartphones, tablettes, etc.).
Paramètres
BD-Live
Permet de régler diverses fonctions
de BD-Live. BD-Live vous permet
d'accéder à des fonctions
complémentaires disponibles sur
certains disques Blu-ray si vous êtes
connecté à Internet.
Connexion internet BD-Live :
Permet d'interdire ou d'autoriser,
en tout ou partie, une connexion
Internet BD-Live.
Gestion données BD : Permet de
gérer les données BD téléchargées
depuis un service BD-Live ou un
disque Blu-ray.
Fonctions Smart
Paramètres
applis
Vous permet de configurer les réglages
de notification d’applications et de
visualiser leurs informations de base.
Paramètres de notification Push :
Permet de recevoir des notifications
des services demandés.
Propriétés : Reportez-vous aux
informations de base sur les
applications.
Verr. classif.
VOD
Vous pouvez verrouiller l'accès au
contenu des Vidéos à la demande
(VOD) en fonction de sa classification.
| REMARQUE |
PIN de sécurité par défaut : 0000.
Selon le pays, cette fonction de
menu peut ne pas être prise en
charge.
Cond.
gén., polit.
confidentialité
Vous permet de visualiser les
Conditions générales ainsi que la
Politique de confidentialité concernant
l’utilisation du Smart Hub.
Réinitialiser
Smart Hub
Permet de réinitialiser tous les
réglages du Smart Hub sur leurs
paramètres par défaut.
| REMARQUE |
Le code PIN de sécurité par
défaut est 0000.
Système
Configuration
Cette option vous permet de
relancer la procédure de réglage des
paramètres initiaux.
Langue
Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue de
votre choix pour le menu à l’écran, le
menu du disque, les sous-titres, etc.
• La langue que vous avez
sélectionnée pour le menu du disque,
la bande-son du disque ou les soustitres apparaîtra seulement si elle est
prise en charge sur le disque.
Gest. périph.
Vous pouvez brancher une souris ou
un clavier USB sans fil au port USB
situé à l'avant de l'appareil.
Paramètres clavier: cette option
vous permet de configurer un
clavier USB sans fil connecté à
l'appareil.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 22 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 22 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:37 013-06-04 오전 10:06:37Français 23|
04
Paramètres
| REMARQUE |
Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier
uniquement lorsqu'un écran ou
une fenêtre de clavier QWERTY
apparaît dans le navigateur Web.
Paramètres souris: cette option
vous permet de configurer une
souris USB sans fil connecté à
l'appareil. Vous pouvez utiliser la
souris dans le menu de l'appareil de
la même manière que vous utilisez
une souris sur votre ordinateur.
Pour utiliser une souris avec le
menu de l'appareil :
1. Connectez la souris USB à
l'appareil.
2. Cliquez sur le bouton principal
que vous avez sélectionné
dans Paramètres souris.
Le menu Simple s'affiche.
3. Cliquez sur les options du
menu que vous désirez.
| REMARQUE |
Certains claviers et souris USB HID
peuvent ne pas être compatibles
avec votre produit.
Certaines touches de clavier HID
peuvent ne pas fonctionner.
Les claviers USB câblés ne sont
pas pris en charge.
Certaines applications peuvent ne
pas être prises en charge.
Si un clavier HID sans fil ne
fonctionne pas en raison
d'interférence, rapprochez le
clavier de l'appareil.
Sécurité
Le code PIN de sécurité par défaut
est 0000. Pour accéder à la fonction
de sécurité, entrez le code PIN par
défaut si vous n'avez pas créé votre
propre code PIN personnel.
Contrôle parent. BD: Empêche la
lecture des disques Blu-ray avec
des classifications particulières
jusqu'à la saisie du code PIN.
Contrôle parent. DVD: Cette
option empêche la lecture
des disques DVD ayant une
classification supérieure à une
classification numérique particulière
que vous avez sélectionnée jusqu'à
la saisie du code PIN.
Modifier PIN: cette option permet
de modifier le code PIN à 4 chiffres
utilisé pour accéder aux fonctions
de sécurité.
En cas d'oubli du code PIN
1. Retirez tout disque ou
périphérique de stockage USB.
2. Appuyez et maintenez le
bouton 5 situé sur la façade
pendant 5 secondes minimum.
Tous les paramètres seront
réinitialisés sur leur valeur
d'origine.
| REMARQUE |
Lorsque les réglages d'usine par
défaut sont rétablis, toutes les
données Blu-ray utilisateur stockées
sur l'appareil seront effacées.
Général
Vous pouvez spécifier la luminosité
de l'affichage et le fuseau horaire.
Affichage du lecteur: cette option
permet de modifier la luminosité du
panneau avant.
Fuseau Horaire: vous pouvez
spécifier le fuseau horaire applicable
à votre région.
Transparence menu: cette option
permet de régler la transparence du
cadre de menu.
Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
Anynet+ est une fonction pratique
qui autorise des commandes liées
entre plusieurs produits Samsung
compatibles Anynet+ et vous
permet de contrôler ces produits
via une télécommande de téléviseur
Samsung. Pour utiliser cette
fonction, vous devez connecter cet
appareil à un téléviseur Samsung
Anynet+ à l'aide d'un câble HDMI.
Si vous voulez utiliser une fonction
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC), veuillez suivre
les instructions ci-dessous.
1) Connectez l'appareil à un
téléviseur Samsung compatible
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) à l'aide
d'un câble HDMI.
2) Définissez la fonction
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) sur Activé
à la fois sur le téléviseur et
l'appareil.
3) Recherchez puis sélectionnez
le produit dans la liste des
téléviseurs Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).
Pour obtenir des instructions
plus exactes, consultez la section
Anynet+ du manuel d'utilisation
du téléviseur.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 23 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 23 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:38 013-06-04 오전 10:06:38| 24 Français
Paramètres
DivX® Vidéo
à la demande
Affichez les codes d'enregistrement
DivX® VOD pour acheter et lire des
contenus DivX® VOD.
Assistance
Gestion à
distance
Lorsque cette option est activée,
elle permet aux agents du Centre
d’assistance téléphonique de
Samsung de diagnostiquer et de
résoudre à distance des problèmes
concernant l'appareil. Elle nécessite
une connexion Internet active. Le
service Gestion à distance pourrait ne
pas être disponible dans certains pays.
Mise à jour du
logiciel
Pour obtenir de plus amples
informations sur la fonction de Mise
à jour logicielle, consultez « Mise à
niveau du logiciel » en page 28.
Mode
d'utilisation
Vous permet de régler le mode
d’utilisation Si vous utilisez le
Home cinéma à votre domicile,
sélectionnez toujours Home. Store
est destiné aux réglages pour
l’affichage magasin uniquement.
Contacter
Samsung
Permet d’obtenir les informations
de contact pour les demandes
d’assistance portant sur l'appareil.
Réinitialisation
Permet de réinitialiser tous les réglages
sur leur valeur par défaut à l’exception
de ceux du réseau et du Smart
Hub, puis de démarrer la fonction
Configuration. Il est nécessaire d’entrer
le code PIN de sécurité. Le code PIN
de sécurité par défaut est 0000.
Etalonnage automatique du son
En réglant la fonction de calibrage automatique du
son ASC (Auto Sound Calibration) lorsque vous
déplacez ou installez l’appareil pour la première fois,
l’appareil reconnaît automatiquement la distance
entre les enceintes, les niveaux entre les canaux et les
caractéristiques de la fréquence pour créer un champ
acoustique 7.1 canaux adapté à votre environnement.
ASC IN
LAN SPEAKERS OUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT L
FRONT R
FRON
FRON
IMPEDANCE : 3
AUX IN FM ANT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO IN
L
R
Microphone ASC
Etalonnage automatique du son
Sélectionnez si vous exécutez et appliquez le calibrage
automatique du son.
• Arrêt : permet de produire un son en fonction de
la configuration des enceintes spécifiée dans les
paramètres des enceintes
• Activé : permet d’exécuter le calibrage automatique du
son et de produire un son en fonction des paramètres
des enceintes calibrées.
Mesure
Avant d’exécuter le calibrage, assurez-vous qu’aucun
disque n’est présent dans le tiroir disque.
1. Branchez le microphone ASC sur la prise ASC IN.
2. Placez le microphone ASC sur la position d’écoute.
• Le calibrage automatique du son configure
automatiquement les enceintes selon la
séquence suivante : Avant G Centre Avant
D Surround D Avant D. Avant G.
Surround G Caisson basses
• Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour annuler le
réglage du calibrage automatique du son.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 24 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 24 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:38 013-06-04 오전 10:06:38Français 25|
04
Paramètres
Réseaux et Internet
Lorsque vous connectez cet appareil à un réseau, vous
pouvez utiliser les applications et les fonctions basées sur
les réseaux telles que Smart Hub et BD-LIVE, et mettre à
niveau le logiciel de l'appareil via la connexion réseau. Pour
plus d'informations concernant l'accès et l'utilisation des
services Internet, reportez-vous au chapitre Services réseau
de ce manuel en pages 43 à 51. Les instructions permettant
la configuration de la connexion réseau débutent ci-dessous.
Configuration de votre connexion réseau
Si vous ne configurez pas votre connexion au réseau au
cours de la procédure de configuration initiale ou si vous
devez réinitialiser la connexion au réseau, respectez les
instructions ci-dessous.
Avant de commencer, contactez votre fournisseur de
services Internet pour savoir si votre adresse IP est fixe
ou dynamique. Si vous avez une adresse IP dynamique
et utilisez un réseau câblé ou sans fil, nous vous
recommandons de suivre les procédures de Configuration
automatique décrites ci-dessous.
Si vous vous connectez à un réseau câblé, connectez
l'appareil à votre routeur en utilisant un câble LAN avant
d'entreprendre la procédure de configuration.
Pour commencer la configuration de votre connexion réseau,
respectez les étapes suivantes :
1. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E
2. Sélectionnez Réseau et appuyez sur le bouton E.
3. Sélectionnez Paramètres réseau et appuyez sur le
bouton E.
4. Consultez les instructions pour les Réseaux câblés
qui débutent ci-dessous ou les instructions pour les
Réseaux sans fil commençant en page 26.
Réseau câblé
❑ Wired – Automatic
Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 ci-dessus :
1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de
réseau sur Câble. Puis sélectionnez Connexion
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'appareil détecte
la connexion câblée, vérifie la connexion réseau,
puis il se connecte au réseau.
2. Une fois terminé, mettez OK en surbrillance et
appuyez sur le bouton E.
❑ Câblé – Manuel
Si vous disposez d'une adresse IP fixe ou si la procédure
automatique est inopérante, vous devrez définir les
valeurs de Paramètres réseau manuellement.
Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 ci-dessus :
1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de
réseau sur Câble. Puis sélectionnez Connexion
puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Le produit recherche un réseau, puis affiche le
message d'échec de la connexion.
| REMARQUE |
S’il est possible de connecter votre Home cinéma à
votre réseau sans fil, sélectionnez maintenant Modifier
réseau, changez le Type de réseau pour Sans fil et
passez aux instructions concernant les réseaux sans
fil à la page 26.
Paramètres réseau
Echec de la connexion au réseau câblé.
Adresse MAC XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Adresse IP 0. 0. 0. 0
Masque ss-réseau 0. 0. 0. 0
Passerelle 0. 0. 0. 0
Serveur DNS 0. 0. 0. 0
Echec connexion réseau. Essayez solut. suiv. : vérif. si adr. IP est définie
correctement dans Paramètres IP. Contactez le fournisseur de services
Internet pour plus d’infos.
Modifier réseau Param. IP Réess. Fermer
2. Utilisez les boutons ◄► pour sélectionner les
Param. IP puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'écran
Paramètres IP apparaît.
3. Sélectionnez le champ Config. IP puis définissez
Entrer manuellement.
4. Sélectionnez une valeur à entrer (adresse IP, par
exemple) et appuyez sur E. Utilisez le clavier
numérique de votre télécommande pour saisir les
chiffres de la valeur. Vous pouvez également saisir
les chiffres en utilisant les boutons ▲▼. Utilisez les
touches ◄► de la télécommande pour passer d'un
champ d'entrée à l'autre pour une valeur. Une fois
terminé avec une valeur, appuyez sur le bouton E.
5. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou▼ pour passer à une
autre valeur et saisissez les chiffres pour cette valeur
en respectant les instructions contenues dans
l’étape 4.
6. Répétez les étapes 4 et 5 jusqu’à ce que vous ayez
renseigné toutes les valeurs.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 25 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 25 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:39 013-06-04 오전 10:06:39| 26 Français
Paramètres
| REMARQUE |
Vous pouvez obtenir les valeurs du réseau auprès de
votre fournisseur d'accès Internet.
7. Après avoir terminé la saisie de toutes les valeurs,
sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. Le
Home cinéma vérifie la connexion réseau puis il se
connecte au réseau.
Réseau sans fil
Vous pouvez configurer une connexion à un réseau sans
fil de trois manières :
- Sans fil automatique
- Sans fil manuel
- WPS(PBC)
Avant de configurer la connexion au réseau sans fil,
déconnectez tous les périphériques réseau sans fil
actuellement connectés à l'appareil ou, le cas échéant, la
connexion câblée actuelle de l’appareil.
❑ Sans fil - Automatique
Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 dans « Configuration de
votre connexion réseau » en page 25:
1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de
réseau sur Sans fil. L'appareil recherche puis
affiche une liste des réseaux disponibles.
Paramètres réseau
Sélectionnez type de réseau.
Type de réseau Sans fil
Réseau sans fil
Vous pouvez connecter votre
Lecteur Blu-ray à Internet.
Sélectionnez le réseau sans fil à
utiliser.
si-ap
iptime
iptime5G
KIMING_VTOWER
TIAS
Rafraîchir WPS(PBC)
2. Sélectionnez le réseau souhaité et appuyez sur le
bouton E.
3. Sur l'écran Sécurité, entrez le code de sécurité ou
la phrase de passe correspondant à votre réseau.
Saisissez directement les nombres en utilisant les
touches numériques de la télécommande. Saisissez
les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à l'aide des
touches ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
4. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis appuyez
sur le bouton E. L'appareil se connecte au réseau
une fois que la connexion réseau a été confirmée.
| REMARQUE |
Vous devriez pouvoir trouver la phrase de passe ou le
code de sécurité sur l'un des écrans de configuration
servant à la configuration du routeur ou du modem.
❑ Sans fil - Manuel
Si vous disposez d'une adresse IP fixe ou si la procédure
automatique est inopérante, vous devrez définir les
valeurs de Paramètres réseau manuellement.
Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 dans « Configuration de
votre connexion réseau » en page 25:
1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de
réseau sur Sans fil. L'appareil recherche puis
affiche une liste des réseaux disponibles.
2. Faites défiler la liste, sélectionnez le réseau souhaité ou
l'option Ajouter réseau, et appuyez sur le bouton E.
3. Si vous avez sélectionné un réseau à l'étape 2,
passez à l'étape 6.
Si vous sélectionnez Ajouter réseau, passez à
l'étape 4.
4. Saisissez le nom de votre réseau sans fil ou de votre
routeur sans fil.
• Saisissez directement les chiffres en utilisant les
boutons numériques de votre télécommande.
• Saisissez les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à
l'aide des boutons ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
• Pour afficher les lettres en majuscule ou réaffichez
des lettres en minuscule si des majuscules sont
affichées, sélectionnez , puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
• Pour afficher des symboles et la ponctuation,
sélectionnez 123#&, puis appuyez sur le bouton
E. Pour réafficher des lettres, sélectionnez
123#&, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
5. Sur l’écran Type de sécurité qui s’affiche,
sélectionnez le type de Sécurité du réseau à l’aide
des boutons ▲▼ et appuyez sur le bouton E.
Sur l'écran suivant, entrez le code de sécurité ou la
phrase de passe correspondant à votre réseau.
• Saisissez directement les nombres en utilisant les
touches numériques de la télécommande.
• les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à l'aide des
touches ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis
appuyez sur le bouton E. L’appareil recherche le
réseau.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 26 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 26 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:40 013-06-04 오전 10:06:40Français 27|
04
Paramètres
6. L'écran d'échec de la connexion réseau apparaît.
Utilisez les boutons ◄► pour sélectionner Param.
IP puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
7. Sélectionnez le champ Config. IP puis définissez
Entrer manuellement.
8. Sélectionnez une valeur de réseau à entrer (adresse
IP, par exemple) et appuyez sur le bouton E.
Utilisez le clavier numérique de votre télécommande
pour saisir les chiffres de la valeur. Vous pouvez
également saisir les chiffres en utilisant les boutons
▲▼. Utilisez les touches ◄► de la télécommande
pour passer d'un champ d'entrée à l'autre pour une
valeur. Une fois terminé avec une valeur, appuyez
sur le bouton E.
9. Appuyez sur le bouton ▲ ou▼ pour passer à une
autre valeur et saisissez les chiffres pour cette valeur
en respectant les instructions contenues dans
l’étape 8.
10. Répétez les étapes 8 et 9 jusqu’à ce que vous ayez
renseigné toutes les valeurs.
| REMARQUE |
Vous pouvez obtenir les valeurs du réseau auprès de
votre fournisseur d'accès Internet.
11. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le
bouton E. L'écran Sécurité apparaît.
12. Sur l'écran Sécurité, entrez le code de sécurité ou
la phrase de passe correspondant à votre réseau.
Saisissez directement les nombres en utilisant les
touches numériques de la télécommande. Saisissez
les lettres en sélectionnant une lettre à l'aide des
touches ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
13. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé, sur la
droite de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
L'appareil se connecte au réseau une fois que la
connexion réseau a été confirmée.
14. Lorsque le Home cinéma a vérifié le réseau,
sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Vous pouvez également commencer le réglage
manuel du réseau en allant à Paramètres >Réseau >
État du réseau.
❑ WPS(PBC)
L'une des méthodes la plus facile pour configurer la
connexion au réseau sans fil consiste à utiliser la fonction
WPS(PBC). Si votre routeur sans fil dispose d'un bouton
WPS(PBC), respectez les étapes suivantes :
Après avoir suivi les Étapes 1 à 3 dans « Configuration de
votre connexion réseau » en page 25:
1. À l'écran Paramètres réseau, placez Type de
réseau sur Sans fil. L'appareil recherche puis
affiche une liste des réseaux disponibles.
2. Faites défiler la liste vers le bas, sélectionnez
WPS(PBC), puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton WPS(PBC) situé sur votre
routeur dans les deux minutes qui suivent. L'appareil
obtient automatiquement toutes les valeurs des
paramètres réseau nécessaires et se connecte au
réseau. L'appareil se connecte au réseau une fois
que la connexion réseau a été confirmée.
4. Une fois terminé, mettez OK en surbrillance et
appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Pour la connexion WPS, réglez le cryptage de sécurité
de votre routeur sur AES. Si le cryptage de sécurité
est réglé sur WEP, la connexion WPS n'est pas prise
en charge.
Wi-Fi Direct
La fonction Wi-Fi Direct vous permet de connecter les
périphériques par Wi-Fi Direct à l'appareil et entre eux en
utilisant un réseau point à point, sans utiliser un routeur
sans fil.
| REMARQUE |
Certains périphériques Wi-Fi Direct peuvent ne pas
prendre en charge la fonction AllShare en cas de
connexion via Wi-Fi Direct. Si tel est le cas, changez la
méthode de connexion réseau que vous avez utilisée
pour connecter le périphérique au Home cinéma.
Les transmissions Wi-Fi Direct peuvent créer des
interférences avec le signal Bluetooth. Avant d'utiliser
la fonction Bluetooth, nous vous recommandons
fortement de désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Direct sur un
périphérique sur lequel il est actuellement activé.
1. Allumez le périphérique Wi-Fi direct et activez la
fonction Wi-Fi Direct.
2. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
3. Sélectionnez Réseau, et appuyez sur le bouton E.
4. Sélectionnez Wi-Fi Direct, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
Les périphériques Wi-Fi Direct que vous pouvez
connecter s’affichent.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 27 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 27 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:41 013-06-04 오전 10:06:41| 28 Français
Paramètres
Rafraîchir
Fermer
Wi-Fi Direct
Nom Periph. : [HTS]F9750W
Sélect. le périph. Wi-Fi Direct pour la connexion.
AndroidXXXXXXX Déconnecté
5. Vous avez trois manières de procéder à la
connexion Wi-Fi.
• Via le périphérique Wi-Fi.
• Via l'appareil en utilisant l'option PBC.
• Via l'appareil en utilisant un code PIN.
Chacune d’elles est indiquée ci-dessous.
Via le périphérique Wi-Fi
1. Sur le périphérique Wi-Fi, suivez la procédure
du périphérique pour la connexion à un autre
périphérique Wi-Fi Direct. Concernant les
instructions, reportez-vous au manuel d’utilisation
du périphérique.
2. Lorsque vous aurez terminé la procédure, vous
devriez voir une fenêtre contextuelle sur l’écran
de votre téléviseur indiquant qu’un périphérique
qui prend en charge Wi-Fi Direct demande à se
connecter. Sélectionnez OK, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E pour accepter.
3. La fenêtre contextuelle de connexion s’affiche, suivie
de la fenêtre contextuelle Connecté. Lorsqu’elle
se ferme, vous devez voir le périphérique listé sur
l’écran Wi-Fi Direct en tant que connecté.
• Les procédures PBC et PIN connectent les
périphériques automatiquement.
Via l'appareil en utilisant l'option PBC
1. Sélectionnez le périphérique Wi-Fi Direct que vous
voulez connecter à cet appareil puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
2. La fenêtre contextuelle de connexion s’affiche, suivie
de la fenêtre contextuelle Connecté. Lorsqu’elle
se ferme, vous devez voir le périphérique listé sur
l’écran Wi-Fi Direct en tant que connecté.
Via l'appareil en utilisant un code PIN
1. Sélectionnez le périphérique Wi-Fi Direct que vous
voulez connecter à cet appareil puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
2. La fenêtre contextuelle PIN s’affiche.
3. Notez le code PIN de la fenêtre contextuelle,
puis saisissez-le dans le champ approprié du
périphérique Wi-Fi Direct que vous voulez connecter.
4. La fenêtre contextuelle de connexion s’affiche, suivie
de la fenêtre contextuelle Connecté. Lorsqu’elle
se ferme, vous devez voir le périphérique listé sur
l’écran Wi-Fi Direct en tant que connecté.
| REMARQUE |
La connexion actuelle au réseau câblée ou sans fil
sera déconnectée lorsque vous utilisez la fonction WiFi Direct.
Les fichiers texte, tels que ceux ayant l’extension .TXT
ou .DOC, ne sont pas affichés lorsque vous utilisez la
fonction Wi-Fi Direct.
Mise à niveau du logiciel
Le menu Mise à niveau du logiciel vous permet de mettre
le logiciel de l'appareil à niveau pour en améliorer la
performance et obtenir des services supplémentaires.
• Évitez d’éteindre et de rallumer le produit
manuellement durant le processus de mise à jour.
1. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Assistance puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
3. Sélectionnez Mise à jour du logiciel, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
4. Pour télécharger la mise à jour du logiciel et mettre
à jour maintenant, sélectionnez MàJ maintenant,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour de plus
amples détails, reportez-vous à MàJ maintenant à la
page suivante.
5. Pour permettre au logiciel de télécharger les mises à
jour automatiquement dès qu’elles sont disponibles,
sélectionnez Mise à jour auto puis appuyez sur le
bouton E. Pour de plus amples détails, reportezvous à Mise à jour auto à la page suivante.
| REMARQUE |
La mise à niveau est terminée lorsque l'appareil s’éteint
et s’allume ensuite par lui-même.
Samsung Electronics n’accepte aucune responsabilité
légale concernant un dysfonctionnement de l'appareil
provoqué par une connexion Internet instable ou une
négligence de la part de l’utilisateur durant la mise à
jour du logiciel.
Si vous souhaitez annuler la mise à niveau en cours
de téléchargement, appuyez sur le bouton E.
Lorsque la mise à niveau du système est en cours,
« UPDATE » s'affiche sur la façade.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 28 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 28 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:42 013-06-04 오전 10:06:42Français 29|
04
Paramètres
MàJ maintenant
Vous pouvez utiliser Mettre à jour maintenant pour mettre
à jour le logiciel via votre connexion réseau ou en utilisant
une clé USB à mémoire flash. Les instructions du réseau
sont indiquées ci-dessous. Les instructions de la clé USB
à mémoire flash se trouvent sur cette page.
1. Sélectionnez MàJ maintenant, puis appuyez sur
le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Mettre à jour
maintenant s'affiche.
2. L’appareil recherche en ligne la version du logiciel la
plus récente.
3. S’il ne trouve pas de mise à jour, la fenêtre
contextuelle « Il n'y a actuellement aucune nouvelle
mise à jour pour vous. » apparaît. Appuyez sur le
bouton E pour quitter.
4. S’il trouve une nouvelle version, la fenêtre
contextuelle Demande de mise à jour apparaît.
5. Sélectionnez OK. L’appareil procèdera à la mise à
niveau du logiciel, puis s’éteindra et se rallumera
automatiquement.
6. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas OK ou Annuler en une
minute, l'appareil stocke la nouvelle mise à niveau du
logiciel. Vous pouvez mettre à niveau le logiciel par la
suite en utilisant la fonction Mise à jour automatique.
7. Si vous sélectionnez Annuler, la mise à niveau sera
annulée par l'appareil.
| REMARQUE |
Lorsque la mise à niveau du système est terminée, vérifiez
les informations du logiciel dans la section Informations
sur le produit de l’écran Contacter Samsung.
N'éteignez pas l'appareil durant la mise à niveau du
logiciel. Ceci peut provoquer le dysfonctionnement de
l'appareil.
Mise à jour auto
Vous pouvez régler la fonction Mise à jour automatique de
sorte que l'appareil télécharge de nouveaux logiciels de
mise à niveau lorsqu'il est en mode Mise à jour automatique.
En mode Mise à jour automatique, l'appareil est éteint
mais sa connexion à Internet reste activée. Ceci permet à
l'appareil de télécharger automatiquement des logiciels de
mise à niveau lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé.
1. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner
Mise à jour auto, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Activé ou Arrêt.
Si vous sélectionnez Activé, l'appareil télécharge
automatiquement le nouveau logiciel de mise à jour
lorsqu'il est en mode Mise à jour automatique et hors
tension. Avant de télécharger le nouveau logiciel de
mise à niveau, l'appareil vous demandera si vous
souhaitez l’installer à la mise sous tension de l’appareil.
| REMARQUE |
Pour utiliser la fonction Mise à jour automatique,
l'appareil doit être connecté à Internet.
Mise à jour par USB
1. Connectez-vous sur www.samsung.com.
2. Cliquez sur SUPPORT en haut à droite de la page.
3. Entrez le numéro de modèle de l’appareil dans le
champ de recherche. Une fois que vous avez entré
le numéro du modèle, une liste déroulante affiche
les produits correspondant aux numéros de modèle.
4. Effectuez un clic gauche sur le numéro de modèle
du produit dans la liste déroulante.
5. Sur la page qui s'affiche, faites défiler puis cliquez
sur Firmware Manuals & Downloads.
6. Cliquez sur Firmware au centre de la page.
7. Cliquez sur le bouton ZIP dans la colonne Fichier
située sur le côté droit de la page.
8. Cliquez sur Send dans la première fenêtre
contextuelle qui apparaît. Cliquez sur OK dans
la seconde fenêtre contextuelle qui apparaît
pour le téléchargement puis enregistrez le fichier
micrologiciel sur votre PC.
9. Dézippez le dossier compressé sur l'ordinateur. Vous
devriez avoir un seul dossier dézippé portant le même
nom que le fichier compressé.
10. Copiez le dossier sur une clé USB à mémoire flash.
11. Vérifiez qu’aucun disque n'est inséré dans l'appareil,
puis insérez la clé USB à mémoire flash dans le port
USB de l'appareil.
12. Dans le menu de l'appareil, accédez à Paramètres
> Assistance > Mise à jour du logiciel.
13. Sélectionnez MàJ maintenant.
14. L’appareil recherche le logiciel sur la clé USB.
Lorsqu’il trouve le logiciel, la fenêtre contextuelle
Demande de mise à jour apparaît.
15. Sélectionnez OK. L’appareil procèdera à la mise à
niveau du logiciel, puis s’éteindra et se rallumera
automatiquement.
| REMARQUE |
Aucun disque ne doit être inséré dans l’appareil lors
de la mise à niveau du logiciel via la prise USB.
Lorsque la mise à niveau du système est terminée,
vérifiez les informations du logiciel dans la section
Informations sur le produit de l’écran Contacter
Samsung.
N'éteignez pas l'appareil durant la mise à niveau du
logiciel. Ceci peut provoquer le dysfonctionnement de
l'appareil.
Les mises à niveau logicielles via la prise USB doivent
être effectuées uniquement à l’aide d’une clé USB à
mémoire flash.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 29 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 29 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:43 013-06-04 오전 10:06:43| 30 Français
Media Play
Votre Home cinéma peut lire le contenu situé sur des
disques Blu-ray/DVD/CD, des périphériques USB, des
ordinateurs, des smartphones, des tablettes et sur
Internet.
Pour lire le contenu situé sur votre ordinateur ou un
périphérique mobile, vous devez connecter l’ordinateur
ou le périphérique mobile et l’appareil à votre réseau.
Pour lire le contenu sur votre ordinateur, vous devez
également télécharger et installer le logiciel de réseau
AllShare ou posséder déjà le logiciel de réseau DLNA sur
votre ordinateur.
| REMARQUE |
Les ordinateurs fonctionnant sous Windows 7 et
Windows 8 possèdent le logiciel DLNA (Play To) intégré.
L'écran Tout le contenu
Pour tous les supports, l'écran Tout le contenu ou l'un de
ses sous-écrans constituent le moyen essentiel d'accéder
aux contenus enregistrés sur différents périphériques
directement connectés ou reliés au réseau.
Utilisation de l'écran Tout le contenu
Pour accéder à l'écran Tout le contenu, sélectionnez
des photos, vidéos et musique à l'écran d'accueil puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
Lecture de disques disponibles
dans le commerce
1. Appuyez sur le bouton ^ pour ouvrir le tiroir disque.
2. Introduisez doucement le disque dans le tiroir, face
imprimée dirigée vers le haut.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton ^ pour fermer le tiroir disque.
La lecture démarre automatiquement.
4. Si la lecture ne démarre pas automatiquement,
appuyez sur le bouton 6 de la télécommande ou
consultez la section « L'écran Tout le contenu » cidessous.
Lecture de fichiers sur un
périphérique USB
Vous pouvez recourir à deux méthodes différentes pour
lire ou afficher via votre appareil les fichiers multimédia
stockés sur un périphérique USB.
Méthode 1
1. Mettez l'appareil sous tension.
2. Connectez le périphérique USB sur le port USB
situé à l'avant de l'appareil. La fenêtre contextuelle
Nouveau périphérique connecté s'affiche.
Films et
séries télé
Applications Photos,
vidéos et
musique
Applications Pho
vidé
mus
Applications Pho
é
Photos
Vidéos
Musique
Tout le contenu
Nv. périph. conn.
Clé USB
Navigateur Web Paramètres Ajouter
l'application
Ajouter
l'application
Ajouter
l'application
| REMARQUE |
Si la fenêtre n'apparaît pas, passez à la méthode 2.
3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner Photos,
Vidéos, Musique ou Tout le contenu, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E. En fonction de la
manière dont le contenu est classé, vous verrez
soit des dossiers, soit des fichiers individuels ou les
deux types d'éléments.
| REMARQUE |
Même si l’appareil affiche les dossiers de tous
types de contenus, il n'affichera que les fichiers
correspondant au type de contenu que vous avez
sélectionné à l'étape 3. Par exemple, si vous avez
sélectionné de la musique, vous ne pourrez visionner
que les fichiers musicaux. Vous pouvez changer cette
sélection en revenant à l’écran Photos, vidéos et
musique puis en passant à l’étape 4 dans la méthode
2 ci-dessous.
4. Si nécessaire, servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄►
pour sélectionner un dossier, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
5. Sélectionnez un fichier à visualiser ou lire, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
6. Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour quitter un
dossier ou sur le bouton Quitter pour revenir à
l'écran d'accueil.
7. Consultez les pages 32 à 40 pour obtenir plus
d'instructions concernant la méthode de contrôle
de la lecture de vidéos, musiques et photos sur un
périphérique USB.
Méthode 2
1. Mettez l'appareil sous tension.
2. Connectez le périphérique USB sur le port USB
situé à l'avant de l'appareil.
3. Sélectionnez Photos, vidéos et musique sur
l'écran d'accueil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 30 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 30 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:44 013-06-04 오전 10:06:44Français 31|
05
Media Play
4. Sélectionnez les Photos, Vidéos, Musique ou Tout
le contenu, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. En
fonction de la manière dont le contenu est classé,
vous verrez soit des dossiers, soit des fichiers
individuels ou les deux types d'éléments à la fois.
| REMARQUE |
Même si l’appareil affiche les dossiers de tous types de
contenus, il n'affichera que les fichiers correspondant
au type de contenu que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape
4. Par exemple, si vous avez sélectionné de la musique,
vous ne pourrez visionner que les fichiers musicaux.
Vous pouvez modifier cette sélection en revenant à
l’écran Photos, vidéos et musique puis en répétant
l’étape 4.
5. Utilisez les boutons ◄► pour sélectionner le
périphérique souhaité, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
6. Si nécessaire, servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄► pour
sélectionner un dossier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
7. Appuyez sur le bouton RETURN pour quitter un
dossier ou sur le bouton Quitter pour revenir à
l'écran d'accueil.
8. Consultez les pages 32 à 40 pour obtenir plus
d'instructions concernant la méthode de contrôle
de la lecture de vidéos, musiques et photos sur un
périphérique USB.
| REMARQUE |
Si vous insérez un disque en cours de lecture de contenu
sur un périphérique de stockage USB ou un téléphone, le
mode de l'appareil passe automatiquement à « Disque ».
Si votre téléphone cellulaire est compatible DLNA, vous
pouvez lire le contenu sans la connexion d'un câble USB.
Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonction
Réseau AllShare » à la page 31.
Lecture d’un disque dont le contenu est
enregistré par l’utilisateur
Vous pouvez lire les fichiers multimédia que vous avez
enregistrés sur des disques Blu-ray, DVD ou CD.
1. Placez un disque enregistré par l'utilisateur dans le
tiroir disque en veillant à ce que l'étiquette du disque
soit orientée vers le haut puis fermez le tiroir disque. La
fenêtre contextuelle du périphérique connecté s’affiche.
2. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner le type de
contenu que vous voulez visionner ou lire - Photos,
Vidéos ou Musique - puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Même si l'appareil affiche les dossiers pour tous les types
de contenus, il affiche uniquement les fichiers du type de
contenu que vous avez sélectionné à l’Étape 2. Par exemple,
si vous avez sélectionné Musique, vous ne pourrez voir que
les fichiers musicaux. Vous pouvez modifier cette sélection
en revenant à l'écran d'accueil et en répétant l'étape 2.
3. Un écran listant le contenu du disque apparaît. En
fonction de la manière dont le contenu est classé,
vous verrez soit des dossiers, soit des fichiers
individuels ou les deux types d'éléments à la fois.
4. Si nécessaire, servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄►
pour sélectionner un dossier, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
5. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner
un fichier à visionner ou à lire, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
6. Appuyez une ou plusieurs fois sur le bouton
RETURN pour quitter l'écran actuel, quitter un
dossier ou revenir à l'écran d'accueil. Appuyez sur
le bouton Quitter pour revenir directement à l'écran
d'accueil.
7. Consultez les pages 32 à 40 pour obtenir plus
d'instructions concernant la méthode de contrôle de la
lecture de vidéos, musiques et photos sur un disque.
Utilisation de la fonction Réseau
AllShare
AllShare vous permet de lire des photos, regarder des
vidéos ou écouter de la musique situées sur votre
ordinateur ou un périphérique compatible DLNA via
l'appareil en utilisant une connexion à un réseau sans fil.
Pour télécharger le logiciel AllShare
AllShare facilite la récupération et la lecture de fichiers
multimédias à partir d'ordinateurs et de périphériques
compatibles DLNA. Toutefois, AllShare PC doit
être installé sur les ordinateurs, et les périphériques
mobiles doivent prendre en charge AllShare. Pour plus
d'informations, visitez le portail de service et contenu de
Samsung (http://link.samsung.com).
| REMARQUE |
Vous risquez de rencontrer des problèmes de
compatibilité en tentant de lire des fichiers multimédias
via un serveur DLNA d'un autre fabricant.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 31 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 31 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:47 013-06-04 오전 10:06:47| 32 Français
Media Play
Lecture du contenu situé sur votre
ordinateur ou un périphérique DLNA via
l'appareil
Connexion AllShare
Ordinateur
Appareil
Lecture des
fichiers de
l’ordinateur
1. Connectez l'appareil, votre ordinateur et/ou votre
périphérique DLNA compatible au même réseau
sans fil.
2. Suivez les directives du manuel d’installation/
instruction du logiciel AllShare pour installer les
périphériques et les fichiers à lire ou à visualiser.
3. Sélectionnez Photos, vidéos et musique sur
l'écran d'accueil de l’appareil, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E. L'écran Photos, vidéos et musique
apparaît.
4. Sélectionnez le type de contenu que vous souhaitez
lire - Photos, Vidéos, Musique ou Tout le
contenu, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
5. Sur l’écran suivant, sélectionnez Allshare, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
6. Dans la liste des périphériques connectés Allshare
qui apparaît, sélectionnez votre ordinateur ou
un autre périphérique compatible Allshare, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E. Un écran listant les
fichiers disponibles s'affiche.
7. Sélectionnez le fichier que vous voulez lire ou
visualiser, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Commander la lecture du contenu de
votre ordinateur avec votre Smartphone
Connexion
AllShare
Ordinateur
Smartphone
Commande des fichiers de
l’ordinateur sur l'appareil
Appareil
Lecture des fichiers
de l’ordinateur
( Disponible uniquement avec les téléphones Samsung qui
prennent en charge la fonctionnalité AllShare)
1. Connectez l'appareil, votre ordinateur et votre
téléphone mobile compatible DLNA au même
réseau sans fil.
2. Suivez les directives du manuel d’installation/
instruction du logiciel AllShare pour installer les
périphériques et les fichiers à lire ou à visualiser.
3. Sur votre ordinateur, en utilisant le logiciel AllShare,
confirmez la connexion de votre téléphone.
4. Sur le téléphone, sélectionnez le fichier que vous
souhaitez visualiser ou lire, puis sélectionnez le
Home cinéma en tant que périphérique de lecture.
5. Sur le téléphone, démarrez la lecture.
Contrôle de la lecture Vidéo
Vous pouvez commander la lecture du contenu vidéo
stocké sur un disque Blu-ray/DVD, un périphérique USB,
un périphérique mobile ou un ordinateur. En fonction du
disque ou du contenu, certaines fonctions décrites dans
ce manuel peuvent ne pas être disponibles.
Touches de la télécommande servant à
la lecture vidéo
0
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
1
2
1 Utilisation du menu du disque, du menu des titres,
du menu contextuel et de la liste des titres
DISC MENU
Au cours de la lecture, appuyez sur
cette touche pour afficher le menu
Disque.
TITLE
MENU
Au cours de la lecture, appuyez sur
cette touche pour afficher le menu
Titre.
• Si le disque possède une liste de
lecture, appuyez sur le bouton
Afficher pour y accéder.
POPUP
MENU
Au cours de la lecture, appuyez sur
cette touche pour afficher le menu
Contextuel.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 32 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 32 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:49 013-06-04 오전 10:06:49Français 33|
05
Media Play
2 Touches liées à la lecture
L'appareil ne lit pas de données audio en mode
Recherche, Lecture au ralenti ou Lecture pas à pas.
• Pour reprendre la lecture à une vitesse normale,
appuyez sur le bouton 6.
6 Permet de démarrer la lecture.
5 Permet d'arrêter la lecture.
7 Permet d’interrompre la lecture.
Lecture
rapide
Pendant la lecture, appuyez sur le
bouton 3 ou . Chaque fois que
vous appuyez sur le bouton 3 ou
la vitesse de lecture change.
Lecture au
ralenti
En mode Pause, appuyez sur le bouton
. Chaque fois que vous appuyez
sur le bouton , la vitesse de lecture
change.
Lecture pas
à pas
En mode Pause, appuyez sur le bouton
7. Chaque fois que vous appuyez
sur le bouton 7, une nouvelle image
apparaît.
Saut de
lecture
Pendant la lecture, appuyez sur le
bouton 1 ou 2. Chaque fois que
vous appuyez sur le bouton 1 ou 2,
le disque se déplace sur le chapitre ou
le fichier précédent ou suivant.
Utilisation du menu OUTILS
Durant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
Lire depuis le
début
Sélectionnez cette option pour
revenir en début de film, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
3D
Utilisez le menu 3D pour
sélectionner l'option Côte-à-côte
ou Haut-bas si le contenu 3D en
cours de lecture n'apparaît pas
correctement en mode 3D.
| REMARQUE |
N’utilisez le menu 3D que pour
du contenu 3D de format Côte-
à-côte ou Haut-bas. S'il est
utilisé pour du contenu 2D, il ne
s'affichera pas correctement.
Rech. scène
Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction
Rech. scène durant la lecture pour
visualiser ou démarrer un film à
partir de la scène de votre choix.
| REMARQUE |
Si les informations d'index
contenues dans le fichier sont
endommagées ou si le fichier ne
prend pas en charge l'indexage,
vous ne serez pas en mesure
d'utiliser la fonction Rech. scène.
Si vous utilisez la fonction
DLNA après avoir connecté un
ordinateur via votre réseau, la
fonction Rech. scène peut ne
pas être prise en charge.
Rech. titres
Si le disque ou le périphérique
contient plusieurs films, sélectionnez
cette option pour lancer un autre titre.
1. Sélectionnez Rech. titres et
appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour
sélectionner un titre puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
Rechercher
des chapitres
Sélectionnez cette option pour lire
le chapitre de votre choix.
1. Sélectionnez Rechercher des
chapitres et appuyez sur le
bouton E.
2. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour
sélectionner un chapitre, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
Rech. barre de
temps
Sélectionnez cette option pour lire
le film à partir d'un point temporel
spécifique.
1. Sélectionnez Rech. barre
de temps et appuyez sur le
bouton E.
2. Servez-vous des boutons
numériques pour entrer le point
temporel de destination, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Vous pouvez également vous servir
des boutons ◄► pour avancer
dans le film ou le rembobiner. Le
film effectue respectivement une
avance ou un retour d'une minute
à chaque fois que vous appuyez
sur les boutons ◄►.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 33 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 33 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:53 013-06-04 오전 10:06:53| 34 Français
Media Play
Mode
Répétition
Sélectionnez cette option pour
répéter un titre, un chapitre ou une
section spécifique.
- Arrêt : cette option permet
de revenir en mode de lecture
normale.
- Titre : cette option permet
de répéter la lecture d'un titre
spécifique.
- Chapitre : cette option permet
de répéter la lecture d'un
chapitre spécifique.
- Répétition A-B : cette option
permet de répéter la lecture
d'une section spécifique.
1. Appuyez sur les boutons ▲▼
pour sélectionner la section
A-B à répéter, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton E à l'emplacement sur lequel
vous souhaitez démarrer
la répétition (A). Lancez la
lecture du film.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton E à
l'emplacement sur lequel vous
souhaitez arrêter la répétition (B).
| REMARQUE |
Vous devez définir le point (B) à un
intervalle d'au moins 5 secondes de
temps de lecture après le point (A).
Mode Image
Sélectionnez cette option pour
régler le mode image.
- Dynamique : permet d'accentuer
la netteté et la luminosité.
- Standard : Choisissez ce réglage
pour la plupart des applications
d'affichage.
- Cinéma : ce réglage est le mieux
adapté au visionnage de films.
- Utilisateur : Ce réglage vous
permet de régler respectivement
la fonction de netteté et de
réduction de bruit.
| REMARQUE |
Ce menu n'apparaît pas lors
de l'utilisation de la fonction BD
Wise.
Mode
égaliseur
Sélectionnez cette option pour
utiliser l’égaliseur.
Paramètres
Egaliseur
Sélectionnez cette option pour
régler l’égaliseur.
| REMARQUE |
Ne s’affiche que lorsque le
mode Égaliseur est activé.
Audio
Sélectionnez cette option pour
régler la langue de bande son
souhaitée.
Sync. audio
Dans certains cas, lorsque le
produit est connecté à un téléviseur
numérique, le signal audio peut ne
pas être synchronisé avec le signal
vidéo. Lorsque cela se produit, il
faut régler le temps de retard audio
de manière à ce qu'il corresponde
au signal vidéo.
Sous-titres Sélectionnez cette option pour régler
la langue des sous-titres souhaitée.
Param. de
sous-titre
Sélectionnez cette option pour
régler les sous-titres souhaités.
Angle
Utilisé pour regarder une scène
sous un autre angle. L’option
Angle affiche le nombre d'angles
disponibles (1/1, 1/2, 1/3, etc.).
BONUSVIEW
Vidéo Sélectionnez cette option pour
régler l’option bonusview désirée. BONUSVIEW
Audio
Plein écran
Permet de régler la taille de l'image
vidéo. Choisissez Original, Mode1
(plus grand), ou Mode2 (le plus
grand).
Information Permet d'afficher les informations
relatives au fichier vidéo.
| REMARQUE |
Le menu Outils peut varier en fonction du disque ou
du périphérique de stockage.
La lecture des fichiers vidéo au débit binaire élevé,
égal ou supérieur à 20 Mbps, exerce une forte charge
sur les capacités de l’appareil et risque, de ce fait, de
s’interrompre en cours de lecture.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 34 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 34 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:53 013-06-04 오전 10:06:53Français 35|
05
Media Play
Utilisation des menus Afficher et Options
Sur l’écran listant les fichiers vidéos, utilisez les boutons
▲▼◄► pour sélectionner Afficher ou Options en haut
à droite, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Vidéos
Afficher
Date
Permet d'afficher tous les
dossiers contenant des
vidéos classés par date. Si
vous sélectionnez un dossier
et appuyez sur le bouton E,
toutes les vidéos contenues
dans ce dossier s’affichent
classées par date.
Titre
Permet d'afficher tous les
fichiers vidéos sur le support
ou le périphérique de
stockage par titre.
Dossier
Permet d'afficher tous les
dossiers contenus sur le support
ou le périphérique de stockage.
Options
Lire élém.
sél.
Lire l'élément sélectionné vous
permet de créer une liste de
lecture en sélectionnant les
fichiers spécifiques à lire. Elle
fonctionne essentiellement de
la même manière sur tous les
supports. Consultez la section
Création d'une liste de lecture
à partir d'un CD à la page 37.
Envoyer
Sélectionnez Envoyer
permet d'envoyer des
fichiers sélectionnés sur
des applications (Picasa,
Facebook, etc.) ou des
périphériques. Pour utiliser la
fonction Envoyer, il vous faut
établir un compte auprès du
site en ligne, et y accéder en
utilisant la fonction Connexion.
| REMARQUE |
Les menus Affichage des options peuvent varier en
fonction du disque ou du périphérique de stockage
utilisé. Toutes les options peuvent ne pas s'afficher.
Les menus Afficher et Options sont généralement
disponibles lorsque vous regardez des fichiers vidéos sur
une clé USB à mémoire flash, un ordinateur, un disque
que vous avez enregistré vous-même ou un périphérique
mobile. Ils ne sont en général pas disponibles si vous
regardez un disque Blu-ray, DVD ou CD du commerce.
Contrôle de la lecture de Musique
Vous pouvez commander la lecture du contenu musical
stocké sur un DVD, CD, un périphérique USB, un
périphérique mobile ou un ordinateur. En fonction du
disque ou du contenu, certaines fonctions décrites dans
ce manuel peuvent ne pas être disponibles.
Touches de la télécommande servant à
l'écoute de musique
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
DISC
MENU
TITLE MENU
POPUP
1
4
5
3 6
2
1
Touches NUMÉRIQUES : Si les pistes
numérotées sont affichées, appuyez sur le
numéro d’une piste. La piste sélectionnée est
alors reproduite.
2
Touches 1 2 : Permet de passer à la piste
précédente/suivante.
3
Touche 5 : Permet d'arrêter la lecture d'une
piste.
4
Lecture rapide (CD audio (CD-DA) uniquement)
Pendant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton 3 ou
. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton
3 ou , la vitesse de lecture change.
5 Touche 7 : Mise en pause d’une piste.
6
Touche 6 : permet de lire la plage
sélectionnée.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 35 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 35 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:54 013-06-04 오전 10:06:54| 36 Français
Media Play
Commandes de l’écran Musique
00:09 00:43
TRACK 001
TRACK 001 00:43
TRACK 002 03:56
TRACK 003 04:41
TRACK 004 04:02
TRACK 005 03:43
TRACK 006 03:40
TRACK 007 04:06
TRACK 008 03:52
TRACK 009 03:04
TRACK 010 04:02
Options
off off
Mise en pause d’une piste.
Lecture d’une piste.
Permet de revenir à la plage précédente.
Permet de passer à la piste suivante.
Permet de rembobiner la piste.
Permet d'avancer sur la piste.
1
,
Répétition d'une piste ou de toutes
les pistes.
Lecture des pistes dans un ordre
aléatoire.
Affichage de l’égaliseur.
Ajustement manuel de l’égaliseur.
( Uniquement lorsque le mode
Égaliseur est activé)
Pour accéder aux commandes, lancez la lecture d'une
piste, puis servez-vous des boutons ▲▼◄► afin de
passer à la commande de votre choix.
| REMARQUE |
Les commandes de l’écran Musique sont accessibles
uniquement lorsqu’une piste est en lecture.
Toutes les commandes ne s’affichent pas simultanément.
Utilisation des menus Afficher et Options
Sur l’écran listant les fichiers de musique, utilisez les
boutons ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner Afficher ou Options
en haut à droite, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Musique
Afficher
Piste
Permet d'afficher toutes
les pistes de musique
contenues sur le support ou le
périphérique de stockage.
Album
Permet d'afficher toutes les
musiques contenues sur
le support ou le stockage
classées par album.
Artiste
Permet d'afficher tous
les fichiers de musique
contenus sur le support ou
le périphérique de stockage
classés par artiste.
Genre
Permet d'afficher toutes les
musiques contenues sur
le support ou le stockage
classées par genre.
Dossier
Permet d'afficher tous les
dossiers sur le support ou
périphérique de stockage.
Options
Lire élém.
sél.
Lire l'élément sélectionné vous
permet de créer une liste de
lecture en sélectionnant les
fichiers spécifiques à lire. Elle
fonctionne essentiellement de
la même manière sur tous les
supports. Consultez la section
Création d'une liste de lecture
sur un CD audio à la page 37.
Envoyer
Sélectionnez Envoyer
permet d'envoyer des fichiers
sélectionnés sur des applications
(Picasa, Facebook, etc.) ou des
périphériques. Pour utiliser la
fonction Envoyer, il vous faut
établir un compte auprès du site
en ligne, et y accéder en utilisant
la fonction Connexion.
Extraction
La fonction Extraction permet
de convertir un CD audio en
format mp3 et de sauvegarder
les fichiers convertis sur une
clé USB ou sur le périphérique
mobile connecté à l'appareil.
Consultez la section Extraction à
la page 38.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 36 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 36 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:55 013-06-04 오전 10:06:55Français 37|
05
Media Play
Information
Permet d'afficher les
informations relatives au
contenu.
Encodage Permet de gérer les options
d'encodage du texte.
| REMARQUE |
Le menu Options peut varier en fonction du disque ou
du périphérique de stockage utilisé. Toutes les options
peuvent ne pas s'afficher.
Répétition des pistes d’un CD Audio
Vous pouvez régler l'appareil pour répéter les pistes d’un
CD audio (CD-DA/MP3).
1. Pendant la lecture, utilisez le bouton ▲▼◄► pour
sélectionner dans le coin à gauche en bas de
l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner le
mode de répétition que vous souhaitez - Arrêt, 1
musique , ou Tous – puis appuyez sur le bouton p pp y E.
00:09 00:43
TRACK 001
TRACK 001 00:43
TRACK 002 03:56
TRACK 003 04:41
TRACK 004 04:02
TRACK 005 03:43
TRACK 006 03:40
TRACK 007 04:06
TRACK 008 03:52
TRACK 009 03:04
TRACK 010 04:02
Options
off off
Lecture aléatoire des pistes d’un CD Audio
Vous pouvez régler l'appareil pour lire les pistes d’un CD
audio (CD-DA/MP3) de façon aléatoire.
1. Pendant la lecture, utilisez le bouton ▲▼◄► pour
sélectionner dans le coin à gauche en bas de
l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour Arrêt ou Activé le
mode Aléatoire et appuyez sur le bouton E.
Création d'une liste de lecture à partir
d'un CD
1. Lorsque l'écran Lecture est affiché, sélectionnez le
bouton Options, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Le menu Options apparaît.
2. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner Lire
élém. sél. puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran
Lire élément sélectionné apparaît.
3. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner une piste,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Une coche s’affiche
à la gauche de la piste.
4. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner et cocher des
pistes supplémentaires.
5. Pour retirer une piste de la liste, accéder à la piste
et appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton E. La coche
de la piste est retirée.
6. Une fois terminé, appuyez sur les boutons ▲▼ pour
sélectionner Lecture, puis appuyez sur le bouton
E. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner et cocher
des pistes supplémentaires. Pour retirer une piste
de la liste, accéder à la piste et appuyez à nouveau
sur le bouton E. La coche de la piste est retirée.
| REMARQUE |
Vous pouvez créer une liste de lecture comportant jusqu'à
99 pistes extraites de différents CD audio (CD-DA).
Lorsque vous créez une liste de lecture, l'option Lire
élém. sél. est remplacée par Modif liste lec dans le
menu Options.
Sur l'écran Lire élément sélectionné, vous pouvez également
choisir Sélectionner tout, Tout désélectionner, et Annuler.
~
Utilisez Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner toutes
les pistes. Ceci annule vos sélections de piste
individuelles. Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche
RETURN de votre télécommande ou que vous
sélectionnez Lecture puis appuyez sur le bouton
E, toutes les pistes s’affichent sur l’écran de
lecture de musique et l'appareil commence à lire
toutes les pistes à partir de la piste 001.
~
Utilisez l’option Tout désélectionner pour
désélectionner en une seule fois toutes les
pistes sélectionnées. Puis sélectionnez les pistes
individuelles ou utilisez Sélectionner tout puis appuyez
sur le bouton RETURN de votre télécommande ou
sélectionnez Lecture puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Si vous n'utilisez pas l'option Sélectionner tout ou
ne sélectionnez pas de piste individuelle, la liste de
lecture ne sera pas modifiée.
~
Annuler annule tout changement effectués sur l’écran
de la sélection de lecture. Lorsque vous revenez à
l’écran de la liste de lecture, elle sera inchangée.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 37 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 37 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:58 013-06-04 오전 10:06:58| 38 Français
Media Play
Extraction
1. Insérez un périphérique USB dans la prise USB
située à l'avant de l'appareil.
2. Lorsque l'écran Lecture est affiché, sélectionnez le
bouton Options, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Le menu Options apparaît.
3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner
Extraction, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L'écran
Extraction s'affiche.
4. Utilisez les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner une piste,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Une coche s’affiche
à la gauche de la piste.
5. Répétez l’étape 4 pour sélectionner et cocher des
pistes supplémentaires.
6. Pour retirer une piste de la liste, accéder à la piste
et appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton E. La coche
de la piste est retirée.
7. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Extract. à
l'aide du bouton ▲▼, puis appuyez sur le bouton
E. La fenêtre contextuelle Extraire s'affiche.
8. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner le
périphérique de stockage des fichiers extraits, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Ne débranchez pas le périphérique lorsque l'extraction
est en cours d’exécution.
9. Si vous souhaitez annuler l'extraction, appuyez sur
le bouton E puis sélectionnez Oui. Sélectionnez
Non pour continuer l'extraction.
10. Lorsque l'opération est terminée, le message « Extract.
réussie. » s'affiche. Appuyez sur le bouton E.
11. Appuyez sur la touche RETURN pour revenir à
l’écran de la liste de lecture.
| REMARQUE |
Cette fonction n'est pas disponible avec les CD Audio
DTS.
Cette fonction n'est pas prise en charge par certains
disques.
L’extraction encode la musique au format .mp3 à 192
kbps.
Dans l'écran Extraction, vous pouvez également
choisir entre les options Sélectionner tout et Tout
suppr.
- Utilisez Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner toutes les
pistes puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Cette action
annule toutes vos sélections de pistes individuelles.
- Utilisez Tout suppr pour désélectionner en une
seule fois toutes les pistes sélectionnées.
Utilisation du système Bluetooth
Vous pouvez utiliser un périphérique Bluetooth pour
écouter de la musique avec un son stéréo de haute
qualité, tout cela sans fil !
Qu’est-ce que Bluetooth ?
Le système Bluetooth est une technologie qui permet
de connecter facilement entre eux des périphériques
compatibles Bluetooth à l'aide d'une liaison sans fil
courte distance.
• Un périphérique Bluetooth peut bourdonner ou être
défectueux :
- Si une partie de votre corps est en contact avec le
système de réception/transmission du périphérique
Bluetooth ou du Home cinéma.
- Lorsque l’appareil est soumis à des variations
électriques liées à la présence d’obstructions (ex. :
mur, coin ou cloison de bureau).
- Lorsque l’appareil est exposé à des interférences
électriques provenant d’appareils utilisant la même
bande de fréquences (exemple : équipements
médicaux, fours à micro-ondes et réseaux LAN sans fil).
• Associer l'Ensemble Home cinéma et le périphérique
Bluetooth, les deux étant près l’un de l’autre.
• Plus la distance est grande entre l'Ensemble Home
cinéma et le périphérique Bluetooth, plus la qualité de la
transmission se dégrade. Si la distance excède la plage
opérationnelle Bluetooth, la connexion est perdue.
• Dans les zones où la réception est faible, la connexion
Bluetooth peut ne pas fonctionner correctement.
• La portée de réception maximale de l'Ensemble Home
cinéma est de 10 m dans toutes les directions, si aucun
obstacle ne se trouve sur le chemin parcouru par le
signal. La connexion sera automatiquement coupée si
le périphérique est hors de portée. Même si la distance
est respectée, il est possible que la qualité sonore soit
détériorée par des obstacles (ex. : murs, portes).
• Ce périphérique sans fil peut provoquer des
interférences électriques durant son fonctionnement.
Pour connecter le Home cinéma à un
périphérique Bluetooth
Connecter
Périphérique Bluetooth
Vérifiez que le périphérique Bluetooth prend en charge la
fonction écouteurs stéréo compatible Bluetooth.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 38 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 38 22013-06-04 오전 10:06:59 013-06-04 오전 10:06:59Français 39|
05
Media Play
1. Appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION de la
télécommande de l'appareil pour afficher le
message BT.
2. Sélectionnez le menu Bluetooth sur le périphérique
Bluetooth que vous désirez connecter. Pour les
instructions, reportez-vous au manuel d’utilisation
de ce périphérique Bluetooth.
3. Sélectionnez le menu des écouteurs stéréo sur le
périphérique Bluetooth.
• Une liste de périphériques s’affiche.
4. Sélectionnez « [HTS]Fxxxxx » dans la liste.
• Lorsque l'Ensemble Home cinéma est connecté au
périphérique Bluetooth, le nom de ce périphérique
Bluetooth connecté suivi du nom du Home cinéma
s’affiche en façade du Home cinéma.
5. Lisez de la musique sur le périphérique connecté.
• Vous pouvez maintenant écouter la musique
enregistrée sur le périphérique Bluetooth
connecté depuis votre Home cinéma.
| REMARQUE |
Le Home cinéma prend en charge uniquement les
données d’ordinateur monocarte de qualité moyenne
(jusqu’à 237 kbps@48 kHz) mais il ne prend pas en
charge les données d’ordinateur monocarte de haute
qualité (328 kbps@44,1 kHz).
La fonctionnalité AVRCP est prise en charge. Sa
fonctionnalité diffère en fonction des spécifications du
périphérique connecté.
Effectuez uniquement la connexion à un périphérique
Bluetooth qui prend en charge le profil A2DP.
Un seul périphérique Bluetooth peut être associé à la fois.
Les fonctions de recherche ou de connexion peuvent
ne pas fonctionner correctement dans les cas suivants:
- En présence d’un fort champ électrique à proximité
ou autour du Home cinéma.
- Si plusieurs périphériques Bluetooth sont associés
simultanément à l'appareil.
- Si le périphérique Bluetooth est éteint, mal
positionné ou s'il connaît des dysfonctionnements.
- Notez que les appareils tels que les fours à microondes, les adaptateurs LAN sans fil, les lampes
fluorescentes et les fours à gaz pour le chauffage
des locaux utilisent la même plage de fréquences
que le périphérique Bluetooth, et peuvent provoquer
des interférences électriques.
Pour déconnecter le périphérique Bluetooth
du Home cinéma
Vous pouvez déconnecter le périphérique Bluetooth du
Home cinéma. Pour les instructions, reportez-vous au
manuel d’utilisation de ce périphérique Bluetooth.
• Lorsque le Home cinéma est déconnecté du périphérique
Bluetooth, le message « DISCONNECTED » s’affiche en
façade.
Pour déconnecter le Home cinéma du
périphérique Bluetooth
Appuyez sur le bouton ( ) en façade du Home cinéma
pour passer du mode BT à un autre mode ou éteindre le
Home cinéma.
• Le périphérique Bluetooth connecté attend un certain
temps la réponse du Home cinéma avant de terminer
la connexion, hormis si vous déconnectez le Home
Cinéma via le changement des fonctions. (Le temps de
déconnexion peut varier en fonction du périphérique
Bluetooth.)
| REMARQUE |
En mode Bluetooth, la connexion sera perdue si la
distance entre le Home cinéma et le périphérique
Bluetooth dépasse 10 m. Lorsque le périphérique
Bluetooth est replacé dans la portée conseillée ou
lorsque vous le redémarrez, vous devez apparier à
nouveau le périphérique et le Home cinéma pour les
reconnecter.
En mode Bluetooth, l’économiseur d’écran s’active si
le périphérique Bluetooth reste en l’état Prêt pendant
5 minutes. Pour reconnecter le périphérique Bluetooth,
désactivez l’économiseur d’écran puis connectez le
périphérique. Pour désactiver l’économiseur d’écran,
appuyez sur n’importe quel bouton de la télécommande
(le bouton Volume, une touche numérique, etc.)
Visionnage des photos
Vous pouvez visionner les photos contenues dans un DVD,
une mémoire USB, un périphérique mobile ou un ordinateur.
Utilisation du menu Outils
Durant la lecture, appuyez sur le bouton TOOLS.
Précédent Sélectionnez cette option pour
déplacer l'image précédente.
Suivant Sélectionnez cette option pour
déplacer l'image suivante.
Lancer/Arrêter
le diaporama
Sélectionnez cette option pour lire
ou mettre en pause le diaporama.
Paramètres du
diaporama
Vitesse : Sélectionnez cette
option pour régler la vitesse du
diaporama.
Effets : Sélectionnez cette option
pour régler les effets spéciaux du
diaporama.
Zoom
Sélectionnez cette option pour
agrandir l'image actuellement
sélectionnée. (Agrandissement
jusqu'à 4 fois la taille réelle)
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 39 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 39 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:00 013-06-04 오전 10:07:00| 40 Français
Media Play
Pivoter
Sélectionnez cette option pour faire
tourner l'image. (Ceci entraînera
la rotation de l'image dans le sens
des aiguilles d'une montre ou dans
le sens inverse.)
Fond musical
Sélectionnez cette option pour
écouter de la musique tout en
visionnant un diaporama.
Paramètres
Mode Image
- Dynamique : Cette option
permet d'accroître la netteté.
- Standard : Choisissez cette
option pour la plupart des
applications de visualisation.
- Cinéma : Ceci est le réglage le
mieux adapté au visionnage de films.
- Utilisateur : Ce réglage vous
permet de régler respectivement
la fonction de netteté et de
réduction de bruit.
Information : Permet d'afficher les
informations concernant l’image.
Mode
égaliseur
Personnalisez vos préférences de son
à l'aide des paramètres de l'égaliseur.
Paramètres
Egaliseur
Cette fonction est également disponible
lorsque Mode égaliseur est Activé.
| REMARQUE |
Le menu Options peut varier en fonction du disque ou
du périphérique de stockage utilisé. Toutes les options
peuvent ne pas s'afficher.
Pour activer la fonction de musique de fond, le fichier
photo et le fichier musical doivent être contenus sur le
même support de stockage. Cependant, la qualité sonore
peut être affectée par le débit binaire du fichier MP3, la
taille de la photo et la méthode d'encodage utilisée.
Vous ne pouvez pas agrandir les sous-titres et les
graphiques PG pour les afficher en mode plein écran.
Utilisation des menus Affichage et
Options en cas de visualisation de la
liste des fichiers photos
Photos
Afficher
Date
Permet de grouper tous
les fichiers photos sur le
support ou périphérique de
stockage par date. Cliquez
sur un groupe pour lire les
photos dans ce groupe.
Titre
Permet d'afficher tous
les fichiers photos sur le
support ou périphérique
de stockage par titre.
Dossier
Permet d'afficher tous les
dossiers sur le support ou
périphérique de stockage.
Options
Diaporama
Permet de démarrer
le diaporama. Permet
d'afficher tous les fichiers
dans le dossier actuel,
l'un après l'autre. Si
vous souhaitez créer un
diaporama avec un groupe
de photos sélectionnées,
voir Lire l'élément
sélectionné ci-dessous.
Lire élém.
sél.
Lire l'élément sélectionné
vous permet de créer
une liste de lecture en
sélectionnant les fichiers
spécifiques à lire. Elle
fonctionne essentiellement
de la même manière sur
tous les supports. Consultez
la section Création d'une
liste de lecture sur un CD
audio à la page 37.
Envoyer
Sélectionnez Envoyer
pour envoyer des fichiers
sélectionnés sur des
applications en ligne
(Picasa, Facebook, etc.)
ou des périphériques. Pour
utiliser la fonction Envoyer, il
vous faut établir un compte
auprès du site en ligne, et
y accéder en utilisant la
fonction Connexion.
| REMARQUE |
Le menu Options peut varier en fonction du disque ou
du périphérique de stockage utilisé. Toutes les options
peuvent ne pas s'afficher.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 40 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 40 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:01 013-06-04 오전 10:07:01Français 41|
05
Media Play
Ecouter la radio
Utilisation des touches de la télécommande
1. Appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION pour
sélectionner FM.
2. Syntonisez la station désirée.
• Syntonisation préréglée 1 : Appuyez sur la touche
5 pour sélectionner Prédéfini puis appuyez sur
la touche TUNING/CH (,.) pour sélectionner la
station préréglée.
- Avant de syntoniser des stations préréglées,
vous devez ajouter les stations préréglées à
la mémoire de l'appareil. Reportez-vous à la
page 42 pour obtenir des instructions.
• Syntonisation manuelle : Appuyez sur la touche
5 pour sélectionner Manuel puis appuyez sur la
touche TUNING/CH (,.) pour syntoniser une
fréquence inférieure ou supérieure.
• Syntonisation automatique : Appuyez sur la
touche 5 pour sélectionner Manuel puis
appuyez et maintenez la touche TUNING/
CH (,.) pour rechercher la fréquence
automatiquement.
Réglage Mono/Stéréo
Appuyez sur la touche MO/ST.
• À chaque appui sur la touche, le son commute entre
STEREO et MONO.
• Dans une région où la réception est faible, sélectionnez
MONO pour une diffusion claire et sans interférence.
Préréglage des stations
Exemple : Préréglage de FM 89.10 dans la mémoire.
1. Appuyez sur la touche FUNCTION pour
sélectionner FM.
2. Appuyez sur la touche TUNING/CH (,.) pour
sélectionner <89.10>.
3. Appuyez sur la touche TUNER MEMORY.
• NUMBER clignote sur l’écran.
4. Appuyez à nouveau sur la touche TUNER
MEMORY.
• Appuyez sur la touche TUNER MEMORY avant
que NUMBER disparaisse lui-même de l’écran.
• Après avoir appuyé sur la touche TUNER
MEMORY, NUMBER disparaît de l’écran et la
station est stockée en mémoire.
5. Pour prérégler une autre station, répétez les étapes
2 à 4.
• Pour syntoniser une station préréglée, appuyez
sur le bouton 5 pour sélectionner Préréglage
puis appuyez sur le bouton TUNING/CH (,.)
pour sélectionner la station préréglée.
Utilisation des touches de contrôle
d’effets spéciaux de la télécommande
Fonction EFFET SONORE SOUND
EFFECT
Vous permet de sélectionner un mode qui optimise le
son.
1. Appuyez sur la touche SOUND EFFECT.
2. Appuyez sur les touches ▲▼ pour sélectionner
le mode souhaité. DSP, Dolby Pro Logic II ou
Mode SFE.
3. Appuyez sur les touches ◄► pour sélectionner
l’effet sonore souhaité.
❑ DSP
MP3 Enhancer Power Bass Football Arrêt
• MP3 Enhancer : cette fonction permet d’optimiser
votre expérience sonore (ex. : musique mp3) Vous
pouvez effectuer une mise à l’échelle du son MP3 (24
kHz, 8 bits) vers un son de CD (44,1 kHz, 16 bits).
• Power Bass : cette fonction augmente le niveau du
volume des basses et procure des effets de basse
plus puissants.
• Football : permet de créer le son comme un stade
plus dynamique et réaliste. Pour écouter le football,
soccer, et autres événements sportifs.
• Arrêt : Sélectionnez cette option pour une écoute
normale.
❑ Dolby Pro Logic II
Cinéma Musique Jeux Matrix Pro Logic
Arrêt
• Cinéma : ajoute du réalisme à la bande son.
• Musique : lorsque vous écoutez de la musique,
vous pouvez faire l’expérience d’effets sonores
comme si vous écoutiez la performance réelle.
• Jeux : améliore la qualité sonore du jeu.
• Matrix : sélectionnez cette option pour obtenir un
son ambiophonique multicanaux de qualité.
• Pro Logic : sélectionnez cette option pour écouter
une source sonore 2CH en son ambiophonique
5.1CH avec toutes les enceintes sous tension.
- Il est possible qu’une enceinte spécifique ne
puisse pas émettre de son en fonction du signal
d’entrée.
• Arrêt : sélectionnez cette option pour une écoute
normale.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 41 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 41 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:01 013-06-04 오전 10:07:01| 42 Français
Media Play
❑ Mode SFE
Symphony Hall à Boston (Salle 1) Philharmonic
Hall à Bratislava (Salle 2) Club jazz à Séoul B
Eglise à Séoul Amphithéâtre (Rock) Arrêt
• Symphony Hall à Boston (Salle 1) : fournit des
voix claires comme dans une salle de concert.
• Philharmonic Hall à Bratislava (Salle 2) : fournit
également un son clair comme dans une salle de
concert, mais moins puissant qu’avec la fonction
HALL1.
• Club jazz à Séoul B : Réglage recommandé pour
le jazz.
• Eglise à Séoul : Donne l’impression de se trouver
dans une cathédrale.
• Amphithéâtre (Rock) : Réglage recommandé pour
le rock.
• Arrêt : Sélectionnez cette option pour une écoute
normale.
Son 3D 3D
SOUND
Vous pouvez profiter d’un son plus naturel et
ambiophonique clair avec des tonalités enrichies
par ajustement de la profondeur du son à l’aide des
options de niveau.
Arrêt Elevé Faible
| REMARQUE |
Le son 3D n'est pas disponible en mode FM.
Son du téléviseur
TV
SOUND
Vous pouvez écouter le son via Haut-parleurs Home
Cinéma ou Haut-parleur TV avec le bouton TV
SOUND.
1. Connectez le câble HDMI au téléviseur et au
Home cinéma. (Reportez-vous en page 17)
2. Placez le Home cinéma et le téléviseur connectés
sur Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Activé.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton TV SOUND de la
télécommande.
4. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton
TV SOUND, TV SOUND ON/OFF clignote
brièvement à l'écran sur la façade puis passe à
D. IN.
- TV SOUND ON (SON DU TÉLÉVISEUR
ACTIVÉ) : émet le son jusqu'aux Hautparleurs Home Cinéma.
- TV SOUND OFF (SON DU TÉLÉVISEUR
DÉSACTIVÉ) : émet jusqu'aux Haut-parleur
TV connectés par Anynet+.
❑ Utilisez dans ce cas.
1) Si vous voulez écouter le son à travers les
enceintes du Home cinéma lorsque vous
regardez la télévision.
2) Si vous voulez écouter le son à partir d'une
clé USB branchée au téléviseur à travers les
enceintes du Home cinéma.
❑ Spécification de prise en charge TV SOUND
ON/OFF
Téléviseur
connecté
Paramètre
Anynet+ (HDMICEC)
TV
Sound
ON
TV
Sound
OFF
Téléviseur
prenant en
charge le
paramètre
Anynet+ (HDMICEC)
MARCHE O O
ARRÊT O X
Téléviseur ne
prenant pas
en charge le
paramètre
Anynet+ (HDMICEC)
Aucune
opération O X
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 42 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 42 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:02 013-06-04 오전 10:07:02Français 43|
06
Services Réseau
Vous pouvez profiter de différents services réseau tels
qu’une lecture vidéo en transit ou une application en ligne
en connectant l'appareil au réseau.
Pour utiliser les services réseau, vous devez d’abord :
1. Connectez l'appareil au réseau.
(Reportez-vous en page 18)
2. Configurez les paramètres réseau.
(reportez-vous aux pages 25 à 27)
Connexion à votre compte
Samsung
Avant d’accéder aux Films et Émissions de télévision ou
Applications, nous vous suggérons de vous connecter à
votre compte Samsung.
Pour vous connecter à votre compte Samsung, suivez
ces étapes :
1. Lorsque l’écran d’accueil est affiché, appuyez sur le
bouton ROUGE (A). L’écran Connexion s’affiche.
2. Sélectionnez le champ E-mail et appuyez sur
le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle du clavier
s’affiche.
3. A l’aide du clavier, saisissez votre adresse e-mail.
Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Terminé
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Connexion
s’affiche à nouveau.
4. Sélectionnez le champ Mot de passe et appuyez
sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle du clavier
s’affiche.
5. A l’aide du clavier, saisissez votre mot de passe.
Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Terminé
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Connexion
s’affiche à nouveau.
6. Pour faciliter votre prochaine connexion,
sélectionnez Connexion auto, et appuyez sur le
bouton E.
7. Sélectionnez Connex. et appuyez sur le bouton E.
L’appareil vous connecte à votre compte. L’e-mail
de votre compte est affiché en bas à gauche de
l’écran.
| REMARQUE |
Si vous avez sélectionné Connexion auto, lors
de votre prochaine connexion, l’appareil entrera
automatiquement votre e-mail et votre mot de passe.
Vous devez simplement sélectionner Connexion.
Si votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe ne
sont pas affichés lorsque l’écran Connexion apparaît,
sélectionnez le bouton possédant la flèche pointant
vers le bas accompagnant le champ Email, et appuyez
sur le bouton E. Une liste déroulante de tous vos
comptes enregistrés s’affiche. Sélectionnez votre
compte puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’appareil
remplit les champs E-mail et Mot de passe.
Si vous appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A) après vous
être connecté, la fenêtre contextuelle Mon compte
apparaît. Dans la fenêtre contextuelle, vous pouvez
sélectionner Déconnexion, Modifier les informations du
compte, Établir une liaison avec les comptes du service,
Retirer le compte du périphérique et Désactiver le compte.
Pour louer des films et acheter des applications payantes,
vous devez posséder une carte de crédit enregistrée
sur votre compte. Si aucune carte n’est enregistrée,
sélectionnez Modifier les informations du compte. Sur la
page Modifier les informations du compte, sélectionnez
Enregistrer carte et appuyez sur le bouton E, puis
suivez les instructions à l’écran.
Avant d’utiliser Films et Émissions
de télévision ou Applications
Si vous n’avez pas configuré Smart Hub, lorsque vous
utilisez Films et Émissions de télévision ou Applications
pour la première fois, l’appareil vous demandera
d’effectuer la procédure de configuration Smart Hub.
1. Sur l’écran d’accueil, sélectionnez Films et séries
télé ou Applications, et appuyez sur le bouton E.
Si vous avez sélectionné Applications, passez à
l'étape 4.
2. Si vous avez sélectionné Films et séries télé, la
fenêtre contextuelle Smart Hub apparaît en vous
demandant de configurer Smart Hub. Sélectionnez
Oui et appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran
Bienvenue s’affiche.
3. Sélectionnez Démarrer et appuyez sur le bouton
E. L’écran Conditions générales, Politique de
confidentialité Smart Hub s’affiche.
4. Sur cet écran, vous devez lire et accepter les
Conditions générales et la Politique de confidentialité
de Smart Hub pour utiliser leurs services.
5. Déroulez le texte et cliquez sur les boutons Afficher
les détails pour prendre connaissance de tous les
documents.
6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, revenez au début du
texte au premier champ de saisie et appuyez sur le
bouton E pour accepter les Conditions générales
et la Politique de confidentialité.
7. Appuyez deux fois sur le bouton ► pour accéder
à l’écran Notifications complémentaires de
confidentialité.
8. Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les détails pour lire la
totalité de la notification.
9. La lecture terminée, revenez au début du texte au
premier champ de saisie et appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Il n'est pas nécessaire d’accepter la Notification
complémentaire de confidentialité, mais une ou
plusieurs des dispositions ou fonctionnalités Smart TV
peuvent ne pas être disponibles si vous ne le faites pas.
10. Appuyez deux fois sur le bouton ►. L'écran
Configuration terminée apparaît. Appuyez sur le
bouton E.
Services Réseau
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 43 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 43 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:04 013-06-04 오전 10:07:04| 44 Français
Services Réseau
Utilisation de Films et Émissions
de télévision
Vous pouvez télécharger ou lire en continu des films et
des émissions de télévision payants ou gratuits et les
regarder sur votre téléviseur.
Films et séries télé
Recommandé Recommandé
Favoris Recommandé Films Emissions TV Acheté
1. Sur l’écran d’accueil, sélectionnez Films et séries
télé, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez entre les films Recommandé ou
Recommandé puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La
page relative à ce film s’affiche.
OU
Utilisez le bouton ▼ pour accéder au bas de l’écran.
Sélectionnez Favoris, Recommandé, Films,
Emissions TV ou Acheté, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
Sur la page qui s’affiche, utilisez les boutons
▲▼◄► pour sélectionner une émission ou un film,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Sur l’écran Émissions de télévision ou Films, vous
pouvez également sélectionner Nouveautés, Le
plus populaire ou Genres pour voir davantage
d’émissions ou de films disponibles. Sur l’écran
Genre, utilisez les touches ▲▼◄► pour sélectionner
un Genre, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Pour effectuer une sélection sur une page affichant
des émissions de télévision ou des films, utilisez les
boutons ▲▼◄►, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
3. Pour regarder une sélection, sélectionnez Regarder
maintenant, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Un écran de sélection s’affiche listant divers
emplacements à partir desquels vous pouvez louer
le film ainsi que son prix.
4. Sélectionnez un emplacement et appuyez sur le
bouton E. Suivez les indications à l’écran pour
démarrer le film.
| REMARQUE |
Si vous ne vous êtes pas connecté à votre compte
Samsung, l’écran Connexion s’affiche après l’étape 3
et vous devez vous connecter.
Si vous n’avez pas de carte de crédit associée à votre
compte Samsung, après vous être connecté, l’écran
Enregistrer une carte s’affiche. Suivez les indications
portées à l’écran. Vous devez avoir une carte de crédit
enregistrée sur votre compte pour louer des films et
acheter des applications payantes.
Utilisation de Applications
Cette option vous permet de télécharger les applications
depuis l'Internet, et d'accéder à diverses applications
gratuites ou payantes que vous pouvez ensuite
visionner sur votre téléviseur. Pour accéder à certaines
applications, vous devez posséder un compte Samsung.
L'écran Applications d'un coup d'œil
Samsung TV
2 3 4 5
Navigateur Web Applications Applications
Plus d'applis
1
Recommandé
Mes applis
Applications
1 2
3 4
1
Recommandé : affiche les contenus
recommandés gérés par Samsung.
Cette option vous permet d'avoir accès aux
applications payantes ou gratuites que vous
pouvez télécharger.
2
Applications représentées : utilisez les
boutons ▲▼◄► pour mettre l’Application
représentée affichée en surbrillance, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
3
Mes applis : affiche votre galerie personnelle
d'applications modifiables sur l'écran Toutes les
applis téléchargées.
4
Plus d'applis : Sélectionnez Plus d'applis
pour accéder à l’écran Toutes les applis
téléchargées sur lequel vous pouvez ajouter,
modifier et supprimer des applications et voir
toutes les applications téléchargées.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 44 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 44 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:05 013-06-04 오전 10:07:05Français 45|
06
Services Réseau
Téléchargement des applications
Vous pouvez télécharger des applications payantes ou
gratuites via Samsung Apps.
1. Sur l’écran Apps, sélectionnez Samsung Apps,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. L’écran Samsung
Apps apparaît.
2. Sous Nouveautés, sur la largeur du haut de l’écran,
s’affiche une série de nouvelles applications. Utilisez
les boutons ◄► pour passer d’une application
à l’autre vers la gauche ou vers la droite, puis
sélectionnez une application. Appuyez sur le
bouton E pour afficher davantage d’informations
concernant cette application. Si l’application est
gratuite, sélectionnez Téléch., puis appuyez sur
le bouton E pour télécharger l’application. Si
l’application est payante, sélectionnez Ach., puis
appuyez sur le bouton E et suivez les instructions
portées à l’écran.
| REMARQUE |
Pour acheter une application, vous devez être
connecté à votre compte Samsung et posséder une
carte de crédit enregistrée sur ce compte. Appuyez
sur le bouton ROUGE (A) de votre télécommande
pour vous connecter.
Si vous n’avez pas de carte enregistrée, après vous
être connecté, appuyez sur le bouton ROUGE (A)
à nouveau et sélectionnez Modifier les informations
du compte dans la fenêtre contextuelle qui apparaît.
Sur la page Modifier les informations du compte,
sélectionnez Enregistrer une carte, puis suivez les
instructions portées à l’écran.
Vous pouvez également accéder et télécharger des
applications à partir des catégories listées sur la
gauche de l’écran. Pour les instructions, reportezvous à l'étape 4.
3. Lorsque l’application a été téléchargée, sélectionnez
Exécuter, puis appuyez sur le bouton E pour lancer à présent l’application. Pour lancer
l’application ultérieurement, appuyez sur le bouton
RETURN. Dans tous les cas, l’icône de l’application
apparaîtra sur l’écran Applications.
4. Pour visualiser plus d’applications, utilisez les
boutons ▲▼◄► pour passer à la liste des
catégories du côté gauche de l’écran.
5. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner une
catégorie. Chaque fois que vous déplacez la
surbrillance sur une autre catégorie, un nouvel
ensemble d'applications s'affiche sur la droite.
6. Utilisez le bouton ► pour passer aux applications et
les boutons ▲▼◄► pour passer d’une application
à une autre.
7. Pour davantage d’informations concernant une
application, sélectionnez-la, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
8. Pour télécharger l’application, suivez les indications
des étapes 2 et 3.
Démarrer une application
1. Sélectionnez Applications sur l'écran Accueil, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sur l’écran Applications, utilisez les boutons
▲▼◄► pour sélectionner une application, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E. L’application démarre.
Utilisation de l'écran Toutes les applis
téléchargées
Plus d'applis
WebBrowser
WebBrowser
Catégorie : XXXXX | Version : X.XXX | Taille : XX.XKB
Samsung Apps
Vue : Date téléchargement Options
1 /23
Stockage
109.48 MB / 629.43 MB
L’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées liste les
applications que vous avez téléchargées et vous permet :
• De trier les applications sur l’écran Toutes les applis
téléchargées par Date téléchargement, Ouvert
récemment et Titre.
• D’attribuer un numéro de fonctions du menu Options
aux applications listées dans la section Mes applis
de l’écran Applications qui inclut la mise à jour des
applications, le déplacement des applications dans un
dossier, la suppression des applications de Mes applis
et le verrouillage des applications.
• De démarrer les applications.
Trier les applications
Pour trier les applications sur l’écran Toutes les applis
téléchargées, suivez ces étapes :
1. Sur l'écran Accueil, sélectionnez Applications, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sur l’écran Applications, utilisez le bouton ▼ pour
accéder à la Zone active téléchargée au bas de la
page, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
3. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour passer à Afficher en haut de
l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
4. Dans la liste déroulante qui apparaît, sélectionnez
Date téléchargement, Ouvert récemment
ou Titre, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Les applications de l’écran Toutes les applis
téléchargées sont triées selon le critère que vous
avez retenu.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 45 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 45 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:11 013-06-04 오전 10:07:11| 46 Français
Services Réseau
Utilisation de fonctions du menu Options
Verr / Déverr
L’utilisation de la fonction Verrouiller/Déverrouiller et
du code PIN de sécurité vous permet de verrouiller les
applications afin qu’elles ne puissent être démarrées
depuis l’écran Applications ou depuis l’écran Toutes les
applis téléchargées. Le code PIN par défaut est 0000.
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Verr / Déverr, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
3. Lorsque Verrouiller le service apparaît, saisissez le
code PIN en utilisant les touches numériques de
votre télécommande.
4. Pour verrouiller une application, sélectionnez cette
application, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Un
verrou apparaît sur l’application. Répétez pour
verrouiller individuellement une autre application.
5. Pour déverrouiller une application verrouillée,
sélectionnez cette application, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
6. Pour verrouiller toutes les applications en une fois,
utilisez les boutons ▲► pour sélectionner le bouton
Verr. tout, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
7. Pour déverrouiller toutes les applications verrouillées
en une fois, utilisez les boutons ▲► pour
sélectionner le bouton Déverr. tout, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
8. Appuyez deux fois sur le bouton RETURN pour
revenir à l’écran Applications. Les applications
verrouillées affichent un verrou en haut à droite.
Modif mes applis
Modifier mes applis vous permet d’ajouter et de supprimer
des applications de Mes applis. Il vous permet également
de changer la position d’une application dans Mes applis.
Ajouter une application à Mes applis.
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Modifier mes applis, puis appuyez sur
le bouton E. L’écran Modifier mes applis apparaît.
3. Sélectionnez une application en couleur dans la
rangée supérieure des applications, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E. L’icône de l’application en
couleur apparaît dans la zone Mes applis audessous et l’icône de l’application dans la rangée
supérieure est grisée.
| REMARQUE |
Les applications grisées sont déjà dans Mes applis.
4. Lorsque vous revenez à l’écran Applications,
l’application s’affiche dans la zone Mes applis.
Supprimer une application de Mes applis
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Modif mes applis, puis appuyez sur
le bouton E. L’écran Modifier mes applis apparaît.
3. Sélectionnez l’application que vous souhaitez supprimer
de Mes applis, appuyez sur le bouton E, puis sur les
boutons ▲▼◄► dans la direction de la .
La fenêtre contextuelle Retirer de mes applis apparaît.
4. Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur le bouton E.
5. Lorsque vous revenez à l’écran Applications,
l’application a été retirée de la zone Mes applis.
Déplacer une application dans Mes applis
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Modif mes applis, puis appuyez sur
le bouton E. L’écran Modifier mes applis apparaît.
3. Sélectionnez l’application que vous souhaitez
déplacer dans Mes applis, appuyez sur le bouton
E puis sur les boutons ▲▼◄► pour déplacer
l’icône de l’application dans la direction de l’une des
flèches (<, >, ^, etc.) qui apparaît autour de l’icône.
L’icône de l’application se déplace dans la direction
que vous avez choisie.
4. Lorsque vous avez placé l’icône de l’application à
l’emplacement souhaité, appuyez sur le bouton E.
5. Lorsque vous revenez à l’écran Applications,
l’application est positionnée à l’emplacement que
vous avez sélectionné.
Créer dossier
L’option Créer dossier vous permet de créer un dossier
sur l’écran Téléchargé dans lequel vous pouvez placer les
applications.
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Créer dossier, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Régler le nom
de dossier apparaît.
3. Appuyez sur le bouton E. Le clavier apparaît.
4. Sélectionnez le bouton Effacer sur le côté droit et
appuyez sur le bouton E pour retirer Dossier 1 du
champ d’entrée. Puis, à l’aide du clavier, entrez le
nom que vous souhaitez appliquer au dossier.
5. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez le bouton Terminé
sur le côté droit, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La
fenêtre contextuelle apparaît à nouveau.
6. Sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E.
Le nouveau dossier s’affiche dans la liste des
applications du côté gauche de l’écran.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 46 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 46 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:17 013-06-04 오전 10:07:17Français 47|
06
Services Réseau
Dépl. ds doss.
L’option Déplacer vers un dossier vous permet de
déplacer des applications vers le dossier de votre choix.
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Dépl. ds doss., puis appuyez sur
le bouton E. L’écran Déplacer vers un dossier
apparaît.
3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour vous déplacer vers
une application, puis appuyez sur le bouton E pour
sélectionner cette application. Une coche s’affiche
dans le coin supérieur gauche de l’application.
4. Pour désélectionner une application, appuyez sur le
bouton E. La coche disparaît.
5. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner des applications
supplémentaires.
| REMARQUE |
Pour sélectionner toutes les applications téléchargées,
sélectionnez Sélectionner tout en haut à droite
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour
désélectionner toutes les applications, sélectionnez
Tout désélectionner en haut à droite de l’écran, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
6. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Sélec. dossier, en
haut de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. La
fenêtre contextuelle Sélectionner le dossier apparaît.
7. Dans la fenêtre contextuelle Sélectionner le dossier,
utilisez les boutons ▲▼ pour sélectionner le dossier
dans lequel vous souhaitez déplacer l’application
que vous avez sélectionnée, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
8. La fenêtre contextuelle Applications déplacées
apparaît. Appuyez sur le bouton E.
9. Pour ouvrir le dossier, utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄►
pour mettre le dossier en surbrillance, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
Renommer doss.
L’option Renommer le dossier vous permet de renommer
un dossier existant.
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Renommer doss., puis appuyez sur le
bouton E. L’écran Renommer le dossier apparaît
et un dossier est en surbrillance.
3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour mettre le dossier
de votre choix en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur
le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle Renommer
apparaît.
4. Appuyez sur le bouton E. Le clavier apparaît.
5. Entrez le nouveau nom pour le dossier. Une fois
terminé, sélectionnez Terminé sur le côté droit, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle
Renommer réapparaît en affichant le nouveau nom.
6. Sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E. Le
dossier est renommé.
7. Sélectionnez Fermer sur le côté droit de l’écran,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Supprimer
L’option Supprimer vous permet de supprimer des
applications et des dossiers à partir de l’écran Mes
applis. Si un dossier contient des applications, le dossier
et les applications sont supprimés ensemble. L’option
Supprimer retire les applications de manière permanente.
Si vous décidez d’utiliser une application que vous avez
supprimée, vous devez la télécharger à nouveau.
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez
les boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
2. Sélectionnez Supprimer et appuyez sur le bouton
E. L’écran Supprimer apparaît.
3. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► pour vous déplacer
vers une application ou un dossier, puis appuyez sur
le bouton E pour la(le) sélectionner. Une coche
s’affiche dans le coin supérieur gauche de l’application
ou du dossier que vous avez sélectionné(e).
4. Pour désélectionner une application, appuyez sur le
bouton E. La coche disparaît.
5. Répétez l’étape 3 pour sélectionner des applications
ou des dossiers supplémentaires.
| REMARQUE |
Pour sélectionner toutes les applications téléchargées,
sélectionnez Sélectionner tout en haut à droite
de l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour
désélectionner toutes les applications, sélectionnez
Tout désélectionner en haut à droite de l’écran, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
6. Lorsque vous avez réalisé toutes vos sélections,
sélectionnez Supprimer en haut de l’écran, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E. La fenêtre contextuelle
de suppression s'affiche.
7. Sélectionnez Oui et appuyez sur le bouton E.
Toutes les applications que vous avez sélectionnées
sont supprimées.
| REMARQUE |
Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer immédiatement
une application ou un dossier verrouillé(e). Si vous
sélectionnez une application ou un dossier verrouillé(e)
pour la(le) supprimer, lorsque vous effectuez l’étape 7,
la fenêtre contextuelle Service verrouillé apparaît. Entrez
le code PIN de sécurité dans la fenêtre contextuelle,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Le verrou sera libéré
et l’application ou le dossier sera supprimé(e).
MàJ applis
L’option Mettre à jour les applications permet de rechercher
automatiquement sur Internet les versions mises à jour des
applications que vous avez téléchargées et de les mettre à
jour lorsque de nouvelles versions sont disponibles.
1. Sur l’écran Toutes les applis téléchargées, utilisez les
boutons ▲► pour accéder à Options en haut de
l’écran, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 47 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 47 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:17 013-06-04 오전 10:07:17| 48 Français
Services Réseau
2. Sélectionnez MàJ applis, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
3. L’appareil recherche sur Internet les nouvelles
versions de vos applications. Si de nouvelles
applications sont disponibles, la fenêtre contextuelle
Mettre à jour les applications apparaît.
4. Pour télécharger la mise à jour d’une application
particulière, mettez l’application en surbrillance et
appuyez sur le bouton E. Une coche s’affiche à la
gauche de l’application.
5. Pour désélectionner l’application, mettez-la en
surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Pour sélectionner toutes les mises à jour, sélectionnez
Sélectionner tout à droite de la fenêtre contextuelle,
puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour désélectionner
toutes les mises à jour, sélectionnez Tout
désélectionner, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
6. Lorsque vous avez sélectionné les mises à jours que
vous souhaitez télécharger, sélectionnez MAJ sur le
côté droit de la fenêtre contextuelle, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
7. L’appareil télécharge les mises à jour que vous
avez choisies. Une barre de téléchargement
s’affiche dans chaque icône d’application pour
indiquer qu’une mise à jour de cette application est
téléchargée. Le téléchargement est terminé lorsque
les barres de téléchargement disparaissent.
Screen Mirroring
La fonction de mise en miroir vous permet de voir l’écran
de votre smartphone ou de votre périphérique intelligent
sur le téléviseur que vous avez connecté au Home cinéma.
1. Avec l’écran d’accueil du Blu-ray affiché, appuyez
sur le bouton BLEU (D) de la télécommande.
L'écran Screen Mirroring apparaît.
2. Lancez AllShare Cast sur votre périphérique.
3. Sur votre périphérique, localisez le nom du Home
cinéma dans la liste des périphériques disponibles
et sélectionnez-le.
4. Le téléviseur affiche un message de connexion en
cours (par exemple, Connexion à Android_92gb…)
puis il affiche le message Connecté.
5. Après quelques instants, l’écran de votre
périphérique s’affiche sur l’écran du téléviseur.
| REMARQUE |
Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Projection de l'écran,
une lecture vidéo saccadée ou des interruptions
audio peuvent se produire, en fonction de votre
environnement.
Vous pouvez connecter à un périphérique prenant
en charge la fonction AllShare Cast. Notez que la
connexion à un tel périphérique peut ne pas être prise
en charge selon le fabricant. Pour en savoir plus sur la
prise en charge de la connexion mobile, reportez-vous
au site Web du fabricant.
Les transmissions par Bluetooth peuvent créer des
interférences avec le signal Projection de l'écran.
Avant d'utiliser la fonction de mise en miroir, nous
vous recommandons fortement d'éteindre la fonction
Bluetooth sur votre smartphone ou votre périphérique
intelligent.
Utilisation de Navigateur Web
Vous pouvez accéder à Internet à l'aide de l'application
Web Browser.
Sélectionnez Navigateur Web sur l'écran d'accueil, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Lorsque vous lancez Navigateur Web avec l'appareil
connecté par HDMI à un téléviseur compatible BD
Wise - et que BD Wise est activé - le navigateur est
maximisé pour remplir l’écran et la résolution du
téléviseur est automatiquement optimisée.
L'application Web Browser est incompatible avec les
applications Java.
Si vous essayez de télécharger un fichier qui ne peut
être enregistré, un message d'erreur s'affichera.
Le E-commerce, (pour l’achat d’appareils en ligne),
n’est pas pris en charge.
ActiveX n’est pas pris en charge.
L'accès à certains sites Web ou à des navigateurs
Web activés par certaines activités peut être bloqué.
Navigation par lien et Navigation par
pointeur
Le Navigateur Web propose deux types de navigation,
la navigation par pointeur et la navigation par lien.
Lorsque vous lancez le navigateur pour la première fois,
la navigation par pointeur est activée. Si vous naviguez
dans le Navigateur Web en utilisant une souris, nous vous
recommandons de maintenir la navigation par pointeur
activée. Si vous naviguez dans le Navigateur Web en
utilisant la télécommande, nous vous recommandons
d’employer la navigation par lien au lieu de la navigation
par pointeur. La navigation par lien déplace la surbrillance
d’un lien au suivant dans le Navigateur Web et elle est
beaucoup plus rapide que la navigation par pointeur si
vous utilisez la télécommande.
Pour activer la navigation par lien, suivez ces étapes :
1. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► de la télécommande
pour déplacer le pointeur sur l’icône Navigateur par
lien du navigateur par lien en haut à droite de l’écran.
L’icône Navigateur par lien du navigateur par lien est
la troisième en partant de la droite. Le pointeur sera
dans la position correcte si l’icône vire au bleu et si
les mots « Navig. ac lien » apparaissent sur l’écran.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton E. La navigation par
lien est activée et le restera chaque fois que vous
accéderez au Web Browser.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 48 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 48 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:18 013-06-04 오전 10:07:18Français 49|
06
Services Réseau
Le panneau de commande en un coup d’œil
Le panneau de commande, qui occupe la largeur en haut de
l’écran, contient une série d’icônes qui permettent de gérer
plusieurs fonctions utiles. Ces icônes sont décrites ci-dessous,
en commençant par celle la plus à gauche sur l’écran.
1
http://www.samsung.com 100%
1
• : permet de passer à la page précédente.
• : permet de passer à la page Web suivante.
• : permet d’afficher l’écran des signets
et de l’historique. Vous pouvez attribuer un
signet à la page actuelle, sélectionner un
signet existant et modifier ou supprimer des
signets. Vous pouvez également consulter
l’historique de votre navigation et sélectionner
une page dans le but de la revisiter.
• : permet d'accéder à l’écran d’accueil de
Navigateur Web.
• http://www.samsung.com : vous permet
d’entrer manuellement l’adresse d’une page
en utilisant la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier.
• : actualise la page actuelle pour la
rafraîchir à l’écran.
• : permet d'ajouter la page actuellement
sélectionnée à vos signets.
• : vous permet de rechercher
des informations en entrant des mots ou des
caractères en utilisant la fenêtre contextuelle
du clavier. Reportez-vous à Utilisation de la
fenêtre contextuelle du clavier sur cette page.
• 100% : vous permet d’agrandir ou de
rétrécir l’écran de divers pourcentages.
• : permet d’activer la fonction PIP.
• : vous permet de commuter entre la
navigation par pointeur et la navigation par lien.
• : vous permet de configurer les réglages
du navigateur. Reportez-vous à Utilisation du
menu Réglage en page 50.
• : permet de fermer le Navigateur Web.
Utilisation de la fenêtre contextuelle du
clavier
Lorsque vous cliquez sur l’adresse http://www.samsung.com
, le champ ou l’accès à un champ d’entrée
de données ou de texte et que vous appuyez sur le bouton
E, la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier apparaît.
http://www.samsung.com
Caps 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Effacer
q w e r t y u i o p ^ *
123#& a s d f g h j k l ~ @ ! Terminé
z x c v b n m , . ? -
Annuler
ENG www. .com / 4
Au fur et à mesure de la saisie, le texte suggéré s’affiche.
100%
Pour utiliser la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier sur votre
télécommande, suivez ces étapes :
1. Utilisez les boutons ▲▼◄► de la télécommande
pour déplacer la surbrillance sur la lettre ou le chiffre
de votre choix.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton E pour entrer la lettre ou le
chiffre dans le champ d’entrée.
3. Pour accéder aux majuscules, déplacez la surbrillance
sur la touche Caps en haut à gauche, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E. Appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton
E avec la touche Caps en surbrillance pour accéder
à nouveau aux lettres minuscules.
4. Pour accéder aux symboles et aux signes de
ponctuation supplémentaires, mettez en surbrillance
le bouton 123#& sur la gauche, puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
5. Pour supprimer un caractère saisi, déplacez la
surbrillance sur le bouton , puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
6. Pour supprimer tous les caractères saisis, déplacez
la surbrillance sur le bouton Effacer, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
7. Une fois la saisie terminée, déplacez la surbrillance sur
le bouton Terminé, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
| REMARQUE |
Si vous disposez d’un clavier sans fil connecté à
votre appareil, vous pouvez utiliser ce clavier sans fil
pour saisir les lettres, les chiffres, les symboles et la
ponctuation. Notez que le clavier sans fil fonctionnera
uniquement lorsque la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier
apparaît et qu’il peut uniquement être utilisé pour saisir
les lettres, les chiffres, les symboles et la ponctuation.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 49 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 49 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:19 013-06-04 오전 10:07:19| 50 Français
Services Réseau
Options de la fenêtre contextuelle du clavier
Pour accéder aux options de la fenêtre contextuelle du
clavier, mettez en surbrillance le bouton situé en bas
à gauche du clavier, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
Langue
Permet de sélectionner la langue pour le
clavier. Vous pouvez sélectionner Anglais,
Français, Russe, etc.
Texte
recommandé
Le clavier suggère les mots
recommandés lorsque vous entrez du
texte. Vous pouvez Activé ou Arrêt
cette fonction.
Prédiction
de la lettre
suivante
Le clavier prédit la lettre suivante lorsque
vous tapez des lettres. Les prédictions
apparaissent dans un cercle entourant
la lettre que vous venez d’entrer. Vous
pouvez sélectionner la lettre prédite ou
passer à une autre lettre. Vous pouvez
Activé ou Arrêt cette fonction.
Utilisation du menu Réglage
Le menu Réglage contient des fonctions qui gèrent le
fonctionnement du navigateur ainsi que des fonctions de
sécurité pour ce dernier. Pour ouvrir le menu Réglage,
mettez en surbrillance l’icône sur le panneau de
commande, puis appuyez sur le bouton E. Pour
sélectionner une option dans le menu de réglage, mettez
cette option en surbrillance, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
http://www.samsung.com
Activer la saisie
Sites approuvés
Navigation privée activée
Param. navigateur Web
Aide
Fermer
100%
Activer
la saisie/
Désactiver
la saisie
Permet d'activer (Activé) et de
désactiver (Arrêt) la fonction de capture.
Lorsque la fonction de capture est
activée, vous pouvez déplacer une
page Web vers le haut et vers le bas
sans faire glisser la barre de défilement.
La fonction de capture est disponible
uniquement en navigation par pointeur.
Sites
approuvés
Cette option vous permet de
restreindre l’accès des enfants aux
pages Web inappropriées en autorisant
uniquement l’accès aux sites Web que
vous avez enregistrés.
L’écran demandant le code PIN
apparaît lors de chaque accès à
l’option Sites approuvés. Lorsque
vous accédez à Sites approuvés pour
la première fois, entrez le code PIN
par défaut, 0000 à l’aide des touches
numériques de la télécommande.
Vous pouvez changer le code PIN en
utilisant la fonction Réinitialiser le mot
de passe pour les sites approuvés.
Voir ci-dessous.
Fonction Sites approuvés: permet
d’activer ou de désactiver la fonction
Sites approuvés.
Réinit mot de passe pr sites
approuvés: permet de modifier
le mot de passe pour les sites
approuvés.
Aj. site actuel: vous permet
d’ajouter le site Web actuellement
affiché à la liste des sites approuvés.
Gérer les sites approuvés: vous
permet de saisir les adresses
URL à ajouter à la Liste des sites
approuvés et de supprimer des
sites de cette liste. Si vous activez la
fonction Sites approuvés en ayant
ajouté aucun site à la liste des sites
approuvés, vous ne pourrez pas
accéder à aucun sites Internet.
Navigation
privée
activée/
désact.
Permet d’activer ou de désactiver
le mode Confidentialité. Lorsque ce
mode est activé, le navigateur ne
retient pas les URL des sites que vous
visitez. Si vous souhaitez activer le
mode Confidentialité, sélectionnez
OK. Si le mode Confidentialité est
actif, l’icône « Arrêt » apparaît en face
de l’URL en haut de l’écran. Pour
désactiver le mode Confidentialité,
sélectionnez-le à nouveau lorsqu’il est
activé.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 50 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 50 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:22 013-06-04 오전 10:07:22Français 51|
06
Services Réseau
Param.
navigateur
Web
Déf. comme page acc. : vous
pouvez régler la page d’accueil du
navigateur.
Bloquer pop-up : permet d'activer
ou de désactiver le blocage de
fenêtre contextuelle.
Blocage de page : Vous pouvez
définir si les annonces publicitaires
sont bloquées et sélectionner les
URL pour lesquelles ces annonces
publicitaires sont bloquées.
Général : Vous pouvez supprimer
les données personnelles des
informations telles que l’historique
des sites Web et les données de
navigation (cookies, etc.), et réinitialiser
tous les réglages du navigateur Web
sur leurs valeurs par défaut d’usine.
Encodage : vous pouvez définir
l’encodage pour les pages Web
comme étant Automatique ou
sélectionner manuellement le format
d’encodage parmi une liste.
Curseur : vous pouvez régler la vitesse
du curseur lorsque celui-ci est défini
comme Pointeur et Activé et Arrêt le
Curseur intelligent.
Infos navigateur : permet d’afficher le
numéro de version et les informations
relatives aux droits d’auteur associés
au Navigateur Web.
Aide Elle présente les informations de base
concernant l’utilisation du Navigateur Web.
| REMARQUE |
En fonction du site Web, certaines fonctions de Réglage du
navigateur Web peuvent ne pas être activées. Les fonctions
qui ne sont pas activées sont grisées et sont inopérantes.
Lier vos comptes de service
Internet à l’appareil
La fonction Établir une liaison avec les comptes de
service vous permet de lier votre appareil et vos comptes
de service Internet afin que l’appareil vous connecte
automatiquement à un service lorsque vous lancez une
application qui est liée à ce service.
Pour créer une liaison à un compte de service, respectez
les étapes suivantes :
1. Sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur le bouton
ROUGE (A) de votre télécommande pour vous
connecter à votre Compte Samsung.
2. Une fois connecté, appuyez à nouveau sur le
bouton ROUGE (A) de votre télécommande.
3. Sélectionnez Associer comptes du service dans
la fenêtre contextuelle Mon compte, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
4. Sur l’écran Établir une liaison avec les comptes de
service, sélectionnez le service que vous souhaitez
lier à l’appareil, puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
5. Sélectionnez Enregistrer et appuyez sur le bouton
E.
6. Sur l’écran Identifiant et mot de passe, entrez
l’identifiant que vous utilisez pour vous connecter au
service sélectionné à l’aide du clavier de la fenêtre
contextuelle. Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé
puis appuyez sur le bouton E.
7. Répétez la même procédure pour le mot de passe.
Une fois terminé, sélectionnez Terminé puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
8. Sélectionnez OK et appuyez sur le bouton E.
BD-LIVE™
Une fois que l'appareil est connecté au réseau, vous
pouvez profiter de différents contenus de services liés aux
films en utilisant des disques compatibles BD-LIVE.
1. Insérez une clé USB à mémoire flash dans la prise
USB située à l’avant de l'appareil, puis contrôlez sa
mémoire restante. Le périphérique de mémoire doit
avoir au moins 1 Go d'espace libre pour satisfaire
aux exigences des services BD-LIVE.
2. Sélectionnez Paramètres sur l'écran Accueil, puis
appuyez sur le bouton E.
3. Sélectionnez Réseau et appuyez sur le bouton E.
4. Sélectionnez Paramètres BD-Live, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
5. Sélectionnez Gestion données BD, puis appuyez
sur le bouton E.
6. Sélectionnez Sélection périph., puis appuyez sur le
bouton E.
7. Sélectionnez le périphérique USB, puis appuyez sur
le bouton E.
8. Insérez un disque Blu-ray prenant en charge la
technologie BD-LIVE.
9. Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste des contenus
de service BD-LIVE fournis par le fabricant de
disque.
| REMARQUE |
L’utilisation du service BD-LIVE ainsi que des contenus
fournis peuvent varier selon le fabricant du disque.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 51 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 51 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:23 013-06-04 오전 10:07:23| 52 Français
Annexes
Informations complémentaires
Remarque
Branchements
SORTIE HDMI
• Selon votre téléviseur, il est possible que certaines
résolutions de sortie HDMI ne fonctionnent pas.
• Vous devez disposer d'une connexion HDMI pour
visionner les vidéos en 3D.
• Un câble HDMI trop long peut provoquer du bruit
à l'écran. Si tel est le cas, réglez Couleur intense
HDMI sur Arrêt dans le menu.
Paramètres
Paramètres 3D
• Sur certains disques 3D, pour arrêter un film en cours
de lecture 3D, appuyez une seule fois sur le bouton
5 Le film s’arrête et l’option 3D est désactivée.
Pour changer la sélection de l’option 3D lorsque vous
regardez un film 3D, appuyez une fois sur le bouton
5. Le menu Blu-ray apparaît. Appuyez à nouveau
sur le bouton 5, puis sélectionnez Paramètres 3D
dans le menu Blu-ray.
• Selon le contenu et le positionnement de l'image sur
l'écran de votre téléviseur, vous pouvez visualiser
apparaître des barres verticales noires à droite ou à
gauche de l'écran ou sur les deux côtés à la fois.
Format TV
• Selon le type de disque utilisé, certains formats
d'image peuvent être indisponibles.
• Si vous sélectionnez un format d’image différent de
celui de votre téléviseur, il est possible que l’image
affichée soit déformée.
• Si vous sélectionnez l'option 16:9 Original,
le téléviseur pourra afficher l'image dans un
encadrement horizontal au format 4:3 Pillarbox
(bandes noires sur les côtés de l’image).
BD Wise (produits Samsung uniquement)
• Lorsque la fonction BD Wise est activée, le paramètre
Résolution est automatiquement spécifié sur BD
Wise et BD Wise apparaît dans le menu Résolution.
• Si l'appareil est connecté à un appareil ne prenant
pas en charge BD Wise, vous ne pourrez pas utiliser
la fonction BD Wise.
• Pour garantir le bon fonctionnement de BD Wise,
réglez l’option BD Wise de l'appareil et du téléviseur
sur Activé.
Sortie numérique
• Assurez-vous de sélectionner la sortie numérique
appropriée, sinon vous n'entendrez aucun son ou un
son très fort.
• Si le périphérique HDMI (récepteur AV, téléviseur)
n'est pas compatible avec les formats compressés
(Dolby digital, DTS), le signal audio sera émis en
sortie au format PCM.
• Les DVD n’ont pas habituellement de fonctionnalité
audio BONUSVIEW ni d’effet sonore de navigation.
• Certains disques Blu-ray ne sont pas dotés de
fonctionnalité audio BONUSVIEW ni d’effet sonore de
navigation.
• La configuration de la sortie numérique n’affecte pas
la sortie audio analogique (G/D) ou HDMI de votre
téléviseur. Elle affecte les sorties audio optique et
HDMI lorsque l'appareil est connecté à un récepteur
AV.
• Si vous lisez des pistes de son audio MPEG, le
signal audio sera émis en sortie au format PCM
indépendamment de vos sélections de sortie
numérique (PCM ou Bitstream).
• La sortie numérique peut être activée lorsque Sélect.
haut-parleur est réglé sur Haut-parleur TV.
Connexion internet BD-Live
• Il est possible que la connexion Internet soit limitée
lorsque vous utilisez des contenus BD-LIVE.
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
• Selon votre téléviseur, il est possible que certaines
résolutions de sortie HDMI ne fonctionnent pas.
Veuillez vous reporter au manuel d'utilisation de votre
téléviseur.
• Cette fonction sera indisponible si le câble HDMI ne
prend pas en charge le format CEC.
• Si votre téléviseur Samsung dispose d'un logo
Anynet+, cela signifie qu'il est compatible Anynet+.
Gestion données BD
• En mode mémoire externe, la lecture du disque
pourra s’arrêter si vous déconnectez le périphérique
USB en cours d'exécution.
• Seuls les périphériques USB formatés selon le
système de fichiers FAT (label de volume DOS 8.3)
sont pris en charge. Nous vous recommandons
d'utiliser des périphériques USB prenant en charge
le protocole USB 2.0 avec une vitesse de lecture/
d'écriture supérieure ou égale à 4 Mo/s.
• La fonction Resume Play (Reprise de la lecture) peut
être inopérante après le formatage du périphérique
de stockage.
• La capacité totale de mémoire disponible pour
l'option Gestion données Blu-ray peut varier selon les
conditions.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 52 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 52 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:24 013-06-04 오전 10:07:24Français 53|
07
Annexes
DivX® Vidéo à la demande
• Pour plus d'informations concernant DivX(R) à la
demande(VOD), veuillez visiter le site « http://vod.
divx.com ».
Affichage du lecteur
• Vous ne pouvez pas changer la luminosité de la
touche ni de la touche VOL +, -.
Paramètre haut-parleur
• Lorsque Sélect. haut-parleur est réglé sur Hautparleur TV, le son est émis depuis les enceintes du
téléviseur.
• L’exécution de la fonction Auto Sound Calibration
(Calibrage automatique du son) prend environ 3
minutes.
• Assurez-vous qu’il n’y a aucun disque dans l’appareil
lorsque vous exécutez la fonction Auto Sound
Calibration (Calibrage automatique du son).
• Si le microphone ASC est débranché pendant la
configuration du calibrage automatique du son, la
configuration sera annulée.
• Lorsque la fonction Auto Sound Calibration
(Calibrage automatique du son) est activée,
les modes DSP, Dolby Pro Logic ll et SFE ne
fonctionnent pas.
• Si l’appareil est connecté à des périphériques
externes ou à d’autres composants (comme p.
ex. AUX, D. IN), la configuration du calibrage
automatique du son peut ne pas être effectuée
correctement.
Son HDMI
• Lorsque le son HDMI sort vers les haut-parleurs du
téléviseur, il subit automatiquement un mixage final
en deux canaux.
Fonct. Retour Audio
• Lorsque la fonction Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) est
désactivée, la fonction Audio Return Channel (Fonct.
Retour Audio) est indisponible.
• L’utilisation d’un câble HDMI non certifié pour ARC
(Audio Return Channel (Fonct. Retour Audio)) peut
provoquer un problème de compatibilité.
• La fonction ARC est uniquement disponible si un
téléviseur compatible ARC est connecté.
Lecture
Lecture des fichiers vidéo
• La lecture des fichiers vidéo au débit binaire élevé,
égal ou supérieur à 20 Mbps, exerce une forte
charge sur les capacités du lecteur et risque, de ce
fait, de s’interrompre en cours d’exécution.
Sélection de la langue de la bande son
• L’indicateur ◄► ne s’affichera pas à l’écran si la
section BONUSVIEW ne contient pas de réglages
BONUSVIEW audio.
• La disponibilité des langues proposées via la
fonction de la langue de la bande son dépend des
langues encodées sur le disque. Par conséquent,
cette fonction ou certaines langues peuvent être
indisponibles.
• Certains disques Blu-ray vous autorisent à
sélectionner la bande son anglaise PCM ou Dolby
Digital.
Sélection de la langue des sous-titres
• En fonction du disque Blu-ray/DVD, vous pouvez
changer la langue des sous-titres dans le Menu du
disque. Appuyez sur la touche DISC MENU.
• Cette fonction dépend de la sélection des soustitres encodés sur le disque et peut ne pas être
disponible sur tous les disques Blu-ray/DVD.
• Les informations concernant la fonction principale
ou le mode BONUSVIEW s’afficheront également
si le disque Blu-ray dispose d'une section
BONUSVIEW.
• Cette fonction modifie à la fois les sous-titres
principaux et secondaires au même moment.
• Le nombre total de sous-titres principaux et
secondaires s’affiche.
Lecture de fichiers JPEG
• Vous ne pouvez pas agrandir les sous-titres ou les
graphiques PG (Accord parental) pour les afficher en
mode plein écran.
Media Play
Mode Dolby Pro Logic II
• Avant de sélectionner le mode Dolby Pro Logic II,
connectez votre périphérique externe aux prises
AUDIO INPUT (ENTRÉE AUDIO) (L et R) de l’appareil.
Si vous ne le connectez pas aux deux prises (L et R),
vous ne profiterez pas du son ambiophonique.
Utilisation de la touche TOOLS (OUTILS) lors du
visionnage d’images.
• Si le système est connecté à un téléviseur
compatible BD Wise dont la fonction BD Wise est
activée, le menu Picture Settings (Paramètres des
images) ne s'affiche pas.
• La fonction Background Music (Musique de fond)
ne fonctionne que si le fichier musical et le fichier
photo sont situés sur le même support de stockage.
Cependant, la qualité sonore peut être affectée par
le débit binaire du fichier musical MP3, la taille des
photos et la méthode d'encodage utilisée.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 53 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 53 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:25 013-06-04 오전 10:07:25| 54 Français
Annexes
Sélections des sorties numériques
Configuration PCM Train de bits
(non traités)
Train de bits
(DTS Réencodé)
Train de bits
(Dolby D. Réencodé)
Connexion Récepteur AV prenant en charge l'interface HDMI
Flux de
données
audio sur
disque
Blu-ray
PCM Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca PCM DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé *
Dolby
Digital Jusqu'à PCM 5,1 ca Dolby Digital DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé *
Dolby
Digital
Plus
Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca Dolby Digital Plus DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé *
Dolby
TrueHD Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca Dolby TrueHD DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé *
DTS Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé *
DTSHD High
Resolution
Audio
Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé *
DTS-HD
Master
Audio
Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS-HD Master Audio DTS réencodé Dolby D. Réencodé *
Flux de
données
audio sur
DVD
PCM PCM 2 ca PCM 2 ca PCM 2 ca PCM 2 ca
Dolby
Digital Jusqu'à PCM 5,1 ca Dolby Digital Dolby Digital Dolby Digital
DTS Jusqu'à PCM 7,1 ca DTS DTS DTS
Résolution
pour
disque
Blu-ray
Any
Décode la principale
fonction audio et
le flux de données
audio BONUSVIEW
en données PCM
et ajoute des effets
sonores de navigation.
Émet uniquement
le flux de données
audio de la fonction
principale, de sorte
que votre récepteur
AV puisse décoder les
trains de bits audio.
Vous n’entendrez
pas de données
audio BONUSVIEW
ni d'effets sonores de
navigation.
Décode la principale
fonction audio et
le flux de données
audio BONUSVIEW
en données PCM
et ajoute des effets
sonores de navigation,
puis réencode les
données audio PCM
en trains de bits DTS.
Décode la principale
fonction audio et
le flux de données
audio BONUSVIEW
en données PCM
et ajoute des effets
sonores de navigation,
puis réencode les
données audio PCM
en trains de bits Dolby
Digital ou PCM.
Si le flux de données source est 2 ca ou mono, le réglage « Re-encoded Dolby D » (Dolby D. réencodé) ne sera pas
appliqué. La sortie sera PCM 2 ca.
Les disques Blu-ray peuvent contenir trois types de flux de données audio :
- Principale fonction audio : Bande son de la fonction principale.
- Fonctionnalité audio BONUSVIEW : Bande son supplémentaire, comportant, par exemple, le commentaire du
réalisateur ou de l’acteur.
- Effets sonores de navigation : Lorsque vous choisissez une navigation via un quelconque menu, les effets sonores de
navigation peuvent retentir. Les effets sonores de navigation sont différents sur chaque disque Blu-ray.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 54 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 54 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:26 013-06-04 오전 10:07:26Français 55|
07
Annexes
Résolution selon le type de contenus
Type de contenu
Configuration Disque Blu-ray E-content/Contenus
numériques
BD Wise Résolution du disque Blu-ray 1080p@60F
Auto.
Trame vidéo : Auto.
Sortie UHD : Auto. 2160p@24F 2160p@24F
Sortie UHD : Arrêt 1080p@24F 1080p@24F
Trame vidéo : Arrêt Résolution optimale de
l'entrée du téléviseur
Résolution optimale de
l'entrée du téléviseur
Trame vidéo : Auto. (24 images/seconde)
1080p et 1080i uniquement 1080p@24F 1080p@24F
1080p 1080p@60F 1080p@60F
1080i 1080i 1080i
720p 720p 720p
576p/480p 576p/480p 576p/480p
Type de contenu
Configuration DVD
BD Wise 480i
Auto.
Trame vidéo : Auto.
Convers. 24 img/s DVD :
Auto.
Sortie UHD : Auto. 2160p@24F
Sortie UHD : Arrêt 1080p@24F
Convers. 24 img/s DVD : Arrêt Résolution optimale de
l'entrée du téléviseur
Trame vidéo : Arrêt Résolution optimale de
l'entrée du téléviseur
Trame vidéo : Auto. (Convers. 24 img/s DVD : Auto.)
1080p et 1080i uniquement 1080p@24F
1080p 1080p@60F
1080i 1080i
720p 720p
576p/480p 576p/480p
| REMARQUE |
Si le téléviseur connecté à l'appareil ne prend pas en charge la fonction Trame vidéo ou la résolution sélectionnée, le message
suivant apparaîtra : « Si, après avoir sélectionné "Oui", aucune image n'apparaît, patientez 15 secondes pour revenir à la résolution
précédente. Modifier la résolution? ». Si vous sélectionnez Oui, l'écran du téléviseur deviendra blanc pendant 15 secondes, puis la
résolution reviendra automatiquement à sa précédente valeur.
Si l'écran est toujours blanc après que vous ayez changé de résolution, éjectez le disque inséré, puis appuyez sur le bouton 5
situé sur le panneau supérieur de l'appareil et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant plus de 5 secondes. Tous les réglages d'usine seront
alors rétablis. Exécutez à nouveau la procédure des paramètres initiaux. Accédez ensuite aux options Paramètres > Affichage >
Résolution du menu, puis sélectionnez la résolution adaptée à votre téléviseur.
Lors de l'exécution de la procédure des paramètres initiaux, sélectionnez à nouveau la langue et le format de l'image (taille et
format d'écran) uniquement. La réinitialisation n'affecte pas vos paramètres réseaux, par conséquent, vous devriez pouvoir sauter
l'étape de la configuration réseau et celle de la mise à jour du logiciel.
Lorsque les réglages d'usine par défaut sont rétablis, toutes les données Blu-ray utilisateur stockées sur l’appareil seront effacées.
Pour que l'utilisateur puisse utiliser le mode Trame vidéo (24Fs), le disque Blu-ray doit être doté d'une fonction 24 images.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 55 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 55 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:27 013-06-04 오전 10:07:27| 56 Français
Annexes
Dépannage
Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous lorsque cet appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement. Si le problème que vous
rencontrez n’est pas répertorié ci-dessous ou si les consignes ne vous sont d’aucune aide, éteignez l’appareil, débranchez
le cordon d’alimentation et contactez le revendeur agréé le plus proche ou un centre de dépannage Samsung Electronics.
Problème Vérification/Solution
Le disque ne peut pas être
éjecté.
• Le cordon d’alimentation est-il branché correctement sur la prise secteur ?
• Coupez l’alimentation électrique, puis rallumez-la.
La lecture ne démarre pas. • Vérifiez le numéro de zone du disque Blu-ray/DVD.
Les disques Blu-ray/DVD achetés à l’étranger peuvent ne pas être compatibles.
• Les CD-ROM et DVD-ROM ne peuvent pas être lus sur ce lecteur.
• Vérifiez que le niveau de classification est approprié.
La lecture ne démarre pas
immédiatement lorsque le
bouton Lecture/Pause est
actionné.
• Le disque est-il déformé ou rayé ?
• Nettoyez le disque.
Aucun son n’est produit. • Le système home cinéma n’émet aucun son pendant la lecture rapide, au ralenti,
et en mode pas à pas.
• Les enceintes sont-elles correctement branchées ? La configuration des enceintes
est-elle réglée correctement ?
• Le disque est-il sale ou endommagé ?
Le son est émis par
certaines enceintes et
non par l’ensemble des 8
enceintes.
• Sur certains disques Blu-ray/DVD, le son est émis depuis les enceintes avant
uniquement.
• Vérifiez que les enceintes sont correctement raccordées.
• Réglez le volume.
• Lorsque vous écoutez un CD, la radio ou la télévision, le son est émis par les
enceintes avant uniquement.
Le son ambiophonique
Dolby Digital 7.1 CH n’est
pas produit.
• Le disque porte-t-il l’indication « Dolby Digital 7.1 CH » ? Le son ambiophonique
Dolby Digital 7.1 CH est produit uniquement si le disque est enregistré au format 7.1.
• La langue audio est-elle correctement réglée sur Dolby Digital 7.1-CH dans
l’affichage des informations ?
La télécommande ne
fonctionne pas.
• Faites-vous fonctionner la télécommande dans sa plage opérationnelle et dans
l’angle correct par rapport au capteur ?
• Les piles sont-elles déchargées ?
• Avez-vous sélectionné correctement les fonctions (TV/BD) de mode de la
télécommande (TV ou BD) ?
• Le disque tourne mais
aucune image ne
s’affiche.
• La qualité est mauvaise
et l’image tremble.
• Le téléviseur est-il sous tension ?
• Les câbles vidéo sont-ils correctement branchés ?
• Le disque est-il sale ou endommagé ?
• La lecture d’un disque de mauvaise fabrication peut s’avérer impossible.
La langue de la bandeson et les sous-titres ne
fonctionnent pas.
• La langue de la bande son et les sous-titres ne fonctionnent pas si le disque n’en
comporte pas.
L’écran de menu n’apparaît
pas même si la fonction de
menu est sélectionnée.
• Le disque que vous utilisez contient-il des menus ?
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 56 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 56 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:27 013-06-04 오전 10:07:27Français 57|
07
Annexes
Problème Vérification/Solution
Impossible de modifier le
format d'image.
• La lecture des disques Blu-ray/DVD 16:9 est possible en mode 16/9 Plein écran,
4/3 Boîte aux lettres ou 4/3 Panoramique – Balayage en revanche, les disques
Blu-ray/DVD 4:3 peuvent être lus au format 4:3 uniquement. Reportez-vous à la
pochette du disque Blu-ray et sélectionnez la fonction appropriée.
• L'appareil ne fonctionne
pas. (exemple : l’appareil
s’éteint ou émet un bruit
anormal).
• L'appareil ne fonctionne
pas normalement.
• Appuyez et maintenez la touche 5 de la télécommande pendant 5 secondes en
mode VEILLE.
- L’utilisation de la fonction RÉINITIALISATION efface tous les réglages
enregistrés. N’utilisez ce bouton que si cela est vraiment nécessaire.
Vous avez oublié le mot
de passe du niveau de
classification.
• Sans disque dans le lecteur, appuyez et maintenez la touche 5 de l'appareil
pendant plus de 5 secondes. Le message INIT s’affiche sur l’écran et les réglages
par défaut sont rétablis.
Puis, appuyez sur la touche MARCHE/ARRÊT.
- L’utilisation de la fonction RÉINITIALISATION efface tous les réglages
enregistrés. N’utilisez ce bouton que si cela est vraiment nécessaire.
Réception des émissions
de radio impossible.
• L’antenne est-elle correctement branchée ?
• Si le signal d’entrée de l’antenne est faible, installez une antenne FM extérieure
dans une zone bénéficiant d’une bonne réception.
Lors de l’écoute du son
du téléviseur via l'appareil,
aucun son n’est entendu.
• Si la touche OUVERTURE/FERMETURE ^ est appuyée lors de l’écoute du son du
téléviseur en utilisant le D. IN ou les fonctions AUX, les fonctions du disque Blu-ray/
DVD sont activées et le son du téléviseur est coupé.
« Indisponible » s’affiche à
l’écran.
• Les fonctions ou les commandes ne peuvent être exécutées pour le moment car :
1. Le logiciel du disque Blu-ray/DVD les limite.
2. Le logiciel du disque Blu-ray/DVD ne prend pas en charge la fonction en
question (par ex. : les angles).
3. La fonction n'est pas disponible pour le moment.
4. Vous avez demandé un titre, un numéro de chapitre ou un temps de recherche
hors de portée du disque.
Il est possible que l'écran
du téléviseur n'affiche
pas d'image lorsque la
résolution de la sortie
HDMI n'est pas prise en
charge par le téléviseur
(par exemple 1080p).
• Appuyez et maintenez la touche 5 du panneau avant pendant plus de 5
secondes en l'absence de disque inséré dans l'appareil. Tous les paramètres
seront réinitialisés sur leur valeur d'origine.
Aucune sortie HDMI. • Vérifiez la connexion entre le téléviseur et la prise HDMI de l'appareil.
• Vérifiez que votre téléviseur prend en charge les résolutions d'entrée HDMI
576p/480p/720p/1080i/1080p.
Écran de sortie HDMI
anormal.
• Si du bruit aléatoire apparaît à l'écran, cela signifie que le téléviseur ne prend pas
en charge la protection HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 57 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 57 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:28 013-06-04 오전 10:07:28| 58 Français
Annexes
Problème Vérification/Solution
Fonction AllShare
Je peux voir les dossiers
partagés via AllShare mais
pas les fichiers.
• AllShare affiche uniquement les fichiers vidéos, photos et musicaux. Les autres
types de fichiers ne sont pas affichés.
La vidéo est lue par
intermittence.
• Vérifiez si le réseau est stable.
• Vérifiez que le câble réseau est correctement branché et que le réseau n'est pas
surchargé.
• La connexion sans fil entre l’appareil compatible DLNA et l'appareil est instable.
Vérifiez la connexion.
La connexion AllShare
entre l'appareil et
l'ordinateur est instable.
• L’adresse IP sous le même sous-réseau doit être unique, dans le cas contraire
une collision IP peut résulter de ce phénomène.
• Vérifiez si vous avez un pare-feu activé.
Si tel est le cas, désactivez la fonction pare-feu.
BD-LIVE
Je n'arrive pas à me
connecter au serveur BDLIVE.
• Vérifiez si la connexion réseau est active ou non en utilisant la fonction État réseau.
• Vérifiez si le périphérique de mémoire USB est connecté à l'appareil.
• Le périphérique de mémoire doit avoir au moins 1 Go d'espace libre pour satisfaire
aux exigences du service BD-LIVE. Vous pouvez vérifier la taille disponible dans
Gestion données Blu-ray. (Voir page 52)
• Vérifiez si l’option Connexion Internet BD-Live est spécifiée sur Allow(All) (Permettre
tout).
• Si toutes les mesures préconisées ci-dessus échouent, contactez le fournisseur de
contenus ou mettez à jour l'appareil à l'aide de la dernière version de micrologiciel
disponible.
Une erreur s'est produite
en cours d'utilisation du
service BD-LIVE.
• Le périphérique de mémoire doit avoir au moins 1 Go d'espace libre pour satisfaire
aux exigences du service BD-LIVE. Vous pouvez vérifier la taille disponible dans
Gestion données Blu-ray. (Voir page 52)
| REMARQUE |
Lorsque les réglages d'usine par défaut sont rétablis, toutes les données Blu-ray utilisateur stockées sur le lecteur
seront effacées.
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 58 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 58 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:29 013-06-04 오전 10:07:29Français 59|
07
Annexes
Généralités
Poids 3.30 kg
Dimensions 430.00 (L) x 55.00 (H) x 314.50 (P) mm
Plage de températures de fonctionnement 5 à 35 °C
Plage de taux d'humidit 10 à 75 %
Tuner FM
Rapport signal/bruit 55 dB
Sensibilité utilisable 12 dB
Distorsion harmonique totale 0.5 %
HDMI
Vidéo 2D : 2160p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p
3D : 1080p, 720p
Audio Audio PCM multicanaux, audio Bitstream et audio PCM
Amplificateur
Sortie de l’enceinte avant 165 W x 2(3)
Sortie de l’enceinte supérieure avant 165 W x 2(3)
Sortie de l’enceinte centrale 170 W(3)
Sortie de l’enceinte ambiophonique 165 W x 2(3)
Sortie du caisson de basse 170 W(3)
Réponse en fréquence
Entrée analogique : 20 Hz~20 kHz (±3 dB)
Entrée numérique : 20 Hz~40 kHz (±4 dB)
Rapport signal/bruit 70 dB
Séparation des canaux 60 dB
Sensibilité d’entrée (AUX) 500 mV
Caractéristiques techniques
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 59 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 59 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:30 013-06-04 오전 10:07:30| 60 Français
Annexes
Enceinte (Système d’enceintes 7.1 canaux)
Enceintes Impédance Plage de
fréquences
Niveau de
pression
acoustique de
sortie
Entrée
nominale
Entrée
maximale
Dimensions
(L x H x P) (Unité : mm)
Poids
(Unité : kg)
Avant/
Supérieur
avant
3
140 Hz~ 20
kHz 87 dB/W/M
165 W 330 W
90.0 x 1302.0 x 70.0
(Socle: 250 x 250) 7.65
Ambiophonique 90.0 x 1252.0 x 70.0
(Socle: 250 x 250) 6.82
Centre
170 W 340 W
360.0 x 70.0 x 65.9 0.98
Caisson de
graves
40 Hz ~
160 Hz 88 dB/W/M 205.6 x 390.6 x 350.6 6.33
• Les vitesses de réseau égales ou inférieures à 10 Mbps ne sont pas prises en charge.
• Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd se réserve le droit de modifier les caractéristiques techniques sans avis préalable.
• Le poids et les dimensions sont approximatifs.
• La conception et les caractéristiques techniques sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis.
• Pour l’alimentation et la consommation d’énergie, reportez-vous à l'étiquette apposée sur l'appareil.
❑ SWA-6000
Poids 1.1 kg
Dimensions (L x H x P) 76.2 x 228.6 x 152.4 mm
Plage de températures de fonctionnement +5 à 35 °C
Plage de taux d'humidité de fonctionnement 10 à 75 %
Puissance 165 W x 2 CH
Plage de fréquences 20 Hz~20 KHz
Rapport signal/bruit 65 dB
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 60 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 60 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:31 013-06-04 오전 10:07:31AH68-02646M-02
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer
care centre.
Comment contacter Samsung dans le monde
Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung, veuillez contacter le Service
Consommateurs Samsung.
SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE ﺑـ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ
ﺇﺫﺍﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ، ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء SAMSUNG.
Area Contact Centre Web Site
` Asia Pacific
AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com
CHINA 400-810-5858 www.samsung.com
HONG KONG (852) 3698 4698
www.samsung.com/hk
(Chinese)
www.samsung.com/hk_en
(English)
INDIA 1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com/in
INDONESIA 0800-112-8888
021-5699-7777 www.samsung.com/id
JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com
MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com/my
PHILIPPINES
1-800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for
PLDT
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for
Digitel
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864) for
Globe
02-5805777
www.samsung.com/ph
SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com
THAILAND 1800-29-3232
02-689-3232 www.samsung.com/th
TAIWAN 0800-329-999
0266-026-066 www.samsung.com
VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com
` Middle East
U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com
OMAN 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/ae
(English)
www.samsung.com/ae_ar
(Arabic)
KUWAIT 183-2255 (183-CALL)
BAHRAIN 8000-4726
QATAR 800-2255 (800-CALL)
Area Contact Centre Web Site
EGYPT 08000-726786 www.samsung.com
JORDAN 800-22273
065777444
www.samsung.com/
Levant(English)
SYRIA 18252273 www.samsung.com/
Levant(English)
IRAN 021-8255 www.samsung.com
MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www.samsung.com
SAUDI ARABIA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com/sa
(Arabic)
TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com
` Africa
NIGERIA 0800-726-7864 www.samsung.com
GHANA 0800-10077
0302-200077 www.samsung.com
COTE D’ IVOIRE 8000 0077 www.samsung.com
SENEGAL 800-00-0077 www.samsung.com
CAMEROON 7095- 0077 www.samsung.com
KENYA 0800 545 545 www.samsung.com
UGANDA 0800 300 300 www.samsung.com
TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 www.samsung.com
SOUTH AFRICA 0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 ) www.samsung.com
BOTSWANA 0800-726-000 www.samsung.com
NAMIBIA 8197267864 www.samsung.com
ANGOLA 91-726-7864 www.samsung.com
ZAMBIA 211350370 www.samsung.com
HHT-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 61 T-F9750W-ZN_FRA_0604.indd 61 22013-06-04 오전 10:07:31 013-06-04 오전 10:07:31
I9100
Mode d’emploiUtilisation de ce mode d’emploi
2
Utilisation de ce mode
d’emploi
Nous vous remercions de la confiance que vous nous accordez
en achetant cet appareil mobile Samsung. Cet appareil vous
permettra de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de
haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de
Samsung.
Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre
de découvrir les fonctions et caractéristiques de votre téléphone.
À lire avant toute utilisation
● Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi et toutes les
précautions qui y sont indiquées avant d’utiliser votre téléphone,
afin de l’utiliser en toute sécurité.
● Les instructions et descriptions mentionnées dans ce mode
d’emploi sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre
téléphone.
● Les illustrations utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi peuvent différer
par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit.
● Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer en fonction du
produit et de votre version logicielle et peut faire l’objet de
modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente
de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur www.samsung.com.
● Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires
peuvent varier en fonction du téléphone ou de votre version
logicielle.
● La mise en forme et la distribution de ce mode d’emploi sont
basées sur le système d’exploitation Google Android et peuvent
varier en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’utilisateur.
● Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de
votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel.
Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance
relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi
3
● Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de
performance ou de compatibilité causés par la modification des
paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur.
● Vous pouvez améliorer la version logicielle de votre appareil
mobile en vous connectant sur le site www.samsung.com.
● Les sons, les fonds d’écran et les images fourni(e)s avec ce
téléphone sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est
restreint à une utilisation entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires
respectifs. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ce matériel à des fins
commerciales ou autres constitue une infraction au regard des
lois sur les droits d’auteur. Samsung n’est pas responsable des
infractions sur les droits d’auteur commises par l’utilisateur.
● Veuillez conserver ce mode d’emploi afin de pouvoir le consulter
ultérieurement.
Icônes
Avant de démarrer, familiarisez-vous avec les icônes utilisées dans
ce mode d’emploi :
Avertissement—situations susceptibles de vous blesser
ou de blesser d’autres personnes
Attention—situations susceptibles d’endommager votre
appareil ou d’autres appareils
Remarque—remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou
informations complémentaires
► Référence: pages contenant plus d’informations.
Exemple : ► p. 12 (signifie « voir page12»)
→ Suivi de: séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner
pour effectuer une étape. Exemple: depuis l’écran
d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur
Paramètres→A propos du téléphone (signifie que
vous devez d’abord appuyer sur Paramètres, puis sur A
propos du téléphone)
[ ] Crochets : touches de l’appareil, par exemple: [ ]
(symbolise la touche Menu)Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi
4
Droits d’auteur
Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics
Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales relatives
aux droits d’auteur.
Ce mode d’emploi ne peut être reproduit, même en partie, ni
distribué, traduit ou diffusé sous quelque forme ou par quelque
moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, y compris par
le biais de photocopies, d’enregistrements, ou stocké dans
un système de stockage ou de recherche documentaire, sans
l’autorisation préalable écrite de Samsung Electronics.
Marques déposées
● SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de
Samsung Electronics.
● Les logos Android, Google
™, Google Maps
™, Google Mail
™,
YouTube
™, Google Play
™, et Google Talk
™ sont des marques
déposées de Google Inc.
● Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
●
Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ou de
ses filiales. Les autres marques sont déposées et demeurent la
propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs.
●
Windows Media Player
® est une marque déposée de Microsoft
Corporation.
●
Wi-Fi
®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™, Wi-Fi Direct
™, Wi-Fi
CERTIFIED™, et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques commerciales
déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi
5
●
DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos
associés sont des marques de Rovi
Corporation ou de ses filiales, et sont
utilisées sous licence.
● Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur appartiennent à
leurs propriétaires respectifs.
À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX
DivX® est un format vidéo numérique créé par DivX, LLC, filiale
de Rovi Corporation. Cet appareil est un appareil DivX Certified®
officiel qui lit les vidéos DivX. Rendez-vous sur le site
www.divx.com pour plus d’informations et pour obtenir des outils
logiciels capables de convertir vos fichiers en vidéos DivX.
Cet appareil DivX Certified® peut lire des vidéos DivX® d'une
résolution allant jusqu’à 720p HD, ainsi que du contenu Premium.
Peut lire des vidéos DivX® jusqu’à 1080p HD
À PROPOS DE DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND (Vidéo à la
demande)
Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré pour pouvoir lire
des films DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD ou vidéo à la demande).
Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, repérez la section DivX
VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Rendezvous ensuite sur vod.divx.com pour plus d’informations sur les
modalités d’enregistrement.Table des matières
6
Table des matières
Assemblage ................................................................... 10
Contenu du coffret ........................................................................ 10
Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie ............................ 11
Mettre la batterie en charge ....................................................... 12
Insérer une carte mémoire ......................................................... 15
Fixer une dragonne ...................................................................... 17
Démarrage ..................................................................... 18
Allumer/éteindre l’appareil ........................................................ 18
Présentation de l’appareil ........................................................... 19
Utiliser l’écran tactile .................................................................... 23
Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les
touches ............................................................................................ 24
Présentation de l’écran d’accueil ............................................... 24
Accéder aux applications ............................................................ 27
Personnaliser le téléphone ......................................................... 29
Saisir du texte ................................................................................ 34
Télécharger des applications à partir de Play Store ............. 38
Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web ........................................... 39
Synchroniser des données .......................................................... 40
Communication ............................................................ 42
Appels .............................................................................................. 42
Messagerie ...................................................................................... 48
Google Mail .................................................................................... 50
E-mail ............................................................................................... 52
Talk ................................................................................................... 54
Chat + ............................................................................................... 55
Google+ ........................................................................................... 55
Social Hub ....................................................................................... 56
MI ...................................................................................................... 56Table des matières
7
Divertissements ............................................................ 57
Appareil photo .............................................................................. 57
Vidéos .............................................................................................. 67
Galerie .............................................................................................. 68
Editeur de photos ......................................................................... 70
Créateur de vidéo ......................................................................... 71
Lecteur MP3 ................................................................................... 73
Radio FM ......................................................................................... 76
Informations personnelles .......................................... 79
Contacts .......................................................................................... 79
Calendrier ....................................................................................... 83
Tâche ................................................................................................ 84
Mémo ............................................................................................... 85
Mémo vocal .................................................................................... 86
Web ................................................................................. 87
Internet ............................................................................................ 87
Maps ................................................................................................. 90
Latitude ........................................................................................... 92
Adresses .......................................................................................... 92
Navigation ...................................................................................... 93
Recherche ....................................................................................... 93
YouTube ........................................................................................... 94
Play Store ........................................................................................ 95
Actualités et météo ...................................................................... 95
App Shop ........................................................................................ 96
Sauvegarde .................................................................................... 96
Jeux .................................................................................................. 97
Maps ................................................................................................. 97
Cinéday ............................................................................................ 97
Sonneries ........................................................................................ 98Table des matières
8
Météo ............................................................................................... 98
Orange et moi ................................................................................ 98
Connectivité .................................................................. 99
Bluetooth ........................................................................................ 99
Wi-Fi ................................................................................................ 101
Wi-Fi direct .................................................................................... 104
AllShare ......................................................................................... 105
Partager une connexion de données ..................................... 107
GPS ................................................................................................. 109
Connexions PC ............................................................................. 111
Connexions VPN .......................................................................... 113
Outils ............................................................................ 115
Horloge .......................................................................................... 115
Calculatrice ................................................................................... 118
Téléchargements ......................................................................... 118
Kies air ............................................................................................ 119
Mini journal .................................................................................. 120
Mes fichiers ................................................................................... 121
Polaris Office ................................................................................ 121
Gestion de tâches ....................................................................... 123
Commande vocale ...................................................................... 124
Discussion ..................................................................................... 124
Paramètres .................................................................. 125
Accéder au menu Paramètres .................................................. 125
Wi-Fi ................................................................................................ 125
Bluetooth ...................................................................................... 125
Utilisation des données ............................................................. 125
Plus... .............................................................................................. 125
Appels ............................................................................................ 127
Son .................................................................................................. 129Table des matières
9
Affichage ....................................................................................... 129
Economie d'énergie .................................................................... 131
Stockage ........................................................................................ 131
Batterie .......................................................................................... 132
Applications ................................................................................. 132
Comptes et synchro. ................................................................... 132
Services de localisation ............................................................. 132
Sécurité .......................................................................................... 133
Langue et saisie ........................................................................... 135
Sauvegarder et réinitialiser ..................................................... 139
Station d'accueil .......................................................................... 139
Date & heure ................................................................................ 140
Accessibilité ................................................................................. 140
Mouvement ................................................................................. 141
Options de développement ..................................................... 141
A propos du téléphone ............................................................. 142
Dépannage ................................................................. 143
Consignes de sécurité ............................................... 149
Index ............................................................................ 161Assemblage
10
Assemblage
Contenu du coffret
Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments
suivants sont présents:
● Téléphone mobile
● Batterie
●
Adaptateur pour micro-SIM1
●
Guide de prise en main rapide
Utilisez exclusivement des logiciels homologués par
Samsung. L’utilisation de logiciels piratés ou illégaux peut
occasionner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements qui
ne sont pas couverts par la garantie du fabricant.
● Les éléments fournis avec votre téléphone peuvent varier
en fonction des logiciels et accessoires disponibles dans
votre région ou proposés par votre opérateur.
● Vous pouvez acquérir d’autres accessoires auprès de votre
revendeur Samsung.
● Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour
votre appareil.
● Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux
fournis, ne soient pas compatibles avec votre appareil.
1. L'adaptateur pour micro-SIM vous permet d’utiliser dans votre appareil
une carte micro-SIM (version miniature d’une carte SIM standard).
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cet accessoire ne
soit pas disponible.Assemblage
11
Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie
Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un service de téléphonie mobile,
une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle
permet de vous identifier et contient tous les détails de votre
abonnement (code PIN, services en option, etc.). Pour bénéficier
des services 3G ou 3G+, vous devez vous procurer une carte USIM
(Universal Subscriber Identity Module).
Pour installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie:
1 Si votre appareil est allumé, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/
Verrouillage enfoncée et appuyez sur Éteindre→OK pour
l’éteindre.
2
Retirez le cache de la batterie.
Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache de la
batterie.
3 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas.
N’introduisez pas de carte mémoire dans le compartiment
prévu pour la carte SIM.Assemblage
12
4 Insérez la batterie.
5
Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.
Mettre la batterie en charge
Vous devez charger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la
première fois.
Vous pouvez recharger le téléphone à l’aide d’un chargeur ou en le
branchant sur un ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC.
Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs et des câbles de
connexion homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de
chargeurs ou de câbles de connexion non homologués peut
provoquer l’explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre
appareil.Assemblage
13
● Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible,
le téléphone émet un signal sonore et affiche un
message d’avertissement. L’icône de batterie est
alors vide et clignote. Lorsque le niveau de charge de
la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, le téléphone s’éteint
automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre le
téléphone en marche.
● Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, il est
impossible d’allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur
est branché. Laissez une batterie épuisée se recharger
pendant quelques minutes avant d’essayer d’allumer
l’appareil.
›
Recharger la batterie avec un chargeur
1
Branchez la fiche micro-USB du chargeur sur le connecteur à
fonctions multiples de l’appareil.
Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement
endommager l’appareil. Les dommages résultant d’une
mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.Assemblage
14
2
Branchez l’autre extrêmité du chargeur sur une prise de
courant.
● Vous pouvez utiliser le téléphone lorsqu’il est en cours
de chargement. Dans ce cas, il est possible que le
rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de
temps.
● Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est
possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison
de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas,
débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil.
● Il est possible que le téléphone chauffe lorsqu’il est en
cours de rechargement. Ce phénomène est normal
et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du
téléphone.
● Si le téléphone ne se charge pas correctement, apportezle, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de
service après-vente Samsung.
3 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas,
l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le chargeur du téléphone,
puis de la prise de courant.
Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le
chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager l’appareil.
Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque
vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’étant pas muni d’un
bouton marche/arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise
de courant pour couper l’alimentation. Lorsqu’il est utilisé, le
chargeur doit rester à proximité de la prise.
›
Recharger la batterie avec un câble de connexion
PC
Avant de recharger le téléphone, assurez-vous que votre
ordinateur est allumé.
1
Branchez la fiche micro-USB du câble de connexion PC sur le
connecteur à fonctions multiples du téléphone.Assemblage
15
2
Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble de connexion PC sur un
port USB de l’ordinateur.
En fonction du type de câble de connexion PC que vous
utilisez, il est possible que le rechargement tarde à démarrer.
3 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas,
l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le câble de connexion PC
du téléphone, puis de l’ordinateur.
Insérer une carte mémoire
Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires, vous devez
utiliser une carte mémoire. Le téléphone est compatible avec les
cartes mémoire microSD™ ou microSDHC
™ d’une capacité allant
jusqu’à 32Go (en fonction du fabricant et du modèle de carte
mémoire).
Samsung utilise des normes industrielles standardisées pour
les cartes mémoire. Néanmoins, il est possible que certaines
marques de cartes mémoire ne soient pas entièrement
compatibles avec votre téléphone. L’utilisation d’une carte
mémoire incompatible peut endommager votre téléphone
ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données
qui y sont stockées.
● Seule la structure de fichiers FAT est compatible avec les
cartes mémoire de votre téléphone. Lorsque vous insérez
une carte formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers,
votre téléphone vous invite à la reformater entièrement.
●
Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement
et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire.
● Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans votre
appareil, le répertoire des fichiers de la carte mémoire
apparaît dans le dossier external_sd du menu Mes
fichiers.Assemblage
16
1
Retirez le cache batterie et la batterie.
2 Insérez la carte en orientant la puce vers le bas.
3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce
qu’elle se verrouille.
4
Remettez la batterie et le cache batterie en place.
›
Retirer une carte mémoire
Avant de retirer une carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable
l’éjecter pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applications→
Paramètres→Stockage→Démonter la carte SD→OK.
2
Retirez le cache batterie et la batterie.
3
Poussez la carte avec précaution jusqu’à ce qu'elle ressorte du
téléphone.
4
Retirez la carte de son emplacement.
5
Retirez la carte mémoire.
6
Remettez la batterie et le cache batterie en place.
Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque le téléphone
y transfère ou lit des données. Vous risqueriez de perdre
des données et d’endommager la carte mémoire ou le
téléphone.Assemblage
17
›
Formater une carte mémoire
Formater une carte mémoire sur un ordinateur peut entraîner des
problèmes de compatibilité avec votre téléphone. Formatez la
carte mémoire uniquement dans le téléphone.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, sélectionnez Applications→Paramètres
→Stockage→Formater la carte SD→Formater la carte SD→
Tout supprimer.
Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas
d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données
importantes qui y sont stockées. La garantie du fabricant ne
couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations
de l’utilisateur.
Fixer une dragonne
1
Retirez le cache de la batterie.
2 Faites passer une dragonne à travers la fente et accrochez-la au
point d’attache.
3
Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.Démarrage
18
Démarrage
Allumer/éteindre l’appareil
Pour allumer le téléphone:
1
Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage enfoncée.
2 Si vous allumez votre appareil pour la première fois, suivez
les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour procéder à la
configuration.
Pour éteindre votre appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/
Verrouillage enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre→OK.
● Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives
formulées par le personnel compétant dans les lieux où
l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par
exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux.
● Pour utiliser uniquement les services hors-réseau de votre
appareil, c’est-à-dre les fonctions autres que les fonctions
d’appel, Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, activez le mode Hors-ligne.
Pour ce faire, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/
Verrouillage enfoncée et appuyez sur Hors-ligne.Démarrage
19
Présentation de l’appareil
›Aspect du téléphone
1. Activé uniquement lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Haut-parleur ou
lorsque vous enregistrez des vidéos.
Objectif photo avant
Capteur de proximité
Touche Accueil
Touche de volume
Capteur de luminosité
Touche Menu
Connecteur à
fonctions multiples
Écouteur
Écran tactile
Touche Recherche
Microphone
Microphone1Démarrage
20
›
Touches
Touche Fonction
Marche/
Arrêt/
Verrouillage
Allumer l’appareil (maintenez la touche
enfoncée). Accéder aux menus rapides
(maintenez la touche enfoncée).
Verrouiller l’écran tactile.
Menu
Ouvrir la liste des options disponibles
dans l’écran actuel. Depuis l’écran
d’accueil, ouvrir l’application de
recherche (maintenir la touche enfoncée).
Ouvrir la fenêtre de recherche en cours
d’utilisation de certaines applications
(maintenir la touche enfoncée).
Accueil
Revenir à l’écran d’accueil. Ouvrir la liste
des applications récentes (maintenir
enfoncée).
Retour Revenir à l’écran précédent.
Volume Régler le volume de l’appareil.
Prise audio 3,5 mm
Antenne intégrée
Objectif photo arrière
Marche/Arrêt/
Verrouillage
Haut-parleur
Cache de la batterie
FlashDémarrage
21
›Icônes d’information
Les icônes qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran peuvent varier en
fonction de votre zone géographique.
Icône Description
Aucun signal
Puissance du signal
Réseau GPRS connecté
Réseau EDGE connecté
Réseau 3G connecté
Ouvrir les connexions Wi-Fi disponibles
Wi-Fi connecté
Wi-Fi Direct connecté
Bluetooth activé
Kit piéton Bluetooth connecté
GPS activé
Appel en cours
Appel en attente
Haut-parleur activé
Appel manqué
Chargement de données
Téléchargement de donnéesDémarrage
22
Icône Description
Transfert d’appel activé
Connecté à un ordinateur
Modem USB activé
Point d’accès Wi-Fi activé
Pas de carte SIM/USIM
Nouveau SMS ou MMS
Nouvel e-mail
Nouveau message vocal
Alarme activée
Notification d’événement
Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale)
Mode Discret activé
Vibreur activé
Mode Hors-ligne activé
Lecture audio en cours
Lecture audio en pause
Radio FM activée en arrière-plan
Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est
nécessaire
Niveau de charge de la batterie
10:00 Heure actuelleDémarrage
23
Utiliser l’écran tactile
L’écran tactile de votre appareil vous permet de sélectionner
des éléments et des fonctions en toute facilité. Découvrez les
manipulations de base relatives à l’utilisation de l’écran tactile.
●
N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus afin de ne pas rayer l’écran.
● Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils
électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent
provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
● Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau.
L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des
dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile.
● Pour une utilisation optimale de l’écran tactile, retirez le
film de protection avant d’utiliser le téléphone.
● L’écran tactile comporte une couche qui détecte les petites
charges électriques émises par le corps humain. Pour de
meilleures performances, appuyez sur l’écran tactile du
bout du doigt. L’écran tactile ne réagit pas si vous utilisez
des objets pointus, tels qu’un stylet ou un stylo.
Contrôlez le fonctionnement de l’écran tactile à l’aide des
manipulations suivantes:
●
Appuyer: appuyez sur l’écran tactile pour sélectionner ou lancer
un menu, une option ou une application.
●
Maintenir enfoncé: pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options
contextuelles, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément
pendant plus de 2 secondes.
● Faire glisser : posez votre doigt et faites-le glisser vers le bas,
le haut, la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre les éléments des
différentes listes.
●
Glisser/déposer: maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément,
puis faites-le glisser pour déplacer l’élément.Démarrage
24
●
Appuyer deux fois: appuyez brièvement à deux reprises sur
l’écran tactile pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière sur les
photos ou les pages Web que vous visionnez.
● Passé un certain délai d’inactivité, votre téléphone éteint
l’écran tactile automatiquement. Pour réactiver l’écran
tactile, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage
ou sur la touche Accueil.
● Vous pouvez également régler la durée du rétroéclairage
de l’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des
applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Affichage→
Mise en veille de l’écran.
Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et
les touches
Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches pour
empêcher toute opération accidentelle du téléphone.
Pour verrouiller, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage
enfoncée. Pour déverrouiller, activez l’écran en appuyant sur la
touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage ou sur la touche Accueil, puis
faites glisser votre doigt sur l'écran.
Présentation de l’écran d’accueil
Lorsque l’appareil est en mode veille, l’écran d’accueil apparaît.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, vous pouvez afficher l’état de votre
téléphone et accéder à ses applications.
L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Faites défiler l’écran
vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre l’un des volets de l’écran
d’accueil. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en bas de
l’écran pour accéder directement au volet correspondant.Démarrage
25
›Ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil
Vous pouvez personnaliser l’écran d’accueil en lui ajoutant des
raccourcis pour accéder à des applications, des widgets ou des
dossiers. Pour ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil :
1
Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter ou maintenez votre doigt
appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil.
2 Sélectionnez la catégorie d’éléments → un élément:
●
Widgets : ajouter des widgets à l’écran d’accueil.
● Raccourcis : ajouter des raccourcis pour accéder par
exemple aux applications, aux favoris et aux contacts.
●
Dossiers : créer un nouveau dossier ou ajouter des dossiers
pour vos contacts.
● Fonds d’écran: définir une image d’arrière-plan.
›Déplacer les éléments sur l’écran d’accueil
1
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément à déplacer.
2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à l’emplacement désiré.
›
Supprimer des éléments de l’écran d’accueil
1
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer.
La corbeille apparaît au bas de l’écran d’accueil.
2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à la corbeille.
3 Lorsque l’élément apparaît en rouge, relâchez-le.Démarrage
26
›Utiliser le volet des raccourcis
Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou lorsque vous utilisez une application,
appuyez sur la zone des icônes d’information et faites glisser votre
doigt vers le bas pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez
activer ou désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil et accéder
aux informations de réseau et à la liste des notifications (messages
reçus, appels manqués, événements etc.). Pour masquer la liste,
faites glisser votre doigt de bas en haut.
Dans le volet des raccourcis, vous pouvez utiliser les options
suivantes:
●
WiFi: activer ou désactiver la fonction de connexion Wi-Fi.
►p.102
● Bluetooth: activer ou désactiver la fonction de connexion
Bluetooth. ►p.99
●
GPS: activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS.
●
Données mobiles : activer ou désactiver votre connexion de
données.
● Rotation auto: activer ou désactiver la rotation automatique de
l’écran.
La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de votre zone
géographique et du forfait auquel vous avez souscrit auprès
de votre opérateur.
›Ajouter ou supprimer des volets d’écran d’accueil
Vous pouvez ajouter de nouveaux volets à l’écran d’accueil ou
bien en supprimer de façon à organiser les widgets selon vos
préférences et vos besoins.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier.
Vous pouvez également placer deux doigts sur l’écran, puis les
resserrer pour passer en mode Modification.
2
Ajoutez ou supprimez des volets en effectuant les opérations
suivantes:
● Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur
sa miniature et faites-la glisser dans la corbeille en bas de
l’écran.
● Pour ajouter un nouveau volet, appuyez sur .Démarrage
27
● Pour changer l’ordre des volets, maintenez votre doigt
appuyé sur la miniature correspondante, puis faites-la glisser
à l’endroit désiré.
3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ].
Accéder aux applications
Pour accéder aux applications du téléphone:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applications pour
accéder au menu des applications.
2 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre un
écran de menus.
Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en bas de l’écran
pour accéder directement à l’écran de menus correspondant.
3 Sélectionnez une application.
● Lorsque vous utilisez des applications fournies par Google,
vous devez disposer d’un compte Google. Si vous ne
disposez pas de compte Google, inscrivez-vous vite à ce
service gratuit.
● Vous pouvez ajouter un raccourci vers une application en
maintenant le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de l’application
dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez ensuite
déplacer l’icône vers l’emplacement de votre choix sur
l’écran d’accueil.
4
Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Appuyez sur
la touche Accueil pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil.
● Si vous faites pivoter le téléphone lorsque vous utilisez
certaines fonctions, l’interface bascule automatiquement.
Afin de conserver l'orientation initiale de l'appareil, ouvrez
le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur Rotation auto.
● Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil, vous pouvez réaliser une
capture d’écran en appuyant simultanément sur la touche
Accueil et sur la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage. Pour
enregistrer l’image, appuyez sur Mes fichiers→Pictures
→Screenshots.Démarrage
28
› Organiser les applications
Vous pouvez organiser les applications de la liste en modifiant leur
ordre ou en les regroupant par catégories. Vous pouvez organiser
les applications uniquement en mode Grille personnalisable.
1
Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur [ ] →Type
d'affichage→Grille personnalisable pour basculer en mode
Grille personnalisable (si nécessaire).
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier→OK.
3
Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une application.
4 Faites glisser l’icône de l’application vers l’emplacement
souhaité.
Vous pouvez déplacer l’icône d’une application vers un autre
écran de menus. Vous pouvez aussi déplacer les applications
les plus utilisées près de l'icône Accueil.
5
Appuyez sur [ ] →Enreg.
Pour ajouter un dossier ou une page à l’écran de menus:
1
Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier.
2
Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une application.
3 Faites glisser l’icône de l’application vers Ajouter un dossier ou
Ajouter une page au bas de l’écran.
4
Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour ajouter plusieurs applications.
5 Faites glisser Ajouter un dossier ou Ajouter une page vers
l’écran de menus.
Un nouveau dossier ou un nouveau volet contenant les
applications est ajouté à l’écran de menus.
6 Si vous avez ajouté un dossier, nommez-le, puis appuyez sur
OK.
7
Appuyez sur [ ] →Enreg.
Pour changer l’ordre des écrans de menus:
1
Dans la liste des applications, placez deux doigts sur l’écran,
puis resserrez-les.
2
Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur la miniature d’un écran, puis
faites-la glisser à l’endroit désiré.Démarrage
29
›Accéder aux applications récentes
1
Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des
applications récemment utilisées.
2 Sélectionnez l’application désirée.
›Utiliser le gestionnaire de tâches
Votre téléphone est un appareil multitâche. Il peut exécuter
plusieurs applications simultanément. Toutefois, le mode
multitâche peut provoquer des blocages, des problèmes de
mémoire ou entraîner une consommation supplémentaire
d’énergie. Pour éviter ces problèmes, arrêtez les applications
inutiles fonctionnant en arrière-plan en utilisant le gestionnaire de
tâches.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Gestion de tâches→Applications actives.
La liste de toutes les applications actuellement utilisées sur
votre téléphone s’affiche.
2
Pour fermer une application, appuyez sur Fin.
Pour fermer toutes les applications actives, appuyez sur
Quitter tout.
Personnaliser le téléphone
Tirez le meilleur de votre téléphone en le personnalisant pour qu’il
réponde à vos envies et vos préférences.
›
Régler la date et l’heure
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Date & heure.
2
Réglez la date et l’heure et modifiez d’autres options.Démarrage
30
›Activer ou désactiver la tonalité des touches
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez
sur Paramètres→Son→Sons tactiles.
›Activer le profil Discret
Pour activer ou désactiver le profil Discret de votre téléphone,
procédez de l’une des façons suivantes:
●
Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage enfoncée et
appuyez sur Profil Discret.
●
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis maintenez la touche #
enfoncée.
›
Changer de sonnerie
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Son→Sonnerie du téléphone.
2
Choisissez une sonnerie dans la liste, puis appuyez sur OK.
›
Sélectionner un fond d’écran d’accueil
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] →Fond d’écran→
une option.
2 Sélectionnez une image.
3
Appuyez sur Enreg. ou Définir fond d’écran.
Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de l’utilisation des
images ou des fonds d’écran fourni(e)s par défaut avec votre
téléphone.Démarrage
31
›
Régler la luminosité de l’écran
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Affichage→Luminosité.
2
Décochez la case située à côté de Luminosité automatique.
3
Pour régler la luminosité, faites glisser le curseur .
4
Appuyez sur OK.
Le niveau de luminosité de l’écran influe sur la vitesse de
déchargement de la batterie.
›Définir un verrouillage de l’écran
Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile en activant la fonction
de verrouillage de l’écran. Vous devez alors dessiner un modèle
de déverrouillage d'écran, saisir un mot de passe ou un code
PIN de déverrouillage d'écran chaque fois que vous activez ou
déverrouillez l’écran tactile.
● Si vous oubliez votre code de déverrouillage, apportez
votre téléphone dans un centre de service après-vente
Samsung pour le réinitialiser.
● Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte
de codes de sécurité, d’informations confidentielles ou
d’autres dommages résultant de l’utilisation de logiciels
illégaux.
Définir un modèle de déverrouillage
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de
l'écran→Modèle.
2
Prenez connaissance des instructions affichées et des exemples
de modèles, puis appuyez sur Suivant.
3
Dessinez un modèle en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran
pour relier au moins 4points.
4
Appuyez sur Continuer.
5
Dessinez à nouveau le modèle pour confirmer.
6
Appuyez sur Confirmer.Démarrage
32
Définir un code PIN de déverrouillage
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de
l'écran→Code PIN.
2 Saisissez un code PIN (numérique) de déverrouillage d’écran et
appuyez sur Continuer.
3
Confirmez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur OK.
Définir un mot de passe de déverrouillage
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de
l'écran→Mot de passe.
2 Saisissez un mot de passe (alphanumérique) de déverrouillage
d’écran et appuyez sur Continuer.
3
Confirmez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK.
Configurer un déverrouillage par détection faciale
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Verrouillage de
l'écran→Déverrouillage visage.
2
Appuyez sur Configurer→Continuer.
3
Réglez l’appareil pour ajuster votre visage dans la zone prévue
à cet effet.
4
Une fois votre visage correctement ajusté, appuyez sur
Continuer.
5 Effectuez la configuration du code de déverrouillage
secondaire.Démarrage
33
›
Verrouiller la carte SIM ou USIM
Vous pouvez verrouiller votre téléphone en activant le code PIN
fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Configurer blocage
SIM→Verrouiller carte SIM.
2 Saisissez votre code PIN et appuyez sur OK.
Lorsque le verrouillage PIN est activé, vous devez saisir votre code
PIN chaque fois que vous allumez votre téléphone.
● Si vous saisissez un code PIN erroné à plusieurs reprises,
votre carte SIM ou USIM se bloque. Vous devez alors saisir
le code PIN de déverrouillage (PUK) afin de débloquer la
carte SIM ou USIM.
● Si vous bloquez votre carte SIM ou USIM en saisissant un
code PUK erroné, apportez-la chez votre revendeur pour la
faire débloquer.
›Activer la fonction de traçage du mobile
Lorsque quelqu’un introduit une autre carte SIM/USIM que
la vôtre dans votre appareil, la fonction de traçage du mobile
envoie automatiquement le nouveau numéro de téléphone
aux destinataires spécifiés, afin de vous aider à le localiser et à le
récupérer.
Pour utiliser cette fonction et contrôler l’appareil à distance sur le
Web, vous devez créer un compte Samsung.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Sécurité→Traçage du mobile.
2
Appuyez sur Connexion, saisissez l’adresse e-mail et le mot de
passe de votre compte Samsung, puis appuyez une nouvelle
fois sur Connexion.
Pour créer un compte Samsung, appuyez sur Créer.Démarrage
34
3
Appuyez sur Destinataires.
4 Saisissez une nouvelle fois le mot de passe de votre compte
Samsung, puis appuyez sur OK.
5 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone précédé de l’indicatif du
pays (avec +).
6
Rédigez le message à envoyer aux destinataires.
7
Appuyez sur OK.
Pour obtenir plus d’informations concernant cette fonction,
connectez-vous sur le site www.samsungdive.com.
Saisir du texte
Vous pouvez saisir du texte en utilisant les caractères du clavier
virtuel ou en utilisant l’option d’écriture manuscrite.
Vous ne pouvez pas saisir du texte dans certaines langues.
Pour saisir du texte, vous devez utiliser une langue prise en
charge. ►p.135
› Modifier le type de clavier
Vous pouvez modifier le type de clavier. Ouvrez le volet des
raccourcis et appuyez sur Mode de saisie→ un type de clavier
(Samsung ou Swype).
Vous pouvez également saisir du texte oralement. Appuyez sur
Saisie Google Voice, puis sélectionnez la langue à utiliser dans le
cadre de la fonction de saisie vocale.
›
Saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung
1
Appuyez sur →Types de clavier Portrait, puis choisissez
un mode de saisie.
Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des modes de saisie à touches
(AZERTY ou clavier traditionnel) ou l’écriture manuscrite.
2 Saisissez le texte en appuyant sur les touches alphanumériques
ou en écrivant sur l’écran.Démarrage
35
Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes:
6
5
7
8
1
2
3
4
Numéro Fonction
1 Modifier la casse.
2 Basculer entre les modes Symbole/Numérique et
ABC.
3 Accéder aux paramètres du clavier. Modifier le type
de clavier (maintenir enfoncée).
4
Saisir du texte oralement. Cette icône n’est
disponible que si vous avez activé la fonction de
saisie vocale du clavier Samsung.
Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas
disponible en fonction de la langue de saisie
sélectionnée.
5 Effacer la saisie.
6 Effectuer un retour à la ligne.
7 Insérer un point. Ouvrir le volet des symboles
(maintenir enfoncée).
8 Insérer un espace. Démarrage
36
›
Saisir du texte avec le clavier Swype
1
Appuyez sur le premier caractère d’un mot et faites glisser
votre doigt en le maintenant sur l’écran vers le second
caractère.
2
Continuez ainsi jusqu’à la fin du mot.
3
Relâchez votre doigt après le dernier caractère.
4 Lorsque le mot souhaité apparaît correctement, appuyez sur
pour insérer un espace. Si le mot souhaité ne s’affiche pas,
choisissez un autre mot dans la liste affichée.
5
Répétez les étapes 1 à 4 pour rédiger tout votre texte.
● Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les touches pour saisir du texte.
● Vous pouvez également maintenir une touche enfoncée
pour saisir les caractères de la moitié supérieure de la
touche. Lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche jusqu’à ce
que la liste de caractères apparaisse, vous pouvez saisir
des caractères spéciaux et des symboles.Démarrage
37
Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes:
1
3
2
4
5
6
8
7
Numéro Fonction
1 Modifier la casse.
2 Accéder aux paramètres du clavier (maintenir
enfoncée).
3 Basculer entre les modes Symbole/Numérique et
ABC.
4 Modifier la langue de saisie.
5 Effacer la saisie.
6 Effectuer un retour à la ligne.
7
Saisir du texte oralement.
Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas
disponible en fonction de la langue de saisie
sélectionnée.
8 Insérer un espace.Démarrage
38
›
Copier et coller du texte
Lorsque vous saisissez du texte, vous pouvez exploiter la fonction
copier-coller pour utiliser le même texte dans d’autres applications.
1
Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un passage du texte.
2 Faites glisser ou pour sélectionner le texte à copier.
3
Appuyez sur pour copier le texte, ou sur pour couper le
texte et l’insérer dans le presse-papiers.
4
Dans une autre application, positionnez le texte à
l’emplacement où vous souhaitez coller le texte.
5
Appuyez sur →Coller pour insérer le texte du pressepapiers dans le champ de saisie.
Télécharger des applications à partir de
Play Store
La plate-forme Google qui équipe votre téléphone permet
d’enrichir ses fonctions en installant des applications
supplémentaires.
Play Store vous permet d’acquérir facilement et rapidement des
applications et des jeux pour mobiles.
● Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
● Votre téléphone enregistrera les fichiers utilisateur des
applications téléchargées dans la mémoire interne
moviNAND™. Pour enregistrer les fichiers sur la carte
mémoire, branchez votre téléphone sur un PC et copiez
les fichiers à partir de la mémoire interne vers la carte
mémoire.Démarrage
39
›Installer une application
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Play Store.
2
Appuyez sur Accepter dans la fenêtre des conditions
d’utilisation.
3
Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le
téléchargement.
›Désinstaller une application
1
Dans l’écran d’accueil de Play Store, appuyez sur [ ] →Mes
applications.
2 Sélectionnez l’élément à supprimer.
3
Appuyez sur Désinstaller→OK.
Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web
Lorsque vous téléchargez des fichiers ou des applications sur le
Web, votre téléphone les enregistre dans la carte mémoire.
Les fichiers téléchargés sur le Web peuvent contenir des
virus potentiellement dangereux pour le téléphone. Pour
réduire les risques, téléchargez uniquement des fichiers
provenant de sources fiables.
Certains fichiers multimédia intègrent le système de
Gestion des droits numériques (DRM) visant à protéger
les droits d’auteur. Cette protection peut empêcher le
téléchargement, la copie, la modification ou le transfert de
certains fichiers.Démarrage
40
Pour télécharger des fichiers sur le Web:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Internet.
2
Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le
téléchargement.
Pour installer des applications téléchargées à partir de sites
Web autres que Google Play Store, appuyez sur Paramètres→
Sécurité→Sources inconnues→OK.
Synchroniser des données
Vous pouvez synchroniser des données avec différents serveurs
Web et les sauvegarder ou les restaurer.
Une fois la synchronisation terminée, le téléphone reste
connecté au Web. Si une modification est apportée sur le Web,
les informations mises à jour s’affichent sur votre téléphone et la
synchronisation débute automatiquement, et inversement.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
›
Paramétrer un compte de serveur
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro.
2
Appuyez sur Ajouter compte→ un type de compte.
3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer la
configuration du compte.Démarrage
41
›Activer la synchronisation automatique
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro.
2
Appuyez sur OFF près du menu Comptes et synchro.
3 Sélectionnez un compte.
4 Sélectionnez les applications à synchroniser.
Pour exclure des applications de la synchronisation automatique,
décochez les cases situées à côté des applications concernées.
›
Synchroniser des données manuellement
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro.
2 Sélectionnez un compte.
3
Appuyez sur Sync maintenant. Votre téléphone commence à
synchroniser les données que vous avez sélectionnées.Communication
42
Communication
Appels
Découvrez comment utiliser les fonctions d’appel de votre
téléphone: passer un appel, répondre à un appel, utiliser les
options disponibles en cours d’appel ou personnaliser les autres
fonctions.
›
Passer un appel et y répondre
Vous pouvez utiliser les touches physiques du téléphone ou celles
de l’écran tactile pour passer, accepter, refuser ou terminer un
appel.
● Lorsque vous activez le capteur de proximité, votre
téléphone s’éteint automatiquement et verrouille l’écran
tactile afin d’éviter les saisies accidentelles lorsque vous
tenez le téléphone près de votre visage. ►p.128
● L’électricité statique de votre corps ou de vos vêtements
peut interférer avec le capteur de proximité au cours d’un
appel.
Passer un appel
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis saisissez le numéro de
téléphone à appeler précédé de son indicatif régional.
2
Pour passer un appel vocal, appuyez sur .
Pour passer un appel visio, appuyez sur .
3
Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin.
●
Utilisez le répertoire pour enregistrer les numéros que
vous composez fréquemment. ►p.79
● Pour accéder rapidement au journal d’appels et composer
les numéros récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Téléphone
→Journal.Communication
43
Répondre à un appel
1 Lorsque vous recevez un appel, appuyez sur l'icône , puis
faites-la glisser hors du cercle.
Pour désactiver la sonnerie lorsque le téléphone sonne,
appuyez sur la touche de volume.
2
Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin.
Rejeter un appel
Lorsque vous recevez un appel, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faitesla glisser hors du cercle.
Pour envoyer un message lorsque vous rejeter des appels entrants,
appuyez sur Rejeter l’appel avec message.
Définissez au préalable un message texte à envoyer aux
correspondants. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste
des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→
Définir messages de rejet.
Appeler un numéro international
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 0
enfoncée pour insérer le caractère +.
2 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone que vous souhaitez
composer en entier (indicatif du pays, indicatif régional et
numéro de téléphone), puis appuyez sur pour appeler ce
numéro.
›Utiliser le kit piéton
En branchant un kit piéton sur l’appareil, vous pouvez répondre
aux appels et les contrôler en gardant les mains libres:
●
Appuyez sur la touche du kit piéton pour répondre à un appel.
● Pour rejeter un appel, maintenez la touche du kit piéton
enfoncée.
● Pour placer un appel en attente ou reprendre un appel mis en
attente, maintenez la touche du kit piéton enfoncée.
● Pour raccrocher, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche du kit piéton.Communication
44
›Utiliser des options au cours d’un appel vocal
Au cours d’un appel vocal, vous pouvez utiliser les options
suivantes:
● Pour régler le niveau sonore de l’appel, appuyez sur la touche de
volume Haut ou Bas.
● Pour placer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . Pour récupérer
un appel en attente, appuyez sur .
● Pour passer un appel alors qu’un autre est déjà en cours,
appuyez sur Ajouter et composez le nouveau numéro.
● Pour répondre à un deuxième appel, appuyez sur l'icône , puis
faites-la glisser hors du cercle lorsqu’un signal d’appel retentit.
Le téléphone vous demande alors si vous souhaitez mettre fin
au premier appel ou le mettre en attente. Pour utiliser cette
fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de mise en
attente des appels.
● Pour ouvrir l’écran de numérotation, appuyez sur Clavier.
● Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur HP.
Dans un environnement bruyant, il vous sera difficile
d’entendre clairement votre correspondant avec la fonction
haut-parleur. Utilisez le mode combiné classique pour une
meilleure qualité sonore.
● Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne
vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet.
● Pour discuter avec l’autre correspondant via un kit piéton
Bluetooth, appuyez sur Casque.
● Pour ouvrir le répertoire, appuyez sur [ ] →Contacts.
● Pour ajouter un mémo, appuyez sur [ ] →Mémo.
● Pour basculer entre les deux appels, appuyez sur Permuter.
● Pour lancer une conférence téléphonique, composez un
second numéro ou répondez à un autre appel, puis appuyez
sur Fusionner lorsque vous êtes en liaison avec le deuxième
correspondant. Répétez cette même procédure pour ajouter
d’autres correspondants. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez
d’abord souscrire au service de conférence téléphonique.Communication
45
›Utiliser des options pendant un appel visio
Au cours d’un appel visio, vous pouvez utiliser les options
suivantes:
● Pour passer de l’objectif avant à l’objectif arrière, et vice-versa,
appuyez sur Objectif.
● Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne
vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet.
● Pour que votre correspondant ne voit plus votre image, appuyez
sur [ ] →Masquer.
● Pour changer l’image à afficher à votre correspondant, appuyez
sur [ ] →Image sortante.
● Pour ouvrir l’écran de numérotation, appuyez sur [ ] →
Clavier.
● Pour discuter avec l’autre correspondant via un kit piéton
Bluetooth, appuyez sur [ ] →Basculer sur le kit piéton.
● Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur [ ] →Activer/
désactiver haut-parleur.
● Pour utiliser l’image de votre correspondant, maintenez le doigt
appuyé sur son image. Vous pouvez capturer l’image à l’écran ou
enregistrer l’appel visio.
›Afficher les appels manqués et rappeler les
numéros correspondants
Votre téléphone affiche les appels manqués à l’écran. Pour
composer le numéro correspondant à un appel manqué, ouvrez le
volet des raccourcis et sélectionnez l’appel manqué.
›Utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires
Vous pouvez utiliser diverses autres fonctions d’appel comme le
rejet automatique, le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN), le renvoi
ou l’interdiction d’appel.Communication
46
Définir le rejet automatique
Pour rejeter automatiquement certains appels, utilisez l’option
de rejet automatique. Pour activer le rejet automatiquement des
appels et créer des listes de rejet automatique:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Rejet de l’appel.
2
Appuyez sur Mode de rejet automatique→ une option.
Paramètre Fonction
Tous les
numéros Rejeter tous les appels.
Numéros rejetés
auto
Rejeter les appels des numéros de
téléphone répertoriés dans la liste de rejet
automatique.
3
Appuyez sur Liste de rejet automatique.
4
Appuyez sur Ajouter.
5
Appuyez sur une option dans Critères correspondants (si
nécessaire).
6 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone, puis appuyez sur
Enregistrer.
7
Pour ajouter d’autres numéros, répétez les étapes 4et6.
Utiliser le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN)
En mode FDN, votre téléphone restreint l’émission d’appels qui
n’est alors possible que pour les numéros enregistrés dans la liste
FDN. Pour activer le mode FDN:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications
et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Paramètres
supplémentaires→Numérotation fixe→Activer FDN.
2 Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM et
appuyez sur OK.
3
Appuyez sur Liste FDN et ajoutez les contacts à utiliser en
mode FDN.Communication
47
Transférer des appels
Le transfert d’appel est une fonction réseau qui permet de
transférer les appels entrants vers un autre numéro prédéfini. Vous
pouvez configurer cette fonction différemment pour plusieurs
situations, lorsque vous ne pouvez pas répondre aux appels,
lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne ou lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans
une zone couverte par le réseau par exemple.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Transfert d’appel→
un type d’appel.
2 Sélectionnez une condition.
3 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone vers lequel vos appels
doivent être transférés et appuyez sur Activer.
Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau.
Configurer la restriction d’appel
La restriction d’appel est une fonction réseau qui interdit certains
types d’appel ou qui empêche d’autres personnes de passer des
appels avec votre téléphone.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications
et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appels→Paramètres
supplémentaires→Restriction d’appel→ un type d’appel.
2 Sélectionnez une option de restriction d’appel.
3 Saisissez votre mot de passe d’interdiction d’appel, puis
appuyez sur OK.
Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau.
Configurer le signal d’appel
Le signal d’appel est une fonction réseau qui vous permet d’être
averti de l’arrivée d’un second appel lorsque vous êtes déjà en
ligne. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour les appels vocaux.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez
sur Paramètres→Appels→Paramètres supplémentaires→
Signal d’appel. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau.Communication
48
›Afficher le journal d’appels
Vous pouvez afficher le journal de vos appels en fonction de leur
catégorie.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Téléphone→Journal.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Afficher par→ une option pour trier le
journal d’appels.
À partir du journal d’appels, vous pouvez appeler ou envoyer
un message directement à un contact en faisant glisser votre
doigt rapidement sur son nom vers la gauche ou la droite.
3 Sélectionnez l’un des journaux pour en afficher les détails.
À partir des détails de l’appel, vous pouvez rappeler ce
correspondant, lui envoyer un message ou l’ajouter au
répertoire ou à la liste noire.
Messagerie
Découvrez comment créer et envoyer des messages texte (SMS),
multimédia (MMS) et comment afficher ou gérer les messages
envoyés ou reçus.
L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors des zones
couvertes par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais
supplémentaires. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre
opérateur.
›
Envoyer un SMS
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis
appuyez sur Messagerie.
2
Appuyez sur .Communication
49
3
Ajoutez les destinataires de votre message.
● Entrez manuellement les numéros de téléphone, en les
séparant par un point-virgule ou une virgule.
● Sélectionnez les numéros de téléphone à partir des listes en
appuyant sur .
4
Appuyez sur Saisissez un message et saisissez le texte de
votre message.
Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] →Insérer
émoticône.
5
Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message.
›
Envoyer un MMS
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis
appuyez sur Messagerie.
2
Appuyez sur .
3
Ajoutez les destinataires de votre message.
● Entrez manuellement les numéros de téléphone ou les
adresses e-mail, en les séparant par un point-virgule ou une
virgule.
● Sélectionnez les numéros de téléphone ou les adresses
e-mail à partir des listes en appuyant sur .
Lorsque vous saisissez une adresse e-mail, le téléphone
convertit automatiquement le message en MMS.
4
Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter un objet et ajoutez l’objet du
message.
5
Appuyez sur Saisissez un message et saisissez le texte de
votre message.
Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] →Insérer
émoticône.
6
Appuyez sur et ajoutez un élément.
Vous pouvez sélectionner un fichier à partir de la liste des
fichiers ou capturer une photo, enregistrer une vidéo ou un
mémo vocal.
7
Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message.Communication
50
›Afficher un SMS ou un MMS
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis
appuyez sur Messagerie.
Vos messages sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion
par contact, comme pour une messagerie instantanée.
2 Sélectionnez un contact.
3
Pour un MMS, sélectionnez un message pour en afficher les
détails.
›
Écouter la messagerie vocale
Si vous avez configuré le téléphone pour que les appels auxquels
vous ne pouvez pas répondre soient dirigés vers votre boîte vocale,
vos correspondants pourront vous laisser un message vocal. Pour
accéder à votre messagerie vocale et écouter vos messages vocaux :
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 1
enfoncée.
2 Suivez les instructions du serveur de messagerie vocale.
Pour pouvoir accéder au serveur de messagerie vocale, vous
devez d’abord enregistrer son numéro. Contactez votre
opérateur qui vous fournira ce numéro.
Google Mail
Vous pouvez récupérer les nouveaux e-mails directement dans
votre boîte de réception à partir de Gmail
™. Lorsque vous accédez
à cette application, l’écran Boîte de réception s’affiche. Le nombre
total de messages non lus s’affiche dans la barre de titre et les
messages non lus apparaissent en gras.
● Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
● Le menu Gmail peut s’intituler différemment en fonction
de votre zone géographique.Communication
51
›
Envoyer un e-mail
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Google Mail.
2
Appuyez sur .
3 Saisissez un nom ou une adresse dans le champ du
destinataire.
4 Saisissez l’objet, ainsi que le contenu du message.
5
Pour joindre un fichier image, appuyez sur [ ] →Joindre un
fichier→ un fichier.
6
Appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail.
›
Consulter les e-mails
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Google Mail.
2 Sélectionnez un e-mail.
En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes:
● Pour répondre à l’e-mail, appuyez sur .
● Pour répondre à tous les destinataires, appuyez sur →Rép. à
tous.
● Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur
→Transférer.
● Pour afficher une pièce jointe, appuyez sur AFFICHER. Pour
l’enregistrer sur votre téléphone, appuyez sur ENREGISTRER.
● Pour archiver le message, appuyez sur .
● Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur .
● Pour identifier le message comme non lu, appuyez sur .
● Pour passer au message suivant ou revenir au message
précédent, faites défiler respectivement vers la gauche ou la
droite.Communication
52
› Organiser les e-mails par libellé
Vous pouvez organiser votre messagerie en affectant un libellé à
vos messages ou en leur ajoutant des étoiles pour faire ressortir
les messages importants. Vous pouvez ainsi trier les messages en
fonction du libellé.
Ajouter un libellé à un message
1
Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur
un message.
2
Appuyez sur .
3
Choisissez le libellé à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK.
Ajouter une étoile de suivi à un message
Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, appuyez sur . L’icône à côté du
message est activée.
Filtrer les messages
1
Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, appuyez sur .
2 Sélectionnez le libellé des messages à afficher.
E-mail
Découvrez comment envoyer ou consulter des e-mails via votre
compte de messagerie électronique personnel ou professionnel.
›
Créer un compte e-mail
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur E-mail.
2 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe.
3
Appuyez sur Suivant.
Pour configurer un compte Exchange ActiveSync, sélectionnez
Config. manuelle→Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.Communication
53
4 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran.
Une fois le compte de messagerie créé, les e-mails sont téléchargés
sur votre téléphone. Si vous avez créé plus de deux comptes,
vous pouvez passer d’un compte e-mail à l’autre. Sélectionnez le
nom de compte en haut de l’écran et choisissez celui dont vous
souhaitez récupérer les messages.
›
Envoyer un e-mail
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur E-mail.
2
Appuyez sur .
3
Ajoutez les destinataires de votre message.
● Entrez manuellement les adresses e-mail, en les séparant par
un point-virgule ou une virgule.
● Sélectionnez les adresses e-mail à partir des listes en
appuyant sur .
● Pour ajouter d’autres destinataires, appuyez sur [ ] →
Ajouter Cc/Cci.
4
Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’objet et indiquez un objet.
5
Appuyez sur le champ de saisie du texte et rédigez votre
e-mail.
6
Appuyez sur et joignez un fichier.
Vous ne pouvez pas joindre les fichiers protégés par le
système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM).
7
Appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail.
Si vous êtes hors connexion ou en dehors de votre zone de
couverture, le message est conservé dans le fil des messages
jusqu’à votre prochaine connexion ou jusqu’à ce que vous
vous trouviez de nouveau dans une zone couverte par votre
opérateur.Communication
54
›Afficher un e-mail
Lorsque vous ouvrez un compte e-mail, vous pouvez afficher
hors connexion les e-mails précédemment récupérés ou vous
connecter au serveur de messagerie pour consulter vos nouveaux
messages. Une fois les messages récupérés, vous pouvez les lire
hors connexion.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur E-mail.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Actualiser pour mettre à jour la liste des
messages.
3 Sélectionnez un e-mail.
En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes:
● Pour passer au message suivant ou revenir au message
précédent, appuyez sur ou .
● Pour répondre à l’e-mail, appuyez sur .
● Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur
.
● Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur .
● Pour enregistrer une pièce jointe sur votre appareil, sélectionnez
l’onglet de pièce jointe → .
Talk
Découvrez comment discuter avec votre famille ou vos amis par
l’intermédiaire de Google Talk
™.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
›Ajouter des amis à votre liste d’amis
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Talk.
2 Sélectionnez un compte Google.
La liste des amis vous permet de voir tous vos contacts Google
Talk en un seul coup d’œil.Communication
55
3
Appuyez sur .
4 Saisissez l’adresse e-mail d’un contact et appuyez sur
TERMINÉ.
Lorsque votre ami accepte l’invitation, ce dernier est ajouté à votre
liste d’amis.
›Démarrer une session de discussion
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Talk.
2 Sélectionnez un nom dans la liste de vos amis. L’écran de
discussion s’ouvre.
3 Saisissez votre message et appuyez sur .
4
Pour clôturer une session de discussion, appuyez sur [ ] →
Arrêter le chat.
Chat +
Découvrez comment envoyer et recevoir des messages
instantanés d’amis et de proches grâce au service de messagerie
instantanée Messenger de Google+.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis
appuyez sur Chat +.
Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, suivez
les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un
compte.
2 Saisissez et envoyez votre message.
Google+
Découvrez comment accéder au service de réseau social de
Google. Vous pouvez créer des groupes pour partager des
centres d’intérêt et avis ou pour envoyer et recevoir des messages
instantanés, tout comme vous pouvez charger vos photos.Communication
56
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Google+.
Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, suivez
les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour configurer un
compte.
2 Sélectionnez une fonction de réseau social.
Social Hub
Découvrez comment accéder à Social Hub
™, l’application de
communication intégrée pour les services de réseaux sociaux, les
e-mails, les messages, les contacts ou les agendas. Visitez le site
socialhub.samsungapps.com pour obtenir plus d’informations.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Social Hub.
2
Découvrez et exploitez le contenu proposé par Social Hub.
MI
Découvrez comment discuter avec votre famille ou vos amis par
l’intermédiaire de n’importe quel client de messagerie instantané
universel.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur MI.
2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, cochez la
case J'accepte toutes les conditions ci-dessus et appuyez sur
Accepter.
3
Appuyez sur Ajouter compte→ un client de messagerie.
4 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe pour
vous connecter.
5
Vous pouvez immédiatement discuter avec vos amis et votre
famille.Divertissements
57
Divertissements
Appareil photo
Découvrez comment capturer et visionner des photos et des
vidéos. Vous pouvez prendre des photos d’une résolution allant
jusqu’à 3264x2448 pixels (8mégapixels) et enregistrer des vidéos
d’une résolution allant jusqu’à 1920x1080pixels.
● L’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement lorsque vous
ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps.
● Il est possible que les capacités de la mémoire diffèrent en
fonction de la scène photographiée ou des conditions de
prise de vue.
›
Capturer une photo
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages
nécessaires.
1
2
4
6
5
3 Divertissements
58
Numéro Fonction
1 Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo.
2 Ouvrir la fenêtre de visualisation des photos
pour afficher les dernières photos capturées.
3
Raccourcis de l’appareil photo.
● : modifier les paramètres du flash.
● : basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière.
Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des
raccourcis vers les options le plus fréquemment
utilisées. ►p.67
4 Afficher l’emplacement de stockage par défaut.
5 Basculer en mode Caméscope.
6 Capturer une photo.
3
Appuyez sur la touche de volume pour effectuer un zoom
avant ou arrière.
Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis
les écarter (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière).
Il est possible que la fonction Zoom ne soit pas disponible
lors d’une prise de vue avec une résolution élevée.
4
Appuyez à l’endroit qui doit être mis au point sur l’écran
d’aperçu.
Le cadre de l’image se déplace à l’endroit où vous appuyez et
devient vert lorsque la mise au point du sujet est terminée.
5
Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.
La photo est enregistrée automatiquement.Divertissements
59
Après avoir pris des photos, appuyez sur l’icône de visualisation
des images pour les visionner.
● Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de
photos.
● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux
doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un
zoom arrière) ou appuyez deux fois sur l’écran.
● Pour envoyer la photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur
Partager.
● Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur Supprimer.
● Pour définir la photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’attribuer à un
correspondant, appuyez sur Plus→Définir comme.
● Pour renommer la photo, appuyez sur Plus→Renommer.
›
Capturer des photos à l’aide des options
prédéfinies
Votre appareil photo propose des paramètres prédéfinis pour
différents types de scènes. Il vous suffit de sélectionner le mode
approprié aux conditions et aux sujets de vos prises de vue.
Par exemple, si vous prenez des photos la nuit, sélectionnez le
mode Nuit dont l’exposition est supérieure à une photo prise de
jour.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Appuyez sur →Mode scène→ une scène → [ ].
3
Procédez aux réglages nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.Divertissements
60
›
Capturer une photo en mode Autoportrait
Vous pouvez prendre facilement des photos de vous-même en
utilisant l’objectif avant.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Appuyez sur →Autoportrait.
3
Procédez aux réglages nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.
›
Capturer une photo en mode Sourire
Votre appareil photo peut reconnaître les visages et vous aider à
prendre des photos lorsque vos sujets sourient.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Sourire.
3
Procédez aux réglages nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur .
5
Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo vers le sujet.
Votre appareil reconnaît les visages sur une photo et
détecte les sourires. Lorsque le sujet sourit, l’appareil prend
automatiquement une photo.
›
Capturer une photo en mode Beauté
Vous pouvez masquer les imperfections des visages en utilisant le
mode Beauté.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Beauté.
3
Procédez aux réglages nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.Divertissements
61
›
Capturer une photo en mode Panorama
Vous pouvez prendre de larges photos panoramiques en utilisant
le mode Panorama. Ce mode est conseillé pour photographier les
paysages.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Panorama.
3
Procédez aux réglages nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur pour prendre la première photo.
5
Déplacez doucement le téléphone dans une direction et
alignez le cadre vert avec l’objectif.
Lorsque le cadre vert est aligné avec l’objectif, l’appareil photo
prend automatiquement la photo suivante.
6
Répétez l’étape5 pour terminer la photo panoramique.
›
Capturer une photo d’action
Vous pouvez prendre des photos d’un sujet en mouvement et les
regrouper en une seule photo pour illustrer l’action.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Action.
3
Procédez aux réglages nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur pour capturer la première photo.
5
Déplacez le téléphone afin de suivre le sujet en mouvement.
L’appareil capture automatiquement les clichés suivants.
6
Continuez de suivre le sujet jusqu’à ce que l’appareil ait capturé
tous les clichés nécessaires pour composer la photo d’action.Divertissements
62
›
Capturer une photo en mode Dessin animé
Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des effets de dessin animé.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2
Appuyez sur →Mode de capture→Dessin animé.
3
Procédez aux réglages nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.
›
Personnaliser les paramètres de l’appareil photo
Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur pour accéder aux
options suivantes:
Paramètre Fonction
Modifier les
raccourcis
Modifier les raccourcis permettant d’accéder
aux options couramment utilisées.
Autoportrait Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière.
Flash
Modifier les paramètres du flash. Vous pouvez
allumer ou éteindre le flash manuellement
ou paramétrer l’appareil photo pour qu’il
déclenche automatiquement le flash lorsque
cela est nécessaire.
Mode de
capture Modifier le mode de prise de vue.
Mode scène Modifier le mode de scène.
Valeur
d’exposition Régler la valeur d’exposition.
Mode focus
Prendre des photos en gros plan ou bien
paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il effectue
automatiquement une mise au point sur des
sujets ou des visages.
Retardateur Définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’appareil doit
prendre une photo.Divertissements
63
Paramètre Fonction
Effets Appliquer des effets spéciaux, par exemple
des tons sépia ou noir et blanc.
Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution.
Balance des
blancs
Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des
conditions d’éclairage.
ISO Régler la sensibilité du capteur d’images.
Mesure Sélectionner un type d’indice d’exposition.
Visibilité
extérieure
Activer ou désactiver la visibilité extérieure
pour sélectionner des conditions de
luminosité appropriées.
Stabilisateur Réduire les flous dus aux vibrations ou aux
mouvements de l’appareil.
Contraste auto Ajuster automatiquement les contrastes entre
votre sujet et l’arrière-plan.
Détection
clignements
Régler l’appareil photo pour qu’il vous alerte
lorsqu’il détecte des yeux fermés.
Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran
d’aperçu.
Qualité d’image Définir le niveau de qualité des photos.
Balise GPS
Paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il ajoute les
informations de localisation aux photos. Pour
utiliser cette fonction, vous devez activer les
services de localisation. ►p.110
Enregistré
comme
retourné
Configurer l’appareil photo de manière à ce
qu’il fasse automatiquement pivoter l’image
quand vous prenez une photo avec l’objectif
avant.
Stockage Sélectionner un emplacement de stockage
par défaut où enregistrer les photos prises.
Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des
prises de vue.Divertissements
64
›
Enregistrer une vidéo
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo.
2 Faites glisser le curseur vers le caméscope pour basculer en
mode Caméscope.
3
Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages
nécessaires.
1
2
6
5
4
3
Numéro Fonction
1 Modifier les paramètres du caméscope.
2 Ouvrir la fenêtre de visualisation pour afficher
les dernières vidéos enregistrées.
3
Raccourcis du caméscope.
● : modifier les paramètres du flash.
● : modifier le mode d’enregistrement.
Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des
raccourcis vers les options le plus fréquemment
utilisées. ►p.67Divertissements
65
Numéro Fonction
4
Barre d'état du caméscope.
● : durée des vidéos que vous pouvez
enregistrer (en fonction de la mémoire
disponible)
● : emplacement de stockage par défaut
5 Basculer en mode Appareil photo.
6 Enregistrer une vidéo.
4
Appuyez sur la touche de volume pour effectuer un zoom
avant ou arrière.
Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis
les écarter (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière).
Il est possible que la fonction Zoom ne soit pas disponible
lors d’un enregistrement avec une résolution élevée.
5
Appuyez sur pour commencer à enregistrer.
6
Appuyez sur pour arrêter l’enregistrement.
La vidéo est enregistrée automatiquement.
Il est possible que le caméscope ne puisse pas enregistrer les
vidéos correctement sur une carte mémoire dont le taux de
transfert est lent.
Après avoir enregistré des vidéos, appuyez sur l’icône de
visualisation des images pour les visionner.
● Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de
vidéos.
● Pour envoyer la vidéo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur
Partager.
● Pour supprimer la vidéo, appuyez sur Supprimer.
● Pour lire la vidéo, appuyez sur ou sur Plus→Lire.
● Pour renommer la vidéo, appuyez sur Plus→Renommer. Divertissements
66
›
Personnaliser les paramètres du caméscope
Avant de commencer à enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur pour
accéder aux options suivantes:
Paramètre Fonction
Modifier les
raccourcis
Modifier les raccourcis permettant d’accéder
aux options couramment utilisées.
Flash Modifier les paramètres du flash. Vous pouvez
éteindre ou allumer le flash manuellement.
Mode enreg. Modifier le mode d’enregistrement.
Valeur
d’exposition Régler la valeur d’exposition.
Retardateur Définir le délai à l’issue duquel l’appareil doit
commencer à filmer.
Effets Appliquer des effets spéciaux, par exemple
des tons sépia ou noir et blanc.
Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution.
Balance des
blancs
Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des
conditions d’éclairage.
Visibilité
extérieure
Activer ou désactiver la visibilité extérieure
pour sélectionner des conditions de
luminosité appropriées.
Qualité vidéo Définir le niveau de qualité des vidéos.
Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran
d’aperçu.
Enregistré
comme retourné
Configurer le caméscope de manière à ce qu’il
fasse automatiquement pivoter l’image quand
vous enregistrez une vidéo avec l’objectif avant.
Stockage Sélectionner un emplacement de stockage
où stocker les vidéos enregistrées.
Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des
prises de vue.Divertissements
67
› Modifier les icônes de raccourcis
Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des raccourcis vers les options
le plus fréquemment utilisées.
1
Depuis l’aperçu, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier les raccourcis
ou sur →Modifier les raccourcis.
2
Appuyez de manière prolongée sur une icône de la liste des
options, puis faites la glisser dans la zone des raccourcis.
Pour supprimer des raccourcis, appuyez de manière prolongée
sur une icône et faites-la glisser dans la liste des options.
3
Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’aperçu.
Vidéos
Découvrez comment utiliser le lecteur vidéo pour visionner toutes
sortes de vidéos. Le lecteur vidéo est compatible avec les formats
de fichiers suivants: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv, WebM (Codec:
MPEG4, H.264, H.263, Sorenson Spark, VC-1, DivX®, DivX®
3.11,
WMV7/8, VP8).
● En fonction de la version logicielle du téléphone, certains
formats ne sont pas compatibles.
●
Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier
si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire
disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Vidéos.
2 Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire.
3 Les icônes suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture:
Icône Fonction
Changer le format de l’écran vidéo.
Lire la vidéo sur d’autres appareils DLNA.
Revenir au fichier précédent. Effectuer un
retour rapide dans le fichier (en maintenant la
touche enfoncée).Divertissements
68
Icône Fonction
Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre,
appuyez sur .
Passer au fichier suivant. Effectuer une avance
rapide dans le fichier (en maintenant la touche
enfoncée).
Activer le son Surround 5.1 lorsqu’un kit piéton
est branché.
Régler le volume.
Galerie
Découvrez comment visionner les photos et regarder les vidéos
enregistrées dans la mémoire du téléphone et sur une carte
mémoire.
›
Formats de fichiers compatibles
Type Format
Image bmp, gif, jpg, png
Vidéo
3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv, WebM (Codec:
MPEG4, H.264, H.263, Sorenson Spark, VC-1, DivX®,
DivX®
3.11, WMV7/8, VP8).
● Évitez de verrouiller l’écran du téléphone pendant que
vous visionnez une vidéo DivX à la demande. Chaque fois
que vous verrouillez l’écran pendant la lecture d’une vidéo
DivX à la demande, le nombre de locations disponibles
diminue.
● En fonction de la version logicielle du téléphone, certains
formats ne sont pas compatibles.
●
Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier
si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire
disponible. Divertissements
69
›Afficher une photo
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Galerie.
2
Choisissez un dossier.
3
Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur ou en
haut à droite de l’écran.
4 Sélectionnez une photo (sans icône de lecture).
En mode affichage d’une photo, les options suivantes sont
disponibles:
● Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de
photos.
● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux
doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour effectuer un
zoom arrière).
Si vous avez activé les mouvements d’inclinaison, vous
pouvez effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière en maintenant
la pression sur deux points de l'écran, puis en inclinant
l’appareil d’avant en arrière.
● Pour envoyer la photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur
Envoyer via.
● Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur Supprimer.
● Pour partager la photo avec d’autres personnes via AllShare ou
des sites Web communautaires, appuyez sur [ ] →Partager
via.
● Pour définir la photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’attribuer à un
correspondant en tant qu’image d’ID appelant, appuyez sur
[ ] →Définir comme.
● Pour utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires avec la photo,
appuyez sur [ ] →Plus, puis utilisez les options suivantes:
- Copier: copier un fichier photo.
- Imprimer: imprimer la photo à l’aide d’une connexion WiFi ou USB. Votre appareil est compatible uniquement avec
certaines imprimantes Samsung.
- Modifier: modifier la photo. ►p.70
- Rogner: redimensionner la photo.Divertissements
70
- Mouvement: accéder aux paramètres servant à contrôler la
reconnaissance de mouvements sur votre appareil.
- Rotation à gauche: faire pivoter la photo dans le sens inverse
des aiguilles d’une montre.
- Rotation à droite: faire pivoter la photo dans le sens des
aiguilles d’une montre.
- Diaporama: démarrer un diaporama en utilisant les photos
enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné.
- Renommer: renommer la photo.
- Détails : afficher les détails de la photo.
›
Lire une vidéo
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Galerie.
2 Sélectionnez une vidéo (avec l’icône ).
3
Pour contrôler la lecture, servez-vous des touches virtuelles.
►p.67
Editeur de photos
Vous pouvez retoucher des photos et appliquer plusieurs effets.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Editeur de photos.
2
Appuyez sur Sélectionner image→ une image.
Pour prendre une nouvelle photo, appuyez sur Capturer une
image.
3
Appuyez sur →Nouvelle sélection→OK.
● Pour redimensionner la bordure de sélection, appuyez
sur →Ajouter à la sélection ou Supprimer de la
sélection.
● Pour inverser la sélection, appuyez sur →Inverser la
sélection.
● Pour modifier le format de la sélection, appuyez sur .Divertissements
71
● Pour faire pivoter ou retourner l’image, appuyez sur .
● Pour rogner l’image, appuyez sur .
● Pour annuler ou répéter votre dernière action, appuyez sur
ou .
4 Faites glisser votre doigt sur la zone à sélectionner.
5
Appuyez sur pour appliquer un effet de couleur ou
appuyez sur pour appliquer un effet de filtre.
Pour utiliser d’autres outils tels que la copie et la distorsion,
appuyez sur .
6 Selectionnez une variation de l’effet à appliquer.
7
Ajustez l’image comme vous le souhaitez (si nécessaire), puis
appuyez sur OK.
8 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Sauveg.
9 Saisissez un nom pour l’image, puis appuyez sur OK.
Créateur de vidéo
Vous pouvez éditer des vidéos et appliquer plusieurs effets. Le
créateur de vidéos prend en charge les résolutions vidéo et les
codecs suivants:
Type Format
Résolutions 176x144, 320x240, 640x480, 720x480,
1280x720
Codecs H.264, H.263, MPEG4
Selon les résolutions vidéo et les codecs, il est possible que
certains fichiers vidéo de la Galerie ne puissent pas être lus.
›
Créer une vidéo
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Créateur de vidéo.
2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode
paysage.Divertissements
72
3
Appuyez sur Nouveau projet.
4 Sélectionnez un thème et appuyez sur Appliquer.
5 Sélectionnez l’icône appropriée sur le panneau gauche de
l’écran pour ajouter des fichiers multimédia.
6
Maintenez votre doigt sur un fichier, puis faites-le glisser vers le
panneau situé au bas de l’écran et appuyez sur OK.
● Pour ajouter d’autres fichiers, répétez l’étape 6.
● Pour sélectionner la durée d’affichage d’une image, faites
glisser l’image vers la ligne rouge et sélectionnez l’icône de
durée sur l’écran d’aperçu.
● Pour supprimer des images ou des vidéos, maintenez votre
doigt sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers la corbeille.
● Pour déplacer des images ou des vidéos, maintenez votre
doigt sur un élément et faites-le glisser vers un nouvel
emplacement.
7
Appuyez sur et ajoutez un effet de transition entre les
images ou les vidéos.
8 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Export film.
9 Sélectionnez une option de résolution →Oui.
›
Couper un segment de vidéo
1 Lancez le créateur de vidéos et ajoutez des fichiers multimédia.
2
Appuyez sur .
3 Faites glisser une image ou une vidéo vers la ligne rouge.
4
Déplacez le crochet de départ vers le point où vous souhaitez
commencer la nouvelle vidéo.
5
Déplacez le crochet de fin vers le point où vous souhaitez
terminer la nouvelle vidéo.
6 Enregistrez la vidéo éditée.Divertissements
73
›Diviser une vidéo
1 Lancez le créateur de vidéos et ajoutez des fichiers multimédia.
2
Appuyez sur .
3 Faites glisser une image ou une vidéo vers la ligne rouge.
4
Déplacez le point où vous souhaitez diviser le fichier en deux
parties et appuyez sur .
5 Enregistrez la vidéo éditée.
›Appliquer un effet à une vidéo
1 Lancez le créateur de vidéos et ajoutez des fichiers multimédia.
2
Appuyez sur .
3 Faites glisser une image ou une vidéo vers la ligne rouge.
4 Sélectionnez une option d’effet.
5 Enregistrez la vidéo éditée.
Lecteur MP3
Découvrez comment écouter vos morceaux de musique favoris à
tout moment grâce au lecteur MP3. Le lecteur MP3 est compatible
avec les formats de fichiers suivants: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, asf,
wma, ogg, oga, aac, flac.
● En fonction de la version logicielle du téléphone, certains
formats ne sont pas compatibles.
●
Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier
si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire
disponible. Divertissements
74
›Ajouter des fichiers audio dans le téléphone
Commencez par transférer des fichiers dans votre téléphone ou
dans une carte mémoire:
● Téléchargez sur le Web. ►p.87
● Téléchargez depuis un ordinateur à l’aide du logiciel Samsung
Kies. ►p.111
● Recevez des fichiers via Bluetooth. ►p.101
● Synchronisez avec Windows Media Player11. ►p.111
● Copiez des fichiers dans une carte mémoire. ►p.112
›
Écouter de la musique
Après avoir transféré des fichiers audio dans votre téléphone ou
sur une carte mémoire:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Lecteur MP3.
2
Choisissez une catégorie de musique.
3 Sélectionnez un fichier audio.
4 Les icônes suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture:
Icône Fonction
Régler le volume.
Activer le son Surround 5.1 lorsqu’un kit piéton est
branché.
Activer le mode Aléatoire.
Modifier le mode de répétition (désactivé, répéter la
lecture d’un seul ou de tous les fichiers).
Redémarrer la lecture; Revenir au fichier précédent
(appuyer dans les 3secondes). Effectuer un
retour rapide dans le fichier (maintenir la touche
enfoncée).
Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre, appuyez
sur .
1
1Divertissements
75
Icône Fonction
Passer au fichier suivant. Effectuer une avance rapide
dans le fichier (en maintenant la touche enfoncée).
1. Ces icônes s’affichent uniquement lorsque vous appuyez sur
l’écran du lecteur.
›
Créer une liste de lecture
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Lecteur MP3.
2
Appuyez sur Listes de lecture.
3
Appuyez sur [ ] →Créer.
4 Saisissez le titre de votre nouvelle liste de lecture, puis appuyez
sur Enregistrer.
5
Appuyez sur Ajouter une musique.
6 Sélectionnez les fichiers que vous souhaitez ajouter et appuyez
sur Ajouter.
Pendant la lecture, vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers à une liste de
lecture en appuyant sur [ ] →Ajouter à liste de lecture.
›Ajouter des morceaux à la liste rapide
Vous pouvez ajouter des morceaux à la liste rapide et les
enregistrer en tant que liste de lecture. Pendant la lecture, appuyez
sur [ ] →Ajouter à liste rapide pour ajouter le morceau en
cours de lecture à la liste rapide.
Pour accéder à la liste rapide, depuis l’écran principal du lecteur
de musique, appuyez sur Listes de lecture→Liste rapide. Pour
enregistrer la liste rapide sous forme de liste de lecture, appuyez
sur [ ] →Enregistrer comme liste de lecture.Divertissements
76
›
Personnaliser les paramètres du lecteur MP3
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Lecteur MP3.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.
3
Pour personnaliser votre lecteur MP3, définissez les paramètres
suivants:
Paramètre Fonction
Egaliseur Sélectionner un type d’égaliseur par défaut.
Effets sonores Sélectionner un effet sonore.
Menu musique Sélectionner les catégories de musique à
afficher sur l’écran de l’audiothèque.
Affichage Afficher une image animée pendant l’écoute.
Paroles Afficher les paroles pendant la lecture, si
disponibles.
Désactiv. auto
MP3
Configurer le lecteur MP3 pour qu’il s’éteigne
automatiquement passé un certain délai.
Radio FM
Découvrez comment écouter de la musique et les actualités en
utilisant la radio FM. Pour écouter la radio FM, vous devez brancher
un casque ou des écouteurs qui font office d’antenne radio.
›
Écouter la radio FM
1
Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil.
2
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Radio FM.
La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les
stations disponibles.
Lorsque vous utilisez la radio FM pour la première fois,
l’appareil lance une recherche automatique des stations.Divertissements
77
3 Sélectionnez la station de radio désirée dans la liste, puis
appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM.
4 Les touches suivantes permettent de contrôler la radio FM:
1 4
2 2
3
5
Numéro Fonction
1 Allumer ou éteindre la radio FM.
2 Rechercher une station de radio disponible.
3 Ajouter la station de radio en cours d’écoute à
la liste des favoris.
4 Régler le volume.
5 Ajuster la fréquence.
›
Enregistrer automatiquement une station de
radio
1
Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil.
2
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Radio FM.
3
Appuyez sur [ ] →Analyser→ une option de recherche.
La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les
stations disponibles.
4 Sélectionnez la station de radio désirée dans la liste, puis
appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM.Divertissements
78
›Ajouter une station à la liste des favoris
1
Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil.
2
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Radio FM.
3
Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur .
4 Sélectionnez la station de radio désirée.
5
Pour ajouter la station à la liste des favoris, appuyez sur .
›
Personnaliser les paramètres de la radio FM
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Radio FM.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.
3
Pour personnaliser votre radio FM, définissez les paramètres
suivants:
Paramètre Fonction
Lecture en
arrière-plan
Indiquer si vous souhaitez écouter la radio
FM en arrière-plan lorsque vous utilisez
d’autres applications. Si cette fonction est
active, vous pouvez contrôler la radio FM
depuis le volet des raccourcis.
Nom de la
station
Indiquer si le nom de la station doit
s’afficher sur l’écran de la radio FM. Ces
noms ne sont disponibles que pour les
stations de radio qui les fournissent.
Fréquence
alternative
Indiquer si la radio FM doit tenter de
changer de fréquence lorsque le signal
d’une station est faible.
Désactiv. auto
radio
Régler la radio FM pour qu’elle s’éteigne
automatiquement passé un certain délai.Informations personnelles
79
Informations personnelles
Contacts
Découvrez comment créer et gérer la liste de vos contacts
personnels ou professionnels. Pour tous vos contacts, vous pouvez
enregistrer des noms, des numéros de téléphone mobile ou fixe,
des adresses e-mail, des dates d’anniversaire et plus encore.
›Ajouter un nouveau contact
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2
Appuyez sur .
3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire.
Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte
auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact.
4 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact.
5
Appuyez sur pour ajouter ce contact dans la mémoire
sélectionnée.
Vous pouvez également créer un contact à partir de l’écran de
numérotation.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Téléphone→Clavier.
2 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone.
3
Appuyez sur Ajouter→Créer un contact.
4 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire.
Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte
auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact.
5 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact.
6
Appuyez sur pour ajouter ce contact dans la mémoire
sélectionnée.Informations personnelles
80
›
Rechercher un contact
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2 Faites défiler la liste de contacts vers le haut ou vers le bas.
Vous pouvez également faire glisser votre doigt à droite de
l’index pour faire défiler rapidement la liste.
3 Sélectionnez un contact.
Une fois le contact localisé, vous pouvez utiliser les options
suivantes:
● Pour appeler le contact, appuyez sur ou sur .
● Pour envoyer un message, appuyez sur .
● Pour modifier les coordonnées du contact, appuyez sur .
›Définir un numéro d’appel abrégé
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Numérotation rapide.
3 Sélectionnez un numéro d’emplacement → un contact.
4 Sélectionnez un numéro de téléphone (si nécessaire).
Depuis l’écran de numérotation, vous pouvez composer
rapidement ce numéro en maintenant votre doigt appuyé
sur le chiffre associé.
›
Créer une carte de visite
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2
Appuyez sur Configurer mon profil.
3 Saisissez vos coordonnées personnelles.
4
Appuyez sur .
Vous pouvez envoyer votre carte de visite en la joignant à
un message ou à un e-mail, ou en la transférant à l’aide de la
fonction sans fil Bluetooth.Informations personnelles
81
›
Créer un groupe de contacts
En créant des groupes de contacts, vous pouvez gérer plusieurs
contacts simultanément et envoyer des messages ou des e-mails à
tous les membres d’un groupe. Commencez par créer un groupe.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts→Groupes.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Nouveau.
3 Saisissez le nom du groupe, puis sélectionnez la sonnerie à
associer au groupe.
4
Appuyez sur Ajouter membre, sélectionnez les contacts à
ajouter au groupe et appuyez sur .
5
Appuyez sur .
›Importer ou exporter des contacts depuis et vers
une carte SIM
Pour copier des contacts à partir de la carte SIM ou USIM dans le
téléphone:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Importer depuis
la carte SIM.
3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire.
Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte
auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact.
4 Sélectionnez les contacts à copier et appuyez sur .Informations personnelles
82
Pour copier des contacts à partir du téléphone sur la carte SIM ou
USIM:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Exporter vers la
carte SIM.
3 Sélectionnez les contacts à copier et appuyez sur →OK.
›Importer ou exporter des contacts depuis et vers
une carte SD
Vous pouvez importer ou exporter des fichiers (au format vcf)
depuis et vers une carte mémoire ou le stockage USB de votre
appareil.
Importer des contacts
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Importer depuis
stockage USB or Importer depuis la carte SD.
3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire.
Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte
auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact.
4
Choisissez entre importer un seul contact, plusieurs contacts
ou l’ensemble des contacts, puis appuyez sur OK.
5 Sélectionnez les contacts à importer, puis appuyez sur OK.
Exporter des contacts
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Contacts.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Exporter vers le
stockage USB or Exporter vers la carte SD.
3
Appuyez sur OK pour confirmer.Informations personnelles
83
Calendrier
Découvrez comment créer et gérer les événements quotidiens,
hebdomadaires ou mensuels et définir des alarmes pour vous
souvenir des événements importants.
›
Créer des événements
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Calendrier.
2
Appuyez sur Appuyer pour créer un événement ou sur [ ]
→Créer.
3 Si un message d'alerte à propos de la synchronisation du
calendrier apparaît, appuyez sur OK.
4 Saisissez les détails de l’événement.
5
Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
›Afficher des événements
Pour modifier l’affichage du calendrier:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Calendrier.
2 Sélectionnez un mode d’affichage en haut de l’écran du calendrier.
Pour afficher les événements d’une date spécifique :
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Calendrier.
2 Sélectionnez une date dans le calendrier. En affichage mensuel,
les dates comportant des événements programmés sont
représentées par un petit carré.
● Pour passer directement à une certaine date en la saisissant
manuellement, appuyez sur [ ] →Accés, saisissez la date en
appuyant sur + ou -, puis sur Régler.
● Pour sélectionner la date du jour, appuyez sur [ ] →Aujourd’hui.
3 Sélectionnez un événement pour en afficher les détails.
Vous pouvez envoyer l’évènement à d’autres personnes en
appuyant sur [ ] →Envoyer via→ une option.Informations personnelles
84
›
Répéter l’alarme d’un événement
Si vous définissez une alarme pour un événement, l’icône de
l’alarme s’affichera à l’heure spécifiée.
1
Ouvrez le volet de raccourcis situé en haut de l’écran.
2 Sélectionnez la notification d’événement.
3 Sélectionnez un événement pour en afficher les détails.
Pour répéter l’alarme de l’événement, cochez la case de
l’événement et appuyez sur Répéter.
Tâche
Découvrez comment créer une liste de tâches et régler les alarmes
pour vous rappeler les tâches importantes ou définir une priorité.
›
Créer une tâche
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Tâche.
2
Appuyez sur Créer tâche ou sur [ ] →Créer tâche pour
créer une tâche.
3 Saisissez les détails de la tâche.
4
Appuyez sur Sauveg.
›Afficher une tâche
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Tâche.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Trier par→ une option pour trier les
tâches.
3 Sélectionnez une tâche pour en afficher les détails.
Pour les tâches associées à un délai d’exécution, vous pouvez
indiquer le statut « terminé» en sélectionnant la case à cocher
correspondante.Informations personnelles
85
Mémo
Découvrez comment enregistrer une information importante pour
la consulter ultérieurement.
›
Créer un mémo
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Mémo.
2 Si un mémo a déjà été enregistré, appuyez sur Créer un mémo
ou sur [ ] →Créer pour créer un mémo.
3 Saisissez le texte de votre mémo et appuyez sur Enreg.
›Afficher des mémos
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Mémo.
2
Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur [ ] →Recherche ou
maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée (si nécessaire).
3 Sélectionnez un mémo pour en afficher les détails.
● Pour modifier le mémo, appuyez sur .
● Pour utiliser d'autres fonctions avec un mémo, appuyez sur
.
Option Fonction
Supprimer le mémo.
Changer la couleur du mémo.
Verrouiller le mémo.
Imprimer le mémo à l’aide d’une connexion
Wi-Fi ou USB. Votre appareil est compatible
uniquement avec certaines imprimantes
Samsung.
Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes en
appuyant sur [ ] →Envoyer→ une option.Informations personnelles
86
Mémo vocal
Découvrez comment utiliser le dictaphone de votre téléphone.
›
Enregistrer un mémo vocal
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Mémo vocal.
2
Appuyez sur Enreg. pour commencer à enregistrer.
3
Parlez dans le microphone.
4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Arrêter.
Le mémo est enregistré automatiquement.
5
Pour enregistrer d’autres mémos vocaux, appuyez de nouveau
sur Enreg.
›
Écouter un mémo vocal
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Mémo vocal.
2
Appuyez sur Liste.
3 Sélectionnez un mémo vocal à lire.
Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo vocal en appuyant sur [ ]
→Partager.Web
87
Web
Les services Web nécessitent une connexion de données. Pour
choisir le meilleur forfait de connexion, contactez votre opérateur.
Internet
Découvrez comment accéder à des pages Web et enregistrer des
favoris.
● L’accès au Web et le téléchargement de contenu
multimédia peuvent entraîner des frais supplémentaires.
Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur.
● La disponibilité de certaines icônes dépend de votre zone
géographique.
›
Surfer sur le Web
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Internet pour ouvrir la page d’accueil.
Pour accéder à une page Web spécifique, appuyez sur le
champ de saisie de l’adresse (URL), saisissez l’adresse de la page
Web, puis appuyez sur Aller à.
2
Utilisez les touches suivantes pour naviguer dans les pages
Web:
1
2
3
Numéro Fonction
1 Saisir l’adresse de la page Web à afficher.
2 Ouvrir la liste des favoris enregistrés, des pages
enregistrées et de l’historique Internet récent.
3 Afficher les miniatures des fenêtres de
navigation actives.Web
88
En cours de navigation sur une page Web, utilisez les options suivantes:
● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux
doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour effectuer un
zoom arrière).
Si vous avez activé les mouvements d’inclinaison, vous
pouvez effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière en maintenant
la pression sur deux points de l'écran, puis en inclinant
l’appareil d’avant en arrière.
● Pour actualiser la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] →Actualiser.
● Pour aller à la page suivante de l’historique, appuyez sur [ ] →
Page suivante.
● Pour ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur [ ] →Nouvelle
fenêtre.
● Pour ouvrir une fenêtre sans enregistrer vos données de
navigation, appuyez sur [ ] →Nouv. fen. priv.
● Pour ajouter la page aux favoris, appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter un
favori.
● Pour envoyer l’adresse de la page Web à d’autres personnes,
appuyez sur [ ] →Partager page.
● Pour rechercher du texte sur la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] →
Rech. sur page.
● Pour passer à l’affichage du bureau, appuyez sur [ ] →
Affichage bureau.
● Pour enregistrer la page Web en cours afin de la lire
ultérieurement en ligne, appuyez sur [ ] →Enregistrer pour
la lecture hors connexion. Vous pouvez afficher les pages
enregistrées en appuyant sur →Pages enreg.
● Pour régler les paramètres de luminosité et de couleur de l’écran,
appuyez sur [ ] →Luminosité/Couleur.
● Pour afficher les détails de la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] →
Info page.
● Pour afficher l’historique de téléchargement, appuyez sur [ ]
→Téléchargements.
● Pour imprimer la page Web ou l’écran en cours sur une
imprimante reliée, appuyez sur [ ] →Imprimer. Votre appareil
est compatible uniquement avec les imprimantes Samsung.
● Pour personnaliser les paramètres du navigateur, appuyez sur
[ ] →Paramètres.Web
89
›
Rechercher des informations oralement
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Internet.
2
Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’URL.
3
Appuyez sur et prononcez un mot-clé dans le microphone
de l’appareil.
L’appareil recherche les informations et les pages Web
correspondant au mot-clé.
›
Créer des favoris de pages Web
Vous pouvez ajouter un favori manuellement si vous connaissez
l’adresse de sa page Web. Pour ajouter un favori :
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Internet.
2
Appuyez sur →Favoris.
3
Appuyez sur [ ] →Dernière page favorite consultée.
Pour ajouter la page Web que vous étiez en train de consulter
aux favoris, passez à l’étape5.
4 Saisissez le titre d’une page Web et son adresse (URL).
5
Appuyez sur .
Dans la liste des favoris, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un
favori et utilisez les options suivantes:
● Pour ouvrir la page Web dans la fenêtre affichée, appuyez sur
Ouvrir.
● Pour ouvrir la page Web dans une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur
Ouvrir nouvelle fenêtre.
● Pour modifier les détails du favori, appuyez sur Modifier le
favori.
● Pour ajouter le raccourci du favori sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez
sur Ajouter raccourci à l'écran d'accueil.
● Pour envoyer l’adresse de la page Web à d’autres personnes,
appuyez sur Partager le lien.Web
90
● Pour copier l’adresse de la page Web, appuyez sur Copier l'URL
du lien.
● Pour supprimer le favori, appuyez sur Supprimer le favori.
● Pour utiliser la page Web en tant que page d’accueil du
navigateur, appuyez sur Définir comme page d’accueil.
›Accéder à l’historique récent
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Internet.
2
Appuyez sur →Historique.
3 Sélectionnez une page Web à ouvrir.
Vous pouvez ajouter une page Web à la liste des favoris en
appuyant sur .
Maps
Découvrez comment utiliser Google Maps
™ pour rechercher votre
position, parcourir la carte en ligne pour afficher une rue, une ville
ou un pays et calculer un itinéraire.
● Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
● Pour trouver votre position et effectuer une recherche
sur la carte, vous devez activer les services de localisation.
►p.110
›
Rechercher un lieu spécifique
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Maps .
2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez
sur OK.
La carte affiche votre position actuelle.
3
Appuyez sur .
Pour localiser un endroit à proximité, appuyez sur .Web
91
4 Saisissez un mot clé pour la localisation, puis appuyez sur .
Pour effectuer une recherche de localisation oralement,
appuyez sur .
5 Sélectionnez le lieu dont vous voulez afficher les détails.
● Pour afficher une liste de l’ensemble des résultats de votre
recherche, appuyez sur LISTE DES RÉSULTATS.
● Pour afficher votre position actuelle, appuyez sur .
● Pour basculer sur le mode Boussole qui permet de changer
l’orientation de la carte dès que vous déplacez l’appareil,
appuyez sur .
● Pour ajouter une étoile de favori au lieu, appuyez sur le nom
du lieu → .
›
Calculer un itinéraire vers une destination
spécifique
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Maps .
2
Appuyez sur .
3 Saisissez les adresses du lieu de départ et du lieu d’arrivée.
Pour saisir une adresse à partir de votre liste de contacts ou de
vos lieux favoris ou pour indiquer un lieu sur la carte, appuyez
sur →Contacts, Point sur la carte ou Mes adresses.
4 Sélectionnez un mode de déplacement (voiture, bus ou à pied)
et appuyez sur ITINÉRAIRE.
En fonction du mode de déplacement sélectionné, il est
possible que plusieurs itinéraires s’affichent.
5 Sélectionnez un itinéraire pour afficher les détails de votre
déplacement, puis appuyez sur PLAN pour afficher l’itinéraire
sur la carte.
Pour utiliser la navigation à guidage vocal, appuyez sur .
6
Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher uniquement une
partie de l’itinéraire.
7 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Effacer
résultats.Web
92
Latitude
Découvrez comment partager votre position avec vos amis et
afficher leur position à l’aide de Google Latitude
™.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Latitude.
Le téléphone se connecte automatiquement à Google
Latitude.
2
Appuyez sur →Sélectionner dans mes contacts ou
Ajouter en indiquant l'adresse e-mail.
3 Sélectionnez un ami à ajouter ou saisissez une adresse e-mail,
puis appuyez sur Ajouter des amis.
4
Appuyez sur Oui.
Lorsque votre ami accepte votre invitation, vous pouvez
partager des positions.
5
Appuyez sur PLAN.
La position de vos amis est marquée avec leur photo sur la
carte.
Adresses
Découvrez comment rechercher un lieu à proximité de votre position.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Adresses.
2
Choisissez une catégorie.
Le téléphone recherche des lieux à proximité de votre position
actuelle reliés à la catégorie sélectionnée.
3 Sélectionnez le nom d’un lieu pour en afficher les détails.
4
Pour afficher le lieu sur une carte, appuyez sur Plan.
Pour afficher l’itinéraire jusqu’à la destination, appuyez sur
Itinéraire.
Pour afficher le numéro de téléphone du lieu, appuyez sur
Appel.Web
93
Navigation
Découvrez comment utiliser le système de navigation GPS pour
rechercher et afficher votre destination avec des indications
vocales.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Navigation.
2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez
sur Accepter.
3 Saisissez votre destination en utilisant l’une des méthodes
suivantes:
● Prononcer le nom de votre destination en disant par
exemple «3 rue Molière, Paris ».
● Saisir la destination à l’aide du clavier virtuel.
● Sélectionner votre destination à partir des adresses de vos
contacts.
● Sélectionner votre destination à partir de la liste de vos lieux
favoris.
Recherche
Vous pouvez rechercher des données enregistrées sur votre
téléphone ou sur le Web.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Recherche.
2 Saisissez un mot ou quelques lettres d’un mot à rechercher.
3 Sélectionnez les données auxquelles vous souhaitez accéder.Web
94
YouTube
Découvrez comment visionner et partager des vidéos via YouTube.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
›
Visionner des vidéos
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur YouTube.
2 Sélectionnez une vidéo dans la liste.
3 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode
paysage.
4
Contrôlez la lecture à l’aide des icônes affichées à l’écran.
›
Partager des vidéos
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur YouTube.
2 Sélectionnez une vidéo.
3
Appuyez sur → une option.
› Mettre des vidéos en ligne
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur YouTube.
2
Pour allumer le caméscope, appuyez sur .
3
Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages
nécessaires.
4
Appuyez sur pour commencer à enregistrer.
5
Appuyez sur pour arrêter l’enregistrement.
6
Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour mettre en ligne la vidéo que
vous venez d’enregistrer.Web
95
7 Sélectionnez votre compte Google s’il est relié à YouTube. Vous
pouvez aussi sélectionner Ajouter un compte et configurer un
compte pour ouvrir une session dans YouTube.
Si vous téléchargez une vidéo pour la première fois,
sélectionnez un type de réseau pour le chargement de la
vidéo.
8 Saisissez les détails du chargement et appuyez sur Envoyer.
Play Store
Vous pouvez télécharger des jeux, des sonneries ou d’autres
applications à partir de Google Play.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Play Store.
2 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur le téléphone. ► p. 38
Actualités et météo
Découvrez comment afficher la météo et lire les actualités à la une
ainsi que d’autres articles.
›Afficher la météo
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Actualités et météo.
2
Appuyez sur MÉTÉO en haut de l’écran.
Votre téléphone recherche votre position actuelle et affiche la
météo correspondante.
Vous pouvez modifier la position pour afficher la météo
dans une autre région. Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres→
Paramètres de la météo et décochez la case Utiliser ma
position. Sélectionnez ensuite sur un emplacement dans
Définir un lieu.Web
96
›
Lire les articles de journaux
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Actualités et météo.
2 Faites défiler vers la gauche pour sélectionner un sujet
d’actualité en haut de l’écran.
3 Sélectionnez un article.
Pour ajouter des sujets d’actualité, appuyez sur [ ] →
Paramètres→Paramètres de l’actualité→Sélectionner
des sujets.
App Shop
Vous pouvez rechercher et télécharger des applications depuis
Orange App Shop.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur App Shop.
2 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur le téléphone.
Sauvegarde
Vous pouvez sauvegarder vos contacts sur votre compte Orange et
les restaurer si nécessaire.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Sauvegarde.
2 Synchronisez vos contacts entre ceux de l’appareil et ceux de
votre compte Orange.
Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur.Web
97
Jeux
Vous pouvez télécharger des jeux depuis Orange App Shop.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Jeux.
2 Localisez un jeu et téléchargez-le sur l’appareil.
Maps
Vous pouvez rechercher une rue ou une adresse, localiser votre
position et obtenir un itinéraire vers une destination définie.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Maps .
2
Retrouvez une rue ou une adresse sur la carte, ou obtenez des
informations de trafic ou locales.
Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur.
Cinéday
Vous pouvez obtenir des réductions sur vos tickets de cinéma,
accédez gratuitement à des bandes annonces, consulter les
programmes, et lire les actualités et les interviews les plus récentes.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez
sur Cinéday.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.Web
98
Sonneries
Vous pouvez télécharger des sonneries et des musiques depuis
Orange App Shop.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Sonneries.
2 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur le téléphone.
Météo
Vous pouvez obtenir les toutes dernières mises à jour météo pour
votre ville ou une autre région publiées par Orange Weather.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez
sur Météo.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.
Orange et moi
Vous pouvez rapidement vérifier le solde de votre compte, vous
informer sur les promotions offertes par les partenaires Orange,
découvrir de nouvelles applications Orange et obtenir de l’aide.
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez
sur Orange et moi.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.Connectivité
99
Connectivité
Bluetooth
Bluetooth est une technologie de communication sans fil à courte
portée, capable d’échanger des informations dans un rayon de
10mètres sans nécessiter de connexion matérielle.
Il est inutile d’aligner les appareils pour envoyer des données via
Bluetooth. Si les appareils sont à portée l’un de l’autre, vous pouvez
échanger des informations, même si les deux appareils ne sont pas
dans la même pièce.
● Samsung n’est pas responsable de la perte, de
l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées
ou reçues via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth.
●
Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de
confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou
de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les
deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action.
● Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec
certains autres, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés
ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG.
›Activer la fonction sans fil Bluetooth
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez
sur Paramètres, puis sur l’option OFF près du menu Bluetooth. Connectivité
100
›
Rechercher d’autres appareils Bluetooth et s’y
connecter
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Bluetooth→Recherche des
périphériques.
2 Sélectionnez un appareil.
3 Saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth de l’appareil ou celui de l’autre
appareil si celui-ci en possède un, puis appuyez sur OK. Sinon,
appuyez sur Accepter pour que votre code PIN corresponde à
celui de l’autre appareil.
Lorsque l’utilisateur de l’autre appareil saisit le même code PIN
ou accepte la connexion, la connexion entre les deux appareils
est effective. Lorsque la connexion est établie avec succès,
l’appareil recherche automatiquement les services disponibles.
Il est possible que certains appareils, notamment les kits
piéton et les kits mains-libres pour voiture, possèdent un
code PIN Bluetooth fixe, par exemple 0000. Si tel est le cas,
vous devez saisir ce code.
›
Envoyer des données par la fonction sans fil
Bluetooth
1 Sélectionnez un fichier ou un élément, par exemple un contact,
un événement, un mémo ou un fichier multimédia à partir de
l'application correspondante ou à partir de Mes fichiers.
2 Sélectionnez une option d’envoi de données via Bluetooth.
La méthode de sélection d’une option peut varier selon le
type de données.
3
Recherchez un appareil Bluetooth à associer au vôtre.Connectivité
101
›
Recevoir des données par la fonction sans fil
Bluetooth
1
Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur Paramètres→
Bluetooth, puis cochez la case correspondant à votre appareil.
Pour sélectionner la durée de visibilité de votre appareil,
appuyez sur [ ] →Expiration de la visibilité.
2 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth et
appuyez sur OK. Sinon, appuyez sur Accepter pour que votre
code PIN corresponde à celui de l’autre appareil.
3
Appuyez sur Accepter pour confirmer que vous autorisez la
réception des données provenant de l’autre appareil.
Les données reçues sont enregistrées dans le dossier Bluetooth
du menu Mes fichiers. Si vous recevez un contact, il est
automatiquement enregistré dans le répertoire.
Wi-Fi
Découvrez comment exploiter les capacités de réseau sans fil de
votre téléphone pour vous connecter à tout réseau local sans fil
(Wi-Fi) compatible avec la norme IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n.
Vous pouvez vous connecter à Internet ou à d’autres appareils
réseau dès qu’un point d’accès sans fil est disponible.
Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée. Il est
conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au
sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner
sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur.Connectivité
102
›Activer la fonction Wi-Fi
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez
sur Paramètres, puis sur l’option OFF près du menu Wi-Fi.
Le réseau Wi-Fi activé et fonctionnant en arrière-plan
consomme de l’énergie. Pour économiser votre batterie,
activez la fonction Wi-Fi seulement lorsque vous en avez
besoin.
›
Rechercher un réseau Wi-Fi et s’y connecter
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi.
Le téléphone recherche automatiquement les réseaux Wi-Fi
disponibles.
2 Sélectionnez un réseau.
3 Saisissez un mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau (si
nécessaire).
4
Appuyez sur Connexion.
›Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi manuellement
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi→Ajouter un réseau.
2 Saisissez le SSID du réseau et choisissez le type de sécurité.
3
Définissez les paramètres de sécurité en fonction du type de
sécurité choisi.
4
Appuyez sur Enreg.Connectivité
103
›
Se connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi avec WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
Grâce à WPS, vous pouvez vous connecter à un réseau sécurisé.
Pour vous connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi avec un bouton WPS:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez un réseau indiqué comme étant un réseau
protégé disponible, puis cochez la case Afficher les options
avancées.
3
Appuyez sur le menu déroulant WPS.
4
Appuyez sur Bouton Push→Connexion.
5
Appuyez sur un bouton WPS au niveau du point d’accès dans
un délai de 2minutes.
Pour vous connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi avec un code PIN
WPS:
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez un réseau indiqué comme étant un réseau
protégé disponible, puis cochez la case correspondant au
menu Afficher les options avancées.
3
Appuyez sur le menu déroulant WPS.
4 Sélectionnez PIN du point d'accès ou PIN de ce périphérique
→Connexion.
5
Au niveau du point d’accès, entrez le code PIN, puis appuyez
sur le bouton de démarrage.Connectivité
104
›Définir les paramètres de configuration IP statique
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Wi-Fi.
2 Sélectionnez un réseau, puis cochez la case correspondant au
menu Afficher les options avancées.
3
Appuyez sur le menu déroulant Paramètres IP.
4
Appuyez sur Statique.
5
Modifiez les paramètres IP du point d’accès (adresse IP,
longueur du préfixe réseau, passerelle, DNS, etc.).
6
Appuyez sur Connexion.
Wi-Fi direct
Découvrez comment utiliser la fonction Wi-Fi Direct pour raccorder
deux appareils via un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès.
›
Connecter votre appareil à un autre appareil Wi-Fi
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Wi-Fi Direct.
2
Appuyez sur OFF près du menu Wi-Fi Direct, puis appuyez sur
OK.
3
Appuyez sur Analyser.
4 Sélectionnez un appareil, puis appuyez sur Connexion.
Dès que le propriétaire de l’autre appareil accepte la
connexion, l’appairage est terminé.
5
Pour désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Direct, appuyez sur Terminer
la connexion.Connectivité
105
›
Envoyer des données via Wi-Fi Direct
1 Sélectionnez un fichier ou un élément, par exemple un
mémo, un fichier multimédia ou une adresse Web à partir de
l’application correspondante ou à partir de Mes fichiers.
2 Sélectionnez une option d’envoi de données via un réseau WiFi.
La méthode de sélection d’une option peut varier selon le
type de données.
3
Recherchez et sélectionnez un appareil Wi-Fi.
›
Recevoir des données via Wi-Fi Direct
Lorsque vous recevez des données, ces dernières sont
automatiquement enregistrées sur votre appareil. Les données
reçues sont enregistrées dans le dossier ShareViaWifi du menu
Mes fichiers.
AllShare
Découvrez comment utiliser le service DLNA (Digital Living
Network Alliance) pour partager des fichiers multimédia entre des
appareils compatibles DLNA en utilisant un réseau Wi-Fi.
Vous devez d’abord activer la fonction Wi-Fi et ajouter un profil
Wi-Fi. ►p.102
›
Personnaliser les paramètres DLNA pour partager
des fichiers multimédia
Vous devez activer le partage multimédia pour autoriser d’autres
appareils compatibles DLNA à accéder à vos fichiers multimédia.
Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus sur les appareils
compatibles DLNA, selon le modèle.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur AllShare.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.Connectivité
106
3
Pour personnaliser la fonction DLNA, configurez les paramètres
suivants:
Paramètre Fonction
Nom de
l’appareil
Saisir un nom pour désigner votre appareil
en tant que serveur de médias.
Partager les
vidéos
Activer le partage de vidéos avec d’autres
appareils compatibles DLNA.
Partager les
photos
Activer le partage d’images avec d’autres
appareils compatibles DLNA.
Part. musique Activer le partage de musiques avec
d’autres appareils compatibles DLNA.
Charger
depuis d’autres
périphériques
Indiquer si vous autorisez ou non le
téléchargement à partir d’autres appareils.
Mémoire par
défaut
Sélectionner l’emplacement de la
mémoire par défaut pour enregistrer vos
fichiers multimédia téléchargés.
Sous-titres Configurer votre téléphone pour afficher
des sous-titres.
›
Lire vos fichiers sur un autre appareil compatible
DLNA
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur AllShare.
2
Appuyez sur Mon appareil.
3 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fichiers multimédia et un fichier.
4 Sélectionnez un lecteur: celui qui lira les fichiers multimédia. La
lecture démarre en utilisant le lecteur sélectionné.
5
Pour contrôler la lecture, utilisez les icônes de votre téléphone.
En fonction du réseau et du serveur auquel vous êtes
connecté, il est possible que les fichiers soit mis en mémoire
tampon lors de la lecture.Connectivité
107
›
Lire les fichiers d’un appareil à l’autre
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur AllShare.
2
Appuyez sur App. distant.
Votre appareil recherche automatiquement les autres appareils
compatibles DLNA.
3 Sélectionnez un appareil et définissez-le en tant que serveur
média : celui qui contient les fichiers multimédia.
4 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fichiers multimédia et un fichier.
5 Sélectionnez un lecteur: celui qui lira les fichiers multimédia.
La lecture démarre en utilisant le lecteur sélectionné.
6
Pour contrôler la lecture, utilisez les icônes de votre téléphone.
Partager une connexion de données
Découvrez comment définir votre appareil en tant que modem
ou point d’accès sans fil et comment partager sa connexion de
données avec des PC ou d’autres appareils.
›
Partager la connexion de données de votre
téléphone via une connexion Wi-Fi
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Point d’accès et
modem.
2
Appuyez sur Point d’accès mobile→OK afin d’activer le point
d’accès Wi-Fi.Connectivité
108
3
Appuyez sur Configurer point d’accès afin de personnaliser le
point d’accès Wi-Fi :
Paramètre Fonction
SSID du réseau
Afficher et modifier le nom de votre
appareil indiqué aux périphériques
externes.
Sécurité Sélectionner le type de sécurité.
Mot de passe
Afficher ou modifier la clé réseau afin
d’empêcher l’accès non autorisé au
réseau.
4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enreg.
5
À partir d’un autre appareil, recherchez le nom de votre
téléphone dans la liste des connexions disponibles et
connectez-vous au réseau.
Votre appareil partage la connexion de données disponible sur
l’autre appareil.
›
Partager la connexion de données de votre
appareil via un branchement USB
1
Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à
fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un
ordinateur.
2
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Point d’accès et
modem.
3
Appuyez sur Modem USB pour activer la fonction modem
USB.
Votre téléphone partage sa connexion de données avec votre
ordinateur.
Pour cesser de partager la connexion de données, décochez la
case située à côté de Modem USB.
La méthode de partage de la connexion de données peut
différer en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’ordinateur.Connectivité
109
›
Partager la connexion de données de votre
appareil via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Point d’accès et
modem.
2
Appuyez sur Modem Bluetooth pour activer la fonction
modem correspondante.
3 Sur un autre appareil, recherchez votre appareil et connectezles.
Assurez-vous de bien avoir activé la fonction Bluetooth et le
paramètre de visibilité.
GPS
Votre téléphone est équipé d’un récepteur GPS (Global Positioning
System). Découvrez comment activer les services de localisation.
Pour améliorer la qualité de réception GPS, évitez d’utiliser votre
téléphone dans les conditions suivantes:
● entre des immeubles, dans des tunnels ou des passages
souterrains ou à l’intérieur des bâtiments;
● en cas de mauvaises conditions météorologiques;
● à proximité de champs magnétiques ou de lignes à haute
tension.
Ne touchez et ne couvrez pas la zone de l’antenne interne
avec vos mains ou tout autre objet lorsque vous utilisez les
fonctions GPS.
Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette
fonction ne soit pas disponible.Connectivité
110
›Activer les services de localisation
Pour recevoir des informations relatives à votre position et
effectuer une recherche sur la carte, vous devez activer les services
de localisation.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Services de localisation.
2
Pour activer les services de localisation, définissez les
paramètres suivants:
Paramètre Fonction
Services de
localisation
Google
Configurer le téléphone pour qu’il utilise
les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou mobiles pour
localiser votre position.
Satellites GPS
Configurer le téléphone pour qu’il utilise
les satellites GPS pour localiser votre
position.
Utiliser fonction
Aide à la
localisation
Utiliser les capteurs afin d’améliorer le
positionnement à pied lorsque le signal
GPS ne passe pas. Il peut y avoir des
écarts entre les estimations du capteur et
votre emplacement réel.
Localisation
& recherche
Google
Configurer l’appareil de manière à ce
qu’il utilise votre position actuelle pour la
recherche et d’autres services Google.Connectivité
111
Connexions PC
Découvrez comment connecter votre téléphone à un ordinateur
à l’aide du câble de connexion PC, et cela dans divers modes de
connexion USB. En connectant l’appareil à un ordinateur, vous
pouvez synchroniser des fichiers à l’aide de Windows Media Player,
transférer directement des données depuis et vers votre appareil et
utiliser le logiciel Samsung Kies.
›
Se connecter avec Samsung Kies
Assurez-vous que le logiciel Samsung Kies est bien installé sur
votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez le télécharger à partir du site Web de
Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies).
1
Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à
fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un
ordinateur.
2
Double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre PC pour
lancer Samsung Kies.
3
Copiez des fichiers depuis l’ordinateur vers le téléphone.
Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies.
›
Synchroniser avec Windows Media Player
Assurez-vous que Windows Media Player est bien installé sur votre
ordinateur.
1
Branchez un câble de connexion PC entre le connecteur à
fonctions multiples de votre appareil et un ordinateur sur
lequel est installé Windows Media Player.
Une fois la connexion établie, une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît
sur l’ordinateur.
2
Ouvrez Windows Media Player pour synchroniser les fichiers
audio.
3
Modifiez ou saisissez le nom de votre appareil dans la fenêtre
contextuelle (le cas échéant).
4 Sélectionnez et faites glisser les fichiers audio voulus vers la
liste de synchronisation.
5 Lancez la synchronisation.Connectivité
112
›
Connecter le téléphone en tant que périphérique
de stockage de masse
Vous pouvez connecter votre téléphone à un ordinateur en tant
que disque amovible et accéder à son répertoire de fichiers. Si vous
insérez une carte mémoire, vous pouvez accéder à son répertoire
de fichiers en utilisant le téléphone en tant que lecteur de carte
mémoire.
Le répertoire des fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît en tant
que disque amovible, indépendamment de la mémoire interne.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→Utilitaires USB→
Connecter le stockage au PC.
2
Appuyez sur OK pour confirmer (si nécessaire).
3
Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à
fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un
ordinateur.
4 Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Connecter le
stockage au PC.
5
Appuyez sur OK pour confirmer (si nécessaire).
6
Ouvrez le dossier pour afficher les fichiers.
7
Copiez des fichiers depuis l’ordinateur vers votre appareil.
8
Une fois l’opération terminée, appuyez sur Désactiver le
stockage USB.
Pour déconnecter le téléphone de l’ordinateur, cliquez
sur l’icône de périphérique USB dans la barre des tâches
Windows, puis sur l’option Retirer le périphérique de
stockage de masse en toute sécurité. Débranchez ensuite
le câble de connexion PC. Si vous n’effectuez pas cette
manipulation, vous risquez de perdre les données stockées
sur la carte mémoire ou de l’endommager.Connectivité
113
Connexions VPN
Vous pouvez créer des réseaux virtuels privés (VPN) et vous y
connecter de façon sécurisée via un réseau public, par exemple
Internet.
Votre téléphone doit déjà être configuré avec un accès
Internet. Vous devez modifier les connexions si vous
rencontrez des problèmes d’accès à Internet. Si vous n’êtes
pas certain des informations de connexion à saisir, consultez
votre opérateur.
›
Paramétrer les connexions VPN
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→VPN.
Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez activer la fonction de
verrouillage d’écran.
2
Appuyez sur Ajouter un réseau VPN.
3
Personnalisez le profil de connexion.
La disponibilité des options dépend du type de VPN.
Paramètre Fonction
Nom Saisir un nom pour le serveur VPN.
Type Sélectionnez un type de VPN.
Adresse serveur Saisir l’adresse IP du serveur VPN.
Secret L2TP Paramétrer le téléphone pour utiliser le
mot de passe secret L2TP.
Identifiant IPSec Saisir un nom d’utilisateur.
Clé pré-
partagée IPsec Définir la touche prépartagée.Connectivité
114
Paramètre Fonction
Certificat
utilisateur IPSec
Sélectionner un certificat utilisateur utilisé
par le serveur VPN pour vous identifier.
Vous pouvez importer des certificats à
partir du serveur VPN ou en télécharger à
partir du Web.
Certificat AC
IPSec
Sélectionner une autorité de certification
(CA) utilisée par le serveur VPN pour vous
identifier. Vous pouvez importer des
certificats à partir du serveur VPN ou en
télécharger à partir du Web.
Cryptage PPP
(MPPE)
Utiliser cette option pour crypter des
données avant de les envoyer au serveur
VPN.
Afficher
les options
avancées
Sélectionner cette option pour modifier
les paramètres réseau avancés.
4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enreg.
›
Se connecter à un réseau virtuel privé
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres→Plus...→VPN.
2 Sélectionnez un réseau virtuel privé pour vous y connecter.
3 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe, puis
appuyez Connexion.Outils
115
Outils
Horloge
Découvrez comment régler et contrôler les alarmes et les horloges
mondiales. Vous pouvez également utiliser le chronomètre et
l’horloge de bureau.
›
Créer une nouvelle alarme
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Horloge→Alarme.
2
Appuyez sur Nouvelle alarme ou [ ] →Créer.
3
Définissez les détails de l’alarme.
Cochez la case Alarme intelligente pour activer des sons
naturels simulés avec l’écran d’alarme avant le déclenchement
de l’alarme principale.
4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enregistrer.
›Arrêter une alarme
Lorsque l’alarme sonne:
● Pour arrêter l’alarme, appuyez sur l'icône , puis faites-la glisser
hors du cercle.
● Pour répéter l’alarme après une durée spécifiée, appuyez sur
l'icône , puis faites-la glisser hors du cercle.
›
Supprimer une alarme
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Horloge→Alarme.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Supprimer.
3 Sélectionnez les alarmes à supprimer.
4
Appuyez sur Supprimer.Outils
116
›
Créer une horloge mondiale
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Horloge→Horloge mondiale.
2
Appuyez sur Ajouter une ville ou sur [ ] →Ajouter.
3 Saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la
liste.
Pour choisir une ville sur la carte du monde, appuyez sur .
4
Pour ajouter d’autres horloges mondiales, répétez les étapes2
et3.
Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, maintenez votre doigt appuyé
sur une horloge, puis appuyez sur Heure d’été.
›Utiliser le chronomètre
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Horloge→Chronomètre.
2
Appuyez sur Début pour commencer à chronométrer.
3
Appuyez sur Tour pour enregistrer des temps intermédiaires.
4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Arrêt.
5
Appuyez sur Réinit. pour effacer les temps enregistrés.
›Utiliser le minuteur
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Horloge→Minuteur.
2
Définissez la durée du minuteur.
3
Appuyez sur Démarrer pour lancer le minuteur.
4
Quand la durée du minuteur est écoulée, appuyez sur l'icône
, puis faites-la glisser hors du cercle pour arrêter l’alarme.Outils
117
›Utiliser l’horloge de bureau
L’horloge du bureau affiche l’heure, la date et la météo.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Horloge→Horloge bureau.
2
Appuyez sur pour afficher l’horloge de bureau en plein
écran.
3
Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.
4
Modifiez les options suivantes:
Paramètre Fonction
Masquer la
barre d’état
Afficher ou non la barre d’état en haut de
l’écran.
Fond d’écran Sélectionner l’image d’arrière-plan pour
l’horloge de l’écran d’accueil.
Affich. heure/
calendrier
Activer cette fonction pour afficher
l’horloge ou le calendrier.
AccuWeather
Activer cette fonction pour afficher la
météo de la ville où vous vous trouvez.
Vous pouvez également configurer
l’horloge de bureau pour qu’elle mette
automatiquement à jour les dernières
informations et sélectionner une unité de
température.
Luminosité Régler la luminosité de l’écran.
Restaurer
valeurs par déf.
Réinitialiser les paramètres de l’horloge de
bureau par défaut.
Station d'accueil
Utiliser le haut-parleur de la station
d’accueil raccordée lorsque votre appareil
est connecté à un véhicule ou à une
station d’accueil de bureau.Outils
118
Calculatrice
Découvrez comment effectuer des calculs mathématiques sur
votre téléphone, comme avec une calculatrice classique.
›
Effectuer des calculs
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Calculatrice.
2
Utilisez les touches de la calculatrice affichées à l’écran pour
réaliser des opérations mathématiques de base.
Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour utiliser la
calculatrice scientifique. Si vous avez désactivé la fonction
de rotation automatique, appuyez sur [ ] →Calculatrice
scientifique.
›Afficher l’historique du calcul
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Calculatrice.
2 Effectuez des calculs.
3
Appuyez sur pour fermer le clavier de la calculatrice.
L’historique du calcul s’affiche.
4
Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur [ ] →Effacer
l’historique.
Téléchargements
Découvrez comment gérer les historiques des fichiers téléchargés
depuis un site Web ou un e-mail.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Téléchargements.
2 Sélectionnez un dossier de téléchargement.
3
Pour ouvrir un fichier, sélectionnez-le dans l’historique.
Pour supprimer un fichier téléchargé, cochez la case
correspondante dans l’historique et appuyez sur .Outils
119
Kies air
Kies air vous permet de connecter votre appareil à un autre
appareil via une connexion Wi-Fi. Depuis un navigateur, vous
pouvez afficher et gérer les fichiers multimédia, les contacts, les
messages et toute autre donnée enregistrée sur votre appareil.
›
Personnaliser les paramètres Kies air
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Kies air.
2
Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.
3
Modifiez les options suivantes:
Paramètre Fonction
Nom de
l’appareil
Afficher ou modifier le nom de votre
appareil.
Demande
d’accès
Paramétrer cette option pour recevoir
des demandes d’autorisation d’autres
appareils lors de l’utilisation de Kies air.
Activer la
visibilité
Configurer l’appareil pour que d’autres
appareils le détectent.
Durée écoulée Sélectionner le délai à l'issue duquel
l'appareil doit mettre fin à la connexion.
Verrouiller le
contenu
Sélectionner les types de données à ne
pas afficher sur d’autres appareils.
Réinitialisation Réinitialiser les paramètres par défaut.
›
Connecter votre appareil à un autre appareil via
un réseau Wi-Fi
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Kies air→Démarrer.
2 Saisissez l’adresse Web affichée par Kies air dans le navigateur
de l’autre appareil.Outils
120
3
Appuyez sur Autoriser (si nécessaire).
Une fois la connexion établie, vous pouvez visualiser les
données de votre appareil sur l’autre appareil.
4
Pour mettre fin à la connexion, appuyez sur Arrêt.
Mini journal
Découvrez comment constituer un journal photographique.
›
Créer un mini journal
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Mini journal.
2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez
sur Oui.
3 Si vous avez déjà enregistré un mini journal, appuyez sur Créer
journal pour ajouter une nouvelle entrée.
4
Modifiez la date et définissez la météo (si nécessaire).
5
Appuyez sur Ajouter photo et ajoutez une image ou prenez
une photo.
6
Appuyez sur Appuyez pour ajouter le texte, saisissez du
texte, puis appuyez sur OK.
7
Appuyez sur Enreg.
›Afficher un mini journal
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Mini journal.
2 Sélectionnez un journal.
Pour publier un mini journal sur un site web communautaire,
appuyez sur [ ] →Publier.Outils
121
Mes fichiers
Découvrez comment accéder rapidement et facilement à toutes
vos images, vidéos, musiques, fichiers audio et autres types de
fichiers stockés dans le téléphone ou dans une carte mémoire.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Mes fichiers.
2 Sélectionnez un dossier → un fichier.
Dans un dossier, appuyez sur [ ] pour utiliser les options
suivantes:
● Pour envoyer un fichier à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur
Partager.
● Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur Créer dossier.
● Pour supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers, appuyez sur
Supprimer.
● Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur Afficher par.
● Pour trier les fichiers ou les dossiers, appuyez sur Lister par.
● Pour déplacer un fichier vers un autre dossier, appuyez sur
Déplacer.
● Pour copier un fichier dans un autre dossier, appuyez sur Copier.
● Pour renommer un fichier, appuyez sur Renommer.
● Pour modifier les paramètres du gestionnaire de fichiers,
appuyez sur Paramètres.
Polaris Office
Découvrez comment créer et afficher des documents Polaris Office
sur votre téléphone et votre carte mémoire.
›
Créer un document
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Polaris Office.
2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois,
enregistrez-vous en tant qu’utilisateur en ligne ou ignorez
l’enregistrement.Outils
122
3
Appuyez sur → un type de document.
4 Saisissez des données dans le document.
5 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Enregistrer.
6 Saisissez le nom du document, puis sélectionnez l’emplacement
d’enregistrement.
7
Appuyez sur Enregistrer.
› Ouvrir un document
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Polaris Office.
2
Appuyez sur Mes fichiers→ un document.
3
Consultez le document.
● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, appuyez sur l’écran avec deux
doigts, puis écartez-les (rapprochez vos doigts pour effectuer
un zoom arrière). Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [ ] →
Zoom→ une option.
● Pour ouvrir la barre d’outils permettant de modifier le
document (fichier Word, Excel ou Power Point), appuyez sur
[ ] →Mode d'édition.
● Pour rechercher du texte dans le document, appuyez sur
[ ] →Rechercher.
● Pour ajouter un signet à la page actuelle, appuyez sur
[ ] →Presse-papiers.
● Pour ajuster la taille du document à l’écran, appuyez sur
[ ] →Redistribution de texte.
● Pour accéder à une page spécifique, appuyez sur [ ] →Aller à.
● Pour envoyer le fichier à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur
[ ] →Envoyer le fichier.
● Pour imprimer le fichier, appuyez sur [ ] →Imprimer.
Votre appareil est compatible uniquement avec certaines
imprimantes Samsung.
● Pour lire un document à l’aide de la fonction de synthèse
vocale, appuyez sur [ ] →Conversion de texte par
synthèse vocale.
● Pour personnaliser les paramètres d’affichage ou de gestion
des documents, appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres.Outils
123
›Gérer des documents en ligne
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Polaris Office.
2
Appuyez sur Fichiers Web→Box.net.
3 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe pour
accéder à votre compte, puis appuyez sur Ajouter.
4
Affichez et gérez vos documents sur le serveur selon vos
besoins.
Gestion de tâches
Grâce au gestionnaire de tâches, vous pouvez visualiser les
applications en cours d’exécution ainsi que les informations
relatives à la mémoire.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Gestion de tâches.
2
Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes:
●
Applications actives : afficher la liste des applications en
cours d’exécution sur le téléphone.
● Téléchargé(es): afficher la quantité de mémoire totale
utilisée par les applications installées sur l’appareil.
● RAM: vérifier et gérer la mémoire vive de votre téléphone.
● Stockage: afficher la quantité de mémoire disponible et
utilisée sur votre téléphone et sur la carte mémoire.
●
Aide: afficher des informations d’aide sur la prolongation de
la durée de vie de la batterie.Outils
124
Commande vocale
Votre téléphone propose la fonction de commande vocale
intelligente qui convertit en actions vos commandes vocales. Vous
pouvez composer un numéro, envoyer un message, rechercher
des lieux ou des informations ou compléter d’autres tâches
simplement en parlant à votre téléphone.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Commande vocale.
2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, lisez les
conditions d'utilisation et les informations d’aide en suivant les
écrans.
3
Appuyez sur Appuyer et Parler.
4
Prononcez une commande dans le microphone.
Discussion
Découvrez comment à utiliser la reconnaissance vocale. Vous
pouvez composer un numéro, envoyer un message, écrire un
mémo ou compléter d’autres tâches simplement en parlant à votre
téléphone lorsque vous êtes en déplacement.
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Discussion.
2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, lisez
la clause de non-responsabilité et les informations d’aide en
suivant les écrans.
3
Appuyez sur Appuyer et Parler.
4
Prononcez une commande dans le microphone.Paramètres
125
Paramètres
Accéder au menu Paramètres
1
Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et
appuyez sur Paramètres.
2 Sélectionnez une catégorie de paramètres, puis une option.
Wi-Fi
Activez ou désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. ►p.102
Bluetooth
Activez ou désactivez la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ►p.99
Utilisation des données
Suivez votre utilisation des données et personnalisez les
paramètres relatifs à votre limite d’utilisation.
●
Données mobiles : paramétrez cette option pour utiliser des
connexions de données sur n’importe quel réseau mobile.
●
Définir limite données mobiles : définissez une limite
concernant l’utilisation de données mobiles.
● Cycle d'util. des données : personnalisez les paramètres du
cycle de limite d’utilisation.
Plus...
Modifiez les paramètres relatifs au contrôle des connexions avec
d’autres appareils ou réseaux.Paramètres
126
› Mode Hors-ligne
Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de votre téléphone. Vous
pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau de votre
appareil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions d’appel,
Wi-Fi et Bluetooth.
›
Kies via Wi-Fi
Connectez votre téléphone à Samsung Kies via Wi-Fi.
›Utilitaires USB
Connectez votre appareil à un ordinateur comme périphérique de
stockage de masse. ►p.112
›
VPN
Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y
connecter. ►p.113
›
Point d'accès et modem
●
Modem USB: activez la fonction modem USB pour partager la
connexion de données de votre appareil avec des ordinateurs
via USB. Lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur, votre téléphone
sert de modem sans fil pour celui-ci. ►p.108
● Point d'accès mobile: activez la fonction de point d’accès Wi-Fi
mobile pour partager la connexion de données de votre appareil
sur un PC par l’intermédiaire de la fonction Wi-Fi. ►p.107
● Configurer point d'accès : configurez les paramètres réseau
pour le point d’accès Wi-Fi.
●
Modem Bluetooth: activez la fonction modem Bluetooth pour
partager la connexion de données de votre appareil avec des
ordinateurs via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ►p.108
●
Aide: affichez des informations relatives à l’utilisation des
fonctions modem.
› Wi-Fi Direct
Activez la fonction Wi-Fi Direct pour raccorder deux appareils via
un réseau Wi-Fi sans passer par un point d’accès. ►p.104Paramètres
127
›
Réseaux mobiles
● Connexions de données : autorisez les connexions de données.
● Itinérance: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il se connecte à
un autre réseau lorsque vous changez de zone de couverture ou
que votre réseau d’origine n’est pas disponible.
●
Nom des points d'accès : définissez des noms de point d’accès
(APN).
●
Mode réseau: sélectionnez un type de réseau.
●
Opérateurs réseau: recherchez les réseaux disponibles et
sélectionnez un réseau d’itinérance.
Appels
Personnalisez les paramètres des fonctions d’appel.
● Rejet de l'appel: rejetez automatiquement les appels en
provenance des numéros de téléphone spécifiés. Vous pouvez
ajouter des numéros de téléphone à la liste de rejet. ►p.46
●
Définir messages de rejet: ajoutez ou modifiez le message qui
sera envoyé lorsque vous rejetez un appel.
● Sonnerie d'appel:
- Vibration lors de réponse: paramétrez le téléphone pour
qu’il vibre lorsque votre correspondant répond à un appel.
- Tonalités état d'appel: activez ou désactivez les tonalités
de connexion d’appel, les bips de durée d’appel ou de
déconnexion.
- Signal d’appel: choisissez la façon dont l’appareil vous
préviendra en cas de survenue d’événements lors d’un appel.
●
Début/Fin d'appel:
- Touche de réponse: paramétrez le téléphone pour pouvoir
répondre aux appels en appuyant sur la touche Accueil.
- Réponse automatique: paramétrez le téléphone pour
pouvoir répondre automatiquement après une période
spécifiée (disponible uniquement lorsque le kit piéton est
branché).
- Touche Marche pour terminer les appels : paramétrez le
téléphone pour pouvoir mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur
la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage.Paramètres
128
● Capteur de proximité: paramétrez le téléphone pour activer le
capteur de proximité en cours d’appel.
● Transfert d’appel: transférez les appels entrants vers un autre
numéro.
● Paramètres supplémentaires :
- Identité de l’appelant: présentez votre numéro de téléphone
mobile à vos destinataires lorsque vous passez un appel.
- Restriction d’appel: bloquez les appels entrants ou sortants.
- Signal d’appel: activez le signal d’appel pour pouvoir recevoir
un appel entrant lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne.
- Rappel automatique: activez la fonction de recomposition
automatique pour pouvoir recomposer automatiquement un
appel qui n’a pas abouti ou qui a été interrompu.
- Numérotation fixe: activez ou désactivez le mode de
numérotation fixe pour limiter les appels aux numéros de la
liste de numérotation fixe. Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec
votre carte SIM/USIM et redémarrez le téléphone.
● Image appel visio: sélectionnez l’image à présenter au
correspondant.
●
Vidéo lors d’un appel reçu: indiquez si votre image en
direct ou une image prédéfinie doit être présentée à votre
correspondant.
●
Options d’échec d’appel: indiquez si le téléphone doit essayer
de passer un appel vocal lorsqu’un appel visio échoue.
● Serv. messagerie vocale: sélectionnez votre opérateur ou un
autre fournisseur pour recevoir vos messages vocaux.
●
Messagerie vocale: saisissez le numéro d’accès au service de
messagerie vocale. Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir ce
numéro.Paramètres
129
Son
Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de votre téléphone.
●
Volume: réglez le niveau sonore des sonneries d’appel, des sons
multimédia, des sons système de l’appareil et des notifications.
● Intensité des vibrations : réglez l’intensité des vibrations.
●
Mode Discret: activez le profil Discret afin d’activer le vibreur ou
de couper tous les sons de votre appareil, à l’exception des sons
multimédia et des sonneries d’alarme.
● Sonnerie du téléphone: sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les
appels entrants.
●
Notifications par défaut: sélectionnez une sonnerie pour
les événements, tels que les messages entrants et les appels
manqués.
●
Vibreur et sonnerie: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il émette
un son et des vibrations lorsque vous recevez un appel.
● Sons : configurez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son
lorsque vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier de l’écran de
numérotation.
● Sons tactiles : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un
son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur
l’écran tactile.
● Son verrouillage écran: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il
émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran
tactile.
●
Vibre en cas d'appui écran: paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il
vibre quand vous appuyez sur la touche Menu ou Retour, ou
quand vous maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur la touche Accueil
ou Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage.
Affichage
Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage.
● Fond d'écran d'accueil: sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de
l’écran d’accueil.
● Fond d'écran de verrouillage: sélectionnez une image à
afficher lorsque l’écran est verrouillé.Paramètres
130
●
Horloge: paramétrez cette option pour afficher l’horloge sur
l’écran verrouillé.
●
Météo: paramétrez cette option pour afficher la météo sur
l’écran verrouillé.
● Paramètres météo: personnalisez les paramètres des
informations météo.
● Position horloge et météo: sélectionnez l’endroit où doivent se
trouver l’horloge et la météo sur l’écran verrouillé.
● Luminosité: réglez la luminosité de l’écran.
●
Mode d'écran: sélectionnez un mode d’affichage.
● Rotation auto. écran: indiquez si le contenu doit
automatiquement pivoter en même temps que le téléphone.
●
Mise en veille de l'écran: définissez le délai de désactivation
automatique du rétroéclairage.
● Police: modifiez le type de police pour le texte affiché sur
l’écran. Vous pouvez télécharger des polices à partir de Google
Play Store en appuyant sur Obtenir des polices en ligne.
●
Durée de l'éclairage des touches : réglez la durée du
rétroéclairage des touches tactiles.
●
Ajustement auto. écran: configurez l’appareil pour économiser
l’énergie en ajustant la luminosité de l’écran.
● Calibrage horizontal: étalonnez l’accéléromètre afin d’ajuster
l’axe horizontal de l’appareil pour une meilleure reconnaissance
des mouvements.
● Calibrage gyroscope: étalonnez le gyroscope afin que votre
appareil puisse s’adapter aux changements d’orientation.
● Lors de l’étalonnage, placez l’appareil sur une surface
stable. Le processus d’étalonnage peut échouer si
l’appareil se met à vibrer ou est déplacé.
● Étalonnez le gyroscope si lors d’un mouvement
panoramique, un de vos jeux par exemple, basé sur la
détection de mouvements présente des mouvements
désordonnés.Paramètres
131
Economie d'énergie
● Eco. d'énergie système: activez le mode d’économie d’énergie
pour limiter l’utilisation de certaines ressources du système.
● Eco. d'énergie personnalisée: configurez cette option pour
activer le mode d’économie d’énergie en fonction de vos
paramètres personnalisés.
● Personnaliser les paramètres :
- Mode éco. énergie à: sélectionnez un niveau d’énergie
déclenchant le mode d’économie d’énergie.
- Désactiver le Wi-Fi: désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi lorsque le
téléphone n’est pas connecté à un point d’accès Wi-Fi.
- Désactiver le Bluetooth: désactivez la fonction Bluetooth
lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas.
- Désactiver le GPS: désactivez la fonction GPS lorsque vous ne
l’utilisez pas.
- Désactiver la synchro.: désactivez la synchronisation lorsque
le serveur n'est pas en cours de synchronisation avec un
serveur Web.
- Luminosité: activez le paramètre de luminosité pour le mode
d’économie d’énergie.
- Luminosité: paramétrez le niveau de luminosité pour le mode
d’économie d’énergie.
- Mise en veille de l'écran: définissez le délai de désactivation
automatique du rétroéclairage.
● En savoir plus : découvrez comme réduire la consommation de
la batterie.
Stockage
Affichez les informations de mémoire relatives à votre téléphone
et à votre carte mémoire. Vous pouvez également formater le
dispositif de stockage USB et d’une carte mémoire.
Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement
toutes ses données.Paramètres
132
Batterie
Affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil.
Applications
Affichez et gérez les applications de votre appareil.
Comptes et synchro.
Modifiez les paramètres de la fonction de synchronisation
automatique ou gérez les comptes de synchronisation.
Services de localisation
Modifiez les paramètres de la fonction GPS.
● Sevices de localisation Google: configurez le téléphone pour
qu’il utilise les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou mobiles pour localiser votre
position.
● Satellites GPS: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il utilise les
satellites GPS pour localiser votre position.
●
Utiliser fonction Aide à la localisation: définissez cette option
pour utiliser les capteurs afin d’améliorer le positionnement à
pied lorsque le signal GPS ne passe pas. Il peut y avoir des écarts
entre les estimations du capteur et votre emplacement réel.
● Localisation & recherche Google: configurez l’appareil de
manière à ce qu’il utilise votre position actuelle pour la recherche
et d’autres services Google.Paramètres
133
Sécurité
Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de votre appareil, ainsi que de
la carte SIM ou USIM.
●
Verrouillage de l'écran: définissez le mode de déverrouillage
de l’écran.
- Aucun: désactivez le verrouillage de l’écran.
- Défilement: paramétrez cette option pour pouvoir
déverrouiller l'écran en faisant simplement glisser votre doigt
sur l'écran.
- Déverrouillage visage: configurez un verrouillage par
détection faciale.
- Modèle : définissez un modèle de déverrouillage pour
déverrouiller l’écran.
- Code PIN : définissez un code PIN (numérique) pour
déverrouiller l’écran.
- Mot de passe: définissez un mot de passe (alphanumérique)
pour déverrouiller l’écran.
● Infos propriétaire: paramétrez cette option afin d’afficher votre
propre message pour l’écran verrouillé.
● Crypter le téléphone: configurez un mot de passe pour
crypter l’appareil afin de protéger les données et informations
enregistrées sur l’appareil. Une fois l’appareil crypté, vous devez
saisir le mot de passe chaque fois que vous l’allumez. Il faut
en premier lieu recharger la batterie, car le cryptage de votre
appareil peut prendre plus d’une heure.
● Crypter la carte SD:
- Crypter la carte SD: protégez vos informations personnelles
en cryptant les données présentes sur votre carte mémoire.
- Cryptage complet: sélectionnez cette option pour crypter
tous les fichiers de votre carte mémoire.
- Exclure les fichiers multimédia: sélectionnez cette option
pour crypter tous les fichiers de votre carte mémoire, à
l’exception des fichiers multimédia.
Il est possible que vous ne puissiez pas accéder à la carte
mémoire cryptée après réinitialisation des données
d’origine. Commencez par décoder la carte mémoire avant
de procéder à cette réinitialisation.Paramètres
134
● Traçage du mobile: activez ou désactivez la fonction de traçage
du mobile qui vous aide à localiser votre appareil s’il est perdu ou
volé. ►p.33
●
Destinataires : ajoutez ou modifiez les destinataires du message
d’alerte.
● Contrôle à distance: contrôlez pour contrôler l’appareil égaré
via le Web. Cette fonction s'active automatiquement quand vous
ouvrez une session sur des comptes Samsung et Google.
● Page Web de SamsungDive: accédez au site Web
SamsungDive pour créer votre compte Samsung.
● Configurer blocage SIM:
- Verrouiller carte SIM: activez ou désactivez la fonction de
verrouillage PIN du téléphone pour qu’un mot de passe PIN
soit demandé lorsque vous allumez votre appareil.
- Modifier code PIN SIM: modifiez le code PIN utilisé pour
accéder aux données de la carte SIM ou USIM.
● Rendre les mots de passe visibles : paramétrez le téléphone
pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le
saisissez.
●
Admin. de périphérique: affichez les administrateurs de
périphérique installés sur votre téléphone. Vous pouvez
activer les administrateurs de périphérique afin d’appliquer de
nouvelles règles à votre téléphone.
● Sources inconnues : sélectionnez cette option pour télécharger
des applications à partir de n’importe quelle source. Si vous
ne sélectionnez pas cette option, vous pouvez uniquement
télécharger des applications à partir de Google Play Store.
● Infos d'ident. sécurisées : sélectionnez les certificats et les
identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation de diverses applications.
● Installer depuis stock. périph.: installez des certificats cryptés
qui sont stockés sur un périphérique de stockage USB.
● Effacer infos identification: effacez les identifiants de sécurité
contenus dans le téléphone et réinitialisez le mot de passe.Paramètres
135
Langue et saisie
Modifiez les paramètres de saisie de texte.
›
Langue
Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage pour les menus et les
applications.
›
Par défaut
Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de
texte.
›
Clavier Samsung
Pour modifier les paramètres de clavier Samsung, appuyez sur .
● Types de clavier Portrait: sélectionnez le mode de saisie par
défaut, par exemple le clavier AZERTY, le clavier 3x4 ou l’écriture
manuscrite.
● Langues de saisie: sélectionnez les langues de saisie.
●
XT9: activez le mode XT9 pour que l’appareil propose des mots
au fur et à mesure de votre saisie.
● Paramètres XT9 avancés : activez les fonctions avancées du
mode XT9, par exemple l’achèvement automatique, la correction
ou la substitution automatique, et définissez votre propre liste
de mots.
●
Modification du clavier: activez ou désactivez la fonction de
modification du clavier pour le mode de saisie du texte. Vous
pouvez sélectionner différents modes de saisie en faisant défiler
le clavier vers la gauche ou vers la droite.
●
Aperçu du caractère: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche un
aperçu de chaque lettre que vous entrez.
●
Mise en majuscules automatique: configurez l’appareil
pour qu’il mette automatiquement en majuscule la première
lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final : le point, le point
d’interrogation et le point d’exclamation.Paramètres
136
● Paramètres de saisie manuscrite: personnalisez la durée de la
reconnaissance en mode manuscrit.
● Entrée voix: pour saisir du texte oralement avec le clavier
Samsung, activez la fonction d’entrée de voix.
● Point automatique: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un
point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace.
●
Didacticiel: découvrez comment saisir du texte avec le clavier
Samsung.
›
Saisie Google Voice
Activez la fonction de saisie vocale de Google pour saisir du texte
oralement. Pour modifier les paramètres de saisie vocale, appuyez
sur .
● Sélectionner les langues de saisie: sélectionnez les langues de
saisie pour la reconnaissance vocale de Google.
● Bloquer les termes choquants : paramétrez cette option pour
empêcher l’appareil de reconnaître des termes choquants lors
des saisies vocales.
›
Swype
Pour modifier les paramètres de clavier Swype, appuyez sur .
● Sélectionner mode de saisie: modifiez le type de clavier.
● Comment Swyper: découvrez comment saisir du texte avec le
clavier Swype.
●
Dictionnaire personnel: configurez votre propre dictionnaire.
Les mots présents dans votre dictionnaire apparaîtront en tant
que suggestions lors de votre saisie textuelle.
● Préférences :
- Aide sonore: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il vous avertisse
si aucun mot alternatif n’existe pour votre saisie si vous
appuyez deux fois sur un mot.
- Retour tactile: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque
vous appuyez sur une touche.
- Afficher les astuces : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche
automatiquement des conseils relatifs à vos actions le cas
échéant.Paramètres
137
- Espacement auto.: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il insère
automatiquement un espace entre les mots.
- Majuscules auto.: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il mette
automatiquement en majuscule la première lettre qui suit un
signe de ponctuation final : le point, le point d’interrogation et
le point d’exclamation.
- Afficher la trace comp.: définissez la durée d’affichage de la
trajectoire de votre déplacement sur l’écran tactile.
- Suggestion de mot: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il
affiche des propositions de mots au fur et à mesure de votre
saisie.
- Vitesse/précision: configurez le ratio entre la vitesse et la
précision des suggestions Swype.
- Réinitialiser le dictionnaire Swype: supprimez les mots que
vous avez ajoutés au dictionnaire.
- Version: affichez les informations de version.
●
Options de langue: sélectionnez les langues de saisie.
›
Reconnaissance vocale
Sélectionnez un moteur de reconnaissance vocale.
›
Rech. vocale
Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Google, utilisez les
options suivantes:
● Langue: sélectionnez la langue pour la reconnaissance vocale.
● SafeSearch: configurez le téléphone pour qu’il filtre les images
ou les textes au contenu explicite dans les résultats de la
recherche vocale.
● Bloquer les termes choquants : configurez le téléphone
pour qu’il reconnaisse et bloque les termes choquants dans les
résultats de la recherche vocale.
Pour le moteur de reconnaissance vocale Samsung, utilisez les
options suivantes:
● Langue: sélectionnez la langue pour la reconnaissance vocale.
●
Moteur de recherche sur Internet: sélectionnez un moteur de
recherche Web.Paramètres
138
●
Numérotation automatique: paramétrez le téléphone pour
composer automatiquement un numéro lorsque les résultats de
la reconnaissance vocale sont fiables.
●
Utiliser l'emplacement: activez l’utilisation des informations de
localisation pour les résultats de recherche vocale.
●
Masquer les mots offensants : configurez le téléphone pour
qu’il reconnaisse et bloque les termes choquants dans les
résultats de la recherche vocale.
● Ponctuation automatique: configurez l’appareil pour insérer
automatiquement les signes de ponctuation.
● Ecouter via Bluetooth: activez les commandes vocales lors de
l’utilisation d’un casque Bluetooth.
●
Voice talk unique ID: affichez l’ID unique de votre appareil pour
obtenir des services quand vous rencontrez des problèmes avec
la fonction de reconnaissance vocale.
●
A propos de: affichez les informations de version.
●
Démarrage automatique de l'écoute: activez
automatiquement la reconnaissance vocale lors du démarrage
de la fonction de commande vocale.
●
Aide de la Commande vocale: accédez aux informations d’aide
sur l’utilisation de la commande vocale.
● Paramètres sociaux: modifiez les paramètres d’accès aux sites
Web communautaires.
● Paramètres de Discussion: modifiez les paramètres
d’utilisation de la reconnaissance vocale.
●
Aide de Discussion: accédez aux informations d’aide sur
l’utilisation de la reconnaissance vocale.
›
Sortie de synthèse vocale
●
Moteur TTS favori: affichez et sélectionnez les moteurs de
synthèse vocale de votre appareil.
●
Vitesse d'élocution: sélectionnez la vitesse de la fonction de
synthèse vocale.Paramètres
139
● Ecouter un exemple: écoutez un exemple de texte parlé.
Installez des données vocales pour l’utilisation de la fonction de
synthèse vocale.
● Profil Voiture: activez le profil Voiture pour configurer le
téléphone afin qu’il lise tout haut le contenu.
● Paramètres du Profil Voiture: spécifiez les applications à
utiliser en mode Voiture.
›
Vitesse du curseur
Réglez la vitesse du curseur de la souris ou du pavé tactile
connecté à votre appareil.
Sauvegarder et réinitialiser
Modifiez les paramètres pour gérer vos propres paramètres et
données.
● Sauvegarder mes données : paramétrez le téléphone pour
sauvegarder vos paramètres et vos données d’application sur le
serveur Google.
● Compte de sauvegarde: ajoutez et affichez votre compte
Google dédié à la sauvegarde de vos données.
● Restaurer automatiquement: paramétrez le téléphone pour
restaurer vos paramètres et vos données d’application lorsque
les applications sont réinstallées sur votre téléphone.
● Rétablir param. par défaut: réinitialisez les paramètres par
défaut et supprimez toutes les données.
Station d'accueil
Mode de sortie audio: utilisez le haut-parleur de la station
d’accueil raccordée lorsque votre appareil est connecté à un
véhicule ou à une station d’accueil de bureau.Paramètres
140
Date & heure
Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour contrôler la
façon dont l’heure et la date s’affichent sur le téléphone:
●
Date et heure automatiques : actualisez automatiquement
l’heure de l’appareil lorsque vous définissez un fuseau horaire.
● Fuseau horaire auto: actualisez automatiquement l’heure du
téléphone lors des changements de fuseau horaire.
●
Définir la date: réglez manuellement la date du jour.
●
Définir l'heure: réglez l’heure manuellement.
● Sélectionner le fuseau horaire: définissez votre fuseau horaire
local.
● Format 24 heures : définissez l’affichage de l’heure sur le format
24heures.
● Format de date: sélectionnez un format de date.
Accessibilité
● Services : activez une application d’accessibilité téléchargée, par
exemple Talkback ou Kickback, qui émet un retour vocal, une
mélodie ou une vibration.
● La Touche Marche met fin aux appels : paramétrez le
téléphone pour mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur la touche
Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage.
● Rotation auto. écran: indiquez si le contenu doit
automatiquement pivoter en même temps que le téléphone.
●
Durée de l'appui prolongé: configurez le délai de
reconnaissance en cas de maintien d’un doigt sur l’écran.
● Installer les scripts Web: configurez les applications pour
qu’elles installent des scripts Web en vue de faciliter l’accès à leur
contenu Web. Paramètres
141
Mouvement
Modifiez les paramètres servant à contrôler la reconnaissance de
mouvements sur votre téléphone.
●
Activer les mouvements : activez cette fonction pour utiliser la
reconnaissance de mouvements.
● Incliner pour zoomer: effectuez des zooms avant ou arrière lors
de la visualisation d’images dans Galerie ou la visualisation de
pages Web, en maintenant vos doigts appuyés sur deux points
de l'écran, puis en inclinant l’appareil vers l’arrière et l’avant.
●
Agrandir pour modifier: déplacez une application vers
une autre page en maintenant votre doigt appuyé sur une
application, puis en inclinant l’appareil vers la gauche ou la
droite.
●
Appuyer deux fois : configurez pour activer les fonctions
vocales en appuyant deux fois sur l’appareil.
● Retourner pour désact. son: paramétrez l’appareil pour que le
son des appels entrants, des alarmes et de la musique soit coupé
lorsque vous placez l’appareil face vers le bas.
Options de développement
Modifiez les paramètres de développement d’applications.
●
Débogage USB: sélectionnez cette option pour brancher votre
appareil à un PC à l’aide d’un câble USB. cette option est utilisée
pour le développement d’applications.
● ID périphérique de développement: affichez l’ID de
développement de votre appareil.
● Positions fictives : autorisez l’envoi de fausses informations
de service et de localisation à un service de Gestionnaire de
localisation à des fins de test. cette option est utilisée pour le
développement d’applications.
●
MDP sauvegarde bureau: configurez un mot de passe pour
sécuriser vos données de sauvegarde.Paramètres
142
●
Mode Strict activé: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il fasse
clignoter l’écran quand des applications effectuent des
opérations de longue durée.
●
Aff. emplacement pointeur: paramétrez cette option pour que
les coordonnées et trajectoires du curseur s’affichent quand vous
touchez l’écran.
●
Afficher les touches : paramétrez cette option pour que le
curseur s’affiche quand vous touchez l’écran.
●
Afficher MàJ écran: paramétrez cette option pour que les zones
de l’écran mises à jour clignotent.
●
Utilisation processeur: paramétrez cette option pour obtenir
une liste de tous les processus actifs.
● Forcer rendu GPU: paramétrez cette option pour utiliser
l’accélération matérielle2D en vue d’optimiser les performances
graphiques.
● Echelle animation fenêtre: sélectionnez la vitesse d’ouverture
et de fermeture des fenêtres contextuelles.
● Echelle animation transition: sélectionnez la vitesse de
basculement entre deux écrans.
●
Ne pas garder activités : paramétrez cette option pour fermer
une application en cours d’exécution quand vous lancez une
nouvelle application.
● Limiter le nombre de processus en arrière-plan: paramétrez
cette option pour restreindre le nombre de processus pouvant
être exécutés en arrière-plan.
●
Afficher toutes les ANR: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vous
alerte quand des applications exécutées en arrière-plan ne
répondent pas.
A propos du téléphone
Accédez à des informations concernant votre appareil et vérifiez
son état.Dépannage
143
Dépannage
Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre appareil, un
message vous invite à effectuer l’une des manipulations
suivantes :
Code Solution possible :
Mot de
passe
Lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée,
vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez
défini pour l’appareil.
Code PIN
Lorsque vous utilisez l’appareil pour la première
fois ou lorsque la demande de code PIN est activée,
vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte
SIM ou USIM. Cette fonction peut être désactivée
en utilisant le menu Paramètres→Sécurité→
Configurer blocage SIM→Verrouiller carte SIM.
Code PUK
Si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs
reprises, votre carte SIM/USIM est bloquée. Vous
devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre
opérateur.
Code PIN2
Lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant la
saisie du code PIN2, vous devez saisir le code PIN2
fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir
plus, contactez votre opérateur.
Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur de service ou
de réseau
● Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception.
Déplacez-vous dans un autre endroit et réessayez.
● Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement.
Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir des informations
complémentaires.Dépannage
144
L’écran tactile réagit lentement ou de manière erronée
Si votre appareil dispose d’un écran tactile et que cet écran réagit
de manière erronée, tentez les manipulations suivantes:
● Retirez les éventuelles protections de l’écran tactile. Les films
de protection peuvent empêcher l’appareil de reconnaître vos
saisies et ne sont pas recommandés pour les écrans tactiles.
●
Assurez-vous que vos mains sont propres et sèches lorsque vous
appuyez sur l’écran tactile.
● Redémarrez votre appareil afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels
dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires.
●
Assurez-vous que vous possédez la dernière version logicielle de
votre appareil.
● Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, apportez votre
téléphone dans votre centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales
Si votre appareil ne répond pas ou se bloque, vous devez
éventuellement fermer des applications ou le réinitialiser afin qu’il
retrouve un fonctionnement correct. Si votre appareil se bloque
et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt/Verrouillage
enfoncée pendant 8à10secondes. L’appareil redémarre
automatiquement.
Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre ce problème à la suite de ces
manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par
défaut. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications
et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sauvegarder et réinitialiser→
Rétablir param. par défaut→Réinitialiser le téléphone→Tout
supprimer.
Les appels sont interrompus
Si vous vous trouvez dans une zone à réception médiocre, il se
peut que vous perdiez votre connexion réseau. Déplacez-vous
dans un autre endroit et réessayez.Dépannage
145
Les appels sortants n’aboutissent pas
●
Assurez-vous d’avoir appuyé sur la touche Appel.
●
Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié.
● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction
d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone.
Les appels entrants n’aboutissent pas
● Vérifiez que votre appareil est bien allumé.
●
Assurez-vous d’être connecté au réseau cellulaire approprié.
● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction
d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone.
Vos interlocuteurs ne parviennent pas à vous entendre
lors de l’appel
● Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert.
●
Assurez-vous que le microphone est placé suffisamment près de
votre bouche.
● Si vous utilisez un kit mains-libres ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est
correctement branché.
La qualité d’écoute est mauvaise
●
Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée de l’appareil.
● Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception.
Déplacez-vous dans un autre endroit et réessayez.
Les appels passés à vos contacts n’aboutissent pas
● Vérifiez que le bon numéro a été enregistré dans la liste de
contacts.
● Si nécessaire, saisissez et enregistrez le numéro à nouveau.
● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction de restriction
d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone.
L’appareil émet des bips et l’icône de la batterie indique
que la batterie est vide
Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Rechargez la batterie
ou remplacez-la pour continuer à utiliser l’appareil.Dépannage
146
La batterie ne se recharge pas correctement ou le
téléphone s’éteint tout seul.
● Les fiches de la batterie sont peut-être sales. Nettoyez les
fiches dorés à l’aide d’un chiffon doux et propre, puis essayez à
nouveau de recharger la batterie.
● Si la batterie ne se recharge plus complètement, remplacez-la
par une batterie neuve et éliminez l’ancienne conformément à la
législation en vigueur dans votre pays.
L’appareil est chaud au toucher
Lorsque vous utilisez des applications qui demandent plus
d’énergie ou sur une période prolongée, votre appareil peut
sembler chaud au toucher. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte
pas la durée de vie ni les performances du téléphone.
Des messages d’erreur apparaissent à l’ouverture de
l’appareil photo
Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre appareil mobile Samsung doit
avoir suffisamment de mémoire disponible et sa batterie doit être
suffisamment chargée. Si vous recevez des messages d’erreur
lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations
suivantes:
● Rechargez la batterie ou remplacez-la par une autre entièrement
chargée.
● Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un PC ou en
les supprimant de votre appareil.
● Redémarrez l’appareil. Si les problèmes de l’appareil photo
persistent après avoir effectué ces manipulations, contactez
votre centre de service après-vente Samsung.Dépannage
147
Des messages d’erreur apparaissent à l’ouverture de la
radio FM
L’application Radio FM de votre appareil mobile Samsung utilise
le casque comme antenne radio. Si un casque n’est pas branché, la
radio FM sera dans l’incapacité de capter les stations. Pour utiliser
la radio FM, commencez par vérifier que le casque est branché
correctement. Ensuite, recherchez et enregistrez les fréquences des
stations disponibles.
Si les problèmes persistent après ces manipulations, tentez
d’accéder à la station désirée avec un autre récepteur radio. Si vous
captez la station avec un autre récepteur, votre appareil a peut-être
besoin d’être réparé. Contactez votre centre de service après-vente
Samsung.
Des messages d’erreur apparaissent à l’ouverture de
fichiers audio
Certains fichiers audio risquent de ne pas fonctionner sur votre
appareil mobile Samsung pour plusieurs raisons. Si vous recevez
des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de fichiers audio avec
votre appareil, tentez les manipulations suivantes:
● Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un PC ou en
les supprimant de votre appareil.
●
Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits
DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si c’est le cas, vous devez
posséder une licence appropriée ou une clé pour lire le fichier.
● Vérifiez que votre appareil est compatible avec le type du fichier
audio.Dépannage
148
Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth
● Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre
appareil.
● Si nécessaire, vérifiez que la fonction Bluetooth est également
activée sur l’autre appareil.
● Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth se situent bien dans le
rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 mètres maximum).
Si le problème persiste après ces manipulations, contactez votre
centre de service après-vente Samsung.
Problème de connexion avec un PC
●
Assurez-vous que le câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez est
compatible avec votre appareil.
● Vérifiez que les pilotes nécessaires sont bien installés sur votre
PC et mis à jour.Consignes de sécurité
149
Consignes de sécurité
Afin d’éviter de blesser votre entourage ou vous-même, ou bien d’endommager
votre appareil, veuillez lire toutes les informations suivantes avant d’utiliser votre
appareil.
Avertissement : évitez les décharges électriques, le feu et les
explosions
N’utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d’alimentation endommagé(e)s
ou de prises électriques mal fixées
Ne touchez pas le cordon d’alimentation lorsque vos mains sont
mouillées et ne tirez pas sur le chargeur pour le débrancher
Ne tordez pas ou n’endommagez pas le cordon d’alimentation
N’utilisez et ne touchez pas votre appareil avec les mains mouillées
lorsque celui-ci est en cours de chargement
Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou la batterie
Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou la batterie et ne les exposez pas
aux chocs
Ne rechargez pas la batterie en utilisant un chargeur non homologué
par Samsung
N’utilisez pas votre appareil pendant un orage
L’appareil peut mal fonctionner et les risques de décharge électrique peuvent
augmenter.
Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) lorsque celle-ci coule
ou est endommagée
Contactez le centre de traitement agréé le plus proche de chez vous afin de vous
séparer de vos batteries Li-Ion en toute sécurité.Consignes de sécurité
150
Manipulez et jetez les batteries et les chargeurs avec précaution
• N’utilisez que des batteries et des chargeurs homologués par Samsung et
spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. L’utilisation de batteries et de
chargeurs incompatibles peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager
votre appareil.
• Ne jetez jamais une batterie ou un appareil au feu. Respectez la réglementation
en vigueur dans votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries et des
appareils usagé(e)s.
• Ne posez jamais une batterie ou un appareil mobile à l’intérieur ou au-dessus
d’appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou des
radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, la batterie peut exploser.
• N’écrasez ou ne perforez jamais la batterie. Évitez d’exposer la batterie à une
pression externe élevée qui risquerait d’entraîner un court-circuit interne et une
surchauffe.
Protégez l’appareil, la batterie et le chargeur contre toute
détérioration
• Évitez d’exposer votre appareil et la batterie à des températures très basses ou
très élevées.
• Des températures extrêmes peuvent déformer l’appareil et réduire la capacité de
chargement, ainsi que sa durée de vie et celle de la batterie.
• Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risquerait
de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et – de la batterie et de
l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente.
• N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e).
Attention : respectez tous les avertissements de sécurité et
les réglementations en vigueur lorsque vous utilisez votre
appareil dans un endroit où son utilisation est réglementée
Éteignez votre appareil lorsque son utilisation est interdite
Respectez toutes les réglementations interdisant l’utilisation des appareils mobiles
dans certaines zones spécifiques.Consignes de sécurité
151
N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’autres appareils
électroniques
La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de radiofréquence.
Il est possible que votre appareil cause des interférences avec d’autres appareils
électroniques.
N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’un stimulateur cardiaque
• Maintenez une distance minimale de 15cm entre votre appareil et un
stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence.
• Il est fortement conseillé, lors d’un appel, de positionner l’appareil sur le côté
opposé à l’implant.
• Si vous pensez que votre appareil vient perturber le fonctionnement d’un
stimulateur cardiaque ou d’un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et
contactez le fabricant du stimulateur ou de l’appareil médical.
N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans un hôpital ou à proximité
d’équipements médicaux en raison des interférences qu’il pourrait
produire
Si vous utilisez vous-même des équipements médicaux, contactez votre fabriquant
afin d’éviter toute interférence de radiofréquence.
Si vous utilisez un appareil auditif, contactez votre fabriquant afin
d’obtenir plus d’informations sur les interférences
Il est possible que certains appareils auditifs subissent des interférences causées par
la radiofréquence de votre appareil. Afin de vous assurer d’une utilisation de votre
appareil auditif en toute sécurité, contactez votre fabriquant.
Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion
• Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion.
• Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique d’utilisation
dans un environnement explosif.
• N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans une station-service, dans les zones
potentiellement explosives ou à proximité de produits combustibles ou
chimiques.
• Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de
matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que l’appareil, ses composants ou
ses accessoires.Consignes de sécurité
152
Éteignez votre appareil lorsque vous voyagez en avion
Les appareils mobiles peuvent engendrer des interférences avec les équipements
aéronautiques. Conformez-vous aux réglementations en vigueur et éteignez votre
appareil.
Il est possible que les appareils électroniques se trouvant à bord d’un
véhicule motorisé subissent des dysfonctionnements provoqués par la
radiofréquence de votre propre appareil
Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et
réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil
lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un véhicule
Votre responsabilité principale est avant tout de conduire votre véhicule sans
prendre de risques. N’utilisez jamais votre appareil au volant, si cela est interdit par
la loi. Pour votre sécurité et celle des autres, faites preuve de bon sens et gardez à
l’esprit les conseils suivants :
• Utilisez un kit mains-libres.
• Apprenez à connaître les fonctions pratiques de votre appareil, comme par
exemple la numérotation rapide et la fonction de rappel automatique. Ces
fonctions vous permettent de gagner du temps et de rester concentré lorsque
vous passez ou recevez des appels sur votre appareil.
• Gardez votre appareil à portée de main. Soyez en mesure d’atteindre votre
appareil mobile sans quitter la route des yeux. Si vous recevez un appel entrant à
un moment inopportun, laissez votre messagerie vocale répondre à votre place.
• Informez votre interlocuteur que vous êtes au volant. Interrompez tout appel en
cas d’embouteillages ou de conditions météorologiques dangereuses. La pluie,
la neige, le verglas et une circulation dense sont des facteurs dangereux.
• Ne prenez pas de notes ou ne recherchez pas de numéros de téléphone. Noter
une liste de tâches à effectuer ou parcourir votre répertoire détourne votre
attention de votre responsabilité principale qui consiste à conduire sans prendre
de risques.
• Composez des numéros de manière raisonnable et évaluez l’état de la
circulation. Passez vos appels lorsque vous êtes immobilisé ou avant de vous
insérer dans la circulation. Essayez de passer vos appels de préférence lorsque
votre véhicule est stationné. Si vous devez absolument passer un appel,
composez les chiffres un à un, regardez la route et dans vos rétroviseurs, puis
reprenez la numérotation.Consignes de sécurité
153
• Ne poursuivez pas de conversations stressantes ou émotionnelles qui
pourraient vous distraire. Informez vos interlocuteurs que vous êtes au volant et
interrompez toute conversation susceptible d’altérer votre attention sur la route.
• Utilisez votre appareil pour demander de l’aide. En cas d’incendie, d’accident de
la route ou d’urgence médicale, composez le numéro d’urgence local.
• Utilisez votre appareil pour aider d’autres personnes en situation d’urgence.
Si vous êtes témoin d’un accident, d’une agression ou de toute autre situation
d’urgence mettant des vies en jeu, contactez les services d’urgence locaux.
• Appelez un service d’assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d’assistance, si
cela s’avère nécessaire. Si vous croisez un véhicule endommagé ne présentant
pas de danger immédiat, si vous constatez un feu rouge cassé, un accident
de la route sans gravité où personne ne semble blessé ou encore un véhicule
que vous savez volé, appelez un service d’assistance dépannage ou un service
spécial d’assistance autre que les services d’urgence.
Pour entretenir et bien utiliser votre appareil
Conservez votre appareil au sec
• L’humidité et tous types de liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les
circuits électroniques de votre appareil.
• En cas de contact avec un liquide, retirez la batterie sans allumer votre
téléphone. Séchez votre téléphone avec un chiffon et confiez-le à un service de
réparation.
• Les liquides modifient la couleur de l’étiquette indiquant que l’intérieur de
l’appareil a été endommagé. L’eau peut endommager votre appareil et entraîner
l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant.
N’utilisez pas ou ne rangez pas votre appareil dans des endroits
poussiéreux ou sales
La poussière peut causer des dysfonctionnements de votre appareil.
Ne posez pas votre appareil sur des surfaces inclinées
Si votre appareil tombe, il peut être endommagé.Consignes de sécurité
154
Ne conservez pas votre appareil dans des endroits chauds ou froids.
Utilisez votre appareil à des températures comprises entre -20°C et
50°C
• Votre appareil peut exploser si vous le laissez dans un véhicule fermé, la
température intérieure pouvant monter jusqu’à 80°C.
• N’exposez pas votre appareil à la lumière directe du soleil de manière prolongée
(comme par exemple sur le tableau de bord d’une voiture).
• Conservez la batterie à des températures allant de 0°C à 40°C.
Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité d’objets métalliques,
comme par exemple des pièces, des clés ou des colliers
• Votre appareil pourrait être déformé ou subir des dysfonctionnements.
• Les bornes de la batterie peuvent causer des incendies si elles sont mises en
contact avec des objets métalliques.
Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité de champs magnétiques
• Lorsqu’il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre appareil peut subir des
dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut se décharger.
• Les cartes à piste, comme par exemple les cartes de crédit, les cartes de
téléphone et les cartes d’embarquement peuvent être endommagées par les
champs magnétiques.
• N’utilisez pas de housses ou d’accessoires équipés de fermetures aimantées et
évitez toute exposition prolongée de votre appareil à des champs magnétiques.
Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de
radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine
chauffants ou de conteneurs à haute pression
• La batterie peut couler.
• Votre appareil peut surchauffer et causer un incendie.
Ne laissez pas tomber votre appareil et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs
• L’écran de votre appareil pourrait être endommagé.
• Votre appareil peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir des
dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou le déformez.Consignes de sécurité
155
N'utilisez pas le flash de l'appareil photo trop près des yeux de
personnes ou d'animaux
Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une perte
temporaire de la vue.
Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur
• Ne laissez pas la batterie en charge pendant plus d’une semaine, car une
surcharge risque de réduire sa durée de vie.
• Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine
se décharge progressivement et doit être rechargée avant utilisation.
• Lorsque le chargeur n’est pas utilisé, ne le laissez pas branché à une prise de
courant.
• Utilisez la batterie pour votre appareil uniquement.
N’utilisez que des batteries, chargeurs, accessoires et fournitures
homologué(e)s par Samsung
• Utiliser des batteries ou des chargeurs génériques peut réduire la durée de vie
de votre appareil ou provoquer des dysfonctionnements.
• Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l’utilisateur si celui-ci
utilise des accessoires ou des éléments non homologués par Samsung.
Ne mordez et ne portez pas à votre bouche l’appareil ou la batterie
• Mordre ou porter l’appareil ou la batterie à votre bouche pourrait endommager
votre appareil ou provoquer une explosion.
• Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent l’appareil de façon appropriée s’ils
doivent l’utiliser.
Pour parler dans l’appareil :
• Tenez l’appareil droit, comme vous le feriez avec un téléphone traditionnel.
• Parlez directement dans le microphone.
• Évitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre téléphone. Toucher l'antenne
peut réduire la qualité d'écoute ou provoquer une émission de radiofréquence
plus élevée que nécessaire.
• Lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone, tenez-le de manière détendue, appuyez
légèrement sur les touches, utilisez les fonctions spéciales de saisie (telles que
les modèles et la saisie intuitive) pour réduire le nombre de touches à manipuler
et faites des pauses régulières.Consignes de sécurité
156
Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil en marchant ou en
bougeant
Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d’éviter de vous blesser ou
de blesser d’autres personnes.
Ne placez pas votre appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à votre
ceinture
Vous pourriez vous blesser ou endommager votre appareil si vous tombiez.
Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vous-même votre
appareil
• Toute modification ou tout changement effectué(e) sur votre appareil peut
entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Pour tout besoin de service,
confiez votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung.
• Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une
explosion ou un incendie.
Ne peignez jamais votre appareil et n’y apposez jamais d’autocollants
La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles de l’appareil
et perturber son fonctionnement. Si vous êtes allergique à la peinture ou aux
pièces métalliques de l’appareil, vous pouvez souffrir de démangeaisons, d’eczéma
ou de toute autre réaction cutanée. Si ces symptômes apparaissent, cessez
immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin.
Pour nettoyer votre appareil :
• Essuyez votre appareil ou le chargeur avec un chiffon ou une gomme.
• Nettoyez les bornes de la batterie avec un morceau de coton ou un chiffon.
• N’utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents.
N’utilisez pas l’appareil si son écran est fissuré ou cassé
Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage. Confiez
votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung afin de le faire réparer.
Utilisez votre appareil uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions
auxquelles il est destiné
Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre
appareil dans un lieu publicConsignes de sécurité
157
Ne laissez pas les enfants utiliser votre appareil
Votre appareil n’est pas un jouet. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec l’appareil, car
ils pourraient se blesser ou blesser d’autre personnes, endommager l’appareil ou
passer des appels susceptibles d’augmenter vos frais de communication.
Installez l’appareil et ses accessoires avec précaution
• Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre appareil mobile et de ses accessoires dans
votre véhicule.
• Évitez de placer votre appareil ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone
d’ouverture des airbags. Si l’équipement mobile n’est pas installé correctement,
le déclenchement de l’airbag risque de provoquer des blessures graves.
Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé
Le recours aux services d’un technicien non agréé risque d’entraîner des dégâts sur
l’appareil et d’annuler la garantie du fabricant.
Manipulez les cartes SIM et les cartes mémoire avec soin
• Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou y lit des informations,
car vous risqueriez de perdre des données et/ou d’endommager la carte ou
l’appareil lui-même.
• Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les
interférences émises par d’autres appareils.
• Ne touchez pas les contacts dorés de la carte avec vos doigts ou avec des objets
métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux.
Assurez l’accès aux services d’urgence
Dans certaines zones ou dans certaines circonstances, il peut être impossible de
joindre les numéros d’urgence avec votre appareil. Avant de vous rendre dans des
régions isolées ou non couvertes, prévoyez un autre moyen pour contacter les
services d’urgence.
Veillez à sauvegarder les données importantes
Samsung ne sera en aucun cas tenu responsable en cas de perte de données.
Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur
Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur que vous avez
enregistrés sans la permission des détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire,
vous seriez en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le fabricant n’est
en aucun cas responsable de l’utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par les
droits d’auteur.Consignes de sécurité
158
Informations sur la certification DAS
Votre téléphone a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d'exposition aux
radiofréquences (RF) émises recommandées par le Conseil de l'Union européenne.
Ces normes empêchent la vente de téléphones mobiles qui dépassent le niveau
d'exposition maximal (également connu sous le nom de DAS ou Débit d'absorption
spécifique) de 2 W/kg.
Lors des tests, la valeur DAS maximum enregistrée pour ce modèle était de
0,338 W/kg. En condition normale d'utilisation, la valeur DAS réelle sera
généralement beaucoup plus faible, car le téléphone n'émet que l'énergie RF
nécessaire à la transmission du signal vers la station de base la plus proche. Le
téléphone minimise ainsi votre exposition globale à l'énergie RF en émettant
automatiquement à des niveaux plus faibles dès que cela est possible.
Par ailleurs, il est également recommandé d'utiliser autant que possible le kit
piéton. Cependant, on veillera dans ce cas à éloigner le téléphone du ventre des
femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des enfants et des adolescents.
Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des
téléphones portables exige de prendre de quelconques précautions.
Cependant, si certains s’inquiètent des risques potentiels liés à une durée
d’utilisation excessive du téléphone, nous leur conseillons d’utiliser le kit piéton afin
de tenir le téléphone portable éloigné de la tête et du corps.
La Déclaration de conformité figurant au dos de ce mode d'emploi prouve que
votre téléphone est conforme à la directive européenne relative aux équipements
terminaux de télécommunications et aux équipements radio. Pour plus
d'informations sur le DAS et les normes européennes correspondantes, veuillez
consulter le site Web de Samsung mobile.Consignes de sécurité
159
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit
(Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres
pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation
indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés
(chargeur, casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.) ne peuvent être
jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée
des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé
publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets.
Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un
développement durable.
Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou
à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les
points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage.
Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à
consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne
peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux.
Élimination de la batterie de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays
européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis
en place)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la
batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec
les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles
chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure,
de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la
directive CE 2006/66. Si la batterie n’est pas correctement éliminée, ces substances
peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement.
Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du
matériel, veillez à séparer la batterie des autres types de déchets et à la recycler via
votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et batteries.Consignes de sécurité
160
Limitation de responsabilité
Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil
appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers et sont protégés par les lois sur
les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété
intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre usage
personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces
contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée par le propriétaire des
contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf
autorisation expresse du propriétaire de contenus ou du fournisseur de services
concerné, il vous est interdit de modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer, de
diffuser, de transmettre, de traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une
quelconque manière et sur quelque support que ce soit, des contenus ou des
services affichés par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil ou d’en créer des dérivés.
LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS " EN L’ÉTAT ". DANS TOUTE
LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE, SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS LES
CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT OU IMPLICITEMENT,
À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE
IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE
QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG
NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L’ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU
L’EXHAUSTIVITÉ DES CONTENUS OU DES SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L’INTERMÉDIAIRE
DE CET APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y
COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ
CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS,
ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D’AVOCAT,
DES FRAIS OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L’UTILISATION DE
TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU PAR UN TIERS (OU DE TOUTE
INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE), MÊME SI SAMSUNG
A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE L’ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. DANS LA MESURE OÙ
CERTAINS PAYS N’AUTORISENT PAS L’EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA
LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES
EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES.
Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment, et
Samsung ne garantit pas qu’un contenu ou un service restera disponible pendant
une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis par des tiers au
moyen de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission qui échappent au contrôle
de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère général du présent avis, Samsung
décline expressément toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension
de tout contenu ou service fourni par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil.
Samsung n’est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux services.
Toute question ou demande de service portant sur les contenus ou les services doit
être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés.Index
161
actualités et météo 95
alarme
arrêter 115
créer 115
désactiver 115
AllShare 105
appareil
allumer et éteindre 18
aspect 19
icônes d’information 21
paramètres 125
personnaliser 29
touches 20
volet des raccourcis 26
appareil photo
capturer des photos 57
enregistrer des vidéos 64
personnaliser l’appareil
photo 62
personnaliser le
caméscope 67
appels
afficher les appels
manqués 45
conférence 44
kit piéton 43
numéros internationaux 43
rejeter 43
répondre 43
restreindre 47
signal 47
transférer 47
appels visio
passer un appel 42
répondre 43
utiliser des options 45
appels vocaux
passer un appel 42
répondre 43
utiliser des options 44
App Shop 96
batterie
charger 12
installer 11
Bluetooth
activer 99
envoyer des données 100
recevoir des données 101
rechercher d’autres appareils
et s’y connecter 100
calculatrice 118
calendrier
afficher des événements 83
créer des événements 83
carte mémoire
formater 17
insérer 15
retirer 16
carte SIM/USIM
installer 11
verrouiller 33
chronomètre 116
IndexIndex
162
organiser les
applications 28
écran tactile
utiliser 23
verrouiller 24
éditeur de photos 70
e-mail
afficher 54
créer des comptes 52
envoyer 53
galerie
afficher des photos 69
formats de fichier 68
lire des vidéos 70
gestionnaire de
fichiers 121
gestionnaire de tâches 123
Google Mail 50
Google Maps 90
Google Talk 54
horloge mondiale 116
Internet
voir navigateur Web
Jeux 97
journal d’appels 48
Kies air 119
langue d’affichage 135
lecteur MP3
ajouter des fichiers 74
créer des listes de
lecture 75
écouter de la musique 74
Cinéday 97
commande vocale 124
connexions
Bluetooth 99
DLNA 105
PC 111
VPN 113
Wi-Fi 101
connexions PC
Samsung Kies 111
stockage de masse 112
Windows Media Player 111
connexion VPN
créer 113
se connecter 114
contacts
copier 81
créer 79
importer ou exporter 82
numérotation rapide 80
rechercher 80
contenu du coffret 10
date et heure 29
dépannage 143
DLNA
voir AllShare 105
écran d’accueil
ajouter des éléments 25
ajouter des volets 26
écran de menu
accéder 27
ajouter un dossier ou un
volet 28Index
163
paramètres
accessibilité 140
affichage 129
appel 127
applications 132
à propos du téléphone 142
batterie 132
Bluetooth 125
comptes et synchro. 132
date & heure 140
économie d’énergie 131
langue et saisie 135
mouvement 141
options de
développement 141
plus 125
sauvegarde et
réinitialisation 139
sécurité 133
services de localisation 132
son 129
station d’accueil 139
stockage 131
utilisation des données 125
Wi-Fi 125
photos
afficher 69
capturer 57
capturer par scène 59
mode Action 61
mode Autoportrait 60
mode Beauté 62
mode Panorama 61
mode Sourire 60
Polaris Office 121
lecteur vidéo 67, 70
luminosité de l'écran 31
Maps 97
mémo texte
afficher 85
créer 85
mémo vocal
enregistrer 86
lire 86
messagerie instantanée 56
messagerie vocale 50
messages
accéder à la messagerie
vocale 50
créer des comptes
e-mail 52
envoyer un e-mail 53
envoyer un MMS 49
envoyer un SMS 48
Météo 98
mini journal 120
MMS
afficher 50
envoyer 49
mode de numérotation
fixe 46
mode Discret 30
mode Hors-ligne 18
navigateur Web
ajouter des favoris 89
surfer sur le Web 87
Orange et moi 98Index
164
transfert d’appel 47
verrouiller à l’aide du code
PIN 33
vidéos
enregistrer 64
lire 67, 70
Wi-Fi
activer 102
rechercher des réseaux et s’y
connecter 102
utiliser WPS 103
YouTube
mettre des vidéos en
ligne 94
visionner des vidéos 94
radio FM
écouter 76
enregistrer des stations 77
recherche Google 93
rejet automatique 46
répertoire
créer des contacts 79
créer des groupes 81
créer votre carte de
visite 80
rechercher des contacts 80
restriction d’appel 47
saisir du texte 34
Samsung Kies 111
Sauvegarde 96
signal d’appel 47
SMS
afficher 50
envoyer 48
Social Hub 56
Sonneries 98
synchronisation
avec le lecteur Windows
Média 111
avec un compte Web 40
tâches
afficher 84
créer 84
téléchargements
applications 38
fichiers 39
gestionnaire 118Déclaration de conformité (R&TTE)
Nous, Samsung Electronics
déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que le produit
Appareil mobile : GT-I9100
en relation avec cette déclaration est en conformité avec les normes suivantes et/
ou d’autres documents normatifs.
Sécurité EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A11:2009
DAS EN 50360 : 2001 / AC 2006
EN 62209-1 : 2006
CEM EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008)
EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005)
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009)
EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007)
Radio EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003)
EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006)
EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (03-2010)
EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (03-2010)
EN 300 440-1 V1.5.1 (03-2009)
EN 300 440-2 V1.3.1 (03-2009)
EN 301 893 V1.5.1 (12-2008)
Cet appareil a été testé et s’est avéré conforme aux normes relatives à l’émission de
fréquences radio. En outre, nous déclarons que cet appareil répond à la directive
1999/5/EC.
La procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l’article 10, puis reprise à
l’alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l’organisme
suivant :
BABT, Forsyth House,
Churchfield Road,
Walton-on-Thames,
Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK*
Numéro d’identification : 0168
Documentation technique détenue par :
Samsung Electronics QA Lab.
disponible sur simple demande.
(Représentant pour l’union européenne)
Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.
Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way,
Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK*
2011.05.23 Joong-Hoon Choi / Directeur de laboratoire
(lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité)
* Il ne s’agit pas de l’adresse du service après-vente de Samsung. Pour obtenir l’adresse ou le
numéro de téléphone du service après-vente de Samsung, reportez-vous au certificat de
garantie ou contactez le revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté ce produit.Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut ne pas correspondre
fidèlement à votre appareil en fonction de votre version logicielle.
French. 07/2012. Rev. 1.0
Pour installer Samsung Kies
1. Téléchargez la dernière version de Kies sur le site Web
de Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies) et installez le
logiciel sur votre ordinateur.
2. Branchez l’appareil à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble
de connexion PC.
3. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur votre
ordinateur pour lancer Samsung Kies.
Pour obtenir davantage d’informations, consultez l’aide
de Kies.
Protégez votre oreille lorsque vous utilisez
un casque ou des écouteurs
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume
élevé peut endommager votre audition.
• Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume
élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut détourner
votre attention et provoquer un accident.
• Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des
écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le volume
minimum nécessaire vous permettant d'entendre
votre conversation ou la musique.
www.samsung.com
使用说明书
GT-N71052
关于本说明书
本设备采用三星的高标准和专门技术，提供优质的移动通讯和娱乐体验。本使用说
明书专门设计用于详细介绍设备的功能和特性。
• 使用设备之前，请阅读本说明书，以确保安全和正确使用。
• 描述基于设备的默认设定。
• 图像和屏幕截图可能与实际产品的外观不同。
• 内容可能与最终产品不同，也可能与服务提供商或运营商提供的软件不
同。如有变更，恕不另行通知。如需获得最新版的说明书，请参阅三星网站
www.samsung.com。
• 可用功能和附加服务可能因设备、软件或服务提供商而异。
• 应用程序及其功能可能因国家、地区或硬件规格而异。对于由三星以外的提供
商应用程序造成的性能问题，三星概不负责。
• 对于编辑注册表设定或修改操作系统软件所造成的性能问题或不兼容性，三星
概不负责。尝试定制操作系统可能导致设备或应用程序无法正常工作。
• 本设备中提供的软件、声源、墙纸、图像及其他媒体以授权方式供有限使用。
针对商业或其他用途抽取和使用这些资料将违反版权法。对于非法使用媒体导
致的法律问题，用户应完全负责。
• 收发讯息、上传和下载、进行自动同步或使用定位服务可能会产生其他费用。
如欲避免产生额外费用，请选择合适的数据收费计划。有关详细信息，请联系
服务提供商。关于本说明书
3
• 随设备附带的默认应用程序随时可能更新，并可能在未经事先通知的情况下撤
消支持。如您对随设备附带的应用程序有疑问，请联系三星服务中心。对于用
户安装的应用程序，请联系服务提供商。
• 修改设备的操作系统或安装非官方来源的软件，可能会导致设备发生故障并损
坏或丢失数据。这些操作违反三星许可协议，并将使您的保修失效。
指示图标
警告：可能伤及自己或他人的情况
小心：可能损坏设备或其他设备的情况
注意：注释、使用提示或其他信息
版权
版权 © 2012 Samsung Electronics
本指南受国际版权法保护。
未经 Samsung Electronics 事先书面许可，不得以任何形式或方式，不论电子或是
机械方式复制、分发、转译或传播本指南中的任何内容，包括影印、录制或存储在
任何信息存储器和检索系统中。关于本说明书
4
商标
• SAMSUNG 和 SAMSUNG 徽标是 Samsung Electronics 的注册商标。
• Android 徽标、Google
™
、Google Maps
™
、Google Mail
™
、YouTube
™
、
Google Play
™
Store 和 Google Talk
™
是 Google, Inc. 的商标。
• 蓝牙®
是 Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 在全球的注册商标。
• Wi-Fi
®
、Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™
、Wi-Fi Direct
™
、Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™
和
Wi-Fi 徽标是 Wi-FiAlliance 的注册商标。
• 其他所有商标和版权的所有权归各自所有者所有。
DivX®
、DivX Certified®
和相关徽标是 Rovi
Corporation 或其子公司的商标，均为授权使用。
关于 DIVX 视像
DivX®
是由 Rovi Corporation 的子公司 DivX, LLC 创建的数字视频格式。本设备
已获得官方 DivX Certified®
认证，可播放 DivX 视像。请访问 www.divx.com 了解
详细信息，以及获取将文件转换为 DivX 视像的软件工具。
关于 DIVX 视像点播
此 DivX Certified®
设备必须先经过注册，然后才能播放购买的 DivX 视像点
播 (VOD) 电影。将 DivX VOD 置于设备的安装菜单以获得登录编号。请在
vod.divx.com 上了解更多关于完成注册的信息。
DivX Certified®
播放 DivX®
视像的分辨率高达 HD 720p，包括付费内容。5
目录
入门指南
8 设备部位图
9 按钮
10 S 笔
10 包装内容
11 安装 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池
14 为电池充电
16 插入存储卡
18 打开和关闭设备
19 握持设备
19 锁定和解锁设备
19 调整音量
20 切换至静音模式
基本功能
21 指示器图标
22 使用触摸屏
25 控制动作
32 扩展页面
32 启动多窗口
33 使用 S 笔
37 S 笔空中视图
38 手写笔防丢失提醒
38 快捷命令
39 通知
40 主屏幕
42 使用桌面工具
42 使用应用程序
43 应用程序屏幕
44 帮助
44 单手操作
45 输入文本
47 连接 Wi-Fi 网络
48 设置帐户
49 传输文件
50 设备安全防护
52 升级设备
通讯
53 手机
58 联系人
62 信息
63 电子邮件
65 谷歌邮箱
66 GoogleTalk
67 Google+
67 碰头
68 ChatON目录
6
实用程序
96 S Note
99 S日历
101 Dropbox
102 云
103 时钟
105 计算器
105 录音机
107 S Voice
108 Google
108 语音搜索
109 我的文件
109 下载
旅行和本地资讯
110 地图
111 本地
112 导航
设定
113 关于设定
113 Wi-Fi
114 蓝牙
114 数据使用
114 更多设置
116 主屏模式
116 阻止模式
117 声音
Web 和网络
69 互联网
71 Chrome
72 蓝牙
73 AllShare Cast
73 AllShare Play
74 群组广播
75 NFC
76 S Beam
媒体
77 音乐播放器
78 照相机
85 相册
88 PaperArtist
89 视频播放器
90 YouTube
91 Flipboard
应用程序和媒体商店
92 Play 商店
93 SamsungApps
93 S Suggest
94 Game Hub
94 Music Hub
95 Readers Hub
95 影视圈
95 学习圈目录
7
117 显示
118 存储
119 省电模式
119 电池
119 应用程序管理器
119 定位服务
120 锁定屏幕
121 安全
122 单手操作
122 语言和输入
125 云
125 备份并重置
125 添加账户
125 动作
127 S Pen
127 配件
128 日期和时间
128 辅助功能
129 开发者选项
130 关于设备
故障排除8
入门指南
设备部位图
返回键
多功能插孔
通知指示灯
听筒
距离传/
光传感器
功能表键
话筒
前置照相机
电源开关键
主页键
触摸屏
后置照相机
GPS 天线
主天线
耳机插口
扬声器麦克风
音量键
闪光
后盖
扬声器
S 笔入门指南
9
设备顶端的麦克风仅在使用扬声器或拍摄录像时启动。
• 请勿用手或其他物体挡住天线区域。否则可能会造成连接问题或耗尽电
池电量。
• 请勿使用屏幕保护装置。否则会导致感应器故障。
• 请勿让水接触触摸屏。触摸屏在潮湿环境中或接触到水时可能发生故障。
按钮
按钮 功能
电源开关键
• 紧按住以打开或关闭设备。
• 如果设备存在致命错误、停止工作或冻结，紧按住
8-10 秒以重置设备。
• 按下以锁定或解锁设备。触摸屏关闭时，设备进入锁
定模式。
功能表键
• 点击以打开当前屏幕的可用选项列表。
• 在主屏幕上点住以启动 Google 搜索。
主页键
• 按下以返回主屏幕。
• 紧按住以打开当前应用程序的列表。
• 按两下以启动 S Voice。
返回键 • 点击以返回上一个屏幕。
音量键 • 按下以调整设备音量。入门指南
10
S 笔
S Pen
触控笔笔尖
S Pen
触控笔按钮
名称 功能
S Pen 触控笔笔尖 • 执行 S 笔的基本操作。(第 22 页)
S Pen 触控笔按钮 • 执行 S 笔的高级操作。(第 33 页)
包装内容
检查产品包装盒中是否包含以下用品：
• 设备
• 电池
• 快速入门指南
只可使用经过三星认可的软件。盗版或非法软件可能会导致损坏或故障，这
些情况不涵盖在保修范围内。入门指南
11
• 设备随附的用品及任何可用配件可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而异。
• 随附的用品专为此设备设计，并不兼容于其他设备。
• 外观和规格如有变更，恕不另行通知。
• 可以向本地三星零售商购买其他配件。购买前请确保它们与设备兼容。
• 其他配件可能与您的设备不兼容。
• 只可使用经过三星认可的配件。使用未经认可的配件所造成的故障不属
保修服务范畴。
• 是否提供所有配件完全取决于制造公司。有关可用配件的更多信息，请
参阅三星网站。
安装 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池
安装移动电话服务提供商提供的 SIM 或 USIM 卡以及随附的电池。
本设备仅可使用 microSIM 卡。
1
取下后盖。
• 取下后盖时，请务必小心操作，以免伤及自己的指甲。
• 请勿过度弯曲或扭转后盖。否则会损坏后盖。入门指南
12
2
将 SIM 或 USIM 卡插入设备，使其金色触点面向下。
• 请勿取下覆盖天线的保护带，否则可能会损坏天线。
• 请勿将存储卡插入 SIM 卡插槽中。如果存储卡在 SIM 卡插槽中卡住，请
将设备送至三星服务中心取出存储卡。
• 小心不要丢失或让他人使用 SIM 或 USIM 卡。对于卡丢失或被盗所造成
的任何损害或不便，三星概不负责。
3
将 SIM 或 USIM 卡推进插槽，直到其锁定到位。
4
插入电池。
2
1入门指南
13
5
装回后盖。
取出 SIM 或 USIM 卡和电池
1
取下后盖。
2
卸下电池。
3
推入 SIM 或 USIM 卡，直到其脱离设备，然后将其抽出。入门指南
14
为电池充电
首次使用前，先为电池充电。使用充电器为电池充电。也可通过 USB 数据线将设
备连接至电脑来为设备充电。
仅使用三星许可的充电器、电池和数据线。未经许可的充电器或数据线会导
致电池爆炸或损坏设备。
• 电池电量不足时，设备会发出警告音并显示电池电量不足讯息。
• 如果电池完全放电，连接充电器时，设备将无法立即开启。开启设备前，
让电量耗尽的电池先充电几分钟。
• 如果一次使用多个应用程序、使用网络应用程序或需要连接至其他设备的
应用程序，电池将会快速耗尽。为避免断开网络连接或数据传输时断电，
务必为电池完全充电后再使用这些应用程序。
使用充电器充电
将充电器的小端插头插入设备的多功能插孔，并将充电器的大端插头插入电源插
座。
充电器连接不当可能会严重损坏设备。对于因误操作造成的任何损坏，将不
予保修。入门指南
15
• 虽然在充电时可以使用设备，但这可能会延长电池完全充电的时间。
• 如果充电时电源电压不稳定，触摸屏可能无法正常工作。这时，请从设
备上拔下充电器。
• 设备在充电时会变热。这属于正常情况，不会影响设备的使用寿命或性
能。如果电池比平常更热，则充电器可能停止充电。
• 如果设备无法正常充电，请将设备和充电器送至三星服务中心。
完全充电后，断开设备与充电器的连接。先从设备上拔下充电器，然后将其从电源
插座拔下。
请勿在取下充电器前取出电池。否则可能损坏设备。
为了节能，不用时，请拔下充电器。充电器不带电源开关，因此不使用时，
必须要从电源插座上拔下充电器，以免浪费电。充电时，设备应该保持靠近
电源插座。
检查电池充电状态
若在设备关闭时为电池充电，以下图标将表明当前的电池充电状态：
正在充电 完全充电入门指南
16
减少电池消耗
本设备提供了若干选项，可助您节省电池电量。自定义以下选项并取消后台运行的
功能，可以延长每次充电后设备的使用时间：
• 启动省电模式。
• 在不用设备时，按下电源开关键切换到休眠模式。
• 使用任务管理器关闭不必要的应用程序。
• 取消蓝牙功能。
• 取消 Wi-Fi 功能。
• 取消应用程序的自动同步功能。
• 减少背景灯时间。
• 降低显示屏的亮度。
插入存储卡
本设备可使用容量最高为 64 GB 的存储卡。取决于存储卡制造商和类别，有些存
储卡可能与您的设备并不兼容。
• 有些存储卡可能与设备并不完全兼容。使用不兼容的存储卡可能会损坏
设备或存储卡，或损坏存储在卡中的数据。
• 正面朝上插入存储卡。
• 设备仅支持 FAT 文件系统的存储卡。插入不同文件系统格式的卡时，设
备会要求重新格式化存储卡。
• 频繁写入和删除数据会缩短存储卡的使用寿命。
• 将存储卡插入设备时，存储卡的文件目录将出现在内部存储器下的
extSdCard 文件夹中。入门指南
17
1
取下后盖。
2
将金色触点面向下插入存储卡。
3
将存储卡推进插槽，直至锁定到位。
4
装回后盖。
取出存储卡
取出存储卡前，先解除固定以便安全取出。在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 设定 →
存储 → 卸载SD卡。
1
取下后盖。
2
推入存储卡，直到其脱离设备，然后将其抽出。
3
装回后盖。
请勿在设备传输或访问信息时取出存储卡。否则会导致数据丢失或损坏，或
损坏存储卡或设备。对于误用损坏的存储卡所造成的损失(包括数据丢失)，
三星概不负责。入门指南
18
格式化存储卡
在电脑上格式化的存储卡可能与设备不兼容。在设备上格式化存储卡。
在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 设定 → 存储 → 格式化SD卡 → 格式化SD卡 → 全部
删除。
格式化存储卡前，记住要将所有重要数据备份到设备。因用户操作而导致的
数据丢失，制造商不提供保修服务。
打开和关闭设备
首次打开设备时，按照屏幕上的指示设定设备。
紧按住电源开关键几秒钟以打开和关闭设备。
• 在禁止使用无线装置的区域 (例如飞机和医院)，请遵守所有张贴的警告和
授权人员的指示。
• 紧按住电源开关键，然后点击飞行模式以禁用无线功能。
如欲关闭设备，紧按住电源开关键，然后点击关机。入门指南
19
握持设备
请勿用手或其他物体挡住天线区域。否则可能会造成连接问题或耗尽电池电量。
锁定和解锁设备
不在使用时，锁定设备以避免不必要的操作。按下电源开关键关闭屏幕并使设备进
入锁定模式。如果设备在一段指定的时间内没有使用，将会被自动锁定。
如欲解锁设备，在触摸屏关闭时，按下电源开关键或主页键，在屏幕上任意点击一
下，然后向任意方向快速移动手指。
可以使用动作解锁设备。在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕
锁定 → 动作。如欲通过动作解锁设备，在屏幕上点住一个点，然后向前倾斜设
备。
调整音量
向上或向下按下音量键以调整铃声音量，或调整音乐或视频播放的音量。入门指南
20
切换至静音模式
使用以下方法之一：
• 向下紧按住音量键，直至其切换至安静模式。
• 紧按住电源开关键，然后点击静音。
• 打开屏幕顶部的通知面板，然后点击声音。
设定设备在静音模式中对各种活动进行提示。紧按住电源开关键，然后点击振动。21
基本功能
指示器图标
屏幕顶部显示的图标提供有关设备状态的信息。下表中列出的图标为最常见的图
标。
图标 意义
无信号
信号强度
漫游中 (在正常服务区外)
已连接 GPRS 网络
已连接 EDGE 网络
已连接 UMTS 网络
已连接 HSDPA网络
已连接 LTE 网络
已连接 Wi-Fi
已启动蓝牙功能
已启动 GPS
正在通话
未接来电
已同步网络
已连接至电脑
无 SIM 卡或 USIM 卡
新简讯或多媒体简讯
已启动闹钟
已启动静音模式
已启动振动模式
已启动飞行模式基本功能
22
图标 意义
发生错误或需要注意
电池电量
使用触摸屏
仅使用手指或 S 笔来使用触摸屏。
• 禁止触摸屏接触其他电子设备。静电放电会导致触摸屏发生故障。
• 请勿让触摸屏接触到水。触摸屏在潮湿环境中或接触到水时可能发生故
障。
• 为免损坏触摸屏，请勿使用任何尖利物体点触屏幕，或在指尖点触屏幕
时用力过猛。
• 使触摸屏待机过长时间可能会产生残像 (屏幕老化) 或重像。不使用设备
时请关闭触摸屏。
手指姿势
点击
如欲打开应用程序、选择功能表项目、按下屏幕上的按钮或使用屏幕键盘输入字
符，用一只手指点击即可。基本功能
23
点住
点住某一项目 2 秒以上以访问可用选项。
拖动
如欲将图标、缩略图或预览移至新位置，将其点住并拖至目标位置即可。
双击
在网页、地图或图像上双击以将某一部分放大。再次双击返回。基本功能
24
快速移动
在主屏幕或应用程序屏幕上向左或向右快速移动以查看其他面板。向上或向下快速
移动以滚动查看网页或列表，例如联系人。
合拢
在网页、地图或图像上分开两指可将某一部分放大。合拢则缩小。基本功能
25
控制动作
可通过简单的动作轻松控制设备。
使用动作前，确保动作功能已启动。在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 设定 → 动作，
然后向右拖动动作开关。
剧烈晃动或碰撞设备可能导致意外输入。如欲了解如何正确控制动作，点击
应用程序 → 设定 → 动作 → 了解动作。(第 126 页)
旋转屏幕
许多应用程序既可纵向显示，又可横向显示。旋转设备会导致显示屏自动调整以适
合新屏幕的方向。
如欲避免显示屏自动旋转，打开通知面板，然后取消选择屏幕旋转。
• 有些应用程序不允许屏幕旋转。
• 有些应用程序会根据方向显示不同的屏幕。旋转至横向时，计算器会变
为科学计算器。基本功能
26
拿起
设备闲置一段时间或在屏幕关闭的情况下拿起设备时，如果有未接来电或新讯息，
设备将会振动。
靠近耳朵
查看通话、讯息或联系人详细信息时，拿起并将设备靠近耳机即可拨打电话。基本功能
27
平移以移动
点住某个项目，然后向左或向右移动设备即可将项目移至主屏幕或应用程序屏幕上
的另一面板。
平移以浏览
图像放大显示时，点住屏幕上某点，然后朝任意方向移动设备即可浏览图像。基本功能
28
双击
双击设备以移至联系人或电子邮件列表的顶部。
旋转
屏幕锁定时，点住屏幕，然后将设备旋转至横向即可启动照相机。如欲使用此动
作，在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 锁屏选项，然后向右拖动
照相机快速访问开关。基本功能
29
翻转
翻转设备即可关闭铃声或暂停媒体播放。
摇晃
• 摇晃设备以搜索蓝牙设备。
• 摇晃设备以更新电邮列表或来自 Yahoo News、Yahoo Finance 或
AccuWeather 的资讯。
更新将不适用于主屏幕上的桌面工具。基本功能
30
掠过
将手在屏幕上扫过可截取屏幕截图。图像储存在相册 → Screenshots 中。使用有
些应用程序时无法截取屏幕截图。
覆盖
用手掌覆盖屏幕可暂停媒体播放。基本功能
31
倾斜
点住屏幕上的两点，然后来回倾斜设备即可放大或缩小。
移动
触摸屏关闭时，将手移过距离/光传感器即可打开屏幕并查看未接来电和新讯息的
数量，以及电池电量级别等等。基本功能
32
扩展页面
使用此功能以基于您的操作使用指定的应用程序。在以下情况中，将会出现与操作
相关的页面：
• 从插槽拔出 S 笔。
• 将耳机或底座连接至设备。
• 在漫游时。
启动多窗口
使用此功能以在屏幕上同时运行两个应用程序。
• 只有多窗口面板上的应用程序可以运行。
• 启动包含多媒体文件的应用程序 (例如音乐或视频)时，两个文件的声音均
会播放。
• 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此功能可能无法使用。
如欲使用多窗口，在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 显示，然后勾选多窗口。
使用多窗口面板
如欲启动多窗口，点住 。多窗口面板出现在屏幕的左侧。选择一个应用程序，
然后将另一应用程序拖至新位置。 如欲取消多窗口，再次点住 。
点击面板手柄以隐藏或显示面板。面板打开时，点住手柄并将其向拖至屏幕的边缘
以移动面板。面板隐藏时，点住手柄并将其向左或向右拖动以移动手柄。基本功能
33
使用 S 笔
随附的 S 笔可用于轻松选择项目或执行功能。配合按钮使用 S 笔执行某些操作尤
其方便，例如捕捉屏幕。
从插槽拔出 S 笔以便使用。
从插槽拔出 S 笔时，设备将检测触控笔并执行以下操作：
• 打开触摸屏 (若其关闭)。
• 启动 S Note (通话期间)。
• 打开 S 笔页面 (从主页屏幕)。
• S 笔的笔尖不可更换。如果笔尖反应变得迟缓，购买新的 S 笔。
• 如果 S 笔无法正常使用，将其送往三星服务中心。请参阅三星网站以了
解更多有关 S 笔的信息。
• 为获得最佳效果，请尽量使 S 笔与屏幕成直角，而不要以锐角使用。
• 功能表键和返回键无法通过 S 笔启动。基本功能
34
打开功能表
按下 S 笔按钮的同时，画出 可打开屏幕可用选项的列表。
撤消上一操作
按下 S 笔按钮的同时，画出 可撤消上一操作。基本功能
35
捕捉屏幕图像
按下 S 笔按钮的同时，触碰屏幕，直到听到“咔哒”一声。屏幕截图将储存在
相册 → Screenshots 文件夹中。
可以在屏幕上绘画、书写，或裁切屏幕截图。编辑的图像将储存在相册 → IMG_
edited 文件夹中。
使用有些应用程序时无法截取屏幕截图。
启动 S Note
按下 S 笔按钮的同时，双击屏幕即可启动 S Note。基本功能
36
选择文本
按下 S 笔按钮的同时，在文本上向左或向右拖动进行选择。如果在行之间拖动，
可能会选择不必要的文本。如欲仅选择想要的文本，在文本中间拖过或拖动文本选
择图标。
Samsung UserManual
启动快捷命令
按下 S 笔按钮的同时，在屏幕上向上拖动 S 笔即可启动快捷命令。
在快捷命令屏幕上，画出手势命令可启动指定的应用程序或功能。基本功能
37
选择和捕捉图像
按下 S 笔按钮的同时，在某一区域周围画出线条以选择该区域。选定的区域将储
存在相册 → Screenshots 文件夹中。从出现在屏幕底部的图标中选择欲用于选定
区域的应用。
S 笔空中视图
将 S 笔靠近屏幕时，屏幕上会出现指针。将指针移至文件、主题或选项以在弹出
窗口中预览内容或查看信息。您可以通过将指针移至屏幕的 (上/下/左/右) 边缘来
滚动查看面板或列表。基本功能
38
手写笔防丢失提醒
如果触摸屏关闭并且 S 笔从设备拔下，设备会显示弹出提示并在您行走时发出声
音。访问 S 笔设置以启动或取消此功能。
快捷命令
使用此功能以在屏幕上画出手势命令来拨打电话、发送讯息或搜索内容。按下 S
笔按钮的同时，在屏幕上向上拖动 S 笔即可启动快捷命令。
添加手势命令
点击 → 添加一个命令 → 选择应用程序或选择功能/设置。选择应用程序或功能
→ 选项。画出新的手势命令，然后点击完成。
使用手势命令
画出手势命令以启动应用程序或功能。
如欲执行特定的任务，在手势命令后面画出姓名或电话号码等关键字。例如，画出
@ 时，电邮应用程序将会启动。在 @ 后面添加收件人姓名后，电邮撰写屏幕将会
打开，以便您向该收件人发送电邮。基本功能
39
通知
通知图标出现在屏幕顶部的状态栏上，报告未接来电、新讯息、日历事件、设备状
态等等。从状态栏向下拖动以打开通知面板。滚动列表以查看其他提示。如欲关闭
通知面板，向上拖动位于屏幕底部上的横条。
从通知面板中，可以查看设备的当前状态并使用以下选项：
• Wi-Fi：启动或取消 Wi-Fi 功能。
• GPS：启动或取消 GPS 功能。
• 声音：启动或取消静音模式。可以在静音模式中将设备设定为振动或静音。
• 屏幕旋转：允许或避免界面在旋转设备时旋转。
• 蓝牙：启动或取消蓝牙功能。
• 移动数据：启动或取消数据连接。
• 阻止模式：启动或取消阻止模式。在阻止模式下，设备将阻止通知。如欲选择
将要阻止的通知，点击设定 → 阻止模式。
• 省电模式：启动或取消省电模式。
• AllShare Cast：启动或取消AllShare Cast 功能。
• 多窗口：设定为使用多窗口。
可用的选项可能随所在地区或服务提供商而异。基本功能
40
主屏幕
主屏幕是访问所有设备功能的起点。它显示指示器图标、桌面工具、应用程序的快
捷方式及其他。
主屏幕可能具有多个面板。如欲查看其他面板，向左或向右滚动。
更改主屏幕模式
主屏幕具有基本和简易模式。在简易模式下，可以通过向主屏幕添加快捷方式来轻
松访问常用联系人、应用程序和设定。
如欲切换至简易模式，在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 设定 → 主屏模式 → 简易模
式 → 应用。
重排项目
添加应用程序图标
在主屏幕上，点击应用程序，点住应用程序图标，然后将其拖入面板预览。
添加项目
通过添加桌面工具或文件夹自定义主屏幕。
在主屏幕上点住空白区域，然后选择以下类别之一：
• 应用程序和小组件：向主屏幕添加小组件或应用程序。
• 文件夹：创建新文件夹。
移动项目
点住项目并将其拖至新位置。如欲将其移至另一面板，将其拖至屏幕一侧。基本功能
41
移除项目
点住项目并将其拖至出现在主屏幕顶部的回收站。回收站变红时，将其放开。
重排面板
添加新面板
点击 → 编辑页 → 。
移动面板
点击 → 编辑页，点住面板预览，然后将其拖至新位置。
移除面板
点击 → 编辑页，点住面板预览，然后将其拖至屏幕底部的回收站。
设置墙纸
将存储在设备中的图像或照片设置为主屏幕的墙纸。
在主屏幕上，点击 → 设置墙纸 → 主屏，然后选择以下选项之一：
• 相册：查看设备照相机拍摄的照片或从互联网下载的图像。
• 动态墙纸：查看动态图像。
• 墙纸：查看墙纸图像。
然后选择图像并点击设置墙纸。或者选择图像，通过拖动边框来调整图像大小，然
后点击完成。基本功能
42
使用桌面工具
桌面工具是小型应用程序，可在主屏幕上提供便捷功能和信息。如欲使用桌面工
具，将其从桌面工具面板添加至主屏幕。
• 有些桌面工具连接至网络服务。使用基于网络的桌面工具可能会产生额
外的费用。
• 可用的桌面工具可能会因所在地区或服务提供商而异。
添加桌面工具至主屏幕
在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 小组件。在桌面工具面板上向左或向右滚动，然后
点住桌面工具以将其添加至主屏幕。
使用设置快捷方式桌面工具
在主屏幕上，点击应用程序 → 小组件，然后点住设置快捷方式以打开设置选项的列
表。选择设置选项以将其添加至主屏幕作为快捷方式。
使用应用程序
此设备可以运行许多不同类型的应用程序，范围包括媒体到互联网应用程序。
打开应用程序
在主屏幕或应用程序屏幕上，选择应用程序图标以将其打开。
从最近使用的应用程序中打开
紧按住主页键以打开最近使用的应用程序列表。
选择应用程序图标以打开。基本功能
43
关闭应用程序
关闭不在使用的应用程序以节省电池电量并保持设备性能。
紧按住主页键，点击 ，然后点击应用程序旁边的结束以将其关闭。如欲关闭所
有运行中的应用程序，点击全部结束。或者，也可以紧按住主页键，然后点击 。
应用程序屏幕
应用程序屏幕显示所有应用程序的图标，包括新安装的应用程序。
在主屏幕上，点击应用程序以打开应用程序屏幕。
如欲查看其他面板，向左或向右滚动。
重排应用程序
点击 → 编辑，点住应用程序，然后将其拖至新位置。如欲将其移至另一面板，
将其拖至屏幕一侧。
通过文件夹整理
将相关的应用程序一起归入文件夹以便于管理。
点击 → 编辑，点住应用程序，然后将其拖至新建文件夹。输入文件夹名称，然
后点击确定。通过拖放操作将应用程序放入新文件夹，然后点击保存以储存排列。
重排面板
在屏幕上合拢手指，点住面板预览，然后将其拖至新位置。基本功能
44
安装应用程序
使用应用程序商店，例如 Samsung Apps 下载和安装应用程序。
卸载应用程序
点击 → 卸载，然后选择应用程序以卸载。
设备附带的默认应用程序无法卸载。
共享应用程序
可通过电邮、蓝牙或其他方式与其他用户共享下载的应用程序。
点击 → 共享应用程序，选择应用程序，点击完成，然后选择共享方式。接下来
的步骤因选择的方式而异。
帮助
访问帮助信息以了解如何使用设备和应用程序，或配置重要设置。
点击应用程序屏幕上的帮助。选择项目以查看提示。
如果已隐藏帮助弹出窗口，如欲重置，点击显示帮助提示弹出窗口，然后勾选项
目。
单手操作
可以启动单手操作模式以便于使用。在此模式下，应用程序界面将变为易于使用单
手操作的状态。
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 单手操作。勾选用于此模式的应用程序或功能。基本功能
45
输入文本
使用三星键盘或语音输入功能输入文本。
有些语言不支持文本输入。如欲输入文本，必须将输入语言改为受支持的语
言。
更改键盘类型
点击任何字段，打开通知面板，点击选择输入法，然后选择要使用的键盘类型。
使用三星键盘
更改键盘布局
点住 ，点击 → 纵向键盘类型，然后点击 Qwerty键盘或 3x4 键盘。
在 3x4 键盘上，每个按键具有三到四个字符。如欲输入某个字符，反复点
击对应于该字符的按键。
断开至下一行。
删除前一个字符。
输入标点符号。
输入大写字母。
切换到手写模式。
输入空格。
输入大写字母
输入字符之前点击 。如欲全部输入大写字母，点击该按钮两次。基本功能
46
更改语言键盘
向左或向右滑动空格键以更改语言键盘。
手写框
点击 ，然后用手指或 S 笔书写字词。输入字符时会显示建议字词。选择建议字
词。
通过语音输入文本
启动语音输入功能，然后对着话筒说话。设备会显示您说的话。
如果设备未正确识别您说的话语，点击带下划线的文本，然后从下拉列表中选择替
代字词或短语。
如欲更改或添加语音识别的语言，点击屏幕底部的当前语言。
完成后，点击 。
复制和粘贴
在文本上点住，拖动 或 以选择更多或更少文本，然后点击 以复制，或
以剪切。选定的文本将复制到剪贴板。
如欲将其粘贴到文本输入字段，在欲输入文本的位置点住，然后点击粘贴。基本功能
47
连接 Wi-Fi 网络
将设备连接至 Wi-Fi 网络以使用互联网或与其他设备共享媒体文件。(第 113 页)
打开和关闭 Wi-Fi
打开通知面板，然后点击 Wi-Fi 以将其打开或关闭。
• 本设备使用非统一的频率，目的是在所有欧洲国家中使用。在欧盟，用户
在室内使用 WLAN 时不受任何限制，但不允许在室外环境使用 WLAN。
• 不在使用时请关闭 Wi-Fi 以节省电池电量。
加入 Wi-Fi 网络
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → Wi-Fi，然后向右拖动 Wi-Fi 开关。
从检测到的 Wi-Fi 网络列表中选择网络，输入密码 (如有必要)，然后点击连接。需
要输入密码的网络会显示锁图标。设备连接至 Wi-Fi 网络后，只要该网络可用，设
备就会自动连接至网络。
添加 Wi-Fi 网络
如果所需的网络没有出现在网络列表中，点击网络列表底部的添加 Wi-Fi 网络。在
网络 SSID 中输入网络名称，选择安全类型并输入密码 (如果不是开放网络)，然后
点击储存。
忘记 Wi-Fi 网络
任何曾经使用过的网络，包括当前网络均可能会被忘记，设备也会因此无法自动连
接至这些网络。在网络列表中选择网络，然后点击忘记。基本功能
48
设置帐户
谷歌应用程序 (例如 Play 商店) 需要使用谷歌帐户，Samsung Apps 也需要使用三
星帐户。创建谷歌和三星帐户以获得最佳的设备体验。
添加帐户
按照未登录的情况下打开谷歌应用程序时出现的指示设置谷歌帐户。
如欲登录或注册谷歌帐户，在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 添加账户 →
Google。在这之后，点击新建注册，或点击现有，然后按照屏幕上的指示完成帐
户设置。设备上可使用多个谷歌帐户。
同理设置三星帐户。
移除帐户
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定，在账户下选择帐户名称，选择要移除的帐户，然后
点击移除账户。基本功能
49
传输文件
将音频、视频、图像或其他类型的文件从设备移至电脑，或反之。
部分应用程序支持以下文件格式。不支持某些文件格式，具体取决于设备的
软件版本。
• 音乐：mp3、m4a、mp4、3gp、3ga、wma、ogg、oga、aac 和 flac
• 图像：bmp、gif、jpg 和 png
• 录像：3gp、mp4、avi、wmv、flv 和 mkv
• 文档：doc、docx、xls、xlsx、ppt、pptx、pdf、和 txt
连接 Samsung Kies
Samsung Kies 是一个用来管理媒体库、联系人和日历并与三星设备进行同步的电
脑应用程序。从三星网站下载最新的 Samsung Kies。
1
使用 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。
Samsung Kies 在电脑上自动启动。如果 Samsung Kies 未能启动，双击电脑
上的 Samsung Kies 图标。
2
在设备和电脑之间传输文件。
有关详细信息，请参阅 Samsung Kies 帮助。
连接 Windows Media Player
确保在电脑上安装了 Windows Media Player。
1
使用 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。
2
打开 Windows Media Player 并同步音乐文件。基本功能
50
作为媒体设备连接
1
使用 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。
2
打开通知面板，然后点击已连接为媒体设备 → 媒体设备 ( MTP )。
如果电脑不支持媒体传输协议或未安装任何相应的驱动程序，点击摄像头
( PTP )。
3
在设备和电脑之间传输文件。
设备安全防护
使用安全功能避免他人使用或访问储存在设备中的个人数据和信息。无论何时解
锁，设备均需要解锁码。
设置面部解锁
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 面部解锁。
使面部适合要拍摄的相框。然后设置备份解锁 PIN 码或图案解锁屏幕，以免面部
解锁失败。
设置面部和语音解锁
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 面部与语音。
使面部适合要拍摄的相框并设置语音命令。然后设置备份解锁 PIN 码或图案解锁
屏幕，以免面部和语音解锁失败。基本功能
51
设置图案
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 图案。
连接四个或四个以上点画出图案，然后再次画出图案进行验证。设置辅助解锁 PIN
码。
设置备份解锁 PIN 码以在您忘记图案时解锁屏幕。
设置 PIN 码
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → PIN 码。
输入至少四位数字，然后再次输入密码进行验证。
设置密码
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 锁定屏幕 → 屏幕锁定 → 密码。
输入至少四个字符 (包括数字和符号)，然后再次输入密码进行验证。
解锁设备
按下电源开关键或主页键打开屏幕，然后输入解锁码。
如果忘记解锁码，请将设备送往三星服务中心进行重置。基本功能
52
升级设备
设备可升级至最新的软件。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此功能可能无法使用。
升级 Samsung Kies
启动 Samsung Kies 并将设备连接至电脑。Samsung Kies 将自动识别设备并在对
话框中显示可用的更新 (如果有)。在对话框中单击“更新”按钮以开始升级。请参
阅 Samsung Kies 帮助以获得有关如何升级的详细信息。
• 设备升级时，请勿关闭电脑或断开 USB 数据线。
• 升级设备时，请勿将其他媒体设备连接至电脑。否则可能会干扰更新过
程。
空中升级
设备可通过空中固件升级 (FOTA) 服务直接升级至最新的软件。
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 关于设备 → 系统更新 → 更新。53
通讯
手机
使用此应用程序拨打或接听电话。
在应用程序屏幕上点击手机。
拨打电话
拨打电话
使用以下方法之一：
• 键盘：使用键盘输入数字，然后点击 。
• 记录：从来电和拨出电话的历史记录和讯息中拨打电话。
• 我的收藏：从收藏联系人的列表中拨打电话。
• 联系人：从联系人列表中拨打电话。
快速拨号数字
对于快速拨号数字，点住对应的数字。
号码预测
在键盘上输入号码时，会自动出现预测号码。选择其中一个号码进行拨打。通讯
54
查找联系人
在联系人列表中输入姓名、电话号码或电邮地址查找联系人。输入字符时，预测的
联系人将会出现。选择要拨打的联系人。
拨打国际电话
点住 0，直到 + 号出现。输入国家代码、区号和电话号码，然后点击 。
通话期间
可供使用的操作包括：
• ：保持通话。或紧按住耳机按钮。点击 返回保持的通话，或紧按住耳机按
钮。
• 添加通话：拨打第二个电话。
• 键盘：打开键盘。
• 扬声器：启动扬声器。使用扬声器时，使设备远离耳朵。
• 静音：关闭话筒使对方听不到自己的声音。
• 耳机：如果蓝牙耳机连接至设备，则切换至蓝牙耳机。
• 切换：在两个通话之间切换。
• 合并：连接至两个通话时发起多方通话。重复此操作可以添加更多方。只有启
动了多方通话服务，此功能才可用。
• → 联系人：打开联系人列表。
• → 讯息：发送讯息。
• → S Note：建立便笺。
• → 噪音降低关：取消噪音减少功能消除背景噪音，以使对方听得更清楚。
• → My call sound：选择要在通话期间使用的均衡器选项。
• → 转接：接通第一个通话方与第二个通话方。这会使您的通话中断。
• → 管理电话会议：在多方通话期间与某一方展开私人会话或从多方通话中
断开某一方。通讯
55
添加联系人
如欲通过键盘向联系人添加电话号码，输入号码，然后点击添加到联系人。
查看通话记录
点击记录以查看来电和拨出电话的历史记录。
如欲过滤通话记录，点击 → 查看方式，然后选择选项。
指定拨号号码
可以将设备设置为仅限制拨出具有指定前缀的号码。那些前缀储存在 SIM 或
USIM 卡中。
点击 → 通话设定 → 其它设置 → 固定拨号号码 → 启动固定拨号，然后输入随
SIM 或 USIM 卡提供的 PIN2 码。点击固定拨号列表并添加号码。
呼叫限制
可以将设备设置为阻止拨打特定电话。例如，可以关闭国际通话。
点击 → 通话设定 → 其它设置 → 呼叫限制，选择通话类型，选择呼叫限制选
项，然后输入密码。
接听电话
应答电话
来电时，将 拖到圆周外面，或按下耳机按钮。
如果呼叫等待服务启动，则可拨打另一个电话。应答第二个通话时，第一个通话将
进入保持状态。通讯
56
拒绝通话
来电时，将 拖到圆周外面，或紧按住耳机按钮。
如欲在拒接来电时发送讯息，点击拒接来电并发送简讯。如欲创建拒绝讯息，点击
→ 通话设定 → 设置拒绝信息。
自动拒接来自可疑号码的来电
点击 → 通话设定 → 呼叫拒绝，向右拖动自动拒绝模式开关，然后点击自动拒绝
列表。点击新建，输入号码，指定类别，然后点击储存。
未接来电
如果有未接来电，状态栏上将会出现 。打开通知面板以查看未接来电的列表。
呼叫等待
呼叫等待是由服务提供商提供的一项服务。用户可以使用此服务来暂挂当前通话并
切换至来电。此服务不适用于视像通话。
如欲使用此服务，点击 → 通话设定 → 其它设置 → 呼叫等待。
呼叫前转
可以将设备设置为将来电发送至指定号码。
点击 → 通话设定 → 呼叫转移，然后选择通话类型和条件。输入号码并点击
启动。
结束通话
点击结束通话结束通话。或按下耳机按钮。通讯
57
视像通话
拨打视像通话
输入号码或从联系人列表选择联系人，然后点击 拨打视像通话。
视像通话期间
可供使用的操作包括：
• 照相机切换：在前置照相机镜头和后置照相机之间切换。
• 静音：关闭话筒使对方听不到自己的声音。
• → 隐藏自己：向对方隐藏自己的图像。
• → 发出图像：选择要向对方显示的图像。
• → 键盘：打开键盘。
• → 转换到耳机：如果蓝牙耳机连接至设备，则切换至蓝牙耳机。
• → 扩音器关：取消扬声器功能。
• → 动态表情：为图像应用表情图标。
• → 主题视图：为图像应用修饰图标。
• → 启用卡通视图：将查看模式更改为卡通视图。
点住对方的图像以访问以下选项：
• 拍照：捕获对方的图像。
• 拍摄录像：拍摄对方图像的录像。
在许多国家/地区，未经对方事先许可录制通话属非法行为。
点住图像以访问以下选项：
• 照相机切换：在前置照相机镜头和后置照相机之间切换。
• 发出图像：选择要向对方显示的图像。通讯
58
切换图像
将任一方的图像拖至对方的图像即可切换图像。
联系人
使用此应用程序管理联系人，包括电话号码、电子邮件地址及其他。
在应用程序屏幕上点击联系人。
管理联系人
创建联系人
点击 并输入联系人信息。
• ：添加图像。
• / ：添加或删除联系人字段。通讯
59
编辑联系人
选择要编辑的联系人，然后点击 。
删除联系人
点击 → 删除。
设置快速拨号数字
点击 → 快速拨号设置，选择快速拨号数字，然后为其选择一个联系人。如欲移
除快速拨号数字，将其点住，然后点击移除。
搜索联系人
使用以下搜索方法之一：
• 向上或向下滚动联系人列表。
• 使用联系人列表右侧上的索引，沿着这些索引拖动手指快速滚动查看。
• 点击联系人列表顶部的搜索字段并输入搜索标准。
一旦选择联系人，即可执行以下操作之一：
• ：添加至收藏联系人。
• / ：拨打语音或视像通话。
• ：撰写讯息。
• ：撰写电邮。
导入和导出联系人
与 Google 联系人同步
点击 → 与Google合并。
在联系人列表中，与 Google 联系人同步的联系人将会显示 。
如果在设备上添加或删除联系人，该联系人也会添加到或从 Google 联系人中删
除，反之亦然。通讯
60
与三星联系人同步
点击 → 与三星帐号合并。
在联系人列表中，与三星联系人同步的联系人将会显示 。
如果在设备上添加或删除联系人，该联系人也会添加到或从三星联系人中删除，反
之亦然。
导入联系人
点击 → 导入/导出 → 从SIM卡导入、从SD卡导入或从 USB 存储导入。
导出联系人
点击 → 导入/导出 → 导出到SIM卡、导出到SD卡或导出至 USB 存储。
共享联系人
点击 → 导入/导出 → 共享名片通过，选择联系人，点击完成，然后选择共享方
式。
收藏联系人
点击 ，然后执行以下操作之一：
• 搜索：搜索联系人。
• 添加至收藏：将联系人添加到收藏夹。
• 从收藏中移除：从收藏夹移除联系人。
• 网格视图 / 列表视图：以网格或列表形式查看联系人。通讯
61
联系人分组
将联系人添加到群组
选择群组，然后点击 。选择要添加的联系人，然后点击完成。
管理分组
点击 ，然后执行以下操作之一：
• 新建：创建新群组。
• 搜索：搜索联系人。
• 更改顺序：点住群组名称旁边的 ，将其向上或向下拖至另一位置，然后点击
完成。
• 删除群组：选择用户添加的群组，然后点击删除。无法删除默认群组。
发送讯息或电邮到群组成员
选择群组，点击 → 发送信息或发送邮件，选择组员，然后点击完成。
名片
创建名片并将其发送给他人。
点击设置我的名片，输入详细资料 (例如电话号码、电邮地址和通讯地址等)，
然后点击储存。如果在设置设备时储存了用户资料，在我中选择名片，然后点击
进行编辑。
点击 → 共享名片通过，然后选择共享方式。通讯
62
信息
使用此应用程序发送文本讯息 (简讯) 或多媒体简讯 (彩信)。
在应用程序屏幕上点击信息。
• 取决于服务提供商的 LTE 网络，此功能可能无法使用。有关详细信息，
请联系服务提供商。
• 在本地服务区外发送或接收讯息可能会产生额外的费用。有关详细信
息，请联系服务提供商。
发送讯息
点击 ，添加收件人，输入讯息，然后点击 。
使用以下方法添加收件人：
• 输入电话号码。
• 点击 ，选择联系人，然后点击完成。
使用以下方法创建多媒体简讯：
• 点击 并附加图像、录像、联系人、便笺、事件及其他。
• 点击 → 插入笑脸符号插入图释。
• 点击 → 添加主题输入主题。
发送预发的讯息
撰写讯息时，点击 → 定时信息。设定时间和日期，然后点击确定。设备将在指
定时间和日期发送讯息。
• 如果设备在预定时间关闭、未连接至网络或网络不稳定，讯息将无法发
送。
• 此功能基于设备上设置的时间和日期。如果跨越了时区且网络未更新该信
息，时间和日期可能不正确。通讯
63
查看收到的讯息
收到的讯息会按联系人分组为讯息线程。
选择联系人以查看此人的讯息。
收听语音讯息
在键盘上点住 1，然后按照服务提供商的指示完成操作。
电子邮件
使用此应用程序发送或查看电邮讯息。
在应用程序屏幕上点击电子邮件。
设置电子邮件帐户
首次打开电子邮件时，设置电子邮件帐户。
输入电邮地址和密码。点击下一步设置私人电子邮件帐户 (例如谷歌邮箱) 或点击
手动设置以设置公司电子邮件帐户。在这之后，按照屏幕上的指示完成设置。
如欲设置其他电子邮件帐户，点击 → 设定 → 。
发送讯息
点击要使用的电子邮件帐户，然后点击屏幕顶部的 。输入收件人、主题和讯
息，然后点击 。
点击 从联系人列表添加收件人。
点击 → 添加抄送/暗送添加更多收件人。
点击 附加图像、录像、联系人、便笺、事件及其他。
点击 将图像、事件、联系人及资讯位置插入讯息。通讯
64
发送预发的讯息
撰写讯息时，点击 → 定时发送。勾选定时发送，设定时间和日期，然后点击
完成。设备将在指定时间和日期发送讯息。
• 如果设备在预定时间关闭、未连接至网络或网络不稳定，讯息将无法发
送。
• 此功能基于设备上设置的时间和日期。如果跨越了时区且网络未更新该信
息，时间和日期可能不正确。
阅读讯息
选择要使用的电子邮件帐户收取新讯息。如欲手动收取新讯息，点击 。
点击要读取的讯息。
打开附件。
回复讯息。
添加此电邮地址到联系人
列表。
删除讯息。
标记讯息为提醒。
转发讯息。
点击附件标签打开附件，然后点击附件旁边的 进行储存。通讯
65
谷歌邮箱
使用此应用程序以快速直接地访问 Google Mail 服务。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Gmail。
• 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
• 此应用程序的标签可能不同，具体取决于所在地区或服务提供商。
发送讯息
在任何邮箱中，点击 ，输入收件人、主题和讯息，然后点击 。
点击 → 附加图片附加图像。
点击 → 附加视频以附加录像。
点击 → 添加抄送/密送地址添加更多收件人。
点击 → 保存草稿储存讯息以便以后发送。
点击 → 舍弃重新开始。
阅读讯息
标记讯息为未读。
为此讯息添加标签。
预览附件。
保存此讯息以便长期储存。
标记讯息为提醒。
删除此讯息。
回复此讯息。
回复所有收件人或转发此讯
息给其他人。
添加此电邮地址到联系人
列表。通讯
66
标签
谷歌邮箱不使用实际的文件夹，而是使用标签。启动谷歌邮箱时，设备将显示带收
件箱标签的讯息。
点击 在其他标签中查看讯息。
如欲为讯息添加标签，选择该讯息，点击 ，然后选择要指定的标签。
GoogleTalk
使用此应用程序以通过 Google Talk 与他人聊天。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 GoogleTalk。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
公开配置
点击好友列表顶部的帐户 ID 以更改可用性状态、图像或状态讯息。
添加好友
点击 ，输入要添加好友的电邮地址，然后点击完成。
与好友聊天
从好友列表中选择好友，在屏幕底部的字段中输入讯息，然后点击 。
如欲添加好友至聊天室，点击 → 添加到聊天。
如欲结束聊天，点击 → 结束聊天。通讯
67
在聊天之间切换
向左或向右滚动。
删除聊天记录
聊天会自动储存。如欲删除聊天记录，点击 → 清除聊天记录。
Google+
使用此应用程序以通过 Google 的社交网络服务与人们保持联络。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Google+。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
点击所有圈子以更改类别，然后向上或向下滚动以查看来自圈子的帖子。
碰头
使用此应用程序以通过 Google+ 即时讯息服务与他人聊天。
在应用程序屏幕上点击碰头。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
从好友列表中选择好友，在屏幕底部的字段中输入讯息，然后点击 。通讯
68
ChatON
使用此应用程序与任何具有手机号码的设备聊天。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 ChatON。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
输入三星帐户的电话号码或电邮地址创建好友列表，或从建议列表中选择好友。
选择好友开始聊天。
如欲将设备上的联系人与 ChatON 同步，点击设定 → 同步联系人。69
Web 和网络
互联网
使用此应用程序以浏览互联网。
在应用程序屏幕上点击互联网。
查看网页
点击地址字段，输入网址，然后点击转到。
点击 以在查看网页时共享、储存或打印当前网页。
打开新页面
点击 → 新窗口。
如欲转到另一网页，点击 ，向左或向右滚动，然后点击页面进行选择。
通过语音搜索网络
点击地址字段，点击 ，说出关键字，然后选择出现的建议关键字之一。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此功能可能无法使用。
书签
如欲将当前网页添加到书签，点击 → 添加书签。
如欲打开已添加到书签的网页，点击 ，然后选择网页。Web 和网络
70
历史记录
点击 → 历史记录从最近访问的网页列表中打开网页。如欲清除历史记录，点击
→ 清除历史记录。
点击 → 历史记录 → 访问最多以从访问次数最多的网页列表中打开网页。
已保存的页面
如欲查看已保存的网页，点击 → 已保存页面。
链接
在网页上点住链接以在新页面上打开、储存、共享或复制。
如欲查看储存的链接，点击 → 下载列表。
共享网页
如欲与他人共享网页地址，点击 → 共享页面。
如欲共享网页某一部分，点住所需的文本，然后点击 → 共享。
使用弹出式浏览器
使用此功能以在不关闭当前应用程序的情况下访问互联网。
查看包含网址的联系人或便笺等内容时，选择网址，然后点击网页浮窗以打开弹出
式浏览器。点击并将拖动浏览器以将其移至其他位置。
如欲以全屏查看浏览器，点击 。
如欲关闭浏览器，点击 。Web 和网络
71
Chrome
使用 Chrome 搜索信息并浏览网页。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Chrome。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
查看网页
点击地址字段，然后输入网址或搜索标准。
打开新页面
点击 → 新建标签页。
如欲转到其他网页，点击 → 网页。
通过语音搜索网络
点击地址字段，点击 ，说出关键字，然后选择出现的建议关键字之一。
与其他设备同步
当使用同一 Google 帐户登录时，可以同步打开的标签和书签，以在其他设备上通
过 Chrome 使用。
如欲在其他设备上查看打开的标签，点击 → 其他设备。选择要打开的网页。
如欲查看书签，点击 。Web 和网络
72
蓝牙
蓝牙可在近距离内的两个设备之间建立直接的无线连接。使用蓝牙与其他设备交换
数据或媒体文件。
• 对于通过蓝牙功能收发数据时的数据丢失、拦截或误用，三星概不负责。
• 分享和接收数据时，请务必确保相应设备采取了适当的安全措施，并且是
可信任的设备。如果设备之间存在障碍，有效距离可能会缩短。
• 某些设备，尤其是未经测试或未经 Bluetooth SIG 审批的设备，可能与本
设备不兼容。
• 不得将蓝牙功能用于非法目的 (例如出于商业目的剽窃商业机密或非法窃
听通讯)。
对于因非法使用蓝牙功能所造成的后果，三星概不负责。
如欲启动蓝牙，在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 蓝牙，然后向右拖动蓝牙开关。
与其他蓝牙设备配对
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 蓝牙 → 扫描，检测到的设备将会列出来。选择欲
配对的设备，然后在两台设备上接受自动生成的密码进行确认。
发送和接收数据
许多应用程序均支持通过蓝牙传输数据。例如相册。打开相册，选择图像，点击
→ 蓝牙，然后选择配对的蓝牙设备之一。在这之后，在其他设备上接受蓝牙授权
请求以接收图像。传输的文件储存在 Bluetooth 文件夹。如果接收到联系人，该联
系人将会自动添加到联系人列表中。Web 和网络
73
AllShare Cast
使用此功能将设备连接至具有AllShare Cast 加密狗的大屏幕设备，然后共享内
容。
• 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此功能可能无法使用。
• 有些文件在播放期间可能需要缓冲，取体取决于网络连接情况。
• 为了节能，请在不用时取消AllShare Cast 功能。
• 如果指定 Wi-Fi 频带，可能无法发现或连接AllShare Cast 加密狗。
• 如果在电视上播放视频或玩游戏，选择适当的电视模式以获得最佳的
AllShare Cast 体验。
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 更多设置 → AllShare Cast，然后向右拖动
AllShare Cast 开关。选择设备，打开或播放文件，然后使用设备上的按键控制显
示。
AllShare Play
使用此应用程序通过网络播放储存在各种设备上的内容。可播放并将任何设备上的
任何文件传送到另一设备或网络存储服务器。
如欲使用此应用程序，必须登入谷歌和三星帐户，并将两个或两个以上设备注册为
文件服务器。注册方法可能会因设备类型而异。如欲了解更多详情，点击 →
常见问题。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 AllShare Play。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
发送文件
选择设备或网络存储器，选择文件，然后点击 。Web 和网络
74
共享文件
选择设备或网络存储器，选择文件，点击 ，然后使用以下选项：
• 群组广播：与连接至同一 Wi-Fi 网络的多个其他设备共享屏幕。
• 发送给附近的用户：与附近已启动AllShare Play 的设备共享文件。
• Facebook/Twitter/Flickr/Picasa：将文件上传至社交网络站点。
在远程设备上播放文件
选择设备或网络存储器，选择文件，点击 ，然后选择设备。
• 支持的文件格式可能会有所不同，具体取决于作为媒体播放器连接的设
备。
• 有些文件在播放时可能需要缓冲，取体取决于网络连接情况。
管理网络存储服务器上的内容
选择网络存储服务器，然后查看和管理文件。
群组广播
使用此应用程序以与连接至同一 Wi-Fi 网络的其他设备共享图像、文档和音乐。
在应用程序屏幕上点击群组广播。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
共享文件
1
点击分享图像、共享文档或共享音乐，选择要共享的文件，然后点击完成。
2
输入 PIN 码，然后点击完成。Web 和网络
75
NFC
设备允许您读取包含有关产品信息的近距离无线通讯 (NFC) 标签。在下载所需的
应用程序之后，也可使用此功能来付款或购买车票。
电池背面含内置 NFC 天线。小心处置电池盖，以免损坏 NFC 天线。
如果屏幕锁定，设备将无法读取 NFC 标签或接收数据。
如欲启动 NFC 功能，在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 更多设置 → NFC。向右拖
动 NFC 开关。
读取 NFC 标签信息
将设备靠近 NFC 标签。该标签的信息将会出现。
通过 NFC 功能购物
使用 NFC 功能进行购物之前，必须先注册手机支付服务。如欲注册或了解有关该
服务的详细信息，请联系您的服务提供商。
将设备的背面贴近 NFC 卡阅读器。
通过Android Beam 发送数据
使用Android Beam 功能以将网页和联系人等数据发送至已启用 NFC 的设备。
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 更多设置 → NFC。向右拖动 Android 传送开关。
选择一个项目，将设备的背面与其他设备的背面靠在一起，然后点击您设备的屏
幕。Web 和网络
76
S Beam
使用 S 传送 功能可以发送音乐、视频、图像和文档等数据。
请勿通过 S 传送 发送受版权保护的数据。该行为违反版权法。对于任何因
非法使用受版权保护的数据而导致的法律问题，三星概不负责。
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 更多设置 → S Beam。向右拖动 S Beam 开关。
选择一个文件，将设备的背面与其他设备的背面靠在一起，然后点击您设备的屏
幕。
如果两个设备尝试同时发送数据，文件传输将会失败。77
媒体
音乐播放器
使用此应用程序以收听音乐。
在应用程序屏幕上点击音乐播放器。
• 不支持某些文件格式，具体取决于设备的软件版本。
• 取决于所使用的编码方式，有些文件可能无法正确播放。
播放音乐
选择音乐类别，然后选择要播放的歌曲。
打开播放列表。
跳至下一首歌曲。点住向前
快进。
暂停和继续播放。
调整音量。
打开音乐广场。
更改重放模式。
重新当前播放的歌曲或跳至
上一首歌曲。点住向后
快退。
打开随机播放。
选择音效。媒体
78
将歌曲设置为铃声
如欲将当前播放的歌曲设置为铃声，点击 → 设定为 → 手机铃声。
创建播放列表
选择自己的歌曲。
点击播放列表，然后点击 → 新建播放列表。输入标题并点击确定。点击添加音
乐，选择要包括的歌曲，然后点击完成。
如欲将当前播放的歌曲添加到播放列表，点击 → 添加到播放列表。
按心情播放音乐
播放按心情分组的音乐。播放列表由设备自动创建。添加新歌曲时，点击音乐广场
→ → 音乐库更新。
点击音乐广场，然后选择一种心情。
照相机
使用此应用程序以拍摄照片或录像。
使用相册查看通过设备照相机拍摄的照片和录像。(第 85 页)
在应用程序屏幕上点击照相机。
不在使用时，照相机会自动关闭。
照相机使用规范
• 未经他人允许，请勿拍摄其照片或录像。
• 请勿在法律禁止的地方拍摄照片或录像。
• 请勿在可能侵犯他人隐私的场合拍摄照片或录像。媒体
79
拍照
拍摄照片
点击预览屏幕上的图像，此时照相机应已对焦。对准拍摄对象后。对焦框将会变
绿。点击 拍摄照片。点住 拍摄一系列照片。
指出使用中的存储
设备。
在静像和录像模式
之间切换。
打开图片浏览器显
示照片。
在前置照相机和后
置照相机之间
切换。
更改闪光灯设定。
更改拍摄模式。
在各种可用的效果
之间选择。
更改照相机设定。
场景模式
预先定义的设置让您在拍摄照片时可以做到对准即拍。
点击 → 场景模式。
• 肖像：使用此设置拍摄人物。
• 风景：使用此设置拍摄视野较宽的场景。
• 运动：使用此设置拍摄快速移动的对象。
• 宴会/室内：使用此设置拍摄光线良好的室内场景。
• 海滩/雪景：使用此设置拍摄光线良好或阳光明媚的户外场景。媒体
80
• 日落：使用此设置可以使颜色更丰富、对比度更锐利。
• 黎明：使用此设置可以获得非常细微的颜色。
• 秋色：使用此设置拍摄背景偏红的风景。
• 文本：使用此设置拍摄书籍或海报。
• 烛火：使用此设置拍摄在黑暗的背景中透出亮光的图像。
拍摄模式
具有几种照片效果可供使用，例如卡通渲染。
点击 → 拍摄模式。
• 正常拍摄：拍摄单张照片。
• 优选拍摄：拍摄一系列照片，然后储存最佳的一张。
• 面部优选：使用此功能可同时拍摄多张群组照片并将其合并到一起以创建最佳
的图像。
点击 以拍摄多张照片。如欲获得最佳照片，在拍照时端稳相机并保持静
止。相册开启时，点击每个脸孔上的黄框，然后为该拍摄对象选择最佳个人姿
势。为各个人选择姿势后，点击储存以将图像合并成一张照片，然后储存。
• 人脸识别：设定设备识别人脸并帮助您拍摄他们的照片。
• 全景拍摄：拍摄一张由多张照片串在一起合成的照片。
• 共享拍摄：通过直接 Wi-Fi 将照片直接发送至另一设备。
• HDR：使用此选项以拍摄具有增强对比度的照片。原图和补偿后的照片均会储
存。
• 好友照片共享：将设备设定为识别照片中标记的人脸并将其发送给此人。取决
于脸部的角度、脸部大小、肤色、脸部表情、光照条件或主体配戴的饰品，面
部识别功能可能会失败。
• 美肌：拍摄人脸加亮的照片以获得更柔和的图像。
• 笑脸拍摄：照相机等待主体微笑再拍照。
• 低灯光：拍摄一系列照片并将它们合成为一张照片以改善图像质量。媒体
81
全景照片
全景照片是一种包含多张照片的宽幅横向图像。
点击 → 拍摄模式 → 全景拍摄。
点击 并向任意方向移动照相机。蓝框与取景器对齐时，照相机将自动以全景
序列拍摄另一张照片。如欲停止拍摄，再次点击 。
拍摄录像
拍摄录像
将静态-录像开关滑向录像图标，然后点击 拍摄录像。如欲暂停录制，点击
。如欲停止录制，点击 。
录制时可使用以下操作：
• 如欲更改对焦，点击您要对焦的任意位置。如欲对焦屏幕中央，选择 。
• 如欲在录制时从录像截取一幅图像，选择 。防震功能启动时，此功能将无法
使用。
如果使用最大分辨率进行视频录制，可能无法使用缩放功能。媒体
82
录制模式
在前置照相机和后
置照相机之间
切换。
更改闪光灯设定。
更改录制模式。
在各种可用的效果
之间选择。
更改照相机设定。
指出使用中的存储
设备。
在静像和录像模式
之间切换。
打开视频播放器播
放视频。
点击 更改录制模式。
• 正常：使用此模式获得一般质量。
• 彩信限制：使用此模式降低质量以便通过讯息发送。
• 慢动作：使用此模式拍摄移动主体的录像。设备将以慢动作播放录像。
• 快动作：使用此模式拍摄移动主体的录像。设备将以快动作播放录像。
放大和缩小媒体
83
使用以下方法之一：
• 使用音量键可放大或缩小。
• 在屏幕上两指张开进行放大，两指合拢进行缩小。
• 如果使用最大分辨率进行录制，可能无法使用缩放功能。
• 放大/缩小效果适用于在拍摄录像的情况下使用缩放功能时。
配置照相机的设置
点击 配置照相机的设置。并非所有以下选项都适用于照相机和摄像机模式。可
用的选项可能会因使用的模式而异。
• 编辑快捷方式：重新整理常用选项的快捷方式。
• 急速连拍：拍摄一系列移动主体的照片。
• 使用音量键作为：设定为使用音量键来控制快门或变焦功能。
• 自拍：拍摄自己的照片。
• 自拍：拍摄自己的录像。
• 闪光灯：启动或取消闪光灯。
• 拍摄模式：更改拍摄模式。
• 录制模式：更改录制模式。
• 效果：在各种可用的照片效果之间选择。
• 场景模式：更改场景模式。
• 曝光值：此值确定相机传感器接收的光线量。对于弱光条件，使用更高的曝
光。
• 聚焦模式：选择聚焦模式。自动对焦由照相机控制。微距适用于非常近的拍摄
对象。
• 定时器：使用此选项进行延时拍摄。
• 分辨率：选择分辨率。分辨率越高，质量越高。但占用内存更多。媒体
84
• 白平衡：选择适当的白平衡，以使图像具有逼真的颜色范围。此设置专为特定
的光照条件设计。这些设置类似于专业照相机中对应于白平衡曝光的热量范
围。
• 感光度：选择 ISO 值。此值用于控制照相机感光度。它以胶片相机的当量衡
量。对静止不动或亮度较高的对象使用较低的值。对快速移动或亮度较低的对
象使用较高的值。
• 测光：选择测光方法。此选项用于确定如何计算光照值。中心重点测光测量场
景中央的背景光线。点测量指定位置的光线值。矩阵取整个场景的平均值。
• 户外能见度：在明亮的户外环境使用此选项。
• 自动调整对比度：设定照相机使用自动调整对比度。自动调整对比度会定义对
比度级别，而无需手动输入。
• 构图线：显示取景器指南以便在选择主体时帮助取景。
• 自动共享拍摄：设定为将您的设备背面与另一个已启用 NFC 的设备触碰并点击
您设备的屏幕时自动启动直接 Wi-Fi 并切换至共享拍摄模式。
• 防抖动：启动或取消防震。防震有助于在照相机移动时进行对焦。
• GPS标签：将 GPS 位置标签附加至照片。
• 如欲改善 GPS 信号，请避免在信号受阻的条件下拍摄，如建筑物之间、
低洼之处或者天气条件恶劣时。
• 您的位置可能会在您将照片上传到互联网时显示在照片上。如欲避免这种
情况，取消 GPS 标签设置。
• 扩展文件名：设定照相机显示上下文标签。
• 使用语音拍照：设定照相机使用语音命令拍照。
• 另存为翻版：反转图像以创建原始场景的镜像。
• 图像质量：图像质量越高，所需的存储空间越多。媒体
85
• 视频质量：设定视频的质量级别。
• 存储器：选择存储位置。
• 重置：重置照相机设置。
快捷方式
重新整理快捷方式以便于访问照相机的各种选项。
点击 → 编辑快捷方式。
点住某一选项并将其拖至屏幕左侧的空位。其他图标可通过点击并拖放来在列表内
移动。
相册
使用此应用程序以查看图片和视频。
在应用程序屏幕上点击相册。
• 不支持某些文件格式，具体取决于设备上安装的软件。
• 有些文件可能无法正常播放，具体取决于文件编码的方式。
查看图像
启动相册显示可用的文件夹。当另一个应用程序 (例如电子邮件) 储存图像时，
设备将自动创建下载文件夹以包含该图像。类似地，捕获截屏时将自动创建
Screenshots 文件夹。选择文件夹以将其打开。
在文件夹中，图像将按创建日期显示。选择要以全屏查看的图像。
向左或向右滚动以查看下一个或上一个图像。媒体
86
放大和缩小
使用以下方法之一放大图像：
• 在任何位置双击放大。
• 在任何位置分开两指进行放大。合拢进行缩小，或双击恢复。
使用动作功能查看图像
使用动作功能以执行特定动作的功能。
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → 动作，向右拖动动作开关，然后勾选功能。
如欲使用动作功能，向左拖动动作开关。
如欲为各动作功能设定灵敏度，点击高级设置，选择功能，然后使用可调整的滑
块。
播放视频
视频文件在预览上显示 图标。选择要观看的视频并点击 ，此时视频播放器将
会启动。
编辑图像
查看图像时，点击 并使用以下功能：
• 幻灯片：开始以幻灯片形式放映当前文件夹中的图像。
• 脸部标记：将图片中的脸孔注册为脸部标签。
• 标记小帮手：设定照相机显示上下文标签。
• 添加天气标签：添加天气标签。
• 图片备注 ( 正面 )：使用此选项以在图片下编写便笺。编辑后的图片将储存在
photonote 文件夹中。
• 图片备注 ( 背面 )：使用此选项以在图片背面编写便笺。点击 以编辑备注。
• 复制至剪贴板：复制至剪贴板。
• 向左旋转：逆时针旋转。
• 向右旋转：顺时针旋转。
• 裁剪：调整要裁剪的橙色边框的大小并储存此框内的图像。媒体
87
• 编辑：启动 Paper Artist 或图片编辑器编辑图片。
• 设定为：将图像设定为墙纸或联系人图像。
• 好友照片共享：将图像发送给面部标记在图像中的人。
• 打印：通过 USB 或 Wi-Fi 连接打印。设备仅兼容于部分三星打印机。
• 重命名：重命名文件。
• 详情：查看图像详细信息。
收藏图像
查看图像时，点击 将图像添加到收藏夹列表。
删除图像
使用以下方法之一：
• 在文件夹中，点击 → 选择项目，勾选图像，然后点击 。
• 查看图像时，点击 。
共享图像
使用以下方法之一：
• 在文件夹中，点击 → 选择项目，勾选图像，然后点击 将其发送给其他
人。
• 查看图像时，点击 将其发送给其他人或通过社交网络服务进行共享。
设定为墙纸
查看图像时，点击 → 设定为将图像设定为墙纸或将其指定给联系人。媒体
88
标记脸孔
查看图像时，点击 → 脸部标记 → 开。识别出的脸孔周围将会出现黄色边框。
点击脸孔，点击添加名称，然后选择或添加联系人。
脸部标记出现在图像上时，点击脸部标记并使用可用的选项，例如拨打电话或发送
讯息。
取决于脸部的角度、脸部大小、肤色、脸部表情、光照条件或主体配戴的饰
品，面部识别功能可能会失败。
使用 Tag Buddy
查看图像时，点击 → 标记小帮手以在打开图像时显示上下文标签 (天气、位
置、日期和人名)。
Paper Artist
使用此应用程序以使图像看起来像具有趣味效果或相框的插图。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Paper Artist。
使用艺术工具编辑图像。编辑的图像将储存在相册 → Paper Pictures 文件夹中。
选择现有图像。 共享图像。
给图像应用效果。
更改笔厚度。
拍摄照片。
更改喷枪粗细。
储存图像。
给图像应用像框。
更改橡皮擦粗细。媒体
89
视频播放器
使用此应用程序以播放视频文件。
在应用程序屏幕上点击视频播放器。
• 避免播放 DivX 点播视像时锁定设备屏幕。播放 DivX 点播视像时屏幕每
锁定一次，可用的租金计数即会失去一次。
• 不支持某些文件格式，具体取决于设备的软件。
• 有些文件可能无法正常播放，具体取决于文件编码的方式。
播放视频
选择要播放的视频。
更改屏幕比率。
拖动横条快进或
快退。
捕捉图像。
重新启动当前的录
像或跳至上一个录
像。点住向后
快退。
跳至下一个录像。
点住向前快进。
调整音量。
缩小视频画面的
大小。
暂停和继续播放。
删除视频
点击 → 删除，勾选视频，然后点击删除。
共享视频
点击 → 共享通过，勾选视频，点击完成，然后选择共享方式。媒体
90
使用弹出式视频播放器
使用此功能以在不关闭视频播放器的情况下使用其他应用程序。观看视频时，点击
以使用弹出式播放器。
两指在屏幕上张开可放大播放器，合拢则可缩小。如欲移动播放器，将播放器拖至
另一位置。
YouTube
使用此应用程序以从 YouTube 网站观看视频。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 YouTube。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
观看视频
点击 ，然后输入关键字。选择返回的搜索结果之一观看视频。
将设备旋转至横向以显示全屏。
暂停或继续
播放。
拖动横条快进或
快退。
更改显示质量。
添加视频到播放
列表。
搜索视频。
将屏幕旋转至纵
向模式。
发送 URL 给其
他人。媒体
91
共享视频
选择要观看的视频，点击 ，然后选择共享方式。
上传视频
选择帐户，点击 ，选择视频，输入视频信息，然后点击 。
Flipboard
使用此应用程序以访问个性化杂志。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Flipboard。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
如欲启动 Flipboard，在问候页面上快速向上移动，点击立即开始，选择新闻标
题，然后点击完成。
选择封面故事或标题，快速移动查看 Flipboard 页面，然后选择要阅读的文章。
阅读文章时，可使用以下图标：
• ：转到上一页。
• ：与他人共享文章。
• ：查看他人对文章的评论。92
应用程序和媒体商店
Play 商店
使用此应用程序购买并下载能够在设备上运行的应用程序和游戏。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Play 商店。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
安装应用程序
按类别浏览应用程序，或点击 通过关键字搜索。
选择应用程序以查看信息。如欲下载，点击安装。如果应用程序需要付费，点击价
格，然后按照屏幕上的指示完成购买过程。
• 任何已安装的应用程序有新版可用时，屏幕顶部均会出现更新图标，提示
您进行更新。打开通知面板并点击图标以更新应用程序。
• 如欲安装从其他来源下载的应用程序，在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 →
安全 → 未知来源。
卸载应用程序
卸载从 Play 商店购买的应用程序。
点击 → 我的应用，在已安装应用程序列表中选择要删除的应用程序，然后点击
卸载。应用程序和媒体商店
93
Samsung Apps
使用此应用程序购买并下载专门的三星应用程序。有关详细信息，请访问
www.samsungapps.com。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Samsung Apps。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
如果未注册三星帐户，按照屏幕上的指示创建三星帐户。如欲完成订用过程，阅读
条款和条件，然后点击接受同意这些内容。
安装应用程序
按类别浏览应用程序。点击 选择类别。
如欲搜索应用程序，在屏幕顶部点击 ，然后在搜索字段中输入关键字。
选择应用程序以查看信息。如欲下载，点击下载。
任何已安装的应用程序有新版可用时，屏幕顶部均会出现更新图标，提示您
进行更新。打开通知面板并点击图标以更新应用程序。
S Suggest
使用此应用程序浏览并下载三星推荐的最新应用程序。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 S Suggest。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。应用程序和媒体商店
94
Game Hub
使用此应用程序访问游戏。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Game Hub。
向左或向右滚动并选择要从 Samsung Apps 下载的游戏。
Music Hub
使用此应用程序收听设备或由 Music Hub 提供的网络服务器上的歌曲以及购买歌
曲。
如果订阅 Music Hub 付费服务，则可享受可定制的服务，例如推荐歌曲或艺人、
无限歌曲串流及个性化电台。如欲了解更多详情，请点击帮助或访问 Music Hub
网站。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Music Hub。
此应用程序或此应用程序的某些功能可能无法使用，具体取决于所在的地区
或服务提供商。
与 Music Hub 音乐库同步歌曲
点击 My Music → → Refresh。Music Hub 音乐库将更新为设备上的最新音
乐。
如果 Music Hub 音乐库上的歌曲不在数据库中，Music Hub 会自动将歌曲上传到
数据库。
播放音乐
点击 My Music，选择音乐类别，然后选择要播放的歌曲。
如欲搜索并收听类似的音乐，点击 → Find similar music。应用程序和媒体商店
95
购买歌曲
点击 Store，然后选择类型 → 类别。点击 → Buy song，然后按照屏幕上的指
示完成购买过程。
Readers Hub
使用此应用程序下载和阅读电子书文件。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Readers Hub。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
选择类别，查看电子书文件，然后下载。
影视圈
使用此应用程序访问和购买视频。
在应用程序屏幕上点击影视圈。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
选择类别，然后选择视频。
学习圈
使用此应用程序访问学习材料。
在应用程序屏幕上点击学习圈。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
选择类别，然后选择视频课程或教材。96
实用程序
S Note
使用此应用程序以使用图像和录音创建便笺。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 S Note。
可以使用 S 笔打开 S Note。按下 S 笔的同时双击屏幕。
选择便笺模板
点击 并选择以下模板之一：
• 注释/创意备注/备忘录：从空页面创建简单的便笺。
• 会议备注：创建会议、谈话或课堂的记录。
• 杂志：插入多媒体文件创建多媒体便笺。
• 日记：创建照片日记。
• 方案：创建您自己的食谱。
• 旅行：创建游记。
• 生日：创建生日贺卡。实用程序
97
撰写便笺
为当前便笺追加其他页面。
撤销和重做上一操作。
插入多媒体文件。
建立录音并插入。
画出便笺时记录您的操作。
擦除手写便笺。
仅使用 S 笔画图。
使用效率工具。
在预设网页上搜索有关手写
关键字的信息。
输入便笺。
草拟或画出便笺。
切换到查看模式。
草拟便笺时，点击 更改画笔类型，细条粗线或画笔颜色。
擦除手写便笺时，点击 更改橡皮擦粗细或清除便笺。
查看更多颜色。
更改线条粗细。
更改笔颜色。
更改笔类型。 将当前设定另存为笔配置。
通过捡色器添加新颜色。
如欲更改工作表背景，点击 → 更改背景。
如欲添加标签，点击 → 添加标签。实用程序
98
插入多媒体文件或录音
点击 以插入多媒体文件。点击 插入录音。
插入多媒体文件。
建立录音并插入。
使用效率工具
双击 并选择以下工具之一：
• 形状匹配：转换画出的形状。
• 公式匹配：将手写公式转换为组织好的公式。点击搜索获得有关公式的详细信
息。
• 手写转化为文本：转换为手写便笺。
浏览便笺
向上或向下滚动浏览便笺缩略图。
如欲与三星帐户同步便笺，点击 → 刷新。
如欲按日期、标题或其他排列便笺，点击 → 排序方式。
如欲更改查看模式，点击 → 列表视图。
如欲通过导入 PDF、图像文件或便笺创建便笺，点击 → 导入。
如欲将便笺与 Google Docs 或 Evernote 同步，点击 → 同步。
如欲创建文件夹，点击 → 新建文件夹。
如欲改变便笺的顺序，点击 → 更改顺序。
如欲复制便笺，点击 → 复制。实用程序
99
如欲将便笺移至其他文件夹，点击 → 移动。
如欲更改 S Note 设定，点击 → 设定。
如欲查看 S Note 教程，点击 → 指南。
查看便笺
点击便笺缩略图将其打开。
如欲移至其他便笺页面，向左或向右滚动。
如欲创建便笺，点击 → 创建笔记。
如欲将便笺发送给其他人，点击 → 共享通过。
如欲将便笺另存为图像文件或 PDF 文件，点击 → 导出。
如欲添加或删除便笺，点击 → 编辑页面。
如欲删除便笺，点击 → 删除。
如欲添加标签，点击 → 添加标签。
如欲将便笺另存为事件，点击 → 新建事件。
如欲将便笺的快捷方式添加到主屏幕，点击 → 设置为快捷键。
如欲将便笺设定为墙纸或将其指定给联系人，点击 → 设定为。
如欲通过 USB 或 Wi-Fi 连接打印便笺，点击 → 打印。设备仅兼容于部分三星
打印机。
S日历
使用此应用程序管理事件和任务。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 S日历。
创建事件或任务
点击 ，然后使用以下方法之一：
• Quick add：从备忘录创建事件或任务。此功能仅适用于英文和韩文。
• 添加事件：输入具有可选重复设置的事件。
• 添加任务：输入具有可选优先级设置的任务。实用程序
100
如欲更快添加事件或任务，点击日期进行选择，然后再次点击。
输入标题并指定要使用或同步的日历。然后点击编辑事件详情或编辑任务详情添加
更多详情，例如事件重复的频率、预先提示的时间或发生的地方。
附加显示事件位置的地图。在位置字段中输入位置，点击字段旁边的 ，然后点
住出现的地图，标出精确的位置。
从 S Note 附加备忘录。点击注释，然后撰写新的备忘录或选择现有备忘录之一。
附加图像。点击图片，然后拍摄照片或选择现有图像之一。
与 Google 日历同步
在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定 → Google (位于账户 → 谷歌帐户 → 同步日历 →
立即同步下)。如欲手动同步以便更新，在应用程序屏幕上，点击 S日历 → →
同步。
如欲在 Google 日历上显示同步的事件或任务，点击 → 设定 → 日历，选择谷
歌帐户，然后点击完成。实用程序
101
更改日历类型
点击 ，然后从不同的日历类型之间选择一种，包括年、月、周及其他。可以使用
合拢手势来更改日历类型。例如，合拢手指可以从月日历变为年日历，而分开手指
可以使年日历变回月日历。
搜索事件
点击 → 搜索，然后输入要搜索的关键字。
如欲查看当天的事件，点击屏幕顶部的今天。
删除事件
选择日期或事件，然后点击 → 删除。
共享事件
选择事件，点击 → 共享通过，然后选择共享方式。
Dropbox
使用此应用程序以储存并通过 Dropbox 云存储与他人共享文件。将文件储存到
Dropbox 时，设备将自动与网络服务器及其他已安装 Dropbox 的电脑同步。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Dropbox。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
首次运行 Dropbox 时，点击 Start 将其启动。按照屏幕上的指示完成设定。
如欲将文件上传到 Dropbox，点击 → Photos or videos 或 Otherfiles。
如欲打开 Dropbox 中的文件，点击 ，然后选择文件。查看文件时，点击
Favorite 将其添加到收藏夹列表。
如欲打开收藏的文件，点击 。实用程序
102
云
使用此功能以同步文件或通过三星帐户或 Dropbox 备份设定和应用程序数据。
在应用程序屏幕上点击设定 → 云。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此功能可能无法使用。
与三星帐户同步
点击您的三星帐户或同步设置以同步文件。
备份或恢复数据
点击设备备份通过三星帐户备份或恢复数据。
与 Dropbox 同步
如果未设置帐户，点击设置账户，然后输入 Dropbox 帐户。按照屏幕上的指示完
成设定。
登录并点击 Allow 之后，无论您何时更改文件，设备都会自动与 Dropbox 同步文
件。实用程序
103
时钟
使用此应用程序以设置闹钟、查看世界任何地方的时间、测量活动的持续时间、设
置计时器或用作台钟。
在应用程序屏幕上点击时钟。
打开或关闭此闹钟。
闹钟
设置闹钟
点击创建闹钟，设置闹钟闹响的时间，选择闹钟重复的日子，然后点击储存。
使用以下选项：
• 点击更多 → 位置闹钟以设置位置。闹钟仅在您位于该位置时闹响。
• 点击更多 → 多睡一会设置预设时间后闹钟重复闹响的间隔及次数。
• 点击更多 → 智能闹钟设置闹钟在预设时间之前闹响的时间。实用程序
104
停止闹钟
将 拖到圆周外面以停止闹钟。将 拖到圆周外面以在指定时间长度后重复闹
钟。
删除闹钟
点住闹钟，然后点击删除。
世界时间
创建时钟
点击添加城市，然后输入城市名称或从城市列表选择城市。
如欲应用夏令时间，点住时钟，然后点击夏时制设置。
删除时钟
点击 → 删除，选择时钟，然后点击删除。
秒表
点击开始为活动计时。点击计时记录单圈用时。
点击重置清除单圈时间记录。
计时器
设定持续时间，然后点击开始。
计时器开始计时时，将 拖到大圆外面。
桌面时钟
点击 以全屏查看。实用程序
105
计算器
使用此应用程序进行简单或复杂计算。
在应用程序屏幕上点击计算器。
旋转设备进入横屏方向以显示科学计算器。如果屏幕旋转关闭，点击 → 科学计
算器。
如欲查看计算历史记录，点击 隐藏键盘。
如欲清除历史记录，点击 → 清除历史记录。
如欲更改历史记录的字符大小，点击 → 文本大小。
如欲设定计算器以便于单手使用，点击 → 单手操作开启。
录音机
使用此应用程序以录制或播放语音备忘录。
在应用程序屏幕上点击录音机。
录制语音备忘录
点击 开始录制。对着设备底部的麦克风说话。点击 暂停录制。点击 完成
录制。
开始录制。
录制运行时间
显示语音备忘录列表。实用程序
106
播放语音备忘录
选择要播放的语音备忘录。
• ：调整播放速度。
• ：修剪语音备忘录。
• ：向上或向下拖动音量条调整音量。
• ：停止播放。
• ：暂停播放。
如欲将语音备忘录发送给其他人，点击 → 共享通过，选择语音备忘录，点击完
成，然后选择共享方式。
管理语音备忘录
在语音备忘录列表中，点击 并选择以下选项之一：
• 共享通过：选择共享方式，然后选择要发送的语音备忘录。
• 删除：选择要删除的语音备忘录。
• 设定：更改录音机设定。
• 结束：关闭录音机。
储存带上下文标签的文件
在语音备忘录列表中，点击 → 设定 → 扩展文件名 → 开。实用程序
107
S Voice
使用此应用程序以通过语音命令设备拨号、发送讯息、撰写备忘录等等。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 S Voice。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
以下是几个口头命令的示例：
• 打开音乐
• 启动计算器
• 呼叫露露手机
• 拨打露露工作电话
• 查看日程
增强语音识别的提示
• 话音清晰。
• 在安静的地方讲话。
• 请勿使用冒犯性言语或俚语。
• 不要以方言口音讲话。
取决于您的环境或讲话的方式，设备可能无法识别您的命令或可能执行不必要的命
令。实用程序
108
Google
使用此应用程序不但可以搜索互联网，而且可以搜索设备上的应用程序及其内容。
在应用程序屏幕上点击 Google。
搜索设备
点击搜索字段，然后输入关键字。或者，点击 ，说出关键字，然后选择出现的建
议关键字之一。
如果未从应用程序返回结果，则会出现网络浏览器，上面显示搜索结果。
搜索范围
如欲选择要搜索的应用程序，点击 → 设置 → 手机搜索，然后勾选要搜索的项
目。
Google Now
启动 Google 搜索以查看 Google Now 卡，上面显示您可能最需要的当前天气、公
共交通信息、下一次约会等信息。
首次打开 Google 搜索时加入 Google Now。如欲更改 Google Now 设定，点击
→ 设置 → Google Now。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此功能可能无法使用。
语音搜索
使用此应用程序以通过说话来搜索网页。
在应用程序屏幕上点击语音搜索。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
请开始说话出现在屏幕上时，说出关键字或短语。选择出现的建议关键字之一。实用程序
109
我的文件
使用此应用程序以访问储存在设备中的所有类型的文件，包括图像、录像、歌曲和
声音片段。
在应用程序屏幕上点击我的文件。
查看文件
选择文件夹以将其打开。如欲返回至父文件夹，点击 。如欲返回根目录，点击
。
在文件夹中，点击 ，然后使用以下选项之一：
• 新建文件夹：创建文件夹。
• 搜索：搜寻文件。
• 查看方式：更改查看方式。
• 排序通过：排列文件或文件夹。
• 设定：更改文件管理器设定。
• 全选：选择所有文件以便一次性应用相同的选项。
添加文件夹快捷方式
将常用文件夹的快捷方式添加至根目录。点击 → 添加快捷方式，输入快捷方式
名称，选择文件夹，然后点击完成。
下载
使用此应用程序以查看通过应用程序下载的文件。
在应用程序屏幕上点击下载。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
如欲查看从互联网下载的文件，点击互联网下载，否则点击其它下载查看从其他应
用程序下载的文件，例如电子邮件。
选择文件以通过适当的应用程序将其打开。110
旅行和本地资讯
地图
使用此应用程序以标出设备的位置、搜索地点或规划路线。
在应用程序屏幕上点击地图。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
查看地图
向任意方向滚动以查看位置或查找路线。
如欲放大或缩小地图，将两只手指在屏幕上分开进行放大，合拢进行缩小。
如欲叠加多个图层，包括卫星图、交通信息等等，点击 。
搜索位置
点击 ，输入地址，然后点击 。选择位置以查看详细位置信息。如欲搜索附近
的位置，点击 。
一旦找到位置，点击 并使用以下功能之一：
• 清空结果：清除地图。
• 允许在离线状态下使用：储存特定区域的地图以便离线查看。
• 路线：获取位置的路线。
• 图层：覆盖多个图层，包括卫星图、交通信息等等。
• 设置：更改地图设定。
• 帮助：查看有关使用地图的信息。
如欲查看当前位置，点击 。旅行和本地资讯
111
获取目的地的路线
1
点击 。
2
点击 ，然后选择以下方法之一输入开始和结束位置：
• 我当前所在的位置：使用当前位置作为开始位置。
• 联系人：从联系人列表中选择。
• 地图上的点：在地图上点击确定位置。
• 我的地点：从收藏地点列表中选择。
3
选择旅行方式，例如驾车、乘坐公共交通工具或步行，然后点击获取路线。
4
选择出现的路线之一，然后点击地图视图查看详细信息。
本地
使用此应用程序以搜索附近的酒店、银行、公共汽车站等等。
在应用程序屏幕上点击本地。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
选择地点类别，然后从搜索结果列表中选择地点。
• 地图：在地图上确定该地点位置。
• 路线：搜索前往该地点的路线。
• 致电：呼叫该地点的电话号码。
如欲添加地点类别，在类别列表上点击 → 添加搜索捷径，然后在文本字段中输
入搜索关键字。旅行和本地资讯
112
导航
使用此应用程序以搜索前往目的地的路线。
在应用程序屏幕上点击导航。
• 导航地图、您的当前位置及其他导航数据可能因实际位置信息而有所不
同。应始终注意路况、交通情况及任何其他可能影响您驾驶的因素。驾驶
时请遵守所有安全警告和规章制度。
• 取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此应用程序可能无法使用。
可使用以下方法之一指定目的地：
• 说出目的地地址。
• 输入目的地地址。
• 从联系人列表选择目的地地址。
• 从带星号标记的地点列表选择目的地。
一旦找到路线，按照屏幕上的指示导航至目的地。113
设定
关于设定
使用此应用程序以配置设备，设定应用程序选项及添加帐户。
在应用程序屏幕上点击设定。
Wi-Fi
启动 Wi-Fi 功能以连接至 Wi-Fi 网络并访问互联网或其他网络设备。
如欲使用选项，点击 。
• 高级设定：自定义 Wi-Fi 设定。
• WPS推送按钮：通过 WPS 按钮连接至安全 Wi-Fi 网络。
• WPS PIN 条目：通过 WPS PIN 连接至安全 Wi-Fi 网络。
设定 Wi-Fi 休眠政策
在设定屏幕上，点击 Wi-Fi → → 高级设定 → 睡眠期间保持 Wi-Fi 开启。
进入省电模式时，设备将自动关闭 Wi-Fi 连接。当上述情况发生时，如果已
设定设备使用数据网络，则会自动进入数据网络。这可能会产生数据传输费
用。如欲避免产生数据使用费用，将此选项设定为总是。
设定网络通知
设备可以检测开放 Wi-Fi 网络并在有网络可用时在状态栏上显示图标。
在设定屏幕上，点击 Wi-Fi → → 高级设定，然后勾选网络通知以启动此功能。设定
114
蓝牙
启动蓝牙功能以在近距离内交换信息。
数据使用
记录数据使用量及自定义限制设定。
• 移动数据：设定为使用任何移动网络上的数据连接。
• 设置移动数据限制：设定使用移动数据的限制。
• 数据使用周期：输入按月重置日期以监控数据使用情况。
如欲使用更多选项，点击 。
• 数据漫游：设定为在漫游时使用数据连接。
• 限制背景数据：设定为在使用移动网络时关闭背景中的同步功能。
• 自动同步数据：设定设备自动同步联系人、日历、电邮、和社交网络图像数
据。
• 显示Wi-Fi使用量：设定为显示通过 Wi-Fi 的数据使用量。
• 移动热点：搜索和使用另一设备的移动网络。
更多设置
自定义设定以控制与其他设备或网络的连接。
飞行模式
此选项将关闭设备上的所有无线功能。仅能使用非网络服务。设定
115
移动网络
• 移动数据：用于允许使用网络服务的分组交换数据网络。
• 数据漫游：将设备用于在漫游时或本地网络不可用时连接到其他网络。
• 接入点名称：设定接入点名称 (APN)。
• 网络模式：选择网络类型。
• 网络运营商：搜索可用网络并选择漫游网络。
网络分享和便携式热点
• 便携式Wi-Fi热点：使用便携式 Wi-Fi 热点，通过 Wi-Fi 网络与电脑或其他设备
共享设备的移动网络连接。
• USB网络分享：使用 USB 网络分享，通过 USB 与电脑共享设备的移动网络连
接。连接到电脑后，设备被用作电脑的无线调制解调器。
• 蓝牙网络分享：使用蓝牙网络分享，通过蓝牙与电脑共享设备的移动网络连
接。
• 帮助：了解关于 USB、Wi-Fi 和蓝牙网络分享的更多信息。
VPN
设定和连接至虚拟专用网络 (VPN)。
NFC
• NFC：启动 NFC 功能以读取或写入包含信息的 NFC 标签。
• Android 传送：打开Android Beam 功能以将网页和联系人等数据发送至已启
用 NFC 的设备。
S Beam
启动 S Beam 功能以将音乐、视频、图像和文档等数据发送至支持 NFC 和直接
Wi-Fi 的设备。设定
116
附近的设备
• 文件共享：启动媒体共享以允许其他 DLNA认证设备访问本设备上的媒体。
• 共享内容：设定为与其他设备共享您的内容。
• 设备名称：输入设备的媒体服务器名称。
• 已允许的设备列表：查看允许访问您设备的设备列表。
• 不允许的设备列表：查看阻止访问您设备的设备列表。
• 下载到：选择用于储存媒体文件的内存位置。
• 从其它设备上传：设定为接受从其他设备上传。
AllShare Cast
启动AllShare Cast 功能并与他人共享显示屏。
KIES 通过Wi-Fi
通过 Wi-Fi 网络将设备连接至 Samsung Kies。
主屏模式
选择主屏模式 (基本或简易)。
阻止模式
选择功能并将设备设定为隐藏或显示其通知图标一段指定时间。设定
117
声音
更改设备上的各种声音设定。
• 音量：调整所有通话铃声、音乐和视频、系统声音和通知的音量。
• 振动强度：调整振动通知的强度。
• 设备铃声：选择来电提示铃声。
• 设备振动：添加或选择振动模式。
• 默认通知：选择新讯息、未接来电和闹钟等事件的铃声。
• 铃响时振动：设定设备在来电时振动并播放铃声。
• 按键声音：设定设备在点击键盘上的按键时发出声音。
• 触摸声音：设定设备在选择触摸屏上的应用程序或选项时发出声音。
• 屏幕锁定声音：设定设备在锁定或解锁触摸屏时发出声音。
• 触觉反馈：设定设备在触摸按键时振动。
显示
更改显示设定。
• 墙纸：
– 主屏：为主屏幕选择一张背景图片。
– 锁定屏幕：为锁定屏幕选择一张背景图片。
– 主屏幕与锁定屏幕：为主屏幕和锁定屏幕选择一张背景图片。
• LED 指示灯：
– 充电：设定为在电池充电时打开通知指示灯。
– 电量低：设定为在电池电量低时打开通知指示灯。
– 通知：设定为在有未接来电、新讯息或通知时打开通知指示灯。
– 语音录制：设定为在录制语音备忘录时打开通知指示灯。设定
118
• 通知面板：自定义出现在通知面板上的项目。
• 多窗口：设定为使用多窗口。
• 扩展页面：设定设备基于您的操作打开上下文页面。
• 屏幕模式：选择显示模式。
– 动态：使用此模式以使显示色调更鲜艳。
– 标准：使用此模式呈现普通环境。
– 天然：使用此模式以使显示色调类似于电视。
– 电影：使用此模式以处理昏错的环境，例如在黑暗的房间内。
• 亮度：设定显示屏的亮度。
• 自动旋转屏幕：设定内容在转动设备时自动旋转。
• 屏幕自动关闭：设定关闭显示屏背景灯前设备等待的时间长度。
• 智能旋转：设定界面不按照脸孔的方向旋转。
• Smart stay：设定为避免在您看显示屏时关闭显示屏背景灯。
• 字体风格：更改用于显示文本的字体类型。
• 字体大小：更改字体大小。
• 点击按键灯持续时间：设定触摸按键背光亮起的持续时间。
• 显示电池电量百分比：设定为查看剩余的电池寿命。
• 自动调节屏幕色调：设定以通过调节显示屏的亮度来节约能源。
存储
查看设备和存储卡的存储信息或格式化存储卡。
格式化存储卡将永久删除卡中的所有数据。
由于操作系统和默认应用程序占用部分内存，因此实际的可用内存容量会少
于指定的容量。设定
119
省电模式
启动省电模式并更改省电模式的设定。
• CPU 节电：设定设备限制某些系统资源使用。
• 屏幕节电：设定设备降低显示屏的亮度。
• 背景颜色：设定设备降低电邮和互联网背景颜色的亮度。
• 关闭触觉反馈：设定设备关闭触摸按键时振动。
• 了解节电模式：了解如何减少电池消耗。
电池
查看设备所消耗的电池电量。
应用程序管理器
查看和管理设备上的应用程序。
定位服务
• 使用无线网络：设定为使用 Wi-Fi 和/或移动网络查找当前位置。
• 使用GPS卫星：设定为使用 GPS 卫星查找当前位置。
• 位置和 Google 搜索：设定为将当前位置用于 Google 搜索和其他 Google 服
务。设定
120
锁定屏幕
更改用于确保设备安全的设定。
• 屏幕锁定：启动屏幕锁定功能。
• 锁屏选项：更改锁定屏幕的设定。这些设定仅在设定滑锁选项时适用。
– 快捷键：设定为在锁定屏幕上显示和编辑应用程序快捷方式。
取决于所在的地区或服务提供商，此功能可能无法使用。
– 信息标签：设定为在锁定屏幕上显示新闻和股票资讯。
– 时钟：设定为在锁定屏幕上显示时钟。
– 双时钟：设定为在锁定屏幕上显示双时钟。
– 天气：设定为在锁定屏幕上显示天气资讯并更改天气显示的设定。
– 涟漪效果：设定为在锁定屏幕上显示涟漪效果。
– 墨水效果：更改颜色以获得水墨效果。
– 帮助文本：设定设备以在锁定屏幕上显示帮助文本。
– 照相机快速访问：设定设备在屏幕锁定时通过点住屏幕并旋转设备来启动照
相机。
– 在锁屏唤醒：设定设备在屏幕锁定时识别唤醒命令。
– 设置唤醒命令：设定唤醒命令以启动 S Voice 或执行指定功能。
• 在锁定屏幕上的提笔速记：设定为在按下 S 笔按钮的同时，双击锁定屏幕时启
动 S Note。
• 所有者信息：输入在锁定屏幕上显示的信息。设定
121
安全
更改设定以确保设备和 SIM 或 USIM 卡。
• 加密设备：设定密码以加密储存在设备上的数据。每次开机时都必须输入密
码。
启用此设定之前，应先为电池充电，因为加密数据可能需要超过一个小时。
• 加密外置 SD 卡：
– 加密：设定为在将文件储存至存储卡时加密文件。
– 全卡加密：设定为加密存储卡上的所有文件。
– 不包括多媒体文件：设定为加密存储卡上除媒体文件外的所有文件。
如果在将设备重置为出厂默认值之前启用了此设定，设备将无法读取加密的
文件。重置设备前禁用此设定。
• 远程控制：设定为允许通过互联网远程控制遗失或被盗的设备。如欲使用此功
能，必须登录您的三星帐户。
– 账户注册：添加或查看您的三星帐户。
– 使用无线网络：设定为允许收集位置数据，并允许通过 Wi-Fi 和移动网络确
定遗失或被盗设备的位置。
• SIM卡更换警告：启动查找我的设备功能。
• 查找我的手机网页：访问 SamsungDive 网站 (www.samsungdive.com)。可以
在 SamsungDive 网站上跟踪和控制遗失或被盗的设备。
• 设置 SIM 卡锁：
– 锁定SIM卡：启动或取消 PIN 码锁功能；该功能要求在使用设备前提供 PIN
码。
– 更改 SIM 卡的 PIN 码：更改用于访问 SIM 或 USIM 卡数据的 PIN 码。
• 使密码可见：默认情况下，设备隐藏密码以确保安全。设定设备以在输入密码
时进行显示。设定
122
• 设备管理器：查看设备上安装的设备管理员。可允许设备管理员为设备应用新
策略。
• 未知来源：选择以从任何来源安装应用程序。若未选择，则只能从 Play 商店下
载应用程序。
• 信任的证书：使用证书和凭证以确保安全使用各个应用程序。
• 从设备存储空间安装：安装储存在 USB 存储设备上的加密证书。
• 清除证书：删除设备中的凭证内容，并重设密码。
单手操作
启动单手操作模式以便于单手使用设备。
语言和输入
更改文本输入设定。
语言
选择所有功能表和应用程序的显示语言。
默认
选择默认的键盘类型进行文本输入。设定
123
Google 语音输入
如欲更改语音输入设定，点击 。
• 选择输入语言：选择用于输入文本的输入语言。
• 屏蔽不文明的字词：设定为阻止设备识别语音输入中的冒犯性用语。
• 下载离线语音识别包：下载和安装语言数据以供离线语音输入使用。
三星键盘
如欲更改三星键盘设定，点击 。
• 纵向键盘类型：更改键盘布局。
• 输入语言：选择文本输入的语言。
• 预测文本：启动预测文本模式以根据您的输入预测单词并显示单词建议。也可
自定义单词预测设定。
• 连续输入：设定为在键盘上滑动输入文本。
• 光标控制：启动或关闭智能键盘导航功能以通过滚动键盘移动光标。
• 笔检测：启动或关闭智能键盘导航功能以通过滚动键盘移动光标。
• 单手操作：将键盘设定为在屏幕的任一侧出现，以方便您用一只手输入文本。
• 手写：自定义手写模式的设定，例如识别时间、笔粗细或线条颜色。设定
124
• 高级设定：
– 自动大写：设定设备将句号、问号或感叹号等标点符号后面的第一个字符自
动转为大写。
– 自动添加标点：设定设备在双击空格键时插入句号。
– 字符预览：设定设备为点击的每个字母显示大图。
– 按键振动：设定设备在触碰按键时振动。
– 按键声音：设定设备在触碰按键时发出声音。
• 指南：了解如何使用三星键盘输入文本。
• 重置设置：重置三星键盘设定。
语音搜索
• 语言：选择用于语音识别的语言。
• 语音输出：设定设备提供语音反馈以提示当前操作。
• 屏蔽不文明的字词：隐藏语音搜索结果中的冒犯性用语。
• 下载离线语音识别包：下载和安装语言数据以供离线语音输入使用。
文字转语音输出
• 首选 TTS 引擎：选择语音合成引擎。如欲更改语音合成引擎的设定，点击 。
• 语速：选择文字转语音功能的语速。
• 收听实例：收听作为示例的语音文字。
• 驾驶模式：启动驾驶模式以将设备设定为读出内容并指定要在驾驶模式中使用
的应用程序。设定
125
指针速度
调整连接至设备的鼠标或触控板的指针速度。
云
更改用于与三星帐户或 Dropbox 云存储同步数据或文件的设定。
备份并重置
更改用于管理设定和数据的设定。
• 备份我的数据：设定为将设定和应用程序数据备份至 Google 服务器。
• 备份账户：设定或编辑 Google 备份帐户。
• 自动恢复：设定为在设备上重新安装应用程序时恢复设定和应用程序数据。
• 恢复出厂设定：将设定重设为出厂默认值并删除所有数据。
添加账户
添加电邮或社交网络服务帐户。
动作
启动动作功能和更改动作识别的设定。
• 快速一览：设定用手在屏幕上方的感应器上移过以打开触摸屏并显示信息，例
如通知、未接来电、新讯息、时间和日期、设备状态等等。
• 体感拨号：设定为在查看通话、讯息或联系人详细信息时，通过拿起并将设备
靠近耳朵来拨打语音通话。设定
126
• 智能提示：设定设备在您拿起设备时提示有未接来电或新讯息。
• 双击转至顶部：设定为在双击设备时移至联系人列表或电子邮件的顶部。
• 倾斜以缩放：设定设备在查看相册中的图像或浏览网页时，用手指点住两个
点，然后来回倾斜设备进行放大或缩小。
• 摇动以移动图标：设定为在点住项目，然后将设备滑向左侧或右侧时将项目移
至另一页。
• 平移设备以浏览图片：设定为在图像放大时，朝任意方向移动设备以滚动查看
图像。
• 晃动以更新：设定设备通过晃动来搜索蓝牙设备。
• 翻转以静音/暂停：设定为通过将设备翻转来关闭来电、闹钟和音乐的声音。
• 高级设置：
– 快速一览：选择要在用手移过距离/光传感器时显示在快速一览屏幕上的项
目。
– 陀螺仪校准：校准回转仪，使设备能够正确识别旋转。
• 校准时将设备置于稳定表面上。如果设备振动或移动，校准过程可能会
失败。
• 在使用倾斜或移动动作或启用了动作的游戏时感到漂移或意外移动，校
准回转仪。
– 灵敏度设置：调整各个动作的反应速度。
• 了解动作：查看控制动作的教程。
• 手掌滑动以捕捉：设定为用手在屏幕上向左或向右擦动时捕捉屏幕图像。
• 手掌触摸以静音/暂停：设定为在用手掌触摸屏幕时暂停媒体播放声音。
• 了解手部动作：查看控制手部动作的教程。设定
127
S Pen
更改使用 S 笔的设定。
• 惯用手：选择用于书写的手以增强 S 笔输入。
• 插入/拨出手写笔声音：设定设备在插入 S 笔或从插槽拔出笔时发出的声音。
• 开启提笔速记：设定为从插槽拔出 S 笔时启动快捷便笺。
• 省电模式：设定屏幕在插入或拔出 S 笔时不作出响应。
• 手写笔防丢失提醒：设定设备在触摸屏关闭且 S 笔未附加在设备上时，若设备
移动，则显示弹出式提示并发出声音。
• 浮窗预览：设定为在 S 笔悬停在屏幕上时显示 S 笔指针。
• 声音和触觉反馈：设定设备在手写笔悬停在文件、主题或选项上时发出声音并
振动。
• 快捷命令设置：配置快捷命令的设定。
• S Pen 帮助：访问有关使用 S 笔的帮助信息。
配件
更改配件设定。
• 底座声音：设定设备以在设备连接至或从台式底座移除时播放声音。
• 音频输出模式：设定为当设备连接至台式底座时，可使用底座扬声器。
• 桌面主屏幕显示：设定设备在设备连接至台式底座时显示台钟。
• 音频输出：选择要在设备连接至 HDMI 设备时使用的声音输出格式。有些设备
可能不支持环绕声设定。设定
128
日期和时间
访问并变更以下设定以控制设备如何显示时间和日期。
如果电池电量完全耗尽或已从设备中取下，时间和日期将会重置。
• 自动日期和时间：跨越时区时自动更新时间和日期。
• 设置日期：手动设置当前日期。
• 设置时间：手动设置当前时间。
• 自动时区：设定为在跨时区旅行时从网络接收时区信息。
• 选择时区：设定本地时区。
• 使用24小时制：以 24 小时制显示时间。
• 选择日期格式：选择日期格式。
辅助功能
辅助工具服务是一些专为身体某一部位有缺陷的人士设计的特殊功能。访问并提示
以下设定以改善设备的可访问性。
• 自动旋转屏幕：设定界面在您旋转设备时自动旋转。
• 屏幕自动关闭：设定关闭显示屏背景灯前设备等待的时间长度。
• 说出密码：设定设备大声读出通过 Talkback 输入的密码。
• 接听/结束通话：
– 应答键：设定设备在按下主页键时接听来电。
– 电源键结束通话：设定设备在按下电源开关键时结束通话。
• 辅助功能快捷方式：向快速功能表上的辅助功能 (按住电源开关键时会出现) 添
加快捷方式。设定
129
• TalkBack：启动提供语音反馈的 Talkback。
• 字体大小：更改字体大小。
• 负色：反转显示颜色以提高可见度。
• 文字转语音输出：
– 首选 TTS 引擎：选择语音合成引擎。如欲更改语音合成引擎的设定，点击
。
– 语速：选择文字转语音功能的语速。
– 收听实例：收听作为示例的语音文字。
– 驾驶模式：启动驾驶模式以将设备设定为读出内容并指定要在驾驶模式中使
用的应用程序。
• 改进网络辅助设置：设定应用程序并安装网络脚本以使其网络内容更易于访
问。
• 声音平衡：调整使用双耳机时的声音均衡。
• 单声道音频：使用一只耳塞收听音频时，启用单声道声音。
• 关闭所有声音：关闭所有设备声音。
• 闪烁通知：设定闪光灯以在有未接电话、新讯息或通知时闪烁。
• 按住延迟：设定点住屏幕的识别时间。
开发者选项
更改应用程序开发的设定。
• 桌面备份密码：设定密码以保护备份数据。
• 保持唤醒：设定屏幕在为电池充电时保持开启。
• 保护 SD 卡：设定为从存储卡读取数据时请求确认。
• USB调试：启动 USB 调试模式以通过 USB 数据线将设备连接至电脑。
• 允许模拟位置：允许将模拟位置和服务资讯发送至位置管理服务以进行测试。
• 选择待调式的应用程序：选择应用程序进行调试并避免暂停调试时发生错误。设定
130
• 等待调试程序：设定为阻止在调试程序就绪前加载选定的应用程序。
• 显示触摸位置：设定在您触摸屏幕时显示指针。
• 显示指针位置：设定在您触摸屏幕时显示指针的座标和轨迹。
• 显示布局边界：设定为显示边界。
• 显示 GPU 视图更新：设定为通过 GPU 更新屏幕区域时闪现更新区域。
• 显示屏幕更新：设定在屏幕区域有更新时闪现更新区域。
• 窗口动画比例：选择打开和关闭弹出窗口的速度。
• 过渡动画比例：选择屏幕切换的速度。
• 动画影像时间伸缩效果：选择弹出窗口显示的时间长度。
• 禁用硬件叠加：设定为隐藏硬件叠加。
• 强制 GPU 渲染：设定为使用 2D 硬件加速以增强图形性能。
• 严格模式：设定设备以在应用程序长时间运行时使屏幕闪光。
• 显示 CPU 使用情况：设定为列出所有活动进程。
• GPU 显示配置文件：设定为检查 GPU 渲染时间。
• 启用轨迹：设定为捕捉应用程序和系统性能的轨迹。
• 不保留活动：设定设备在启动新应用程序时结束运行中的应用程序。
• 限制后台进程：设定设备限制后台运行的进程数。
• 显示全部ANR：设定设备在有后台运行的应用程序没有响应时提醒您。
关于设备
访问设备信息，更新设备软件。131
故障排除
开启或使用设备时，设备提示您输入以下代码之一：
• 密码：如果启动了设备锁定功能，则必须输入为设备设置的密码。
• PIN 码：首次使用设备或启用要求提供 PIN 码时，必须输入随 SIM 或 USIM
卡提供的 PIN 码。使用锁定 SIM 卡功能表可关闭该功能。
• PUK：如果 SIM 或 USIM 卡被锁，通常是因为 PIN 码多次输错所致。如欲解
锁，必须输入服务提供商提供的 PUK 码。
• PIN2：当访问要求输入 PIN2 码的功能表时，必须输入随 SIM 或 USIM 卡提供
的 PIN2 码。有关详细信息，请联系服务提供商。
设备显示网络或服务错误
• 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时，设备可能无法接收讯号。请移至其他地方
后再试。
• 如果未开通服务，某些选项无法使用。请联系服务提供商以了解更多详细信
息。
触摸屏反应缓慢或无法正常反应
如果设备具有触摸屏并且触摸屏无法正常反应，请尝试以下操作：
• 取下触摸屏的任何保护性外盖。保护性外盖可能会阻止设备识别输入，我们不
推荐触摸屏设备使用保护性外盖。
• 点击触摸屏时请确保手掌干燥且干净。
• 重新启动设备以清除任何暂时性软件错误。
• 确保设备软件已升级到最新版本。
• 如果触摸屏受到刮擦或损坏，请将其送至当地的三星服务中心。故障排除
132
设备冻结或出现致命错误
如果设备死机或挂断，则可能需要关闭部分程序或重置设备才能恢复正常。如果设
备死机和没有响应，紧按住电源开关键 8-10 秒。设备自动重启。
如果还是无法解决问题，请将设备重置至出厂状态。在应用程序屏幕上，点击设定
→ 备份并重置 → 恢复出厂设定 → 重置设备 → 全部删除。
通话掉线
位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时，网络连接可能会断开。请移至其他地方后再
试。
拨出呼叫无法接通
• 确保已按下拨号键。
• 确保已进入正确的蜂窝网络。
• 确保未对拨打的电话号码设置呼叫限制。
呼入电话无法接通
• 确保设备已开机。
• 确保已进入正确的蜂窝网络。
• 确保未对该呼入电话号码设置呼叫限制。
通话时对方无法听到您的声音
• 确保未遮住内置话筒。
• 确保话筒靠近您的嘴部。
• 如果使用耳机，请确保耳机连接正确。故障排除
133
声音质量差
• 确保未挡住设备的内置天线。
• 位于信号较弱或接收不良的地方时，设备可能无法接收讯号。请移至其他地方
后再试。
从联系人拨打电话时，无法接通
• 确保存储在联系人列表中的号码正确。
• 如有必要，请重新输入并保存该号码。
• 确保未对该联系人电话号码设置呼叫限制。
设备发出提示音且电池图标呈空白显示
电池电量不足。为电池充电或更换电池后才能继续使用设备。
电池充电异常或设备关机
• 可能是电池电极脏污所致。请先用干净的软布擦拭两个金色的触点，然后再尝
试为电池充电。
• 如果电池的电量再也无法充足，请妥善处理旧电池并用新电池进行更换 (请参
考当地法令，了解有关妥善处理电池的说明)。
设备摸上去很热
当使用耗电量大的应用程序或在设备上长时间使用应用程序时，设备摸上去就会很
热。这属于正常情况，不会影响设备的使用寿命或性能。故障排除
134
启动照相机时出现错误讯息
三星设备必须拥有足够的可用存储空间和电池电量，才能支持照相机应用。如果启
动照相机时收到错误讯息，请尝试以下操作：
• 为电池充电或换上充满电的电池。
• 将文件传送到电脑或删除设备中的文件，以释放存储空间。
• 重新启动设备。如果尝试这些操作后，依然无法正常使用照相机，请联系三星
服务中心。
打开音乐文件时出现错误讯息
三星设备可能会因为各种原因而无法播放某些音乐文件。如果在设备上打开音乐文
件时收到错误讯息，请尝试以下操作：
• 将文件传送到电脑或删除设备中的文件，以释放存储空间。
• 确保音乐文件未受到数字权利管理 (DRM) 保护。如果文件受到 DRM 保护，请
确保拥有播放该文件所需的合适许可证或密钥。
• 确保设备支持该文件类型。故障排除
135
无法找到其他蓝牙设备
• 确保设备已启动蓝牙无线功能。
• 确保要连接的设备已启动蓝牙无线功能 (如有必要)。
• 确保设备和另一个蓝牙设备的距离在最大蓝牙范围 (10 米) 之内。
如果以上方法无法解决您的问题，请联系三星服务中心。
将设备连接到电脑时未建立连接
• 确保所用的 USB 数据线与设备兼容。
• 确保电脑上安装了合适的驱动程序，并且驱动程序已更新。
• 如果您是 Windows XP 用户，确保电脑上安装了 Windows XP Service Pack 3
或更高版本。
• 确保您的电脑上安装了 Samsung Kies 2.0 或 Windows Media Player 10 或更
高版本。
机壳外围的小缝隙
• 此缝隙为制造工艺所需，且部件可能会发生轻微颤动或震动。
• 随着时间的推移，部件间的摩擦可能会使此缝隙稍微扩大。Chinese. 06/2013. Rev. 1.0
取决于地区或服务提供商，有些内容可能会因设备而异。
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
User Manual
GT-N71052
About this manual
This device provides high quality mobile communication and entertainment using Samsung’s
high standards and technological expertise. This user manual is specially designed to detail
the device’s functions and features.
• Please read this manual before using the device to ensure safe and proper use.
• Descriptions are based on the device’s default settings.
• Images and screenshots may differ in appearance from the actual product.
• Content may differ from the final product, or from software provided by service providers
or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. For the latest version of the
manual, refer to the Samsung website, www.samsung.com.
• Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service
provider.
• Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications.
Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by applications from any provider
other than Samsung.
• Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited
registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the
operating system may cause the device or applications to work improperly.
• Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other media provided with this device
are licensed for limited use. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other
purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Users are entirely responsible for illegal
use of media.
• You may incur additional charges for data services, such as messaging, uploading and
downloading, auto-syncing, or using location services. To avoid additional charges, select
an appropriate data tariff plan. For details, contact your service provider.About this manual
3
• Default applications that come with the device are subject to updates and may no longer
be supported without prior notice. If you have questions about an application provided
with the device, contact a Samsung Service Centre. For user-installed applications,
contact service providers.
• Modifying the device’s operating system or installing softwares from unofficial sources
may result in device malfunctions and data corruption or loss. These actions are violations
of your Samsung licence agreement and will void your warranty.
Instructional icons
Warning: situations that could cause injury to yourself or others
Caution: situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment
Note: notes, usage tips, or additional information
Copyright
Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics
This guide is protected under international copyright laws.
No part of this guide may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any
information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung
Electronics.About this manual
4
Trademarks
• SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics.
• The Android logo, Google
™, Google Maps
™, Google Mail
™, YouTube
™, Google Play™
Store, and Google Talk
™ are trademarks of Google, Inc.
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide.
• Windows Media Player® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
• Wi-Fi
®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup
™, Wi-Fi Direct
™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are
registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
DivX®, DivX Certified®, and associated logos are trademarks
of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under
licence.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This
is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more
information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND
This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in
your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your
registration.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.5
Table of Contents
Getting started
8 Device layout
9 Buttons
10 S Pen
10 Package contents
11 Installing the SIM or USIM card and
battery
14 Charging the battery
16 Inserting a memory card
18 Turning the device on and off
19 Holding the device
19 Locking and unlocking the device
19 Adjusting the volume
20 Switching to silent mode
Basics
21 Indicator icons
22 Using the touch screen
25 Control motions
32 Page Buddy
32 Activating Multi Window
33 Using the S Pen
37 S Pen Air View
38 S Pen Keeper
38 Quick Command
39 Notifications
40 Home screen
42 Using widgets
42 Using applications
43 Applications screen
44 Help
44 One-handed operation
45 Entering text
47 Connecting to a Wi-Fi network
48 Setting up accounts
49 Transferring files
50 Securing the device
52 Upgrading the device
Communication
53 Phone
58 Contacts
62 Messaging
63 Email
65 Google Mail
66 Talk
67 Google+
67 Messenger
68 ChatONTable of Contents
6
Utilities
97 S Note
100 S Planner
102 Dropbox
103 Cloud
104 Clock
106 Calculator
106 Voice Recorder
108 S Voice
109 Google
109 Voice Search
110 My Files
110 Downloads
111 Google Wallet
Travel & local
112 Maps
113 Local
114 Latitude
114 Navigation
115 Google Earth
Settings
116 About Settings
116 Wi-Fi
117 Bluetooth
117 Data usage
117 More settings
119 Home screen mode
119 Blocking mode
120 Sound
120 Display
Web & network
69 Internet
71 Bluetooth
72 AllShare Cast
72 AllShare Play
74 NFC
75 S Beam
Media
76 Music Player
77 Camera
84 Gallery
87 Paper Artist
88 Video Player
89 YouTube
90 Flipboard
Application & media stores
91 Play Store
92 Samsung Apps
92 S Suggest
93 Game Hub
93 Music Hub
94 Play Books
94 Play Movies
95 Play Music
95 Play Magazines
95 Readers Hub
96 Video Hub
96 Learning HubTable of Contents
7
121 Storage
122 Power saving
122 Battery
122 Applications manager
122 Location services
123 Lock screen
124 Security
125 One-handed operation
125 Language and input
128 Cloud
128 Back up and reset
128 Add account
128 Motion
130 S Pen
130 Accessory
131 Date and time
131 Accessibility
132 Advanced settings
133 About device
Troubleshooting8
Getting started
Device layout
Back button
Multipurpose jack
Noti cation light
Earpiece
Proximity/Light
sensor
Menu button
Microphone
Front camera
Power button
Home button
Touch screen
Rear camera
GPS antenna
Main antenna
Headset jack
Microphone for
speakerphone
Volume button
Flash
Back cover
Speaker
S PenGetting started
9
The microphone at the top of the device is active only when you use the speakerphone or
take videos.
• Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause
connectivity problems or drain the battery.
• Do not use a screen protector. This causes sensor malfunctions.
• Do not allow water to contact the touch screen. The touch screen may malfunction
in humid conditions or when exposed to water.
Buttons
Button Function
Power
• Press and hold to turn the device on or off.
• Press and hold for 8-10 seconds to reset the device if it has
fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes.
• Press to lock or unlock the device. The device goes into lock
mode when the touch screen turns off.
Menu
• Tap to open a list of options available for the current screen.
• Tap and hold on the Home screen to launch Google search.
Home
• Press to return to the Home screen.
• Press and hold to open the list of recent applications.
• Press twice to launch S Voice.
Back
• Tap to return to the previous screen.
• Tap and hold to activate or deactivate Multi Window.
Volume • Press to adjust the device volume.Getting started
10
S Pen
S Pen tip
S Pen button
Name Function
S Pen tip • Perform basic S Pen actions. (p. 22)
S Pen button • Perform advanced S Pen actions. (p. 32)
Package contents
Check the product box for the following items:
• Device
• Battery
• Quick start guide
Use only Samsung-approved software. Pirated or illegal software may cause damage
or malfunctions, which are not covered by the warranty.Getting started
11
• The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may vary
depending on the region or service provider.
• The supplied items are designed only for this device and may not be compatible
with other devices.
• Appearances and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
• You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung retailer. Make
sure they are compatible with the device before purchase.
• Other accessories may not be compatible with your device.
• Use only Samsung-approved accessories. Malfunctions caused by using
unapproved accessories are not covered by the warranty service.
• Availability of all accessories is subject to change depending entirely on
manufacturing companies. For more information about available accessories, refer
to the Samsung website.
Installing the SIM or USIM card and battery
Insert the SIM or USIM card provided by the mobile telephone service provider, and the
included battery.
Only microSIM cards work with the device.
1 Remove the back cover.
• Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover.
• Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively. Doing so may damage the cover.Getting started
12
2 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards.
• Do not remove the protective tape covering the antenna, as this can damage the
antenna.
• Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card happens to
be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to
remove the memory card.
• Use caution not to lose or let others use the SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not
responsible for any damages or inconveniences caused by lost or stolen cards.
3 Push the SIM or USIM card into the slot until it locks in place.
4 Insert the battery.
2
1Getting started
13
5 Replace the back cover.
Removing the SIM or USIM card and battery
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Pull out the battery.
3 Push the SIM or USIM card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out.Getting started
14
Charging the battery
Charge the battery before using it for the first time. Use the charger to charge the battery. A
computer can be also used to charge the device by connecting them via the USB cable.
Use only Samsung-approved chargers, batteries, and cables. Unapproved chargers or
cables can cause the battery to explode or damage the device.
• When the battery power is low, the device emits a warning tone and displays a low
battery power message.
• If the battery is completely discharged, the device cannot be turned on
immediately when the charger is connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for
a few minutes before turning on the device.
• If you use multiple applications at once, network applications, or applications
that need a connection to another device, the battery will drain quickly. To avoid
disconnecting from the network or losing power during a data transfer, always use
these applications after fully charging the battery.
Charging with the charger
Plug the small end of the charger into the multipurpose jack of the device, and plug the large
end of the charger into an electric socket.
Connecting the charger improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any
damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.Getting started
15
• The device can be used while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge
the battery.
• If the device receives an unstable power supply while charging, the touch screen
may not function. If this happens, unplug the charger from the device.
• While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect the
device’s lifespan or performance. If the battery gets hotter than usual, the charger
may stop charging.
• If the device is not charging properly, take the device and the charger to a
Samsung Service Centre.
After fully charging, disconnect the device from the charger. First unplug the charger from the
device, and then unplug it from the electric socket.
Do not remove the battery before removing the charger. This may damage the
device.
To save energy, unplug the charger when not in use. The charger does not have a
power switch, so you must unplug the charger from the electric socket when not in
use to avoid wasting power. The device should remain close to the electric socket
while charging.
Checking the battery charge status
When you charge the battery while the device is off, the following icons will show the current
battery charge status:
Charging Fully chargedGetting started
16
Reducing the battery consumption
Your device provides options that help you save battery power. By customising these options
and deactivating features in the background, you can use the device longer between charges:
• Activate power-saving mode.
• When you are not using the device, switch to sleep mode by pressing the Power button.
• Close unnecessary applications with the task manager.
• Deactivate the Bluetooth feature.
• Deactivate the Wi-Fi feature.
• Deactivate auto-syncing of applications.
• Decrease the backlight time.
• Decrease the brightness of the display.
Inserting a memory card
Your device accepts memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB. Depending on the
memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be compatible with your
device.
• Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. Using an
incompatible card may damage the device or the memory card, or corrupt the data
stored in it.
• Use caution to insert the memory card right-side up.
• The device supports only the FAT file system for memory cards. When inserting a
card formatted in a different file system, the device asks to reformat the memory
card.
• Frequent writing and erasing of data shortens the lifespan of memory cards.
• When inserting a memory card into the device, the memory card’s file directory
appears in the extSdCard folder under the internal memory.Getting started
17
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing downwards.
3 Push the memory card into the slot until it locks in place.
4 Replace the back cover.
Removing the memory card
Before removing the memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. On the Home screen, tap
Apps→Settings→Storage→Unmount SD card.
1 Remove the back cover.
2 Push the memory card until it disengages from the device, and then pull it out.
3 Replace the back cover.
Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or accessing
information. Doing so can cause data to be lost or corrupted or damage to the
memory card or device. Samsung is not responsible for losses that result from the
misuse of damaged memory cards, including the loss of data.Getting started
18
Formatting the memory card
A memory card formatted on a computer may not be compatible with the device. Format the
memory card on the device.
On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Storage→Format SD card→Format SD
card→Erase everything.
Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all
important data stored on the device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss
of data resulting from user actions.
Turning the device on and off
When turning on the device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your
device.
Press and hold the Power button for a few seconds to turn the device on and off.
• Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas
where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals.
• Press and hold the Power button and tap Flight mode to disable the wireless
features.
To turn off the device, press and hold the Power button, and then tap Power off.Getting started
19
Holding the device
Do not cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects. This may cause connectivity
problems or drain the battery.
Locking and unlocking the device
When not in use, lock the device to prevent unwanted operation. Pressing the Power button
turns off the screen and puts the device into lock mode. The device automatically gets locked
if it is not used for a specified period.
To unlock the device, press the Power button or the Home button when the touch screen is
turned off, tap anywhere on the screen, and then flick your finger in any direction.
You can use motion to unlock the device. On the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Lock
screen→Screen lock→Motion. To unlock the device with motion, tap and hold a point on
the screen, and then tilt the device forwards.
Adjusting the volume
Press the Volume button up or down to adjust the ringtone volume, or to adjust the sound
volume when playing music or video.Getting started
20
Switching to silent mode
Use one of the following methods:
• Press and hold the Volume button down until it switches to silent mode.
• Press and hold the Power button, and then tap Mute.
• Open the notifications panel at the top of the screen, and then tap Sound.
Set the device to alert you to various events in silent mode. Press and hold the Power button,
and then tap Vibrate.21
Basics
Indicator icons
The icons displayed at the top of the screen provide information about the status of the
device. The icons listed in the table below are most common.
Icon Meaning
No signal
Signal strength
Roaming (outside of normal service area)
GPRS network connected
EDGE network connected
UMTS network connected
HSDPA network connected
LTE network connected
Wi-Fi connected
Bluetooth feature activated
GPS activated
Call in progress
Missed call
Synced with the web
Connected to computer
No SIM or USIM card
New text or multimedia message
Alarm activated
Silent mode activated
Vibration mode activated
Flight mode activatedBasics
22
Icon Meaning
Error occurred or caution required
Battery power level
Using the touch screen
Use only fingers or the S Pen to use the touch screen.
• Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices.
Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction.
• Do not allow the touch screen to contact water. The touch screen may malfunction
in humid conditions or when exposed to water.
• To avoid damaging the touch screen, do not tap it with anything sharp or apply
excessive pressure to it with your fingertips.
• Leaving the touch screen idle for extended periods may result in afterimages
(screen burn-in) or ghosting. Turn off the touch screen when you do not use the
device.
Finger gestures
Tapping
To open an application, to select a menu item, to press an on-screen button, or to enter a
character using the on-screen keyboard, tap it with a finger.Basics
23
Tapping and holding
Tap and hold an item for more than 2 seconds to access available options.
Dragging
To move an icon, thumbnail, or preview to a new location, tap and hold it and drag it to the
target position.
Double-tapping
Double-tap on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Double-tap again to return.Basics
24
Flicking
Flick left or right on the Home screen or the Applications screen to see another panel. Flick up
or down to scroll through a webpage or a list, such as contacts.
Pinching
Spread two fingers apart on a webpage, map, or image to zoom in a part. Pinch to zoom out.Basics
25
Control motions
Simple motions allow easy control of the device.
Before using motions, make sure the motion feature is activated. On the Home screen, tap
Apps→Settings→Motion, and then drag the Motion switch to the right.
Rotating the screen
Many applications allow display in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotating the
device causes the display to automatically adjust to fit the new screen orientation.
To prevent the display from rotating automatically, open the notifications panel and deselect
Screen rotation.
• Some applications do not allow screen rotation.
• Some applications display a different screen depending on the orientation. The
calculator turns into a scientific calculator when rotated to landscape.Basics
26
Picking up
When you pick up the device after it has been idle for some time or when the screen has
turned off, it vibrates if you have missed calls or new messages.
Holding to ear
While viewing call, message, or contact details, pick up and hold the device to your ear to
make a call.Basics
27
Panning to move
Tap and hold an item, and then move the device to the left or right to move the item to
another panel on the Home screen or the Applications screen.
Panning to browse
When an image is zoomed in, tap and hold a point on the screen, and then move the device
in any direction to browse the image.Basics
28
Double-tapping
Double-tap the device to move to the top of a list of contacts or emails.
Rotating
While the screen is locked, tap and hold the screen, and then rotate the device to landscape
orientation to launch the camera. To use this motion, on the Home screen, tap Apps→
Settings→Lock screen→Lock screen options, and then drag the Camera quick access
switch to the right.Basics
29
Turning over
Turn over the device to mute ringtone or pause media playback.
Shaking
• Shake the device to search for Bluetooth devices.
• Shake the device to update the list of emails or information from Yahoo News, Yahoo
Finance, or AccuWeather.
Updates will not work for widgets on the Home screen.Basics
30
Sweeping
Sweep your hand across the screen to capture a screenshot. The image is saved in Gallery→
Screenshots. It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some applications.
Covering
Cover the screen with a palm to pause media playback.Basics
31
Tilting
Tap and hold two points on the screen, and then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or
out.
Moving
When the touch screen is turned off, move your hand across the Proximity/Light sensor to
turn on the screen and view the number of missed calls and new messages, the battery
power level, and more.Basics
32
Page Buddy
Use this feature to use specific applications based on your actions. Pages related to your
actions appear in the following conditions:
• When you pull out the S Pen from the slot.
• When you connect a headset or dock to the device.
• When you are roaming.
Activating Multi Window
Use this feature to run two applications on the screen at the same time.
• Only applications on the Multi Window panel can run.
• When launching applications that contain multimedia files, such as music or
videos, sound from both files will be played.
• This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
To activate Multi Window, tap and hold . The Multi Window panel appears at the left side of
the screen. Select one application, and then drag another application to a new location.
Drag the bar between the application panels up or down to adjust the size of the panels.
Tap the panel handle to hide or show the panel. When a panel is open, tap and hold the
handle and drag it to an edge of the screen to move the panel. When a panel is hidden, tap
and hold the handle and drag it up or down or left or right to move the handle.Basics
33
Using the S Pen
The included S Pen can be used to easily select items or perform functions. Actions using the
S Pen with the button pressed provide additional conveniences, such as screen capture.
Pull out the S Pen from the slot to use it.
When you pull out the S Pen from the slot, the device detects it and performs the following:
• Turns on the touch screen (if it is off).
• Launches S Note (during a call).
• Opens the S Pen page (from the Home screen).
• The tip of the S Pen is not replaceable. If the tip gets dull, purchase a new S Pen.
• If the S Pen is not working properly, take it to a Samsung Service Centre. Refer to
the Samsung website for more information about the S Pen.
• For best results, keep the S Pen mostly perpendicular to the touch screen and avoid
using it at sharp angles.
• The Menu button and the Back button cannot be activated by the S Pen.Basics
34
Opening a menu
With the S Pen button pressed, draw to open a list of the screen’s available options.
Undoing the last action
With the S Pen button pressed, draw to undo the last action.Basics
35
Capturing screenshots
With the S Pen button pressed, touch the screen until you hear a click. A screenshot is saved
in the Gallery→Screenshots folder.
It is possible to draw or write on or to crop a screenshot. The edited image is saved in the
Gallery→IMG_edited folder.
It is not possible to capture a screenshot while using some applications.
Launching S Note
With the S Pen button pressed, double-tap the screen to launch S Note.Basics
36
Selecting text
With the S Pen button pressed, drag left or right on the text to select. If you drag between
lines, you may select unwanted text. To select only the text you intend, drag across the middle
of the text or drag the text selection icons.
Samsung UserManual
Launching Quick Command
With the S Pen button pressed, drag the S Pen up the screen to launch Quick Command.
On the Quick Command screen, draw a gesture command to launch the assigned application
or feature. To view assigned gesture commands, press the S Pen button while hovering over
the Quick Command screen.Basics
37
Selecting and capturing an image
With the S Pen button pressed, draw a line around an area to select it. The selected area is
saved in the Gallery→Screenshots folder. Select an application to use with the selected
area from the icons that appear at the bottom of the screen.
S Pen Air View
When you hold the S Pen near the screen, a pointer appears on the screen. Move the pointer
to files, subjects, or options to preview the contents or view information in pop-up windows.
You can scroll through panels or lists by moving the pointer to an edge (top/bottom/left/
right) of the screen.Basics
38
S Pen Keeper
When the touch screen is off and S Pen is removed from the device, the device displays a popup alert and emits a sound if you walk. Access the S Pen settings to activate or deactivate the
feature.
Quick Command
Use this feature to make a call, send a message, or search for content by drawing gesture
commands on the screen. With the S Pen button pressed, drag the S Pen up on the screen to
launch Quick Command.
Adding gesture commands
Tap →Add a command→Select an application or Select functions. Select an
application or a feature → an option. Draw a new gesture command, and then tap Done.
Using gesture commands
Draw a gesture command to launch applications or features.
For more specific tasks, draw a keyword, such as a name or phone number, after a gesture
command. For example, when drawing @, the Email application launches. When adding a
recipient’s name after @, an email composing screen opens so that you can send an email to
the recipient.Basics
39
Notifications
Notification icons appear on the status bar at the top of the screen to report missed calls, new
messages, calendar events, device status, and more. Drag down from the status bar to open
the notifications panel. Scroll the list to see additional alerts. To close the notifications panel,
drag up the bar that is at the bottom of the screen.
From the notifications panel, you can view your device’s current status and use the following
options:
• Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature.
• GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature.
• Sound: Activate or deactivate silent mode. You can vibrate or mute your device in silent
mode.
• Screen rotation: Allow or prevent the interface from rotating when you rotate the device.
• Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth feature.
• Mobile data: Activate or deactivate the data connection.
• Blocking mode: Activate or deactivate blocking mode. In blocking mode, the device will
block notifications. To select which notifications will be blocked, tap Settings→Blocking
mode.
• Power saving: Activate or deactivate power-saving mode.
• AllShare Cast: Activate or deactivate the AllShare Cast feature.
• Sync: Activate or deactivate auto sync of applications.
The available options may vary depending on the region or service provider.Basics
40
Home screen
The Home screen is the starting point to access all of the device’s features. It displays indicator
icons, widgets, shortcuts to applications, and others.
The Home screen can have multiple panels. To view other panels, scroll left or right.
Changing the Home screen mode
The Home screen has basic and easy modes. In easy mode, you can easily access your
favourite contacts, applications, and settings by adding shortcuts to the Home screen.
To switch to easy mode, on the Home screen, tap Apps→Settings→Home screen mode
→Basic mode→Easy mode→Apply.
Rearranging items
Adding an application icon
On the Home screen, tap Apps, tap and hold an application icon, and then drag it into a panel
preview.
Adding an item
Customise the Home screen by adding widgets or folders.
Tap and hold the empty area on the Home screen, and then select one of the following
categories:
• Apps and widgets: Add widgets or applications to the Home screen.
• Folder: Create a new folder.
Moving an item
Tap and hold an item and drag it to a new location. To move it to another panel, drag it to the
side of the screen.Basics
41
Removing an item
Tap and hold an item, and drag it to the rubbish bin that appears at the top of the Home
screen. When the rubbish bin turns red, release it.
Rearranging panels
Adding a new panel
Tap →Edit page→ .
Moving a panel
Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location.
Removing a panel
Tap →Edit page, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to the rubbish bin at the
bottom of the screen.
Setting wallpaper
Set an image or photo stored in the device as wallpaper for the Home screen.
On the Home screen, tap →Set wallpaper→Home screen, and then select one of the
following:
• Gallery: See photos taken by the device’s camera or images downloaded from the
Internet.
• Live wallpapers: See animated images.
• Wallpapers: See wallpaper images.
Then, select an image and tap Set wallpaper. Or, select an image, resize it by dragging the
frame, and then tap Done.Basics
42
Using widgets
Widgets are small applications that provide convenient functions and information on your
Home screen. To use them, add widgets from the widgets panel to the Home screen.
• Some widgets connect to web services. Using a web-based widget may result in
additional charges.
• The widgets available may vary depending on the region or service provider.
Adding widgets to the Home screen
On the Home screen, tap Apps→Widgets. Scroll left or right on the widgets panel, and then
tap and hold a widget to add it to the Home screen.
Using the setting shortcut widget
On the Home screen, tap Apps→Widgets, and then tap and hold Settings shortcut to open
a list of setting options. Select a setting option to add it to the Home screen as a shortcut.
Using applications
This device can run many different types of applications, ranging from media to Internet
applications.
Opening an application
On the Home screen or the Applications screen, select an application icon to open it.
Opening from recently-used applications
Press and hold the Home button to open the list of recently-used applications.
Select an application icon to open.Basics
43
Closing an application
Close applications not in use to save battery power and maintain device performance.
Press and hold the Home button, tap , and then tap End next to an application to close it.
To close all running applications, tap End all. Alternatively, press and hold the Home button,
and then tap .
Applications screen
The Applications screen displays icons for all applications, including any new applications
installed.
On the Home screen, tap Apps to open the Applications screen.
To view other panels, scroll left or right.
Rearranging applications
Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to a new location. To move it to
another panel, drag it to the side of the screen.
Organising with folders
Put related applications together in a folder for convenience.
Tap →Edit, tap and hold an application, and then drag it to Create folder. Enter a folder
name and then tap OK. Put applications into the new folder by dragging, and then tap Save
to save the arrangement.
Rearranging panels
Pinch on the screen, tap and hold a panel preview, and then drag it to a new location.Basics
44
Installing applications
Use application stores, such as Samsung Apps, to download and install applications.
Uninstalling applications
Tap →Uninstall, and then select an application to uninstall it.
Default applications that come with the device cannot be uninstalled.
Sharing applications
Share downloaded applications with other users via email, Bluetooth, or other methods.
Tap →Share app, select applications, tap Done, and then select a sharing method. The
next steps vary depending on the method selected.
Help
Access help information to learn how to use the device and applications or configure
important settings.
Tap Help on the Applications screen. Select an item to view tips.
To reset help pop-ups if you have hidden them, tap Show help tip pop-ups, and then select
items by ticking.
One-handed operation
You can activate one-handed operation mode for your convenience. In this mode, application
interfaces are modified for easy use with one hand.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→One-handed operation. Tick applications or
features to use with the mode.Basics
45
Entering text
Use the Samsung keyboard or the voice input feature to enter text.
Text entry is not supported in some languages. To enter text, you must change the
input language to one of the supported languages.
Changing the keyboard type
Tap any text field, open the notifications panel, tap Choose input method, and then select
the type of keyboard to use.
Using the Samsung keyboard
Changing the keyboard layout
Tap and hold , tap →Portrait keyboard types, and then tap Qwerty keyboard or 3x4
keyboard.
On the 3x4 keyboard, a key has three or four characters. To enter a character, tap
repeatedly the key corresponding to the character.
Break to the next line.
Delete a preceding character.
Enter punctuation marks.
Enter uppercase.
Switch to handwriting mode.
Enter a space.
Entering uppercase
Tap before entering a character. For all caps, tap it twice.Basics
46
Changing language keyboards
Slide the space key left or right to change language keyboards.
Handwriting
Tap , and then write a word with a finger or the S Pen. Suggested words appear as
characters are entered. Select a suggested word.
Entering text by voice
Activate the voice input feature and then speak into the microphone. The device displays
what you speak.
If the device does not recognise your words correctly, tap the underlined text and select an
alternative word or phrase from the dropdown list.
To change the language or add languages for the voice recognition, tap the current language
at the bottom of the screen.
When you are finished, tap .
Copying and pasting
Tap and hold over text, drag or to select more or less text, and then tap to copy or to
cut. The selected text is copied to the clipboard.
To paste it into a text entry field, tap and hold at the point where it should be inserted, and
then tap Paste.Basics
47
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network
Connect the device to a Wi-Fi network to use the Internet or share media files with other
devices. (p. 116)
Turning Wi-Fi on and off
Open the notifications panel, and then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on or off.
• Your device uses a non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all
European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction
indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors.
• Turn off Wi-Fi to save the battery when not in use.
Joining Wi-Fi networks
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Wi-Fi, and then drag the Wi-Fi switch to the right.
Select a network from the list of detected Wi-Fi networks, enter a password if necessary, and
then tap Connect. Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon. After the device
connects to a Wi-Fi network, the device will automatically connect to it any time it is available.
Adding Wi-Fi networks
If the desired network does not appear in the networks list, tap Add Wi-Fi network at the
bottom of the networks list. Enter the network name in Network SSID, select the security
type and enter the password if it is not an open network, and then tap Save.
Forgetting Wi-Fi networks
Any network that has ever been used, including the current network, can be forgotten so the
device will not automatically connect to it. Select the network in the networks list, and then
tap Forget.Basics
48
Setting up accounts
Google applications, such as Play Store, require a Google account, and Samsung Apps
requires a Samsung account. Create Google and Samsung accounts to have the best
experience with the device.
Adding accounts
Follow the instructions that appear when opening a Google application without signing in to
set up a Google account.
To sign in with or sign up for a Google account, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→
Add account→Google. After that, tap New to sign up, or tap Existing, and then follow onscreen instructions to complete the account setup. More than one Google account can be
used on the device.
Set up a Samsung account as well.
Removing accounts
On the Applications screen, tap Settings, select an account name under Accounts, select the
account to remove, and then tap Remove account.Basics
49
Transferring files
Move audio, video, image, or other types of files from the device to the computer, or vice
versa.
The following file formats are supported by some applications. Some file formats are
not supported depending on the version of the device’s software.
• Music: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac, and flac
• Image: bmp, gif, jpg, and png
• Video: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, and mkv
• Document: doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, pdf, and txt
Connecting with Samsung Kies
Samsung Kies is a computer application that manages media libraries, contacts, and
calendars, and syncs them with Samsung devices. Download the latest Samsung Kies from
the Samsung website.
1
Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
Samsung Kies launches on the computer automatically. If Samsung Kies does not launch,
double-click the Samsung Kies icon on the computer.
2 Transfer files between your device and the computer.
Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information.
Connecting with Windows Media Player
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on the computer.
1
Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
2
Open Windows Media Player and sync music files.Basics
50
Connecting as a media device
1
Connect the device to the computer using the USB cable.
2
Open the notifications panel, and then tap Connected as a media device→Media
device (MTP).
Tap Camera (PTP) if your computer does not support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) or
not have any appropriate driver installed.
3 Transfer files between your device and the computer.
Securing the device
Prevent others from using or accessing personal data and information stored in the device by
using the security features. The device requires an unlock code whenever unlocking it.
Setting a face unlock
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face unlock.
Fit your face in the frame to be captured. Then, set a backup unlock PIN or pattern to unlock
the screen in case the face unlock fails.
Setting a face and voice unlock
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Face and voice.
Fit your face in the frame to be captured and then set a voice command. Then, set a backup
unlock PIN or pattern to unlock the screen in case the face and voice unlock fails.Basics
51
Setting a pattern
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Pattern.
Draw a pattern by connecting four dots or more, and then draw the pattern again to verify it.
Set a backup unlock PIN to unlock the screen when you forget the pattern.
Setting a PIN
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→PIN.
Enter at least four numbers, and then enter the password again to verify it.
Setting a password
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Lock screen→Screen lock→Password.
Enter at least four characters including numbers and symbols, and then enter the password
again to verify it.
Unlocking the device
Turn on the screen by pressing the Power button or the Home button, and enter the unlock
code.
If the unlock code is forgotten, take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it.Basics
52
Upgrading the device
The device can be upgraded to the latest software.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Upgrading with Samsung Kies
Launch Samsung Kies and connect the device to the computer. Samsung Kies automatically
recognises the device and shows available updates in a dialogue box, if any. Click the Update
button in the dialogue box to start upgrading. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for details on
how to upgrade.
• Do not turn off the computer or disconnect the USB cable while the device is
upgrading.
• While upgrading the device, do not connect other media devices to the computer.
Doing so may interfere with the update process.
Upgrading over the air
The device can be directly upgraded to the latest software by the firmware over-the-air
(FOTA) service.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→About device→Software update→Update.53
Communication
Phone
Use this application to make or answer a call.
Tap Phone on the Applications screen.
Making calls
Making a call
Use one of the following methods:
• Keypad: Enter the number using the keypad, and then tap .
• Logs: Make a call from the history of incoming and outgoing calls and messages.
• Favourites: Make a call from the list of favourite contacts.
• Contacts: Make a call from the contacts list.
Speed dial numbers
For speed dial numbers, tap and hold the corresponding digit.
Number prediction
When entering numbers on the keypad, automatic predictions appear. Select one of these to
make a call.Communication
54
Finding contacts
Enter a name, phone number, or email address to find a contact in the contacts list. As
characters are entered, predicted contacts appear. Select one to place a call to it.
Making an international call
Tap and hold 0 until the + sign appears. Enter the country code, area code, and phone
number, and then tap .
During a call
The following actions are available:
• : Hold a call. Or press and hold the headset button. Tap to retrieve the held call, or
press and hold the headset button.
• Add call: Dial a second call.
• Keypad: Open the keypad.
• Speaker: Activate the speakerphone. Keep the device away from your ears when using
the speakerphone.
• Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you.
• Headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device.
• Swap: Switch between two calls.
• Merge: Make a multiparty call when connected to two calls. Repeat this to add more
parties. This feature is available only if the multiparty call service is active.
• →Contacts: Open the contacts list.
• →S Note: Create a note.
• →Transfer: Connect the first party to the second party. This disconnects you from
the conversation.
• →Manage conference call: Have a private conversation with one party during a
multiparty call or disconnect one party form the multiparty call.
• →Message: Send a message.Communication
55
• →Noise reduction off: Deactivate the noise reduction feature that removes
background noise so that the other party can hear you more clearly.
• →My call sound: Select an equaliser option for use during a call.
Adding contacts
To add a phone number to the contacts list from the keypad, enter the number and tap Add
to contacts.
Viewing call logs
Tap Logs to view the history of incoming and outgoing calls.
To filter a call log, tap →View by, and then select an option.
Fixed dialling number
The device can be set to restrict outgoing calls only to numbers with specified prefixes. Those
prefixes are stored in the SIM or USIM card.
Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Fixed Dialling Numbers→Enable FDN,
and then enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. Tap FDN list and add numbers.
Call barring
The device can be set to prevent certain calls from being made. For example, international
calling can be disabled.
Tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call barring, select a call type, select a call
barring option, and then enter a password.
Receiving calls
Answering a call
When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press the headset button.
If the call waiting service is active, another call can be made. When the second call is
answered, the first call is put on hold.Communication
56
Rejecting a call
When a call comes in, drag outside the circle, or press and hold the headset button.
To send a message when rejecting an incoming call, tap Reject call with message. To create
the rejection message, tap →Call settings→Set reject messages.
Automatically rejecting calls from unwanted numbers
Tap →Call settings→Call rejection, drag the Auto reject mode switch to the right, and
then tap Auto reject list. Tap Create, enter a number, assign a category, and then tap Save.
Missed calls
If a call is missed, appears on the status bar. Open the notifications panel to view the list of
missed calls.
Call waiting
Call waiting is a service provided by the service provider. A user can use this service to
suspend a current call and switch to an incoming call. This service is not available for video
calls.
To make use of this service, tap →Call settings→Additional settings→Call waiting.
Call forwarding
The device can be set to send incoming calls to a specified number.
Tap →Call settings→Call forwarding, and then select a call type and condition. Enter a
number and tap Enable.
Ending a call
Tap End call to end a call. Or press the headset button.Communication
57
Video calls
Making a video call
Enter the number or select a contact from the contacts list, and then tap to make a video
call.
During a video call
The following actions are available:
• Switch Camera: Switch between the front and rear camera.
• Mute: Turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you.
• →Hide me: Hide your image from the other party.
• →Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party.
• →Keypad: Open the keypad.
• →Switch to headset: Switch to a Bluetooth headset if it is connected to the device.
• →Speaker off: Deactivate the speakerphone feature.
• →Animated emotions: Apply emotional icons to your image.
• →Theme view: Apply decorative icons to your image.
• →Enable cartoon view: Change the view mode to the cartoon view.
Tap and hold the other party’s image to access the following options:
• Capture image: Capture the other party’s image.
• Record video: Take a video of the other party’s images.
It is illegal in many countries to record a call without the other party’s prior
permission.
Tap and hold your image to access the following options:
• Switch camera: Switch between the front and rear camera.
• Outgoing image: Select an image to show it to the other party.Communication
58
Swapping images
Drag an image of either party onto the other party’s image to swap the images.
Contacts
Use this application to manage contacts, including phone numbers, email addresses, and
others.
Tap Contacts on the Applications screen.
Managing contacts
Creating a contact
Tap and enter contact information.
• : Add an image.
• / : Add or delete a contact field.Communication
59
Editing a contact
Select a contact to edit, and then tap .
Deleting a contact
Tap →Delete.
Setting a speed dial number
Tap →Speed dial setting, select a speed dial number, and then select a contact for it. To
remove a speed dial number, tap and hold it, and then tap Remove.
Searching for contacts
Use one of the following search methods:
• Scroll up or down the contacts list.
• Use the index at the right side of the contacts list for quick scrolling, by dragging a finger
along it.
• Tap the search field at the top of the contacts list and enter search criteria.
Once a contact is selected, take one of the following actions:
• : Add to favourite contacts.
• / : Make a voice or video call.
• : Compose a message.
• : Compose an email.
Importing and exporting contacts
Syncing with Google Contacts
Tap →Merge with Google.
Contacts synced with Google Contacts appear with in the contacts list.
If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Google
Contacts, and vice versa.Communication
60
Syncing with Samsung Contacts
Tap →Merge with Samsung.
Contacts synced with Samsung Contacts appear with in the contacts list.
If a contact is added or deleted on the device, it is also added to or deleted from Samsung
Contacts, and vice versa.
Importing contacts
Tap →Import/Export→Import from SIM card, Import from SD card, or Import from
USB storage.
Exporting contacts
Tap →Import/Export→Export to SIM card, Export to SD card, or Export to USB
storage.
Sharing contacts
Tap →Import/Export→Share namecard via, select contacts, tap Done, and then select
a sharing method.
Favourite contacts
Tap , and then take one of the following actions:
• Search: Search for contacts.
• Add to favourites: Add contacts to favourites.
• Remove from favourites: Remove contacts from favourites.
• Grid view / List view: View contacts in grid or list form.Communication
61
Contact groups
Adding contacts to a group
Select a group, and then tap . Select contacts to add, and then tap Done.
Managing groups
Tap , and then take one of the following actions:
• Create: Make a new group.
• Search: Search for contacts.
• Change order: Tap and hold next to the group name, drag it up or down to another
position, and then tap Done.
• Delete groups: Select user-added groups, and then tap Delete. Default groups cannot be
deleted.
Sending a message or email to a group’s members
Select a group, tap →Send message or Send email, select members, and then tap Done.
Business card
Create a business card and send it to others.
Tap Set up my profile, enter details, such as phone number, email address, and postal
address, and then tap Save. If user information has been saved when you set up the device,
select the business card in ME, and then tap to edit.
Tap →Share namecard via, and then select a sharing method.Communication
62
Messaging
Use this application to send text messages (SMS) or multimedia messages (MMS).
Tap Messaging on the Applications screen.
• This feature may be unavailable depending on your service provider’s LTE network.
For details, contact your service provider.
• You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while you are
outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider.
Sending messages
Tap , add recipients, enter a message, and then tap .
Use the following methods to add recipients:
• Enter a phone number.
• Tap , select contacts, and then tap Done.
Use the following methods to make a multimedia message:
• Tap and attach images, videos, contacts, notes, events, and others.
• Tap →Insert smiley to insert emoticons.
• Tap →Add subject to enter a subject.
Sending scheduled messages
While composing a message, tap →Scheduled message. Set a time and date, and then
tap OK. The device will send the message at the specified time and date.
• If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network,
or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent.
• This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date
may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update
the information.Communication
63
Viewing incoming messages
Incoming messages are grouped into message threads by contact.
Select a contact to view the person’s message.
Listening to a voice message
Tap and hold 1 on the keypad, and then follow the instructions from your service provider.
Email
Use this application to send or view email messages.
Tap Email on the Applications screen.
Setting up email accounts
Set up an email account when opening Email for the first time.
Enter the email address and password. Tap Next for a private email account, such as Google
Mail, or tap Manual setup for a company email account. After that, follow on-screen
instructions to complete the setup.
To set up another email account, tap →Settings→ .
Sending messages
Tap the email account to use, and then tap at the top of the screen. Enter recipients,
subject, and message, and then tap .
Tap to add a recipient from the contacts list.
Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients.
Tap to attach images, videos, contacts, notes, events, and others.
Tap to insert images, events, contacts, and information location into the message.Communication
64
Sending scheduled messages
While composing a message, tap →Schedule sending. Tick Schedule sending, set a
time and date, and then tap Done. The device will send the message at the specified time and
date.
• If the device is turned off at the scheduled time, is not connected to the network,
or the network is unstable, the message will not be sent.
• This feature is based on the time and date set on the device. The time and date
may be incorrect if you move across time zones and the network does not update
the information.
Reading messages
Select an email account to use, and new messages are retrieved. To manually retrieve new
messages, tap .
Tap a message to read.
Open attachments.
Reply to the message.
Add this email address to the
contacts list.
Delete the message.
Mark the message as a reminder.
Forward the message.
Tap the attachment tab to open attachments, and then tap next to an attachment to save
it.Communication
65
Google Mail
Use this application to quickly and directly access the Google Mail service.
Tap Google Mail on the Applications screen.
• This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
• This application may be labelled differently depending on the region or service
provider.
Sending messages
In any mailbox, tap , enter recipients, a subject, and a message, and then tap .
Tap →Attach file to attach images.
Tap →Add Cc/Bcc to add more recipients.
Tap →Save draft to save the message for later delivery.
Tap →Discard to start over.
Reading messages
Download attachment.
Mark the message as unread.
Add a label to this message.
Preview attachment.
Keep this message for long-term
storage.
Mark the message as a reminder.
Delete this message.
Reply to this message.
Reply to all recipients or forward
this message to others.
Add this email address to the
contacts list.Communication
66
Labels
Google Mail does not use actual folders, but uses labels instead. When Google Mail is
launched, it displays messages labelled Inbox.
Tap to view messages in other labels.
To add a label to a message, select the message, tap , and then select the label to assign.
Talk
Use this application to chat with others via Google Talk.
Tap Talk on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Public profile
Tap the account ID at the top of the friends list to change the availability status, image, or
status message.
Adding friends
Tap , enter the email address of the friend to add, and then tap DONE.
Chatting with friends
Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen,
and then tap .
To add a friend to chat, tap →Add to chat.
To end the chat, tap →End chat.Communication
67
Switching between chats
Scroll left or right.
Deleting chat history
Chats are automatically saved. To delete chat history, tap →Clear chat history.
Google+
Use this application to stay connected with people via Google’s social network service.
Tap Google+ on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Tap All circles to change the category, and then scroll up or down to view posts from your
circles.
Messenger
Use this application to chat with others via Google+ instant messaging service.
Tap Messenger on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a friend from the friends list, enter a message in the field at the bottom of the screen,
and then tap .Communication
68
ChatON
Use this application to chat with any device that has a mobile phone number.
Tap ChatON on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Create the buddies list by entering phone numbers or email addresses of Samsung accounts,
or selecting buddies from the list of suggestions.
Select a buddy to start chatting.
To sync contacts on the device with ChatON, tap Settings→Sync contacts.69
Web & network
Internet
Use this application to browse the Internet.
Tap Internet on the Applications screen.
Viewing webpages
Tap the address field, enter the web address, and then tap Go.
Tap to share, save, or print the current webpage while viewing a webpage.
Opening a new page
Tap →New window.
To go to another webpage, tap , scroll left or right, and tap the page to select it.
Searching the web by voice
Tap the address field, tap , speak a keyword, and then select one of the suggested keywords
that appear.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Bookmarks
To bookmark the current webpage, tap →Add bookmark.
To open a bookmarked webpage, tap , and then select one.Web & network
70
History
Tap →History to open a webpage from the list of recently-visited webpages. To clear the
history, tap →Clear history.
Tap →History→Most visited to open a webpage from the list of most visited webpages.
Saved pages
To view saved webpages, tap →Saved pages.
Links
Tap and hold a link on the webpage to open it in a new page, save, share, or copy.
To view saved links, tap →Downloads.
Sharing webpages
To share a webpage address with others, tap →Share page.
To share a part of a webpage, tap and hold the desired text, and then tap →Share.
Using Popup Browser
Use this feature to access the Internet without closing the current application.
While viewing content, such as contacts or notes that include web addresses, select a web
address, and then tap Popup Browser to open the pop-up browser. Tap and drag the browser
to move it to another location.
To view the browser in full screen, tap .
To close the browser, tap .Web & network
71
Bluetooth
Bluetooth creates a direct wireless connection between two devices over short distances. Use
Bluetooth to exchange data or media files with other devices.
• Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or
received via the Bluetooth feature.
• Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted
and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating
distance may be reduced.
• Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by the Bluetooth
SIG, may be incompatible with your device.
• Do not use the Bluetooth feature for illegal purposes (for example, pirating copies
of files or illegally tapping communications for commercial purposes).
Samsung is not responsible for the repercussion of illegal use of the Bluetooth
feature.
To activate Bluetooth, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth, and then drag
the Bluetooth switch to the right.
Pairing with other Bluetooth devices
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Bluetooth→Scan, and detected devices are
listed. Select the device you want to pair with, and then accept the auto-generated passkey
on both devices to confirm.
Sending and receiving data
Many applications support data transfer via Bluetooth. An example is Gallery. Open Gallery,
select an image, tap →Bluetooth, and then select one of the paired Bluetooth devices.
After that, accept the Bluetooth authorisation request on the other device to receive the
image. The transferred file is saved in the Bluetooth folder. If a contact is received, it is added
to the contacts list automatically.Web & network
72
AllShare Cast
Use this feature to connect your device to a large screen with an AllShare Cast dongle, and
then share your contents.
• This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
• Some files may be buffered during playback, depending on the network
connection.
• To save energy, deactivate the AllShare Cast feature when not in use.
• If you specify a Wi-Fi frequency band, AllShare Cast dongles may not be discovered
or connected.
• If you play videos or games on a TV, select an appropriate TV mode to get the best
experience from AllShare Cast.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→AllShare Cast, and then drag
the AllShare Cast switch to the right. Select a device, open or play a file, and then control the
display with the keys on your device.
AllShare Play
Use this application to play contents saved on various devices over the Internet. You can play
and send any file on any device to another device or web storage server.
To use this application, you must sign in to your Google and Samsung accounts and register
two or more devices as file servers. The registration methods may vary depending on the
device type. To get more details, tap →FAQ.
Tap AllShare Play on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Sending files
Select a device or web storage, select a file, and then tap .Web & network
73
Sharing files
Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then use the following options:
• Send to Nearby Users: Share files with nearby devices that have AllShare Play activated.
• Facebook/Twitter/Flickr/Picasa: Upload files to a social network site.
Playing files on a remote device
Select a device or web storage, select a file, tap , and then select a device.
• Supported file formats may differ depending on connected devices as a media
player.
• Some files may be buffered while playing depending on the network connection.
Managing contents on a web storage server
Select a web storage server, and then view and manage your files.Web & network
74
NFC
Your device allows you to read near field communication (NFC) tags that contain information
about products. You can also use this feature to make payments and buy tickets for
transportation or events after downloading the required applications.
The back cover contains a built-in NFC antenna. Handle the back cover carefully to
avoid damaging the NFC antenna.
If the screen is locked, your device will not read NFC tags or receive data.
To activate the NFC feature, on the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→
NFC. Drag the NFC switch to the right.
Reading information from an NFC tag
Place the device near an NFC tag. The information from the tag will appear.
Making a purchase with the NFC feature
Before you can use the NFC feature to make payments, you must register for the mobile
payment service. To register or get details about the service, contact your service provider.
Touch the back of your device to the NFC card reader.
Sending data via Android Beam
Use the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and contacts, to NFC-enabled
devices.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→NFC. Drag the Android Beam
switch to the right.
Select an item, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap
your device’s screen.Web & network
75
S Beam
Use the S Beam feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents.
Do not send copyright-protected data via S Beam. Doing so may violate copyright
laws. Samsung is not responsible for any liabilities caused by the illegal use of
copyrighted data.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→More settings→S Beam. Drag the S Beam
switch to the right.
Select a file, touch the back of your device to the back of the other device, and then tap your
device’s screen.
If both devices try to send data simultaneously, the file transfer may fail.76
Media
Music Player
Use this application to listen to music.
Tap Music Player on the Applications screen.
• Some file formats are not supported depending on the device’s software version.
• Some files may not play properly depending on the encoding used.
Playing music
Select a music category, and then select a song to play.
Open the playlist.
Skip to the next song. Tap and
hold to move forwards quickly.
Pause and resume playback.
Adjust the volume.
Open Music square.
Change the repeat mode.
Restart the currently-playing
song or skip to the previous
song. Tap and hold to move
backwards quickly.
Turn on shu e.
Select a sound e ect.Media
77
Setting a song as ringtone
To use the currently-playing song as ringtone, tap →Set as→Phone ringtone.
Creating playlists
Make an own selection of songs.
Tap Playlists, and then tap →Create playlist. Enter a title and tap OK. Tap Add music,
select songs to include, and then tap Done.
To add the currently-playing song to a playlist, tap →Add to playlist.
Playing music by mood
Play music grouped by mood. The playlist is automatically created by the device. When a new
song is added, tap Music square→ →Library update.
Tap Music square and select a cell of mood.
Camera
Use this application to take photos or videos.
Use Gallery to view photos and videos taken with the device’s camera. (p. 84)
Tap Camera on the Applications screen.
The camera automatically shuts off when unused.
Camera etiquette
• Do not take photos or videos of other people without their permission.
• Do not take photos or videos where legally prohibited.
• Do not take photos or videos in places where you may violate other people’s privacy.Media
78
Taking photos
Taking a photo
Tap the image on the preview screen where the camera should focus. When the subject is
in focus, the focus frame turns green. Tap to take the photo. Tap and hold to take a
series of photos.
Indicates which
storage is in use.
Switch between still
and video mode.
Open the image
viewer to display
photos.
Switch between the
front and rear
camera.
Change the ash
setting.
Change the shooting
mode.
Select among
various e ects that
are available.
Change the camera
settings.
Scene mode
Predefined settings make point-and-shoot photos easier to take.
Tap →Scene mode.
• Portrait: Use this setting for a human subject.
• Landscape: Use this setting for a wider view.
• Sports: Use this setting for fast-moving subjects.
• Party/Indoor: Use this setting for well-lit indoor scenes.
• Beach/Snow: Use this setting for well-lit or sunny outdoor scenes.Media
79
• Sunset: Use this setting for richer colours and sharper contrasts.
• Dawn: Use this setting for very subtle colours.
• Autumn colour: Use this setting for red-shifted background scenery.
• Text: Use this setting for books or posters.
• Candlelight: Use this setting for images of bright light against a dark background.
Shooting mode
Several photo effects are available, such as cartoon rendering.
Tap →Shooting mode.
• Single shot: Take a single photo.
• Best photo: Take a series of photos, and then save the best one.
• Best Face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same time and combine them to
create the best possible image.
Tap to take multiple photos. To get the best shot, hold the camera steady and remain
still while taking photos. When Gallery opens, tap the yellow frame on each face, and
choose the best individual pose for the subject. After choosing a pose for each individual,
tap Save to merge the images into a single photo, and save it.
• Face detection: Set the device to recognise people’s faces and help you take photos of
them.
• Panorama: Take a photo composed of many photos strung together.
• Share shot: Send a photo directly to another device via Wi-Fi Direct.
• HDR: Take three photos with different exposures and then combine them to improve the
contrast ratio.
• Buddy photo share: Set the device to recognise a person’s face that you have tagged
in a photo and send it to that person. Face recognition may fail depending on the face
angle, face size, skin colour, facial expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject
is wearing.
• Beauty: Take a photo with lightened faces for gentler images.
• Smile shot: Take a photo while the camera waits for a subject to smile.
• Low light: Take a series of photos and combine them into one photo to improve the
image quality.Media
80
Panoramic photos
A panoramic photo is a wide landscape image consisting of multiple shots.
Tap →Shooting mode→Panorama.
Tap and move the camera in any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the
viewfinder, the camera automatically takes another shot in a panoramic sequence. To stop
shooting, tap again.
Taking videos
Taking a video
Slide the still-video switch to the video icon, and then tap to take a video. To pause
recording, tap . To stop recording, tap .
While recording, use the following actions:
• To change the focus, tap where you want to focus. To focus on the centre of the screen,
tap .
• To capture an image from the video while recording, tap . This feature will not work
when the anti-shake feature is activated.
The zoom function may not be available when recording at the highest resolution.Media
81
Recording mode
Switch between the
front and rear
camera.
Change the ash
setting.
Change recording
mode.
Select among
various e ects that
are available.
Change the camera
settings.
Indicates which
storage is in use.
Switch between still
and video mode.
Open the video
player to play videos.
Tap to change recording mode.
• Normal: Use this mode for normal quality.
• Limit for MMS: Use this mode to lower quality for sending via messaging.
• Slow motion: Use this mode to take a video of a moving subject. The device will play the
video in slow motion.
• Fast motion: Use this mode to take a video of a moving subject. The device will play the
video in fast motion.
Zooming in and outMedia
82
Use one of the following methods:
• Use the Volume button to zoom in or out.
• Spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to zoom out.
• The zoom function may not be available when shooting at the highest resolution.
• The zoom in/out effect is available when using the zoom feature while shooting
video.
Configuring settings for Camera
Tap to configure settings for Camera. Not all of the following options are available in both
still camera and video camera modes. The available options vary depending on the mode
used.
• Edit shortcuts: Reorganise shortcuts to frequently-used options.
• Burst shot: Take a series of photos of moving subjects.
• Self portrait: Take a photo of yourself.
• Self recording: Take a video of yourself.
• Flash: Activate or deactivate the flash.
• Shooting mode: Change the shooting mode.
• Recording mode: Change recording mode.
• Effects: Select among various photo effects that are available.
• Scene mode: Change the scene mode.
• Exposure value: This determines how much light the camera’s sensor receives. For lowlight situations, use a higher exposure.
• Focus mode: Select a focus mode. Auto focus is camera-controlled. Macro is for very
close objects.
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots.
• Resolution: Select a resolution. Use higher resolution for higher quality. But it takes up
more memory.Media
83
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so images have a true-to-life colour
range. The settings are designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are similar
to the heat range for white-balance exposure in professional cameras.
• ISO: Select an ISO value. This controls camera light sensitivity. It is measured in filmcamera equivalents. Low values are for stationary or brightly-lit objects. Higher values are
for fast-moving or poorly-lit objects.
• Metering: Select a metering method. This determines how light values are calculated.
Centre-weighted measures background light in the centre of the scene. Spot measures
the light value at a specific location. Matrix averages the entire scene.
• Outdoor visibility: Use this for bright, outdoor conditions.
• Auto contrast: Set the camera to use automatic contrast. Automatic contrast defines
contrast levels without manual input.
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition when selecting subjects.
• Auto share shot: Set to automatically activate Wi-Fi Direct and switch to share shot mode
when you touch the back of your device to another NFC-enabled device, and then tap
the screen of your device’s screen.
• Anti-Shake: Activate or deactivate anti-shake. Anti-shake helps focus when the camera is
moving.
• GPS tag: Attach a GPS location tag to the photo.
• To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be
obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas, or in poor weather
conditions.
• Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the Internet.
To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.
• Contextual filename: Set the camera to display contextual tags.
• Take photos using voice: Set the camera to take photos with voice commands.
• Save as flipped: Invert the image to create a mirror-image of the original scene.
• Image quality: Higher quality images require more storage space.Media
84
• Video quality: Set the quality level for videos.
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.
Shortcuts
Reorganise shortcuts for easy access to the camera’s various options.
Tap →Edit shortcuts.
Tap and hold an option and drag it to a slot at the left of the screen. The other icons can be
moved within the list by tapping and dragging them.
Gallery
Use this application to view images and videos.
Tap Gallery on the Applications screen.
• Some file formats are not supported depending on the software installed on the
device.
• Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded.
Viewing images
Launching Gallery displays available folders. When another application, such as Email, saves
an image, the download folder is automatically created to contain the image. Likewise,
capturing a screenshot automatically creates the Screenshots folder. Select a folder to open
it.
In a folder, images are displayed by creation date. Select an image to view it in full screen.
Scroll left or right to view the next or previous image.Media
85
Zooming in and out
Use one of the following methods to zoom in an image:
• Double-tap anywhere to zoom in.
• Spread two fingers apart on any place to zoom in. Pinch to zoom out, or double-tap to
return.
Viewing images using the motion feature
Use the motion feature to execute a function with particular motion.
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Motion, drag the Motion switch to the right, and
then select features by ticking.
To stop using a motion feature, drag the Motion switch to the left.
To set the sensitivity for each motion feature, tap Advanced settings, select a feature, and
then use the adjustable slide bar.
Playing videos
Video files show the icon on the preview. Select a video to watch it and tap , and Video
Player launches.
Editing images
When viewing an image, tap and use the following functions:
• Slideshow: Start a slideshow with the images in the current folder.
• Face tag: Register the faces in the image as face tags.
• Tag buddy: Set the camera to display contextual tags.
• Add photo note: Add a note to the image. Tap to edit the note.
• Copy to clipboard: Copy to clipboard.
• Rotate left: Rotate anticlockwise.
• Rotate right: Rotate clockwise.
• Crop: Resize the orange frame to crop and save the image in it.
• Edit: Launch Paper Artist to edit the image.
• Set as: Set the image as a wallpaper or a contact image.
• Buddy photo share: Send the image to a person whose face is tagged in the image.Media
86
• Print: Print via a USB or Wi-Fi connection. The device is only compatible with some
Samsung printers.
• Rename: Rename the file.
• Details: View image details.
• Edit weather tag: Add a weather tag.
Favourite images
When viewing an image, tap to add the image to the favourites list.
Deleting images
Use one of the following methods:
• In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap .
• When viewing an image, tap .
Sharing images
Use one of the following methods:
• In a folder, tap →Select item, select images by ticking, and then tap to send them
to others.
• When viewing an image, tap to send it to others or share it via social network services.
Setting as wallpaper
When viewing an image, tap →Set as to set the image as wallpaper or to assign it to a
contact.Media
87
Tagging faces
When viewing an image, tap →Face tag→On. A yellow frame appears around the
recognised face. Tap the face, tap Add name, and then select or add a contact.
When the face tag appears on an image, tap the face tag and use available options, such as
making calls or sending messages.
Face recognition may fail depending on the face angle, face size, skin colour, facial
expression, light conditions, or accessories the subject is wearing.
Using Tag Buddy
When viewing an image, tap →Tag buddy to display a contextual tag (weather, location,
date, and person’s name) when opening an image.
Paper Artist
Use this application to make images look like illustrations with fun effects or frames.
Tap Paper Artist on the Applications screen.
Use artistic tools to edit an image. The edited image is saved in the Gallery→Paper Pictures
folder.
Select an existing image. Share the image.
Apply effects to the image.
Change the pen thickness.
Take a photo.
Change the brush thickness.
Save the image.
Apply frames to the image.
Change the eraser size.Media
88
Video Player
Use this application to play video files.
Tap Video Player on the Applications screen.
• Avoid locking the device’s screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand. Each
time you lock the screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand, one of your
available rental counts is lost.
• Some file formats are not supported depending on the device's software.
• Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded.
Playing videos
Select a video to play.
Change screen ratio.
Move forwards or
backwards by
dragging the bar.
Capture an image.
Restart the current
video or skip to the
previous video. Tap
and hold to move
backwards quickly.
Skip to the next
video. Tap and hold
to move forwards
quickly.
Adjust the volume.
Reduce the size of
the video screen.
Pause and resume
playback.
Deleting videos
Tap →Delete, select videos by ticking, and then tap Delete.
Sharing videos
Tap →Share via, select videos by ticking, tap Done, and then select a sharing method.Media
89
Using Popup Video player
Use this feature to use other applications without closing the video player. While watching
videos, tap to use the pop-up player.
Spread two fingers apart on the screen to enlarge the player or pinch to reduce it. To move
the player, tap and hold the player, and then drag it to another location.
YouTube
Use this application to watch videos from the YouTube website.
Tap YouTube on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Watching videos
Tap , and then enter a keyword. Select one of the returned search results to watch a video.
Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display full screen.
Pause or resume
playback.
Move forwards or
backwards by
dragging the bar.
Change display
quality.
Add the video to
the playlist.
Search for videos.
Rotate the screen
to portrait
orientation.
Send the URL to
others.Media
90
Sharing videos
Select the video to view, tap , and then select a sharing method.
Uploading videos
Select your account, tap , select a video, enter information for the video, and then tap
Upload.
Flipboard
Use this application to access your personalised magazines.
Tap Flipboard on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
To start your Flipboard, flick up on the greeting page, tap Get Started, select news topics, and
then tap Done.
Select a cover story or a topic, flick through the Flipboard pages, and then select an article to
read.
While reading an article, use the following icons:
• :
Go to the previous page.
• :
Share the article with others.
• :
View others’ comments about the article.91
Application & media stores
Play Store
Use this application to purchase and download applications and games that are able to run
on the device.
Tap Play Store on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Installing applications
Browse applications by category, or tap to search with a keyword.
Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Install. If there is a charge for
the application, tap the price, and follow on-screen instructions to complete the purchase
process.
• When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon
appears at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications
panel and tap the icon to update the application.
• To install applications that you downloaded from other sources, on the
Applications screen, tap Settings→Security→Unknown sources.
Uninstalling applications
Uninstall the applications purchased from Play Store.
Tap →My Apps, select an application to delete in the list of installed applications, and
then tap Uninstall.Application & media stores
92
Samsung Apps
Use this application to purchase and download dedicated Samsung applications. For more
information, visit www.samsungapps.com.
Tap Samsung Apps on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
If a Samsung account is not registered, follow the on-screen instructions to create a Samsung
account. To complete the subscription process, read the terms and conditions, and then tap
Accept to agree to them.
Installing applications
Browse applications by category. Tap to select a category.
To search for an application, tap at the top of the screen, and then enter a keyword in the
search field.
Select an application to view information. To download it, tap Get.
When a new version is available for any installed application, an update icon appears
at the top of the screen to alert you to the update. Open the notifications panel and
tap the icon to update the application.
S Suggest
Use this application to browse and download the latest applications suggested by Samsung.
Tap S Suggest on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.Application & media stores
93
Game Hub
Use this application to access games.
Tap Game Hub on the Applications screen.
Scroll left or right and select a game to download from Samsung Apps.
Music Hub
Use this application to listen to songs on the device or the web server provided by Music Hub,
and purchase songs.
If you subscribe to the Music Hub premium service, you can enjoy customisable services, such
as recommended songs or artists, unlimited song streaming, and personal radio stations. To
get more details, tap Help or visit the Music Hub website.
Tap Music Hub on the Applications screen.
This application or some features of this application may not be available depending
on the region or service provider.
Syncing songs with the Music Hub library
Tap My Music→ →Refresh. The Music Hub library is updated with the songs on the
device.
If a song on your Music Hub library is not in the database, Music Hub will automatically
upload the song to the database.
Playing music
Tap My Music, select a music category, and then select a song to play.
To search for and listen to similar songs, tap →Find similar music.Application & media stores
94
Purchasing songs
Tap Store, and then select a genre → a category. Tap →Buy song, and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the purchase process.
Play Books
Use this application to read and download book files.
Tap Play Books on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a book file by scrolling left or right. While reading a book file, tap to access
additional options.
To purchase book files, tap .
Play Movies
Use this application to watch, download, and rent movies or TV shows.
Tap Play Movies on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a category at the top of the screen, and then select a movie, TV programme, or video to
play or rent.Application & media stores
95
Play Music
Use this application to stream music from the Google cloud service.
Tap Play Music on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Play music by selecting a music category or share songs with others by uploading them to
the Google cloud storage.
Play Magazines
Use this application to read and download magazines.
Tap Play Magazines on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a category, and then select a magazine.
Readers Hub
Use this application to download and read book files.
Tap Readers Hub on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a category, find a book file, and then download it.Application & media stores
96
Video Hub
Use this application to access and purchase videos.
Tap Video Hub on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a category, and then select a video.
Learning Hub
Use this application to access learning material.
Tap Learning Hub on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a category, and then select a video lecture or book.97
Utilities
S Note
Use this application to create a note using images and voice recordings.
Tap S Note on the Applications screen.
The S Pen can be used to open S Note. Double-tap the screen with the S Pen button pressed.
Selecting note templates
Tap and select one of the following templates:
• Note/Idea note/Memo: Create a simple note from an empty page.
• Meeting note: Create a record of meetings, conferences, or lectures.
• Magazine: Create a multimedia note by inserting multimedia files.
• Diary: Create a photo diary.
• Recipe: Create your own recipe.
• Travel: Create a travel essay.
• Birthday: Create a birthday card.Utilities
98
Composing notes
Append another page to the
current note.
Undo and redo the last action.
Insert a multimedia file.
Make a voice recording to insert.
Record your actions while
drawing a note.
Erase the handwritten note.
Draw only with the S Pen.
Use productivity tools.
Search for information about the
handwritten keyword on a
preset webpage.
Enter a note.
Jot down or draw a note.
Switch to view mode.
When jotting down a note, tap to change the pen type, line thickness, or pen colour.
When erasing the handwritten note, tap to change the eraser size or clear the note.
View more colours.
Change the line thickness.
Change the pen colour.
Change the pen type. Save the current setting as a pen
profile.
Add a new colour with the Color
Picker.
To change the sheet background, tap →Change background.
To add tags, tap →Add tag.Utilities
99
Inserting multimedia files or a voice recording
Tap to insert multimedia files. Tap to insert a voice recording.
Insert a multimedia file.
Make a voice recording to insert.
Using productivity tools
Double-tap and select one of the following tools:
• Shape match: Convert a shape you have drawn.
• Formula match: Convert a handwritten formula to a well-organised formula. Tap Search
to get detailed information about the formula.
• Handwriting-to-text: Convert a handwritten note.
Browsing notes
Browse note thumbnails by scrolling up or down.
To sync notes with the Samsung account, tap →Refresh.
To sort notes by date, title, or others, tap →Sort by.
To change the view mode, tap →List view.
To create a note by importing a PDF, image file, or note, tap →Import.
To sync notes with Google Docs or Evernote, tap →Sync.
To create a folder, tap →Create folder.
To change the order of notes, tap →Change order.
To copy notes, tap →Copy.Utilities
100
To move notes to another folder, tap →Move.
To change the S Note settings, tap →Settings.
To view the tutorial for S Note, tap →Tutorial.
Viewing a note
Tap the note thumbnail to open it.
To move to other pages of the note, scroll left or right.
To create a note, tap →Create note.
To send the note to others, tap →Share via.
To save the note as an image file or a PDF file, tap →Export.
To add or delete the note, tap →Edit pages.
To delete the note, tap →Delete.
To add tags, tap →Add tag.
To save the note as an event, tap →Create event.
To add a shortcut to the note on the Home screen, tap →Set as shortcut.
To set the note as wallpaper or to assign it to a contact, tap →Set as.
To print the note via a USB or Wi-Fi connection, tap →Print. The device is only compatible
with some Samsung printers.
S Planner
Use this application to manage events and tasks.
Tap S Planner on the Applications screen.
Creating events or tasks
Tap , and then use one of the following methods:
• Quick add: Create an event or task from a memo. This feature is available only for English
and Korean.
• Add event: Enter an event with an optional repeat setting.
• Add task: Enter a task with an optional priority setting.Utilities
101
To add an event or task more briefly, tap a date to select it and tap it again.
Enter a title and specify which calendar to use or sync with. Then tap Edit event details or
Edit task details to add more details, such as how often the event repeats, when it has an
advance alert, or where it takes place.
Attach a map showing the location of the event. Enter the location in the Location field, tap
next to the field, and then pinpoint the precise location by tapping and holding on the
map that appears.
Attach a memo from S Note. Tap Notes, and then compose a new memo or select one of the
existing memos.
Attach an image. Tap Images, and then take a photo or select one of the existing images.
Syncing with Google Calendar
On the Applications screen, tap Settings→Google under Accounts→ a Google account →
Sync Calendar→Sync now. To manually sync for updating, on the Applications screen, tap S
Planner→ →Sync.
To display synced event or tasks on Google Calendar, tap →Settings→Calendars, select
the Google account, and then tap Done.Utilities
102
Changing calendar type
Tap , and then select one from among different types of calendars including year, month,
week, and others. A pinch gesture can be used to change calendar type. For example, pinch
to change from the monthly calendar to the yearly calendar, and spread apart to change
yearly calendar back to monthly calendar.
Searching for events
Tap →Search, and then enter a keyword to search for.
To view today’s events, tap Today at the top of the screen.
Deleting events
Select a date or event, and then tap →Delete.
Sharing events
Select an event, tap →Share via, and then select a sharing method.
Dropbox
Use this application to save and share files with others via the Dropbox cloud storage. When
you save files to Dropbox, your device automatically syncs with the web server and any other
computers that have Dropbox installed.
Tap Dropbox on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
When running Dropbox for the first time, tap Start to activate it. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the setup.
To upload files to Dropbox, tap →Photos or videos or Other files.
To open a file in Dropbox, tap , and then select a file. While viewing the file, tap Favorite to
add it to the favourites list.
To open favourite files, tap .Utilities
103
Cloud
Use this feature to sync files or back up settings and application data with your Samsung
account or Dropbox.
Tap Settings→Cloud on the Applications screen.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Syncing with the Samsung account
Tap your Samsung account or Sync settings to sync files.
Backing up or restoring data
Tap Device backup to back up or restore data with your Samsung account.
Syncing with Dropbox
If an account is not set up, tap Set account, and then enter the Dropbox account. Follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the setup.
Once you sign in, tap Allow and the device automatically syncs files with Dropbox whenever
you make some changes.Utilities
104
Clock
Use this application to set alarms, check the time in any location in the world, measure the
duration of an event, set a timer, or use as the desk clock.
Tap Clock on the Applications screen.
Turn this alarm on or off.
Alarm
Setting alarms
Tap Create alarm, set a time for the alarm to go off, select days for the alarm to repeat, and
then tap Save.
Use the following options:
• Tap More→Location alarm to set a location. The alarm goes off only when you are in
the location.
• Tap More→Snooze to set an interval and the number of times for the alarm to repeat
after the preset time.
• Tap More→Smart alarm to set a time for the alarm to go off before the preset time.Utilities
105
Stopping alarms
Drag outside the circle to stop an alarm. Drag outside the circle to repeat the alarm
after a specified length of time.
Deleting alarms
Tap and hold the alarm, and then tap Delete.
World clock
Creating clocks
Tap Add city, and then enter a city name or select a city from the cities list.
To apply summer time, tap and hold a clock, and then tap DST settings.
Deleting clocks
Tap →Delete, select clocks, and then tap Delete.
Stopwatch
Tap Start to time an event. Tap Lap to record lap times.
Tap Reset to clear lap time records.
Timer
Set the duration, and then tap Start.
Drag outside the large circle when the timer goes off.
Desk clock
Tap to view in full screen.Utilities
106
Calculator
Use this application for simple or complex calculations.
Tap Calculator on the Applications screen.
Rotate the device to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator. If Screen
rotation is disabled, tap →Scientific calculator.
To see calculation history, tap to hide the keypad.
To clear history, tap →Clear history.
To change the character size for history, tap →Text size.
To set the calculator for convenient use with one hand, tap →One-handed operation on.
Voice Recorder
Use this application to record or play voice memos.
Tap Voice Recorder on the Applications screen.
Recording voice memos
Tap to start recording. Speak into the microphone at the bottom of the device. Tap to
pause recording. Tap to finish recording.
Start recording.
Recording elapsed time
Display the list of voice memos.Utilities
107
Playing voice memos
Select a voice memo to play.
• : Adjust the volume by dragging the volume bar up or down.
• : Trim the voice memo.
• : Stop playback.
• : Pause playback.
To send a voice memo to others, tap →Share via, select a voice memo, and then select a
sharing method.
Managing voice memos
In the list of voice memos, tap and select one of the following:
• Share via: Select a sharing method, and then select voice memos to send.
• Delete: Select voice memos to delete.
• Settings: Change the voice recorder settings.
• End: Close the voice recorder.
Saving files with contextual tags
In the list of voice memos, tap →Settings→Contextual filename→On.Utilities
108
S Voice
Use this application to command by voice the device to dial a number, send a message, write
a memo, and more.
Tap S Voice on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Here are several examples of spoken commands:
• Open music
• Launch calculator
• Call Lulu mobile
• Dial Lulu work
• Check schedule
Tips for better voice recognition
• Speak clearly.
• Speak in quiet places.
• Do not use offensive or slang words.
• Avoid speaking in dialectal accents.
The device may not recognise your commands or may perform unwanted commands
depending on your surroundings or how you speak.Utilities
109
Google
Use this application to search not only the Internet, but also applications and their contents
on the device as well.
Tap Google on the Applications screen.
Searching the device
Tap the search field, and then enter a keyword. Alternatively, tap , speak a keyword, and
then select one of the suggested keywords that appear.
If no results are returned from the applications, the web browser appears, displaying the
search results.
Search scope
To select what applications to search, tap →Settings→Phone search, and then tick the
items to search for.
Google Now
Launch Google search to view Google Now cards that show the current weather, public
transit info, your next appointment, and more when you are most likely to need it.
Join Google Now when opening Google search for the first time. To change Google Now
settings, tap →Settings→Google Now.
This feature may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Voice Search
Use this application to search webpages by speaking.
Tap Voice Search on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Speak a keyword or phrase when Speak now appears on the screen. Select one of the
suggested keywords that appear.Utilities
110
My Files
Use this application to access all kinds of files stored in the device, including images, videos,
songs, and sound clips.
Tap My Files on the Applications screen.
Viewing files
Select a folder to open it. To go back to the parent folder, tap . To return to the root
directory, tap .
In a folder, tap , and then use one of the following options:
• Create folder: Create a folder.
• Search: Search for files.
• View by: Change the view mode.
• Sort by: Sort files or folders.
• Settings: Change the file manager settings.
• Select all: Select all files to apply the same option to them at once.
Adding shortcuts to folders
Add a shortcut of frequently-used folders to the root directory. Tap →Add shortcut, enter
a shortcut name, select a folder, and then tap Done.
Downloads
Use this application to see what files are downloaded through the applications.
Tap Downloads on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
To see the files downloaded from the Internet, tap Internet downloads, otherwise, tap Other
downloads to see the files downloaded from other applications, such as Email.
Select a file to open it with an appropriate application.Utilities
111
Google Wallet
Use this application to add credit or debit card information for mobile payments or manage
the payment history.
Tap Google Wallet on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Access credit card information to edit it, register additional purchase methods, or manage the
payment history.
To make a payment, touch the back of your device to the NFC card reader.112
Travel & local
Maps
Use this application to pinpoint the location of the device, search for places, or get directions.
Tap Maps on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Viewing maps
Scroll in any direction to view a location or find your way.
To zoom in or out the map, spread two fingers apart on the screen to zoom in, and pinch to
zoom out.
To overlay multiple layers including satellite images, traffic information, and more, tap .
Searching for locations
Tap , enter an address, and then tap . Select a location to view the detailed location
information. To search for nearby locations, tap .
Once the location is found, tap and use one of the following functions:
• Clear Map: Clear the map.
• Make available offline: Save the map of a specified area to view it offline.
• Settings: Change the map settings.
• Help: View information about using the map.
To view current location, tap .Travel & local
113
Getting directions for a destination
1 Tap .
2 Tap , and then select a method to enter starting and ending locations:
• My current location: Use current location for starting location.
• Contacts: Select from the contacts list.
• Point on map: Pinpoint by tapping on the map.
• My Places: Select from the list of favourite places.
3 Select a travel method, such as driving, public transit, or walking, and then tap GET
DIRECTIONS.
4 Select one of the routes that appear, and then tap MAP VIEW to view details.
Local
Use this application to search for nearby restaurants, banks, bus stops, and more.
Tap Local on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Select a place category, and then select a place from the list of search results.
• Map: Pinpoint the place on the map.
• Directions: Search for a route to the place.
• Call: Call the place’s phone number.
To add a place category, tap →Add a search on the category list, enter a keyword to
search into the text field.Travel & local
114
Latitude
Use this application to share location information with friends.
Tap Latitude on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
To add a friend with whom location information is shared, tap →Select from Contacts or
Add via email address. Select one from contacts or enter an email address, and then tap Add
friends to send an invitation. Once the invitation is accepted, either party can know where
the other party is located.
Navigation
Use this application to search for a route to a destination.
Tap Navigation on the Applications screen.
• Navigation maps, your current location, and other navigational data may differ
from actual location information. You should always pay attention to road
conditions, traffic, and any other factors that may affect your driving. Follow all
safety warnings and regulations while driving.
• This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.
Specify the destination by using one of the following methods:
• Speak the destination address.
• Enter the destination address.
• Select the destination address from the contacts list.
• Select the destination from the list of starred places.
Once a route is found, follow on-screen instructions to navigate to the destination.Travel & local
115
Google Earth
Use this application to explore any location in the world using the satellite map view.
Tap Google Earth on the Applications screen.
This application may not be available depending on the region or service provider.116
Settings
About Settings
Use this application to configure the device, set application options, and add accounts.
Tap Settings on the Applications screen.
Wi-Fi
Activate the Wi-Fi feature to connect to a Wi-Fi network and access the Internet or other
network devices.
To use options, tap .
• Advanced: Customise Wi-Fi settings.
• WPS push button: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS button.
• WPS PIN entry: Connect to a secured Wi-Fi network with a WPS PIN.
Setting Wi-Fi sleep policy
On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced→Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep.
When entering power-saving mode, the device automatically turns off Wi-Fi
connections. When this happens, the device automatically accesses data networks if it
is set to use them. This may incur data transfer fees. To avoid data-usage bills, set this
option to Always.
Setting Network notification
The device can detect open Wi-Fi networks and display an icon on the status bar to notify
when available.
On the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi→ →Advanced and tick Network notification to
activate this feature.Settings
117
Bluetooth
Activate the Bluetooth feature to exchange information over short distances.
Data usage
Keep track of your data usage amount, and customise the settings for the limitation.
• Mobile data: Set to use data connections on any mobile network.
• Set mobile data limit: Set a limit for the mobile data usage.
• Data usage cycle: Enter monthly reset date to monitor your data usage.
To use more options, tap .
• Data roaming: Set to use data connections when you are roaming.
• Restrict background data: Set to disable sync in the background while using a mobile
network.
• Auto sync data: Set the device to sync contact, calendar, email, bookmark, and social
network image data automatically.
• Show Wi-Fi usage: Set to show your data usage via Wi-Fi.
• Mobile hotspots: Search for and use another device’s mobile network.
More settings
Customise settings to control connections with other devices or networks.
Flight mode
This disables all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services.Settings
118
Mobile networks
• Mobile data: Use to allow packet switching data networks for network services.
• Data roaming: Use the device to connect to another network when you are roaming or
your home network is not available.
• Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs).
• Network mode: Select a network type.
• Network operators: Search for available networks and select a network for roaming.
Tethering and portable hotspot
• Portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Use the portable Wi-Fi hotspot to share the device’s mobile
network connection with computers or other devices through the Wi-Fi network.
• USB tethering: Use USB tethering to share the device’s mobile network connection with
a computer via USB. When connected to a computer, the device is used as a wireless
modem for the computer.
• Bluetooth tethering: Use the Bluetooth tethering to share the device’s mobile network
connection with computers via Bluetooth.
• Help: Learn more about USB, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth tethering.
VPN
Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs).
NFC
• NFC: Activate the NFC feature to read or write NFC tags that contain information.
• Android Beam: Turn on the Android Beam feature to send data, such as webpages and
contacts, to NFC-enabled devices.
S Beam
Activate the S Beam feature to send data, such as music, videos, images, and documents, to
devices that support NFC and Wi-Fi Direct.Settings
119
Nearby devices
• File sharing: Activate media sharing to allow other DLNA-certified devices to access
media files on your device.
• Shared contents: Set to share your content with other devices.
• Device name: Enter a media server name for your device.
• Allowed devices list: View the list of devices that can access your device.
• Not-allowed devices list: View the list of devices that are blocked from accessing your
device.
• Download to: Select a memory location for saving media files.
• Upload from other devices: Set to accept uploads from other devices.
AllShare Cast
Activate the AllShare Cast feature and share your display with others.
Kies via Wi-Fi
Connect the device to Samsung Kies via a Wi-Fi network.
Home screen mode
Select a Home screen mode (basic or easy).
Blocking mode
Select features and set the device to hide or show notification icons of them for specified
periods.Settings
120
Sound
Change settings for various sounds on the device.
• Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, system sounds, and
notifications.
• Vibration intensity: Adjust the force of the vibration notification.
• Device ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls.
• Device vibration: Add or select a vibration pattern.
• Default notifications: Select a ringtone for events, such as incoming messages, missed
calls, and alarms.
• Sound and vibration: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone for incoming calls.
• Keytones: Set the device to sound when tapping the buttons on the keypad.
• Touch sounds: Set the device to sound when selecting an application or option on the
touch screen.
• Screen lock sound: Set the device to sound when locking or unlocking the touch screen.
• Haptic feedback: Set the device to vibrate when touching keys.
Display
Change the settings for the display.
• Wallpaper:
–
Home screen: Select a background image for the Home screen.
– Lock screen: Select a background image for the locked screen.
–
Home and lock screens: Select a background image for the Home screen and the
locked screen.
• LED indicator:
–
Charging: Set to turn on the notification light while you are charging the battery.
– Low battery: Set to turn on the notification light when the battery is low.
–
Notifications: Set to turn on the notification light when you have missed calls,
messages, or notifications.
–
Voice recording: Set to turn on the notification light when you record voice memos.Settings
121
• Page buddy: Set the device to open contextual pages based on your actions.
• Screen mode: Select a display mode.
• Brightness: Set the brightness of the display.
• Auto-rotate screen: Set the content to rotate automatically when the device is turned.
• Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s
backlight.
• Smart rotation: Set the interface not to rotate according to the orientation of your face.
• Smart stay: Set to prevent the display backlight from turning off while you are looking at
the display.
• Font style: Change the font type for display text.
• Font size: Change the font size.
• Touch key light duration: Set the duration for the touch button backlight.
• Display battery percentage: Set to view the remaining battery life.
• Auto adjust screen tone: Set to save power by adjusting the brightness of the display.
Storage
View memory information for your device and memory card, or format a memory card.
Formatting a memory card permanently deletes all data from it.
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified
capacity because the operating system and default applications occupy part of the
memory.Settings
122
Power saving
Activate power-saving mode and change the settings for power-saving mode.
• CPU power saving: Set the device to limit some system resource usage.
• Screen power saving: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the display.
• Background colour: Set the device to decrease the brightness of the background colour
of email and Internet.
• Turn off haptic feedback: Set the device to turn off the vibration when touching keys.
• Learn about power saving: Discover how to reduce battery consumption.
Battery
View the amount of battery power consumed by your device.
Applications manager
View and manage the applications on your device.
Location services
• Use wireless networks: Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks for finding the current
location.
• Use GPS satellites: Set to use the GPS satellite for finding the current location.
• Location and Google search: Set to use your current location for Google search and
other Google services.Settings
123
Lock screen
Change settings for securing the device.
• Screen lock: Activate the screen lock feature.
• Lock screen options: Change the settings for the locked screen. These settings are
applied only when you set the swipe lock option.
–
Shortcuts: Set to show and edit application shortcuts on the locked screen.
– Information ticker: Set to show news or stock information on the locked screen.
–
Clock: Set to show the clock on the locked screen.
–
Dual clock: Set to show the dual clock on the locked screen.
– Weather: Set to show weather information on the locked screen.
–
Ripple effect: Set to show the ripple effect on the locked screen.
–
Help text: Set to show the help text on the locked screen.
–
Camera quick access: Set the device to launch the camera by tapping and holding
the screen and rotating the device while the screen is locked.
– Wake up in lock screen: Set the device to recognise your wake up command when
the screen is locked.
–
Set wake-up command: Set a wake up command to launch S Voice or perform a
specified function.
• Popup Note on lock screen: Set to launch S Note when you double-tap the locked
screen with the S Pen button pressed.
• Owner information: Enter your information that is shown on the locked screen.Settings
124
Security
Change settings for securing the device and the SIM or USIM card.
• Encrypt device: Set a password to encrypt data saved on the device. You must enter the
password each time you turn on the device.
Charge the battery before enabling this setting because it may take more than an
hour to encrypt your data.
• Encrypt external SD card:
–
Encrypt: Set to encrypt files when you save them to a memory card.
–
Full encryption: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card.
–
Exclude multimedia files: Set to encrypt all files on a memory card, except for media
files.
If you reset your device to the factory defaults with this setting enabled, the device
will not be able to read your encrypted files. Disable this setting before resetting the
device.
• Remote controls: Set to allow control of your lost or stolen device remotely via the
Internet. To use this feature, you must sign in to your Samsung account.
–
Account registration: Add or view your Samsung account.
–
Use wireless networks: Set to allow location data collection and to determine the
location of your lost or stolen device via Wi-Fi and mobile networks.
• SIM Change Alert: Activate the Find my mobile feature.
• Find my mobile web page: Access the SamsungDive website (www.samsungdive.com).
You can track and control your lost or stolen device on the SamsungDive website.
• Set up SIM card lock:
– Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before
using the device.
–
Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data.
• Make passwords visible: By default, the device hides passwords for security. Set the
device to display passwords as they are entered.Settings
125
• Device administrators: View device administrators installed on the device. You can allow
device administrators to apply new policies to the device.
• Unknown sources: Choose to download applications from any source. If not chosen,
download applications only from Play Store.
• Trusted credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various
applications.
• Install from device storage: Install encrypted certificates stored on the USB storage.
• Clear credentials: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password.
One-handed operation
Activate one-handed operation mode for your convenience when using the device with one
hand.
Language and input
Change the settings for text input.
Language
Select a display language for all menus and applications.
Default
Select a default keyboard type for text input.Settings
126
Google voice typing
To change the voice input settings, tap .
• Choose input languages: Select input languages for text input.
• Block offensive words: Set to prevent the device from recognising offensive words in
voice inputs.
• Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline
voice input.
Samsung keyboard
To change the Samsung keyboard settings, tap .
• Portrait keyboard types: Change the keyboard layout.
• Input languages: Select languages for text input.
• Predictive text: Activate predictive text mode to predict words based on your input and
show word suggestions. You can also customise the word prediction settings.
• Continuous input: Set to enter text by sweeping on the keyboard.
• Pen detection: Set the device to open the handwriting panel when the field is tapped
with the S Pen.
• One-handed operation: Set the keyboard to appear on either side of the screen for
convenience when entering text with one hand.
• Handwriting: Customise settings for handwriting mode, such as recognition time, pen
thickness, or pen colour.Settings
127
• Advanced:
–
Auto capitalisation: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first character after
a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark.
–
Auto-punctuate: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space
bar.
–
Character preview: Set the device to display a large image of each character tapped.
–
Key-tap vibration: Set the device to vibrate when a key is touched.
–
Key-tap sound: Set the device to sound when a key is touched.
• Tutorial: Learn how to enter text with the Samsung keyboard.
• Reset settings: Reset Samsung keyboard settings.
Voice search
• Language: Select a language for the voice recognition.
• Speech output: Set the device to provide voice feedback to alert you to the current
action.
• Block offensive words: Hide offensive words from voice search results.
• Download offline speech recognition: Download and install language data for offline
voice input.
Text-to-speech output
• Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for
speech synthesis engines, tap .
• Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature.
• Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example.
• Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and
specify applications to use in driving mode.Settings
128
Pointer speed
Adjust the pointer speed for the mouse or trackpad connected to your device.
Cloud
Change settings for syncing data or files with your Samsung account or Dropbox cloud
storage.
Back up and reset
Change the settings for managing settings and data.
• Back up my data: Set to back up settings and application data to the Google server.
• Backup account: Set up or edit your Google backup account.
• Automatic restore: Set to restore settings and application data when the applications are
reinstalled on the device.
• Factory data reset: Reset settings to the factory default values and delete all data.
Add account
Add email or SNS accounts.
Motion
Activate the motion feature and change settings for motion recognition.
• Quick glance: Set to turn on the touch screen and display information, such as
notifications, missed calls, new messages, time and date, device status, and more by
moving your hand across the sensor at the top of the screen.
• Direct call: Set to make a voice call by picking up and holding the device near your ear
while viewing call, message, or contact details.Settings
129
• Smart alert: Set the device to alert you if you have missed calls or new messages when
you pick up the device.
• Double tap to top: Set to move to the top of a list of contacts or email messages when
you double-tap the device.
• Tilt to zoom: Set to zoom in or out while viewing images in Gallery or browsing
webpages, when you tap and hold two points with your fingers and then tilt the device
back and forth.
• Pan to move icon: Set to move an item to another page when tapping and holding the
item and then panning the device to the left or right.
• Pan to browse images: Set to scroll through an image by moving the device in any
direction when the image is zoomed in.
• Shake to update: Set the device to search for Bluetooth devices by shaking it.
• Turn over to mute/pause: Set to mute incoming calls, alarms, and music by placing the
device face down.
• Advanced settings:
–
Quick glance: Select items to display on the quick glance screen when you move your
hand across the Proximity/Light sensor.
–
Gyroscope calibration: Calibrate the gyroscope so your device can correctly
recognise rotation.
• Place the device on a stable surface during calibration. The calibration process may
fail if the device vibrates or moves.
• Calibrate the gyroscope when you experience drifting or unintended movements
when using tilting or panning motions or motion-enabled games.
–
Sensitivity settings: Adjust the reaction speed for each motion.
• Learn about motions: View the tutorial for controlling motions.
• Palm swipe to capture: Set to capture an image of the screen when you sweep your
hand to the left or right across the screen.
• Palm touch to mute/pause: Set to pause media playback when you touch the screen
with your palm.
• Learn about hand motions: View the tutorial for controlling hand motions.Settings
130
S Pen
Change the settings for using the S Pen.
• Dominant hand: Select the hand used to write with to enhance S Pen inputs.
• Pen attach/detach sound: Set the device to emit a sound when the S Pen is inserted or
pulled out from the slot.
• Open Popup Note: Set to launch a quick note when the S Pen is pulled out from the slot.
• Battery saving: Set the screen not to respond when inserting or removing the S Pen.
• S Pen Keeper: Set the device to display a pop-up alert and emit a sound if you walk when
the touch screen is off and S Pen is removed from the device.
• Air View: Set to show the S Pen pointer when the S Pen is hovering over the screen.
• Sound and haptic feedback: Set the device to sound and vibrate when hovering over
files, subjects, or options.
• Quick Command settings: Configure the settings for Quick Command.
• S Pen help: Access help information for using the S Pen.
Accessory
Change the accessory settings.
• Dock sound: Set the device to play a sound when your device is connected to or
removed from a desktop dock.
• Audio output mode: Set to use the dock speaker when your device is connected to a
desktop dock.
• Desk home screen display: Set the device to show the desk clock when your device is
connected to a desktop dock.
• Audio output: Select a sound output format to use when connecting your device to
HDMI devices. Some devices may not support the surround sound setting.Settings
131
Date and time
Access and alter the following settings to control how the device displays the time and date.
If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date
is reset.
• Automatic date and time: Automatically update the time and date when moving across
time zones.
• Set date: Set the current date manually.
• Set time: Set the current time manually.
• Automatic time zone: Set to receive time zone information from the network when you
move across time zones.
• Select time zone: Set the home time zone.
• Use 24-hour format: Display time in 24-hour format.
• Select date format: Select a date format.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features for those with certain physical disabilities. Access
and alert the following settings to improve accessibility to the device.
• Auto-rotate screen: Set the interface to rotate automatically when you rotate the device.
• Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s
backlight.
• Speak passwords: Set the device to read aloud passwords you enter with Talkback.
• Answering/Ending calls:
–
Answering key: Set the device to answer an incoming call when pressing the Home
button.
–
The power key ends calls: Set the device to end a call when pressing the Power
button.
• Accessibility shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility on the quick menu that appears
when you press and hold the Power button.Settings
132
• TalkBack: Activate Talkback, which provides voice feedback.
• Font size: Change the font size.
• Negative colours: Reverse the display colours to improve visibility.
• Text-to-speech output:
–
Preferred TTS engine: Select a speech synthesis engine. To change the settings for
speech synthesis engines, tap .
–
Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature.
– Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example.
–
Driving mode: Activate driving mode to set the device to read contents aloud and
specify applications to use in driving mode.
• Enhance web accessibility: Set applications to install web scripts to make their web
content more accessible.
• Sound balance: Adjust the sound balance when using a dual headset.
• Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with one earbud.
• Turn off all sounds: Mute all device sounds.
• Tap and hold delay: Set the recognition time for tapping and holding the screen.
Advanced settings
Change the settings for application development.
• Desktop backup password: Set a password to secure your backup data.
• Stay awake: Set the screen to remain on while you are charging the battery.
• Protect SD card: Set to request a confirmation when reading data from a memory card.
• USB debugging: Activate USB debugging mode to connect your device to a computer
with a USB cable.
• Allow mock locations: Allow mock locations and service information to be sent to a
Location Manager service for testing.
• Select debug app: Select applications to debug and prevent errors when you pause
debugging.Settings
133
• Wait for debugger: Set to prevent the selected application from loading until the
debugger is ready.
• Show touches: Set to show the pointer when you touch the screen.
• Show pointer location: Set to show the coordinates and traces of the pointer when you
touch the screen.
• Show layout boundaries: Set to show boundaries.
• Show GPU view updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated with
the GPU.
• Show screen updates: Set to flash areas of the screen when they are updated.
• Window animation scale: Select a speed for opening and closing pop-up windows.
• Transition animation scale: Select a speed for switching between screens.
• Animator duration scale: Select how long pop-up windows will be shown.
• Disable hardware overlays: Set to hide hardware overlays.
• Force GPU rendering: Set to use 2D hardware acceleration to improve graphic
performance.
• Strict mode: Set the device to flash the screen when applications perform long
operations.
• Show CPU usage: Set to list all active processes.
• Profile GPU rendering: Set to check the time of GPU rendering time.
• Enable traces: Set to capture traces of application and system performance.
• Do not keep activities: Set to end a running application when you launch a new
application.
• Limit background processes: Set to limit the number of processes that can run in the
background.
• Show all ANRs: Set the device to alert you to unresponsive applications that are running
in the background.
About device
Access device information and update device software.134
Troubleshooting
When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it
prompts you to enter one of the following codes:
• Password: When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set
for the device.
• PIN: When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you
must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by
using the Lock SIM card menu.
• PUK: Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly
several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider.
• PIN2: When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with
the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider.
Your device displays network or service error messages
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move
to another area and try again.
• You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for
more details.
The touch screen responds slowly or improperly
If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the
following:
• Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the
device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices.
• Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen.
• Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs.
• Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version.
• If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take it to your local Samsung Service Centre.Troubleshooting
135
Your device freezes or has fatal errors
If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close programs or reset the device to regain
functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power button for
8-10 seconds. The device reboots automatically.
If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. On the Applications
screen, tap Settings→Back up and reset→Factory data reset→Reset device→Erase
everything.
Calls are being dropped
When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose your connection to
the network. Move to another area and try again.
Outgoing calls are not connected
• Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key.
• Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling.
Incoming calls are not connected
• Ensure that your device is turned on.
• Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number.
Others cannot hear you speaking on a call
• Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone.
• Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth.
• If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected.Troubleshooting
136
Audio quality is poor
• Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna.
• When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move
to another area and try again.
When dialling from contacts, the call is not connected
• Ensure that the correct number is stored in the contact list.
• Re-enter and save the number, if necessary.
• Ensure that you have not set call barring for the contact’s phone number.
The device beeps and the battery icon is empty
Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device.
The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off
• The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe both gold-coloured contacts with a clean, soft
cloth and try charging the battery again.
• If the battery no longer charges completely, dispose of the old battery properly
and replace it with a new battery (refer to your local ordinances for proper disposal
instructions).
Your device is hot to the touch
When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an
extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not
affect your device’s lifespan or performance.Troubleshooting
137
Error messages appear when launching the camera
Your Samsung device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate
the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the
following:
• Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged.
• Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device.
• Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying
these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre.
Error messages appear when opening music files
Some music files may not play on your Samsung device for a variety of reasons. If you receive
error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following:
• Free some memory by transferring files to a computer or deleting files from your device.
• Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is
DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file.
• Ensure that your device supports the file type.Troubleshooting
138
Another Bluetooth device is not located
• Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device.
• Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect
to, if necessary.
• Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum
Bluetooth range (10 m).
If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre.
A connection is not established when you connect the device to a
computer
• Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device.
• Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your computer.
• If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher
installed on your computer.
• Ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0 or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed
on your computer.
A small gap appears around the outside of the device case
• This gap is a necessary manufacturing feature and some minor rocking or vibration of
parts may occur.
• Over time, friction between parts may cause this gap to expand slightly.English (EU). 10/2012. Rev. 1.0
Some content may differ from your device depending on the region or service provider.
www.samsung.com
ML-1860 Series
ML-1865 Series
Imprimante laser monochrome
Mode d’emploi
imaginez les possibilités
Merci d’avoir fait l’acquisition d’un produit
Samsung. Copyright_ 2
Copyright
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés.
Le présent mode d’emploi n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis.
Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce mode d’emploi.
• Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• PCL et PCL 6 sont des marques commerciales de la société Hewlett-Packard.
• Microsoft, Internet Explorer, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2 sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de
Microsoft Corporation.
• PostScript 3 est une marque commerciale d’Adobe System, Inc.
• UFST®
et MicroType™ sont des marques déposées de Monotype Imaging, Inc.
• TrueType, Mac et Mac OS sont des marques commerciales d’Apple Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
• LaserWriter est une marque commerciale d’Apple Inc.
• Les autres noms de produit et de marque sont des marques commerciales de leurs propriétaires respectifs.
Reportez-vous au fichier « LICENSE.txt » du CD-ROM fourni pour consulter les informations de licence Open Source.
REV. 1.04Table des matières_ 3
Table des matières
COPYRIGHT
2
TABLE DES MATIÈRES
3
6 Informations en matière de sécurité
11 Informations légales
17 A propos de ce mode d’emploi
19 Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil
INTRODUCTION
21
21 Description de l’appareil
21 Vue avant
22 Vue arrière
23 Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande
24 Présentation du voyant d’état
24 Présentation des touches utiles
25 Mise en marche de l’appareil
PRISE EN MAIN
26
26 Configuration du matériel
26 Emplacement
26 Impression d’une page de configuration
26 Logiciel fourni
27 Configuration requise
27 Windows
27 Macintosh
27 Linux
28 Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB
28 Windows
29 Macintosh
29 Linux
30 Partage local de l’appareil
30 Windows
31 Macintosh
CONFIGURATION DE BASE
32
32 Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut
32 A partir de votre ordinateur
32 Utiliser la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie
SUPPORTS ET BACS
33
33 Sélection du support d’impression
33 Recommandations pour sélectionner le support d’impression
33 Formats de support pris en charge dans chaque mode
34 Modification du format du bac
34 Chargement de papier dans le bac
34 Bac
35 Alimentation manuelle du bac
35 Impression sur supports spéciaux
36 Enveloppes
36 Transparents
37 Étiquettes
37 Papiers cartonnés ou de format personnalisé
37 Papier à en-tête/papier pré-imprimé
37 Utilisation du support de sortie papierTable des matières
Table des matières_ 4
IMPRESSION
38
38 Fonctions des pilotes d’impression
38 Pilote d’impression
38 Impression de base
39 Annulation d’une impression
39 Ouverture des préférences d’impression
39 Utilisation d’un réglage favori
40 Utilisation de l’aide
40 Utilisation des fonctions d’impression spéciales
40 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille
40 Impression d’affiches
40 Impression de brochures (manuelle)
41 Impression recto verso (manuelle)
41 Modification des proportions de votre document
41 Impression d’un document sur un format de papier donné
41 Impression de filigranes
42 Utilisation de surimpressions
43 Options de qualité d’impression
43 Modification des réglages d’impression par défaut
43 Définition de votre appareil comme appareil par défaut
44 Impression dans un fichier (PRN)
44 Impression Macintosh
44 Impression d’un document
44 Modification des paramètres de l’imprimante
45 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille
45 Impression Linux
45 Impression à partir d’applications
46 Impression de fichiers
46 Configuration des propriétés de l’imprimante
OUTILS DE GESTION
47
47 Présentation des outils de gestion utiles
47 Utilisation de Samsung Easy Printer Manager (Windows uniquement)
47 Présentation de Samsung Easy Printer Manager
48 Utilisation de État de l’imprimante Samsung (Windows uniquement)
48 Vue d’ensemble de État de l’imprimante Samsung
49 Utilisation du programme Smart Panel (Macintosh et Linux
uniquement)
49 Présentation de Smart Panel
49 Modification des paramètres du programme Smart Panel
50 Utilisation du configurateur de pilote unifié Linux
50 Ouverture d’Unified Driver Configurator
50 Fenêtre Printers configuration
51 Ports configuration
MAINTENANCE
52
52 Impression d’un journal de l’appareil
52 Nettoyage d’un appareil
52 Nettoyage de l’extérieur
52 Nettoyage de l’intérieur
53 Stockage de la cartouche de toner
53 Instructions de manipulation
53 Utilisation de cartouches de toner d’une autre marque que Samsung et
rechargées
53 Durée de vie estimée d’une cartouche
53 Conseils pour déplacer et ranger l’appareilTable des matières
Table des matières_ 5
DÉPANNAGE
54
54 Redistribution du toner
54 Astuces pour éviter les bourrages papier
55 Résolution des bourrages papier
55 Dans le bac
55 À l’intérieur de l’appareil
56 Résolution d’autres problèmes
56 Problèmes d’alimentation
57 Problèmes d’alimentation papier
57 Problèmes d’impression
59 Problèmes de qualité d’impression
62 Problèmes Windows courants
62 Problèmes Linux courants
63 Problèmes Macintosh courants
FOURNITURES
64
64 Comment commander
64 Consommables disponibles
64 Pièces de rechange disponibles
65 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner
CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
66
66 Caractéristiques techniques du matériel
66 Caractéristiques techniques environnementales
67 Caractéristiques techniques électriques
68 Spécifications des supports d’impression
CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
69
GLOSSAIRE
71
INDEX
77Informations en matière de sécurité_ 6
Informations en matière de sécurité
Ces avertissements et précautions sont inclus afin d’éviter des blessures pour vous et d’autres personnes, ainsi que pour
éviter des dommages potentiels à votre appareil. Veillez à lire et à comprendre toutes ces instructions avant d’utiliser
l’appareil.
Faites preuve de bon sens lors de l’utilisation d’appareils électriques et chaque fois que vous utilisez votre appareil.
Observez en outre toutes les mises en garde et instructions mentionnées sur le produit et dans la documentation qui
l’accompagne. Une fois que vous avez lu cette section, conservez-la pour pouvoir vous y reporter par la suite.
Important symboles de sécurité
Cette section explique la signification des icônes et des signes de ce guide de l’utilisateur. Ces symboles de sécurité sont dans l’ordre, suivant
le degré de danger.
Explication des icônes et des signes utilisés dans le guide de l’utilisateur :
Avertissement Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures graves ou la mort.
Mise en garde Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels.
Ne pas essayer.
Ne pas démonter.
Ne pas toucher.
Débranchez la prise d’alimentation de la prise murale.
Assurez-vous que votre appareil est branché sur une prise de courant reliée à la terre.
Contactez le service de maintenance pour obtenir de l’aide.
Suivez les instructions à la lettre.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 7
Environnement d’exploitation
Avertissement
Ne pas utiliser si le câble d’alimentation électrique est
endommagé ou si la prise électrique n’est pas reliée
à la terre.
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.
Ne pliez pas le câble d’alimentation électrique et ne
placez pas d’objets lourds dessus.
► Le fait de marcher sur le câble d’alimentation
électrique ou de l’écraser avec un objet lourd peut
occasionner une décharge électrique ou un incendie.
Ne rien poser sur l’appareil (eau, objets métalliques,
objets lourds, bougies, cigarettes allumées, etc.).
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.
Ne retirez pas la fiche en tirant sur le câble ; ne
manipulez pas la prise avec des mains mouillées.
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.
Si l’appareil surchauffe, libère de la fumée, émet des
bruits étranges, ou produit une odeur bizarre :
coupez immédiatement l’interrupteur d’alimentation
et débranchez l’appareil.
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.
Mise en garde
Pendant un orage ou pendant une période de
non-fonctionnement, retirez la fiche d’alimentation de
la prise de courant.
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.
Si la fiche n’entre pas facilement dans la prise, ne forcez pas
pour l’insérer.
► Appelez un électricien pour changer la prise de courant,
sous peine de décharge électrique possible.
Faites attention, la zone de sortie papier est chaude.
► Vous pouvez vous brûler.
Veillez à ce qu’aucun animal domestique ne ronge les cordons
d’alimentation, de téléphone et d’interface PC.
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie et/ou de
blessure pour votre animal domestique.
Si on a laissé tomber l’appareil, ou si le boîtier semble
endommagé, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et
demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service
qualifié.
► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique
ou d’incendie.
Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement après avoir suivi
ces instructions, débranchez toutes les connexions de
l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de
service qualifié.
► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique
ou d’incendie.
Si l’appareil présente un changement visible et brusque du
niveau de performance, débranchez toutes les connexions de
l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de
service qualifié.
► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique
ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 8
Méthode d’utilisation
Mise en garde
Ne tirez pas avec force sur la feuille durant
l’impression.
► Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil.
Lors de l’impression de grandes quantités, la partie
inférieure de la zone de sortie papier peut devenir
chaude. Ne laissez pas des enfants y toucher.
► Vous pouvez vous brûler.
Faites attention de ne pas mettre la main entre
l’appareil et le bac d’alimentation papier.
► Vous pourriez vous blesser.
Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, évitez
d’utiliser des objets métalliques pointus.
► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil.
N’obstruez pas l’orifice de ventilation et n’y poussez pas
d’objets.
► La température des composants risquerait d’augmenter et
pourrait provoquer des dommages ou un incendie.
Ne laissez pas le papier s’empiler sur le réceptacle de sortie.
► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil.
Faites attention lorsque vous remplacez du papier ou que vous
retirez du papier coincé.
► Les bords d’une feuille neuve sont tranchants et peuvent
provoquer des coupures douloureuses.
Le dispositif d’interruption d’’alimentation de cet appareil est
son câble d’alimentation électrique.
► Pour couper l’alimentation, retirez le câble d’alimentation
électrique de la prise électrique. Informations en matière de sécurité_ 9
Installation/déplacement
Avertissement
Ne placez pas l’appareil dans un endroit
poussiéreux, humide ou sujet à des fuites d’eau.
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.
Mise en garde
Avant de déplacer l’appareil, éteignez-le et
débranchez tous les cordons.
Puis levez l’appareil :
•si le poids de l’appareil est inférieur à 20 kg, une
seule personne suffit ;
•si le poids de l’appareil est de 20 kg, deux
personnes sont nécessaires ;
•si le poids de l’appareil est supérieur à 40 kg,
4 personnes sont nécessaires.
► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser
quelqu’un.
Ne couvrez pas l’appareil et ne le placez pas dans un endroit
confiné comme un placard.
► Si l’appareil n’est pas bien ventilé, il y a un risque d’incendie.
Ne placez pas l’appareil sur une surface instable.
► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser
quelqu’un.
Branchez directement le câble d’alimentation électrique dans
une prise de courant correctement reliée à la terre.
► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique
ou d’incendie.
L’appareil doit être connecté au niveau de puissance indiqué
sur l’étiquette.
► En cas de doute et si vous voulez vérifier le niveau de
puissance utilisé, contactez le service d’électricité.
Ne branchez pas un trop grand nombre d’appareils électriques
sur une même prise murale ou sur une même rallonge.
► Une prise surchargée réduit les performances et constitue
une source potentielle d’incendie et de décharges électriques.
Utilisez exclusivement du câble AWG N°26a
a.AWG : American Wire Gauge
ou un câble de
téléphone plus grand, si nécessaire.
► Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager
l’appareil.
Pour un fonctionnement sûr, utilisez le câble d’alimentation
électrique fourni avec votre appareil. Si vous utilisez un câble
de plus de 2 mètres avec un appareil 140 V, le calibre doit être
16 AWG ou plus grand.
► Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil peut être endommagé et il y
a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 10
Entretien/contrôle
Mise en garde
Débranchez l’appareil de la prise secteur avant de
nettoyer l’intérieur. Ne nettoyez pas l’appareil avec
du benzène, du diluant pour peinture ou de l’alcool ;
ne pulvérisez pas de l’eau directement dans
l’appareil.
► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.
Gardez les produits de nettoyage hors de portée des
enfants.
► Ils peuvent se blesser.
Lorsque vous effectuez une tâche dans l’appareil
pour remplacer des consommables ou nettoyer
l’intérieur, ne le faites pas fonctionner.
► Vous pourriez vous blesser.
Ne démontez pas, ne réparez pas et ne remontez
pas l’appareil vous-même.
► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. Appelez un
technicien agréé lorsque l’appareil doit être réparé.
Gardez le câble d’alimentation et la surface de contact de la
fiche exempts de poussière ou d’eau.
► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique
ou d’incendie.
Pour nettoyer et faire fonctionner l’appareil, respectez à la lettre
le guide d’utilisateur fourni avec l’appareil.
► Dans le cas contraire, vous pourriez endommager l’appareil.
Ne retirez jamais les couvercles ou protections fixés avec des
vis.
► L’appareil doit exclusivement être réparé par un technicien
de maintenance Samsung.
Utilisation des consommables
Mise en garde
Ne démontez pas la cartouche de toner.
► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses
si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez.
Lorsque vous rangez les consommables comme les
cartouches de toner, gardez-les hors de portées de
enfants.
► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses
si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez.
Ne brûlez aucun consommable comme une
cartouche de toner ou une unité de chauffe.
► Cela pourrait provoquer une explosion ou
déclencher un incendie incontrôlable.
L’utilisation de consommables recyclés, comme le toner, peut
endommager l’appareil.
► En cas de dommage lié à l’utilisation de consommables
recyclés, des frais seront imputés.
Lorsque vous changez la cartouche de toner ou que vous
retirez un papier bloqué, faites attention de ne pas vous salir ou
salir vos vêtements avec le toner.
► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous
les inhalez ou les ingérez.
Si du toner se dépose sur vos vêtements, n’utilisez pas d’eau
chaude pour les laver.
► L’eau chaude fixe le toner sur le tissu. Utilisez de l’eau
froide. Informations légales_ 11
Informations légales
Cet appareil est conçu pour votre environnement de travail normal et certifié avec plusieurs déclarations légales.
Avertissement relatif à la sécurité laser
Cette imprimante est certifiée conforme aux spécifications DHHS 21 CFR, chapitre 1, sous-chapitre J pour les produits laser de classe I(1) aux
États-Unis, et certifiée dans les autres pays comme un produit laser de classe I, conformément aux spécifications IEC 60825-1.
Les produits laser de classe I ne sont pas considérés comme dangereux. Le système laser et l’imprimante sont conçus de manière à interdire
tout accès aux rayonnements laser au-dessus d’un niveau de classe I pendant l’exploitation normale, les interventions de maintenance
utilisateur, dans les conditions d’utilisation spécifiées.
• Longueur d’onde: 800 nm
• Divergence de faisceau
- Parallèle: 11 degrés
- Perpendiculaire: 35 degrés
• Puissance maximale de l’énergie en sortie: 12 mW
AVERTISSEMENT
N’utilisez jamais l’imprimante après avoir retiré le capot protecteur du module laser/scanner. Le faisceau lumineux, bien qu’invisible, pourrait
endommager vos yeux.
Lors de l’utilisation de cet appareil, ayez toujours à l’esprit les recommandations de sécurité suivantes, afin de réduire les risques d’incendie,
de décharge électrique et d’autres accidents corporels :
Consignes de sécurité relatives à l’ozone
En mode d’utilisation normal, cet appareil génère de l’ozone. Cette production ne présente aucun risque pour l’utilisateur. Toutefois, il est
préférable d’utiliser l’appareil dans un local correctement aéré.
Pour obtenir des informations complémentaires sur l’ozone, contactez votre revendeur Samsung local.Informations légales_ 12
Economie d’énergie
Cette imprimante est dotée d’un dispositif perfectionné d’économie d’énergie réduisant la consommation électrique en période d’inactivité.
Lorsque l’imprimante ne reçoit pas de données pendant un certain temps, la consommation électrique est réduite automatiquement.
ENERGY STAR et la marque ENERGY STAR sont des marques déposées aux États-Unis.
Pour plus d’informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR, reportez-vous au site http://www.energystar.gov.
Recyclage
Veuillez recycler ou jeter les emballages de ce produit dans le respect de l’environnement.
Chine uniquement
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif)
Le symbole sur le produit, les accessoires ou la documentation indique que le produit et ses accessoires électroniques (par ex. chargeur,
écouteurs, câble USB) ne doivent pas être éliminés en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. Pour éviter toute atteinte à
l’environnement ou à la santé des personnes due à une mise au rebut non contrôlée, séparez cet appareil des autres déchets et recyclez-le
afin de promouvoir une réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles.
Les particuliers doivent contacter le revendeur chez qui ils ont acheté le produit ou l’administration appropriée pour s’informer sur le lieu et le
moyen de recycler cet appareil tout en préservant l’environnement.
Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Cet appareil
ne doit pas être mélangé avec d’autres déchets commerciaux lors de sa mise au rebut.Informations légales_ 13
Émissions radioélectriques
Réglementation FCC
Cet appareil est conforme à l’alinéa 15 de la réglementation FCC. Son exploitation ou utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes :
• Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles.
• Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable.
Ce matériel a été testé et satisfait aux limites s’appliquant aux appareils numériques de classe B, en vertu des dispositions de l’alinéa 15 de la
réglementation FCC. Ces limites visent à assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interférences en zone résidentielle. Cet appareil
génère, utilise et peut émettre de hautes fréquences radio et, s’il n’est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions, peut provoquer des
perturbations dans les communications radio. Il est toutefois possible que son utilisation dans un environnement domestique génère de
nombreuses interférences. Le cas échéant, l’utilisateur devra faire le nécessaire pour les éliminer et prendra toutes les dépenses afférentes à
sa charge. Si cet appareil provoque des interférences sur la réception radio ou télévision lors de sa mise sous tension et hors tension, essayez
de résoudre le problème en adoptant l’une des mesures suivantes :
• Réorientez ou repositionnez l’antenne de réception.
• Éloignez l’équipement du récepteur.
• Branchez l’appareil sur une prise différente de celle du récepteur.
• Consultez votre distributeur ou un technicien radio/télévision qualifié pour obtenir de l’aide.
Tout changement ou modification effectué sans l’accord exprès du fabricant pourrait annuler la capacité de l’utilisateur à utiliser cet
équipement.
Réglementations canadiennes relatives aux interférences radio
Cet appareil numérique ne dépasse pas les limites de Classe B pour les émissions de parasites radio par des appareils numériques, telles que
définies dans la norme sur les équipements provoquant des interférences intitulée « Digital Apparatus », ICES-003 de l’Industry and Science
Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur : « Appareils Numériques », ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
Russie uniquement
Yalnızca Türkiye
Allemagne uniquementInformations légales_ 14
Remplacement de la prise (Royaume-Uni uniquement)
Important
Les fils électriques de cet appareil sont équipés d’une fiche électrique standard de 13 A (BS 1363) et d’un fusible de 13 A. Lorsque vous
changez ou examinez le fusible, vous devez replacer le fusible de 13 A approprié. Vous devez ensuite replacer le capuchon du fusible. Si vous
avez perdu le capuchon du fusible, n’utilisez pas la prise avant d’avoir replacé un autre capuchon.
Prenez contact avec le détaillant qui vous a vendu l’appareil.
La fiche électrique la plus utilisée au Royaume-Uni est la prise de 13 A. Cependant, certains bâtiments (particulièrement les plus anciens) ne
disposent pas de prises de courant de 13 A. Vous devez alors vous procurer un adaptateur approprié. Ne retirez pas la fiche moulée d’origine.
Si la fiche monocoque est endommagée, débarrassez-vous en immédiatement. Il n’est pas possible de la réparer et vous risqueriez de
recevoir une décharge électrique si vous la branchiez dans une prise.
Avertissement important
Cet appareil doit être relié à la terre.
Le code de couleurs suivant est appliqué aux fils des branchements électriques :
• Vert et jaune : terre
• Bleu : neutre
• Brun : phase
Si les fils de votre système électrique ne correspondent pas aux couleurs indiquées sur la fiche, procédez comme suit :
Connectez le fil vert et jaune à la broche portant la lettre « E », le symbole de mise à la terre, la couleur verte ou les couleurs jaune et verte.
Connectez le fil bleu à la broche signalée par la lettre « N » (neutre) ou par la couleur noire.
Connectez le fil marron à la broche signalée par la lettre « L » ou par la couleur rouge.
Un fusible de 13 A doit être présent dans la fiche, dans l’adaptateur ou sur le tableau électrique.Informations légales_ 15
Déclaration de conformité CE
Approbations et certifications
Le marquage CE apposé sur ce télécopieur signifie que Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. a déclaré l’appareil conforme aux directives 93/68/CEE
de l’Union Européenne suivantes :
Par la présente, Samsung Electronics déclare que cet appareil est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes
des directives suivantes :
ML-1860 Series/ML-1865 Series: Directive basse tension (2006/95/CE) et Directive EMC (2004/108/CE).
Vous pouvez consulter cette déclaration de conformité sur www.samsung.com/printer. Accédez à Assistance > téléchargements et entrez le
nom de votre imprimante (MFP) pour parcourir cette déclaration.
1er janvier 1995 : directive 2006/95/EC du Conseil de l’UE, harmonisation des lois des États membres relatives aux équipements basse
tension.
1er janvier 1996 : directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/CEE) du Conseil de l’UE, harmonisation des lois des États membres relatives à la
compatibilité électromagnétique.
9 mars 1999 : directive 1999/5/CE relative à la conformité des équipements radios et des terminaux de télécommunications. Vous pouvez
vous procurer le texte complet de la déclaration, décrivant en détail ces différentes directives et les normes correspondantes, auprès de votre
distributeur Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Certification CE
Certification de conformité à la Directive 1999/5/CE relative aux équipements radio et terminaux de télécommunications (FAX).
Cet équipement Samsung a été auto-certifié par Samsung pour la connexion en Europe d’un terminal simple au réseau téléphonique commuté
(RTPC) en conformité avec la Directive 1999/5/CE. Il a été prévu pour fonctionner sur le réseau téléphonique public commuté français et sur
les autocommutateurs privés compatibles des pays européens :
En cas de problème, il convient de contacter en premier lieu le laboratoire européen QA de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Ce produit a été testé en fonction des normes TBR21. Pour faciliter l’utilisation et la mise en œuvre de tout équipement terminal compatible
avec ces normes, l’Institut européen des normes de télécommunications (ETSI) a édité un document consultatif (EG 201 121) contenant des
remarques et des obligations supplémentaires destinées à assurer la compatibilité totale des terminaux TBR21 avec les réseaux. Ce produit a
été conçu en fonction et dans le respect total de toutes les informations applicables contenues dans ce document.Informations légales_ 16
Chine uniquementA propos de ce mode d’emploi_ 17
A propos de ce mode d’emploi
Ce mode d’emploi offre une description succincte de l’appareil, ainsi que des explications détaillées sur chaque étape de
son fonctionnement. Il constitue une aide précieuse pour les novices et les utilisateurs professionnels quant à l’installation
et l’utilisation correctes de l’appareil.
• Lisez les informations de sécurité avant d’utiliser l’appareil.
• Si vous rencontrez un problème d’utilisation de l’appareil, reportez-vous au chapitre de dépannage. (Voir « Dépannage » à la page 54.)
• Les termes utilisés dans ce mode d’emploi sont expliqués dans le chapitre du glossaire. (Voir « Glossaire » à la page 71.)
• Les illustrations de ce mode d’emploi peuvent être différentes de votre appareil en fonction de ses options ou du modèle.
• Les procédures de ce mode d’emploi sont principalement basées sur Windows XP.
Convention
Certains termes sont utilisés de manière interchangeable dans ce mode d’emploi, comme ci-dessous :
• « Document » est synonyme d’« original ».
• « Papier » est synonyme de « support » ou de « support d’impression ».
• « Appareil » se rapporte à une imprimante ou une imprimante multifonctions.
Vous trouverez les conventions utilisées dans ce guide récapitulées dans le tableau ci-dessous :
Convention Description Exemple
Gras Pour les textes apparaissant à l’écran ou les noms des boutons sur l’appareil. Annuler
Remarque Donne des informations ou des détails supplémentaires sur les fonctions et les
fonctionnalités de l’appareil.
Le format de la date peut varier d’un
pays à l’autre.
Mise en garde Informe les utilisateurs des risques éventuels de dommages mécaniques ou de
dysfonctionnements de l’imprimante.
Ne touchez pas la surface du tambour
situé dans la cartouche de toner ou
l’unité d’imagerie.
Note de bas de page Donne des informations complémentaires sur certains mots ou certaines
expressions.
a. pages par minute
(« Référence ») Vous renvoie à des informations complémentaires détaillées. (Voir « Recherche d’autres informations » à
la page 18.)A propos de ce mode d’emploi_ 18
Recherche d’autres informations
Les ressources suivantes vous proposent, soit à l’écran, soit sous forme imprimée, des informations concernant la configuration et l’utilisation de l’appareil.
Nom du document Description
Guide d’installation
rapide
Ce guide fournit des informations sur la configuration de l’appareil. Ce guide est fourni avec l’imprimante dans l’emballage.
Mode d’emploi Ce guide fournit des instructions pas à pas pour utiliser toutes les fonctions de l’appareil, pour l’entretien et le dépannage de votre
appareil, ainsi que pour le remplacement des consommables.
Aide du pilote de
l’appareil
Cette aide vous fournit des informations sur le pilote d’impression et des instructions concernant la configuration des propriétés pour
l’impression. (Voir « Utilisation de l’aide » à la page 40.)
Site Web de
Samsung
Si vous avez accès à Internet, vous pouvez obtenir l’aide, le support, les pilotes de l’appareil, les manuels ou les informations de
commande nécessaires sur le site Web Samsung, www.samsung.com/printer.
Logiciels
téléchargeables
Vous pouvez télécharger des logiciels utiles à partir du site Web de Samsung.
• Samsung AnyWeb Print : permet aux utilisateurs individuels de facilement capturer à l’écran la fenêtre du site Web dans Windows
Internet Explorer, Windows Firefox et Macintosh Safari. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint)Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil_ 19
Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil
Votre nouvel appareil est doté de fonctionnalités améliorant la qualité des documents que vous imprimez.
Fonctions spéciales
Impression rapide et de haute qualité
• Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu’à une résolution effective de
1 200 x 1 200 points par pouce.
• Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu’à 18 ppm sur du papier au
format A4 et 19 ppm sur du papier au format Lettre.
Prise en charge de plusieurs types de support d’impression
• Le bac de 150 feuilles prend en charge le papier ordinaire en
divers formats, le papier à en-tête, les enveloppes, les
étiquettes, des supports de format personnalisé, des cartes
postales, et du papier lourd.
Création de documents professionnels
• Impression de filigranes. Vous pouvez personnaliser vos
documents avec des mots tels que « Confidentiel ». (Voir «
Impression de filigranes » à la page 41.)
• Impression d’affiches. Le texte et les images de chaque
page de votre document sont agrandis et imprimés sur
plusieurs feuilles de papier qui peuvent être collées
ensemble pour former une affiche. (Voir « Impression
d’affiches » à la page 40.)
• Vous pouvez utiliser des formulaires préimprimés et des
papiers à en-tête avec du papier ordinaire. (Voir « Utilisation
de surimpressions » à la page 42.)
Gain de temps et d’argent
• Pour économiser du papier, vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs
pages sur une seule feuille. (Voir « Impression de plusieurs
pages sur une seule feuille » à la page 40.)
• Cet appareil économise l’électricité en réduisant
considérablement la consommation électrique lorsqu’il n’est
pas utilisé.
• Pour économiser du papier, vous pouvez imprimer sur les
deux faces de chaque feuille (manuel). (Voir « Impression
recto verso (manuelle) » à la page 41.)
Impression sous différents environnements
• Vous pouvez imprimer avec Windows, ainsi qu’avec des
systèmes Linux et Mac OS.
• Votre appareil est doté d’une interface USB.Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil_ 20
Fonctionnalités par modèle
Cet appareil est conçu pour répondre à tous vos besoins documentaires – allant de l’impression, jusqu’à des solutions réseau avancées destinées à votre activité
commerciale.
Les fonctionnalités par modèle incluent :
FONCTIONS ML-1860 Series ML-1865 Series
USB 2.0 rapide ● ●
Impression recto verso (manuelle) ● ●
(●: Inclus) Introduction_ 21
1.Introduction
Ce chapitre vous présente brièvement l’appareil.
Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes :
• Description de l’appareil
• Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande
• Présentation du voyant d’état
• Présentation des touches utiles
Description de l’appareil
Vue avant
Selon le modèle, cette illustration peut différer de votre appareil.
1
Panneau de commande 5
Guide de longueur du papier
2
Couvercle supérieur 6
Guides de largeur du papier
3
Cartouche de toner 7
Support de sortie papier
4
Bac 8
Réceptacle de sortie (face à imprimer vers le
bas)Introduction_ 22
Vue arrière
Selon le modèle, cette illustration peut différer de votre appareil.
1
Port USB
2
Réceptacle du câble d’alimentation
électriqueIntroduction_ 23
Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande
Selon le modèle, ce panneau de commande peut différer de celui de votre appareil.
1
Bourrage Permet d’afficher l’état du bourrage papier (voir « Présentation du voyant d’état » à la page 24).
2
En ligne/Erreur Permet d’afficher l’état de l’appareil (voir « Présentation du voyant d’état » à la page 24).
3
Impression écran Imprime l’écran affiché sur le moniteur. (Voir « Bouton (Impression écran) » à la page 24.)
4
Alimentation Ce bouton permet de mettre l’appareil sous et hors tension. (Voir « Bouton (Alimentation) » à la page 25.)Introduction_ 24
Présentation du voyant d’état
La couleur du voyant indique l’état actuel de l’appareil.
Voyant Statut Description
Bourrage
( )
Orange Allumé Un bourrage papier s’est produit.
(Voir « Résolution des bourrages
papier » à la page 55.)
En ligne
/Erreur
( )
Désactivé • L’appareil est déconnecté.
Vert Allumé • L’appareil est en mode économie
d’énergie.
• L’appareil est en ligne et peut
recevoir des données.
Clignotant • Un clignotement lent de la LED
indique que l’appareil reçoit des
données de l’ordinateur.
• Un clignotement rapide indique
que l’appareil imprime des
données.
Rouge Allumé • Le capot est ouvert. Fermez le
capot.
• Le bac est vide. Insérez du papier
dans le bac.
• L’appareil s’est arrêté à la suite
d’une erreur grave.
• Votre système rencontre certains
problèmes. Si ce problème se
produit, contactez un technicien
de maintenance.
• Une cartouche de toner a
pratiquement atteint son
autonomie estimée.a
a.L’autonomie estimée de la cartouche signifie l’autonomie attendue ou
estimée de la cartouche de toner, ce qui indique la capacité moyenne
d’impression. Elle est définie conformément à la norme ISO/IEC 19752.
Le nombre de pages peut varier en fonction de l’environnement
d’exploitation, du délai entre chaque impression, ainsi que du type et du
format des supports. Un peu de toner peut rester dans la cartouche,
même lorsque le voyant rouge est allumé et que l’imprimante s’arrête
d’imprimer.
. Il est
recommandé de remplacer la
cartouche de toner. (Voir «
Remplacement de la cartouche de
toner » à la page 65.)
Clignotant • Un léger dysfonctionnement est
survenu et l’appareil est en attente
jusqu’à ce qu’il soit corrigé. Dès
que le problème est résolu,
l’appareil reprend l’impression.
• Il reste une petite quantité de toner
dans la cartouche. L’autonomie
estimée de la cartouchea
est
presque atteinte. Préparez une
nouvelle cartouche en vue de son
remplacement. Vous pouvez
améliorer provisoirement la qualité
d’impression en secouant la
cartouche afin de répartir le toner
résiduel (voir « Redistribution du
toner » à la page 54).
• L’appareil imprime en mode
d’alimentation manuelle ou en
mode recto-verso manuel.
• L’appareil annule une tâche
d’impression.
Samsung ne recommande pas l’utilisation de cartouches de toner
non-Samsung, telles que les cartouches rechargées ou réusinées.
Samsung ne peut garantir la qualité des cartouches de toner
non-Samsung. Tout entretien ou réparation requis suite à l’utilisation
de cartouches de toner non-Samsung ne sera pas couvert par la
garantie de l’appareil.
Toutes les erreurs d’impression apparaissent dans État de
l’imprimante (Windows) ou Smart Panel (Linux, Mac OS X). Si le
problème persiste, contactez un technicien de maintenance.
Présentation des touches utiles
Bouton (Impression écran)
En appuyant sur , vous pouvez :
Fonction Description
Imprimer la fenêtre
active
Appuyez sur le bouton et le voyant vert
commence à clignoter. Quand le voyant vert
s’arrête de clignoter, relâchez le bouton.
Imprimer l’ensemble de
l’écran de moniteur
Appuyez sur le bouton et le voyant vert
commence à clignoter. Relâchez le bouton
pendant le clignotement.
Impression d’une page
de configuration
En mode prêt, maintenez ce bouton enfoncé
pendant environ 10 secondes jusqu’à ce que
le voyant vert clignote lentement, puis
relâchez ce bouton. (Voir « Impression d’une
page de configuration » à la page 26.)
Rapport Infos conso En mode prêt, maintenez ce bouton enfoncé
pendant 15 secondes jusqu’à ce que le
voyant vert clignote rapidement, puis
relâchez ce bouton.
Impression manuelle Appuyez sur cette touche chaque fois que
vous chargez une feuille de papier dans le
bac si vous avez sélectionné le mode
Chargeur manuel comme Alimentation
dans le pilote d’impression.
• Impr. Écran est utilisable uniquement avec les systèmes
d’exploitation Windows et Macintosh.
• Lorsque vous imprimez la fenêtre active/l’ensemble de l’écran en
utilisant la touche d’impression écran, l’appareil peut utiliser une
plus grande quantité de toner, en fonction des éléments imprimés.
• Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette fonction que si le programme
Samsung Easy Printer Manager ou Smart Panel de l’appareil est
installé.Introduction_ 25
Bouton (Alimentation)
En appuyant sur , vous pouvez :
Fonction Description
Mise sous tension/hors
tension
Appuyez sur ce bouton pour mettre l’appareil
sous tension ou hors tension.
Annulation d’une
impression
Pendant l’impression, appuyez une fois sur
ce bouton. La tâche d’impression est
supprimée de l’appareil et de l’ordinateur,
l’appareil retourne ensuite au mode prêt. Cela
peut prendre un certain temps, selon la taille
de l’impression.
Si vous appuyez plus de 2 secondes
sur ce bouton, l’appareil s’éteint.
Mise en marche de l’appareil
1. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation.
2. Appuyez sur le bouton du panneau de commande.
Si vous souhaitez mettre l’appareil hors tension, appuyez sur ce
bouton pendant environ 2 secondes.Prise en main_ 26
2.Prise en main
Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de l’appareil connecté à un réseau et du logiciel.
Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes :
• Configuration du matériel
• Impression d’une page de configuration
• Logiciel fourni
• Configuration requise
• Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB
• Partage local de l’appareil
Configuration du matériel
Ce chapitre décrit les étapes de configuration du matériel, comme elles sont
présentées dans le Guide d’installation rapide. En premier lieu, veillez à lire
le Guide d’installation rapide et effectuez les étapes suivantes :
Emplacement
1. Choisissez un emplacement approprié.
Installez votre copieur sur un support horizontal et stable en laissant
suffisamment d’espace pour la circulation de l’air. Prévoyez de l’espace
supplémentaire pour ouvrir le(s) capot(s) et le(s) bac(s).
Cet emplacement doit être bien aéré et à l’abri de toute exposition
directe à la lumière du soleil, ou de toute source de chaleur, de froid et
d’humidité. Évitez d’installer votre appareil près du bord de votre plan de
travail.
L’impression est adaptée pour des zones avec une altitude inférieure à
1 000 m.
Installez votre copieur sur un support horizontal et stable et ne le laissez
pas s’incliner à plus de 2 mm. Sinon, la qualité d’impression peut être
affectée.
2. Déballez l’appareil, puis contrôlez les éléments inclus.
3. Retirez la bande adhésive permettant de maintenir l’appareil en place.
4. Installez la cartouche de toner.
5. Chargez du papier. (Voir « Chargement de papier dans le bac » à la
page 34.)
6. Vérifiez que les câbles sont correctement connectés à l’appareil.
7. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. (Voir « Mise en marche de l’appareil » à
la page 25.)
Cet appareil ne fonctionnera pas en cas de coupure de courant.
Impression d’une page de configuration
Imprimez une page de configuration afin de vous assurer que l’appareil
fonctionne correctement.
Pour imprimer une page de configuration :
En mode prêt, appuyez sur la touche pendant environ 10 secondes
jusqu’à ce que le voyant vert clignote de façon lente, puis relâchez-la.
Logiciel fourni
Une fois votre appareil paramétré puis connecté à votre ordinateur, vous
devez installer le logiciel de l’imprimante. Si vous utilisez un système
d’exploitation Windows ou Macintosh, installez le logiciel depuis le CD
fourni. Si vous utilisez Linux, téléchargez le logiciel du site Web de
Samsung (www.samsung.com/printer) et installez-le.
Le logiciel de l’appareil est parfois mis à jour pour des raisons telles
que la sortie d’un nouveau système d’exploitation, etc. En cas de
besoin, téléchargez la dernière version sur le site Web Samsung
(www.samsung.com/printer).
Système
d’exploit
ation
Contenu
Windows • Pilote d’impression : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes
les fonctions de votre appareil.
• Easy Printer Manager : ce programme combine les
paramètres du périphérique ainsi que les
environnements d’impression, les paramètres/actions et
le lancement. Cela vous permet d’utiliser facilement votre
appareil Samsung.
• État de l’imprimante : ce programme contrôle l’état de
l’appareil et vous en informe.Prise en main_ 27
Configuration requise
Avant de commencer, assurez-vous que votre système répond aux
conditions ci-dessous :
Windows
Votre appareil prend en charge les systèmes d’exploitation Windows
suivants.
SYSTÈME
D’EXPLOITATI
ON
Configuration (recommandée)
Processeur RAM
Espace
disque
disponible
Windows®
2000 Intel®
Pentium®
II 400
MHz (Pentium III 933
MHz)
64 Mo
(128 Mo)
600 Mo
Windows®
XP Intel®
Pentium®
III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 Mo
(256 Mo)
1,5 Go
Windows
Server®
2003
Intel®
Pentium®
III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 Mo
(512 Mo)
1,25 Go à
2 Go
Windows
Server®
2008
Intel®
Pentium®
IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 Mo
(2 048 Mo)
10 Go
Windows
Vista®
Intel®
Pentium®
IV 3 GHz 512 Mo
(1 024 Mo)
15 Go
Windows®
7 Processeur Intel®
Pentium®
IV 1 GHz 32
bits ou 64 bits ou
supérieur
1 Go
(2 Go)
16 Go
• Prise en charge DirectX®
9 avec 128 Mo de mémoire
(pour activer le thème Aero).
• Lecteur de DVD-R/W
Windows
Server®
2008
R2
Processeurs Intel®
Pentium®
IV 1 GHz (x86)
ou 1,4 GHz (x64) (2 GHz
ou plus rapide)
512 Mo
(2 048 Mo)
10 Go
• Pour tous les systèmes d’exploitation Windows, Internet
Explorer 5.0 ou supérieur doit être installé sur l’ordinateur.
• Windows Terminal Services est compatible avec cet appareil.
Macintosh
SYSTÈME
D’EXPLOITA
TION
Configuration (recommandée)
Processeur RAM
Espace
disque
disponible
Mac OS X
10.3 à 10.4
• Processeurs
Intel®
• PowerPC G4/G5
• 128 Mo pour un
Mac équipé d’un
processeur
PowerPC
(512 Mo)
• 512 Mo pour un
Mac équipé d’un
processeur Intel
(1 Go)
1 Go
Mac OS X
10.5
• Processeurs
Intel®
• Processeur
PowerPC G4/G5
à 867 MHz ou
plus rapide
512 Mo (1 Go) 1 Go
Mac OS X
10.6
• Processeurs
Intel®
1 Go (2 Go) 1 Go
Linux
Élément Configuration requise
Système
d’exploitation
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5
Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
SuSE Linux 10.0, 10.1
OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1
Ubuntu 5.04, 5.10, 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10,
9.04, 9.10, 10.04
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11
Debian 4.0, 5.0
Processeur Pentium IV 2,4 GHz (Intel Core™2)
RAM 512 Mo (1 024 Mo)
Espace disque
disponible
1 Go (2 Go)
Macintosh • Pilote d’impression : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes
les fonctions de votre appareil.
• Smart Panel : ce programme vous permet de surveiller
l’état de l’appareil.
Linux • Unified Linux Driver : ce pilote permet d’exploiter
toutes les fonctions de votre appareil.
• Smart Panel : ce programme vous permet de surveiller
l’état de l’appareil et vous avertit lorsqu’un
dysfonctionnement survient en cours d’impression.
Système
d’exploit
ation
ContenuPrise en main_ 28
Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via
USB
Un appareil local est un appareil directement connecté à votre ordinateur à
l’aide du câble USB.
Utilisez uniquement un câble USB ne dépassant pas 3 m.
Windows
Vous pouvez installer le logiciel d’impression à l’aide de la méthode
standard ou personnalisée.
Les étapes suivantes sont recommandées pour la plupart des utilisateurs
qui utilisent un appareil directement raccordé à l’ordinateur. Tous les
composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés.
1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à l’ordinateur et qu’il est sous
tension.
Si la fenêtre « Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel détecté »
s’affiche pendant la procédure d’installation, cliquez sur Annuler
pour fermer la fenêtre.
2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur.
• Le CD du logiciel s’exécute automatiquement et la fenêtre d’accueil
s’affiche à l’écran.
• Si la fenêtre d’installation ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur Démarrer puis
sur Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre
qui représente votre lecteur de CD. Cliquez sur OK.
• Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, Windows 7 ou Windows 2008
Server R2, cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les
programmes > Accessoires > Exécuter.
Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre représentant
votre lecteur CD-ROM, puis cliquez sur OK.
• Si la fenêtre Exécution automatique s’affiche sous Windows Vista,
Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2, cliquez sur Exécuter
Setup.exe dans le champ Installer or exécuter un programme et
cliquez sur Continuer ou Oui dans les fenêtres Contrôle de
compte d’utilisateur.
3. Sélectionnez Installer maintenant.
Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante.
L’Installation avancée possède l’option Installation
personnalisée. L’Installation personnalisée vous permet de
sélectionner la connexion de l’appareil et de choisir les
composants individuels à installer. Suivez les instructions qui
s’affichent.
4. Lisez le Contrat de licence et sélectionnez J’accepte les dispositions
du contrat de licence. Ensuite, cliquez sur Suivant.
Le logiciel recherche l’appareil.
Si l’appareil n’est pas connecté à l’ordinateur, la fenêtre suivante
s’affiche à l’écran.
• Une fois l’appareil connecté, cliquez sur Suivant.
• Vérifiez si vous souhaitez installer les logiciels sans
connecter l’imprimante au réseau ou localement.
- Cochez cette option pour installer le logiciel sans qu’un
appareil soit connecté. Dans ce cas, la fenêtre d’impression
d’une page de test est omise.
• Chercher à nouveau
- Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher un appareil
connecté.
- Lorsque vous cliquez sur ce bouton, la fenêtre
d’avertissement concernant le pare-feu s’affiche :
Désactivez le pare-feu et cliquez sur Chercher à nouveau.
Pour le système d’exploitation Windows, cliquez sur
Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Pare-feu
Windows et désactivez cette option.
Cliquez ensuite sur Suivant dans la fenêtre
Avertissement concernant le pare-feu.
Désactivez tout pare-feu tiers. Reportez-vous au manuel
fourni avec le programme correspondant.Prise en main_ 29
• Aide
- Le bouton Aide donne des informations détaillées sur la
manière de raccorder l’appareil.
5. Les appareils détectés s’afficheront à l’écran. Sélectionnez celui que
vous souhaitez utiliser, puis cliquez sur Suivant.
Si le logiciel n’a trouvé qu’un seul appareil, la fenêtre de
confirmation s’affiche.
6. Une fois l’installation terminée, une fenêtre vous demandant d’imprimer
une page de test apparaît. Si vous souhaitez imprimer un page de test,
cliquez sur Imprimer une page de test.
Sinon, contentez-vous de cliquer sur Suivant et passez à l’étape 8.
7. Si la page s’imprime correctement, cliquez sur Oui.
Sinon, cliquez sur Non pour relancer l’impression.
8. Si vous désirez enregistrer votre appareil sur le site de Samsung,
cliquez sur Inscription en ligne.
9. Cliquez sur Terminer.
Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez
comme suit pour le désinstaller puis le réinstaller.
a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il
est sous tension.
b) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les
programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote
d’impression > Désinstaller.
c) Sélectionnez l’option nécessaire et suivez les instructions
affichées dans la fenêtre.
d) Après avoir désinstallé le pilote d’impression, réinstallez-le (voir
« Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page
23).
Macintosh
Le logiciel livré avec votre appareil contient le fichier PPD vous permettant
d’utiliser le pilote CUPS ou le pilote Apple LaserWriter (disponible
uniquement si vous utilisez un appareil prenant en charge les pilotes
PostScript) pour imprimer à partir d’un Macintosh.
1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est
sous tension.
2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur.
3. Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du
Macintosh.
4. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer.
5. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X.
6. Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK.
7. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur
Continuer.
8. Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer.
9. Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les termes du contrat de licence.
10.Sélectionnez Installation standard et cliquez sur Programme
d’installation => Installer (10.4). L’option Installation standard est
recommandée pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Tous les composants
nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés.
Lorsque vous choisissez Installation personnalisée, vous pouvez
installer les composants de votre choix.
11.Lorsqu’un message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les
applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît, cliquez
sur Continuer.
12.Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter.
13.Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Utilitaires > Configuration
d’imprimante.
• Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, ouvrez le dossier Applications >
Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax.
14.Cliquez sur Ajouter dans la Liste des imprimantes.
• Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur l’icône « + » ; une fenêtre
d’affichage apparaît.
15.Sous Mac OS X 10.3, sélectionnez l’onglet USB.
• Sous Mac OS X 10.4, cliquez sur Navigateur par défaut et
recherchez la connexion USB.
• Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur Par défaut et recherchez la
connexion USB.
16.Sous Mac OS X 10.3, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas
correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Modèle de l’imprimante et
votre nom d’appareil dans Nom de modèle.
• Sous Mac OS X 10.4, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas
correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Imprimer via et votre
nom d’appareil dans Modèle.
• Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, si la sélection automatique ne
fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Sélectionner un
gestionnaire à utiliser..., puis le nom de votre imprimante dans
Imprimer via.
Votre appareil apparaît dans la Liste des imprimantes et est défini
comme imprimante par défaut.
17.Cliquez sur Ajouter.
Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement,
désinstallez-le et réinstallez-le.
Pour Mac OS, procédez comme suit pour désinstaller le pilote.
a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il
est sous tension.
b) Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur.
c) Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du
Macintosh.
d) Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer.
e) Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X.
f) Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK.
g) La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez
sur Continuer.
h) Sélectionnez Désinstaller et cliquez sur Désinstaller.
i) Lorsqu’un message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les
applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît,
cliquez sur Continuer.
j) Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter.
Linux
Vous devez télécharger les packages de logiciels Linux du site Web de
Samsung pour installer le logiciel de l’imprimante.
Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour installer le logiciel.
Installation du Unified Linux Driver
1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il
est sous tension.
2. Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, entrez root dans
le champ Login et entrez le mot de passe du système.
Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root)
pour installer le pilote de l’appareil. Si vous ne disposez pas du
statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur
système.Prise en main_ 30
3. Sur le site de Samsung, téléchargez le package Unified Linux Driver
et sauvegardez-le sur votre ordinateur.
4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Unified
Linux Driver et extrayez-le.
5. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > autorun.
6. Lorsque l’écran de bienvenue s’affiche, cliquez sur Next.
7. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Finish.
Pour des raisons pratiques, le programme d’installation a ajouté l’icône
de bureau du configurateur de pilote unifié et le groupe de pilotes unifiés
au menu système. Si vous rencontrez la moindre difficulté, consultez
l’aide à l’écran, accessible via le menu système ou via les applications
Windows du package du pilote, telles que Unified Driver Configurator.
Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement,
désinstallez-le et réinstallez-le.
Pour Linux, procédez comme suit pour désinstaller le pilote.
a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et
qu’il est sous tension.
b) Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, tapez
« root » dans le champ Login et saisissez le mot de passe
système.
Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root)
pour désinstaller le pilote d’impression. Si vous ne disposez
pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre
administrateur système.
c) Cliquez sur l’icône située en bas du bureau. Lorsque l’écran
Terminal apparaît, tapez :
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
d) Cliquez sur Uninstall.
e) Cliquez sur Next.
f) Cliquez sur Finish.
Installation de Smart Panel
1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il
est sous tension.
2. Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, entrez root dans
le champ Login et entrez le mot de passe du système.
Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root)
pour installer le pilote de l’appareil. Si vous ne disposez pas du
statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur
système.
3. Sur le site Web Samsung, téléchargez le package Smart Panel sur
votre ordinateur.
4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Smart Panel
et extrayez-le.
5. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.
Partage local de l’appareil
Procédez comme suit pour configurer les ordinateurs pour partager
l’appareil localement.
Si l’ordinateur hôte est directement connecté à l’appareil par un câble USB
et est également connecté à l’environnement du réseau local, l’ordinateur
client connecté au réseau local peut utiliser l’appareil partagé pour imprimer
via l’ordinateur hôte.
1
Ordinateur hôte Ordinateur qui est directement connecté à
l’appareil par un câble USB.
2
Ordinateurs
clients
Ordinateurs qui utilisent l’appareil partagé
via l’ordinateur hôte.
Windows
Configuration d’un ordinateur hôte
1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Installation du pilote d’un
appareil connecté via USB » à la page 28).
2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows.
3. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes.
• Sous Windows XP/2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et
télécopieurs.
• Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de
configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes.
• Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de
configuration > Matériel et audio > Périphériques et
imprimantes.
• Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de
configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes.
4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’icône de l’imprimante.
5. Sous Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, sélectionnez Propriétés.
Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez, dans
les menus contextuels, les Propriétés de l’imprimante.
Si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Propriétés de
l’imprimante, vous pouvez sélectionner les autres pilotes
d’impression reliés à l’imprimante sélectionnée.
6. Sélectionnez l’onglet Partage.
7. Cochez Modifier les options de partage.
8. Cochez la casePartager cette imprimante.
9. Renseignez le champ Nom de partage. Cliquez sur OK.
Configuration d’un ordinateur client
1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Installation du pilote d’un
appareil connecté via USB » à la page 28).
2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows.
3. Sélectionnez Tous les programmes > Accessoires > Explorateur
Windows.Prise en main_ 31
4. Saisissez l’adresse IP de l’ordinateur hôte et appuyez sur Entrée sur
votre clavier.
Si l’ordinateur hôte exige un Nom d’utilisateur et un Mot de
passe, indiquez l’ID d’utilisateur et le mot de passe du compte
de l’ordinateur hôte.
5. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’icône de l’imprimante que vous
souhaitez partager et sélectionnez Se connecter.
6. Si un message de configuration terminée apparaît, cliquez sur OK.
7. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer et démarrez
l’impression.
Macintosh
Les étapes suivantes concernent Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6.
Reportez-vous à l’aide Mac pour les autres versions du système
d’exploitation.
Configuration d’un ordinateur hôte
1. Installation du pilote d’impression. (Voir « Macintosh » à la page 29.)
2. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez
sur Imprimantes et fax.
3. Sélectionnez l’imprimante à partager dans la Liste des
imprimantes.
4. Sélectionnez Partager cette imprimante.
Configuration d’un ordinateur client
1. Installation du pilote d’impression. (Voir « Macintosh » à la page 29.)
2. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez
sur Imprimantes et fax.
3. Cliquez sur l’icône « + ».
Une fenêtre indiquant le nom de votre imprimante partagée apparaît.
4. Sélectionnez votre appareil et cliquez sur Ajouter. Configuration de base_ 32
3.Configuration de base
Une fois l’installation terminée, vous devez définir les paramètres par défaut de l’appareil. Consultez la section suivante si
vous souhaitez définir ou modifier des valeurs. Ce chapitre vous guide pas-à-pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de
l’appareil.
Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes :
• Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut • Utiliser la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie
Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut
Vous pouvez sélectionner le bac et le papier à utiliser par défaut pour les
tâches d’impression.
A partir de votre ordinateur
Windows
1. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows.
2. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes.
• Sous Windows XP/2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et
télécopieurs.
• Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de
configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes.
• Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de
configuration > Matériel et audio > Périphériques et
imprimantes.
• Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de
configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes.
3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur votre appareil.
4. Sous Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista, cliquez sur Options
d’impression.
Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez, dans
les menus contextuels, les Options d’impression.
Si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Options
d’impression, vous pouvez sélectionner les autres pilotes
d’impression reliés à l’imprimante sélectionnée.
5. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier.
6. Sélectionnez le bac souhaité et les options correspondantes,
notamment le format et le type de papier.
7. Appuyez sur OK.
Si vous souhaitez utiliser du papier de format spécial comme du
papier à facture, sélectionnez Modifier... dans l’onglet Papier de
Options d’impression. (Voir « Ouverture des préférences
d’impression » à la page 39.)
Macintosh
Macintosh ne prend pas en charge cette fonction. Les utilisateurs de
Macintosh doivent changer manuellement le réglage par défaut chaque
fois qu’ils veulent utiliser d’autres réglages.
1. Ouvrez une application Macintosh, puis sélectionnez le fichier à
imprimer.
2. Ouvrez le menu Fichier et cliquez sur Imprimer.
3. Sélectionnez le volet Alimentation.
4. Définissez le bac approprié duquel vous souhaitez imprimer.
5. Sélectionnez le volet Papier.
6. Réglez le type de papier pour faire correspondre le papier inséré
dans le bac avec celui voulu pour l’impression.
7. Cliquez sur Imprimer pour imprimer.
Linux
1. Ouvrez Terminal Program.
2. Lorsque l’écran Terminal apparaît, tapez : [root@localhost root]#
lpr
3. Sélectionnez Printer et cliquez sur Properties…
4. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancés.
5. Sélectionnez le bac (source) et les options correspondantes,
notamment le format et le type de papier.
6. Appuyez sur OK.
Utiliser la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie
Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil pendant un moment, vous pouvez
utiliser cette fonctionnalité pour économiser de l’énergie.
1. Installez le pilote (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via
USB » à la page 28).
2. Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes ou Tous les programmes >
Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Printer Manager > Samsung
Easy Printer Manager.
3. Sélectionnez Paramètres du périphérique > Appareil > Economie
d’énergie.
4. Sélectionnez l’heure de votre choix dans la liste déroulante.
5. Cliquez sur Enreg.Supports et bacs_ 33
4.Supports et bacs
Ce chapitre vous explique comment charger les supports d’impression dans votre appareil.
Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes :
• Sélection du support d’impression
• Modification du format du bac
• Chargement de papier dans le bac
• Impression sur supports spéciaux
• Utilisation du support de sortie papier
Sélection du support d’impression
Vous pouvez imprimer sur différents supports, par exemple du papier
ordinaire, des enveloppes, des étiquettes ou encore des transparents.
N’utilisez que des supports d’impression compatibles avec l’appareil et dans
le bac approprié.
Recommandations pour sélectionner le support
d’impression
L’utilisation d’un support d’impression non conforme aux spécifications
décrites dans le présent mode d’emploi peut provoquer des problèmes,
notamment :
• Qualité d’impression médiocre.
• Des bourrages papier répétés.
• Une usure prématurée de l’appareil.
• Détérioration permanente de l’unité de chauffe, non couverte par la
garantie.
Certaines caractéristiques, comme le grammage, la composition, le grain et
la teneur en humidité, constituent des facteurs importants qui ont une
incidence sur les performances de l’imprimante et sur la qualité
d’impression. Lorsque vous choisissez un support d’impression, tenez
compte des points suivants :
• Le type, le format et le grammage des supports d’impression pour votre
appareil sont dans les spécifications sur les supports d’impression. (Voir
« Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 68.)
• Résultat recherché : choisissez un support d’impression adapté à votre
travail.
• Luminosité : plus le support d’impression est blanc, plus les couleurs
paraissent éclatantes.
• Satinage : le satinage du papier améliore la netteté de l’impression.
• Il arrive que certains supports d’impression répondant aux critères
décrits dans cette section ne fournissent cependant pas des
résultats satisfaisants. Cela peut être dû aux caractéristiques du
papier, à une manipulation inadéquate, à des niveaux de
température et d’hygrométrie excessifs ou à d’autres facteurs sur
lesquels aucun contrôle ne peut être exercé.
• Avant de faire l’acquisition de supports d’impression en grande
quantité, vérifiez qu’ils répondent aux spécifications indiquées
dans le présent document ainsi qu’à ce que vous souhaitez obtenir
en sortie.
• L’utilisation d’un support d’impression non conforme aux
spécifications peut provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement
de l’imprimante, allant jusqu’à nécessiter l’intervention d’un
technicien. Ce type d’intervention n’est pas couvert par la garantie
ni par les contrats de maintenance.
La quantité de papier placée dans le bac peut varier selon le type
de support utilisé. (Voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression
» à la page 68.)
• L’utilisation d’un support d’impression inflammable peut provoquer
un incendie.
• Utilisez le support d’impression prévu. (Voir « Spécifications des
supports d’impression » à la page 68.)
L’utilisation d’un support inflammable ou la présence de corps
étrangers laissés dans l'imprimante peut entraîner une surchauffe de
l'unité et, dans de rares cas, provoquer un incendie.
Formats de support pris en charge dans chaque
mode
Mode Format Type Alimentation
Impression
recto
Pour plus
d’informations
sur le format de
papier,
reportez-vous à
la section «
Spécifications
des supports
d’impression » à
la page 68.
Pour plus
d’informations
sur le type de
papier,
reportez-vous à
la section «
Spécifications
des supports
d’impression » à
la page 68.
Bac
Impression
recto verso
(manuelle)a
a.75 à 90 g/m2
